The American Naturalist
MSS intended for p publication and books, ete., intended for review should be
sent to the Editor of THE AMERICAN NATURALIST, Garrison-on-Huds on, New York.
Articles containing research work bearing on the problems of organic evolu-
tion are especially welcome, and will be given ee nd pu tion
f authors free of charge.
T ee
One hund
Further w hy a supplied at cost.
Subscriptions and advertisements should be sent to the Fag ager! he
; Subscription aipa is four dollars a year. Foreign is
Can twenty-five cents additional. The charge for single poii =
thirty-five cents. The savertiiine rates are Four Dollars for a page.
sce ees THE SCIENCE PRESS
Lancaster, Pa. Garrison, N. Y.
rete _ NEW YORK: Sub-Station 84
, Pa., under the Act of
: PT Congress of Maron 3, 1879.
; m BULLETIN—For bargains i in Piinoak ii
ical and Pre-historic Specimens. Books on Natural
shee Comme || Fifty Years of Darwinism
pate ; Comprising the eleven addresses in honor
: — < ed - ? =a =|} of Charles Darwin delivered before the
ee ong a American Association for the Advance-
: “ment of Science.
= > pp- $2.00, et
“Henry | Holt & eee pany
34 West 33d St., New York
378 Safco: sehen veneer
THE AMERICAN NATURALIST
THE We
AMERICAN NATURALIST
A MONTHLY JOURNAL
DEVOTED TO THE ADVANCEMENT OF THE BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES
WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO THE FACTORS OF EVOLUTION
VOLUME XLV
Mo. Bot, Garden
1912
NEW YORK
THE SCIENCE PRESS
IQII
THE
AMERICAN NATURALIST
VoL. XLV : January, 1911 No. 529
ORGANIC RESPONSE!
D. T. MACDOUGAL, Px.D., LL.D.
Desert LABORATORY, Tucson, ARIZ.
Ar no time in the history of natural science has such
a large share of thought and research energy been di-
rected to the solution of evolutionary problemsas at pres-
ent. Methods of work, plans for experimentation and
modes of interpretation have recently undergone such
rapid development and improvement that our potenti-
ality for solving questions in heredity and origination is
vastly greater than even at such recent date as the be-
ginning of this new century. With increased facility
in attack has also come wider vision and altered view-
points with regard to almost all phases of biology.
Biological thought once quickened and broadened by
evolutionary ideas was by this same means led to be-
come entangled in a maze of illusive assumptions as to
purpose and plan in organisms from which it is being but
slowly freed, to view functions as inevitable reactions,
however complex they may be. The variables included
in the equations of protoplasmic action are numerous
and large, but they do not exceed the undefined prin-
ciples of osmotic action, surface tension and unknown
phases of association and dissociation that are concerned
in the interplay of substances in the cell, and upon which
1 Presidential sigan Society of American Naturalists, Ithaca, New
York, December 29,
5
6 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vot. XLV
depend the chemico-physical relations of tissue compo-
nents and structures of all kinds. If physiology escapes
the soporific and deadening influence of the vitalistic con-
ceptions, now appearing in some profusion, it may in turn
furnish the secure means for a long and rapid advance
in genetics, and it may be assumed with some certainty
that the chief superstructures of evolutionary science will
be those securely raised upon a foundation of physiolog-
ically tested facts.
In taking this direction, natural history is not alone;
the briefest comprehensive view of the physical sciences
will show that here also the chief advance lies along the
way of the study of energetics, and that the fundamental
problems are those lying about the mode and means of
transformations of energy.
Recent events in the field of evolution comprehend a
number of movements and accomplishments of extraor-
dinary interest. The rediscovery of the facts of alter-
native inheritance, the formulation of the concepts of
equivalent, balanced, paired or differential characters, the
results of statistical studies of variability, the analyses
of species of various constitution by pedigree cultures, in
which the value of fertilization from various sources is
carefully measured, the distinction of the biotype or geno-
type as a hereditary entity, the possibilities in the ac-
tion of pure lines within a specific group, the cytological
contributions of fact and forecast upon the physical as-
pects of heredity, and lastly the presentation of the facts
and allowable generalizations identified with the muta-
tion theory, comprise a series of advances, of accretions
to knowledge, furnish a broadened foundation for biolog-
ical science, and disclose additional possibilities in all lines
of experimental research with living things, besides open-
ing up new realms for speculative thought, and stimulat-
ing the scientific imagination to renewed fruitfulness.
Biological literature has also been recently enriched by
a series of formal papers commemorative of the life and
work of Charles Darwin, by more than fourseore workers
No. 529] ORGANIC RESPONSE A
representing the laboratories and national cultures of
the world. This group of addresses and essays, fortu-
nately written chiefly within four languages, taken col-
lectively, constitutes a critical and evaluatory discussion
of the mass of fact and galaxy of theory concerning or-
ganic evolution, and furnishes the most complete and
thorough appraisal ever made of any subject in modern
biology.
The moment, therefore, is one of consciousness of
achievement, of realization of increased powers of pene-
tration, and charged with desire for the exploitation of
the unknown, and is vibrant with the inspiration coming
from such a rapid march of events. With this quick-
ening in activity, the outeries of acrid controversies no
longer monopolize our attention, but it must not be sup-
posed that differences of opinion have vanished from
among us. The agreement as to the value of methods
of experimentation and calibration is a most gratifying
fact, but the harmonies of opinion as to interpretation of
results have not yet come to a monotone.
On the contrary, the pressure of new and undisciplined
evidence has awakened a freshened chorus of voices cry-
ing the virtues of special interests and extolling the suff-
ciency of theories dignified by age and more or less
weighty with authority. Those busy with vitalism of
various patterns have spun a moiety of their favorite
fabric to mend the breaks in the fragile web made by the
impact of new facts. Isolation and the mechanism of
geographical distribution have again been elaborated to
account for all differentiation and what their exponents
are pleased to term speciation. The anticipatory forma-
tion of structures in a rudimentary condition with a long
prefunctional progress, guided by the morphological pos-
sibilities and actuated by internal impulses, has again
been offered to us, fortified by paleontological fact and
clever logic, in such manner as to avoid most of the serious
objections to orthogenesis except those of physiological
morphology.
8 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
Natural selection with diverse meanings and manifold
implications has been made to explain development, dif-
ferentiation and general evolutionary progress. The tu-
mult'is greatest at the present time, however, about the
idea of mutation. Standing to one side, the biologist
hears a medley of assertions ‘‘that mutations have long
been known,” ‘‘do not exist,’’ ‘‘were discovered by Dar-
win,’’ ‘‘are always an evidence of hybridization,’’ ‘‘re-
sult in the formation of nothing but elementary species,”’
‘sive only weakened derivatives that are quickly
swamped by parental forms,’’ ‘‘are encountered only
among cultivated plants,’’ ‘‘the mutation theory is based
upon the conception of unit characters,’’ ‘‘constitutes the
only adequate means of accounting for the enormous
number of living forms and myriad characters of living
things,’’ ‘‘unit characters are unreal, have never been
seen, do not exist and are incapable of demonstration.’’
‘‘The difference between mutation and variation is one of
amplitude only,’’ and lastly mutation signally ‘‘refutes
Darwinism,’’ and ‘‘swings us back in harmony with the
theologian’s arguments for special creation.’’
The absurdity of the many injudicial assertions by the
partisans concerned need not blind us to the stubborn
fact that saltatory changes do occur in hereditary pure
lines in a large number of forms in both plants and
animals. Observations and experiments have estab-
lished beyond doubt that mutation is one way by which
organisms bearing new combinations of qualities may
arise, although it is probable that its importance as a
general procedure varies in different groups of organisms
and certain that many shades of opinion as to its exact
part in the evolution of living things will always be held.
Our appraisement of the value of all the protheses
cited may also be amended from time to time with view-
points altered by the advance of knowledge. The situa-
tion with regard to one hypothesis is far more serious,
however. This is the theory which predicates direct
adaptational adjustment of the organism, quickly or
No. 529] ORGANIC RESPONSE 9
slowly as the case may be, to environie factors, and
the inheritance of the somatic alterations constituting
such variations. The various corollaries of this theory
have the force of a certain obviousness, its assumptions
have been of ready service to the systematist and bio-
geographer, and its conclusions have long been tolerated
in the absence of decisive tests which are not to be easily
made or readily carried out. The time has now arrived,
however, when the claimants for Neo-Lamarckianism and
all of its conclusions must show cause for its further con-
sideration, or else allow it to drop from the position of
being seriously taken as a method of evolutionary advance.
It is unanimously agreed that organisms, plants as well
as animals, change individually in aspect, in form and
structure of organs, in functionation and habit as they
encounter swamps, saline areas, gravelly uplands or
slopes, climatic differences identifiable with latitude or
elevation, and other physical and biological factors. It is
assumed that these somatic alterations are accommodative
and adaptive, making the organism more suitable for the
conditions which produce the changes. Such an assump-
tion is an over-reaching one. Any analysis of the changes
which an organism undergoes after transportation to a
new habitat will disclose one or a few alterations which
might be of advantage in dealing with the newly encoun-
tered conditions, but with these are many others, direct,
necessitous, atrophic, or hypertrophic as to organs which
have no relation whatever to usefulness or fitness. Fur-
ther, a critical examination fails to disclose any theoret-
ical considerations or any actual facts which would con-
nect inevitably the somatic response with the nature of
the excitation, outside of the specialized tropisms in
which specific reactions are displayed. Even in these
the adjustment is of such nature that a mechanism spe-
cially perceptive to contact, for example, may react to
changes in temperature, as illustrated by the action of
tendrils, and many similar cases might be cited. It is
evident that the soma of a plant or animal is not to be
10 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
considered as capable of adaptive alterations to every new
agency which may cause changes in its form, structure
or functionation.
Next we come to the very crux of the whole matter: do
the unusual forms or activities of organs resulting from
environic causes act in any manner upon the germ-plasm
connected with such altered bodies? If we are to con-
sider the activities of the organism or of the cell to de-
pend mainly upon its chemical structure and constituency
and such a generalization seems unavoidable, then we
have means by which the soma might cause its proper-
ties to be reflected from the germ-plasm in a succeeding
generation, since the chemical mechanism of the soma
and germ-plasm must be of the most intimate nature.
That some such connection does actually exist is strongly
suggested by the behavior of a great number of organ-
isms which have been seen to carry marked environic
effects to the second or even third generations; if the
interrogation be made as to why the induced qualities are
earried no further it may be said that the reply may be
suggested by the results of long-continued action of the
exciting agency, such as has been used by Woltereck with.
Daphnia.
If a general view be taken of the available information
of interest in this connection, three classes of facts will
be discerned. One group is comprised in the mass of in-
formation obtained by the operations of the horticul-
turist, the agriculturist and the breeder as to the behav-
ior of crops, plants and domestic animals, when trans-
ferred from one habitat to another. The greater part of
such data is the result of observations which do not com-
ply with the ordinary requirements in the avoidance of
error so that strict comparisons as to the behavior of
organisms under conditions of various habitats are im-
possible. A consideration of the literature yields many
suggestions for experimental research and the simple
generalization that the direct effects of climatic com-
plexes on the seasonal cycle, and upon color, or struc-
No. 529] ORGANIC RESPONSE 11
tural features of the individual, may be repeated or car-
ried over two or three generations, in a habitat where
the specific causal combinations are lacking. This is the
available total of knowledge furnished us by economic
operations, and by the introduction operations of botan-
ical gardens and plantations.
In contrast with these the fortunate experience of Zed-
erbauer with Capsella has yielded some conclusions of
exceptional importance. A genotype of Capsella Bursa-
pastoris resembling taraxicafolium was found on the |
lower plains of Asia Minor, and displayed the well-
known characters of this form, including broad leaves,
whitish flowers, and stems 30-40 em. high. A highway
leads from these regions to a plateau at an elevation of
2,000 to 2,400 meters. The conditions of distribution are
such as to indicate that the plant has been carried up
this thoroughfare by man, and in this elevated habitat
it has taken on certain alpine characters, including elon-
gated roots, xerophytic leaves, stems 2-5 em. high, red-
dish flowers, with a noticeable increase of the hairiness
of the entire plant. That the distributional history has
been correctly apprehended seems entirely confirmed by
the fact that when seeds are taken from the lowlands the
alpine characters enumerated are displayed at once as a
direct somatic response. When seeds are taken from
plants on the elevated plateau where their ancestors may
have been for many years or many centuries (perhaps as ,
long as 2,000 years) and sowed at Vienna and in other cul-
tures carried through four generations the leaves lose
their xerophytie form and structure, but the other charac-
ters are retained within the limits of variability. The
stems show an increase in average length of 1 or 2 em.,
the roots change as much, but the reproductive branches
and floral organs retain their alpine characters. The
slight modifications undergone by these features were
seen to reach a maximum and to decrease in the latest
generations cultivated. The structural changes and im-
plied functional accommodations are indubitably direct
12 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
somatic responses, there is no escape from the conclu-
sion that the impress of the alpine climate on the soma
has been communicated to the germ-plasm directly or
indirectly in such manner as to be transmissible, and the
suggestion lies near that repeated and continued excitation
by climatic factors may have been the essential factor in
such fixation.”
Among the most noteworthy investigations of the fea-
tures of interest in connection with habitat changes are
those being made by the anthropologist in which somatic
calibrations of immigrating races and linguistic studies _
of peoples of known origin, geographical movement, and
established relationship are being used to great advan-
tage. No more fascinating chapters of scientific litera-
ture are to be found than those which delineate the migra-
tory movements, segregation and habital reactions of
Polynesian islanders, of North American Indians, or of
Asiatie peoples, yet their value as actual contributions to
the phase of biology of interest to this society is hardly
recognized. The investigator of problems in anthropol-
ogy has the advantage of dealing with an animal whose
psychology, history, traditions and records are readily
intelligible to him, so that a much wider range of facts
may be brought within the zone of reliability than when
we deal with an organism whose actions, at best, are but
imperfectly understood by us.?
A second series of results of great interest and suggest-
iveness are those which have been obtained in various
laboratories as to the individual modifications in cyclical
activity, functionation and structure of plants and ani-
mals in response to unusual stimuli, or under the influ-
ence of unusual intensities of the common environic com-
ponents. The behavior of organisms in constant illumi-
nation, equable and variable temperatures, salinity, alka-
linity or acidity of the medium, unusual pressures of at-
***Versuche ueber Vererbung erworbener Eigenschaften bei Capsella
— pastoris,’’ ait r. Bot. Zeitschr., Vol. 58: pp. 231-236, 285-288, 1908.
e Boas, F., ‘‘Changes in Bodily Form of Descendants of Immi-
ar The Tmimnigration Committee, Document No. 208, presented to the
61st Congress, 2d Session, Washington, D. C., U. B. A., 1910.
No. 529] ORGANIC RESPONSE 13
mospheric constituents, to unusual compounds and unac-
customed food-material, make up an important propor-
tion of the sum total of information ordinarily classified
as physiology. The morphogenic and accommodative
adjustments presented afford by analysis the best con-
ceptions available as to the nature of the physiologic
activity of organisms.
The experimental results of Stockard with fish eggs
subjected to the action of various chemical substances
are of unusual interest in the present connection. The
eyclopean embryos of Fundulus formed in sea-water con-
taining magnesium salts offer the first known example
of the induction of an abnormality in the vertebrates
occurring in nature, by specific reagents. Suggestion of
a common cause is obvious as it is in the instances in
which similar divergences have been secured in the labo-
ratory with plants. As will be pointed out later, such
analytical tests constitute a very important part of the
procedure in the study of acclimatization results.‘
In very few cases, however, has the permanency or
heritability of the deviations induced been tested, and in
most of such tests the agencies employed might ha
acted upon both soma and germ-plasm, as will be ap-
parent upon an examination of the work of Standfuss,
Fischer, Pictet and Houssey. The work of these older
experimenters has been reviewed so many times that it
will be unnecessary to discuss their results further in the ©
present paper. This was done at the Darwin memorial
meeting in 1908, and quite recently by Bourne in his ad-
dress before Section of Zoology of the British Associa-
tion for the Advancement of Science, at the Sheffield
meeting.”
The present opportunity may well be used to make a
presentation of the results of the last few years obtained
“Stockard, ©. R., ‘‘The Development of Artificially Produced Fish.—
The Cyclopean Embryo,’’ Jour. Exper. Morphology, Vol. 7, No. 2, p. 285,
1909
* Nature, Vol. 84, p. 378, 1910, September 22, 1910.
14 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
by investigations, using a more perfected technique, and
having the advantage of a keener insight into the real
nature of the problems to be solved.
That the general hypothesis with its corollaries is
being subjected to the most critical examination and that
the assumptions implied in the conception of inheritance
of acquired characters are being put to exact and conclu-
sive tests, is readily apparent when a review is made of
recent and current researches in which living material
from widely separated groups of animals and plants is
being subjected to a variety of nutritive conditions and
climatic agencies. Klebs, who has long been concerned
with the morphogenic reactions of plants, has determined
a series of conditions under which the stages of mycelial
development, asexual zoospore and sexual or oospore
formations in filamentous fungi may be inhibited or var-
iously interchanged. Much more important reactions
were obtained from Sempervivum, the live-forever of tae
garden. In this plant, inflorescences were replaced by sin-
gle flowers by experimental excitation while it was found
the number and arrangement of the floral organs as well
as of the stamens and carpels could be altered. Further-
more, the deviations in question were found to be trans-
missible to the second or third generation in guarded seed-
reproductions.°®
Microorganisms with a short cycle offer peculiarly ad-
vantageous material by reason of their simple reproduc-
tive processes, and also by the fact that it is possible to
control environic factors with exactitude. The volu-
minous literature of bacteriology shows that much at-
tention has been devoted to the building up of characters
by selection, and to the study of the behavior of morpho-
logical divergences occurring in special cultures.
The experiments of Buchanan with Streptoccus lacti-
cus yields the conclusion that phases of fluctuating varia-
tions in the bacteria induced by cultures may not be fixed,
° Alterations in the development and forms of plants as a result of
environment, Proe. Roy. Soe. Lond., Vol. 82, No. B. 559, p. 547, 1910.
No. 529] ORGANIC RESPONSE 15
and are not transmissible, which is in accord with the
main body of evidence upon this point. There are, how-
ever, a number of records of the appearance of definite
qualities or morphological characters in the yeasts,
which were transmissible and permanent. These de-
partures were so striking as to be capable of being re-
garded as mutational, and their origin has been ascribed
to the influence of the environment by experimenters of
notable skill, such as Beijerinck, Winogradsky, Lepesch-
kin, Hansen and Barber. It may be recalled in this con-
nection, that environic responses are generally sudden,
and that the entire range of departure may be made in
a single generation, at most in two or three.’
Pringsheim after a comprehensive review of his own
work and of other available evidence obtained by a study
of accommodations or adaptations of yeasts and bacteria
to unusual temperatures, culture media, and poisons,
concludes that some of these variations are fixed
and transmissible both asexually and by spores, while
others are not. It is not easy to analyze contributions
upon this subject with reference to the differential action
of the exciting agencies upon soma or germ-plasm,
neither is it clear as to the action of the selection in the
experimentation. It is important, however, to note that
the alterations concerned are direct functional responses
to the exciting agencies.’
The researches of Jennings with paramecium deals
with conditions of morphology and physiology not widely
dissimilar from those offered by the bacteria with regard
to the present problems, and his work has been carried
out with an extensiveness and thoroughness impossible
to the worker with more massive and more slowly moving
organisms. Cultures were carried through hundreds of
generations with no progressive action in fluctuating
"For a brief review of this subject see Buchanan, ‘‘Non-inheritance of
impressed variations in Streptoccus lacticus,’’ Journal of Infectious Dis-
eases, Vol. 7, p. 680, 1910.
* Pringsheim, H., ‘‘Die Variablitit niederer Organismen,’’ Berlin, 1910.
16 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
variability; while the organism as a whole was strongly
resistant to all kinds of environic influences, and actual
alterations were extremely rare. Most of the supposedly
acquired characters disappeared in two or three gener-
ations by fission, although one was followed for twenty-
two generations. The new é¢haracter was borne by only
one of the pair produced by a division, except in rare
instances, and in only one case was there found such
modification as to produce a race bearing the odd char-
acter in which the feature in question was imperfectly
transmitted in series of asexual generations.’
The results of Woltereck with Daphnia offer some-
thing by way of contrast and also serve to illustrate the
necessity for continuation of parallel cultures for the
purpose of comparison of divergent forms and the nor-
mal. The particular group of this crustacean furnish-
ing the experimental material is taken to be very var-
liable, and it was subjected to over-feeding with the im-
mediate result that the variability of the form of the head
appeared to be widened, the size of this structure being
increased. This disappeared when lots from the culture
‘were restored to normal conditions in the earlier stage of
the work. After three or four months of over-feeding,
the form of the head came within narrower limits, and
fewer aberrants were seen, while lots returned to normal
conditions, showed a slower restoration of the original
form of the head. Two years after the cultures were
begun, it was found that the original head form was not
displayed by young restored to normal nutrition condi-
tions, the larger helmet being persistent. It seems
fairly certain that a new genotype resulted from the long-
continued action of the culture medium.
* Jennings, H. $S., ‘‘ Heredity and Variation in the Simplest Organisms,’’
AMER. Nart., Vol. 43, No. 510, June, 1909; and other papers by the same
author.
” <t Weitere experimentelle Untersuchungen ueber Artenveranderung spe-
ziell ueber das Wesen quantitativer Artenunterschiede bei Daphniden,’’
Sonderabdruck a. d. Verhandl. d. Deut. Zool. Gesell., 1909.
No. 529] ORGANIC RESPONSE 17
In the experiments of Sumner mice reared in a warm |
room were found to differ considerably from those reared
in a cold room in the mean length of the tail, foot, and
ear, and the differences were transmitted to the next
generation. The differences may be reasonably desig-
nated as being directly individual and somatic, and as
having been transmitted by the germ-plasm, which was
not subject to the action of various temperatures in the
first instance. The reaction forms have an additional
claim upon our attention, since they are the ones which
distinguish northern and southern races of many animals.
The crucial test of the value of the alterations induced in
the mice is the one applicable to all of the experimenta-
tion on this subject, a test in which two parallel series of
cultures, one under the altered environment and the
other under usual conditions, should be kept going con-
tinuously for a long number of years, lots being with-
drawn from both, from time to time, for long-continued
comparative culture in normal habitat and under other
conditions. Effects due solely to fluctuating variability
may be expected to reach a maximum and minimum
within two or three years, leaving the enduring effects
standing alone, or in such relief as to be capable of ready
calibration."
Kammerer carried out some tests with salamanders
three years ago which have the interest attached to any
attempt to interpret geographic or habitat relations. Sala-
mandra maculosa is viviparous when it lives high in the
mountains and ovo-viparous at lower levels. S. atra
is an alpine form and the larvae are large with very long
gills. When the latter form was kept at unusually high
temperatures the larve produced resembled those of S.
maculosa in its lower warmer habitats. S. maculosa
kept in low temperatures and without water showed a
cumulation of effects by which the characters of the
“ Sumner, F. B., ‘An Experimental Study of Somatie Modifications and
their Reappearance in the Offspring,’’ Archiv. f. Entwickelungsmechanik
d. Organismen, Vol. 30, pt. 2, p. 317, 1910.
<
18 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
young and the reproductive habits resembled those of
S. atra. The conditions of these experiments are not
such as to allow a definite separation of somatic and ger-
minal effects, neither was the permanency of the newly
acquired habits tested to such an extent as to determine
their hereditary value. That characters and habits may
be modified in such manner as to appear in the next gen-
eration or two in the absence of exciting conditions is il- -
lustrated by hundreds of authentic examples in plants
which have long been known.12
My own earlier work with relation to this subject con-
sisted chiefly of ovarial treatments in which the main
and accessory reproductive elements of seed-plants were
subjected to the direct action of solutions of various
kinds. New combinations of characters constituting a
distinct elementary species or genotype were obtained in
one plant, and the divergent type has been found to trans-
mit its qualities in the fullest degree as far as tested, to
the fifth generation. Still more marked forms were ob-
tained in a second genus, the divergent progeny being
lost in transference to the Desert Laboratory, while —
marked responses have been obtained in the extensions
of these experiments upon species representing widely
different morphological types in Arizona. The greater
majority of the tests have been made upon plants grow-
ing under natural conditions, so that environmental reac-
tion in addition to that of the specific reagents might be
excluded. Progenies representing many species, in-
cluding thousands of individuals, many of which are di-
vergent, are now under observation. Absolute finality
of decision with respect to the standing of the new types
may be reached but slowly.
Gager produced chromosomic aberrations in the reduc-
ing divisions of Enothera by irradiations and such excita-
tion was also followed by the appearance of aberrants in
the progeny, the hereditary qualities of which have not
* Arch. f. Entwickel., Vol. 30, pp. 7-51, 1907.
No. 529] ORGANIC RESPONSE 19
been tested. Using similar excitation Morgan induced
the appearance of white eyes and of short wings in a pedi-
gree culture of the fly, Drosophila ampelophila. Both
qualities were sex-limited and mendelized when paired
with the red eyes and long wings of the original type.
Both however seem to be fully transmissible.’
A related phase of the subject is that of the interposi-
tion of environic factors in mutations and hybridizations.
DeVries has repeatedly called attention to the fact that
the composition of hybrid progenies of mutants with
each other and with the parental form might be altered
by nutritive conditions, and the author has cited the fact
that mutations were made by (nothera Lamarckiana
in the climate of New York which had never been seen
in Amsterdam. Furthermore, in discussing the diver-
gent results of DeVries and myself, obtained by crossing
the same forms in Amsterdam and New York, the sug-
gestion was made that ‘‘the manner in which the var-
ious qualities in the two parents are grouped inthe prog-
eny might be capable of a wide range of variation.
Many indications lead to the suggestion that the domi-
nancy and prevalency, latency and recessivity of any
character may be more or less influenced by the condi-
tions attendant upon the hybridization; the operative
factors might include individual qualities as well as ex-
ternal conditions.’’!4
Using abnormal temperatures for excitation, Kammerer
induced color changes in Lacerta constituting female di-
morphism in one species, and male dimorphism in another,
and the newly induced characters, like the original ones,
behave in a mendelian manner in crosses, although the
heredity has not been carried through enough generations
to test their permanence.'®
“ Morgan, T. H., The method of inheritance of two sex- -limited charac-
ters in the same pilak. Proc. Soe. for Exper. Biol. and Med., Vol. 8, No.
1, p. 17, 1910.
yi MacDongal, Vail, Shull and Small, ‘‘ Mutants and Hybrids of the
(Enotheras,’’ Pub. No. 24, p. 57, Gatniele Inst. of Washington, 1905.
Vererbung erzwungener Farbenaenderungen. Arch. f. Entwickl., Vol.
39, Hefte 3 and 4, p. 456, 1910.
20 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Von. XLV
Much more striking evidence upon the matter has been
recently obtained by Tower in intercrossing Leptinotarsa
decemlineata, L. multitineata, L. oblongata and other
species in their habitats in southern Mexico, and at the
desert laboratory. Among other divergences one of the
three first generation intermediates characteristic of
these cultures was lacking from the Tucson cultures,
although two other such forms were included.1* In a
teh i | | | | eo
` lek A ; baa. T.
f,
Fie. 1. Acclimatization shelters and beetle cages, Desert Laboratory
(2,600 ft.).
comprehensive treatment of the entire subject with espe-
cial reference to modifications in dominance Tower says:
The experiments and observations herein given warrant the general
statement that conditions external to a cross are important factors in
determining the results thereof. This conclusion has been worked out
in both normal and hybrid erosses, in crosses between races which
have been created selectively, and between forms which arose as sports;
* See Report, Department of Botanical Research, Carnegie Institution of
Washington, for 1908 and 1909.
No. 529] ORGANIC RESPONSE 21
and the second series of experiments in synthesis is sufficient warrant
for attributing to this factor a considerable importance in evolution.”
Tennent arranged a series of hybridizations of Echino-
derms at Tortugas which yielded data of great interest in
connection with the earlier conclusions of Vernon, Don-
caster, and Herbst as to the influence of temperature and
season changes upon dominance. From the information
derived from crosses of Hipponoë and Toxopneustes it is
clear that the dominance of the parental characters is
dependent upon the alkalinity or the concentration of the
OH ions. The products of the trial cross fertilization,
however, were not reared to maturity.'§
No phase of the subject under discussion is more
readily amenable to experimental investigation, and no
results may be expected to bear more directly on the
mechanism of inheritance than those in which similar
unions give dissimilar progenies under the pressure of
unlike environments. It is to be noted that everything
of value with regard to the influence of environment
upon hybridizations has been secured by the introduc-
tion of the geographic or climatic element, that is, the
unions leading to divergent results have been made in
habitats in which the environic complexes differed not in
one, but in many features. Thus the climatic components.
in southern Mexico reach dissimilar maxima and minima.
and run unlike courses from those of Arizona.
This method of transplantation of organisms to dis-.
tant localities furnishing congeries of climatic factors
markedly different from those of the habitat in which
they were found is one which offers opportunities of the
broadest kind, and such exchanges have been made be-
tween fresh and salt water, cave and surface, alpine
" Tower, W. L., ‘‘The Determination of Dominance and the Modifiea--
tion of Behavior in Alternative (Mendelian) Inheritance, by Conditions:
Surrounding or Incident upon the Germ Cells at Fertilization. (Reprinted:
from Biological Bulletin, Vol. XVIII, No. 6, Ma
sS
eport, Director Dept. of Marine Biology, Carnegie Institution of
Rinshiapton for 1909 and 1910.
22 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
summits and lowland plains, high and low latitudes,
with results of somewhat limited value until recently.
The first of these in which plants were used was made by
Nägeli, who carried on observational work on a large
number of species in plantations of the botanical garden
at Munich, detecting certain obvious alterations which
did not appear to offer anything of hereditary value.
The more recent work of Bonnier was directed chiefly
toward comparison of the vegetative activity, anatomical
modification, and developmental habit of plants ex-
changed between the mountain and low-land. The care
used in attempting to transport soils with the plant was
almost wholly without direct application, since the char-
acter of the soil is so largely a function of climate that
the course of a single season would suffice to change or
materially modify any transported soil. Such a precau-
tion might have the sole merit of furnishing the trans-
planted species with a limited amount of some compound
necessary for its growth, but any small amount of soil
becomes quickly permeated by solutions from the forma-
tions below and contiguous to it. Bonnier’s results in-
clude much that is suggestive, although no effects were
secured which did not disappear within two or three sea-
sons after a plant had been removed from the influence
of the exciting agencies or returned to its original hab-
itat.
The first realization of results of importance from
cultures widely extended geographically has been ob-
tained in the experiments with Leptinotarse by Tower,
in which various species of these beetles were studied in
their habitats in southern Mexico, in open air and glass
houses as far north as Chicago, as far east as the Atlan-
tic and as far west as the Desert Laboratory. Facilities
for work upon special problems are now being organized
at several places and many contributions to the subject
may be expected within the next decade.
The plan for work upon the problems of special in-
terest in connection with the Department of Botanical
No. 529] ORGANIC RESPONSE 23
Research of the Carnegie Institution of Washington, im-
plies the establishment of experimental cultures in lo-
calities which furnish distinct types of climate, or which
have characteristic complexes of meteoric factors, as in-
dicated by the vegetation indigenous to them. Secondly,
these localities have been chosen with regard to their geo-
graphical relations so far as possible, in order that the
possible and probable fate of migrating species might
be studied. The behavior of plants in these localities is
Fic, 2. Santa Catalina mountains as seen from Des ert Laboratory. Experi-
mental plantations shown in figures 3 and 4 are located on this ra nge.
recorded as to anatomical alteration and physiological
departure. Having detected some such feature of ap-
parent importance, its reappearance in plants from seeds
carried to the original habitat and other locations is fol-
lowed as one line of evaluation. C Jontemporaneously,
the form is taken into the laboratory and here by analy-
tical experimental tests the effort is made to ascertain
to what special agencies the departures are due. Four
24 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
main locations furnish the chief facilities for these some-
what extensive experiments, which may be briefly charac-
terized as follows. The domain of the Desert Laboratory
has a subtropical arid climate, with one cool moist sea-
son, one warm wet season, two intervening dry seasons,
the vegetation being chiefly composed of spinose xero-
phytic shrubs and woody plants, with a large number of
the more advanced types of desert plants, which carry an
immense water balance, such as the cacti and other suc-
culents. The total rainfall is 12 inches, relative humid-
ity falls as low as 5 per cent. for extended periods and
the soil moisture remains below 10 per cent. for weeks,
and the altitude is 2,300 feet; maximum temperatures of
112°-114°, minima of about 16° F., with a total exposure
below the freezing point of from 12 to 80 hours per
annum are encountered.
The xero-montane plantation lies at 5,400 feet on the
near-by slopes of the Santa Catalina Mountains at the
extreme upper edge of the characteristic desert flora in
the oak belt of vegetation with a rainfall of 16 to 18
inches per year, minima a few degrees lower than those
of the Desert Laboratory, with such an extension of cold
nights as to make temperature a distinct limiting factor;
relative humidity is extremely low, soil moisture quite as
low as that of the base plantation, and the activity of
vegetation of the winter wet season which is such a.
marked feature of the lower plantation is entirely lack-
ing. The meteoric and other agencies carry a constant
stream of seeds from this locality into the region of the
laboratory.
The montane plantation lies at an elevation of 8,000
feet in a forest of pine, spruce and aspen, with a climate
equivalent to that of northern Michigan, the growing
season being about 110 days, the winter being character-
ized by a heavy snowfall and temperatures as much as
20°—25° below zero Fahrenheit. The spring and autumn
are dry, and midsummer has the usual manifestation of
heavy thunder-storms, in which the precipitation is
No. 529] ORGANIC RESPONSE 25
slightly less than the amount in the winter. The yearly
total is between 35 and 40 inches. The vegetation is
characterized by conifers, grasses and a wide variety of
herbaceous and shrubby perennials, very few annuals
being found here. The mountain streams carry the seeds
of the contiguous elevated slopes and valleys in great
profusion to the region of the xero-montane plantations
and to the lowlands of the character of those around the
Desert Laboratory. These three localities form a con-
nected series in which the behavior of the tested species
may be expected to offer phenomena of wide significance
and of direct bearing on many phases of geographical
distribution and evolutionary advance.
The fourth plantation is at Carmel, California, some
800 miles distant in a straight line from the first three,
within a thousand yards of the Pacific Ocean in a forest
of Monterey pine, the soil being granitic sand, with or-
ganic material or humus in some places, and a heavy
cement in others. The climate is characterized by a win-
ter wet season, in which the minima are scarcely below
the freezing point and the exposure to such low tempera-
tures is for not more than fifteen or twenty hours per
year. A period of heavy continued fogs during two
months of the midsummer results in minima of 41° F.
in July and August, there being almost no precipitation
between March and November. The total precipitation is
about 18 inches per annum. The place, therefore, has
one rainy season, a dry spring and fall, and a cool mid-
summer, conditions exceptionally favorable for the sur-
vival of species introduced from the localities of the
other three plantations of the series. It is obvious that
if the data concerning the climatic factors are integrated
or summarized and placed in parallel columns a ready
means is afforded for detecting the causes which prevent
survival or facilitate the development of any form in
any locality, and a proper analysis of the same facts
may also yield direct suggestions as to the nature of the
excitation responsible for any departure on the part of
a plant removed from one habitat to another.
26 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
The groups of species interchanged among the four
different localities include material upon which such
analysis may be most readily made. In addition, the
introductions are also arranged to simulate certain geo-
graphical movements and topographical effects. Spe-
cies from eastern America and from the lower plantations
are taken to the montane and xero-montane plantations
to meet conditions similar to those they might encounter
in a migration toward alpine or arctic regions. Species
from the montane locations and from the eastern states
are carried to the desert plantations to have the expe-
rience of a southward movement, or that of descending
mountain valleys, while all of these localities have fur-
nished forms for establishment in the maritime locality
characterized by equable conditions in which species may
range widely as to latitude and indefinitely as to longitude.
The preliminary exchanges included over a hundred spe-
cies, mostly biennials and perennials; the survivals amount
to less than 80, while perhaps not more than a score of
these may be expected to yield results of value or interest.
Our increased insight into the nature of natural groups
of organisms has shown the necessity and suggested the
means of observing certain distinctions and precautions
in this work. Thus it is of the greatest importance that
the living material shall be shown to be either simple
genotypes or that its phaenotypic nature be apprehended
in order that the integration and combination of these
forms shall not be mistaken for environic effects. When
a lot of plants is taken from one plantation to another,
data of the original locality are preserved as the stand of
the plant in that place serves as the control. If the plant
is multiplied vegetatively in the test, it might reveal a
possible complex character of the material in bud-sports,
but other divergences might be well ascribed to local
effects. On the other hand, if introduced in the form of
seeds, the possible complex character of the material
would soon become apparent, especially if the generations
were followed properly. In the actual.management of
No. 529] ORGANIC RESPONSE AT
the cultures, it is found profitable to re-introduce forms
from the original or control lot of various species in
order to follow the first stages of their adjustment re-
peatedly.
The earlier introductions were made in May, 1906, but
the establishment of the system was not completed until
early in 1909. Some of the species have therefore been
observed through the fourth growing season in newly
encountered habitats, and as the somatic responses are
Fig. 3. Xero-montane plantation (5,500 ft.), Santa Catalina Mts., Arizona.
immediate or nearly so it may be assumed with some con-
fidence that the alterations observed are those which are
to be tested as to their transmissibility. It may be of
interest to note briefly some of the more salient alterations
with some attention to their geographical significance,
reserving the discussion of structural details for a more
suitable occasion.
1. Many species of perennials native to regions in
eastern America with a temperate summer or growing
28 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [VoL. XLV
season 160-170 days in length, and a winter with ex-
tended exposures below the freezing point, endure the
climate of the montane plantation with lower minima,
shorter growing seasons and more arid dry seasons, all
seasonal changes being much more sudden and pro-
nounced than those encountered in their original habi-
tats. Trillium, Arisema, Roripa, Sanguisorba, Fragaria
and others offer examples of such survival.
2. Perennials as above survive and thrive in the
equable climate of the maritime plantation in which much
more equable conditions are found than in the original
habitats—Podophyllum, Sanguisorba, Arisema, C£no-
thera, Roripa and Fragaria.
It is to be noted that many species of annuals and per-
ennials are supposed to range from the temperate low-
lands of New York to similar montane climates farther
south in the Rocky Mountain region, and also to the Pa-
cific coastal belt. Critical examination of material rep-
resenting the supposed inclusion of the species generally
reveals differences denoting elementary species or geno-
types which might be grouped together in a Linnean
treatment. These relationships offer some most inter-
esting probabilities as to derivation and dissemination
which may not be touched upon here.
3. Species from the montane plantation survive and
show a luxuriant growth in the maritime plantation with
various vegetative modifications, of which Fragaria,
(Enothera, Juglans, Scrophularia, Senecio and Dugaldea
offer illustrations.
4. Species from the montane plantation survive and
show a development somewhat atypic when carried to the
foot of the mountain on which they are indigenous. Ex-
amples are Œnothera, Juglans, Scrophularia and Fra-
garia.
5. Species from the arid region about the Desert Labo-
ratory survive and show atypic activity in the equable
maritime climate. Illustrations are offered by the
Opuntias, Parkinsonia and Penstemon. Species from the
No. 529] ORGANIC RESPONSE 29
equable maritime location do not survive when taken to
any of the other plantations, with the single exception of
Fragaria Californica, the extremes of temperatures
being the evident limiting factor.'®
By the consideration of the responses of plants in the
various climates into which they may be introduced in
these experiments, it is possible to determine with some
accuracy the limiting factors acting for the exclusion of
the form in question. The analysis of the responses to
changed environment may be briefly given as follows:
Species from locations with well-marked seasons, in
which there is a definite contrast between the warm and
dry periods or between dry and rainy seasons, show a
lessened tendency to sexual reproduction, and a conse-
quent weakened capacity to form fruits and seeds when
taken to locations with equable or monotonous conditions.
This is a fact well known to the grower of economic
plants, the chief examples being offered by bush and tree
fruits disseminated to the southward. Fertilization and
the preliminary stages of seed formation may ensue as
usual, but the absence of the stimulating effect of chang-
ing temperatures usually characterizing the close of a
season appears to be followed by a lack of development
of the fruit. Examples of this are offered by Arisema,
Salomona, Sanguisorba, Actea, Podophyllum, Menisper-
mum, Apios Fragaria and Phytolacca. Exceptions are
offered by Senecio, Ginothera (some species), Potentilla,
Geum and others.
The transplantation of a species from one type of cli-
matic complex to another generally alters the shoot-habit,
or pattern of development of buds. The maritime loca-
tion is characterized by a profuse development of run-
ners and offsets, and the growth of branches on the lower
part of main axis, above or below ground. In some spe-
cies, the main axis remains in a very rudimentary condi-
tion. Excellent illustrations are furnished by @nothera,
Scrophularia, Dugaldea and Phytolacca.
See Kuckuck, P., ‘‘Ueber die Eingewéhnung von Pflanzen wirmerer
Zonen auf Helgoland,’’ Bot. Ztg., Vol. 68: 49-86, April, 1910.
30 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
The removal of the higher types of plants from the
desert conditions with which they articulate, that is, ex-
treme forms with reduced shoots and swollen stems, is
followed by increased development of spines when grown
é
y
A
I
= Hf
Fic. 4. Montane plantation (8,000 ft.), Santa Catalina Mts., Arizona.
under equable conditions, or in climates with greater
water supply as illustrated by Opuntia santa rita and
other ‘‘spineless’’ forms.
No. 529] ORGANIC RESPONSE 31
The removal of plants from localities with well-marked
seasons to equable maritime climates is followed by a
leaf development which may result in the multiplication
of the parts. Fragaria. All introductions in which
the range of climatic conditions to which the plant was
subject was narrowed, were followed by increased vege-
tative activity, which multiplied underground branches
and propagative bodies.
The concurrence of these responses in a single form
may be well demonstrated by the results of studies of a
genotype near Scrophularia leporella, found in the vicin-
ity of the montane plantation, which has survived in the
shade at the Desert Laboratory and at the seaside locality.
In its native habitat, it shows a strict, scarcely branch-
ing shoot with a few fleshy succulent roots, which appar-
ently carry water with a small dissolved content. When
this form is taken to the Desert Laboratory, its repro-
ductive season is lengthened from two months to five or
six months, although but few seeds are formed, the shoots
branch more profusely, and a greater mass of under-
ground members are formed. In the maritime location
these features are accentuated and the development of
branches goes on to such extent that the shoot gives rise
to a number of main branches which can not be supplied
with water, and hence soon wilt and die. The under-
ground system now includes dozens of thickened members
from one to two centimeters in diameter, which may show
a total weight of from 6 to 8 kilograms.
The removals of forms included in the experimental
series may be taken as fairly parallel to the distributional
movements effected by various agencies without the in-
tervention of man. Some, as a matter of fact, are exact
duplicates of occurrences in which these same species
participate. The alterations noted are undoubtedly en-
vironic effects, and may be attributed chiefly to climatic
factors. Two common assumptions as to the behavior of
plants are to be noted when species are removed to local-
ities widely separated from the habitat in which they are
32 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
found. If they fail to survive or do not flourish in the
second location, they are said to have failed to adapt
themselves to the new conditions. Into this statement
may be read one more in accordance with a physiological
consideration of the matter to the effect that the inten-
sities of some of the factors present exceeded the maxima
of the plants in question and thus acted as limiting fac-
tors to their proper or full development or survival.
The second assumption is to the effect that the altera-
tions displayed by a plant in newly encountered habitats
are adaptive and that these changes render the organism
displaying them better fitted to meet the conditions.
Some reactions are of such a nature as to be of benefit
to the plant displaying them, but the worker who assumes
that this is true of all changes even in species which
thrive and luxuriate in the new habitats will soon find
himself widely afield from facts capable of being substan-
tiated by experiments. Thus in the case of the Scrophu-
laria noted above, the new maritime habitat includes a
congerie of agencies which incite it to form enormous
clusters of thickened roots and to exhibit the habit of
branching densely. So many branches are formed in fact
that the conducting channels at the base of the shoot
are incapable of carrying a supply of water adequate to
the transpiratory needs of the foliar organs, although the
vastly increased balance in the root-system would be suf-
ficient to meet the needs of the plant for days, and con-
sequently the widely spreading shoots of these plants
show a large proportion of branches which have about
reached maturity and are dying. The behavior of the
semi-spineless opuntia (O. santa rita) offers illustration
of the same sort. Bearing only a few or no spines in
its native mountains, the new segments in the cool
foggy climate of Carmel are spinose at almost every
areole. Here the result is very plainly one of the awak-
ening of a latency, since it seems fairly clear that this
plant and all of its relatives show spines as a final stage
in the reduction of the shoot system, and that the spine-
less form is the culmination of a line of progress. The
No. 529] ORGANIC RESPONSE 33
reappearance of the spines is, therefore, one of regres-
sion; in a paper before this society a year ago I was
able to present results of experimental parasitism, in
which the reactions of autophytic green plants when
grown as parasites included a number of phenomena,
which were not only not adaptive in any sense, but which
might reasonably be considered as distinctly unsuitable.
Among these was included the very striking autonomic
movements of etiolated segments of the prickly pear
(Opuntia) when it was led to fasten upon other plants as
- a parasite.”
Many alterations in plants in the cultures, however,
particularly those concerning the reproductive habits,
may readily be interpreted as being adjustments of a
directly adaptive character. With these are many cor-
relative changes which are simply carried along. It
seems fairly certain that the distinction between the pri-
mary adjustive alterations and correlative effects will
be made clearer in any analyses made of the possibil-
ities of inheritance of somatic changes. In connec-
tion with the discussion of the nature of the parasitic
adjustments the behavior of a drop of water when rest-
ing upon a rough surface was offered as an illustration
of the modifications of an organism under environ-
mental influences. The sectors of the drop in direct
contact with a hard object which is not wetted will
be most markedly and directly altered, in a manner
parallel to the reactions in functions most directly af-
fected by environment, while the free sectors or qualities
of the drop or of the organism will be altered in various
degrees by correlation stresses.
So far as the responses in the cultures at the four plan-
tations are concerned, they appear to the fullest extent at
once and in the first generation. Whether any of them may
become fixed and transmissible in a long series of genera-
tions subjected to the same conditions, like Daphnia, re-
mains to be determined. That this might be the most
* MacDougal and ‘Cannon, ‘‘The Conditions of Parasitism in Plants,’’
Pub. No. 29, Carnegie Institution of Washington, 1910, p. 37.
34 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
important feature of all experiments of this kind was
pointed out three years ago.™ Although our attention
has been focused chiefly on the possibilities of the trans-
mission of somatic effects by seed reproduction, yet it is
to be recalled that the continuation of an alteration by
fissions, division or cuttings might come to have great
biological significance.
Fig. 5. Maritime plantation near the sea-shore, Carurel, California.
Jennings would consider the Paramecia as free germ
cells subject to the direct action of environment, and
themselves propagating by simple division if his meaning
is properly apprehended. If this is allowable, the same
conception may be extended to include cuttings and all
fission methods of reproduction in plants, even of the
most advanced types. Asa general rule, when a portion
of the sporophyte of a plant, such as an offset, runner,
stolon, tuber, bulb, corm or other detached branch pro-
duces a new individual, the mature characters of the par-
ent disappear in the regeneration or sprouting and the
“<< Fifty Years of Darwinism,’’ 1909.
No. 529] ORGANIC RESPONSE 30
ontogenetic procedure of the plantlet will be much like
that of a seedling.
The exact observation of the manner in which environic
effects may pass the regeneration stage and reappear
has not yet been made to any great extent. Doubtless
many conditions will be found to affect the process.
Bud sports, or vegetative mutations, are, of course, fully
transmissible along a series of stages of division by
cuttings, and many of them have been found to trans-
mit their divergent characters by seed resulting from
close pollination. Mechanically considered, the vegeta-
tive reproduction of a plant consists simply of its per-
petuation through an unbroken chain of metameres or
internodes, each joint arising from a growing point borne
terminally or laterally by its predecessor. The projec-
tion of induced characters formed by metamere A into
metamere P, therefore, involves the question of germ-
plasm as represented by the embryonic mass of the grow-
ing points with no opportunity for carrying over struc-
tures mechanically as in the Paramecium. The compar-
ative action in heredity when plants are transported to
new climates through bulbs and tubers and through seeds
is one that has not yet been made, although doubtless hor-
ticultural and agricultural literature is rich in the records:
of facts upon which decisive generalizations might be
made.
The genetic character of environic effects remains to
be considered. In any species or genotype there is,
withal, a limited number of things included within the
morphological possibilities. The appearance of any char-
acter in an acclimatization culture raises a question
at once as to the standing of the new feature. Is it a
regressive character, once displayed by the species and
now recalled by the very conditions under which it was
first induced, or is it to be considered as a character de
novo, arising simply and directly in response to the ex-
ternal agencies which have been seen to induce it? Thus.
in the results cited above, our general knowledge of the-
Cactacee leads us to assert with some confidence that the.
reappearance of a full complement of spines in a prickly
36 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
pear from which they had all but disappeared is a regres-
sion or return to the condition of the greater majority of
the group, a condition which must have been shared by
its ancestors at no remote stage in its progressive
development.
None of the attempts hitherto made to perfect a theo-
retical conception which would be useful in interpreting
the mechanism of environic responses have had anything
more than the most limited usefulness. The stimuli of
climatic and many other agencies do not imply the intro-
duction of any strange or new substances into the bodies
of the organs affected. These agencies might change the
dissociations in such a manner as to modify the relative
number of free ions and thus alter the molecular complex
of the living matter in a very important manner. The
intricate play of enzymatic action might also be altered,
and any modification of the relative reaction velocities of
the more important processes might result in material
and permanent change, especially in those cases in which
external agencies interfere directly with the action of the
germ-plasm.
The introduction of solutions into ovaries or the ex-
posure of reproductive elements to unusual irradiation
may raise the additional liability of disturbed polarity
and of modified surface tensions in the cells. It is conceiv-
able that the rearrangement or disturbance of the local-
izations of substances, especially the mineral salts, might
seriously modify the capacities of the bearers of heredity.
These direct and material possibilities offer an adequate
basis for the organization of experimental research upon
the main subject, as well as the means of interpretation
of results without recourse to schemes of particulate
inheritance or theories as to the constitution of germ-
plasm to which may be ascribed usefulness in the discus-
sion of other problems in evolution.
The theoretical consideration of the subject which seeks
to assign all cases of inheritance of environic effects to
the direct action of the existing agency upon the germ-
plasm in itself is one to be regarded with some wariness,
as it may lead us into empiric assumptions which may
No. 529] ORGANIC RESPONSE st
conceal rather than visualize the actual occurrences.
Direct germinal effects are undoubtedly secured in ovarial
treatments, and Tower’s analytical cultures showed that
certain somatic characters induced directly might be
secured also by direct excitation of the egg. Such con-
currence of reaction may be expected especially with re-
gard to some qualities of simpler organization. Not so
readily -interpreted are the responses of Sempervivum.
Alterations in size, number, and structure of floral organs
brought about by excitation during ontogeny are surely
not coordinate with changes in the germ plasm induced
simultaneously. In the ease of Capsella the transference
to an alpine habitat of the plant in the shape of seeds is
followed by immediate and direct ontogenetic alterations
affecting a multitude of characters. Not until these so-
matic responses have been repeated, dozens, scores, or per-
haps hundreds of times, is an impression made on the
germ-plasm that allows it to carry the new characters in
the absence of the inducing. These facts suggest to us
that the soma is in the closest association with the germ-
plasm, has both theoretical and actual qualities different
from it, and any changes in these must inevitably be com-
municated, by the action of hormones or other physio-
logical mechanisms.
A brief paraphrase of the foregoing discussion may be
useful in emphasizing some of the more important mat-
ters which have been touched upon. It is readily appar-
ent that the assumption of the inheritance of acquired
characters, after a long period of tolerance, with but
little research activity bearing upon its principal claims,
is coming in for a large share of attention from the ex-
perimentalist, and there seems a fair prospect that de-
cisive facts may be obtained within a period, very brief
in comparison with the century since the principal tenets
of the theory were first formulated. Already results are
available which have been obtained by cultures of animals
from paramoecia to mammals, and of plants from bacteria
to the higher seed-plants.
_A critical consideration of the available information
seems to justify the following generalizations:
38 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
External agencies acting upon bacteria, crustaceans,
beetles, fungi, and some of the higher types of seed plants
have been seen to result in the appearance of new types
or genotypes, which have been found to transmit their
characters perfectly through so many generations as to
indicate practical permanency.
In the greater majority of such cases of changes in
heredity, inclusive of Tower’s cultures of beetles, Wol-
tereck’s experiments with Daphnia, Morgan’s results with
flies, and my own ovarial treatments of seed plants the
germ-plasm was exposed to the excitation of unusual cli-
matic factors, irradiation, concentrated nutritive media,
or of solutions of sugar or inorganic salts.
The new qualities were seen to be fully displayed, and
to appear in a mutational manner in all of these in-
stances, although the new head form acquired by Daphnia
in Woltereck’s experiments did not become fixed and
fully heritable until the organism had been kept under
the influence of the exciting agency for an extended period,
nearly two years. The most recent and one of the most
interesting series of results are those which show that
the influence of environic factors upon hybridizations
by excitation of the germ-plasm may alter materially
the results of the unions of identical pairs. This seems
- to have been first suggested by De Vries and to have
been seen by MacDougal in hybrids of mutants of Gino-
thera, while it has been established beyond doubt by the
extensive and conclusive results of Tower in crossing
beetles under various conditions that environic agencies
may exert a very marked effect upon the dominancy of
paired characters and the general composition of hybrid
progenies. A different phase of the matter is represented
by the experiments of Kammerer, in which, characters
constituting temporary sexual dimorphism mendelize
when paired. Aberrants, sports or mutants have been
seen to arise and perpetuate themselves under unusual
culture conditions in yeasts and bacteria, their survival
being dependent upon pedigreed cultures in some cases;
and the successive generations were those resulting from
fissions, although in some cases spores were interposed.
No. 529] ORGANIC RESPONSE 39
Many of the purely accommodative adjustments dis-
played by these organisms and by Paramecia as well as
the extremes of variability induced by external agencies
and continued by selection, do not become fixed and are
not transmissible even in a series of generations by fis-
sion. The recent work of Pringsheim, however, shows
that some alterations in the way of accommodations or
functional responses of yeasts and bacteria to unusual
temperatures, culture media, and toxic substances become
fixed and transmissible both by fission and through
spores. It is not clear, however, that the differential
action of the exciting agent upon soma and germ can be
made out, and perhaps nothing more definite might be
said than that both are directly and simultaneously ex-
posed and exhibit coincident reaction.
When we pass to a consideration of the results of Zed-
erbauer and Klebs, however, the evidence becomes much
more decisive. A Capsella was found growing at an ele-
vation of 2,000 to 2,400 meters in Asia Minor which had
hairy stems, 2-4 em. long xerophytic leaves, and reddish
flowers. This plant had been evidently introduced from |
the lowlands by man along a route that has been in use
for more than 2,000 years. The Capsella of the lower
plains forms a stem 30-40 em. high, has whitish flowers
and broad leaves; when its seeds are taken to elevations
with climates comparable to the above, individuals are
developed duplicating those of the highlands,. so that the
characteristic features of this alpine form are clearly
direct somatic reactions; and that they have become
fixed and fully transmissible is demonstrated by the fact
that in a series of generations grown at lower levels the
stem characters, as well as those of the reproductive
branches and floral organs, retained their alpine acquired
characters, although the leaves, as might be expected,
returned to a mesophytie form with broad lamine.
The results obtained by Klebs include divergences of
stem habit, number and structure of floral organs in
Bompervsdi which are not capable of being interpreted
as functional or adaptive responses to the agencies which
called them out and were found to be fully transmissible
40 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
by seeds, in which case it is fairly clear that somatically
produced characters have been impressed upon the germ-
plasm and carried by it to succeeding generations. The
structural and functional features displayed by Semper-
vivum in these laboratory experiments are not adaptive
in any sense in contrast with those of Capsella, which are
direct responses.
The actual transplantation of organisms from one lo-
cality to another, as a method of experimentation, prom-
ises the results of highest value and widest significance,
especially when taken in connection with analytical lab-
oratory cultures. This method of approach is one which
may yield evidence of the greatest value upon the influ-
ence of isolation and other geographical factors, but is
also one which allows the repetitive or mnemonic effects
to be evaluated. When supplemented by laboratory
analyses and cultures to determine the nature of altera-
tions induced, such methods promise results of the great-
est value. A series of plantations including locations from
mountain tops to the seashore has been established in con-
nection with the Desert Laboratory in accordance with this
idea, and in addition to the interchange of species from
the various localities a number of introductions have
been made from eastern America. Negative or positive
results of sufficient inclusiveness to permit analyses as to
the nature of the exciting agency and the permanence of
the response are yet available.
Some of the characters called out by environic agencies
may be retracements, or regressions, as the reappearance
of spines in cacti, or they may be awakened latencies or
organizations de novo. Some of the responses may result
in sexual dimorphism, while in others the induced char-
acters may be sex-limited. The alterations induced by
external agencies may be cumulative or mutative as to
appearance or organization, and they may be permanent
upon first appearance, or on the other hand may need
generations of repetition before becoming fixed. And
lastly the changes may be orthogenetie or heterogenetic
as to direction, adaptive and accommodative or correla-
tive, or wholly inutile as to their functional relations.
THE NATURE OF GRAFT-HYBRIDS
PROFESSOR DOUGLAS HOUGHTON CAMPBELL
STANFORD UNIVERSITY
Tue possibility of hybrids arising as the result of
grafting long has been a mooted point and the subject has
given rise to much discussion.
The history of the small number of graft-hybrids that
have hitherto been recorded is small and is not as com-
plete as might be wished; indeed it has been claimed re-
peatedly that these supposed graft-hybrids are not really
such but have been produced by the ordinary method of
cross-fertilization. The most famous of these graft-
hybrids is the much discussed Cytisus Adami which
originated at Vitry near Paris about 1826. This was
said to have been the result of grafting Cytisus pur-
pureus upon C. laburnum. A series of supposed graft-
hybrids is also recorded resulting from grafts between a
thorn, Crategus monogyna, and the medlar, Mespilus
germanicus. Three of these graft-hybrids were secured
hy Bronvaux. The hybrids in this case were not all alike
and were given special names and the genus Cratego-
mespilus was proposed for these bi-generic hybrids.
Of the recent opponents of the graft-hybrid theory the
best known is the distinguished botanist Professor E.
Strasburger, of Bonn. Strasburger made a careful cyto-
logical study of Cytisus Adami which has been retained
in cultivation ever since its origin some eighty-five years
ago. Strasburger came to the conclusion that Cytisus
Adami was a real sexual hybrid and not a graft hybrid.
He believes that if the latter were true the nuclei of the
hybrid would show a double number of chromosomes.
This, of course, implies that in hybrids arising otherwise
than sexually, assuming that a nuclear fusion would pre-
cede the formation of such a hybrid, there would be no
41
42 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
reduction division of the nuclei comparable to that which
normally occurs before the fusion of the sexual cells in
normal fertilization.
mani ihn
Je
auey ree ius We!
anniari
Fic. 1. A, seedling of the black nightshade, Solanum nigrum ; B, seedling of a
tomato, S. lycopersicum ; O, shoot of the graft-hybrid, S. tubingense; D, E, leaves
of the graft-hybrid, 8S. proteus. (All figures after Winkler.)
Němec,! however, believes that a reduction division
does occur, and there is, therefore, no reason to expect
1 Němec, B., ‘‘Zur Mikrochemie der Chromosomen,’’ Ber. der deutsch.
Botan. Gesellsch., 27, 46, 1909.
No. 529] THE NATURE OF GRAFT-HYBRIDS 43
an increase in the number of chromosomes in the cells of
the hybrid. If such a reduction does occur Cytisus
Adami would show the same number of chromosomes as
C. laburnum which has the same number as C. purpureus.
The study of graft-hybrids has assumed a new interest
through the very important recent investigations of Pro-
fessor H. Winkler, of Tübingen. These investigations
prove beyond question that graft hybrids are possible,
and the numerous experiments carried out with every
possible precaution and showing remarkable ingenuity
as well, furnish by far the most important study on the
nature and origin of graft-hybrids that has yet been pub-
lished. These experiments are being further developed
by Professor Winkler but the results already obtained
are of the greatest interest and value.”
The fact that hybrids may arise as a result of grafting
touches some of the fundamental problems of heredity.
and this makes these papers of Professor Winkler of the
highest importance to all students of heredity, and they
deserve much wider attention than they have as yet re-
ceived.
The plants chosen by Winkler for his experiments were
the black nightshade, Solanum nigrum, and two varieties
of the tomato, Solanum lycopersicum. These two species
are very distinct, and indeed many botanists regard the
tomato as belonging to a distinct genus Lycopersicum, so
that Winkler’s graft-hybrids might be regarded as bi-
generic like the Cratego-mespilus graft-hybrids.
The methods by which Winkler secured his graft-hy-
brids were extremely ingenious. Seedlings of the night-
*1. ‘‘Uber Propfbastarde und pflanzliche Chimeren,’’ Ber. d. deutsch.
botan. Gesellsch., 25, 568-576, 1907.
“Solanum tubingense, ein echter Propfbastard zwischen Tomate und
Nachtschatten, ’? ibid., 27, 595-608, 1908.
3. ‘Weitere oo über Propfbastarde,’’ Zeitschr. fiir Bo-
tanik, 1, 315-345,
4. ‘‘ Uber die ein E der Solanum- eee und die
pig seagrass ihrer Keimzellen,’’ ibid., 8, 190
5.
r Propfbastarde TAR roa “Mittheilung). z
Ber. der deutsch. botan. Gesellsch., 28, 116-118, 1910.
44 ` THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
shade and of the tomato were decapitated and reciprocal
grafts were made. In making these unions the graft was
cut either wedge-shaped or saddle-shaped at the point of
junction with the stock. The graft and stock united
readily whether the nightshade or tomato was used as the
stock. After the union was complete the plant was again
decapitated, the cut being made through the region where
the union had taken place. The cut surface thus exposed
is composed of tissue derived from the two members of
the union and from this cut surface a callus soon develops
from which numerous adventitious buds quickly arise.
It was thought that from some of these adventitious buds
arising at the point of the junction of the graft and stock
there might be produced shoots which would combine the
characteristics of the two, or at least might be composed
of tissue derived from the two parents.
Naturally the great majority of the shoots arising
from the cut surface of the stem were either pure night-
shade or pure tomato. But finally shoots were observed
which were evidently of mixed origin. The first of these
graft-hybrids were obviously composed of pure elements
derived from the two parents. Some of these shoots
were almost equally divided by a median line on one side
of which the organs—stem, leaf, ete.—were those of the
nightshade, while on the other the organs were evidently
derived from the tomato. Sometimes a leaf was nearly
equally divided. In most cases one or the other of the
parents predominated, but there was no intermediate
region between the two kinds of tissues and organs. It
is clear that such monstrous forms, for which Winkler
proposes the name ‘‘chimera,’’ are not hybrids in any
true sense of the word, but have arisen from buds in
which there was a mere mechanical coalescence of tissue
from the two parent forms at the junction of the stock
and graft.
Further experiments, however, resulted in the produc-
tion of shoots in which the characteristics of the two
parents were so intimately combined, that their discov-
No. 529] THE NATURE OF GRAFT-HYBRIDS 45
erer felt warranted in assuming that these were really
hybrids, probably arising from the actual fusion of cells
derived respectively from the nightshade and the tomato,
this fusion taking place where the graft had united with
the stock. This cell-fusion was assumed to involve a
fusion of the nuclei as well, analogous to the fusion of the
egg-nucleus with the generative nucleus of the pollen
tube in normal fertilization.
Several types of these graft-hybrids were produced
and to these specific names were given.
The first genuine graft-hybrid was called Solanum
tubingense and it has since been produced several times
and has been propagated by cuttings and distributed to
various botanical gardens. During the past summer I
had an opportunity of seeing this graft-hybrid growing
well in the botanical gardens of the University of Munich.
Solanum tubingense is intermediate in external appear-
ance between the nightshade and tomato but is rather
nearer the former (see Fig. 1, C). The nightshade (A)
has simple, smooth-edged, oval leaves and an almost
smooth stem. The tomato (B) has compound leaves with
sharply serrate leaflets and all of the varieties are
strongly hairy. The hybrid (see Fig. 1, C) has simple
leaves but they are sharply serrate or often slightly lobed
like the leaflets of the tomato, and both stem and leaves
are abundantly provided with hairs.
The flower in Solanum tubingense is also intermediate
in character. The nightshade has small white flowers
with a smooth calyx whose lobes are very short. The
flower of the tomato is much larger, bright yellow in
color and the lobes of the calyx are hairy and very much
longer than those in the nightshade: The hybrid has
flowers which are intermediate in character. They are
larger than those of the nightshade but much smaller
than those of the tomato, but like the latter the flowers
are a pronounced yellow. The calyx lobes are two or
three times as long as those of the nightshade but much
shorter than those of the tomato. Like the latter, how-
46 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von. XLV
ever, there are numerous hairs upon the calyx lobes
which in the nightshade are almost smooth.
The fruit of Solanum tubingense is very much like that
of the nightshade but is rather larger, and although it is
black in color there are some traces of the red or yellow
color of the tomato.
Four other well-marked graft-hybrids were secured
to which were given the names Solanum proteus, Sola-
num darwinianum, Solanum koelreuterianum and Sola-
num gaertnerianum.
The first of these originated in a most peculiar fash-
ion. A chimera was obtained which consisted of two
hybrid components. One of these was the before men-
tioned S. tubingense while the other was a hybrid which
was more like the tomato. This chimera soon divided
into two branches one of which was pure S. tubingense
and the other the new hybrid, S. proteus. The latter
was then removed and rooted and further propagated
by cuttings. This species has very variable leaves (see
Fig. 1, D, E) which on the whole are more divided than
those of S. tubingense, while in the characters of the
flower and the fruit it is more like the tomato than like
the nightshade.
Both of the forms S. koelreuterianum and S. gaert-
nerianum were produced more than once and they are
respectively more like the tomato and nightshade but
each differs in important particulars from either of the
parents.
The form, however, which is of the greatest interest
is the hybrid to which Winkler gave the name 9. darwini-
anum, the third to result from his experiments. This
hybrid arose in a quite different manner from the others
and great ingenuity was shown in isolating and prop-
agating it. The shoot from which this hybrid originated
was a chimera which developed from a graft of a tomato
upon a nightshade. This chimera was made up princi-
pally of pure Solanum nigrum, but a small portion of
it consisted of tissue which was different from any
No. 529] THE NATURE OF GRAFT-HYBRIDS 47
of the forms which had yet been discovered. The
chimera instead of being made up of two portions united
longitudinally was composed mainly of tissue evidently
of pure Solanum nigrum origin. A small strip, however,
near its base was of a different character. This region
consisted of a single leaf, and a small amount of tissue
lying below belonging to the stem. The same form was
secured a second time where it developed from a five-
fold chimera derived from S. proteus. Unfortunately,
it was not possible to propagate this second specimen.
In order to isolate this new form it was necessary to
cause the axillary bud belonging to the single leaf to
develop into a shoot. This was finally successful after
four decapitations of the Solanum nigrum shoot above
it. The final result was a branch which was very dif-
ferent from any of the previously developed forms and
it was named Solanum darwinianum. The point of spe-
cial interest in connection with this form is that of all
graft-hybrids which Winkler secured, this seems to be
the only one which is likely to prove a hybrid in the
strict sense of the word. This point, however, will be
brought out later in the discussion of the real nature of
these graft-hybrids.
All of the hybrids were propagated further by cut-
tings and with the single exception of Solanum koel-
reuterianum, were made to produce ripe fruit which in
all cases was more or less intermediate in character be-
tween the fruit of the nightshade and the tomato. In
Solanum darwinianum, however, the fruit was all sterile
and no perfect seeds were formed. The fruit itself is a
small round berry like the fruit of the nightshade in
form, but having the color and structure of the tomato.
In Solanum koelreuterianum the young fruit set but
failed to reach maturity.
Of the hybrids Solanum tubingense is the most fertile
and produces fruit very abundantly. A considerable
number of the fruits, however, are sterile or ‘‘partheno-
carpic’’ and the seeds in no cases reach their full de-
48 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
velopment. Nevertheless Winkler was able to make
these seeds germinate and the second generation of the
plants was reared. S. gaertnerianum produces fruit only
in small numbers but the seeds are perfectly developed
and germinate readily, the same being true of S. proteus.
REVERSIONS
Winkler observed a number of cases where the graft-
hybrid reverted to one or other of the parent forms.
Similar cases of reversions have been recorded for
Cytisus Adami and Cratego-mespilus. These rever-
sions were studied with special care in his first hybrid
S. tubingense. In several instances where the plant was
cut off below the first lateral bud numerous adventitious
shoots arose from the cut surface, and while some of
these were pure S. tubingense, others were pure Solanum
nigrum, the parent species which is nearer to S. tubin-
gense. In a similar manner S. proteus was observed
frequently to revert to the tomato, but in no case was
there reversion to the nightshade.
Sometimes spontaneous reversions occur. Thus in S.
tubingense the apex of a plant was noted which had sud-
denly assumed the characters of S. nigrum. Winkler
gives an excellent photograph of this plant. In other
cases shoots of mixed nature were seen, some having the
structure of chimeras, half nightshade and half the
hybrid form. In these mixed shoots the inflorescence
had flowers of two sorts belonging respectively to the
nightshade and to the hybrid. Similar mixed inflores-
cences have also been observed in Cytisus Adami.
The Second Generation
In S. proteus and S. gaertnerianum perfect seed is de-
veloped and germinates readily. S. tubingense which
sets fruit freely never has the seed fully developed but
as we have already stated Winkler succeeded in germi-
nating these seeds and rearing plants from them. He
No. 529] THE NATURE OF GRAFT-HYBRIDS 49
explains the failure of the seeds to develop fully to the
fact that the fruit of the hybrid, which closely resembles
that of the nightshade, ripens before the seeds have had
time to complete their development. The tomato fruit
requires a very much longer time for maturing than does
the berry of the nightshade and a correspondingly
longer time is needed for the seed to be perfected; and
he thinks that the longer time required for the seed de-
velopment in S. tubingense is an inheritance from the
tomato parent, while the fruit is mainly of nightshade
derivation.
All of the seedlings derived from these hybrids re-
verted absolutely to that parent form which the hybrid
more nearly resembles. Thus the seedlings of S. tubin-
gense and S. gaertnerianum are pure S. nigrum, those
of S. proteus pure tomate. This behavior also corre-
sponds to that of the very few cases where seedlings
have been secured from Cytisus Adami, these in all cases
proving to be pure Cytisus laburnum.
Of the Crategus-mespilus hybrids only one, Cratego-
mespilus asniéresi produced seed capable of germina-
ting. These seedlings were not reared to maturity but
so far as could be judged from the young plants, were
pure Crategus monogyna, the parent which the hybrid
more nearly resembled.*
The third and fourth generations of the S. tubingense
seedlings retain perfectly the characters of S. nigrum
and the same is the case when they are cross-pollinated
by S. nigrum. Attempts to cross S. tubingense with the
tomato resulted in the formation of fruit but no seeds
were developed. It may be also recorded that crosses
between the two parent forms, the nightshade and the
tomato, were without any result.
S. proteus crossed with the two parent forms produced
seed when crossed with the tomato to which it stands the
nearer, and sterile fruit when crossed with S. nigrum.
* Noll, F., ‘‘ Die Propfbastarde von Bronvaux,’’ Sitzungsber. der nieder-
rheinische Geselisch. fiir Natur- und Heilkunde, 1905.
50 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
As yet no seed has been obtained from crosses between
the graft-hybrids themselves.
The Nature of Graft-Hybrids
Winkler concluded at first that all the graft hybrids
except the chimeras probably arose from actual cell
fusion and might be compared directly with hybrids
arising from true fertilizations. It was suggested by
another student of graft-hybrids, Bauer,* that these ap-
parent true hybrids might also be chimeras of a type
which he has called ‘‘periclinal,’’ i. e., the outer tissues
are derived from one parent, and the inner tissues from
the other, but none of the tissues themselves are of
hybrid nature. This hypothesis seemed the more prob-
able from the results of investigations of MacFarlane
upon Cytisus Adami in which he showed that the epi-
dermal tissues were strikingly like those of C. purpureus
while the inner tissues were like those of C. laburnum.
An investigation of the Cratego-mespilus hybrids re-
vealed a similar state of affairs.
Acting on this suggestion Winkler made a careful cyto-
logical study of his hybrids and found that four of them
were indeed periclinal chimeras. But one of them
seemed to be a real hybrid resulting apparently from a
fusion of cells at the junction of the graft and stock.
The nuclei in the nightshade and the tomato differ
very much in the number of the chromosomes so that the
determination of the origin of the tissues in the hybrid
is made comparatively easy. The chromosome number
in the sporophytic tissue is twenty-four in the tomato
and seventy-two in the nightshade. These numbers
were found in the tissues of all of the graft hybrids ex-
cept S. darwinianum where the reduced number of the
* Bauer, Erwin, ‘‘ Propfbastarde,’’ Biologisches Centralblatt, 33, No. 1
497-514, 1910.
ë MacFarlane, J. M., ‘‘A Comparison of the Minute Structures of Plant
Hybrids with those ot. their Parents, and its Bearing on Biological Prob-
lems,’’ Trans. Roy. Soc. of Edinburgh, 37, 203-286, 1895.
No. 529] THE NATURE OF GRAFT-HYBRIDS 51
chromosomes in the germ cells was found to be twenty-
four, which was to be expected if these were derived
from cells with forty-eight chromosomes; i. e., one-half
the number of the twenty-four plus seventy-two chromo-
somes of the two parents. It is assumed by Winkler
that a reduction in the number of chromosomes follows
the fusion of the cells. He says:
This chromosome number, i. e., forty-eight, is most readily explained
by the assumption that in the formation of the graft hybrid a night-
shade cell (with seventy-two chromosomes in its nucleus) and a tomato
cell (with twenty-four chromosomes) united. The resulting cell, from
which the subepidermal layer at the apex of the darwinianum hybri
arose, had a nucleus with ninety-six chromosomes which then under-
went a reduction division resulting in forty-eight chromosomes.
This study of the tissues of S. darwinianum indicates
that the subepidermal tissue from which the sporogen-
ous cells develop is of genuine hybrid nature arising
from a fusion of cells including the nuclei derived from
the two parent forms.
In his latest paper (5) Winkler gives a brief summary
of his conclusions which are as follows:
Hybrids may be arranged in two groups, sexual and graft hybrids.
The latter may be divided into three classes S to the theoretical
possibility of their method of origin, viz.: (1) Fusion graft-hybrids
arising from a fusion of two somatie cells ried from distinct species.
(2) “Influenced” (“ Beeinflussungs Propfbastarde”) graft-hybrids
‘which arise from specifie influences of one graft component upon the
other without cell fusion (as through chemical substances, transloca-
tion of cytoplasm, ete.). (3) Chimeras, in which specifically pure
cells from both graft components are combined to form a new individ-
ual. These chimeras may be: (a) Sectorial chimeras in which the two
sorts of cells in the growing point are divided by a longitudinal plane.
(b) Periclinal chimeras in which the periclinal cell layers of the grow-
ing point are furnished respectively from one or the other parent form.
(c) Hyperehimeras in which the growing point is made up of a
mosaic of cells derived from the two parent forms.
The first of Winkler’s graft-hybrids were unmistak-
ably chimeras of the first type. Of his later graft-
hybrids to which he gave special names, all except S.
52 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
darwinianum are periclinal chimeras. This is true also
of Cytisus Adami and the Cratego-mespilus hybrids,
Thus S. tubingense has its epidermal region derived
from the tomato while the inner tissues including those
which give rise to the sporogenous cells are of night-
shade origin. In S. proteus the reverse is the case.
This explains all cases of reversion to the parent forms
and also the character of the seedlings which in the one
case are pure nightshade and in the other tomato, this
being due to the fact that the spores (pollen spores and
embryo-saes) arise from sub-epidermal tissues derived
from the nightshade or the tomato as the case may be.
These remarkable experiments of Winkler’s must be
of the greatest interest to all students of the problems
of heredity. They emphasize a fact, too often over-
looked, that it is not always safe to apply to the study of
plants the data of zoolegy. It must be remembered that
in the evolution of the higher plants there has been a
constant tendency toward a reduction of the sexual re-
productive parts. Many biologists quite ignore the fact
that the flowering plant, as it is generally understood,
is a purely sexless organism. The so-called sex organs,
stamens and carpels, are not such at all, but are non-
sexual sporophylls.
The sexual generation of the highest seed plant is a
far simpler organism than that of the moss or fern and
the sex organs are correspondingly simpler. Moreover
the development of the sex cells and the extraordinary
correspondences in nuclear structure, the reduction
divisions and the mechanics of fertilization must have
developed quite independently of these phenomena in
animal cells, since the two great divisions of organisms,
plants and animals, parted company for good long be-
fore the elaborate structures found in the higher mem-
bers of the two series were developed. Hence it by no ©
means follows that what is true in cne case must neces-
sarily follow in the other.
With the subordination of the sexual generation of
No. 529] THE NATURE OF GRAFT-HYBRIDS 53
the higher plants there goes a high degree of regenera-
tive power, a great contrast to the very limited capacity
for regeneration shown by the highly organized animals
where new individuals can only arise through sexual
reproduction. This great power of regeneration in
plants is accompanied by much less specialized cells and
a very imperfectly marked individuality of the organ-
ism as a whole. Any seed plant may be regarded as a
colony of individuals since the parts are repeated in-
definitely and can be made to regenerate the whole plant.
The power of regeneration shown by almost any part of
the plant, even a single cell in some cases, renders any
theory of a special germ plasm out of the question in the
case of plants, however plausible such a theory may ap-
pear when applied to animals.
It is not then so very extraordinary that this regenera-
tion of the plant from somatic cells should be carried so
far as to involve cell fusions such as Winkler believes
preceded the formation of his Solanum darwinianum.
Even if this should not be proved, his experiments show
beyond question the existence of graft-hybrids of a sort
quite inconceivable in any animals except very low types,
such as corals where it is by no means impossible that
similar graft-hybrids might be developed.
It is this positive demonstration of the reality of
‘‘vegetative’’ or ‘‘somatic’’ hybrids which gives the ex-
periments of Winkler their greatest value, and it is to
be hoped that they will serve as a stimulus to other work
in the same direction which may well have a great infiu-
ence upon the drift of biological speculations dealing
with the laws of heredity.
A DOUBLE HEN’S EG@
DR. J. THOMAS PATTERSON,
UNIVERSITY OF TEXAS
Dovuste hens’ eggs have always attracted much at-
tention and the literature covering the records and de-
scriptions of the various kinds has become extensive. In
a comparatively recent paper published in this journal,
Parker? has reviewed the main contributions to the sub-
ject and from a consideration of these, together with his
own observations on five double eggs, has been led to the
conclusion that at least two factors are involved in the
production of such eggs. According to him, double-yolk
eggs are produced when there is a simultaneous dis-
charge of two yolks from the ovary, whether these are
derived from a single follicle or from two separate fol-
licles ; while inclosed eggs may be the product of a normal
ovary and probably are produced through the abnormal
action of the oviduct, ‘‘in that a yolk normally supplied
by the ovary may be abnormally covered, retained and
inclosed in another egg.’? Parker therefore classifies the
factors concerned in the formation of double eggs as
ovarian and oviducal. Three types of double eggs result
from the action of these two factors: (1) those in which
the yolks have been derived from an abnormal ovary but
have traversed a normal oviduct, (2) those produced by
an ovary and an oviduct both of which have functioned
abnormally, (3) and those in which the yolks have come
from a normal ovary but have passed through an abnor-
mal oviduct.
The egg described in the following pages clearly be-
longs to the third type, and since it possesses certain
‘Contributions from the Zodlogical Laboratory of the University of
Texas, No. 107.
+‘ Double Hens’ Eggs,’’ by G. H. Parker, AMERICAN NATURALIST, Vol.
XL, 1906.
54
N’ S EGG
1
4
ae > 6
s
DOUBLE
A
No. 529]
‘Ex ‘38a Sutsojoul ey Jo yok ay} sp; 33ə pasojourt ay} Jo
SulA| SSEW YAVp oy, ‘palvededd A[Ava[D Ba oy JO s}uəzuo2 oy] pur uədo nə səurıquəow Joq SMOYS SULE 'E DIA
‘Ex 's}jsodəp yons woaz ƏƏ Áp uə st ‘favajquoo əy} Uo ‘auvaAqUIeU JeuU, Əy} “S39 ay} JO puə Je[;eUIS
ay} uo A[[vPVedse ‘Swpy JO S}Isodep SMOYS sUBAQUIBU J9INO VY} AYM RY} VION ‘VUBIqMIBUT JOUUT OY} [BeAII 0} SB OS YOR pauANn} ə
ey} JO Ulsivw aeddn əy} pug əugaquəw Ja}NO Ə} Up epvuUl Used PRY UOIS|PUT Uv 194ze UMOYS s; 339 əy} Yduasojoyd s) ul ‘Z ‘PIA
‘$x +830 oy} Jo ydvaSojoyd y `I IA
qJ9, 284} 04
56 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
peculiarities that have not appeared in any previous ac-
count, seems to be worthy of record. It should be kept
in mind, however, that the value of such descriptions does
not come from the morphological features revealed, no
matter how bizarre these may be, but from the fact that
considerable light is often thereby shed on the complex
physiology of the reproductive organs, and it is with
this idea in mind that the following record is made.
The egg in question, which was kindly handed to me
by Mr. S. L. Pinckney, Austin, Texas, was laid March 28,
1910. It was stated that several double eggs had been
received from the flock from which this egg came, but
whether they were all laid by the same hen could not be
ascertained. The egg was large, measuring 85 mm. in
its long axis and 62 mm. in the short axis, and was
slightly smaller at one end than at the other, so that we
may speak of the blunt and pointed ends. It was prac-
tically a soft-shelled egg, in that the amount of lime de-
posited on the shell-membrane was very small, and for
the most part was collected into little nodules scattered
about over the surface (Figs. 1 and 2). A microscopical
examination of the shell-membrane did not reveal any-
thing unusual, for it consisted of the two characteristic
layers, a thick outer and a thinner inner; but on cutting
it open I was surprised to find another shell-membrane
lying almost directly beneath it (Fig. 2). The two mem-
branes were separated by the very thinnest layer of
watery albumen. This second or inner membrane was in
every way normal, and perfectly white, but was entirely
void of lime deposits, reminding one very much in its gen-
eral appearance of the membranes on eggs which have
just reached the isthmus.
The contents of the inner shell-membrane consisted of
much albumen in which were imbedded a hard-shelled
egg anda yolk (Fig. 3). Upon examination the inclosed
egg was found to be perfectly normal in every respect,
and its yolk contained a healthy blastoderm. The in-
closed yolk, although normal in structure, was much dis-
No. 529] A DOUBLE HEN’S EGG 57
torted, owing to the pressure exerted upon it by the ap-
proximation of the hard-shelled egg. The albumen
closely adhered both to the egg and to the yolk, but much
of it was of a liquid nature, as was indicated by the ease
= with which it flowed out of the cut first made in the inner
membrane.
The accompanying diagram will make clear the rela-
tion of the various parts of this interesting monstrosity
(Fig. 4). The inclosed egg lies toward the pointed end
4. Diagram of a median section of the egg. i.s.m., inner shell-mem-
brane, the two lines representing its two layers; 0.s.m., outer shell-membrane;
8, Shell of the inclosed egg; y, yolk of the inclosed egg; y’, yolk of the inclosing
egg. Natural size.
of the inclosing egg, and its long axis meets the corre-
sponding one of the double egg at an oblique angle. On
account of this inclination of the inclosed egg its pointed
end lies nearer to the blunt than to the pointed end of the
inclosing egg. The inclosed yolk occupies the blunt end
of the inclosing egg and is considerably distorted by
pressure. The chalaze are but poorly developed, but
the axis formed by a line passing through their points
of attachment to the vitelline membrane approximately
coincides with the long axis of the inclosing egg, showing
that the yolk has maintained its original orientation.
58 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vor. XLV
As I have pointed out above, the most interesting ques-
tion regarding this egg pertains to the physiology of its
formation. Parker states that two hypotheses have been
advanced to explain how inclosed double eggs are formed.
According to one of these, which was first advocated by
Panum,* the inclosed egg remains in the distal part of
the oviduct until overtaken by a second one, when both
are then surrounded by a common envelope; according to
the other a completely formed egg is carried by antiperi-
stalsis back up the oviduct, where it meets a second one,
and the two passing down become covered by a second
shell and are laid. It seems quite evident from the de-
scription of the egg just given that it is the product of
antiperistalsis, but the especial interest lies in the fact
that this process has taken place twice.
The first antiperistalsis took place immediately after
the hard-shelled egg was formed, and of course caused its
migration to the upper or proximal end of the oviduct
where it met the second egg. This meeting must have
taken place very close to the infundibulum, for otherwise
the yolk of the second egg would have possessed much
larger chalaze.
The second antiperistalsis occurred immediately after
the inner of the two shell-membranes had been laid down,
and must have succeeded in carrying the double egg up
the oviduct to a point where albumen is secreted, that is,
to a place slightly above the beginning point of the isth-
mus; for it is only on this assumption that we are able to
explain how a thin layer of albumen came to exist be-
tween the two shell-membranes. The small amount of
lime deposited on the outer of the two shell-membranes
indicates that the egg did not remain long in the uterus,
but must have been laid shortly after having entered that
organ.
In many respects this egg conforms to the facts already
seen in the inclosed types of double eggs; thus the in-
* Untersuchungen über die Entstehung der Missbildungen zunächst in
den Eiern der Végel,’’ by P. L. Panum, Berlin, 1860.
No. 529] A DOUBLE HEN’S EGG 59
closed egg lies near the pointed end of the inclosing one,
and it was laid during the time of year when such eggs
most frequently appear, that is, in the winter or spring;
but it differed in one rather important respect. The
pointed end of the inclosed egg does not lie in the same
direction as that of the inclosing one. This unusual
position of the inclosed egg doubtless has been brought
about by crowding, and does not indicate necessarily that
it was at first incorrectly oriented.
Among the more important things so far revealed by
a study of inclosed double eggs is the light thrown on the
problem of the orientation of the egg in the oviduct, a
problem in which the writer has been deeply interested.
These eggs clearly demonstrate that when an egg has
once entered the oviduct its original orientation in that
organ is maintained during the formation of the enve-
lopes, no matter to what extent it may have been moved
up and down the reproductive passage. This fact
strongly supports the conclusion reached by the writer‘
in a recent contribution, in which it was pointed out that
the definite orientation of the egg in the reproductive
passage is not a matter of chance, but is something that
is handed on to the oviduct by the ovary, that is to say
that the ova in the ovary have a definite polarity which
is passed on to the oviduct through the mechanism of the
infundibulum.
*‘‘The Early Development of the Hen’s Egg, I., History of the Early
Cleavage and of the Accessory Cleavage,’’ by J. Thomas Patterson, Journal
of Morphology, Vol. 21, 1910.
NOTES AND LITERATURE
HEREDITY
One of the most important papers relating to heredity that
has appeared in recent months is that of Tower, dealing with
hybridization investigations with species of the genus Leptino-
tarsa. I shall not here attempt an extensive review of this
paper, but mention it rather as a means of calling attention to
its importance and suggesting that any one interested in theo-
retical discussions of heredity should not fail to read it. Tower
has done an immense amount of work with this genus. His re-
sults lead him to accept the factorial hypothesis as an explana-
tion of Mendelian phenomena but to discard wholly the de
Vriesian interpretation of these factors. The most important
contribution in this paper is the apparent fact that the environ-
ment at the time when eggs are fertilized may change very ma-
terially the nature of the hereditary factors. It is unfortunate
that the author does not give more details in connection with
this conclusion. The data he does give are mixed and contra-
dictory. There has possibly been an error in printing Tower’s
paper, but if not there was a serious error in its preparation, as
will be seen from the following. In experiment 409, which was
several times repeated, the results were exactly as if one of the
parents had been a heterozygote between the two species. F, con-
sisted of two types, one of which was identical with the female
parent and the other intermediate between the two. The one
like the female parent bred true to that type, while the other
behaved in all respects as a heterozygote. In experiment 410-
the same two species were utilized, but the temperature and
humidity conditions at the time the eggs were fertilized were
made quite different. This experiment, which was repeated
eleven times, gave in every case ordinary Mendelian phenomena.
In experiments 409/411, which was performed seven times,
one set of eggs from the same cross as above was produced
under conditions identical with those of experiment 409, and in
* Tower, Wm. L., ‘‘ The Determination of Dominance and the Modifica-
tion of Behavior in Alternative (Mendelian) Inheritance, by Conditions
Surrounding or Incident upon the Germ Cells at Fertilization,’’ Biol. Bull.,
XVIII, No. 6, May, 1910
60
No. 529] NOTES AND LITERATURE 61
each case gave identical results with those of 409; that is, F,
consisted of two types, one heterozygote, and the other homozy-
gote of the maternal type. Using the same individuals which
produced a set of eggs of this kind to secure another set of eggs
produced under the conditions of experiment 410, the results
in each of the seven experiments gave F, which behaved in all
respects as a homozygote of the maternal type. This fact is set
forth in considerable detail and Plate III illustrates it just as
here described. This result occurred in all cases whether the
set of eggs produced under the conditions of experiment 410
was produced before or after the set which gave the results of
experiment 409. Now the remarkable thing about this experi-
ment is this. While in experiment 410 the results in each of the
eleven cases gave ordinary Mendelian heterozygotes in F,, in
each of the seven cases of 409/411 the eggs produced under the
same conditions as 410 gave homozygotes of the maternal type.
Thus, the conditions of experiment 410 in eleven cases gave one
result, in seven other cases they gave an entirely different re-
sult, and the only difference in the conditions was that in
409/411 the female either had produced or was in the future
to produce a set of eggs under the conditions of experiment 409
(p. 295).
Thus, on page 294, in describing experiment 410, it is stated
that experiment 410 gave F, all heterozygote; on page 330 it is
stated that experiment 410 gave F, all homozygote of the ma-
ternal type; on page 295-6, in describing experiment 409/411,
it is stated that, under the conditions of experiment 410, this
experiment gave F, all homozygotes of the maternal type; and
on page 304 it is stated that experiment 409/411, when per-
formed under the conditions of 410, gave results identical with
those of 410. These statements are directly contradictory.
We must withhold judgment on this point of influencing the
hereditary factors at the time of fertilizations, until Mr. Tower
informs us which of these statements are correct.
In these exceptional cases, where the F, hybrid behaved as a
homozygote of one of the paternal races, the author does not
tell us whether the F, and later generations were each time pro-
duced under the conditions which produced the aberrant F,.
One would infer, however, that they were not, and that the
change which occurred in the fertilization of the eggs which
produced F, was permanent and not reversible. It is hoped
62 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
that he will give us fuller data on this point in future papers
which are promised.
In several cases Tower mixed three species which interbred
freely and left them under natural conditions for several years.
A careful study of the progeny in each case showed that a new
type arose, consisting of a complex of the characters of the old
types, and that this new type rather rapidly replaced every
other type, although some of these other types were known to be
quite capable of existing under the conditions of the experi-
ment. This would indicate that in some way the new type had
a distinct advantage over the other types with which it com-
peted for food, or possibly the repeated crossing of the types
was in some way inimical to all the types except the one. Ex-
periments of this character show that hybridization may be an
important factor in the development of new varieties or pos-
sibly new species.
From the fact that when the same species are mixed together
in two places where the conditions are different, the resulting
type which finally wins out and becomes practically the sole
representative of the mixture, is different under different con-
ditions. Tower draws the conclusion that the conditions sur-
rounding the germ cells at the time of fertilization ‘‘ profoundly
- modify the behavior and the relationships of the characters en-
tering into the crosses.’ This conclusion seems hardly justified.
Of course it may be correct, but the well known fact that from
complex crosses of this kind a great many types may result
from what we know of the behavior of Mendelian characters
‘and that these types would naturally bear different rela-
tions to the environmental conditions offers apparently a
much simpler explanation of the reason for the survival of
the one type under one set of conditions and another type
under another set of conditions. It seems hardly necessary
to assume that the conditions existing at the time of the fertil-
ization of the egg determine the characters which were to result
from the fertilization to explain this particular phenomenon.
Subsequent investigation of these new types of mixed origin
showed that in all cases they occasionally produced individuals
different from the general population but which in all cases ex-
hibited characters which were present in the original parents
of the complex mixture. Tower repeatedly compares this phe-
nomenon to the phenomena which de Vries observed in (no-
No. 529] NOTES AND LITERATURE 63
thera lamarckiana, and suggests that the mutations which de
Vries observed are probably due to previous hybridization.
This is a very interesting suggestion, but the writer is
inclined to believe that the phenomena observed by de Vries
were due to a different cause. It is definitely proved that
in some of de Vries’s mutants the chromosome numbers are dif-
ferent from those of the parent form. Cytological investiga-
tions have also shown that in the reduction division in these
(nothera mutants there are frequent irregularities in the dis-
tribution of chromosomes. It seems probable that de Vries’s
mutations are not the result of previous hybridizations but
rather are due to irregular behavior of chromosomes in the re-
duction division. If this is true then the phenomena observed
by de Vries would be due to a different cause from that which
presumably produced the results which Tower observed. In
the case of Tower’s results we can explain the facts by the as-
sumption of simple Mendelian segregation. In de Vries’s work
there is evidence that the phenomena are due to a different
cause.
It is gratifying that Tower takes a very broad view of the fac-
torial hypothesis of Mendelian phenomena. On page 323 he
remarks:
This factorial point of view is in no wise, of necessity, to be tied to
or confounded with such speculations as the id-determinant-biophore
fabrie of Weismann, nor with the pangene complex of de Vries, which
have no foundation in fact. :
This is the view which the writer has held for years and has fre-
quently set forth in these pages. I have also frequently pointed
out that we do not yet have sufficient knowledge of the phys-
iological processes of living matter to permit us at the present
time to formulate an adequate theory of the phenomena ob-
served in hybrids. I think we can, however, point out the gen-
eral nature of the causes underlying these phenomena, as I
have attempted to do in my theory of Mendelian phenomena.*®
In speaking of the difference in germ cells with respect to given
characters, he has the following to say:
What this difference in the gametes is we do not know, but observed
behaviors are interpreted as being, most probably, due to the mechan-
ical separation into different germ-cells of whatever it is that produces
the contrasting attributes—segregation during gametogenesis.
* American Breeders’ Magazine, Vol. I, No. 2.
64 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
He further remarks on page 328:
At present in biology we have no business with ultimate conceptions,
and the two thus far attempted of germinal composition—the “ par-
ticulate conception ” and the “crystalline entity” are both equally
dismal failures and equally useless as working hypotheses.
The statement on page 335, that characters which Mendelize
are in the main unimportant attributes of the organism and
only rarely are of importance in the struggle for existence,
is a little bit strong. Apparently it would have been better to
state that those characters which have been shown to Mendelize
are of this nature. Unfortunately, most of the work of the
Mendelians has been done with these superficial, easily observed
characters. I see no reason why any character whatever might
not, from the failure of some chromosome to perform a usual
function, give a variation which would behave in Mendelian
fashion if the resulting type were capable of propagating and
crossing with the parent type.
Tower’s paper will undoubtedly have an important influence
on biological thought, as it deserves to have.
W. J. SPILLMAN.
ee et N
The Anatomical Laboratory
of Charles H. Ward
189 West Avenue, Rochester, N. Y.
x OUR HUMAN SKELETONS are selected specimens scientifically
' and mounted. They are undoubtedly the finest and strongest
skeletons obtainable, and are purchased by the leading Medical and
Literary Colleges, Schools, Surgeons, ete. We make a number of special
skeletons for demonstrating dislocations, muscular areas, anthropometric
ks, muscles, ete.
The mounting of the articulations permits movements as in life.
Strength ge Higiity are — by — use of a special bronze wire of
) tl g oxidation. Portability
and ease of d trati ttained by our nickeled steel clutch stand-
ard, a is a great protection as well.
ese skeletons are shipped entirely set up, carefully wrapped, and
with a directions for unpacking and handling. Our Catalogue
gives further details.
: OUR SKELETONS OF TYPES OF VERTEBRATES are large
specimens, principally of American species, mounted in characteristic
Eoo with nickel-plated brass standards. |
ae We We offer a a type collection‘for schools and colleges.
2 _ ANATOMICAL MOORS
8: sand T Universities. Ge ar Seapire head, brain, |
f which ho tones. These EE pay 1 no duty, no trans-
portation, no middlemen’s profits, but are sold direct, at very m moderate
s, í nd can be supplied promptly when needed
The American Naturalist
A Monthly i established in 1867, Devoted to the Advancement of
Factors of Organic Evolution and Her
th Special Reference to the
the ag Sciences
CONTENTS OF THE JULY NUMBER
A SS of the “Species Plantarum” of Linnaeus
r the Starting Point of the oe
of percha Professor W. G. Far
Notes on Some Beaufort Fishes. E. W. vrei
On the Effect of — Conditions = ae Reproduc-
aphnia. Dr. J. F. McCLEN
Are Fluctuations aay Dr. HARRY ne ‘Love.
P Professor EDWARD Fr East.
~~. ap ~ and Se ap seacivayeighy The Age
AS or oa ae
a pee ae : Russ A bis “Determir eey on and
neg Sfodifeaton of the Mendelian s, Pro-
The Bubonic Peas "Proessor
H E Was: os ai P Plants, WILLIAM L. Bray,
CONTENTS OF THE AUGUST NUMBER
Chromosomes and Heredity. Professor T. H. MORGAN.
Spiegler’s “White Melanin” as Related to Dominant or
Recessive White. Dr. Ross AIKEN GORTNER.
Shorter Articles and Correspondence: A Pickwickian
Contribution to Our Knowledge of Wasps: Professor
KARL PEARSON.
Notes and Literature: Heredity, Dr. W. J. SPILLMAN.
CONTENTS OF THE SEPTEMBER NUMBER
Nuclear swig of Sexu: eae in the
Alge. Dr. BRADLE
Y Moor: D
TE Phenomena of Sexual ceai in Fungi,
R R. A. HARPER.
The Pose A the Sauropodous Dinosaurs. Der. W. D.
ATTHEW.
Shorter Articles and Discussion: Evolution without Iso-
lation, Dr. oe T. GULICK. Retroactive Selection,
Casper REDFIELD. The Logic of Chance in
Problems of Genetics, ARTHUR
Notes and Literature: Animal Structure and Habi
Professor G. H. Parker. Plant Physiology, C. Ñ
SHEAR.
CONTENTS OF THE OCTOBER NUMBER
hrant = Urosalpinx. Dr. HERBERT EUGENE
AAE D ~ Sexual Reproduction in Gym-
nosperms. ERLA
ES J. CHAMBERLAIN.
Nuclear Phenomena ‘a Sexual rar E in Angio-
sperms. Profi D. M. MOTT
Shorter Articles and Discussion : ‘mae Dr. Max
MORSE.
Notes and Lite
Davin ae cian
Professor T. D. A. COCKERELL.
: Notes on Ichthyology, Presiden’
The Mammals of ere
CONTENTS OF THE NOVEMBER NUMBER
gassed of Skin Pigmentation in gee GERTRUDE C,
VENPORT and CHARLES B, DAVENPORT.
The yes Sense of the pany mesg: Bees distinguish
Colors? JOHN
Shorter Articles ane sa sya Anta oF the
Product apea Method o oef
cient of Correla’ ¥ Dr, J: j sa HARRIS.
Notes and Literature: Schlosser on Fayûm Mammals,
Dr. W. D. MATTHEW. Pei rere acgeen Genus Grayia:
Professor T. D. A. Coc
CONTENTS OF THE DECEMBER NUMBER
Heredity of cosmid Pi “een in Man. GERTRUDE c.
DAVENPORT RLES B. DAVENPORT.
oe and Larva a Amie Jeffersonianum. Pro-
essor W. H. PIERSO
The RA ena of Sizes a Shapes in Plants. Professor
Shorter icles and
Discussion : The Modification of
Mendelian Inheritance Pd a al Co
r T. D. A. Cock
Conditions.
Notes ae Literature: Heredity, eh W. J. SPILLMAN.
Index to Volume XLIV.
Single Number 35 Cents
Yearly Subscription, $4.00
The NATURALIST will be sent to new subscribers for four months for One Dollar
THE SCIENCE PRESS
Garrison, N. Y.
Sub-Station 84: NEW Y
P
Lancaster, a
VOL. XLV, NO. 530 ~ FEBRUARY, 1911
THE
AMERICAN
The American Naturalist
MSS. intended for publication and books, etc., intended for review should be
sent to the Editor of THE comedy NATURALIST, Garrison-on-Hud son, New York.
Articles containing research work bearing on the problems of ae evolu-
tion are os welcome, on will be given arelarenas | in publicatie
e hundrea nts of pisao Seg are supplied to authors is of charge.
Further reprints will be supplied at cos
Subscri and advertisements should be sent to the Tatapi The
subscription price is four dollars a year. Foreign postage is fifty cents and
Canadian enty- er cents additional. The charge for maa copies is
thirty-five cents. The advertising rates are Four Dollars for a
oo : THE SCIENCE PRESS
_ Lancaster, Pa. Garrison, N. Y.
ee es _ NEW YORK: Sub-Station 84
_ Entered tter, April 2, 1908, at the Post Office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act ot
Congress of March 3, 1879.
THE BULLETIN—For bargains in Ethnolograph- | MARINE wage HOLE Mas LABORATORY
ae ETE E À SUPPLY DEPART
ical and Pre-historic Specimens. Books on Natural l rahn. Preserved m aterial of all a animals for
PE S i r ea
Sa nas Fes oes TE | reamgiloel Mela soma dara nen a
i : post ‘or 3 cen p. R a, ter
4 Duke St., Adelphi London—Englaad Liverworts and bk gn ina så
3 GEORGE M. GRAY, Curator, nia Hole, Mass.
= ambriage University Press. |
£ {E nugian |
W. BATESON, M.A., F.R.S., Director of the John Innes Horticultural
R.C. F JNNETT, MA. Professor of Biology in the Uni-
ublication of sande original research in Heredity, Variation and allied f
Deore time to time, contain articles summarizing the existing state of f
seine but reviews and abstracts rigs yang published elsewhere f-
equate illustra tion will be provided, and, ` where the subject t matter
en T oE V Vol, J No. 1. November, 1910.
iss White Flowered Varieties of Primu
at fuse $ = Colour and o Characters |
ex Figures.
mee E “The Mode oee daa Ton
of Doubleness in Flowers. I. Petunia. (are. 7
“The Bieta of one-sided Ovarotmy on the Sex +
la si Tt
in the the Potato: F
THE
AMERICAN NATURALIST
VoL. XLV February, 1911 No. 530
THE APPLICATION OF THE CONCEPTION OF
PURE LINES TO SEX-LIMITED INHERI-
TANCE AND TO SEXUAL DIMORPHISM!
PROFESSOR T. H. MORGAN
COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY
In the same sense in which our ideas concerning
variation and heredity have been entirely revolutionized
since 1891, so has a similar change taken place in regard
to our theories of sex determination. Sex is now treated
by the same methods that are used for Mendelian char-
acters in general. From this point of view I propose to
consider to-day three questions, intimately associated.
First, the treatment of sex as a Mendelian character;
second, the relation between sex and the inheritance of
secondary sexual characters; third, the bearing of the
recently discovered cases of ‘‘sex-limited-inheritance’’
on the problem of the transmission of characters in
general.
Most modern theorists are in agreement that the
heredity of sex can be best understood when one sex is
regarded as a pure line, or homozygous, and the other
sex is treated as a phenotype, i. e., as heterozygous.
The experimental evidence has made it plain that in
some animals and plants it is the female that is hetero-
zygous, and in other animals and plants it is the male
that is heterozygous. Hence have arisen through the
necessities of the situation the two following classes of
formule :
‘From a symposium on ‘‘The Study of Pure Lines of Genotypes,’’
before the American Society of Naturalists, December 29, 19-4,
65
66 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
Gametes
od Female F 8
gő Male OOS
g
female male
99 Female g ?
Q¢ Male oOo S.
2
female male
In certain groups of animals, as in Abraxas amongst
insects, and in poultry amongst birds, the first scheme is
essential to an interpretation of the facts obtained by
experiment. In other groups, as in Drosophila amongst
insects, and in man amongst the vertebrates, the second
scheme accounts for the experimental results.
These methods of formulation are open to two serious
objections. As the tables show, the combination of 2¢
stands for the female in one case, and for the male in the
other. In order to avoid this apparent contradiction it
is assumed that in some groups femaleness dominates
maleness, and in other groups maleness dominates fe-
maleness, which seems to me paradoxical at least.
It will be observed also that in the first of these
schemes the male carries none of the sexual characters
of the female, and in the second scheme the female car-
ries none of those of the male; both of which assump-
tions do not seem to me to be completely in accord with
fact. Cytologists represent these same two schemes in
a different way. They represent in the one case the
female character by X; and the male by the absence of
X. Thus:
Gametes
XO Female x
OO Male o oO
ao CO
female male
This representation covers the first class of cases
where the female is heterozygous. For the second class,
where the female is homozygous, the following scheme is
No. 530] CONCEPTION OF PURE LINES 67
used, in which the female is represented by two X’s and
the male by one X:
Gametes
XX Female
XO Male x (0)
AX 30
female male
The XO—OO scheme applies, as before, to the case of
Abraxas and to poultry, and the XX—XO scheme to the
other class of cases. The latter expresses also exactly
what takes place in the chromosomes of those groups
where two classes of sperm exist (in relation to the X
element), as has been demonstrated by Stevens and by
Wilson.
In both of these two latter schemes the production of
the female is ascribed to the presence of the chr e
X, but in the first formula one X makes the female and
its absence stands for the male, while on the second
formulation two X’s make the female, while one makes
the male. In one case XO is female and in the other XO
is male. Again we meet with the same paradox as in
the first two formulations.
The chief drawback to these formule is, in my opin-
ion, the absence of any character to stand for maleness.
Absence of femaleness does not appeal to me as a suffi-
cient explanation of the development of a male; for the
male is certainly not a female minus the female char-
acters.
Nevertheless, despite these objections I am inclined
to think that these two methods of formulation indicate
the direction in which we must look for an explanati
of the experimental evidence, and that they may be still
utilized provided we can so modify them that their in-
consistences can be made to disappear.
It seems to me that if we are to succeed in bringing
Sex into line with Mendelian methods we must be pre-
pared to grant that there are representative genes for
the male condition and others for the female; and we
must so shape our formule that the female carries the
68 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Von. XLV
genes for the male and the male carries those for the
female. In fact, I am inclined to think that the evidence
forces us to accept Darwin’s original view, that in each
sex the elements of the other sex are present; a view that
has been largely given up by modern theorists (except
by Strasburger). I think that we must accept this in-
terpretation for several reasons. Every zoologist is
familiar with cases in which the same individual may at
first function as a male and later as a female. More re-
markable still is the case of the Nematodes in which in
some species the female has come to produce both eggs
and sperm as shown by Maupas and more recently by
Potts, while in another closely related species it is prob-
ably the male, according to Maupas and Zur Strassen,
that has come to produce eggs as well as sperm. There
is further the class of cases where the female develops
the male secondary characters and the male those of the
female. This class of cases I shall discuss later, for the
value of this evidence will turn on whether these second-
ary sexual characters are represented by independent
genes, or are expressions of the presence of one or the
other sexual condition; or due to a combination of these
two possibilities.
By means of the following formule we can meet the
requirements that the situation seems to me to demand.
If we admit that in the first class one of the genes has
become larger than the other female genes, and if we
admit that in the second class one of the female genes
has become smaller than its sister genes we can account
for the results as the following formule show:
Gametes
Fmfm Female
fmfm Male fm fm
Ffmm ffmm
female \ male
FmFm Female Fm X Fm
Fmfm Male Fm \ fm
PASSES, geome
FFmm Ffmm
No. 530] CONCEPTION OF PURE LINES 69
It should be carefully observed that in this scheme the
female genes, F or f pair when they meet (allelomorphs) ;
likewise the male genes‘ pair only with male genes. In
fact, both genes are carried by all of the gametes. Sex-
ual dimorphism may appear either because one female
gene has become stronger than the others, or, because
one has become weaker. On the first view we have
the case where the female is heterozygous in its female
genes; in the latter case it is the male that is heterozy-
gous in its female genes. If in this latter case we as-
sume that the weakened female gene is contained in the
so-called Y-chromosome we can then understand how it
is that we have a degraded series of this chromosome
leading in some forms to its final extinction, for even its
disappearance leaves the formule unaffected. On the
same grounds we may anticipate that in those species in
which the X elements are alike in the male, one X in
the female may be found larger than its partner, al-
though visible size differences in the chromosomes are
not essential to the scheme, since these chromosomes
undoubtedly contain many other factors than those of
sex whose presence might obscure size relations even
when such exist in the sex genes.
These formule appear more complicated than those
previously given, but in reality they are not so. It is
the presence of m in all of the gametes that gives the
appearance of complication. If this is omitted, as in the
formula given below, the formule are no more complex
than those given earlier.
Gametes
Ff Female
ff Male f f
Ff ff
FF Female F F
Ff Male F £
FF Fe
The formule might be further simplified, if it seemed
desirable to do so, by simply indicating the determining
factor in each case as shown below; thus:
70 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
Gametes
FO Female
OO Male O O
FO (010)
OO Femalə (0) O
Of Male O f
o0 Of
But this last simplification is misleading, if the thesis
that I shall here maintain in connection with sex-limited
inheritance is correct; because the F’s and the f’s
omitted in the last case are supposed to be carried in
definite bodies, the chromosomes, which also carry other
factors than sex factors, and it is essential to indicate
their presence in some way in order that these other fac-
tors may have some means of transportation.
In a recent paper on sex determination in phylloxerans
and aphids (1909) I discussed at some length different
theories of sex determination, and adopted provisionally
the view that the outcome is determined by a quantita-
tive factor. The present hypothesis is little more than a
further development of this same view,” but I hope in a
form more in accord with the Mendelian treatment of
the problem. Sex is still represented as the result of a
quantitative factor F (or f), but its relation to the male
factor is now expressed, for maleness is not assumed, as
before, to be no femaleness or less femaleness. Here, as
there, more of a particular factor turns the scale towards
femaleness in the first class of cases, and less of the fe-
male factor allows the scale to turn in the opposite direc-
tion in the second class of cases.*
2 In 1903 I suggested that in the case of the bee a quantitative factor
determines sex, viz., the chromatin; two nuclei producing a female and one
a male, Wilson (1905) has identified the quantitative factor with a special
chromosome and this interpretation of the quantitative factor is here fol-
lowed. On Wilson’s view the male condition is represented by the absence
of the X-chromosome in some cases, and by the presence of only one X-
chromosome in the others, (see ante); but on my view the determination of
sex is regulated by this quantitative factor in relation to another factor,
the male determining element.
*It should be pointed out that these formule are in no way related to
a suggestion that I made in 1907 in regard to dominance and recessiveness
No. 530] CONCEPTION OF PURE LINES 71
These formule have certain advantages over those
now in vogue, first, because the male gene is not ignored
as a factor in sex determination; second, that its pres-
ence, both in males and females, explains how under cer-
tain conditions the male or the female may assume some
of the characters of the opposite sex; third, that the
paradox of the female being the heterozygous form in
one class and the male in the other class is, in part at
least, resolved; fourth, that the ease with which species
pass from the hermaphrodite condition to that of sexual
dimorphism and the reverse is understandable; fifth,
that the production of males by parthenogenetic females
can be accounted for by the loss of one of the female
genes in the polar body; and lastly, we see how there
may be two kinds of eggs, as in Dinophilus apatris, both
of which can be fertilized; for, in such cases the sperma-
tozoa should be all alike.
I do not wish to urge this view too positively, for I am
acutely aware that we are only at the beginning of our
understanding of the problem of sex determination, but
I believe that the difficulties of the current hypotheses
must be clearly understood and met if possible.*
THE INHERITANCE OF SECONDARY SEXUAL CHARACTERS
From the point of view reached in the preceding dis-
cussion let us now examine the problem of the inherit-
ance of secondary sexual characters.
Males are distinguished from females not only by the
presence of sperm in place of eggs, but by the presence
in general. That view I have entirely abandoned. In the present hypoth-
esis the relation of the determining elements is stated in the same form as
in other Mendelian formule, with the possible exception that here one gene
is represented as larger or smaller than its allelomorphs, and the scale is
turned by the mass relation between these female genes and those of the
male,
*I have not discussed here the possibility of selective fertilization,
because if we can explain the facts without this problematical assumption
we simplify the problem greatly. Moreover, the evidence brought forward
by Payne, Brown and myself, while admittedly insufficient, stands definitely
opposed to the view of selective fertilization.
72 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Von. XLV
of different kinds of ducts, glands, copulatory organs, or
other accessory sexual apparatus; and also by structures
not essential to reproduction. These last we call the
secondary sexual characters.
It has long been known that in the embryonic develop-
ment of the vertebrates some of the accessory organs of
the male appear in the female, and conversely some of
the accessory organs of the female in the male. This
evidence seems to me to point with no uncertain mean-
ing to the conclusion that each sex carries the genes of
the other. It is however the secondary sexual characters
rather than these accessory organs of which I wish to
speak now; for, these often appear to be present in one sex
only. Are these characters represented in all eggs and
sperm or are they by-products of the sexual condition of
the animal? Fortunately there is a good deal of experi-
mental evidence that bears on this question, but it is also
true that the evidence teaches that the matter must be
handled with care, and if I seem to speak dogmatically
it is for lack of time rather than for want of caution.
It has been shown by Meisenheimer that removal of
the gonads of the caterpillar of Ocneria dispar fails to
produce any effect, or very little, on the secondary sex-
ual characters of the moth. It would seem, therefore,
that these characters are represented in the germ cells in
the same way as are other characters, and are not depend-
ent for their development on the presence of the gonads.
Some mechanism must exist by means of which the genes
of these organs are distributed so that two kinds of in-
dividuals are produced. It has been suggested by Castle
that the secondary sexual characters may be carried by
the Y-element in the formule XX — female, XY — male,
but this hypothesis fails to explain the results when the
Y-element is absent, as E. B. Wilson has pointed out. It
also fails to explain how the male secondary sexual or-
gans can appear in the female after castration.
On the sex formule that I have suggested it is pos-
sible to account for the results, if the genes for these
No. 530] CONCEPTION OF PURE LINES 73
characters are carried by all cells alike; possibly they go
along with the male-group, but this is not essential.
Whether they develop, or not, will depend on the pres-
ence of other genes in the cells. Thus when the Fmfm
group is present they will be suppressed, or when, as on
the other formule, the FmF'm group is present. We can
understand on this view why in the insects the male sec-
ondary sexual organs do not develop in the female after
removal of the ovaries, because in this group it is not
material derived from this source, but from materials
produced in the cells themselves, that bring about the
suppression.
It has been demonstrated by Geoffroy Smith that
when the young males of the spider crab, Inarchus mau-
‘retanicus, are infested by Sacculina the secondary sex-
ual characters of the female develop. It appears that
the parasite produces some substance that inhibits the
activity of the male-producing group in each cell, or
counteracts some materials produced there, so that the
female characters now find the situation favorable for
their development. When the young female crab is in-
fected by Sacculina she does not develop the male sec-
ondary characters, which is in harmony with the view
just stated for the manner of action of the parasite.
In birds and in mammals it has long been recognized
that some substance is produced in the ovary that in-
hibits the development in the female of the male second-
ary sexual characters, for, after removal of the ovaries
the male characters may to some extent develop. It
seems fairly clear that here the female group in each
cell fails to entirely suppress the male characters; the
inhibiting effect from this source must be reinforced
from something produced in the ovary. Whether after
castration of the male the secondary sexual characters
of the female develop is not so clear, since some at least
of the characters that characterize the castrated male
may be juvenile. But on my view the possibility exists
for the castrated male to produce the secondary sexual
74 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
characters of the female, if their development is in part
suppressed by substances made in the testis.
The view here presented also allows us to explain how
the secondary sexual characters of the male are trans-
mitted through the female, as they may be so transmitted.
THE INHERITANCE OF SEX-LIMITED CHARACTERS
In recent years a new class of facts has been discov-
ered that promises to throw a flood of light not only on
the sex-determination problem, but also on the problem
of inheritance in general. I refer to the cases of sex-
limited inheritance.
We mean by sex-limited inheritance that in certain
combinations a particular character appears in one sex
only. An example will make this clear. In one of my
cultures of the red-eyed fly, Drosophila, a white-eyed
male appeared. Bred to red-eyed females, all of the off-
spring, male and female alike, had red eyes. These
inbred produced red-eyed males and females, and white-
eyed males. In other words the white-eyed mutant
transmitted his character to half of his grandsons, but
to none of his granddaughters.
Yet this white-eyed condition is not incompatible with
femaleness; for, it can be artificially carried over to the
female by making a suitable cross. If, for instance, a
white-eyed male is crossed with a heterozygous red fe-
male, there will be produced red-eyed males and females
and white-eyed males and females.
There are certain combinations of sex-limited char-
acters that give results outwardly similar to sexual
dimorphism. If a black langshan cock is crossed to a
dominique hen, all of the sons are barred and all of the
daughters are black. If a white-eyed Drosophila female
is crossed with a red male all of the sons will have white
eyes, and all of the daughters will have red eyes. I have
another strain of these flies with small wings and still
another strain with truncated wings. If a female of the
former is crossed with a male of the latter strain all of
No. 530] CONCEPTION OF PURE LINES 16
the daughters will have long wings and all of the sons
will have small wings, like their mother.
These cases conform to Mendel’s principle of segrega-
tion. Were there time I could show by an analysis of the
problem why these sex-limited characters behave in in-
heritance in a different way from secondary sexual
characters, although the results in both cases may be
accounted for on the assumption that there are genes in
the cells for both kinds of characters. In a word, this
difference exists because one of the factors for the sex-
limited characters in question is absent from one of the
female determining chromosomes, while the genes for the
secondary sexual characters of the male are contained
in other chromosomes, possibly in those that contain the
male determinants.
This interpretation of the relation between the X-
chromosomes and sex-limited characters makes it now
possible to demonstrate a point of great theoretical im-
portance. I invite your serious attention for a few
moments longer to this question. Three other characters
have appeared in my cultures that are sex-limited; one
of these only I may now speak of. A male with wings
half the normal length suddenly appeared. He trans-
mitted his short wings to some of his grandsons, but to
none of his granddaughters. I tried to see if the other
sex-limited character, white eyes, could be combined in
the same individual with short wings. As the next dia-
gram shows a red-eyed short-winged male was bred to a
white-eyed female with normal wings. All of the off-
spring had long wings; the female had red eyes and the
males white eyes. These were inbred and produced
white and red-eyed males and females with long wings,
red-eyed males with short wings, and white-eyed males
with short wings. In the last case the transfer had been
made. The reciprocal cross also given in the diagram is
equally instructive.
76 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
LWF — LWF Long-winged, white 9
SRF O Short-winged, red g
LWFSRF — LWF
LWF SRF SWF LEF = 9 Gametes
F— oO g Gametes
LWFLWF Long-winged Ọ white eyes
SRFLWF Long-winged Ọ red eyes
SWFLWF Long-winged ? white eyes
LRFLWF
n
SRF Short-winged ¢ red eyes
SWF Short-winged & white eyes
LRF Long-winged ¢ red eyes
LRF LRF Long-winged, red 9
SWF O Short-winged, white ¢
LRFSWF — LRFO
LEF SWF LWF 8RF 9° Gametes
LRF O g Gametes
LRFLRF Long-winged ? red eyes
LRF ong-winge red ey
SWF Short-winged 4 white eyes
LWF Long-winged ¢ white eyes
SRF Short-winged g red eyes
In both cases the combination is possible because in
the female of the hybrid (F,) a shifting of the gene for
long and that for short wing (both carried by the X-
chromosome) takes place. This interchange is possible
during the synezesis of the two X-chromosomes. On the
other hand the male contains only one X-chromosome
which has no mate, hence the gene for long wings in the
hybrid (F,) can not leave that chromosome to pass into
the male-producing group. If it could do so short-winged
females would also appear, but as I have shown they are
not present in the second generation.
Interpreted in terms of chromosomes these results can
have, in my opinion, but one meaning. During union of
homologous chromosomes (during synezesis, perhaps)
homologous genes pair and later separate to move to op-
No. 530] CONCEPTION OF PURE LINES 77
posite sides (or enter the chr sometimes one
way and sometimes the other). All the genes contained
in the X-chromosomes can thus shift in the female be-
cause in this group two X’s are present. Sex-limited
inheritance is only possible where similar conditions
exist (either in the male or in the female) and since in
man color blindness follows the same scheme as does
white eyes in my flies, we have an experimental proof that
in the male of homo sapiens there is only one X-chromo-
some, and this, in fact, Guyer has just shown to be the
case from cytological evidence. But by parity of rea-
soning it is the female in Gallus bankiva that should have
_ only one X present, but Guyer is persuaded that here too
(at least in the race of fowls he studied) the male has
only one X-chr . There is then in this case a
contradiction between the experimental evidence and that
furnished by cytology and it remains to see which is
correct.
Bateson has shown that some of these cases of sex- -
limited inheritance can be explained on the grounds that
there is a repulsion between the female-determining fac-
tor and that character that is sex-limited. The view that
I maintain does not involve the idea of a repulsion be-
tween unlike elements, not allelomorphic. Spillman’s
hypothesis also involves this idea of repulsion between
unlike elements. On my view, on the contrary, an at-
tempt is made to show how the results may be due to a
connection existing between certain material bodies in
the egg; a connection that is consistently carried through
successive generations, and subject only to the ordinary
interchange of genes between homologous chromosomes
(when a pair of chromosomes is present).°
For several years it has seemed to me that the chromo-
some hypothesis, so called, could not be utilized to ex-
plain the Mendelian results in the form presented by
ë The hypothesis advanced here to explain sex-limited inheritance applies
also to Abraxas if the latter follows the Fmfm scheme and if in the egg
there is no interchange between the F-bearing and the f-bearing chromo-
somes,
78 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
Sutton, because, if it were true, there could be no more
Mendelian pairs in a given species than the number of
chromosomes present in that species. Even if this ob-
jection could be avoided® the more serious objection still
remained, namely, that with a small number of chromo-
somes present many characters should Mendelize to-
gether, but very few cases of this sort are known. De
Vries was the first, I believe, to point out that this objec-
tion could be met if the genes are contained in smaller
bodies that can pass between homologous pairs of chro-
mosomes; and Boveri has admitted this idea as compat-
ible with his conception of the individuality of the
chromosomes, In the case of the inheritance of two sex-
limited characters in the same animal we have an experi-
mental verification of this hypothesis.
°Spillman’s suggestion that the difficulty exists only when it can be
shown that more dominant characters can occur in the same individual than
the number of chromosomes seems to me only to push back the difficulty.
PURE LINES IN THE STUDY OF GENETICS IN
LOWER ORGANISMS!
PROFESSOR H. S. JENNINGS
THe JoHns HOPKINS UNIVERSITY
Art the meeting of this society a year ago I asked in a
paper read,? whether the pure line idea did not deserve
agitating a little before this society, and I tried to agitate
it. This was because I saw that for practical purposes
of future work it would be necessary to make up my mind
as to the importance of this idea, and it seemed that other
members of the society might be in the same situation and
that we might help one another. My method of agitation
was to give the apparent relations of the results of work
along this line up to that time, to one of the burning
problems in our field—the problem of selection. In the
few minutes that each of us have here the purpose of
agitation can be served and general results brought
sharply into view only by naked and dogmatic statements,
such as one would never use under other conditions.
Such naked and dogmatic presentation has serious dis-
advantages—felt most decidedly by the author when his
critics hold the mirror up to nature. I have therefore at
times regretted giving forth this paper. But if it has in
any way acted as an irritant to arouse the discussion fore-
shadowed in our present program, I shall feel that its
good results outweigh its painful ones, and that it was
worth while after all. We are apparently to have >
brought before us a part of that ‘‘thorough try out’’ that
I asked for, and from a study of our program I think I
can see that it is not all to be a pean of praise for the pure
line work. Such illumination and such interest as comes
m a symposium on ‘‘The Study of Pure Lines or Genotypes,’’ be-
* Fro;
fore the Ameriean Society of Naturalists, December 29, 1910.
* This JouRNAL, March, 1910.
79
80 THE AMERIGAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
from having both sides presented I believe that we have
before us.
What I wish to attempt is to give some concrete illus-
trations of the answer to the question discussed by Dr.
Webber— What are genotypes? I note that some of the
titles on our program speak of the genotype hypothesis,
the pure line theory. What I wish to emphasize is that
these things, whatever we call them, are concrete realities
—realities as solid as the diverse existence of dogs, cats
and horses. I find in many biologists not working in
genetics an incorrigible bent for seeking under such a
term as genotype something deeply hypothetical or meta-
physical, and for characterizing it therefore boldly as
purely imaginative. This is merely because such
workers have not the things themselves before them.
The genotype is merely a race or strain differing heredi-
tarily in some manner from other races. Neither the
idea nor the fact is a new one, and we should perhaps do
better to discuss merely the importance of distinguishing
in our work the diverse existing strains—rather than to
introduce an unfamiliar term for a familiar thing. But
investigation has shown the existence of these strains to
play a part of such hitherto unsuspected importance that
it has seemed worth while to introduce a more precise
term, which shall emphasize their importance for work in
genetics. In work with a certain lower organism—
Paramecium—t have found the existence of these diverse
strains or genotypes to be the guiding fact, not only for
work in genetics, but for all exact work in comparative
physiology. I wish to show how this is true.
We must then distinguish clearly these concrete
realities called genotypes from any theories that have
been built up in connection with them; from any generali-
zations based on their study up to this time. The exist-
ence and importance of genotypes are not bound up with
any particular theory regarding selection or any other
single point. In lower organisms, at least, genotypes OT
pure lines are merely the name for certain actual exist-
ences that you have before you; for facts that strike you
No. 530] PURE LINES IN STUDY OF GENETICS 81
in the face. We have, side by side in the laboratory, a lot
of diverse sets of our organisms, each set derived origin-
ally from one individual, and each differing characteris-
tically but minutely from the others—the differences per-
sisting from generation to generation. The behavior and
properties of these things are of course a matter for
further study. Can selection change them? Can envi-
ronmental action permanently modify them? These are
matters quite distinct from the existence of the genotypes.
To get a clear grasp of the matter, I believe that those
not working with lower organisms will find it worth while
to try to realize the condition which the investigator in
this field has before him. A comparison may help. In
lower organisms the genotype is actually isolated, each in
a multitude of examples, which live along without admix-
ture, visibly different from all others, for many genera-
tions, before again plunging into the melting pot of cross-
breeding. In higher organisms we should have the same
thing if every rabbit, every dog, every human being,
multiplied by repeated division into two like itself, till
there were whole counties inhabited by persons that were
replicas of our absent president; cities made up of copies
of our secretary, and states composed of duplications of
the janitor I saw outside. Every human being, as it now
stands, represents a different genotype (save perhaps in
the case of identical twins), and these genotypes become
inextricably interwoven at every generation. It is there-
fore easy to see how the genotype idea might appeal to
workers among higher organisms as a mere hypothesis.
What then are these visible, tangible, isolated geno-
types (or races, or strains) of lower organisms, and how
are they distinguished? Taking Paramecium as a type:
1. Some of them differ in size—the size of each remain-
ing closely constant, under given conditions, for hundreds
of generations; for years. This was the first difference
observed, and I tried to demonstrate it by giving meas-
urements of successive generations of the different races.
But to the worker in the laboratory these differences are
evident without refined measurements; the student is at
82 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
once struck with the fact that one culture is formed of
individuals that are throughout and constantly larger
than those of another culture.
And here, in view of that extraordinary cry ‘‘no here-
dity without a correlation table’? (a ery that at once
annihilates most Mendelian evidence of heredity), it may
be well to define a little more precisely what is meant by
saying that the diverse sizes are hereditary in the differ-
ent races. It means that if you keep your different geno-
types side by side under precisely the same conditions,
you will find whenever you choose to examine and meas-
ure them, that each has a characteristic size, differing
from that of the others. If therefore you follow the
diverse lines from generation to generation you will get
a set of chains, each with links differing characteristically
throughout from the links of the other chains. It means
that it is possible to predict the diverse relative sizes that
will be found in the different races, and that when you
examine them a hundred generations later, you will find
the prediction correct. These striking facts are what are
meant by the statement that the diverse sizes are heredi-
tary in the different lines—and the way to determine
whether the statement is true or not is to examine the
lines from generation to generation to see if the state-
ment is verified. To neglect this obvious fact; to mix all
your lines together and then, in order to find out if size 1s
inherited, to laboriously work out coefficients of correla-
tion by refined biometrical methods—is like cutting serial
sections ten microns thick of an eel, in order to find out
whether it has an alimentary canal. Persons have been
known to so bedevil material with refined histological
methods as to quite miss the alimentary canal of an eel.
The way to see it is to open the animal up and take a look
atit. The way to see diverse genotypes is to isolate them
and look at them and measure them and compare them.
If the use of correlation tables should succeed in obscur-
ing these striking facts (as should not be the case with
proper handling) this would merely show the worthless-
* Compare Pearson, Biometrika, 1910, Vol. 7, p. 372.
No. 530] PURE LINES IN STUDY OF GENETICS 83 -
ness of this method of attempting to learn the important
biological facts under consideration.
2. Some of the genotypes show slight but constant
differences in structure, which I shall not dwell upon
here.*
3. They show most varied differences in their physio-
logical characters. These physiological differences may
go with differences in form and structure, or apparently
they may not—so that we find types that differ, so far as
detectable, only in physiological peculiarities.
This fact becomes of great practical importance for
all physiological investigations, as a few examples from
Paramecium will show:
(a) The races or genotypes differ in the conditions, both
external and internal, that induce conjugation. A worker,
using a certain strain, works out the conditions inducing
conjugation and gives precise directions for accomplish-
ing this. His colleague, with another strain, finds this
work all wrong, and the controversy on this ancient
question continues. One of my strains can be absolutely
depended on to conjugate monthly if certain definite con-
ditions are furnished; another under the same condi-
tions never conjugates; others show intermediate con-
ditions. These differences require no biometric methods
for their demonstration.
(b) Again, the genotypes differ in rate of multiplica-
tion; under the same conditions some divide once in
twelve hours; others once in twenty-four or more hours;
others have intermediate periods.
(c) The genotypes differ as to the conditions required
for their existence and increase. Several strains, out-
wardly alike, living in the same medium, are cultivated
side by side on slides, in the.usual hay infusion. One
flourishes indefinitely. Another multiplies for ten gen-
erations, then dies out completely, and this is repeated
invariably, no matter how many times we start anew our
“For a detailed, illustrated account ug “ characters, both structural
and ge pene of these races , see Jennings and Hargitt, ‘‘ Character-
isties of the Diverse Races of Peia, >” Journal of ‘Morpholo ogy, De-
cember, 1910
f
a
84 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
cultures of this genotype. A third lives along in a sickly
way, barely maintaining its existence.
Thus we get in our laboratory striking cases of nat
ural selection between genotypes. To recall our com-
parison with human beings, if we could mix an entire
community composed homogeneously of, let us say,
Roosevelts, with another of copies of your ash man—
which would be likely to survive? If we place together
in the same culture two genotypes of Paramecium, as I
have many times done, almost invariably one flourishes
while the other dies out. This ruins many a carefully
planned experiment; it must take place on a tremendous
scale in nature.
What distinguishes the different genotypes then is,
mainly, a different method of responding to the environ-
ment. And this is a type of what heredity is; an organ-
ism’s heredity is its method of responding to the envir-
onmental conditions. Under a given environment the
genotype A is large, while the genotype B is small.
Under a given environment the strain C conjugates,
while D does not. Under a given environment the strain
E divides rapidly, F slowly or not at all. The various
strains thus differ hereditarily in these respects, and we
may say that the differences are matters of heredity.
And yet we can get these same contrasts within any
genotype (as our diagram illustrates), by varying the
environment. The genotype A under one environment
is large; under another it is small. Under one environ-
ment the type C conjugates; under another it does not.
Under one environment E divides rapidly ; under another,
slowly. / Are then size, conjugation and rate of fission
after all determined by heredity or by environment?
Such a question, when thus put in general terms, is
everywhere an idle and unanswerable one. All environ-
mental effects are matters of heredity when we compare
types differing in their reaction to the environment; all
hereditary characters are matters of environmental ac-
tion when we compare individuals of the same heredity
under effectively different environmental conditions.
No.530] PURE LINES IN STUDY OF GENETICS
A A i
B A |
| | , i 3 |
F E | E | E
Different Race Same Race
Same Environment Different Environment
DIAGRAM TO ILLUSTRATE THE RELATION OF HEREDITY TO ENVIRONMENTAL ACTION
IN DETERMINING CHARACTERS. xt.)
Heredity has a meaning only when we (explicitly or im-
plicitly) compare two concrete cases; when we say: To
what is due the difference between these two cases?
Otherwise we can demonstrate either that all character-
86 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
istics are hereditary (as we heard maintained at Woods
Hole some summers ago); or, with Brooks, that there is
no such thing as heredity. If we always compare two
concrete cases, asking to what is due the difference be-
tween them, and remembering that a difference in hered-
ity means different response to the same environment,
we shall avoid these confusions, and shall find the con-
cept of heredity most useful.
Do hereditary differentiations ever arise within our
genotypes, so that from one genotype we get two? In
other words, do we get from a single type strains that
differ in their behavior under the same environment—
the differences persisting from generation to generation?
This is of course one of the fundamental questions. The
genotypes of Paramecium, like those of most other or-
ganisms that have been carefully studied, are singularly
resistant, remaining quite constant in most respects, so
far as has been determined. This is an example of what
gives the genotype concept its practical and theoretical
importance. This is what is meant by saying that selec-
tion and environmental action are usually without in-
herited effect within the genotype. To find differentia-
tions within the genotypes of Paramecium, we must
examine certain characteristics that are most delicately
poised in their responses to all sorts of conditions; such
is the rate of multiplication. Studying carefully this
most sensitive character, we find that differences do arise
within the genotype. Under given conditions, certain
rare individuals are found that divide more slowly than
usual, others more rapidly, and these differences are
perpetuated from generation to generation indefinitely.
How are these hereditary differentiations produced?
The origin of these differentiations is in Paramecium
as elusive as in most other cases where they have been
discovered. Apparently they arise in our organism as a
result of conjugation within the genotype. Certainly if
after an epidemic of conjugation within the genotype we
cultivate many isolated exconjugants, we find a certain
small number of strains that differ in their rate of fission
No.530] PURE LINES IN STUDY OF GENETICS 87
from that which is typical. But the experimental analy-
sis of this matter is still in progress, and conclusions
can not yet be drawn.
It is only in rate of multiplication that I have thus far
found hereditary differences arising within the pure line,
and these but rarely. But this encourages one to hope
that the same may be found for other characters when
these are extensively studied with sufficient minuteness.
The negative results thus far reached do not (as many
critics have pointed out) exclude the possibility that
rare cases of hereditary variation within the pure line
will yet be found. What the negative results have
demonstrated is that a very large share of the observed
variations in organisms are not hereditary, and that se-
lection based on these variations leads to no result—a
conclusion of such great importance as to make the pure
line work epoch-marking in character.
Finally, what happens when diverse genotypes mix in
conjugation? To my disappointment, I have found this
much more difficult to determine for the infusorian than
I expected. This is owing to the fact that the condi-
tions for conjugation differ in the diverse genotypes, so
that it is almost impossible to get them to conjugate at
the same time. Further, in the rare cases where two are
conjugating at once, the assortative mating discovered
by Pearl results in the two sets remaining separate.
Thus I have not yet been able to get crosses between two
genotypes whose characteristics are known beforehand;
and this will be necessary before a study of inhoritaned,
exact in the modern physiological sense, can be made.
On the other hand, it is possible to get conjugations in wild
populations that include many genotypes, and to com-
pare the results with conjugations where but a single
genotype is involved. Certain most interesting results
appear. In these conjugations of mixed populations, a
great number of diverse combinations are produced ; the
variability increases greatly, in size and in other re-
spects. Numbers of the strains produced die, or multiply
so slowly that they have no chance in competition with
88 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
those that are strong and multiply rapidly. Thus many
of the combinations produced are canceled; only the
strongest combinations survive. We have then on a
most extensive scale an operation in natural selection
and the survival of the fittest; the production of many
combinations, some of which survive, while others fail.
As already set forth, there is some indication of the same
process in the case of conjugation within the genotype.
At our last meeting I tried to summarize the facts as to
the relation of genotypic investigation to selection; it
turned out that much which had been deemed a progres-
sive action of selection was not such; and up to that time
the action of selection in modifying genotypes had not
been demonstrated. Similarly, I had earlier summar-
ized the facts regarding selection in behavior, showing
that it there plays a large part. I have hence suffered
the peculiar fate of being belabored as an anti-selectionist
in genetics, while subjected in the field of behavior to
rough treatment as the champion of selection. What I
tried to do in both cases was, to determine how far we had
actually seen the effectiveness of selection—holding this
question quite apart from what we believe must occur, or
believe will be found to occur when we have seen it. It
appeared clear, and still appears clear, that a very large
share of the apparent progressive action of selection
has really consisted in the sorting over of preexisting
types, so that it has by no means the theoretical signi-
ficance that had been given to it. When operating on a
single isolated type it appeared that the progressive
action of selection had not been seen. These are facts of
capital importance to the experimenter; besides their
theoretical significance, they open to each of us the oppor-
tunity to direct our efforts upon precisely this point, and
so perhaps to be the first to see examples of this funda-
mental process not yet seen. I hoped to accomplish this
myself, but after strenuous, long-continued, and hopeful
efforts, I have not yet succeeded in seeing selection effec-
tive in producing a new genotype. This failure to dis-
cover selection resulting in progress came to me as a
No.530] PURE LINES IN STUDY OF GENETICS 89
painful surprise, for like Pearson I find it impossible to
construct for myself a ‘‘philosophical scheme of evolu-
tion’’ without the results of selection and I would like to
see what I believe must occur. It is therefore with some
pleasure that I am able to record for Paramecium this
extensive operation of selection among the diverse exist-
ing lines, and particularly in this extensive production of
new combinations at conjugation, with cancellation of
many of the combinations. It would seem that the
diverse genotypes must have arisen from one, in some
way, and when we find out how this happens, then
such selection between genotypes will be all the selection
that we require for our evolutionary progress. What I
hope, therefore, is that some one on our program, more
fortunate than myself, will be able to record seeing the
actual production of two genotypes from one, or the
transformation of one into another, by selection, or in any
way whatever.
Yet even if this is done, we shall make the greatest
possible mistake if we therefore conclude that the exist-
ence of genotypes is unimportant, and throw the matter
aside ; for work with a mixture of unknown genotypes will
always give confused and ambiguous results, whose signi-
ficance no one can know. If on the other hand we work
with single genotypes, or with known combinations of
them, we shall understand what our results mean. And
this applies to work in other fields of biology as well as to
genetics,
SOME EFFECTS OF TEMPERATURE UPON
GROWING MICE, AND THE PERSISTENCE
OF SUCH EFFECTS IN A SUBSE-
QUENT GENERATION?
DR. FRANCIS B. SUMNER
Woops Hote, Mass.
I must preface my remarks by an apology for coming
before you with some results which have already been
published pretty fully within the past year.? My appear-
ance here may seem the more unwarranted in view of the
limited amount of evidence which I am about to offer
upon those subjects which form the focus of attention at
this meeting, namely heredity and evolution. However,
aside from the fact that I am acting at the instance of our
president, I will say two things in my own defense.
First, the results which I offer, meager as they doubtless
are, appear to be the only ones of just this sort which are
in evidence at present. And secondly, I am bold enough
to believe that I have developed a promising method of
attacking a few of the many knotty problems which are
bound up together in the time-honored question: Are
‘Read before the American Society of Naturalists, December 30, 1910.
? (í Some Effects of External a upon the White Mouse,’’ Journal
of Experimental Zoology, August, 1909. ‘‘The Reappearance in the Off-
spring of Artificially Produced piena Modifieations,’? AMERICAN NAT-
URALIST, January, 1910. ‘‘An Experimental Study of Somatie Modifica
tions and their Reappearance in the Offspring,’’ Archiv fiir Entwicklungs-
mechanik der Organismen, June, 1910.
*Since writing this statement, I have received Semon’s highly interest-
ing paper, entitled ‘Der Stand der Frage nach der Vererbung erworbener
Kigenschaften’’ (Fortschritte der naturwissenschaftlichen Forschung, Bd.
TI, 1910). From this I learn that some of the more important features of
my results have been obtained by Przibram, in the course of experiments
upon rats, conducted at about the same time as my own. I have not yet
seen Przibram’s own report of his work. This confirmation will, I trust,
dispel any doubts as to the statistical aM of my own figures, what-
ever interpretation we may choose to give them.
90
No. 530 | TEMPERATURE ON GROWING MICE 91
acquired characters inherited? It is my hope to convince
you that the method which I have employed conforms to
certain a priori requirements, on the one hand, and, on the
other hand, is workable in practise. That my results are
not thus far more imposing is due, I think, to no defect in
the method itself, but to the limitations which encompass
a solitary investigator, deprived of some of the generally
acknowledged desiderata for successful work in animal
breeding, such, for example, as assistants, funds and ade-
quate equipment.
As to the logical requirements for such a test—to begin
with, what is it that we are going to test? The ‘‘inherit-
ance of acquired characters’’?—yes and no. First of all,
that threadbare expression itself must be relegated to
limbo where it belongs. For, not only does it fail to indi-
cate with any precision the subject-matter of our inquiry,
but historically the expression has been applied to a wide
range of phenomena, real and alleged. Some of these we
now know to be fictitious; others, on the contrary, are
acknowledged facts; while others yet are more or less
debatable. It is with the debatable group, of course, that
we are here concerned. But, even among these, we en-
counter not one problem but many. Suppose, then, that
we drop all vague generalized expressions and consider
one more or less restricted problem: Are specific struc-
tural effects, resulting from the action of external condi-
tions upon organisms of one generation ever repeated in
the next generation under such circumstances that the
immediate and parallel modification of the germ-cells
may not be invoked as an explanation? Under ‘‘specifie
structural effects,” I do not wish to include general con-
ditions of health, metabolism, ete.
What are some of the necessary conditions for a fair
test of this question? To begin with, we must effect our
modifications in the first generation. And since these
modifications, if repeated at all, will probably reappear
in a much-diminished degree, it would seem far prefer-
able to select characters which lend themselves readily
92 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
to accurate measurement. Qualitative differences, such
as those of color or of physiological reactions, do not
seem well adapted to such experiments, although they
have commonly been the ones dealt with in studies of this
sort.
In the second place, we must choose such an organism
and such a physical agency that the latter may act upon
the former without immediately influencing the germ-
cells. This would seem to rule out of consideration as
really crucial tests of this problem all experiments, how-
ever instructive otherwise, in which modification has been
brought about through the influence of foods, unusual in
amount or in character. For the effect of these upon the
parent body is, of course, a chemical one, and the specific
substances responsible for the modifications are presum-
ably free to enter the germ-cells. The experiments of
Arnold Pictet upon lepidoptera and of Houssay upon
fowls are to be recalled in this connection. Similar con-
siderations apply with equal force to any results from
experiments in which invertebrate animals or ‘‘cold-
blooded’’ vertebrates have been influenced by tempera-
ture. The recent work of Kammerer upon lizards* and
that of various investigators upon butterflies and moths
occur to us at this point; likewise certain features of
Tower’s work on Leptinotarsa. In such cases, by pretty
general consent, we have to do with an ‘‘immediate effect
upon the germ-plasm,’’ and not with transmission at all.
Later, I shall inquire a little into the validity of this
assumption.
~ In the meantime, I will point out that for certain
classes of animals this objection cannot be raised, at least
in its original form. I refer to the so-called ‘‘warm-
blooded’’ ones. Iam not very well versed in that branch
of physiology which deals with temperature regulation,
but the published evidence which I have examined seems
to show that mammals normally undergo but slight fluc-
tuations of body temperature as a result of even very
* Archiv fiir Entwicklungsmechanik der Organismen, September, 1910.
No.530] © TEMPERATURE ON GROWING MICE 93
considerable changes in the penparainre of the surround-
ing atmosphere.®
Assuming, provisionally, the truth of this proposition,
we may discount in advance the objection that the germ-
cells of a mammal may be influenced by differences of
temperature as such. If these differences affect the
germ-cells at all, and it is reasonable to believe that they
may do so, they must act upon them indirectly.* I shall
revert to this point again shortly.
_ As some of you may perhaps already know, I have
succeeded for several years past in producing very
decided quantitative differences in certain of the external
parts of mice through the action of widely differing tem-
peratures. ... (This part of the discussion has been
omitted in the printed report, since the results in ques-
tion have already been fully published.)
In experiments such as those which I am describing, it,
is obviously impossible to subject a single individual to
both extremes of temperature during growth, and to com-
pare the differing effects of these upon structure. We
therefore, of necessity, resort to a comparison of aver-
ages, based upon as many individuals as possible. If
each of the contrasted groups is sufficiently large, and if
its members have been taken at random, the presumption
*Przibram found that the body temperature of his rats was somewhat
C. This |
raised when kept in a room at 30° to 35° ast was, however, con-
siderably higher than the me n temperature of my own warm m, a
e
his experiments. (See Semon, op. cit., pp. 45, 46.) On the other hand;
Pembrey (Journal of Physiology, 1895) found that the body temperature
of mice did not rise appreciably above the ea when the animals were
kept at a temperature of 29.5° or even 32.5° C. for an hour or more.
effects of a more prolonged stay were not determined. I have myself
Heese commenced experiments with mice, using a special clinical ther-
meter made for the purpose. I have already (January 21) shown pretty
Saian that mice may ws almost precisely the same rectal tempera-
ture at —'6° C, as at + 30°
e is true even Oy tunndbatty: ritak than temperature per se, is
the factor ahia concerned in these modifications. As "o in my T
paper (1909), the relative humidity of my heated room wa very m
lower than that of the unheated room. Thus far I have not PPa
the effects of these two factors.
94 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von XLV
is that the mean potential (that is to say, congenital)
value of every character is about the same for the two
lots. I fully realize that the study of genetic problems by
the use of mass averages has recently received a decided
set-back, largely through the labors of some of those who
have contributed to our present program. But until
some one is ingenious enough to produce a strain of par-
thenogenetic or self-fertilizing mice, I fear that my only
practical. method of procedure in these experiments is to
deal with mass statistics based upon ‘‘heterozygous”’
stock.
It must also be pointed out that the technique of the
problem which I am discussing is inevitably different
from that involved in the endeavor to find, or to produce,
‘‘mutations’’ or single abrupt deviations from the parent
stock, which appear at once in full force, if they appear
at all, and thereafter breed true. On the contrary, the
distribution of the lengths for the tail, ear and foot,
within each of the temperature groups in my experi-
ments, appears to follow the normal probability curve,
just as in the case of the so-called ‘‘fluctuating varia-
tions,” whose heritability is nowadays so much in
question.
In the splendid paper of Professor Johannsen, to which
we listened yesterday, occurs the following statement:
‘as yet no experiment with genotypically homogeneous
cultures has given any evidence for the Lamarckian view,
the most extreme ‘transmission’-conception ever issued.”’
Leaving aside for the time being the question whether
results such as mine, even when every possible defect of
technique has been eliminated, are to be regarded as
‘fevidence for the Lamarckian view,” let us consider for
a moment whether the fact that I have not myself found
it practicable to use ‘‘genotypically homogeneous cul-
tures’’ does, in reality, invalidate the evidence which I
offer. Ay y Professor Johannsen would hold this
to be true. Bo far as I can see myself, the only difference
between results from pure and from mixed lines in the
No.530] © TEMPERATURE ON GROWING MICE 95
present case would be this. Individuals belonging to a
single pure line would probably respond with much
greater uniformity to the effects of an environmental
change than would those belonging to a composite stock,
consisting of a number of lines. It is quite conceivable
that among these last some would respond in a much
greater measure than others. Or indeed some might not
be affected at all. But here the much-scorned ‘‘mass
statistics’? would reveal the mean tendencies of the two
lots, and the resulting data, though confessedly capable
of further analysis, would be none the less valuable. If
it be objected that the differences between the two aver-
ages may be due to the presence in one or both of the con-
trasted lots of a few ‘‘mutants,’’ while the remaining
individuals may not have been affected at all, I will only
point out, as above, that the frequency distributions are
directly opposed to such an assumption.
Having produced modifications of the sort mentioned,
it remained to be seen whether these effects persisted
beyond the generation immediately influenced. . . . (This
part of the discussion, including an account of the method
employed, the results, and certain of the possibilities of
interpretation, I have thought it best to omit here, in view
of the fact that I have covered practically the same
ground in statements already published. I will merely
note that the offspring of warm-room and cold-room mice,
although themselves reared under identical temperature
conditions, presented differences of the same sort as had
been brought about in their parents through the direct
effect of temperature, viz., differences in the mean length
of tail, foot and ear.)
There remain two principal alternative explanations,
which are not wholly distinguishable from one another,
and neither of which admits of being stated except in
rather vague terms.
One of these is the assumption that the changes under-
gone by the parent body are in some way registered in the
germ cells, so as to be repeated, in a certain measure, in.
96 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST — [Vou. XLV
the body of the offspring. This conception has taken
various forms, commencing with Darwin’s hypothesis of
‘‘nangenesis.’’ The same general view has recently been
restated in chemical terms, and in a manner which is
perhaps far less shocking to our common sense.
The other alternative is that of a ‘‘ parallel induction”’
or ‘‘simultaneous modification of the germ-plasm,’’
through the direct action of the modifying agent. This
explanation, as we all know, has been freely used by
Weismann and others to account for a considerable range
of phenomena, notably the persistence of temperature
effects in a second generation of butterflies. The phrase
has indeed become so familiar through long repetition
that few of us stop to consider just what it implies.
‘Parallel modification of the germ-plasm?’’ How can
the unformed material of the germ cells be modified in the
same manner as certain groups of somatic cells—say in a
butterfly’s wing—even by an all-pervading influence like
temperature? This is obviously not what is intended.
What we mean, concretely stated, is this: the germinal
matter is so affected by the temperature that, after some
hundreds or thousands of cell generations, certain of the
resulting cells will show peculiarities in their pigment-
producing powers of the same nature as those which
arose directly in the somatic cells of the parent. And a
most curious feature of this coincidence is that these
modified cells are situated in precisely the same parts of
the body in the one case as in the other.”
Thus do these very simple explanations have a way of
losing their simplicity when examined critically. In the
present instance, the hypothesis stated may, for all we
know, be the one that most nearly represents the truth.
But it should be stated frankly, in all its complexity, and
not palmed off upon us as a readily intelligible hypoth-
esis, which relieves us of the necessity of adopting an
‘‘inconceivable’’ one such as that of pangenesis.
* Weismann’s ‘‘determinant’’ hypothesis offers at least a formal solution
of this difficulty, but I think that most biologists will agree with me that
the solution thus offered is almost wholly a formal one.
No.530] TEMPERATURE ON GROWING MICE 97
In the case of a warm-blooded animal, of course, such
an explanation as the foregoing could not be offered with-
out still further modification. It might be conceded that
temperature, as such, could not affect the germ-cells to
any appreciable extent. But it might, on the other hand,
be contended that the effects of temperature, even upon
the parent body itself, may not be direct, but may be due
to the formation of specific chemical substances, which,
through the medium of the blood, may be supposed to
simultaneously influence the body and the germ-cells.
Thus we should, after all, be invoking a ‘‘simultaneous
modification of the germ-plasm,’’ as in the case of cold-
blooded animals.
Such a conception, vague as it is, has certain decided
elements of strength. Let me point out, however, as I
have already done more than once, that any such chemico-
physiological mechanism as is here assumed would be of
nearly or quite the same value for evolution as the
‘‘inheritance of acquired characters’’ in the old sense.
An interpretation of this sort might ‘‘save the face’’ of
certain speculative students of heredity, but the differ-
ence between the two views would have little but academic
interest.
At the present time, I am continuing these experiments
with mice, and am not only using much larger numbers
than hitherto, but am resorting to several variations of
the original theme, by which I hope to reduce the number
of possible interpretations to a minimum. A friend wrote
to me recently, wishing me no end of ‘‘good results, not
Lamarckian.’’ This doubtless represents the attitude of »
a large number of persons toward the whole subject. By
many, anything with a taint of ‘‘Lamarckism’’ about it
would seem to be, ipso facto, beyond the pale of legitimate
scientific investigation, belonging rather to the same cate-
gory as pre-natal influences, telepathy and the ‘‘border-
land’? phenomena of psychical research. But the dawn
of better times is already with us.
In conclusion, let me state that my own attitude toward
98 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Von. XLV
this group of problems is one of indecision. If I confess
to you, as I am bound to do, that positive results from my
own experiments will give me far greater satisfaction
than negative ones, this is chiefly because negative results
commonly prove nothing. The question would be left
very nearly as it was before. This, of course, constitutes
a serious defect in my own vaunted method of attacking
the problem, a defect which it shares, however, with any
other which could be devised. But any results are better
than no results, and these problems seem worth afar more
thorough testing than they have yet received. The pres-
ent experiments ought, as Professor MacDougal has
pointed out, and the author keenly realizes, to be sub-
jected to various checks and controls, and to be continued
through a considerable series of generations. It is my
own fervent hope to be able to carry out such a program.
* Presidential address before the American Society of Naturalists, read
at Ithaca, December 29, 1910.
THE MENDELIAN RATIO AND BLENDED IN-
HERITANCE!
SHINKISHI HATAT
THE Wistar INSTITUTE or ANATOMY
Tue indefatigable efforts of neo-Mendelists have suc-
ceeded in bringing numerous cases of inheritance, which
had previously been considered incompatible with Men-
del’s law, into their domain by widening the original
limitations. We still have. many instances such as
blended inheritance which can not apparently be harmon-
ized with the law of Mendel. Recent experiments which
demonstrate the existence of various degrees of domi-
nance as well as the mutability of the determinants in
their behavior, suggested to the writer that various
forms of inheritance might be considered as degrees of
modification of the law of Mendel. With this view in
mind, I have attempted to obtain some general expres-
sion for the underlying principle of the law of inherit-
ance by which means Mendel’s original law may possibly
be theoretically connected with the other cases. In fact,
I was compelled to pursue this investigation in connec-
tion with my own experiments on the inheritance of the
weight of the central nervous system, though this is not
yet ready to present at this time.
In carrying out this investigation, I have assumed that
the germ plasm is composed of many factors, the true
nature of which is unknown, but which in one way or
another determine the characters in the offspring. It is
these hypothetical factors which are here provisionally
called determinants. With this understanding, we ma
now proceed to the argument. i
Suppose a gamete of one parent after the reducing
division contains n determinants, the whole group of
t Read before the American Society of Naturalists, December 30, 1910.
= 99
100 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
determinants being designated p, and the gamete of
another parent also contains after the reducing division
n determinants, the whole group being designated q.
Then in the first hybrid zygote (F,) there will be con-
tained at the time of the union of the gametes 2n determ-
inants. As we know, rearrangement takes place during
the maturation of the germ cells and we assume this
rearrangement to involve a random sampling by which
n determinants are taken from the group of 2n. From
the theory of probabilities we find that n, n— 1, n— 2
. determinants of either parent contained in the
gametes of F, are proportional to the successive terms
of the following series:
p+ np"—'q 4 nO) pig a n(n - oa oo es 5 ee ie ee a )
The same phenomenon e in the gametes of the
other hybrid parent (F,) and since the gametic consti-
tution of the two hybrid parents is assumed to be identi-
cal with respect to the distribution of determinants (1),
the frequency of the various combinations of the de-
terminants in the second hybrid offspring (F,) will be —
given by the square of (1) or
e 2 r n(n — 1)(n — 2)
T ar ao
2
(r m - Eri .) (2)
which may also be written as follows:
(p? + 2pq +a)".
This series, or the square of the binomial series, is
then the most general expression for the gametic com-
position of any hybrid arising from a combination of p
and q determinants and may therefore be considered as
the underlying principle of any law of inheritance where
the idea of determinants is used.
It is evident that since the somatic characters in ques-
tion depend entirely on the behavior of the determinants,
the relative frequency of various zygotes, as well as the
character of the zygotes, depends on whether p or q de-
No. 530] THE MENDELIAN RATIO 101
terminants are related as dominant and recessive, re-
spectively, or whether they blend.
Suppose p is recessive and q is dominant in the Men-
delian sense, we at once obtain from (2) the general
expression for the alternative inheritance or
(RR + 2DR + DD)”
where n refers to the number of allelomorphic pairs of
characters, and the expansion gives a strict Mendelian
ratio for any number of allelomorphic pairs of char-
acters.
On the other hand, if we consider that p and q determi-
nants blend with an equal intensity the series (2) will
give all grades of hybrid characters between the two pa-
rental types, the frequency of which is proportional to
the successive terms of a symmetrical point binomial
curve, and the maximum frequency will be associated
with the midparental types (case of equipotency).
Castle’s (’09) experiments with the length of the ear of
rabbits illustrates this case.
Again let us suppose that p and q determinants blend,
but with unequal intensity. According as p or q is pre-
potent, the zygote will resemble more closely one or the
other parent. The frequency of each type of zygote
again will be represented by the symmetrical point bi-
nomial curve. Thus the present series (2) represents
both alternative and blended inheritance according to
the behavior of the determinants.
The fact just mentioned, that the expressions for both
blended and alternative inheritance are obtained from
the same series which represent the gametic composition,
suggests that we may possibly obtain cases of blending
in character which normally follow the law of the alter-
native inheritance, and vice versa, and further we may
even obtain both blended and alternative inheritance in
the same offspring by subjecting the hybrid parents to
different conditions, provided by such treatment we can
modify the behaviors or functional activity of the de-
102 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
terminants, since as soon as the behavior is altered, we
at once obtain from the series (2) another type of in-
heritance.
Although we have no clear direct evidence which
demonstrates an occurrence of such extreme modification
in the behavior of determinants, nevertheless the possi-
bility of such an event is amply suggested by the recent
experiments. For instance Tower (°’10) has shown not
only a reversal of dominance and apparent failure of
segregation by merely modifying the environment of the
beetles, but also a case in which the same parents pro-
duce offspring, some of which follow the law of Mendel
while others show entirely different behavior with re-
spect.to dominance and segregation. Tennent (’10) was
able to obtain from a cross of Hipponoë esculenta with
Taxopneustes variegatus, reversal of dominance by de-
creasing the alkalinity of the sea water. Numerous
samples of this sort can easily be found in the recent
literature.
Whatever be the real condition or conditions which
control the behavior of the determinants, one point is
clear from the above, that the determinants are not im-
mutable in their behavior, but subject to modification.
This fact naturally leads us to think that we may obtain
various forms of inheritance which are more or less dif-
ferent from the type form according to degree of func-
tional modification. When a modification is maximum,
we may even obtain a case of blended inheritance in a
character which normally follows the law of alternative
inheritance, or vice versa.
The facts mentioned above then indicate that our de-
duction from the properties of the formula is not at all
improbable.
Again the properties of the formula suggests that we
can theoretically connect cases of blended inheritance
with those of alternative inheritance by the mere as-
sumption that p or q fails to dominate either completely
or incompletely. Since as we have shown by the degree
No. 530] THE MENDELIAN RATIO 103
of dominance, the formula reduces to either equipotent
or prepotent blending inheritance. From this stand-
point we may consider that blending inheritance is a
limiting case of alternative inheritance where either —
dominance is absent (equipotency) or is imperfect
(heteropotency). If this hypothesis is accepted, then
Mendel’s law of alternative inheritance may be taken as
the standard, and all cases referred to it or blending in-
heritance (though by this some more important features
of inheritance are not suggested) may similarly be made
the standard, the Mendelian ratios then becoming a
special case.
In this connection Professor Davenport’s (’07) view
on the law of potency is of great interest. As his view of
potency is so important, and especially as it clearly ex-
plains the relation between Mendelism and cases con-
sidered to be non-Mendelian, I shall quote his words at
some length.
After quoting various cases of inheritance, Professor
Davenport says:
_ Taking all cases into account, it is clear that Mendel’s law does not
cover all; and if not, it must be a special case of a more inclusive law.
Can we find a more general expression for the inheritance of charac-
teristies which will cover all these cases? I think we can and that it
may be called the law of potency. At the one extreme of the series we
have equipotent unit characters, so that when they are crossed, the
offspring show a blend, or a mosaic between them. At the other extreme
is allelopotency. One of the two characteristics is completely recessive
to the other. Between the two extremes of equipotency and al lelopo-
tency lies the great mass of heritable characteristics which when opposed
in heredity, exhibit varying degrees of potency. This sort of inherit-
ance may be called heteropotency.
Thus Professor Davenport shows also that Mendelian
dominance is a particular case of potency, allelopotency,
though he did not state that blending inheritance is a
limiting case of Mendelism.
Whether a new expression ‘‘the law of potency”
should be introduced as Professor Davenport has sug-
gested, or whether the various potencies may be consid-
104 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
ered as a limiting case of Mendel’s law of alternative
inheritance, thus saving the original name, is a matter
for later decision, though the latter name seems to me
` more appropriate to retain owing to the fact that the
phenomenon of segregation, most important of all, had
been first stated by Mendel.
Let us now consider a limiting case of our formula (2)
when the values of. n (number of allelomorphic pairs of
characters) increase. In the typical Mendelian ratio,
the relative frequency of the various zygotes with re-
spect to any given visible character is proportional to an
expansion of (1+ 3)" which is the same as (1/4 + 3/4)"
if we consider the relative values of the frequencies.
Thus in all known cases of the inheritance, we have to
deal with an expansion of (r -+ s)” where r+ s=1. A
concise mathematical formula which represents a limit-
ing case of the binomial series arising from an expansion »
of (r + s)” will be very useful, especially when we are
dealing with a quantitative measurement such as weight,
length, area, volume, etc., since in these cases the values
of the variates will be graded. Further, the theoretical
frequency corresponding to each variate when the value
of n becomes very large, can best be determined from
such a mathematical expression which represents a limit-
ing case.
Without going into any detail of the mathematical
treatment, it will be seen that we obtain two forms of
expression according as r= s or rs. The former will
be represented by the normal probability curve and the
latter by a limiting case of a skew binomial curve. For
representing a skew binomial curve we can best use
DeForest’s formula (Professor Pearson’s curve of type
3). It may be useful to the reader to know that De-
Forest’s formula degenerates into the normal probability
curve as its simplest form, as will be seen below.
DeForest’s formula (Hatai: 710) is usually written in
the following form:
No. 530] THE MENDELIAN RATIO ~ 105
1 X a?b—1
= ———_| ] aes eae
A a ea +e) a
where
1
k= 1 May aor For
12a%b ™ 288(a°b)?
a =— quotient of twice the second moment divided
by the third moment.
b — second moment.
Writing c for
1
ky 2mb
we have
log (2) = (e0 — 1) log (1 +3)
æ i/Ææ\ that? 1oy"
= (ab — Dia- la T 1 -a a |e
a x? 1 x a eae | ey
--35+(35- )a-(Ge-3) ab
g l ey
kab 8 [Nag
Since for a vanishingly small value of the third moment,
ab will be a very large number, consequently #/ab will
be infinitesimal. Thus neglecting all terms in which x/ab
is factor, we have
Restoring the value of C and remembering that for large
values of ab, k reduces to unity, we finally have
which is the familiar formula for the normal probability
curve.
From the above it is clear that DeF orest’s formula and
its limiting case represent the frequency distribution of
the zygotes, whether we are dealing with alternative or
106 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
blended inheritance. One, however, must not be misled to
conclude that continuous variation necessarily means
failure of segregation, since on the contrary apparent
continuity may be a resultant of combinations of various
segregating characters. Whether or not given data indi-
cate a segregation, may be variously tested by some other
means according to the nature of the experiment.
From the above we draw the following conclusions:
1. The series obtained from the square of the binomial
expresses the distribution of determinants for both alter-
native and blended inheritance.
2. Blended inheritance may be considered to be a limit-
ing case of alternative inheritance where dominance is
imperfect. Thus Mendel’s law of alternative inheritance
may be considered as the standard and all other cases
referred to it.
3. DeForest’s formula with its limiting case ade-
quately represents frequencies of all known cases of
inheritance when the number of allelomorphic pairs of
characters is large, especially when quantitative meas-
urements are considered.
LITERATURE CITED
1909. Castle, W. E. Studies of yong in Rabbits. Pub. of the
; Carnegie Inst. of Washington, No. 114, pp. 9-68.
1907. Davenport, C. B. Heredity and Mendel’s Law. Proc. of the Wash.
Acad. of Sciences, Vol. 9, p. 179.
1910. Davenport, C. B. e Imperfection of pR and some of its
Consequences. Am. Naturalist, Vol. 44, pp. 150-155.
1910. Hatai, §. DeForest’s Formula for ‘‘ An Unsymmetrical Probability
Curve.’’ Anat. Rec., Vol. 4, No. 8, pp. 281-290.
1910. Tennent, D. H. The Dominance ps E or of Paternal Char-
acters in Echinoderm RIET . f. Entwicklungsmechn. d.
O
1910. Tower, W. L. The Determination of Dominance and Modification
of Behavior in Alternative (Mendelian) Inheritance, by Conditions
Surrounding or Incident upon the Germ Cells at Fertilization. Biol.
Bull., Vol. 18, No. 6, pp. 285-352.
DATA ON THE RELATIVE CONSPICUOUSNESS
OF BARRED AND SELF-COLORED FOWLS!
DR. RAYMOND PEARL,
MAINE AGRICULTURAL EXPERIMENT STATION
I. Puystcan Data
Tue purpose of this note is to put on record a rather
striking physical fact, and to discuss briefly its biological
significance. Some two years ago Davenport? published
a short note regarding the relative number of self-colored
and of ‘‘penciled or striped’’ chicks killed by crows one
afternoon, at Cold Spring Harbor. The rather striking
result was that out of 24 birds killed, only one was other
than self-colored. The communication closes with the
following words: ‘‘This fragment, then, so far as it
goes, indicates that the self-colors of poultry, which have
arisen under domestication, tend to be eliminated by
the natural enemies of these birds, and the pencilled birds
are relatively immune from attack because relatively
inconspicuous.’ |
Some photographs taken on the poultry range of the
Maine Experiment Station this past summer illustrate
this point made by Davenport as to the relative conspic-
uousness of self-colored birds in so striking and com-
vlete a manner as to warrant their publication and a
critical discussion of their significance. These photo-
graphs were made without any thought whatever at the
time that they were going to bring out the relative con-
spicuousness of different plumage patterns. Indeed, it
was not realized that they did so until the finished prints
were given to me by the station photographer, Mr. Roy-
1 Papers from the Biological Laboratory of the Maine Experiment Sta-
tion, No. 23.
* Davenport, C. B., ‘‘ Elimination of Self-Coloured Birds,’’ Nature, Vol.
78, p. 101, 1908.
107
108 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
i Photograph of a Golden Pencilled Hamburg g- Practically. a solid
colored bird (red on body, black tail). The few barred feathers which the
of this variety has are covered by solid colored feathers. In this picture one
barred feather shows in the region of the saddle. The wind had displaced this
feather.
den Hammond, to whom I am indebted for developing
and printing these pictures. As a matter of fact the
four pictures which accompany this note were taken for
the purpose of (a) testing a then new camera as to its
usefulness in obtaining pictures to form part of a per-
manent record system in poultry-breeding experiments,
and (b) to get photographic records of certain particu-
lar birds of interest from one standpoint or another.
All the exposures were made by the same person (the
writer) on the same afternoon and within an hour of
each other. It was on a cloudless afternoon early in
August, and the light conditions, shutter-opening, speed,
and diaphragm opening were constant for all of the pic-
tures. What differences appear in the pictures, then,
are such as are referable to the different color patterns
of the birds, when seen under the light conditions and
against the kind of background which obtained in this
case.
No. 530] RELATIVE CONSPICUOUSNESS OF FOWLS 109
Fic very dark, practically solid black Fə g from the cross Cornish
Indian pute Fı 9 from Cornish Indian g x Barred Rock Q.
From these photographs the following poimia are to be
noted :
1. As compared with self-colored birds the barred in-
dividuals obviously are relatively much less conspicuous,
when under the same light conditions, and when seen
against the same kind of a background. The pictures of
the barred birds (Figs. 3 and 4) are not, to be sure, like
the ‘‘puzzle’’ pictures of supposedly protectively colored
organisms, which one sometimes sees, where it is exceed-
ingly difficult to distinguish the animal from the back-
ground at all. In both Figs. 3 and 4 it is easy enough
to see the bird, but at the same time these birds are
obviously much less conspicuous than those shown in
Figs. 1 and 2.
2. This inconspicuousness is equally marked whether
the barred bird is in the bright sunlight (Fig. 3) or in
a relatively deep shadow (Fig. 4).
3. These pictures furnish objective and unbiased phys-
110 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
2 ate cross-bred chick. .Sex 9. Produced by mating Fi
barred ‘croes-breda inter s$
ical evidence regarding the relative conspicuousness of
two types of plumage pattern.
II. Dara on tHE Bronocican VALUE or THE [NCONSPIC-
UOUSNESS OF THE BARRED PATTERN
The physical fact set forth above is obvious: barred
chickens are clearly less conspicuous than self-colored
when seen against the background of grass on the range
where they live. Has this physical fact any biological
significance? Are the barred birds, by virtue of the
possession of this color pattern, at any advantage in
the struggle for existence? Is their relative inconspic-
uousness any real protection against their natural ene-
mies? It is the purpose of this section of the paper to
present some numerical data regarding this matter.
The only evidence which exists in the literature on this
problem, so far as poultry is concerned, consists in the
admittedly fragmentary statistics presented by Daven-
port, which have been cited above. It should be pointed
No. 530] RELATIVE CONSPICUOUSNESS OF FOWLS 111
F ure Barred Plymouth Rock Q, with barring of fine quality from
the fyn i Spd It is to be noted that the bird in this figure is in the
shadow of a T in contrast to that shown in Fig. 3, which is standing in
the bright s
out that Davenport’s data are fragmentary not alone in
respect to the small number of deaths (eliminations in
the technical sense) involved, but also because these
deaths were due to but a single one of the natural ene-
mies of poultry, namely the crow. There are, of course,
many others. Under the conditions prevailing on or
about the poultry plant of which the writer has charge
the following animals are regular or occasional destroy-
ers of young chicks: Rats, skunks, foxes, crows, hawks,
cats.’
In different seasons the relative importance of these
different enemies varies. Thus in the breeding season of
1908 many birds were killed by foxes. In 1909, the year
“To this list one feels tempted to add that species of vermin which is
in some respects the worst which attacks a poultry plant, namely the thief,
but fortunately the range was free from his depredations in 1909.
112 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
for which statistics are given below, not a single bird was
killed by a fox so far as is known. Similarly in 1909 no
birds were killed by skunks. In 1910 a skunk succeeded
in getting into a house one night and killed a number of
birds. On the Maine Station plant normally predaceous
birds undoubtedly rank first in destructiveness. This is
probably quite generally true of poultry plants, though
because of the fact that the loss is distributed so evenly
over the whole season the importance of this class of
enemies is apt to be underrated. Next to predaceous
birds stand rats, under our conditions. An important
point to be noted is that on the plant under discussion
here all killing of chickens by rats is done in the daytime.
Rats burrow in the ground under the houses, and then
when the chicks are playing about a rat will dash out,
seize a chick and carry it back to the burrow. It is not
an uncommon occurrence for a rat thus to kill as many
as 12 chickens within the space of an hour. With rare ex-
ceptions we never lose any chickens at night except those
taken by thieves. The chicks are shut and locked in rat
and (usually) vermin proof houses at night. Occasion-
ally, as noted above, a skunk is able to effect entrance
into a house. This, however, did not happen in 1909, the
year which furnished the statistics given below. It
should be clearly understood that in the statistics which
follow all ‘‘eliminations’’ occurred in the daytime, when
color and pattern might presumably be of some signifi-
cance.
It is my purpose to present some statisties, involving
a relatively large number of individuals, regarding the
relation of color pattern to the elimination of chickens
by all of these natural enemies taken together. These
statisties cover the hatching season of 1909 in which
chickens were on the range, and subject to the attacks
of enemies, from about April 1 to October 1. Birds of
all colors and patterns ran together on the same open,
turf-covered range, and, without regard to color or pat-
tern, all were equally exposed to attack by all sorts of
No. 530] RELATIVE CONSPICUOUSNESS OF FOWLS 113
natural enemies. The total number of chickens involved
was 3,345. An account of the way in which the statistics
were obtained is necessary. All of these 3,343 chicks
were of known pedigree, and a numbered aluminum
leg band was attached to each one when it was re-
moved from the incubator in which it was hatched. A
record was made of each chick’s number. This num-
bered leg band was worn by the chick throughout its
life. Whenever a chick died a record of this fact was
made opposite its entry in the pedigree book. Dur-
ing the season every living chick on the range was
handled over twice and its leg band number checked back
with the original entry, and at the end of the season all
chicks remaining on the range were checked up.
Now it is clear that dead chicks which come to autopsy
will fall into two general classes: on the one hand, those
that died from one or another of the many diseases which
make the poultry raiser’s life a burden in the springtime,
and on the other hand, those killed by some enemy but not
carried away. In the latter class will fall the great ma-
jority killed by rats, some killed by skunks, and a fair
proportion of those killed by foxes. Usually a direct
record can be obtained for practically none of the chicks
killed by predaceous birds and cats. In 1909 we have
reason to believe that substantially all unrecorded deaths
were caused by predaceous birds.
At the end of the season when the birds are checked
up all will be accounted for as either (a) living, (b) dead
from some disease, (c) killed by recorded enemies, or
finally (d) missing. Of the missing birds there are two
classes again. On the one hand are those killed by ene-
mies which carried the carcases away, and on the other
hand, are those that through accident lost their leg bands,
and hence, while present in the flock, can not be entered
upon the records. With the methods of work in use here
the number of the latter class has always been small.
Unfortunately I am not able to give exact figures for such
birds for the season of 1909. It can be stated with cer-
114 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
tainty, however, that they did not exceed 25. Of this
number that lost their leg bands 8 were known to be self-
colored birds.
There were on the range in 1909 three classes of birds,
in respect to color pattern. These were (a) barred birds,
bearing either the pattern of the pure Barred Plymouth
Rock, or a modification of it;* (b) solid (self-colored)
black birds, resulting from the cross Cornish Indian
Game 3 X Barred Rock 2; and (c) pure Cornish Indian
Games of the dark variety which may for present pur-
poses be classed as self-colored birds.
With this somewhat lengthy explanation of the com-
position of the flock and method of keeping records in
hand we may proceed to examine the statistics of. elimi-
nation. In compiling these statistics the blank birds
which lost their bands (ca. 25) have been included with
the eliminated. This does not affect the conclusions in
any way because of the facts that (1) the number of such
birds is so small relatively, and (2) the proportion of
self-colored to barred birds among those which lost their
bands is relatively higher than in the general population
from which they came. The significance of this point
will be apparent as we proceed.
We have the following figures, it being understood that
‘eliminated’? means ‘‘killed by natural enemies’’ with
the inclusion of the small number of birds which lost their
bands as noted above.
Total number of birds = 3,343.
Number of barred birds = 3,007.
Number of self-colored birds = 336.
Total number of eliminated birds = 325.
Number of barred birds eliminated = 290.
Number of self-colored birds eliminated = 35.
The above figures include all eliminated birds, those
killed by recorded and unrecorded enemies together. If
we take only those killed by recorded enemies, which
*See Pearl, R., and Surface, F. M., ‘‘On the Inheritance of the Barred
Color Pattern in Poultry,’’ Arch. f. Entwicklungsmech., Bd. XXX, Fest-
Band fiir Roux), pp. 45-61, 1910.
No. 530] RELATIVE CONSPICUOUSNESS OF FOWLS 115
under the conditions prevailing on the plant in 1909
means practically those killed by rats, we have:
Number of barred birds eliminated by recorded ene-
mies — 68.
Number of self-colored birds eliminated by recorded
enemies = 6. .
From these figures the following proportions are de-
rived: Of the total number of birds 10.05 per cent. were
self-colored.
Of all the eliminated birds 10.77 per cent. were self-
colored.
If we consider by themselves the birds eliminated by
recorded enemies, we have:
Of the birds eliminated by recorded enemies 8.11 per
cent. were self-colored.
Putting the figures in another way we have:
Of the self-colored birds 10.42 per cent. were elimi-
nated by all enemies.
Of the barred birds 9.64 per cent. were eliminated by
all enemies.
Of the self-colored birds 1.79 per cent. were eliminated
by recorded enemies (chiefly rats).
Of the barred birds 2.26 per cent. were eliminated by
recorded enemies.
Of the self-colored birds 8.63 per cent. were eliminated
by unrecorded enemies (chiefly predaceous birds).
Of the barred birds 7.38 per cent. were eliminated by
unrecorded enemies (chiefly predaceous birds).
The conclusion to be drawn from these figures, which
involve a large number of individuals, is obvious. It is
that the relative inconspicuousness of the barred color
pattern afforded its possessors no great or striking pro-
tection against elimination by natural enemies, during the
season (April 1 to October 1) of 1909 on the poultry
range of the Maine Experimental Station. It might be
objected that if the eliminations by predaceous birds
alone could be separately recorded it would then be found
that against this class of enemies the barred pattern had
116 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
great protective value, as suggested by Davenport’s fig-
ures. This, however, can hardly be the case in the pres-
ent statistics since if it be assumed that predaceous birds
killed relatively few barred chicks and relatively many
self-colored, then it must also be assumed that the other
unrecorded enemies showed a preference for barred
birds, since with all enemies taken together substantially
equal proportions of both kinds of birds were eliminated.
In other words, if we assume a selective elimination in the
case of predaceous birds, we are obliged to assume an
equal and opposite selective elimination on the part of
other unrecorded enemies. There is no evidence on which
such an assumption could be based.
These figures, of course, cover only one year’s expe-
rience, and are in no wise conclusive, but general obser-
vation indicates strongly that essentially the same re-
sult would be shown in other years if it were possible
to tabulate the figures. Unfortunately neither the
records of 1908 nor 1910 can be used for this purpose.
In 1908 there were almost no self-colored birds on the
range. In 1910, owing to the location of the houses
on the range and other circumstances which can not
be gone into in detail, thieves were active on the plant
and the birds taken were not a random sample of the
flock in respect to color. 1909 was a fortunate year
for such a study as the present one. The thieves con-
fined their attention to adult stock on a part of the plant |
away from the chicks, and left the latter strictly alone.
Definitely controlled observations regarding the elim-
ination of animals by natural enemies, covering a consid-
erable number of individuals and anything like a com-
plete range of enemies, are exceedingly scarce. The
whole question of the interplay of factors in the ‘‘strug-
gle for existence” constantly going on in the organic
world has been discussed very largely from the a priori
standpoint, throughout the whole period since the ap-
pearance of the ‘‘ Origin of Species.” The ‘‘rabbit with
his legs a little longer,’’ the ‘‘fox with the little keener
No.530] RELATIVE CONSPICUOUSNESS OF FOWLS ia
sense of smell,’’ the ‘‘bird of dull colors which har-
monized with the background,” et id genus omne, have
been made to do valiant service.
Ever since the first description, made by the Nurem-
berg miniature painter Rösel in 1746,° of a case of pre-
sumably protective coloration, we have been prone to
argue that because an organism was colored or formed in
such a way as to be inconspicuous it was, therefore, nec-
essarily protected from attack by its enemies to a greater
or less degree. The logic of such reasoning is flawless.
It ought to be protected. But a conclusion may be per-
fectly logical and still not true. In the study of pro-
tective coloration, including mimicry, it is essential that a
discovery that an organism is to human eyes inconspicu-
ous or not readily distinguishable from some other or-
ganism shall not be considered the final goal. Rather let
such a discovery always be supplemented by an experi-
mental or observational determination of whether this
inconspicuousness really helps the organism, in actual
practise, in avoiding elimination by natural enemies. It
is worth noting that more than one recent critical stu-
dent of these problems who has applied this method has
brought to light results essentially similar in their gen-
eral import to those set forth here.’
*Cf. Müller, H., ‘‘Schiitzende Aehnlichkeit einheimischer Insekten,’’
Senei, Jahrg. III, Heft 8, p. 114, 1879.
. for mmnte the chapter on ‘‘Colouration of Organisms’’ in Dewar
and Finn ’s ‘*The Making of Species’? (New York, seyi , and still more
recently the thorough critical study by Punnett on ‘‘ Mimicry in Ceylon
Butterflies, with a Suggestion as to the Nature of Polymorphism’? (Spolia
Zeylonica, Vol. VII, Part XXV, September, 1910, pp. 1-24, 2 plates).
SOME CONSIDERATIONS CONCERNING THE
PHOTOGENIC FUNCTION IN MARINE
ORGANISMS
F. ALEX. McDERMOTT
WASHINGTON, D. C.
In two very interesting papers, Professor C. C.
Nutting’ has brought forth evidence tending to show that
in oceanic depths below the range of penetration of the
sun’s rays, there exists a dim, phosphorescent light, quite
general in its distribution, radiated from various photo-
genic organisms of the abyssal regions, and having a defi-
nite and valuable significance for the life of animal forms
at these depths.
That such a light actually exists is scarcely to be sanely
doubted, in view of the evidence of the deep-sea explora-
tions which have added so much to the knowledge of
oceanic conditions. And that it has a purpose in the life
of the forms inhabiting those portions of the ocean beds
where it exists, seems to the writer equally undeniable,
unless we accept Emerson’s poetic reasoning that
“ Beauty is its own excuse for being.”
Just what its purpose may be in hermaphroditic, simple
forms not provided with definite organs of sight, and
indeed also in many higher forms, may, of course, still be
a legitimate subject for investigation and consideration.
Professor Nutting’s remarks have been of special
interest to the writer in connection with some recent
studies made by the latter on the general subject of bio-
photogenesis, with special reference to the: Lampyride.*
*(a) ‘*The Utility of Phosphorescence in Deep-sea Animals,’’ page
Nar., Vol. 3, 1899, pp. 792-799; (b) ‘‘The Theory of Abyssal Light,’’
Pros. VII Dano. Zool., advance reprint, 1910.
2 Amer. Journ. Physiol., 1910. Vol. 27, pp. 122-151; Canad. Entomol.,
1910, Vol. 42, pp. 357-363; Popular Sci. Monthly, 1910, Vol. 77, pp. 114-
121.
118
No. 530] THE PHOTOGENIC FUNCTION 119
The coloring and photogenicity of the organisms found
in the depths of the sea show some similarities to the
corresponding features of life on land.
Take the family Buprestide, of the genus Coleoptera,
of the order of insects. The insects of this family are
probably the most brilliantly colored of any of the beetles,
and are colored quite as brilliantly as the insects of any
other genus. The colors cover a quite wide range of
metallic, polished, glistening greens, blues, reds, coppery
and golden; many of the smaller species wear more
somber dark blues, browns and blacks, but as a class they
are brilliant and showy. Obviously, these colors would
be invisible in the absence of light, and need a light of
considerable intensity to bring out their full value. Now
we find that almost without exception these Coleoptera
are diurnal; they attain their maximum activity during
the brightest daylight, and fly but little at night. But one
species has been reported to be luminous, and unless this
report is pretty definitely confirmed there is grave reason
to doubt its authenticity.
Now let us consider the Lampyride: The beetles of this
family of almost eleven hundred species are in the great °
majority of instances, luminous; the non-luminous species
form a decided minority of the true Lampyride. They
are also, in the great majority of cases, mainly nocturnal
in habit, hiding out of the sunlight during the day; those
species which are markedly diurnal in habit are also those
which are non-luminous, or in which the luminosity is
relatively slight. In coloration, they show none of the
bright metallic, showy colors of the Buprestide; black,
gray, brown and yellow-brown predominate, with occa-
sional red markings, yellow stripes and indistinct lines
and spots. In them, the photogenic function possesses at
least two definite significances: (1) it is an adjunct of the
sexual organism of the insect, rendered of value to them
by reason of their nocturnal habits, and (2) it has a pro-
tective value. In the larve it might also be considered
to have an aggressive value, in attracting the snails. etc.,
120 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
on which they feed, but this argument would not hold for
the imagos, which are much more active.
Most of the above statements apply with equal force
to the Pyrophorini, the luminous Elateride of the tropics;
these insects are herbivorous, however, and the aggres-
sive significance does not hold for them.
It would seem, then, very probable that similar condi-
tions obtain in the abyssal region, with its dim weird,
phosphorescent light. The light produced by the Lam-
pyride has recently been shown by Ives and Coblentz? to
have the extremely high radiant efficiency of 96.5 per
cent., against 4 per cent. for the best artificial illuminant.
The spectrum of this light is a continuous band extending
from the upper red to the lower blue with a maximum
intensity in the yellow-green. This spectrum is of wider
range than that of the sea-forms cited by Nutting,* but
can hardly be of less efficiency. The light of the Lam-
pyride is generally stated to be yellow, or greenish; there
are some slight variations among different species, but in
the main the lights are similar; it seems that a great many
of the marine organisms also give a light of similar
tone. Therefore colors whose wave-lengths are within
the limits of those of the emitted lights of these forms,
would be distinguishable in such a biophotogenic light.
Although we do not yet know the full details of the
process of the production of light by living forms, it is
not too much to assume that Nature has developed it to
a point very near to the maximum possible efficiency, and
if such is the case, the luminous oceanic forms could emit
a very penetrating illuminating radiation with very little
expenditure of energy, and though this light might not be
of any considerable intensity, as judged by our eyes, it
could undoubtedly serve as quite a useful light to the
large-eyed denizens of the deep.
The photogenicity of Salpa, Noctiluca and other such
simple forms, which are without definite organs of sight,
* Bulletin of the U. S. Bureau of Standards, 1910, Vol. 6, pp. 321-336.
t Supra b, page 10.
No. 530] THE PHOTOGENIC FUNCTION 121
presents other difficulties. It is not, however, necessary
to the faculty of perception of light that definite organs
should exist. It is a quite well-known fact that certain
worms, bacteria, and other low organisms are able to
detect ultra-violet rays to which the human organism is
wholly without sensible response, and yet these actino-
tropic (if a coined word may be pardoned) forms show
no definite organs such as might be adapted to the receiv-
ing and recording of the very short wave-lengths of ultra-
violet light. If, then, existing organisms are known to be
affected by ultra-violet rays for which they have no
special sense-organs, it is certainly logical to assume that
they and other forms may also be susceptible to the
longer and more easily discerned wave-lengths of visible
light—especially when those wave-lengths comprise
mainly the rays possessing the highest illuminating effect
—and without the necessity for the existence of ‘‘eyes’’
or other definite light-receiving organs. As a matter of
fact Noctiluca, and numerous other marine organisms
have been shown to be susceptible to light, although
they possess no specific organs for this function so far as
we have been able to make out.
Another consideration as to the purpose of the light
presents itself here. We must consider the nature of the
medium in which these creatures live. Water does not
lend itself as readily as does air to the diffusion of the
particles which produce the sensation of smell; and hence
while odors, or speaking more properly, from the stand-
point of marine organisms, flavors or tastes undoubtedly
exist in the ocean water, they could not, on account of the
water currents, lack of diffusion, etc., serve the purpose
which the odors of land animals serve of giving indication
of the presence and location of the creatures. It there-
fore would not be unreasonable to assume that in the gre-
garious simple luminous marine forms, the photogenic
function takes the place to some extent of the animal
odors of land forms.
To sum up, then:
122 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
From analogy to terrestrial forms, the photogenicity
and coloration of marine organisms must play some
essential part in their life histories;
The absence of definite organs for the reception of the
radiations of light may not necessarily indicate that the
forms from which they are absent are insensible to these
radiations;
' The photogenic function in certain simple marine
forms may replace the olfactory function of terrestrial
forms, to some extent.
SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION
COMPUTING CORRELATION IN CASES WHERE SYM-
METRICAL TABLES ARE COMMONLY USED
In studying the assortative mating of Paramecium I have
found occasion to compute the correlation in many cases for
which double or symmetrical tables are commonly employed.
I have found that in such cases the use of symmetrical tables
is quite unnecessary and the computations can be performed
with much less labor without them. It will, therefore, be worth
while to show how the use of symmetrical tables can be avoided.
When the two objects to be compared are alike, as when the
two members, A and B, of conjugating pairs are examined,
evidently either A or B might be entered in either the horizontal
rows or the vertical columns of the correlation table. In such
cases, the mean computed from the rows, and that computed
from the columns are likely to differ, depending on which indi-
viduals were entered in the rows, which in the columns. If, for
example, the larger individual is always entered in the vertical
columns, the smaller in the horizontal rows, as in Table II, then
the means and standard deviations of the two sets will differ
much. As a result the coefficient of correlation computed in
the usual way will show varying values, depending on how the
pairs are entered in the table. From the collection shown in
Table II we can by varying the method of entering the pairs
get coefficients of correlation varying from 0.132 to 0.523.
Under such conditions Pearson (1901), Pearl (1907) and
others enter each pair twice, once in the rows, once in the col-
umns. This gives a ‘‘symmetrical’’ table, in which the sums
of either the rows or the columns include all the individuals.
This method is theoretically correct, since each individual func-
tions both as ‘‘principal’’? and as ‘‘mate’’; the coefficient of
correlation computed from such symmetrical tables is the cor-
rect one. But such symmetrical tables are cumbersome and
involve much labor. Pearl (1907) gives a formula by which the
same coefficient can be obtained without making symmetrical
tables, by computations involving the two means and standard
123
124 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
deviations and the coefficient of correlation found in the usual
way.
But it is possible to find the correct coefficient of correlation
from ordinary tables, and with much less labor than by either
the use of symmetrical tables or by the method given by Pearl.
To see how this can be done, it is well to examine a symmetrical
table prepared for computation of the coefficient of correlation,
such as is given in Table I. Here the large figures give the
frequencies, while the subscripts in smaller type give the prod-
ucts of the deviations from the approximate mean (37). There
are two main points to be considered: (1) How the quantity
30311323 3.4/3 5/3 63 (7/3 8/3 940/41 2143/4445
30 ; k$ 2
31 421 224 4
32 o 1
33 sel y. 32 12
34 2b Bg 2a 13} lf |13 2e |l2 12
35 ld | la 24® 3344|54 |36 23
36 le 13| 32 7 |3| 54 63 30
3 Ht 2-47 ane -
38 la 54 3:|7 22| 5a 5a] 6s| le 18440
39 544 |22| 2 26| 28| Ap 19
4 34 | 36] 6a d | 53| 26| Bq 24 214 la| 2h JBL
41 224120 Sal 2e) 2226 14
42| 135 25 J |65| 29 As lab 17
43 id iLp iL 3
44 lak 22 3
4 ls l
2 |4 |1 1212838033/4019 1114/117/3 |3|1 R50
TABLE I. SEET CORRELATION TABLE FOR THE ag OF 125 PAIRS
OF Paramecium au each individual orga ip twice, once in the vertical
columns, once in hes fad aces rows. (Unit of AE 4 microns.)
(xy) is to be correctly obtained; (2) how the mean and stan-
dard deviation are to be correctly obtained.
1. With regard to the first point, it will be observed that such
a table is divisible by a diagonal passing from the upper left-
hand corner to the lower right-hand corner into two halves which
are in all respects duplicates as regards both frequencies and
deviation products. (The frequencies through which the diag-
onal line passes are to be divided evenly between the two halves.)
It is evident, therefore, that if we use only one of these halves
No.530] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 125
of the table in getting the sum S(wy) we shall get just one half
the sum we should get by using the whole table; the sum for the
whole table would therefore be obtained simply by doubling this
half-sum. Now, if in place of making a symmetrical table we
enter always the larger member of each pair in the vertical
columns, the smaller in the horizontal rows, we shall get a table
that is precisely one of these duplicate halves of the symmetrical
table; this will be seen by comparing Tables I and II. The
quantity (xy) from such a table will then be just half that
from the symmetrical table; it may then be doubled, and the
further computation will be identical with that for the symmet-
30, 31 32 33, 34 35, 86.37 38, 33, 40,41, 42,43, 44, 45,
A B C
30, ] L 2 2
31 1, 1, ar ie 4
$2, wp 1
33, 2,6 22| ls 32 Epa 21/12
34, 1, | 26 }15] 4 | Is Qs} | ded [9] 3422
35, 2, |3.|4 || |3 | fiq 6 2s
36, z 2:114 |3: | 52 | 63 we 23| 7 |30
38, 2, |22| 53| 54| 6s| 16| |1s{22/18 |40
39, Lel 2e | 20} Re | 7}a2}19
40, ls | 22] 215] ne] 2a] | 8/23 |31
41, he 1]13 |14
42, i {| p e | n?
43, ; g 3| 3
i x ETE 3| 3
a ee Ske es NEE
45, zis
8 23 6 7 ele 12231916 3 3 1J.
LE II. THE SAME TABLE SHOWN IN TABLE I, SAVE THAT EACH INDIVIDUAL
ENTERED BUT ONCE—the larger member of the pair in the vertical column, the
smaller in the horizontal row.
rical tables. Or (as we shall see) this half sum, which forms
the dividend in obtaining the coefficient of correlation, may be
divided by a number half as great as in the symmetrical tables,
giving the same result.
It will further be seen that if in place of entering all pairs in
the same way—the larger members in the columns, the smaller
in the rows—we enter some or all of them differently, this will
make no difference in the result. If in Table II, for example,
the pair showing measurements 44 by 34 were entered in the
reverse way, it would fall, no longer in the right upper quad-
126 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
rant, but in the left lower quadrant, at the point marked X.
Here, as examination will show, it would receive the same sub-
script that it has now, and would count as negative, exactly as
it now does. Again, suppose the pair 36 by 31 were similarly
transposed ; it would still fall in the left upper quadrant, at the
point marked Y, where it would receive the same subscript as at
present and count as positive, just as at present. And so of all
other cases; the value of a pair is not altered in any way by
changes in the way it is entered in the table. In making the
table, therefore, the pairs may be entered only once and quite at
random, or in any way that is convenient.
2. With regard to the mean and standard deviation, the ap-
parent advantage of symmetrical tables is that they give us the
actual mean of all the individuals; it is to this mean that our
correlation must refer. But this actual mean ean readily be
obtained from the tables in which each pair is entered but once,
in any way that happens to be convenient. It is merely neces-
sary to add together the sums of the rows and of the columns
of the table. Thus in Table II the number of individuals having
the length 35 is not 17 (sum from the row beginning.with 35),
nor 6 (sum from the column headed 35), but 23 (sum from both
the row and the column) and so for all other classes. It will be
well to illustrate by an example certain of the steps in the com-
putation. Table II shows a correlation table of single entry, as
prepared for computation of the coefficients of correlation and
other constants.
After finding the sums of the rows (given in column A at the
right) and of the columns (given in B, underneath), we place
the latter sums (B) by the side of A, in the proper places (as
at B’), then add the two sets, giving the sums shown in the
column C at the right. These are the same sums that we should
get from a symmetrical table; adding these we get the total
number of individuals (250 in Table II). Now from this
column C we find the approximate mean in the usual way; it
lies in this case at the length 37 (with 38 individuals). Through
the column and the row headed 37 we therefore draw the lines
serving as axes of reference in finding the correlation- We now
find the correlation in the usual way. In so doing (1) we make
use always of the sums in the column C in finding mean, stan-
dard deviation, ete. (2) We use for both horizontal and ver-
tical axes of reference in computing the correlation in all cases
No.530] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 17
a row and column with the same heading (37 in this case).
(3) We employ the ordinary frequencies in the body of the
table in getting the sum of the deviations of (xy) for use in the
formula for the coefficient of correlation, just as in ordinary cor-
relation tables. The computation of the coefficient is of course
(as in the case of symmetrical tables) considerably simpler
than in the usual case, since we have but one standard deviation
and one quantity d to deal with.
Only one other point in the computation is peculiar, requiring
careful observance. If we let n signify the number of pairs
and N the number of individuals (so that N = 2n), then in find-
ing the mean, standard deviation, and coefficient of variation,
we use N (just as in symmetrical tables), so that the formula for
the standard deviation is
= (OD a 0nk
But in getting the coefficient of correlation, the sum S(zy) :
which we get from our unsymmetrical table is just half what we
_ should get from a symmetrical table (as we have already seen).
Therefore, to make the computations identical with those for
symmetrical tables, we must either double this sum in the for-
mula for the coefficient of correlation, or what is simpler, in
place of doubling this sum we may halve the number by which
we divide this sum, that is, we may use n in place of N. us
the formula for the coefficient of correlation becomes by this
method
S 1
= (=e — «) x a
This method lends itself readily to the valuable procedure
recently described by Harris (1910) for finding the coefficient
of correlation, the only point requiring careful attention being
the fact that in finding the standard deviation we must use
N (number of individuals), while in the formula for the coeffi-
cient of correlation we must use n (number of pairs). The
present plan is likewise well adapted for finding the coefficient
of correlation by the ‘‘difference method’’ (see Harris, 1909).
If the method we have described is used, the pairs are entered
in the table but once, in any way that is convenient; the correla-
tion computed will always be the same, and identical with that
from symmetrical tables. It avoids the cumbersome and labo-
128 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Von. XLV
rious symmetrical table; at the same time it involves much less
labor than the method given by Pearl. When there are many
tables to be computed, the amount of drudgery it saves is great.
PAPERS CITED
1909. Harris, J. A. A Short Method of Calculating the Coefficient of
Correlation i in the Case of Integral Variates, Biometrika, 7, 21
1910. Harris, J. A. The Arithmetic of the Product Moment Method of
Caleulating the Coefficient of Correlation. Amer. pate 44,
iS)
693-699.
1907. Pearl, R. A Biometrical Study of Conjugation in Paramecium.
Biometrika, 5, 213-297.
1901. Pearson, K. Mathematical Contributions to the Theory of Evolu-
iors. On the Principle of Homotyposis and its Relation to
Heredity, to the Variability of the Individual-and to that of the
Race. Philos. Trans., A, 197, 285-379.
THE JOHNS HOPKINS UNIVERSITY.
H. S. JENNINGS.
The Anatomical Laboratory
of Charles H. Ward
189 West Avenue, Rochester, N. Y.
= OUR HUMAN SKELETONS are selected specimens scientifically
prepa: They are undoubtedly the finest and strongest
skeletons obtainable, and are purchased by the leading Medical and
Literary Colleges, Schools, Surgeons, ete. We make a number of special
skeletons for demonstrating dislocations, muscular areas, anthropometric
landmarks, muscles, etc.
The mounting of the articulations permits movements as in life.
Strength and rigidity are secured by the use of a special bronze wire of
— tensile strengt and great eee 1o to oxidation. Portability
ease of d y our nickeled steel clutch stand-
ard which is a great protection as well.
These are entirely set up, carefully wrapped, and
with detailed en for omk and handling. Our Catalogue
gives further detai
OUR ste OF TYPES OF VERTEBRATES are large
‘specimens, principally of Cassini as mounted in characteristic
poses on polished og nickel plated Ł
es We offer a Pegs § ` r ee NON; lleges.
_ ANATOMICAL MODELS _
anatomical models i in 1 great vi variety. These have been purchased b by many
a ‘Schools and Universities. TI ead, brain,
2 a aoa as organs, ete., of most |
oe of which we have large half tones. ‘These ERREF on no duty, no trans-
p , no middlemen’s s profits, but are sold direct, at very moderate |
; when needed
.
i
prices, ouu
We: aso make BIOLOGICAL MODELS of the forms s commonly
e laboratory. :
The American Naturalist
A Monthly Journal, established in 1867, Devoted to the A
sca SEE etches. Aei a Ooa Ente aad
of the Biological Sciences
Heredity
CONTENTS OF THE AUGUST NUMBER
: Chromosomes and Heredity. Professor T. H. MORGAN.,
3 Spiegler’s “White Melanin” ey oneness ae
: Recessive White. Dr. Ross AIKEN GoRTNER.
‘Shorter Articles and Correspondence: A
Š _ Contribution to Our Knowledge of Wasps:
Tia ak Tela Heredity, Dr, W. J. Serran.
. Pickwickian
Professor
CONTENTS OF THE SEPTEMBER NUMBER
Nuclear Phenomena of Sexual mopar in the
Dr, BRAD: Moore Dav:
Nuclear Phenomena of Sexual aera in Fungi,
PROFESSOR R. A. HARPER.
The Pose of the Sauropodous Dinosaurs. Dr, W. D.
MATTHEW.
Shorter Articles and Discussion : Evolution without Iso-
and Literature imal Structure and Habits,
AA G. H. PARKER, Plant Physiology, ©. L.
CONTENTS OF THE NOVEMBER NUMBER
eee of Skin Pigmenta tation in Man. Geamkues S
B. DAVENPORT.
MARCH, 1911
The American Naturalist
MSS. intended for publication and books, ete., intended for review should
sent to the Editor of THE AMERICAN NATURALIST, Garrison-on-Hudso n, New York
Articles containing research work bearing on ar e " iph evolu-
tion are ph ea welcome, and will be given preference in publica
e hundrea reprints Splat are sippii to authors m of charge.
Further’ reprints will = supplied at
asain should be sent to the publishers. The
subscription price is y> dollars a year. — postage is fifty cents and
postage -five cents additional. The narge for single copies is
thirty-five cents. The advertising rates are Four Dollars for a pa
o THE SCIENCE PRESS
i Lancaster, Pa. _ Garrison, N. Y.
ook EW YORK: Sub-Station 84
Entered as tter, April 2, 1908, at the Post Office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act of
; : of March 3, 1879.
x
THE BULLETIN—Porta in Ethnolograpn. | MARINE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY
ical and Pre-historie io Specimens, Books on Natural. | Ser oE ARTEN nt lr nimi
“pores repre ape e e ney
> BERA &
Prva: ed of Algae,
K Liverworts and ‘oases.
4 Duke Sty Adetphi—London—England | For price lists information, ad
GEORGE S GRAY. Curator, Woods. Hole, Mass.
Sep oR ee cree
| z r ambridge > University Press.
d
TE ON, M.A cll. Dicter ot thie John tombs T
aaier ea - PUNNETT 1 M-A., Professor of ot Biology in the Un t
THE
AMERICAN NATURALIST
VoL. XLV March, 1911 No. 531
THE GENOTYPE CONCEPTION OF HEREDITY!
PROFESSOR W. JOHANNSEN
UNIVERSITY OF COPENHAGEN
Brotoey has evidently borrowed the terms ‘‘heredity”’
and ‘‘inheritance’’ from every-day language, in which the
meaning of these words is the ‘‘transmission’’ of money
or things, rights or duties—or even ideas and knowledge
—from one person to another or to some others: the
‘theirs’’ or ‘‘inheritors.’’
_ The transmission of properties—these may be things
owned or peculiar qualities—from parents to their
children, or from more or less remote ancestors to their
descendants, has been regarded as the essential point in
the discussion of heredity, in biology as in jurisprudence.
Here we have nothing to do with the latter; as to biology,
the students of this science have again and again tried to
conceive or ‘‘explain’’ the presumed transmission of
general or peculiar characters and qualities ‘‘inherited’’
from parents or more remote ancestors. The view of
natural inheritance as realized by an act of transmission,
viz., the transmission of the parent’s (or ancestor’s)
personal qualities to the progeny, is the most naive and
oldest conception of heredity. We find it clearly devel-
oped by Hippocrates, who suggested that the different
parts of the body may produce substances which join in
the sexual organs, where reproductive matter is formed.
* Address before the American Society of Naturalists, December, 1910.
129
130 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
Darwin’s hypothesis of ‘‘pangenesis’’ is in this point
very consistent with the Hippocratic view, the personal
qualities of the parent or the ancestor in question being
the heritage.
Also the Lamarckian view as to the heredity of
“acquired characters’’ is in accordance with those old
conceptions. The current popular definition of heredity
as a certain degree of resemblance between parents and
offspring, or, generally speaking, between ancestors and
descendants, bears the stamp of the same conceptions,
and so do the modern ‘‘biometrical’’ definitions of hered-
ity, e. g., as ‘‘the degree of correlation between the
abmodality of parent and offspring.’’ In all these cases
we meet with the conception that the personal qualities of
any individual organism are the true heritable elements
or traits!
This may be characterized as the ‘‘transmission-con-
ception” of heredity or as the view of apparent heredity.
Only superficial instruction can be gained by working on
this basis. Certainly, medical and biological statisticians
have in modern times been able to make elaborate state--
patti of great interest for insurance purposes, for the
‘‘eugenics-movement’’ and so on. But no profound
insight into the biological problem of heredity can be
gained on this basis, for the transmission-conception of
heredity represents exactly the reverse of the real facts,
just as the famous Stahlian theory of ‘‘phlogiston’’ was
an expression diametrically opposite to the chemical
reality. The personal qualities of any individual organ-
ism do not at all cause the qualities of its offspring; but
the qualities of both ancestor and descendant are in quite
the same manner determined by the nature of the ‘‘sexual
substances’’—i. e., the gametes—from which they have
developed. Personal qualities are then the reactions of
the gametes joining to form a zygote; but the nature of
the gametes is not determined by the personal qualities
of the parents or ancestors in question. This is ued
modern view of heredity.
No. 531] GENOTYPE CONCEPTION OF HEREDITY 131
The main result of all true analytical experiments in
questions concerning genetics is the upsetting of the
transmission-conception of heredity, and the two differ-
ent ways of genetic research: pure line breeding as well
as hybridization after Mendel’s model, have in that
respect led to the same point of view, the ‘‘genotype-
conception’? as we may call the conception of heredity
just now sketched.
Here we can not trace the historical evolution of the
ideas concerning heredity, not even in the last ten years,
but it must be stated as a fact that a very great number of
the terms used by the modern biological writers have been
created under the auspices of the transmission-concep-
tion, and that perhaps the greater number of botanists
and zoologists are not yet emancipated from that old con-
ception. Even convinced Mendelians may occasionally
be caught using such words as ‘‘transmission’’ and other
now obsolete terms.
The science of genetics is in a transition period, becom-
ing an exact science just as the chemistry in the times of
Lavoisier, who made the balance an indispensable imple-
ment in chemical research.
The ‘‘genotype-conception,’? as I have called the
modern view of heredity, differs not only from the old
‘‘transmission-conception’’? as above mentioned, but it
differs also from the related hypothetical views of Galton,
Weismann and others, who with more or less effectiveness
tried to expel the transmission-idea, having thus the great
merit of breaking the ground for the setting in of more
unprejudiced inquiries. Galton, in his admirable little
paper of 1875, and Weismann, in his long series of fasci-
nating but dialectic publications, have suggested that the
elements responsible for inheritance (the elements of
Galton’s ‘‘stirp’? or of Weismann’s ‘‘Keimplasma’’)
involve the different organs or tissue-groups of the indi-
Vidual developing from the zygote in question. And
Weismann has furthermore built up an elaborate hypoth-
esis of heredity, suggesting that discrete particles of
132 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vor. XLV
the chromosomes are ‘‘bearers’’ of special organizing
functions in the mechanism of ontogenesis, a chromatin-
particle in the nucleus of a gamete being in some way the
representative of an organ or a group of tissues.
These two ideas: that ‘‘elements’’ in the zygote corre-
spond to special organs, and that discrete particles of the
chromosomes are ‘‘bearers’’ of special parts of the whole
inheritance in question are neither corollaries of, nor
premises for, the stirp- or genotype-conception. Those
special ideas may have some interest as expressions of
the searching mind, but they have no support in experi-
ence; the first of them is evidently erroneous, the second
a purely speculative morphological view of heredity with-
out any suggestive value.
The genotype-conception of the present day, initiated
by Galton and Weismann, but now revised as an expres-
sion of the insight won by pure line breeding and Mendel-
ism, is in the least possible degree a speculative concep-
tion. Of all the Weismannian armory of notions and
categories it may use nothing. It is a well-established
fact that language is not only our servant, when we wish
to express—or even to conceal—our thoughts, but that it
may also be our master, overpowering us by means of the
notions attached to the current words. This fact is the
reason why it is desirable to create a new terminology in
all cases where new or revised conceptions are being
developed. Old terms are mostly compromised by their
_ application in antiquated or erroneous theories and
systems, from which they carry splinters of inadequate
ideas, not always harmless to the developing insight.
Therefore I have proposed the terms ‘‘gene’’ and
‘‘genotype’’ and some further terms, as ‘‘phenotype’’
and ‘‘biotype,’’ to be used in the science of genetics. The
‘‘gene’’ is nothing but a very applicable little word, easily
combined with others, and hence it may be useful as an
expression for the ‘‘unit-factors,’’ ‘‘elements”’ or ‘‘allelo-
morphs” in the gametes, demonstrated by modern
Mendelian researches. A ‘‘genotype’’ is the sum total of
No. 531] GENOTYPE CONCEPTION OF HEREDITY 133
all the ‘‘genes’’ in a gamete or in a zygote. When a
monohybrid is formed by cross fertilization, the ‘‘ geno-
type’’ of this F,-organism is heterozygotic in one single
point and the ‘‘genotypes’’ of the two ‘‘genodifferent”’
gametes in question differ in one single point from each
other.’
As to the nature of the ‘‘genes’’ it is as yet of no value
to propose any hypothesis; but that the notion ‘‘gene’’
covers a reality is evident from Mendelism. The Men-
delian workers have the great merit of being prudent in
their speculations. In full accordance with this restraint
—a quite natural reaction against the morphologico-
phantastical speculations of the Weismann school—it
may be emphatically recommended to use the adjectival
term ‘‘genotypical’’ instead of the noun ‘‘genotype.’’
We do not know a ‘‘genotype,’’ but we are able to demon-
strate ‘‘genotypical’’ differences or accordances. Used
in these derivated ways the term ‘‘gene’’ and ‘‘geno-
type’’ will prejudice nothing. The very appropriate
German term ‘‘Reaktionsnorm’’ used by Woltereck is, as
may be seen, nearly synonymous with ‘‘genotype,’’ in
so far as the ‘‘Reaktionsnorm’’ is the sum total of the
potentialities of the zygotes in question. That these
potentialities are partly separable (‘‘segregating’’ after
hybridization) is adequately expressed by the ‘‘geno-
type’’ as composed of ‘‘genes.’’? The ‘‘Reaktionsnorm”’
emphasizes the diversity and still the unity in the
behavior of the individual organism; certainly, the partic-
ular organism is a whole, and its multiple varying reac-
tions are determined by its ‘‘genotype”’ interfering with
the totality of all incident factors, may it be external or
internal. Thence the notion ‘‘Reaktionsnorm’’ is fully
compatible with the genotype-conception.
The genotypes can be examined only by the qualities
and reactions of the organisms in question. Supposing
*They may therefore be characterized as ‘*mono-genodifferent’’; this
term and the further terms ** di-genodifferent’’ and so on, may or may not
be of any use.
134 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
that some organisms of identical genotypical constitution
are developing under different external conditions, then
these differences will produce more or less differences as
to the personal qualities of the individual organisms. By
simple inspection of series of different individuals it will
be quite impossible to decide if they have or have not the
same genotypical constitution—even if we know them to
be homozygotic.2 We may easily find out that the organ-
isms in question resemble each other so much that they
belong to the same ‘‘type’’ (in the current sense of this
word), or we may in other cases state that they present
a disparity so considerable that two or more different
‘‘types’’ may be discerned.
All ‘‘types’’ of organisms, distinguishable by direct
inspection or only by finer methods of measuring or
description, may be characterized as ‘‘phenotypes.”’
Certainly phenotypes are real things; the appearing (not
only apparent) ‘‘types’’ or ‘‘sorts’’ of organisms are
again and again the objects for scientific research. All
typical phenomena in the organic world are eo ipso
phenotypical, and the description of the myriads of
phenotypes as to forms, structures, sizes, colors and other
characters of the living organisms has been the chief aim
of natural history, which was ever a science of essentially
morphological-deseriptive character.
Morphology, supported by the huge collections of the
museums, has of course operated with phenotypes in its
speculations concerning phylogenetic questions. The
idea of evolution by continuous transitions from one
‘*type’’ to another must have imposed itself upon zoolo-
gists and botanists, because the varying external condi-
tions of life are often‘ shifting the phenotypes in very
fine gradations; but also—and that is an important point
—because there may always be found considerable geno-
typical differences hidden in apparently homogeneous
populations, exhibiting only one single ‘‘type’’? around
* Here we are not concerned with the question of variable dominance, ete.
*Not always, as Bateson has the merit of having emphasized.
No. 531] GENOTYPE CONCEPTION OF HEREDITY 135
which the individuals fluctuate. For the descriptive-
morphological view the manifestations of the phenotypes
in different generations are the main point, and here the
transmission-conception immediately announces itself.
Hence we may adequately define this conception as a
“*phenotype-conception’’ in opposition to the genotype-
conception.
As already stated, the genotype-conception has been
gained in two ways: pure line breeding and hybridization.
The first way leads to an analysis of the existing stocks
or populations, the second way may realize an analysis of
the genotypical constitution of the individuals. The
analysis of populations has its most obvious importance in
all such cases, where the phenotypes are quantitatively
characterized. Even where individuals with consider-
able genotypical differences co-exist, the population may
—by simple inspection or by statistical appreciation—seem
to exhibit only one phenotype, this being usually charac-
terized by the average measure of the individuals (dimen-
sions, weight, intensity of any quality, number of organs
and so on). This is due to the fluctuating variability
swamping all limits between the different special pheno-
types in question (see the diagram).
Populations of self-fertilizing organisms (several
cereals and beans, peas and others) have offered the
Starting point for pure line breeding as a scientific
method of research. A pure line may be defined as the
descendants from one single homozygotie organism, ex-
clusively propagating by self-fertilization. ‘‘Pure line’’
is a merely genealogical term, indicating nothing as to
the qualities of the individuals in question. A ‘‘line’’
ceases to be ‘‘pure’’ when hybridization (or even inter-
crossing) disturbs the continuity of self-fertilization.
From a population of homozygotic self-fertilizers
there can be started (isolated) as many pure lines as
there are fertile individuals—of course very many of
such pure lines will be quite identical in genotypical
constitution and might in reality belong to one and the
136
THE AMERICAN NATURALIST
[Vot. XLV
REREN
ARAS
Nae E
EEEN
Ses
SA Sd
case the beans enclosed in glass-
l are
ostly impos-
e ne to which it
gs.—The fiu tions about the average length (
pure lines as well as in the mix
the phenotype) within the
ed population show no characteristic difference.
No. 531] GENOTYPE CONCEPTION OF HEREDITY 137
same pure line if the genealogy was but sure. The
guarantee of the descendence is thus a main point in the
principle of pure lines. Identity of genotypical nature
is not at all a proof for identical genealogy: the wide-
spread confusion of ‘‘resemblance’’ with ‘‘ genealogical
relation’’ is the root of much evil—of which the statis-
tics of biometricians have given us some instances.
The isolation of pure lines from plant-populations has
been the instrument for gaining the conviction that se-
lection is not able to shift the nature of genotypes.
The well-known displacement of the ‘‘type’’ of a popu-
lation by selection—this displacement proceeding from
generation to generation in the direction indicated by
the selection—is due to the existence a priori of geno-
typical differences in such populations (see the dia-
gram). By selection a relatively great number of those
organisms, whose genotypical constitution is favorable
for the realization of the desired degrees of any char-
acter, will be saved for reproduction; hence the result
of the selection!
Within pure lines—if no mutation or other disturb-
ances have been at work—or within a population in
which there is no genotypical difference as to the char-
acter in question, selection will have no hereditary influ-
ence. This result has in recent years also been reached
by several other experimenters in genetics. Here I also
may recall the brilliant experiments of H. S. Jennings
with Paramecium, experiments which have been carried
out quite independently of my own researches and which
have been of great importance for the propagation
and support of the genotype-conception. The bearing
It can not be detected by inspection that the five upper diagrams represent
Phenotypes which are genotypically pgp te while the nethermost diagram
—the sum of the others—indicates a phenotype masking five others. That
‘eae five phenotypes all are genotypically different is known a priori in this
Special case, but it could not be discerned by simple inspection.—In the popula-
tion genotypical pital are combined with merely individual fluctuations ;
within the single pure line only such fluctuations are seen. Hence, while selec-
tion within a pure line will have no hereditary op spate it is evident that any
Selection in the populenion must shift or move the “type” of the progeny in
the direction of selecti
138 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
of these experiments has been attacked on the ground
that the Parameeciums multiply asexually; but this mat-
ter seems to me of no importance in the present case.
The experience that pure-line breeding of plants and
pure-strain cultures of micro-organisms, in full agree-
ment, demonstrate the non-adequacy of selection as a
genotype-shifting factor, is a circumstance of the great-
est interest. Also Woltereck’s experiments with
Daphnias, the important researches of Wolff, and the
highly interesting indications of C. O. Jensen as to
bacteria may be mentioned here as further supports for
this view. Quite recently Pearl has arrived at the same
conclusion as to the egg-production by fowls.
The famous Galtonian law of regression and its corol-
laries elaborated by Pearson pretended to have estab-
lished the laws of ‘‘ancestral influences’’ in mathemat-
ical terms. Now, by the pure-line explanation of the
well known action of selection in poly-genotypic popu-
lations, these laws of correlation have been put in their
right place; such interesting products of mathematical
genius may be social statistics in optima forma, but they
have nothing at all to do with genetics or general biol-
ogy! Their premises are inadequate for insight into the
nature of heredity.
Ancestral influence! As to heredity, it is a mystical
expression for a fiction. The ancestral influences are
the ‘‘ghosts’’ in genetics, but generally the belief in
ghosts is still powerful. In pure lines no influence of the
special ancestry can be traced; all series of progeny
keep the genotype unchanged through long generations.
A. D. Darbishire’s laborious investigations as to the
classical object of Mendel’s researches, green and yellow
peas, may even convince-a biometrician that the ances-
tral influence is zero in ‘‘alternative inheritance.’’ An-
cestral influence in heredity is, plainly speaking, a term
of the ‘‘transmission-conception’’ and nothing else.
The characters of ancestors as well as of descendants
are both in quite the same manner reactions of the geno-
No. 531] GENOTYPE CONCEPTION OF HEREDITY 139
typical constitution of the gametes in question. Partic-
ular resemblances between an ancestor and one or more
of his descendants depend—so far as heredity is re-
sponsible—on corresponding particular identities in the
genotypical constitution, and, as we have urged here,
perhaps to excess, the genotype is not a function of the
personal character of any ancestor.
The genotypic constitution of a gamete or a zygote
may be parallelized with a complicated chemico-phys-
ical structure. This reacts exclusively in consequence
of its realized state, but not in consequence of the
history of its creation. So it may be with the geno-
typical constitution of gametes and zygotes: its history
is without influence upon its reactions, which are de-
termined exclusively by its actual nature.
The genotype-conception is thus an ‘‘ahistoric’’ view
of the reactions of living beings—of course only as far
as true heredity is concerned. This view is an analog to
the chemical view, as already pointed out; chemical com-
pounds have no compromising ante-act, H,O is always
H,O, and reacts always in the same manner, whatsoever
may be the ‘‘history’’ of its formation or the earlier
states of its elements. I suggest that it is useful to
emphasize this ‘‘radical’’ ahistoric genotype-conception
of heredity in its strict antagonism to the transmission-
or phenotype-view.
As to the evolution of human civilization we meet with
true ancestral influences, viz., the tradition (comprising
literature, monuments of art, etc., and all forms of
teaching). Tradition is playing a very great réle, but
tradition is quite different from heredity. Nevertheless
there may often be danger of confusion, and here the use
of false analogs is not harmless. So an obscure meta-
phor is involved in archeologists’ reference to Greek
temples as ‘‘ancestors’? of some types of Christian
churches, or in their speaking of the descent of violins
from more primitive ‘‘ancestors.’’ Certainly, evolution
of types of tools, instruments and implements of all
kinds is—at least partially—going on by means of select-
140 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
ive factors combined with tradition, the latter not only
conserving the valuable types but actively stimulating
their improvement. But all this has nothing at all to do
with the biological notion of heredity. It is of course
interesting to see that the idea of ‘‘evolution by selec-
tion” has won credit in archeology, sociology, etc., but
this involves nothing as to genetics, for which ‘‘tradi-
tion’’ is irrelevant.
The very ‘‘radical’’ form of the genotype-conception
advocated here may be too ‘‘theoretical’’ to be carried
through in all its consequences in cases of practical ex-
periments in genetics. In nature and even in the chem-
ical factories the chemical compounds are not always to
be had in quite pure state. The history of a prepara-
tion may sometimes be traced by accompanying impuri-
ties. As to the analogy with the genotypes we touch
here the question whether the genotypical constitution
of a gamete may not be accompanied by some accessorial
or accidental ‘‘impurities’’ from the individual organ-
ism in which the gamete was developed.
Here we meet with the cases of ‘‘spurious’’ heredity,
e. g., the infections of the gametes or zygotes as may be
seen in certain cases of tuberculosis, syphilis, ete. Such
and other forms of spurious heredity may have the ap-
pearance of ‘‘hereditary transmission’? or ‘‘ancestral
influence’’; but theoretically they do not interfere at all
with the genotype-conception of heredity. In such in-
teresting cases as that detected by Correns, viz., the
‘‘heredity’’ of a special form of albinism by ‘‘trans-
mission’’ through the plasm of the ovum—the sperm not
transmitting this character—we may at the first glance
be puzzled. Nevertheless, as Correns himself points out.
here we have certainly to do with a pathological state 0
the plasm or the chromatophores in question, and that
may perhaps be the reason for the lack of heredity
through the sperm which carries no (?) plasm or only a
small quantity. The etiology of such abnormalities
being as yet quite unknown, it may often be very difficult
to distinguish them clearly from ‘‘genotypically’’ de-
No. 531] GENOTYPE CONCEPTION OF HEREDITY 141
termined abnormalities which show the normal form of
heredity through both ovum and sperm. The case quoted
demands further experience and seems not to be in ac-
cord with results of Baur’s experiments. At any rate,
there may be several difficulties to overcome in the full
and consistent application of the genotype-conception,
difficulties that may be characterized as perturbations
by infection or contamination. And hereby it must be
r bered that theoretically, as well as practically,
there are no sharp limits between ‘‘normal’’ and ‘‘path-
ological’’ manifestations of life. ‘‘Nature is beautiful,
but not correct,’’ is a Danish saying.
The principle of pure lines or, generally, pure culture,
is of importance also for elucidating the celebrated ques-
tion of the inheritance of ‘‘acquired characters.” Men-
delism and pure-line researches are here in the most
beautiful accordance, both emphasizing the stability of
genotypical constitution; the former operating with the
constituent unities, the latter with the behavior of the
totality of the genotypes in question. The brilliant work
of Tower with Leptinotarsa and the highly suggestive
injection experiments of MacDougal indicate that
changes of the genotypical constitution are produced by
steps, discontinuously. And as yet no experiment with
genotypically homogeneous cultures has given any evi-
dence for the Lamarckian view, the most extreme
‘‘transmission’’-conception ever issued. As to bacteria,
the important experiments recently made by C. O. Jen-
sen for the purpose of changing their types through
adaptation have given not only absolutely negative re-
sults, but have demonstrated the fallacy of some posi-
tive indications by previous authors. Lamarckism and
selectionism are certainly at bottom the same thing: the
belief in personal qualities being ‘‘transmitted’’ to the
offspring. Observations in impure populations are now
their places of resort; nevertheless, it is granted that
their history in biology as suggestive ideas has been most
glorious. :
Apropos, some cases of apparent action of selection
142 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
may have direct touch with Lamarckian ideas, as, e. g.,
De Vries’s selection of buttercups, recently quoted by
Jennings as ‘‘the only case that he has found’’ indi-
eating hereditary action of selection: ‘‘Here, after
selection the extreme was moved far beyond that before
selection.” And Jennings says: ‘‘Possibly repetition
with thorough analytical experimentation will show that
something besides selection has brought about the great
change. But at present the case stands sharply against
the generalizations from the pure line work.”’
Certainly Jennings is in reason, when he, on the
ground of his own masterly researches, looks out for
‘‘something besides selection.’’ There are three direc-
tions for the inquiry here. First, the strong evidence
that the buttercup-population was not at all homogene-
ous. Secondly, the possibility of intercrossing. I only
need to point out the beautiful researches of Shull as to
the effect of intercrossing in maize. The heterozygotes
were here larger and more productive than the pure
strains. The surprises of heterozygotic ‘‘constructions’”’
or of new combinations in F, may perhaps be respon-
sible for the case of De Vries’s buttercups; I shall not
try to discuss it. But, thirdly, we have an instance
pointed out several times by De Vries himself, viz., the
combination of selection with nourishment: ‘‘la sélection
c’est l’alimentation’’ as it has been said. I suppose that
we have here the essential point. The buttercups in cul-
ture have been better nourished than before the experi-
ments. Hence, the ‘‘best’’ genotypes having been se-
lected from the population and submitted to ‘‘better’’
nourishment, the result would easily be a moving of the
extremes far beyond those before selection. The butter-
cup-case seems to me to present no difficulties for the
genotype-conception.
The practical breeders are a somewhat difficult people
to discuss with. Their methods of selection combined
with special training and ‘‘nurture’’ in the widest sense
of this word are mostly unable to throw any light upon
questions of genetics, and yet they only too frequently
No. 531] GENOTYPE CONCEPTION OF HEREDITY 143
make hypotheses as to the nature of heredity and varia-
bility. Darwin has somewhat exaggerated the scientific
value of breeders’ testimonies, as if a breeder eo ipso
must be an expert in heredity. As to the principle of
pure lines it has been occasionally vindicated by Ger-
man authors, e. g., K. v. Riimker, that pure line breeding
is a thing old and well known. This is quite true; nearly
sixty years ago L. Vilmorin not only emphasized in a
lucid manner the importance of pure breeding, but he
even tried a little to use his experiences theoretically.
But it can not be denied that the principle of pure lines,
as a true scientific analytical implement, as an indispen-
sable method of research in heredity—not merely as a
questionable and, at any rate, unilateral and insufficient
method of practical breeding—is a novelty from recent
years. Had this analytical principle been used in the
times of Darwin, or had it even been appreciated in due
time by the biometric school, certainly the real bearing
of selection might long since have been rightly under-
stood also by the practical breeders of pure strains.
The genotypes may then be characterized as some-
thing fixed and may be, to a certain degree, parallelized
with the most complicated molecules of organie chem-
istry consisting of ‘‘nuclei’? with a multitude of ‘side-
chains.’’ Continuing for a moment such a metaphor, we
may even suggest that the genes may be looked upon as
analogs of the ‘‘radicals’’ or ‘‘side-chains.’’? All such
ideas may as yet be premature; but they are highly
favored by the recent researches of Miss Wheldale.
The fixity of a genotypical constitution in question is
the conception arrived at by Mendelian and pure line
work. Hence there is a discontinuity between different
genotypes. This discontinuity has been energetically
contested by several biologists, among whom Woltereck
may be pointed out as an important representative. In
his very interesting report on experiments with Daph-
mas, Woltereck indicates, as said above, that selection
was as yet ineffective; moreover he describes a case of
discontinuous alteration of type (mutation), and his ex-
144 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
periments designed to confirm the Lamarckian view
have given as yet negative results, even though these
may be called ‘‘promising,’’ as he says. So all the evi-
dence of his breeding experiments is in reality quite in
favor of our genotype-conception !
But how much depends upon our mental eyesight,
what we see. Woltereck confesses openly his belief in
continuous evolution and remarks that for a convinced
selectionist of the Weismann school the new genotype-
conception is a ‘‘hard blow.’’ The aim of his paper in
question is to parry off such blows. Of course this parry
can not use his own statements just mentioned; as to
their obvious but inconvenient accordance with our con-
ception Woltereck might apply the famous words from
Harvey’s times: ‘‘video sed non credo.’’ Hence the
arguments must be taken from other observations, and
some very instructive results of cultures under varying
conditions have supplied the piéce de résistance for the
discussion. Woltereck is within his right when assert-
ing that we consider different genotypes as having con-
stant differences (like different formulas in chemistry).
This is an essential point; but Woltereck, admitting no
constancy in the differences, tries to demonstrate that
our view must be fallacious.
In a very suggestive manner he presents ‘‘phenotype-
curves’’ for several pure strains. These curves are
graphical schemes expressing (for the strain in ques-
tion) the average degree or intensity of any particular
character as it manifests itself under different condi-
tions, e. g., the relative length of heads by poor, inter-
mediate and rich feeding, ete. Such ‘‘phenotype-
curves’? may indeed be very useful as records of the
behavior of the organisms in question, and they mark
certainly a valuable progress in descriptive methods.
The phenotype-curves of the Daphnias in question
sometimes show rather constant differences between the
pure strains compared; but mostly this is not the case.
Especially under extreme conditions, e. g., with poor oT
even with very rich feeding, some of the curves are con-
No. 531] GENOTYPE CONCEPTION OF HEREDITY 145
fluent. So the differences between the phenotype-curves
may vary considerably or may even vanish entirely.
These experiences agree with numerous observations of
Wesenberg Lund as to the Daphnias in the Danish lakes,
and there is no doubt as to their correctness.
But when Woltereck thinks that these facts are in-
consistent with the existence of constant differences be-
tween the genotypes, he shows himself to have totally
misunderstood the question! Of course the phenotypes
of the special characters, i. e., the reactions of the geno-
typical constituents, may under different conditions ex-
hibit all possible forms of transition or transgression
—this has nothing at all to do with constancy or incon-
stancy of genotypical differences.
Every student of genetics ought to know this; some
few examples may suffice to enforce it: Temperature has
great influence upon the intensity of color in flowers; all
shades of intensity from saturated reddish-blue to pure
white may be observed with different temperatures in
lilac flowers of the ‘‘colored’’ varieties. Such pure
white flowering individuals are—as to color—pheno-
typically not distinguishable from genotypically pure
‘white? varieties. Nobody will assume that there
should be genotypical transitions here! Pure lines of
beans may in one year be different in size, e. g., the
average of the line A exceeding that of B. In another
year B may exceed A, or their average sizes may be
practically identical. Differences of soil may produce
something similar, and it is well known to breeders that
Some strains of wheat yield relatively much better than
others on rich soil, while the reverse is realized on
poorer soils. In four subsequent years two pure lines of
barley, both characterized by a considerable degree of
disposition to produce vacant spikelets (aborted grains)
in the heads, presented the phenotypes here indicated in
percentages of such vacancies.
Pure line L: 30 33 27 29
Pure line G: 5 45 3 28
146 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
The genotype-differences are nevertheless constant;
the ‘‘Reaktionsnorms’’ of the organisms in Woltereck’s
cases, as well as in the examples just cited, are of course
eo ipso ‘‘constantly different’’ just as well as the ‘‘ Reak-
tionsnorms’’ of different chemical compounds. And as
to chemical analogies it may perhaps be useful to state
that different chemical compounds (the structural or
constitutional differences of which surely are granted to
be discontinuous and constant) may sometimes show
‘‘reaction-curves’’ highly resembling Woltereck’s ‘‘ phen-
otype-curves.’’ It is, I suppose, quite sufficient to point
out the temperature-curves of solubility for different
salts of sodium and other metals. These curves inter-
fere in different ways, cutting each other or partially
confluent, in analogy with Woltereck’s phenotype-curves.
The essential point in the whole matter is, of course,
that a special genotypical constitution always reacts in
the same manner under identical conditions—as all
chemical or physical structures must do. Differences in
genotypical constitution (as well as differences in chem-
ical or physical nature) are not bound to manifest them-
selves at all—and still less to do so in the same sense
—under all conditions. Sometimes even quite special
conditions may be required for the realization of possi-
bilities (‘‘Potenzen,’’ as some German authors are say-
ing), due to a special genotypical nature: This is a well-
known fact in physiology as in the fine art of gardening.
Baur has long since emphasized the importance of this
point for the Mendelian researches.
So the criticisms of Woltereck as to the genotypical
discontinuity and constancy are only based upon a re-
grettable misconception of the genotype-notion. Over
and over we find in current literature this confusion of
genotypes with phenotypes, and we even have met with
the idea, that the Daphnias of a lake may in summer
diverge in different races or varieties, but that in winter
they converge into one single race! In this statement of
Wesenberg Lund, the author regards of course only the
phenotypes in a purely descriptive manner. It is evident
No. 531] GENOTYPE CONCEPTION OF HEREDITY 147
that Woltereck’s view has been influenced by Wesenberg
Lund in this matter; but what might be fairly excused in
the latter is not allowable for an experimenter pretending
to work with cardinal questions of genetics.
Discontinuity and constant differences between the
‘‘oenes’’ are the quotidian bread of Mendelism, and here
the harmony of Mendelism and pure line work is perfect.
We have dealt with some recent criticism of the pure line
results; now it is time to look at Mendelism. The aston-
ishing evolution of this mode of research has given an
almost interminable stock of special results, and cases
that at first might seem incompatible with the Mendel-
ian views have been analyzed more thoroughly on a
large scale and have shown themselves quite in accord-
ance with Mendelism. The magnificent book of Bateson
gives a full account of this prosperous state of Mendel-
ian research. And it may be evident that Mendelism
gives the most striking verification of the essential point
in Galton’s ‘‘stirp-hypothesis’’: the inadequacy of
the personal quality in heredity. At the same time it
overthrows totally the idea of ‘‘organs’’ as being repre-
sented by the unities of the ‘‘stirp,’’ pointing out that
the personal qualities of the organism in toto are the re-
sults of the reactions of the genotypical constitution.
The segregation of one sort of ‘‘gene’’ may have influ-
ence upon the whole organization. Hence the talk of
‘“‘genes for any particular character’? ought to be
omitted, even in cases where no danger of confusion
Seems to exist. So, as to the classical cases of peas, it is
not correct to speak of the gene—or genes—for ‘‘yellow’’
in the cotyledons or for their ‘‘wrinkles,’’—yellow color
and wrinkled shape being only reactions of factors that
may have many other effects in the pea-plants. It
Should be a principle of Mendelian workers to minimize
the number of different genes as much as possible.
Here we meet with the questions of correlation and
‘coupling’? of genes. I can not here enter into a discus-
Sion as to the notion of ‘‘correlation’’ with its several
meanings; in my ‘‘Elemente der exakten Erblichkeits-
148 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von XLV
lehre’’ a rather full discussion is to be found. I may only
point out here that many cases of presumed correlation
may simply be cases of two or more characters (reac-
_ tions) due to the presence—or even absence—of one
single gene. The phenotypically distinct and even di-
versely localized ‘‘characters’’ convey easily the impres-
sion that they are reactions of different genes.
The highly interesting experiences of Correns, Don-
caster, Morgan, Spillman and others as to the sex-de-
termining factors, are in some way connected with
researches of correlation and ‘‘coupling’’ of genes. The
discussion of the ingenious Bateson-Punnett scheme for
Abraxas and Morgan’s suggestive schemes as to Droso-
phila may favor the idea of what may be called ‘‘rami-
fied’’ genes. Castle has in his splendid researches as to
color-factors in rabbits, ete., initiated a systematic de-
scription of the (partially) analyzed genotypes, some-
what resembling the formulas of organic ‘‘structural
chemistry.” If we suggest an analogy between the
radicals of chemistry and the genes, the (partial) geno-
type-formulas in Castle’s manner may be able to demon-
strate ramifications of the genes inserted upon the main
group of the genotype-constituents. Pausing a moment
on this metaphor, it may be suggested that the ‘‘branch.”’
or ‘‘branches’’ of a ramified gene may be more difficult
to separate from its ‘‘trunk’’ than the whole gene from
the totality of the genotype. I shall here only ask if such
views may be of any use as working hypotheses. Their
bearing as to the realization of mutations is obvious,—
but the purely speculative nature of these suggestions
can not as yet warrant a longer discussion here.
It should always be borne in mind that the Mendelian
analysis is purely relative. Baur and Shull and even
several others have emphasized this fact when discussing
the segregations in their experiments, and Shull has
clearly pointed out that it may be quite impossible to in-
dicate whether a particular reaction (character) is due
to something positive or to the lack of a factor in the
genotypical constitution. All that can as yet be deter-
No. 531] GENOTYPE CONCEPTION OF HEREDITY 149
mined in this regard by Mendelian analysis is the nwmber
of differing points between the two gametes forming a
heterozygote. Such differences may be termed ‘‘geno-
differences.’’ The well-known facts, that a ‘‘character’’
may be dominant in some hybrids but recessive in others,
and that segregation in different cases may be very dif-
ferent, indicate that ‘‘characters’’ are complicated reac-
tions. The famous case of Bateson’s fowl-hybrids as to
the form of comb may here be quoted as an example: In
Walnut comb X Rose comb the latter is recessive, in’
Single comb X Rose comb it is dominant, and in both
casesthe segregation gives three dominants : one recessive.
Now Bateson has shown that ‘‘Walnut’’ is a compound
of Rose- and Pea-comb. Homozygotic Walnut differs
from homozygotie Rose only in one point, as does Rose
compared with Single. But Walnut-gametes differ from
Single-gametes in two points; hence Walnut X Single,
with Walnut as dominant, segregates in Walnut, Rose,
Pea and Single in the proportions 9:3:3:1. Even with
this analysis it is as yet not possible to decide whether
Single or Walnut is the form of comb for the realization
of which the greater number of positive factors are re-
quired. Suggesting—what seems to be the most prob-
able assumption—that Walnut is the most geno-compli-
cated case, Single may even be an expression for a
multitude of genes in the fowl-constitution. The rela-
tivity of the analysis by segregation must in all such
cases be remembered, and it is quite erroneous to think
that dominance indicates the positivity of the ‘‘unit-
factor’’ in question: So ‘‘Horns’’ are in Wood’s cases
dominant in male sheep but recessive in female sheep.
And as to analogs with chemical reactions it must be
kept in mind that a characteristic reaction may be the
consequence of lack of any substance as well as de-
pendent upon the presence of any special compound in
the solution in question.
The elaborate work of Mendelians of recent years has
shown very complicated segregations, and the most spe-
cialized segregation is almost the most specialized analy- —
150 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
sis still known of any ‘‘character’’ in question. The
‘‘units’’ or ‘‘unit-factors’’ stated in Mendelian work are
consequently quite provisory, depending essentially upon
the number of genodifferences in the special crossing.
Probably it may be discovered that several such ‘‘unit-
factors’’ for one character may also be elements for the
realization of quite other characters. If this be the truth,
then the present state of Mendelism, characterized by
the rapidly augmenting number of new ‘‘unit-factors’”’
demonstrated in the organization of different biotypes
able to hybridize, may be replaced by a period in which `
many such unit-factors will be identified. At any rate
there is no reason to believe that the further Mendelian
analysis will augment the number of genes into absurd-
ity. The enormously increasing possibilities of combina-
tions by augmentation of the number of segregable genes
are a source of interest also in this connection.
As to cases of hybridization, in which segregation and
combination do not suit the Mendelian ‘‘laws,’’ it must
at first be stated that some apparent exceptions are prob-
ably caused by non-homogeneity of the initial material
for experiments. The experiments of Correns, Castle,
Miss Saunders, Tschermak and others have shown to
excess that phenotypes may seem totally ‘‘pure’’ and
nevertheless be heterogeneous (e. g., white flowering
stocks or albino mice). Thus constancy as to the pheno-
type of the progeny is no sure proof for genotypical
purity or unity. In discussing alternative inheritance
we meet with difficulties of the same nature as in regard-
ing fluctuating variability: the inadequacy of pheno-
type-description as the starting-point for genetic in-
quiries.
Secondly, the more or less high vitality of the different
combinations of genes in F, may perturb the Mendelian
results, as Baur has illustrated; in other cases the dif-
ferent degree of facility with which the union of special
gametes is realized may influence the relative numbers
of representatives in the F,-generation, as Correns has
demonstrated.
No. 531] GENOTYPE CONCEPTION OF HEREDITY 151
Here we can not discuss the difficulties in a complete
carrying through of the Mendelian analysis; Bateson’s
recent book contains a richness of instances concerning
this matter. Only one instance of special importance
may be mentioned here, viz., the so-called ‘‘ blended in-
heritance’’ opposed to Mendelian segregation or ‘‘alter-
native inheritance.’’ In cases of blended inheritance the
genes in question might be supposed to ‘‘fuse together’’
by the act of hybridization, or, in accordance with the
presence- and absence-view, the gene unilaterally carried
to the zygote might here in some manner be ‘‘diluted.’’
In this way, which certainly is very badly compatible with
the conception of genes as unit-factors, failing segrega-
tion might be explained.
Cases of failing segregation seemed to be abundant in
the beginning of the modern Mendelian era; Mendel him-
self pointed out some typical cases in the species-hybrids
of Hieracium. And Correns’s indication as to the con-
stant intermediate stature of maize stems seemed to be
a crucial case. Now the insight won by breeding experi-
ments as well as by cytological researches concerning
the phenomena of apogamy has put the question in a new
light. The discoveries of Murbeck, Raunkier, Ostenfeld,
Rosenberg and others have led to quite other explana-
tions as to the constancy of several intermediate hybrid
forms. In such cases no segregation is realized, because
no gametogenesis is going on—and in such cases there is
no reason for supposing any ‘‘fusing’’ or ‘‘dilution’’ of
genes. And as to Correns’s experiments, this careful
author has himself withdrawn the suggestion in question.
But still cases of ‘‘blending inheritance’’ remain.
Among these Castle’s experiences as to the dimensions of
rabbits, especially the length of ears, are the most impor-
tant and most discussed instances. Castle has in a con-
vincing and suggestive manner demonstrated that the
complicated color-characters in rabbits agree with the
Mendelian laws. Therefore much stress might be laid
upon his indication of cases contrary to these laws.
152 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou XLV
Crossing short-eared and long-eared races, he gained
an F’,-generation with almost intermediate ears, and here
no segregation was observed in F,.
But even this case may agree with Mendelian laws.
The idea for such interpreting is won—as Lang has
clearly pointed out—by means of Nilsson-Ehle’s (and
_ East’s) experiments, the former concerning the colors of
wheat-grains, the latter dealing with the number of
‘‘rows’’ in the ears of maize. Nilsson-Ehle demonstrated
that blending of red and white color in wheat is appa-
rently a fiction: The red color is determined by several
different genes, acting in the same sense and augmenting
the effect of each other. Hence by segregation and new
combinations of these approximately equipotent genes a
whole series of gradations in red color will be realized.
And these gradations must group themselves symmet-
rically around the phenotype of the F, in question. If
_we have to consider say three genes, A, B and C, we shall
for F, use the formula AaBbCe, indicating the value 3
which is intermediate between aabbee as zero and
AABBCC as 6. Even in case of no fluctuation such a
series must present itself as an almost continuous grada-
tion, and it is not difficult to find out that the progeny of
every ‘‘class’’ here will breed true, i. e., the average of
the progeny’s character will be like the ‘‘class’’ of the
parent.
Just so it is in the case of Hast’s experiments with
maize, as East himself has clearly illustrated. Thus,
well-analyzed instances of heredity in plants, concerning
both color-factors and meristic factors may be compared
with Castle’s case in question. Lang in his interesting
criticisms points out that certain irregularities in Castle’s
F,-material give strong evidence for the view that we
have no blended inheritance but true segregation here as
well as in the cases of Nilsson-Ehle (and, as we may add,
in the cases of East). Further analysis may then prob-
ably demonstrate in a more direct manner the true nature
of the apparent blending in Castle’s case; as yet we can
No. 531] GENOTYPE CONCEPTION OF HEREDITY 153
only say that this case does not seem incompatible with
Mendelian views. It must also be borne in mind that
certainly there have been very many genodifferences
between the differing races intercrossed in Castle’s
experiments. Hence these experiments are really operat-
ing with highly poly-heterozygotic F,-generations. And
how great influence upon dimensions (of ears and other
parts of the body) those color-determining genes may
have exercised can not be easily determined.
As to beans, it is proved that genes, effective in color-
reactions, may also have great influence upon the dimen-
sions and forms. So in my crosses a special factor,
which makes yellow color turn into brown and causes
violet to be turned into black, has a very marked influence
upon the size and form of the beans in question. Here
exact data are not necessary; the instance exemplifies the
two incident matters of fact, viz., that apparently simple
‘‘dimensional’’ or meristic characters may be determined
by several different genes, and that one sort of gene may
have influence upon several different reactions.
Then it seems that Mendelian analysis is proceeding in
a very prosperous way; but there may be even very
narrow limits for this analysis: the entire organization
may never be ‘‘segregated’’ into genes! But still there
is much to do in carrying through the genotype-concep-
tion as far as possible.
As to cytological researches the genotype-conception is
as yet rather indifferent. Certainly the process of segre-
gation must be a cell-action intimately connected with
division. But all the innumerably detailed results of the
refined cytological methods of to-day do not elucidate
anything as to segregation. It seems to the unprejudiced
observer that the much-discussed cytological phenomena
of karyokinesis, synapsis, reduction and so on may be
regarded rather as consequences or manifestations of the
divisions, repartitions and segregations of genotypical
constituents (and all other things in the cell) than as
their causes. This view is applicable even in those cases
154 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
where sex-determination can be diagnosticated cyto-
logically.
In the discussion as to the existence of true graft-
hybrids the cytological configurations have of course a
high importance as precisely defined characters of cells
in such cases where the cytological elements of the two
species in question are different. And, as it may be well
known, cytological evidence is not at all favorable for the
idea of graft-hybrids. But the use of cytological configu-
rations for diagnosis is quite different from the idea that
special cytological elements might have importance for
the phenomena of heredity.
The question of chromosomes as the presumed ‘‘ bearers
of hereditary qualities’’ seems to be an idle one. I am
not able to see any reason for localizing ‘‘the factors of
heredity” (i. e., the genotypical constitution) in the
nuclei. The organism is in its totality penetrated and
stamped by its genotype-constitution. All living parts of
the individual are potentially equivalent as to genotype-
constitution. In botany there has been no doubt as to
this conception, and as to animals, O. Hertwig has for a
long time advocated the same view against the views of
Weismann and others, who have suggested that ontogene-
sis is partly determined or at any rate accompanied by a
progressive simplification of the ‘‘anlagen’’ (as we say
the ‘‘genotype-constitution’’) in the cells of the growing
embryo. The agencies of normally varying ambient con-
ditions and the interactions of specialized parts in the
developing individual may exercise their strong influence
upon the whole phenotypical state of the resulting partic-
ular individual. But these factors will as a rule not
change or shift the fundamental genotypical constitution
of the biotype in question. Later on we shall touch the
problem of such genotypical changes (the mutations)
induced by external factors.
Here we have to point out the fact that ‘‘living
matter’’—or, with a more precise definition, those sub-
stances or structures the reactions of which we call oe
No. 531] GENOTYPE CONCEPTION OF HEREDITY 155
‘‘manifestations of life,’’—is inter alia characterized by
the property of autocatalysis. The autocatalysis of
living beings must embrace the totality of their geno-
typical constituents. It seems to me that this autoca-
talysis as well as the compensative and complemental
maintenance of genotypical equilibrium in the organisms,
present some of the greatest enigmas of organic life.
The discussion of cytological problems leads us to the
question of pure or impure segregation. In the begin-
ning of modern Mendelian researches several instances of
presumed impure segregation of genes in gametogenesis
were discussed, e. g., as to color factors in animals. But
more thorough analytical experiments have in many such
cases demonstrated ‘‘purity’’ in the gametes, the charac-
ters in question having proved to be more complicated
reactions than at first supposed. Recently Morgan has
discussed the question in a quite new manner, suggesting
—as a working hypothesis—that the segregation might be
not of qualitative but of merely quantitative nature.
Hence the gametes should as a rule not be pure. Never-
theless, as the author illustrates by means of interesting
diagrams, the F,-generation of a monohybrid with normal
dominance might be composed of two classes of indi-
viduals sharply defined. And the author suggests that
this idea might be able to explain ‘‘the graded series of
forms so often met with in experience and so often
ignored or roughly classified by Mendelian workers.’’
Here we again touch the question of ‘‘blended in-
heritance.” I suppose that the above-mentioned expla-
nations by Lang and East are more consistent with the
real nature of the graded series in question. Now the
Mendelian work has not only been able to demonstrate
that several cases of segregation apparently impure are
pure segregations of complicated nature; but even the
““spotted conditions’? as to color in animals and plants,
emphasized by Morgan as a puzzling case, does not seem
to present any real difficulty for Mendelian explanation.
Certainly such cases as Shull has pointed out, viz., hetero-
156 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
zygotic nature being necessary for ‘‘mottling’’ in some
special bean-hybrids, may at first glance favor the idea of
‘‘snotted conditions’’ being due to irregular segregation
or to different repartition of color-determining factors in
the tissues in question. But a closer examination seems
to vindicate the real existence of special ‘‘spotting
factors.’’ The very interesting researches of Lock as to
the ‘‘Inheritance of certain invisible characters. in peas’’
have clearly pointed out a ‘‘spotting’’ factor or a
‘‘pattern’’-determiner in peas, independent of any color-
manifestation. It must be borne in mind that a multitude
of characteristic epidermal ‘‘patterns’’ are found in
animals and plants, these patterns concerning all epider-
mal manifestations and often showing a widely fluctuat-
ing variability. As to the realization of all such spots it
might be suggested that in neighboring parts of the devel-
oping epidermal tissue some little difference of ambient
conditions may inhibit or even release reactions, the alter-
nation of which produces the spots.
The whole case seems to be somewhat analogous to the
merely phenotypical phenomena of alternative variability
first pointed out by De Vries, e. g., the alternation of
decussated and contorted stems of Dipsacus. Here we
touch the highly suggestive idea of ‘‘ sensible periods’’ in
ontogenesis or histogenesis emphasized with so good
experimental arguments by De Vries. Of course there
must be a genotypical fundament for the existence of the
alternating character in question, e. g., for the particular
nature of the surface of the spots (or for the contortion
in Dipsacus, ete.); strains without such genotypical
fundament will not be spotted (nor produce contorted
individuals at all)—These remarks are made only to
point out that Morgan may have exaggerated a little his
criticisms as to ‘‘spotting factors,” but I confess that this
question is in need of closer analysis. :
Then the problem of pure or impure segregation may
still be open; but the tendency in modern genetics goes
certainly in the direction of establishing pure segrega-
No. 531] THE GENOTYPE HYPOTHESIS 157
tion as the normal case. If we accept the suggestion of
autocatalysis as an essential factor for the propagation of
living matter in general, and hence eo ipso, for the growth
or multiplication of genotypical constituents, we might in
case of impure segregation expect frequently to find
‘‘dominants’’ in the progeny of ‘‘recessives’’; and the
numerical proportions of the dominants and recessives in
consecutive generations must be rather irregular. But
this is not the case. The recent experiments of Darbi-
shire quoted above demonstrate in a beautiful manner the
purity of segregation during subsequent generations in
Mendel’s classical object, the pea.
Francis Bacon says: ‘‘Human understanding easily
supposes a greater degree of order and equality in things
than it really finds.’? So we may in modern genetics be
aware of the relativity and narrowness of our provisorial
explanations, remembering Bacon’s warning that ‘‘many
things in nature may be sui generis and irregular!’
Among the irregularities in heredity we may reckon the
mutations, observed in nature as well as in more precisely
defined conditions of artificial experiments. From the
famous observations of De Vries and the indications of
several earlier authors, to the modern experimental
researches of MacDougal, Standfuss, Tower, Blaringhem
and others, all evidences as to mutations point out the
discontinuity of the changes in question. Here we need
not enter the question; it is sufficient to state that the es-
sential point is the alteration, loss or gain of constituents
of the genotype. The splendid experiments of Tower as to
Leptinotarsa have in the most evident manner shown that
the factors which produce the mutations in this case, viz.,
the temperature and state of moisture, are able to act in
a direct manner upon the genotypical constitution of the
gametes; and Tower has noted the occurrence of Mendel-
lan segregation in hybridizing his mutants with the
original unaltered biotypes. There may in some cases
be certain puzzling irregularities to be explained by
future researches, but it is evident that in all such muta-
158 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
tions, discontinuity is the characteristic feature in the
change of type.
As to populations, the biotypes of which may practi-
eally exhibit continuous transitions—like the case of my
own populations of beans—the idea might be born that
biotypes are evolved from each other by extremely small
steps in genotypical change. Hence such mutations must
be practically identical with ‘‘continuous’’ evolution.
But there is no evidence for this view. Certainly in such
populations the ‘‘static’’ transitions between the geno-
typical differences manifesting themselves. in several
characters may be called continuous—but such a ‘‘con-
tinuity of museums,’’ as it might be called, is not at all
identical with genetic continuity. Galton himself has
emphasized the capital difference between the notions of
continuity in collections and continuity in origin, and as
yet the mutations really observed in nature have all
shown themselves as considerable, discontinuous salta-
tions. So in my own still unpublished experiments with
pure lines. Natura facit saltus. The chemical analog
to such mutations may be the formation of homologous
alcohols, acids and so on. The greater mutations may be
symbolized by more complicated molecular alterations.
But such analogs are of very little value for the under-
standing of genetic evolution.
The genotype-conception supported by the great stock
of experiments as to pure line work, Mendelism and muta-
tions does not consider personal adaptation as a factor of
any genetic importance. Phrases as ‘‘cl ters, won by
adaptation and having successively been hereditarily
fixed,” are without meaning from our point of view.
Hence much talk of adaptive characters successively
gained seems to us an idle matter. A closer study of
desert-organisms and the like may elucidate such things;
here the suggestive researches of Lloyd as to stomates in
desert plants may be pointed out. And as to the old
question of ‘‘mimiery,’’ this problem in the famous cases
of butterflies has in a most convincing manner been put
No. 531] GENOTYPE CONCEPTION OF HEREDITY 159
into Mendelian terms by the observations and experi-
ments of Punnett, de Meijere and others. This strong-
hold of the united Lamarckism and selectionism has now
been conquered for Mendelism, i. e., for the genotype-
conception.
The genotype-conception here advocated does not pre-
tend to give a true or full ‘‘explanation’’ of heredity, but
may be regarded only as an implement for further critical
research, an implement that in its turn may be proved to
be insufficient, unilateral and even erroneous—as all
working-hypotheses may some time show themselves to
be. But as yet it seems to be the most prosperous leading
idea in genetics.
Heredity may then be defined as the presence of iden-
tical genes in ancestors and descendants, or, as Morgan
says in full accordance with this definition: ‘‘The word
heredity stands for those properties of the germ-cells
that find their expression in the developing and developed
organism.”’’
And now it is time to end this communication, too long
for its real contents, but too short for the importance and
diversity of the great problem of heredity.
In concluding this address I must highly emphasize the
eminent merits of Hugo de Vries. His famous book ‘‘ Die
Mutationstheorie,’’ rich as well in positive indications as
in ingenious views, has been the mediator for the new and
the old era in genetics. This monumental work is a land-
mark in the progress of our science. Like the head of
Janus it looks at once forward and backward, trying to
reconcile—at least partly—the antagonistic ideas of con-
tinuity and discontinuity in evolution and heredity; hence
a great deal of the charm of De Vries’s work. But just
these qualities have made the work of De Vries too
eclectic for the stringent analytical tendencies of modern
genetics—a tendency which has in recent years found a
true home in American science.
THE GENOTYPE HYPOTHESIS AND HYBRIDI-
: ZATION?!
PROFESSOR E. M. EAST
HARVARD UNIVERSITY
Ir sometimes seems as if the hypercritical attitude had
become an obsession among biologists. A proper judi-
cial spirit is of course essential to science, but do not
biologists often require a large amount of affirmative
data before assenting to a proposition which is in real-
ity a simple corollary of one already accepted?
For example, Darwin emphasized small quantitative
variations as the method of evolution, although he rec-
ognized the occurrence of larger changes both quantita-
tive and qualitative. De Vries, on the other hand,
emphasized large variations—especially qualitative
variations—as the real basis of evolution, although he
too admitted the existence of lesser changes. He dis-
tinctly states that a mutation or new basis for fluctua-
ting variation, may be so small that it is obscured by the
fluctuations themselves.
If relative frequency of occurrence is a criterion of
the value of variations in organic evolution, which is not
necessarily so, Darwin’s point of view is probably the
nearer correct. If one could find a unit basis for describ-
ing variations in terms of the physiological economy of
the organism concerned, i. e., if one knew exactly what
was a large change and what was a small change, he would
probably find that a random sample of inherited varia-
tions followed the normal curve of error. By this I
*Read at the symposium on the ‘‘Genotype Hypothesis’’ at the meeting
of the American Society of Naturalists, Ithaca, N. Y., December 28, 1910.
Contribution from the Laboratory of Genetics, Bussey Institution of
Harvard University.
The experimental results are from cooperative work between the Con-
necticut Agricultural Experiment Station and the Bussey Institution of
Harvard University.
160
No. 531] THE GENOTYPE HYPOTHESIS 161
mean that small variations would center closely around
a mode, and large variations would occur with a rela-
tive frequency inversely proportional to their size. The
point that I wish to emphasize, however, is that neither
Darwin nor De Vries recognized the proper distinction
between a mutation and a fluctuation. Darwin made no
distinction. De Vries, however, considered fluctuations
to be linear; that is, to be limited to increase and de-
crease in characters already present. He thought that
selection of such variations brought about changes in
the selected population due to the inheritance of the
fluctuations, but that the selected populations returned
to the mean of the general population after selection
ceased. Mutations, on the other hand, were gains or
losses of entire characters—qualitative changes—which
were transmitted completely, i. e., were constant, from the
beginning. De Vries did indeed state that mutations
could take place in any direction, which would involve the
idea of linear change or quantitative mutations; yet it
seems quite evident from his general attitude in ‘‘Die
Mutationstheorie’’? that to his mind qualitative and
quantitative variations were quite distinct.
Many practical breeders had long known, however,
that the selection of linear variations often produced
new races which were as constant as any races, provided
they were not exposed to crossing with individuals of
the general population from which the selected race had
come. Why this was true was unknown. It was felt
that there was a real distinction between certain varia-
tions, to which Darwin had not called attention; yet it
was felt that the De Vriesian idea was not wholly cor-
rect. It has been in making this distinction clear-cut and
definite that Johannsen has rendered his great service.
His elaborate extensions of the genotype conception of
heredity have cleared up many debated points, and
corroborative evidence has been received from so many
lines that it can hardly be doubted that the main points
of the hypothesis are correct. It may seem, therefore,
162 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou, XLV
‘as if the superstructure of this conception were too
elaborate to rest upon a simple foundation; yet I can not
see but that the basis of the entire hypothesis is the fact
that a fluctuation is a non-inherited variation produced
upon the soma by environmental conditions, while the
inherited variation, the mutation if you will, is any
variation qualitative or quantitative, that is germinal
in character. This being so, it seems scarcely necessary
for an elaborate proof of the proposition, for it is noth-
ing but a corollary to that part of Weismannism which
was already generally accepted.
Of course it is recognized that pure Lamarckism still
has followers to whom neither Weismannism in any
form nor the genotype conception of heredity could ap-
peal. But to thorough Weismannians and to those who
believe in occasional germinal response to environmental
conditions, it seems as if both propositions must be ac-
ceptable and their interdependence apparent.
Let us follow this line of reasoning to its logical con-
clusion in regard to the physiology of heredity. The
Mendelian notation has been generally accepted as a con-
venient way of accounting for the facts of heredity in
certain markedly discontinuous characters. It has been
questioned by many, however, whether the Mendelian con-
ception is not rather an apparent interpretation of a rela-
tively small number of facts than a general law. De Vries
has even suggested that there are definite physiological
reasons why certain characters should Mendelize and
others should not. His idea is that Mendelian segrega-
tion occurs when a germinal determinant for a character
(Anlage) meets an opposing determinant, and when no
such opposition exists the character in the cross-bred
organism breeds true. Now the universal tendency of the
facts of breeding is towards an interpretation the oppo-
site of this. When a determinant from one parent meets
with no such determinant from the other parent (pres-
ence and absence hypothesis), Mendelian segregation
appears. When the same determinant is received from
No. 531] THE GENOTYPE HYPOTHESIS 163
both parents, segregation can not be proved, for the char-
acter breeds true.
In fact the many results of experimental breeding dur-
ing the past few years have convinced me that De Vries’s
general conception of this matter is incorrect. There may
be finally a considerable modification of our ideas regard-
ing the ultimate nature of Mendelian unit characters and
the exact meaning of segregation, yet the universal appli-
eability of a strict Mendelian system to interpret the
facts of heredity becomes more and more apparent every
day. And the point that I wish to emphasize is that
Mendelian inheritance is a genuine corollary of the geno-
type hypothesis if the latter is applicable to a popula-
tion in a state of natural hybridity. In my work with
maize where free intercrossing does occur I am convinced
of the existence of genotypes in a state of natural
hybridization. Furthermore, these genotypes can be iso-
lated by inbreeding. If it were true, then, that only
certain markedly discontinuous characters such as color
Mendelize, how could genotypes which differ from each
other in size characters be isolated? It is not expected,
however, that the statement that Mendelian inheritance
and the genotype hypothesis are interdependent will be
received without proof. Data that are believed to fur-
nish such proof are submitted here.
When Mendelism was a new idea it was natural that
the behavior of many hybrids should be regarded as
irreconcilable to such a system of interpretation. The
earlier criticisms arose largely through the misconception
that dominance instead of segregation was its essential
feature. Later, when so many complex results from pedi-
gree cultures were fitted into a strict and simple Men-
delian notation, it was objected that the investigators
could by expert juggling of a sufficient number of factors
interpret according to their system any experimental
results they might obtain. Perhaps a few biologists re-
garded as a personal affront the gradual growth of the
idea that the facts of heredity were complex, but it is
164 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
hardly likely that many could regard this complexity as
an invention of Mendelians. The latter would only too
gladly have the facts as simple as possible.
There have remained, however, several instances in
which hybrids apparently did not segregate in the F,
generation. Mendel himself investigated one such case,
the genus Hieracium. The investigation of Ostenfeld?
made this case perfectly clear by showing that the hy-
brids reproduced apogamously. Such asexual reproduc-
tion may also explain the behavior of hybrids between
species of brambles which are also said to breed true in
all their characters. These cases, however, and others
among animals of which human skin color is the example
par excellence, may be left out of consideration because
no exact data concerning them have been forthcoming.
There remain the experiments of two careful investi-
gators who observed no segregation in the F, generations
of their hybrids, those of Lock? upon heights of maize
plants and those of Castlet upon weights and ear lengths
of rabbits. Lock expected that if segregation occurred
it would be into two classes, i. e., simple mono-hybridism.
For this reason he made no measurements which would
show whether he obtained the kind of segregation which
as is shown later in this paper, does occur in maize hy-
brids. Castle® has recently admitted the possibility that
his numbers were not large enough to prove definitely
that segregation involving several small unit characters
does not occur in the ear length of rabbits.
The difficulty attending this earlier work was that there
was no way of explaining different manifestations of the
same character. Segregating characters could always be
interpreted either as the presence and absence of a uni
* Ostenfeld, C. H., 1904, ‘‘Zur Kenntnis der Apogamie in der Gattung
Hieracium,’’ Ber. Detach, Bot. Ges., 22: 7
* Lock, R. H., 1906, ‘‘ Studies in Plant Breeding in the Tropics,’’ MI,
Experiments with Maize, Ann. Roy. Bot. Gard. Peradeniya, 2: 95-184.
* Castle, W. E., et al., 1909, ‘‘Studies of Inheritance in Rabbits, ”” ’ Car-
negie Inst. Wash. Ta, 114: 5-70.
*In lectures at the Tawi Institute, Boston, Mass., 1910.
No. 531] THE GENOTYPE HYPOTHESIS 165
giving a 3:1 ratio, or as the complemental action of two
different units each allelomorphic to its absence, giving
:3:3:1 ratios or modifications of them. Nillson-Ehle®
and the writer,’ however, have shown that several units
each allelomorphic to its own absence may be the determi-
nants of what appears to the eye as a single character.
In the above paper the writer suggested that if such
ratios as 15:1 and 63:1—di-hybrid and tri-hybrid ratios,
respectively—were found in considerable numbers, then
higher ratios of this kind might account for the apparent
constancy of hybrids in characters that seemed to be con-
tinuous. For, if—as is quite probable—the additional
units increase the activity of the character in question,
and if there is no dominance,’ it is quite evident that
hybrids may be intermediate between the two parents.
All the pure classes in a complex character of this kind
would indeed be difficult to isolate, but segregation could
be absolutely proved by a comparison of the variability
of the F, and F, generations.
Since writing the above paper I have obtained clear
evidence of 15:1 ratios in two other cases. The first is
a red pericarp color, the second is the condition of endo-
sperm in maize which gives dented seeds as distinct from
that which gives flinty seeds. There is even considerable
probability that higher ratios oecur which affect the latter
character. In another paper? I have shown photo-
graphic evidence of size segregation in varieties of Nico.
tiana rustica and stated that similar evidence of segre-
gation of size character in maize had been obtained. The
following figures and tables show sufficient of the evi-
dence from the maize crosses to demonstrate conclusively
° Nillson-Ehle, H., 1909, ‘‘Kreuzungsuntersuchungen an Hafer und
Weizen,’’ Lunds Universitets Årsskrift, N. F., Afd. 2., Bd. 5, Nr. 2, 1-122.
' East, E. M., 1910, ‘ʻA Mendelian RF OAN a Variation that is
Apparently Canthmous: ?? AMER. NAT., 44: 65-8
° One. dose, i. e., receiving the dante gene Sit: a single parent, would on
the average increase the manifestation of the character half as much as
two doses,
. M., 1910, ‘‘The Rôle of Hybridization in Plant Breeding,’’
Pop. Sci. Pa Oct., 1910, pp. 342-354.
166 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
that size characters segregate. It is hoped that this evi-
dence will make us more cautious about accepting uncor-
roborated statements about characters which are definite
exceptions to the Law of Mendel. It is by no means
certain that no such exist, but no experimental proof of
hybrids non-Mendelian in character has been made.
A further proof of segregation of size characters has
recently been made in a preliminary note by Emerson."°
He states that definite segregation occurs in beans,
gourds, squashes and maize. His full data are therefore
awaited with great interest.
Table I shows the frequency distribution of the heights
of plants in a cross between no. 5 a medium-sized flint
maize and no. 6 a tall dent maize. Sufficient seed was
obtained in a previous season so that the entire series
could be grown in rows side by side during one summer.
This procedure eliminates any possibility that the varia-
bility of the F, generation might have come from varying
conditions of soil fertility.
It will be noticed that the F, generation is nearly as tall
as the taller parent. This increase in size is not due to
dominance. It is the increased vigor that comes from
crossing in maize, and while it obscures the hereditary
differences in size, it is really a problem of development
and not of heredity as was shown in a previous paper.”
The distribution of heights in the F, generation is seen
by simple inspection of the table to be more variable than
the F, "generation in the case of each ear planted. Re-
duced to simple terms by the calculation of the coefficient
of variation in each case, however, the two generations
can be compared more accurately. In the F, generation
the C.V.—8.68 + .553 while in the various F, genera-
tions from different ears the coefficients of variation run
from 12.02 + .559 to 15.75 + .684.
* Emerson, R. A., 1910, ‘Inheritance of Sizes and Shapes in Plants,’’
AMER, NAT., 44: 739-746,
“ East, E. M., 1909, ‘‘ The Distinction lien Development and Hered-
ity in | Inbreeding,” AMER. NAT., 43: 173-18
167
‘sossu[o [vI}U0D eT} punose yueSs9Au0d A[Su0I4s
ə19m [TY 'pə}unoə syuejd zo Iəqunu pue paINsBeUT IIM SIMAJXH p
‘uosgəs owes ur əpıs Aq OPIS UMOIS SoINSY Burrs Suornqeaqsic] er
‘S189 JUAIIPIP MIY WOIF UMOIY) ,,
‘S1BO JUJIIPIP OM WOIFJ UMOIH şr
THE GENOTYPE HYPOTHESIS
No. 531]
‘SIVI JUdIOIP JAY WOT UMOLY or ‘mosves oules UT ƏPIS Aq APIS UMOIH zr
60% | |@ | 80 |r | 4y | Fe | B42 | 09 | 89 | Ie | se | si) or] 9 | nid (to x 8-09)
833 Iiris io ié |% 1 | ke 9¢ 62 |ceierierio |¢ |T I | oxi ($9 X 8-09
6F9 e |e |ze| te | 69 |e | get! ziti 96 " pest 8 |1 $18 | | er ŠI (POX S09
og +e wi (#9 X 8-09
9% He | | H (eee
eg prm ‘a (P9 X 9-09
00T née —> 09 “ON
wr Itigi? ela eea | | i] rg ON
r | s8 | ss | æ | ez |o |e | |z | ro | 1's] oo | ao | or | oF | er | oF | ze | ve | te |s | 9 | 2
[810.1 : “ON
S}UB][J JO $14819 H 103 SaYOUT UT s1970 S880
(09 X P9) SSOUQ NI SEINVIG A0 SLHYITH AO NOILAAINLSIA. AONTAÒOTAA
: «II @IAViL
OGF’ F COZ | $98' F 8Z'OL | SIS’ + F4'I8 g If o |OTIITIG 91i Pz LS ITI Arg A 16 | Fl Si TI tanxe)
6S9 F ZOZI | 8E F G6 | 129° OF'6L I E rT 18 8 Or STi Stisti6 |L I> iF 3 „18 -(9%¢
GLO" F P8°Sl | L99°F SLIT | 208° + 888 | 3121/8 [OTIS 18 |e 19 IZLI8 lZli¢ 0 Iz iP Iz Z ag -(9x9)
$89 F CLL | 98h F 9L'ZI | 989° F 00'T8 git t ig OTO [SLIT] 2 [OL/9T/ZZ/OT\OL/¢g g | 9 SIlTIs At
Seq’ = 99° 619° F 128 | OL’ F S$C'K6 Lir t 9 19 16 16 eib ig a -(9x¢
627 10°E | $86°F L09 | OOF’ E8TTOT| £ |8PT IPL Stig |S |T 9
IZ F 1¢° $68" F 6F'9 | 90F F 3389 $ 19 JOL er Li LT Sirig e g
TTE | 80T | SOT | ZOT | 66 | 96 | £6 | 06 | 28 | #8 | T8 | 84 | GŁ | ZL | 69 | 99 | £9 | 09| Łe | +e | 1s |
‘AD ‘a's "Y ‘ON
SIULA JO S]YSIOP] 10J soyouy UF S197U3Q SEVP |
al PI4JVL
ry x a ssouy 1 NI SINVId IZIV dO SLHÐITH AO NOILNJINLSIA AONTNOTAT
168 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
Table II shows a similar distribution of heights in
cross between no. 60, a dwarf pop maize commonly known
as Tom Thumb, and no. 54, a sugar corn known as Black
Mexican. The distribution of heights of no. 54 was ob-
tained in the same season as the F, generation. They
were both grown upon the same plot of ground in which
the soil appeared to be quite uniform. Unfortunately,
the exact distribution of the heights of no. 60 and of the
F, plants which were grown in previous seasons, is un-
known. The range of the variates shown by the black
lines, however, is correct. Furthermore, from notes re-
corded at the time we know that the F, generation was
comparatively uniform, the greater number of variates
being distributed around classes 67, 70 and 73 inches. In
this case, also, the effect of crossing is shown by the rela-
tively high plants of this generation. The plants of the
F, generation show a wide range of variation. ‘he
highest individuals are practically the height of the
highest individuals of the taller parent, no. 54. The
lowest plants of F, do not reach the lower range of no. 60.
I interpret this as due to continued heterozygosis in other
characters and to physiological correlation. By the latter
term I mean that since the plants of no. 60 are very small,
F, segregates of the same size could only be expected
where the ears and seeds also are very small. But since
the ears and seeds of these plants also show segrega-
tion in new combinations, normal growth correlation
probably resulted in a somewhat larger average size.
For example, little 40-inch plants were found with ears
three times the length of normal ears of no. 60. It is
likely that such plants might have been smaller if they
had been recombined with the characters necessary for
the production of smaller ears.
Table III and Figs. 1-4, show the lengths of ears in the
cross just described. In making this table the best ear
from each plant that bore a well-filled ear was taken.
The small ears, therefore, do not represent poor, unfilled
or supernumerary ears. The coefficients of variability
169
THE GENOTYPE HYPOTHESIS
No. 531]
‘SIVI 9014} WOIF UMOIY yz
‘SIVI GAI} WOIJ UMOIN yz
‘SIVO OM} WOIJ UMOID oz
‘SIBI JAY WOLF WAOIY) er
“OLGT Ut ‘wed “g pue Fo ON “G0GT Up UMoIT ‘uo T pue 09 ON sr
EI FOLGI | S80 F LTT | LPO F09 | €1%18 l6 |61|1z|2¢| 0F| Se lr | Fs|01\F | a Sa (FS ¥ 8-09)
66L F P8'6I | LEO FETI | L90 F79 T| 1/6 |8 |ZI|8i|8Z|egjLIj9T | Sts jT | ec (P9 X 8-09
chr F 9903 | B20 F GOT | seo Feo - I I 8 (ST 23 SF | 69 | $8 \STT| 86 | 6F| AL} 2 |T | ez al (p9 x 9-09
Z16 F 16ST | I0 FPS 6S0 F 9'F € |F ILI |SL/3t\¢ A (#9 X 2-09
E9 F FOF | PLO FIST | LOI FES #| GS /OLj/PI|L |9 |Z |3 bg
668° + PPPI | PZO F(E P80" FLT P | 86/33) 4 09
aa oe es|os gL OL 9'9 o'g | s'o oe es ri S'S) 08 | VS 0% |
‘AO ‘as V ‘ON
Sp9eg CZ JO 814319 M JOJ SMBIDH UT S19} 00H SEVO
(S X 09) Ssoup dO SATA9 JO SLHÐIAM JO NOLLAATALSIG] AONTNOAAT
AI S@TaVi
FPL 08'CS 180° 18% SEU FOSE | | S/T |ZE]TT|OL|ST |1823 jeg |se|se|zt|¢ |g 3 A (P9 X 8-09)
SIF FPF LI ESO FSZ LO FGI I |6 |ST|98|68|89/89 |&4 | Lh 9G GT) OT) T oz e
i963 FL9'SI 180° 66'T 890° F LCI I |9 | LT} 26] $9| 16 6ZI/SFT| 08/99/339 |F ot “A (FE X 9-09
LoL’ FSFI 880° 1¢'T (4 ties + |6 AT PL |SE/ S/T ‘a (PS X 9-09)
ISS FETII 880° L8'L IZUFS'9L | Z| L | OT/SE| 9%) S| Sr| IL |g bo ON
| ($82 F L331 10°F 18" 810° 9'9 |8 #6 |13| F 09 “ON
| 1% | 06 | 6I | 8E | ZT {| OL er | +I | er ZI 1} or 6 | 8 |2 DFS
O ‘a's Yy | ‘ON
i | sivy JO SySue'y 10j ‘wD UT 81940900 ssBIO
(PG X 09) SSOND NI Suv MO SHLONA'T JO NOILAOIINLSIA JAONTAOTAT
s III WIdvViL
170 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
Fig. 1. No. 60, female parent, illustrating variation in length of ear (4).
have again been calculated, but they hardly emphasize
the real segregation as well as do the photographs which
were made from representative ears of the different
classes found in the actual crop.
Table IV shows the segregation of weights of seeds in
F, in this same cross. Fig. 5 shows the average size of
Fic. 2. No. 54, male parent, illustrating variation in length of ear (p).
No. 531] THE GENOTYPE HYPOTHESIS 171
Fic. 3. Variation in length of ear of F; generation of cross between
No. 60 and No. 54 (4).
the seeds of the two parents and the F, generation and
the extremes of the F, generation. In making the
weights for this table, it was necessary to use a scheme
by which the sugary wrinkled seeds of the Black Mexican
parent, no. 54 could be weighed as starchy seeds. This
*
Sabet tae Be ae
Fic. 4. Variation in length of ear of F, generation of cross between
No. 60 and No. 54 (})
172 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
was done by planting the no. 54 between rows of the
hybrid. Sufficient crossed seeds which had become
starchy through Xenia were obtained to make the weights
given. Not all of the ears, however, had 25 starchy seeds,
which accounts for the small number of plants meas-
ured. Furthermore, the seeds of no. 54 were a rather
mixed lot, which of course resulted in a higher varia-
bility than would probably have been found if only seeds
Fic. 5. Average size of seeds of No. 60 and No. 54 and the F, generation of
the cross between them. Extremes of the F generation.
of the individual plant of no. 54 which was used as the
male parent of the cross, could have been planted. Per-
haps it should be noted here since the question might
arise, that since the size of the seeds on an ear is gov-
erned by the development of the pericarp, the sugar corn,
no. 54, was unaffected in other ways than by having the
pericarp filled out with starch by the hybridization which
occurred attended by the resultant Xenia.
In Tables III and IV the measurements and weights of
the F, generation were recorded from only one cross,
although three crosses between the two varieties were
made. It might be said that one has the right to com-
No. 531] THE GENOTYPE HYPOTHESIS 173
pare only the F, generation of cross of which the F,
generation is given. If this were granted our conclu-
sions in regard to segregation would be the same. It
might be said, however, that sufficient records were made
of the F, generations of the other crosses to know that
they differed but little from the family of which the data
were recorded. In addition, it is a fact that general
Fic. 6. Avers a ears of No. 60 and No, 58 and the F; ge ation of the cross
etween them, Extremes of the Fə generat
populations of the two parents were studied, and their
variation was undoubtedly greater than would have been
that of the inbred progeny of the three parent plants
of either variety.
An additional cross between Tom Thumb pop maize
and a small purple flint is illustrated in Fig. 6. The ears
pictures show the average size of the two parents and
the F, generation, and extremes of the F, generation.
In conclusion there are two points I wish to notice.
Unquestionable segregation in size characters has been
shown by comparison of the F, and F, generations. It
can scarcely be doubted that some of these segregates
will breed as true as the parent forms, yet one can
174 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von XLV
scarcely do more than speculate in regard to the specific
characters that are concerned in developing either organs
or individuals of certain sizes. There are probably many
characters that interact together in developing certain
characters, although the actual determinants in the germ
cells may be transmitted independently. These interde-
pendent reactions during development obscure to us the
real causes and what we regard as independent char-
acters may be but indirect results of unknown causes.
For example, the ability to evert their starch when heated
has been the distinguishing character of the subspecies
called Zea mays everta, the pop maizes. This character
so called, however, is the resulting physical condition of
the starch caused at least partially by the small size, the
thickness and the toughness of the enveloping pericarp. .
For these reasons it may not be possible—at least very
soon—to point out even the number of characters con-
cerned in size developments. From the number of ex-
treme segregates obtained in each case I might venture
to state that the size of ear in the cross shown in Fig.
5 is apparently due to not less than three characters,
while the size of ear in the other cross pictured seems
to be due to not less than four characters.
NOTES ON GUNDLACHIA AND ANCYLUS
DR. WILLIAM HEALEY DALL
U. S. NATIONAL MUSEUM
AsrourT seven years ago,! in the Nautilus I called at-
tention to certain problems connected with the genera
mentioned in the title of this paper, and urged investiga-
tion of the subject from the hypothetical view of the two
following propositions: :
1. That Gundlachia is merely an Ancylus which under
favorable circumstances has been able to form a cal-
careous epiphragm and survive the winter, which ordi-
narily kills the great mass of individuals, and, while
retaining the shell of the first season, to secrete an en-
larged and somewhat discrepant continuation of it dur-
ing the second summer.
2. That not all Ancyli necessarily have the ability to
do this, but the practise may have developed in certain
small species; and in tropical regions where the dry
season takes the place of winter it is possible that sur-
vival may become more or less habitual with some of
these species.
In this connection attention may be recalled to the
estivation in dry mud behind a double epiphragm, in the
Bahamas, of Segmentina dentata Gould,? and to the ob-
servations of Erland Nordenskjold? on Ancylus mori-
candi Orbigny, in Brazil.
During the past four years I have received an inter-
esting series of notes by Mr. John A. Allen, of Cleve-
land, Ohio, connected with the Nungesser Electrice Works
of that city, who has for some time been domesticating
in small aquaria species of fresh-water shells, including
* Nautilus, XVII, No. 9, pp. 97-98, January, 1904.
*Smithsonian Miscell. Coll., Vol. 47, Pt. 4, No. 1566, pp. 446-448,
April, 1905.
* Zool. Anzeiger, XXVI, pp. 590-593, July, 1903.
. 175
I6 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
Ancylus and Gundlachia. His observations extend over
some six years and his notes contain so much of interest
that it has seemed desirable to summarize and publish
his data, thus placing on record facts which may stimu-
late others to follow his example.
Mr. Allen was kind enough to send to the museum a
lot of Anacharis supposed to contain both Ancylus and
Gundlachia in the living state, and numerous specimens
of the former were observed in a jar to which the vege-
tation was consigned, immediately after it was filled
with water. We were not able to distinguish with cer-
tainty any Gundlachia, though some may have been pres-
ent, and the small aquarium was kept in good condition
to await developments. This was in December, 1907.
The Ancyli continued to exist in apparent health during
the winter. In May, 1908, they seemed to go into hiding,
but during the summer reappeared again in rather dimin-
ished numbers, while a few young ones were observed.
No particular change was noticed during the following
winter and spring. While absent during the summer of
1909, it became necessary to transfer the collections to
the new building of the National Museum and the aquaria
were set aside. After the confusion of the transfer was
measurably over, I examined the aquaria and, finding
nothing visible, had the contents of the smaller one
(about 8 X 4 X 10 inches in size) removed and submitted
to the most careful scrutiny, the sand at the bottom
being placed in a fine sieve for examination, but not a
trace of Ancylus remained. I concluded that there had
been sufficient carbonic acid in the water to completely
dissolve these fragile shells after death, and that some
unfavorable condition had exterminated the colony. In
the other aquarium, which was about eight times the ca-
pacity of the smaller one, the water had evaporated to
about half its normal quantity and no mollusks except —
a few small Lymnzas were visible, while the Anacharts
had suffered considerably by the adverse conditions.
This was towards the end of November, when it was
No. 531] GUNDLACHIA AND ANCYLUS 177
difficult to get any fresh weed except by purchase. Being
much occupied, I contented myself with having the
aquarium filled with Potomac water from the tap. A
short time afterward I was surprised to note a large
number of young Ancylus with clean translucent shells,
on the side of the tank. There had never been any
Ancylus in the aquarium except such as might have been
put in with Mr. Allen’s Anacharis. These had up to
February 22, 1910, grown rapidly and continued to flour-
ish, though the number then visible was only about half
that which was noticed in November. In April the
Ancylus completely disappeared again. I have not been
able to discover where they went to, as the most careful
scrutiny of the sparse amount of Anacharis remaining
has not revealed any on the stems or leaflets. None of
the specimens seemed to have formed any septum and
nearly all of them were carrying a small colony of five
or six minute hydroids on the posterior upper surface
of the shell. The shells in February were still too fragile
to admit of removal from the glass without crushing,
and most of them kept on the side away from the
window, on the sill of which the tank stood. They were
about 3.0 mm. in length, and remarkably active, moving
about on the glass with surprising speed.
Subsequently Mr. Allen kindly furnished me specimens
of all these stages in alcohol; and I also had the oppor-
tunity of seeing some specimens in alcohol which had
been sent to Mr. Bryant Walker and Dr. H. A. Pilsbry
in 1908, and which were obviously identical with those
sent as examples by Mr. Allen to me over a year later,
and Dr. Pilsbry thought also with specimens collected
at Rockford, Illinois, in the ancyloid stage. On account
of its relations to the Gundlachia it will be referred to
here as Ancylus meekiana, since, unless in the Gund-
lachia stage, it seems not to have been described.
Mr. Allen also sent a lot of the wild Ancylus collected
in the Thornburg lagoon and which he was disposed to
regard as something distinct from his aquarium ancy-
178 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vov. XLV
loids. After a careful examination under the microscope
I have been unable to find any constant differences be-
tween shells of the same age, except that the larger
specimens of Ancylus seem to have grown continuously
and evenly, while those ancyloids which attained a
Gundlachia stage show the sharp contrast between the
separate stage and that with the expanded third stage
of the shell. As this is only what one might expect if the
Ancylus attained its full growth without interruption,
while the ancyloid becoming septate passed through a
resting stage and then began to grow again, I consider
this difference of no moment systematically. The young
Ancylus and the ancyloid of the same length appeared
generally quite identical, though I noticed that in both
the obliquity of the apex varied to some extent, being
more emphatically bent toward the posterior right side
in some individuals than in others.
Ancylus meekiana is, when young, for a time nearly
parallel-sided, the growth toward maturity being more ex-
panded than at first. The apex is behind the middle of the
shell and slightly inclined toward the posterior right-hand
side at maturity. The microscope reveals some very
feeble radial striae from the apex, mostly vanishing be-
fore they reach the base. The incremental lines are not
strongly marked and the shell when clean is of a pale
translucent yellowish color. At or near maturity the
shell assumes a more oval form slightly more expanded
in front than behind. The animal has short pointed ©
tentacles, well-marked black eyespots, and a bluish-white
color, except about the mouth, where the yellow-brown
jaws are laterally set and the buccal mass has a pinkish
color. The shell is about 3.6 mm. long, 2.3 wide, and 1.0
high. In the dark-colored specimens of the wild Ancylus,
on the inside, may often be seen a dark-brown line cor-
responding to the margin of the young Ancylus and
showing the more parallel-sided early outline.
Miss Mary Breen, who has been studying the anatomy
of the fresh-water gastropods of the District of Co-
No. 531] GUNDLACHIA AND ANCYLUS ' 179
lumbia, was kind enough to undertake the removal and
mounting of radule taken from specimens of the differ-
ent stages, as well as from the wild Ancylus. This was a
task of no little difficulty on account of the extremely
minute size of the organ. The radule of ancyloids, sep-
tates and Gundlachia were absolutely identical in ap-
pearance and in number of teeth, the formula 5-10-1-10-5,
holding good for all. The uncinal teeth are not gradu-
ally modified from the laterals, but change abruptly and
form a distinct band on each side of the radula. The
lateral part of Stimpson’s figure of the dentition of his
Gundlachia meekiana is imperfectly made out, and obvi-
ously inaccurate; due doubtless to the fact that he had
only a few specimens and a not very powerful microscope.
Unfortunately his original material was destroyed in
the great fire at Chicago of 1871.
An examination of the radula of a septate form, col-
lected in Nicaragua by Professor B. Shimek, showed a
similar radula but with one more uncinal tooth on each
side. In this case, unfortunately, while endeavoring to
transfer the minute object to a slide for permanent pres-
ervation, it mysteriously disappeared, and a trial with
a second specimen was no more successful.
The form of the laterals is fairly well given by Dr.
Stimpson, and the rhachidian tooth is correct in his fig-
ure; but the gradual modification and uncertain number
of the outer teeth of the radula do not agree with our
observations on the specimens from Ohio. Renewed
correspondence with Mr. Allen led to the preparation
of this paper, pending the continuation of his observa-
tions.
Since the different stages of Gundlachia need to be
carefully discriminated, I have adopted the following
nomenclature for them.
In the first stage, when the young shell has a laterally
compressed subconical shape without any trace of
Septum, and is to all intents and purposes, concholog-
180 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
ically and anatomically, an Ancylus, I call the individ-
uals ‘‘aneyloids.’’
In the second stage when the base of the conical shell
is more or less closed by a flat horizontal septum con-
tinuous with the margin around it, I call the individuals
‘“septates. ”’
Lastly, when the animal in its second season begins to
form a marginal expansion external to the septum, and
with its longitudinal axis sometimes at a considerable
angle with the axis of the ancyloid shell, I reserve for
this stage, up to and including maturity, the term
**Gundlachia.’’
Mr. Allen kindly sent alcoholic specimens of ancyloids,
septates and Gundlachias from his aquarium for ana-
tomical examination. The posterior part of the foot en-
tirely hides the septum when the living animal on the
walls of the aquarium is examined through the glass.
Nothing to distinguish it from ordinary Ancylus is
visible in the soft parts. The creatures feed on the
microscopic alge, etc., which grow on the walls of their
domicile and when feeding the movement of the jaws and
radula can be seen with ease by means of a magnifier.
On the alcoholic specimens, on the exterior of the shell,
were many minute lenticular capsules which, from anal-
ogy with Neritina, Pompholyx, ete., were supposed to be
the ovicapsules. The very young shells are very trans-
parent and fragile. It is difficult to find them until they
have reached a length of over a millimeter, and so far it
has proved impracticable to detach them from their roost
without crushing them, they are so extremely fragile.
The smallest septate seen was slightly less than two
millimeters in length and the animal had entirely with-
drawn behind the septum, which covers more than two
thirds of the aperture.
The species in the Gundlachia stage agrees substan-
tially with the form described from the District of Co-
lumbia by Stimpson, under the name of Gundlachia
meekiana. Asin many other fresh-water shells the newly
No. 531] GUNDLACHIA AND ANCYLUS 181
formed shell is yellowish translucent, while the older
part, especially when the pond or aquarium has a muddy
bottom, often becomes darkened or even blackish, and
more or less covered by a growth of conferva. Mr.
Allen calls attention to the fact that the sharp line of
demarkation which separates the dark encrusted shell
of the septate from its translucent Gundlachia extension
in the final stage, is evidence that the growth is not con-
tinuous, but that a resting period of some duration sepa-
rates the two stages.
I have preferred for the most part to refrain from
theorizing on the inferences to be drawn from the data,
letting them speak for themselves. To me, however, the
facts tend strongly to confirm the hypothesis suggested
in the opening paragraphs of this paper.
GENERAL NOTES
The following notes are partly summarized from a
rather voluminous correspondence with Mr. Allen, ex-
tending over more than four years.
The Thornburg lagoon is an abandoned channel’ of
the Cuyahoga River. In 1903 the river was fairly well
stocked with Unionidæ, but soon after that date the con-
tamination of the river by drainage and sewage killed off
the naiad population. This contamination is not believed
by Mr. Allen to have seriously affected the water of the
lagoon, though for some reason it does not seem to be a
place favorable to vigorous growth of mollusks. It pro-
duces a dwarf Planorbis parvus, a poorly developed
Physa, a small form of Lymnea humilis modicella and a
scanty supply of Amnicola. It is nearly filled with
Nuphar on the leaves of which Ancylus is found; also
Ceratophyllum, Potamogeton, ete., occur, especially
where the water is shallow.
At one place the bank bordering on the lagoon is steep
and the water near it deep, so here even at low water
mollusks would never be left dry. There is another por-
tion of the lagoon where a wide zone, producing vegeta-
182 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vor, XLV
tion on which Ancylus occurs, is sometimes left uncov-
ered when by dry weather the water becomes low. In
this part of the lagoon three Gundlachia were found.
In general the water of the lagoon is deep and constant,
but owing to the presence of these shallows the hypoth-
esis that the formation of a septum in Gundlachia may
be due to alternation of wet and dry periods can not be
wholly excluded.
Ancylus occurs in one to three feet of water where
Ceratophyllum is abundant. In the deeper water shore
there is more Nuphar and less fine vegetation the Ancylus
seems to be absent or rare.
Mr. Allen attempted to domesticate the Thornburg
Ancylus, placing many young ones in a 15 X 9-inch jar
stocked with Anacharis from the lagoon. Apparently,
all soon disappeared, although Lymnea and Amnicola,
coincidentally transferred, lived a long time.
NOTES ON THE SEVERAL JARS USED AS AQUARIA
The 15 X 9-inch Jar—This originally contained a
dwarf Nymphea which died. There was a mixture of
peaty and ordinary soil about three inches deep in the
bottom of the jar. This was stocked in 1906 with
Anacharis and some specimens of Vivipara. The date
of the first appearance in it of the ancyloid stage of
Gundlachia was not determined. February, 1907, individ-
uals were very numerous and, some being taken out to
save in the dry state, the septate form was discovered.
Mr. Allen had noticed the presence of the ancyloid form
some time before. The first date at which Gundlachia
had been obtained from the Thornburg lagoon was July
15, 1906, but Mr. Allen doubts if the copious swarm of
ancyloid individuals of Gundlachia could have originated
in the jar so quickly from individuals accidentally put
in at that time. Some of the vegetation in the jar had
been received from elsewhere in Ohio, and some from
another state. The ancyloid stage of the Gundlacha
can not be distinguished from the associated Ancylus by
No. 531] GUNDLACHIA AND ANCYLUS 183
the external features as seen in the aquarium. In Feb-
ruary, 1907, probably hundreds of the unseptate ancyloid
form were present. There were several Vivipara in the
jar that winter. Subsequently they were removed, Mr.
Allen thinking that they might consume the food supply
needed by the ancyloids. Having heard that the stunted
growth of aquarium mollusks might be due to the pres-
ence of their soluble excreta in the water, he thought the
removal of the Vivipara might have had some influence
in this way. However, the removal of the large snails did
not stop septation.
In the winter of 1906-07 the specimens of Planorbis
parvus in the jar were large and healthy. In the winter
of 1907-08 the individuals of this species appeared
dwarfed. The water in the jar was then removed and
replaced by distilled water. After that the Planorbis
(and Mr. Allen thought also the Anacharis) took on a
more healthy appearance. He thought that the concen-
tration of saline matter due to refilling loss from evapo-
ration with ordinary lake water might have been influ-
ential injuriously, and the transfer to distilled water
have lessened the tendency to septation.
In the winter of 1907-08 septate individuals of which
the exact number were not recorded were again found in
the jar. In January and February, 1908, the ancyloid
form was fairly plenty, though not so numerous as in the
previous year. In spring they became fewer and in May,
1908, there were none visible (although in a smaller jar
there were some). They reappeared in the first half of
June, 1908. July 3, 1908, an immature septate individ-
ual was taken, and another on July 20. On the theory
that the septum is formed during a resting stage, these
may have been forming during May, when nothing was
in sight. August 3, 1906, another specimen was taken.
January 11, 1909, a specimen was found which had be-
gun to add the third or expanding stage of the shell ex-
ternal to the septum. No mature Gundlachia were
taken from this jar during the winter of 1908-09.
184 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
August 19, 1909, a minute ancyloid specimen was taken,
and another August 24. September 26 six ancyloids
were visible at one time, but were not disturbed. It was
noticed that the ancyloids came out in sight on the walls
of the jar more freely on cloudy than sunny days.
This jar, December, 1909, contains a dense and vigor-
ous growth of Anacharis, also plenty of fresh-water
algw. It stands in the factory room subject to the fall
of factory dust, and to the changes of temperature in
the room. When the room gets unusually cold the
ancyloids mostly retire out of sight, temporarily. De-
cember 9, 1909, two specimens with the third stage of
the shell partly grown were taken near the top of the jar.
A sudden spell of unusually cold weather having begun
two nights previous may account for the ancyloids hav-
ing gone, as they did, into hiding, but it was somewhat
surprising that the more nearly mature form had not
also hidden.
The 8 X 6-inch Jar—This had sand on the bottom and
was planted with Anacharis from the larger jar, carry-
ing with it Ancylus, Gundlachia and Planorbis parvus
in the summer of 1908. The following winter, having
nothing but sand and water to live on, the vegetation had
become rather attenuated and feeble looking. The ancy-
loids were few and perhaps not more than half as large
as those in the larger jar. January 19, 1909, two or three
immature septate specimens were taken from this jar,
and February 10 one about half grown. Very few ancy-
loids were seen about this time in this jar. February 11
two immature septate specimens were taken, being all
of either form which were at that time visible. Feb-
ruary 24, 1909, for the first time since the eleventh, a
small ancyloid was noticed. On the twenty-seventh one
moderate-sized but fully septate individual was taken
and one ancyloid seen. Another septate was taken
March 8, and March 11-13 a solitary ancyloid was
noticed.
Fearing that there was not enough stock in the jar to .
No. 581] |. GUNDLACHIA AND ANCYLUS 185
continue the race, March 15, Mr. Allen put in half a
dozen ancyloids from the large jar. March 29 a mature
septate was taken out, and it was noticed that the Plan-
orbis looked frail as if insufficiently supplied with lime
salts. October 11, 1909, two half-grown septates were
taken from this jar. In the winter (1909-10) the Plan-
orbis, for some unknown reason, completely disap-
peared.
From these data Mr. Allen concludes that about 80 per
cent. of the stock in this jar had assumed the septate
form, the conditions obviously being such as to stunt
both Anacharis and ancyloids. In the 15 X 9-inch jar
the vegetation is luxuriant and abundant, and the sep-
tate individuals produced were only about two to five
- per cent. of the ancyloids. From this Mr. Allen con-
cludes that the formation of a septum is promoted by
causes which tend to restrict or retard growth.
The 9 X 7-inch Jar—This has a mixture of sand and
soil at the bottom. There is plenty of algal growth, but
the Anacharis is not as vigorous as in the 15 x 9-jar,
from which it was stocked with ancyloids and Planorbis.
In the winter of 1906-07 it yielded two septates. The
winter of 1907-08 ancyloids were fairly numerous, more
so than during the first winter, but no septates were de-
tected. July 1, 1908, young fry, hatched that season,
were visible. March 8, 1908, a fine large mature Gund-
lachia was taken. The original ancyloid part was deep
black and the flaring expansion beyond it was colorless
and transparent. In the sand-bottomed jar the mature
Gundlachia is uniformly yellowish translucent, but in
the large jar with mud bottom the whole shell gets black-
ish. December 13, 1909, a census of this jar was at-
tempted. The day was dark and a count difficult, but the
result was six septates and two ancyloids, all eight being
small and immature.
A Jar without Planorbis—Thinking it might be de-
sirable to have a stock of the ancyloids not associated
with Planorbis, Mr. Allen, about February, 1909, when
186 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
the Planorbis was not breeding, transferred some Ana-
charis and a number of mature ancyloids to a new
15 X 9-inch jar, taking care not to introduce any Plan-
orbis. May 3, 1909, the first ancyloid hatched in the jar
was noticed; it was about half the size of the parents.
Others appeared later. By December, 1909, the parent
stock had disappeared and the stock hatched in the jar
remains very small, indicating some unfavorable condi-
tion. The bottom of the jar was covered with a mixture
of ordinary and swamp soil, but the supply of swamp
soil used in previous jars having been used up, that in
the present jar was taken from another place, and may
have contained some unfavorable matter. The Ana-
charis in the jar is fairly flourishing, but there is no
green algal growth.
General Conclusions—The Gundlachia may repro-
duce before assuming the completely mature form. The
shell varies in apparent color in accordance with the
muddy or sandy character of the bottom soil, but the
dark coating in the former case is not incorporated with
the shell structure.
The ancyloid stage has a period of least activity im
May. In July and August the septates appear. In au-
tumn and early winter the third stage is developed, be-
coming mature and complete in February or March.
This course is, however, not invariable in the aquarium
or domesticated specimens, since Mr. Allen has taken
ancyloids in January or February, an irregularity prob-
ably due to temperature and which might not have oc-
cured in specimens under perfectly natural conditions.
It is not certain that the ancyloids detected by Mr. Allen
in July and August were the young of that season, since
the minute creatures are very difficult to detect in the
aquarium and can not be handled. They are so trans-
lucent in the younger stages as to be practically invisible.
However, it is probable that the eggs are laid during the
winter and hatched in the very early spring.
It seems likely that under average conditions only aà
No. 531] GUNDLACHIA AND ANCYLUS 187
small proportion of the individuals advance beyond the
septate stage; and also that, of the ancyloids, only part
reach that stage. It is also probable, from Mr. Allen’s
observations, that anything which tends to retard de-
velopment may coincidently increase the tendency to
form a septum.
Since there is a period of least activity in May, a nat-
ural observation year will be from one May to another.
Mr. Allen summarizes the results obtained during the
period, May, 1908, to May, 1909, as follows:
None being taken before July nor after the following
March, there were secured between July, 1908, and
March, 1909, inclusive:
9 X 7-inch jar 1 septate
15 X 9-inch jar 4 septates
total 15.
8 X 6-inch jar 10 septates
-= From August 19, 1909, to December 13, 1909:
15 X 9-inch jar 8 septates
fs 16.
9 X 7-inch jar 6 septates
8 X 6-inch jar 2 septates
Further correspondence, during February, 1910, af-
fords additional notes.
A lot of the wild Thornburg Ancylus in alcohol was
sent by Mr. Allen and, contrary to his expectation, on
careful comparison with his series of ancyloids from his
aquaria, no difference, beyond slight individual varia-
tions, could be observed in the shells of the two series,
while the radula and the soft parts, after repeated com-
parisons, seemed to be identical in both.
Mr. Allen especially notes that in the winter, 1909-10,
the septates were the prevailing form in his aquaria,
exactly the reverse of the case when the aquaria were
freshly established. The generation, which appeared in
ay and June, 1909, in the ‘‘Planorbis-free’’ jar, was
dwarfed was not in sight during the latter part of the.
winter, 1909-10, and may possibly have all died. Mr.
Allen attributes the poor success of this jar to the use of
188 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
swamp soil from a different place from that previously
used.
February 15, 1910, being a dark day and therefore
favorable for the septates to be out of sight, Mr. Allen
counted those visible in the large aquarium. Six sep-
tates and one ancyloid were noted. This illustrates the
observation that (excepting the ‘‘Planorbis-free’’ jar)
the septate is the prevailing form this season, and is
promoted by causes which dwarf or retard growth.
After noting the inexplicable way in which fresh-water
mollusks sometimes appear and disappear from pools
where they occur, Mr. Allen further suggests that the
septate form may be a prelude to total disappearance of
the species from a given place.
Another count on February 17, 1910, gave three ancy-
loids and three septates in sight, which Mr. Allen re-
marks is the first time for a considerable period that the
two forms have appeared in equal numbers. In the large
jar every mature specimen seen this season has been
conspicuously bicolored, the ancyloid or septate part
being stained deep black, while the flaring extension is
translucent and colorless, indicating that a resting period
intervened between the completion of the septum and the
formation of the mature shell.
Three ancyloids seen February 17 were all translu-
cent and about the same size. There can be little doubt
that they date from the summer of 1909. Hence, Mr.
Allen infers that the blackened original shells of the ma-
ture Gundlachia date from the season previous.
TABLE FOR JANUARY AND FEBRUARY, 1910
Specimens taken or observed
Date Gundlachia Septates Ancyloids
Janvary 12 (hig jar) 6.60685 00 83 0
Jannar 19 Gio MY gk, 1 0
January 31 (small jar) ............ 1 0 0
February 4 (Qui y 2 0 0
February 5 (big tar) -A se. 3 1 0
February 6 (medium jar) .......... 0 2 0
No. 531] GUNDLACHIA AND ANCYLUS 189
My last communication from Mr. Allen, dated De-
cember 11, 1910, contains the following additional notes:
As I have already written there was plenty of A-form (ancyloids)
and no G-form (septates) visible in my original large jar last summer.
But, since the latter part of November, besides ancyloids in various
stages, young septates have been visible in fair abundance. I counted
about a dozen in sight at one time.
He concludes that ancyloids are present most of the
year, but only young ones in May and mostly also in June.
But septates appear to be a strictly winter form, that is,
the immature septate stage appears in August or later,
reaches maturity (Gundlachia) in February or March,
and disappears about the end of April, after which and
a shorter or longer interval the young ancyloids of the
season begin to appear in the jars.
If the hypothesis stated at the beginning of this paper
be well founded, it would explain why mature Gund-
lachias appear, if at all, usually as a few individuals in
any given locality, and their presence can not be counted
on, as in the usual case of fresh-water mollusks, and is
distinctly a rarity in the temperate regions of the conti-
nent, where there are no well-defined wet and dry seasons.
NOTES AND LITERATURE
MIMICRY
IN some ways it would be a pity if the theory that mimicry has
arisen through the operation of natural selection must be dis-
carded since it is so ingenious in itself and was originated and
fostered by such masters of theoretical biology. However, the
old order seems to be surely giving place to new, here, as in other
phases of the study of evolution. Since Wallace’s ‘‘Papilionide
of the Malayan Region”’ the case of Papilio polytes has been a
classic. The females of this butterfly are of three sorts: one like
the male polytes, one like P. aristolochie and the third like P.
hector. The two latter species are supposed to be distasteful to
insectivorous animals while P. polytes is supposed to be edible.
e two ‘‘models’’ are numerous in individuals and while ‘*P.
hector and the hector form of P. polytes are confined to India
and Ceylon, both P. aristolochiew and the aristolochie form of P.
polytes have a wider range eastward.’’ The case is complete and
has been convincing. :
However, Punnett! found that in Ceylon
The following statements may be taken as a fair presentation of the
facts:
1. In the low-country the male form of polytes female is at least as
numerous as either of the other forms, and may be the most abundant
of the three. ;
2. In the northeast of the island, in the hector country, the aristo-
lochiæ form polytes is nearly as abundant as the hector form, though its
model is at any rate exceedingly scarce.
3. Higher up-country, where P. hector is rare or absent and P.
aristolochie is common, the hector form of polytes is more abundant
than the aristolochi# form.
It is obvious that these statements are not in harmony with the ideas
of those who look to the theory of mimicry for an explanation of the
polymorphism that exists among the females of P. polytes.
His observations concerning the enemies of butterflies con-
firm those of other heterodox students, namely: that ‘‘as serious
_enemies of butterflies in the imago state birds may be left out of
*«¢Mimiery in Ceylon Butterflies, with a Suggestion as to the Nature of
Polymorphism,’’ Spolia Zeylanica, Vol. VII, Part XXV, September, 1910.
190
No. 531] NOTES AND LITERATURE 191
account,’’ that lizards ‘‘certainly do not appear to exercise that
nice discrimination with regard to butterflies which is necessary
for the establishment of mimicking forms on the theory of nat-
ural selection,’’ and that asilids are not averse to preying upon
** distasteful species.’
After pointing out that the resemblances on which the theory
was based are far less striking in living, moving specimens than
in their expanded museum state, he says
Apart then from the questions whether the resemblances in many
cases of mimicry are sufficiently close to be of effective service to the
mimic, and whether the action of natural selection can be regarded as
sufficiently stringent to have brought these resemblances into being,
there are still the following difficulties in the way of the acceptance of
the hypothesis of those who look to natural selection as an explanation
of polymorphic forms in Lepidoptera:
1. The attribution of selection value to minute variation.
2. The absence of transitional forms.
3. The frequent absence of mimicry in the male sex.
4. The inability to offer an explanation of polymorphism, where the
polymorphic forms ean not be regarded as mimics of a distasteful
species.
Moreover, the hypothesis assumes that minute variations of all sorts
can be inherited, a position which at present is lacking in experimental
proof.
The gist of the constructive part of his paper is as follows:
Natural selection plays no part in the formation of these polymorphie
forms, but they are regarded as having arisen by sudden mutation, and
series of transitional forms do not exist because such series are not
biologically possible. Polymorphie forms may arise and may persist,
provided that they are not harmful to the species, and it is possible
to look upon their existence as due to the absence of natural selection
rather than to the operation of this factor. . . . That polymorphism
m a species should so frequently be confined to the female sex has long
been remarked upon by those who study these matters, and the explana-
tion most favored is that the female, burdened as she is with the next
generation, is more exposed to the action of natural selection and in
greater need of some protective adaptation. The weak point of such a
view is that it does not explain why the male is not similarly protected.
Tn Connection with this problem recent Mendelian research on sex-
limited inheritance is highly suggestive. It has been shown that cer-
tain types of inheritance receive their simplest explanation on the as-
sumption that the female is heterozygous for a sex factor not contained
qn the male and that this sex factor may, on segregation of the gametes,
repel the factor for some other character for which the female is also
192 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Voi XLV
heterozygous. From the beautiful experiments of Doncaster and Ray-
nor it has been inferred that inheritance of this type occurs in the
common currant moth (Abraxis grossulariata), where a distinct color
variety, var. lacticolor, occurs. The factor for grossulariata pattern
appears to segregate against the female sex factor, with the conse-
quence that in only one type of mating, and that a rare one, is the
lacticolor pattern transmitted to the male sex.
Gametic formule are suggested and the conditions they im-
pose are mentioned, but no breeding work was done. Whether
the above explanation of the behavior of grossulariata is correct
or not and also the correctness of the suggested formule for
polytes are immaterial to the present discussion. It is now well
known that ‘‘mutations’’ do occur in the females of insects and
that the new characters can be transferred to the male by proper
breeding. But, why do the mutants of P. polytes resemble
greatly, even if they do not do so to such an extent as had been
supposed, other species? On account of similar anatomical and
physiological make up; or, in this case, did the proper gametic
couplings once take place so that the then new female type was
transferred to the males (as in grossulariata) and was there-
after continued with such other modifications as were necessary
to separate them taxonomically? In other words, the mimicking
species came first and gave rise to the model!
Mutation, in itself, is not the whole story. Granting it, we
must be given a reason for the mutant resembling something else
and while the amendment just made to Punnett’s paper may
earry for this case, the chances are against it and we can not
apply it to resemblances between species of different orders. In
this connection, however, there seems to be an important thing
which is often overlooked. It would be far more wonderful if,
among the thousands of new forms which have arisen, there were
no resemblances than it is that some of the forms are very much
alike.
As Punnett and others have pointed out, the same process
which brought about such a close resemblance between, for ex-
ample, earwigs (Orthoptera) and rove beetles (Coleoptera) that
they are frequently mixed in entomological collections doubtless
caused also the resemblances (here called mimicry because an
advantage can be imagined) between certain flies and certam
stinging Hymenoptera. If ‘‘chance’’ or ‘‘environment’’ is used
in the former case it is not unlikely that it applies in the latter
also. Frank E. LUTZ.
The Anatomical Laboratory
of Charles H. Ward
189 West Avenue, Rochester, N. Y.
OUR HUMAN SKELETONS l ientifically
prepared and mounted. They are undoubtedly the finest and strongest
skeletons obtainable, and are purchased by the leading Medical and
Literary Colleges, Schools, Surgeons, etc. We make a number of special
skeletons for demonstrating dislocations, muscular ant
landmarks, muscles,
The mounting of i articulations permits movements as in tife.
Strength sol Tigidity ar are = by the use a a special bronze wire of
dia sdatimm
normous oxidation. Portability 3
and ease of demonstration are attained by our sdokcsed! steel clutch — i
ard, gee is a great protection as well. ji
ese skeletons are shipped entirely "k up, carefully wrapped, ax
with ay ies directions for papkig. a ae pe Danem qT
gives further details. ey
OUR SKELETONS OF TYPES OF VERTEBRATES are large i
American species, mounted in b4
aa E T TORES of
Sabra ae a E ms are leni era ema
Schoolsan nd Universities. The series includes complete
3 ‘of which Se ialf
Se ek Lite Masks « of Aborigi & si i Al
a Ca t i of i
The American Naturalist
A Monthly Journal, established in 1867, Devoted to the Advancement of the Biological Sciences
with Special Reference to the Factors
of Organic Evolution and Heredi
CONTENTS OF THE SEPTEMBER NUMBER
Nuclear apga of Sexual AST in the
Alge. Dr, LEY Moore DAVI
ena! renna of spoe 1 Reproduction in Fungi,
ESSOR Harp.
Ss Pose fo the aaa Dinosaurs. Dr. W. D,
Matt
Shorter pre and Discussion: Evolution without Iso-
lation, Dr. JOHN T. ETA saeth Seema,
CasrER u on LD; The Logic of Chance in
P , ARTHUR S. ex heag
Notes and Literature: Animal Structure and Habits
Professor G. H. PARKER. Plant Physiology, C. L.
B.
CONTENTS OF THE OCTOBER NUMBER
LT
Nuclear Phenomena of Sexual i in Gym-
nosperms. CHARLES J. CHAMBE
Nuclear Phenomena of Sexual 1 Reproduction in Angio-
sperms. Professor D. M. M
Shorter nega and Discussion : ‘ache. Dr. Max
Mors
Variations in Urosalpinx. Dr. HERBERT EUGENE
WALTER.
Notes and Literature: Notes on rato ae
Davip serge JorpAN, The Mammals of Colorado,
Prof D. A. COCKEREL LL,
CONTENTS OF THE NOVEMBER NUMBER
mp res He of Sieg tee sipe in Man. organ C.
and CHARLES B, DAVEN
The pes iii of the Hoey Bee—Can ach deta
Colors? JOHN LOVE
Shorter Articles and D : The Arithmetic of atic
Product Moment Method "at ce atm
cient of Correlation: Dr. J. ARTHUR E
Notes and Literature: Schlosser on Fayû is,
Dr. W. D. MEE The Ophidian mip Grayia:
Professor T. D, A. COCKERELL.
CONTENTS OF THE DECEMBER NUMBER
seas of Skin Pi ee in Man. cient c.
AVENPORT an B. DAVEN
Spawn and Larva of mr cena Sii Pro-
fessor W. H, PIERSO
The Loge of Sizes a Shapesin Plants. Professor
R. A. EMERSON.
Shorter Articles and Discussion : The Modification of
a erin bai „External Conditions.
Profi D. A. COCKE
Notes es Literature: Heredity, aes W. J. SPILLMAN.
Index to Volume XLIV.
——
CONTENTS OF THE JANUARY NUMBER
Somatic Alteration: Its Origination and Inheritance.
Dr. D. T. MacDoueaL,
The Nature of Graft- hybrids. Professor Dovcias
HOUGHTON CAMPBELL.
A Double Hen’s Egg. Dr. J. THOMAS PATTERSON.
Notes and Literature: Heredity, Dr. W. J. SPILLMAN.
CONTENTS OF THE FEBRUARY NUMBER
The Sp rey of Nave a tion Si Pure peas to Sex
mited Inheri and to xual Dimorphism.
Profe ssor T. H. prana
ear Lines in cts age te’ ott Genetics in Lower Organisms.
rofess
Pad ‘outs of Tem sai upon Growing Mice, and
the Persistence of Such Effects a a Subsequent Gen-
ration. Dr, Francis B. SuMN
The ee Ratio oa Biended regret SHINK-
Data. - g=» Relative Conspicuousness n enga and Self-
lored F Dr. RAYMOND PEA
Some Considerations panime FA the Photogen Fane
Shorter Articles and Discussion : Computing Correla”
in Cases where Symmetrical — are com”
manly used. Professor
ame
Single Number 35 Cents
Yearly Subscription, $4.00
The NATURALIST will be sent to new subscribers for four months for One Dollar
Garrison, N. Y.
THE SCIENCE PRESS
Lancaster, Pa.
Sub-Station 84: NEW YORK
VOL. XLV, NO, 532 APRIL, 1911
THE
AMERICAN
NATURALIST
A MONTHLY JOURNAL
Devoted to the Advancement of the Biological Sciences with
Special Reference to the Factors of Evolution
CONTENTS
Page
I. Genetical Studies on Oenothera. II. Dr. BRADLEY MOORE Davis - - 198
II. The Genotypes of Maize. Dr. GEORGE HARRISON SHULL - - - -234
II. Notes and Literature: Is the Female Frog Heterozygous in regard to Sex De-
termination? Professor T. H. MORGAN. The Mutation Theory, Dr. R. R.
GATES - ~ an ~ "a = - ~ - - - ~ - sete 263
THE SOIENCE PRESS
LANCASTER, PA. GARRISON, N. Y.
NEW YORK: SUB-STATION 84
The American Naturalist
SS intended for publication and books, etc., intended for review should be
sent tate Editor of THE AMERICAN NATURALIST, Garrison-on-Hucson, New York.
Articles containing research work bearing on the problems of organic evolu-
tion are especially welcome, and will be given preference in publication
a. hundrea reprints of ere are supplied to authors free of charge.
urther reprints will be supplied at co
tions and adv srl _— roe sent et >a: a The
posta
rip
subscription price is four dollars a year.
twe yes -five cents additional. The charge for single copies is
for a page.
thirty-five cents, The advertising rates are Four Dollars
—— THE SCIENCE PRESS
‘Lancaster, Pa. Garrison, N. Y.
_ NEW YORK: Sub-Station 84
- Entered , tter, April 2, 1908, at th r, Pa., under the Act ot
3 Se i uaig g
Se aaa | ARRE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY
= ical ———- Specimens. Books on Natural SUPPEN DEP ANTENE a of see
= History, Seience, ‘ravel, Voyages, eto. See Tux | %2 Fobtyological Material of some invertebrates, fishes (in-
cae 5 and mam-
sae ae ee aaia al ales PAR
= A Duke St, Adelphi—LondonEngland o PES bate lisis and
M. GRAY, Tiai oh a
r F Badge Dorani Press. |
(E England) :
JOURNAL OF GENETICS
W. a. M.A., F. R-S., Director of the John Innes H
i and R. C. PUNNET
Variation ain
nanas piares
THE
AMERICAN NATURALIST
Vor. XLV | April, 1911 No. 532
GENETICAL STUDIES ON CENOTHERA. II
Some Hysrips or Cnothera biennis ann O. grandiflora
THAT RESEMBLE 0. Lamarckiana
DR. BRADLEY MOORE DAVIS
Tue status of Cnothera Lamarckiana is a matter
which must be given serious consideration in any attempt
to judge the value of De Vries’s mutation theory, for the
reason that the behavior of this form in throwing off
marked variants (mutants) from the type has been re-
garded by De Vries as direct experimental proof of mu-
tation. Indeed, the theory of De Vries may fairly be
said to rest chiefly upon the behavior of this interesting
plant, the account of which forms so large a part of his
work, ‘‘Die Mutationstheorie,’’ 1901-1903.
Aside from his claim of direct proof of the origin of
mutations from nothera Lamarckiana, De Vries offers
a considerable body of indirect evidence of the sort pre-
sented in Darwin’s ‘‘Variation of Animals and Plants
under Domestication,’’ and in that extensive and very
carefully sifted account of Bateson, ‘‘Materials for the
Study of Variations,” 1894. However, much of this in-
direct evidence of De Vries deals with the origin of
‘‘sports’’ from domesticated forms or with the origin
* Contribution from the Laboratory of Geneties, Bussey Institution of
Harvard University No. 7. An investigation conducted with aid from the
Elizabeth Thompson Science Fund for which the author desires to express
his indebtedness,
193
194 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Vou. XLV
of new forms under conditions that are not typical of
those of nature in the wild. For these reasons such evi-
dence could never appeal with so much force as would
direct experimental proof that a wild species is in the
habit of producing suddenly new types sufficiently dis-
tinct from the parent form to rank as new species or even
as strongly marked varieties.
In ‘‘Die Mutationstheorie’’ of De Vries the behavior
of Enothera Lamarckiana in giving rise to the so-called
mutants is presented as evidence that new species have
come into existence without intermediate steps from a
form which is assumed to be typical of a species in na-
ture. (Enothera Lamarckiana is made to bear the
weight of an elaborate hypothesis, treating of funda-
mental problems, very much as the apex might be made
to bear the weight of an inverted pyramid. As the equi-
librium. of the inverted pyramid depends upon the sta-
bility of its apex, so the value for the mutation theory
of the evidence from the behavior of Lamarckiana must
rest with the status of this plant as a form truly repre-
sentative of a typical species.
De Vries from the beginning took it for granted that
(Enothera Lamarckiana was a native American species
introduced into Europe, an assumption that was perhaps
not unnatural, although dangerous when the responsibil-
ity of direct proof of the origin of species by mutation
was laid upon its behavior. As far as the writer is
aware, O. Lamarckiana, as a wild American species, is
unknown. No American locality can be cited where it
may be found as a clear component of the native flora.
There are certain records of its presence under condi-
tions that indicate the possibility of its being sometimes
a garden escape, and there is some herbarium material,
referred to Lamarckiana, which, however, has not been
tested by culture and was collected at times when the im-
portance of the most critical judgment in identification
was not appreciated. It cannot be said that American
botanists are not alive to the importance of the status of
No.532] GENETICAL STUDIES ON (2ENOTHERA 195
Lamarckiana, for it is well known that a certain group
would follow with persistence any clue that might give
evidence of its being or having been an American native
species.
Crities of the evidence for De Vries’s mutation theory
have been aware of the point of weakness that lay in the
uncertain status of G@nothera Lamarckiana and the sug-
gestions of Bateson and Saunders (’02, p. 153), Hast
(707, p. 34), Boulenger (’07, p. 363), Leclere du Sablon
(710, p. 266), Tower (710, p. 322), and others have prob-
ably occurred to many, namely, that this plant is of hy-
brid origin and that the appearance of its ‘‘mutations’’
is due to the continued splitting off of variants after the
manner of hybrids. This view is held by a number of
American botanists with whom the writer is acquainted
and represents the attitude of those who are sceptical of
the importance of mutation as a factor of organic evolu-
tion in nature. If Lamarckiana is of hybrid origin it
should be possible to obtain evidence of its probable
parentage, and the present paper offers a hypothesis |
with a considerable body of evidence in its favor. After
the evidence has been presented the hypothesis will be
discussed in the concluding section entitled ‘‘The Pos-
sible Origin of @nothera Lamarckiana as a Hybrid of
O. biennis and O. grandiflora.”
None of the hybrids of biennis and grandiflora de-
scribed in the following pages are identical with La-
marckiana. There are important differences, chiefly of
foliage and stem markings, which distinguish the hybrids
at a glance, but on the other hand these characters in
taxonomy would be considered of minor importance and
the hybrids, if their origin were unknown, could not be
placed elsewhere than next to Lamarckiana. Further-
more, these differences are of a sort that are likely to be
much less apparent when the results of crosses made
this summer (1910) between certain types recently dif-
ferentiated become known in succeeding cultures. In
an investigation of this character the results, as every
196 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST: [Vou. XLV
student of genetics knows, come slowly, and the writer
feels no necessity of offering an apology in publishing
preliminary data, since they are based on three seasons’
study, even though he hopes to present more conclusive
evidence in the future.
The cultures of the past season (1910) were grown
partly at the Bussey Institution and partly in the Botanic
Garden of Harvard University, where facilities were of-
fered for which the writer is deeply indebted.
METHODS
To break the biennial habit and obtain flowering plants
in one season it is only necessary to sow seeds in the hot
house during the winter, where rosettes will develop,
which may be set out in the open in the early spring.
The cultures of 1910 were sown early in January and had
developed large rosettes by May 5, when the plants were
transferred to the gardens. It is best to sow the seeds
thinly in large seed pans (with, of course, sterilized soil)
from which each individual seedling may be potted.
Cross pollination was always performed on flowers
from which the unopened anthers had been removed.
The best results are generally obtained when a castrated
flower is left bagged for twelve to twenty-four hours
before the pollen is applied, in order that the stigma
may have time to mature fully which will be evident from
the moist exudation on its surface. Strong manila bags
tied firmly over the pollinated flowers have proved
more satisfactory than special bags of parafin paper,
which appear to hold the flowers in an atmosphere too
moist for the best results. It is my practise to dip the
forceps in a bottle of alcohol before each transfer of
pollen and also to rinse the hands in alcohol. The pollen
of nothera is so sticky that under ordinary conditions
there is no danger from wind blown pollen, and by fol-
lowing the practise outlined above there is little or no
probability of impure pollination.
In the future my plan will be to sow the seed capsule
No. 532] GENETICAL STUDIES ON @NOTHERA 197
by capsule, which is the safest method to obtain quantita-
tive results. In the past I have sown from bulk collec-
tions of seed and my studies so far must be regarded
as primarily qualitative in character. This practise was
followed under the impression that probably only a small
proportion of the seed from a cross, apparently as ex-
treme as that between biennis and grandiflora, would
germinate. The results, however, have shown that the seed
of this cross is fertile to a very high degree. In conse-
quence my cultures of this season gave three or four
times more seedlings than it was practicable to bring to
maturity. A process of selection became at once neces-
sary, which was followed with the end in view of obtain-
ing a variety of types, but it soon became evident, with
the later development of the cultures, that it is impos-
sible to select with accuracy among the young seedlings.
Thus plants which showed certain tendencies as young
rosettes or seedlings of five to nine leaves often changed
very materially in later growth. For these reasons my
cultures of this year even as qualitative studies are un-
doubtedly not fully representative.
(Enothera biennis L.
My first crosses between biennis and grandiflora were
made at Woods Hole, Mass., in 1908. This locality was
carefully searched for rosettes of biennis with broad
leaves and two plants of this character were transplanted
from waste ground to the garden. The rosettes were
similar and at maturity the plants proved to be the same
form of biennis and were practically indistinguishable.
These two plants were the starting points of two strains
of biennis, designated A and B, which have been culti-
vated through two and three generations, respectively,
and have proved constant.
It seems quite certain that under the name Œnothera
biennis is included a number of races with well-marked
peculiarities. These races are probably very pure, for
the reason that close pollination is certainly usual, if
198 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
Fic. 1. Mature rosette of @nothera biennis, B (10.21a).
not universal, among the forms of the species. The
lower portions of the stigma lobes in the bud lie below the
tips of the anthers which discharge their pollen before
the bud opens. As a result the stigma is not only well
pollinated in the bud, but cytological studies on my
strains A and B have shown that the pollen tubes reach
the embryo sacs before there is any opportunity for cross
pollination. Hybridization in nature could hardly occur
in these forms unless their own pollen should be insuffi-
cient for the number of ovules in the ovary or was much
slower than foreign pollen in effecting fertilization ; al-
ternatives that are very unlikely. These conditions,
similar physiologically to those of cleistogamous flowers,
are present in all of the forms of biennis known to the
writer, and have been noted by De Vries for the Euro-
pean types. As a result a strain once established is cer-
tain to remain pure throughout at least the great mass
of its seeds.
The chief characteristics of the biennis strains A and
No. 532] GENETICAL STUDIES ON ŒNOTHERA 199
Fic. 2. Mature plant of @nothera biennis, B (10.21a).
B, employed in the hybrid studies of the present paper,
when under good cultivation are as follows:
1. Rosettes.—The mature rosettes (Fig. 1), from 3 to 4
dm. broad, have about 40 closely clustered leaves, spatu-
late, irregularly toothed at their base, and green except
for occasional reddish spots. The rosettes are persistent
and conspicuous during the early development of the main
stem.
2. Mature Plants —The mature plants, 1-1.5 m. high,
have a spreading habit (Fig. 2) with long side branches.
Stems chiefly green (brownish below), the papillate
glands at the base of long hairs also green. Basal
leaves on the main stem narrowly elliptical, about 16 em.
long (Fig. 3), leaves above lanceolate.
3. Inflorescence.—Bracts lanceolate, less than half the
length of the buds (Fig. 4).
4. Buds.—About 5.5 em. long, the cone 4-angled (Fig.
4). Sepals clear green, their tips not markedly attenuate.
200 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
5. Flowers.—Small (Figs. 3 and 5). Petals about 1.3
em. long. Lower halves of stigma lobes (when closed)
below the tips of the anthers.
6. Capsules.—Gradually narrowing from the base, 2-
2.5 em. long.
7. Seeds—Light brown. Those developed in the
ovary of biennis after pol-
lination by grandiflora
are similar to the female
parent.
The most striking pecu-
liarities of strains A and
B in comparison with cer-
tain other American types
of biennis are:—the small
flowers, green stems, and
the absence of that red
coloration in the papillate
glands which is seen in
- some forms of the species
and is conspicuous in La-
marckiana.
Since differentiating the
strains A and B in 1908,
I have had an opportunity
of observing somewhat
extensively various forms
of biennis in the vicin-
ity of Boston, where
l —! the prevailing type has
eooo ace: k bogie rs xeon = larger flowers, frequently
leaf from lower portion of main stem. a broader leaf, and usually
stems punctate with red tinted glands. There is con-
siderable variation in the characters above mentioned
and I have this year selected certain plants growing
wild on the grounds of the Bussey Institution that in
some respects are likely to prove much more satisfac-
tery for my purposes than the strains A and B. These
No. 532] GENETICAL STUDIES ON ŒNOTHERA 201
l j
biennis B srandiflora B biennis B
|
grandiflora B
Fic. 4. Buds of biennis B and Fig. 5. Flowers of biennis B and
grandifiora B. grandiflora B.
plants (strains C and D) have been crossed this year
with the best strains of grandiflora (B and D) and I
expect to grow the hybrids in another season, when
the strains will also be tested for their stability. The
testing for purity is of course a necessary precaution,
although, as explained above, the habit of self-pollination
in biennis makes it very unlikely that any of these plants
are tainted with foreign blood. These strains will not
be further described until the prospective cultures have
been grown.
Sowings from the wild seed collected as (nothera
grandiflora, described below, have given several plants of
a southern form of biennis (strain S) which may prove
of considerable interest since some of its characters
(stem coloration, form of buds, size of flowers, etc.) are
202 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
very favorable for combination with grandiflora with cer-
tain ends in view. This southern strain was crossed this
season with grandiflora, and the hybrids and the parent
biennis will be studied through further cultures.
(Enothera grandiflora. Ait.
We are indebted to Dr. MacDougal (’05, p. 7) and to
Miss Vail (’05, p. 9) for accounts of the rediscovery of
this remarkable species of the southern United States
and for a clear analysis of its probable history. Aiton’s
original description (1789), from material grown at Kew,
states that Gnothera grandiflora was introduced by John
Fothergill, M.D., in 1778. An expedition of William
Bartram in 1776, undertaken at the request of Dr. Foth-
ergill for the purposes of botanical discovery, records
the finding of a large-flowered @nothera near Tensaw
(Taensa), Ala. Bartram’s picturesque and excellent de-
scription of this new plant (see MacDougal, ’05, p. 7),
together with a herbarium specimen in the British
Museum from ‘‘Hort. Fothergill, 1778,’’ makes it evident
that Bartram must have sent seed to Fothergill, through .
whom the plant was introduced into England in 1778.
Professor S. M. Tracy in 1904 visited the original lo-
cality and found the species growing in considerable
quantity along the east bank of the Alabama river in
the vicinity of Dixie Landing, which is only a few miles
from Tensaw. His material agrees with the descriptions
of Bartram and Aiton and, according to Miss Vail, with
the herbarium specimen of Fothergill, and there seems to
be no doubt that nothera grandiflora, so widely culti-
vated, has been rediscovered growing wild in its original
locality.
My seed of Œnothera grandiflora was collected by
Professor Tracy at Dixie Landing in September, 1907.
During the past three seasons I have sampled the col-
lection to the extent of bringing to maturity from the
wild seed thirty-four plants, and in addition some sev-
enty rosettes and young plants have passed under my
No. 532] GENETICAL STUDIES ON (2NOTHERA 203
inspection. Besides the above I have selected and cul-
tivated from this material three strains (grandiflora A,
B, and D), which have been carried through a second gen-
eration represented by twenty-four mature plants.
It became apparent, as my cultures progressed, that
the Œnothera grandiflora growing near Tensaw is far
from uniform in character. I have so far selected four
distinct types of plants, only one of which, however, has
been cultivated in later generations. The fact that the
stigma of grandiflora is generally well above the tips of
the anthers prevents pollination in the bud and in the
opening flower, and offers a very much greater oppor-
tunity for cross pollination than is possible in biennis.
This condition is probably responsible for the hetero-
geneity of the species.
The type which I have under cultivation and which has
proved stable is characterized by a somewhat broader
leaf than is common to the species. From it have been
differentiated the following three strains (A, B, and D),
which have been used in the crosses with (nothera
biennis.
1. Strain D came directly from a wild plant.
2. Strains A and B are the result of a cross between
D and a similar plant, F, in the garden at Woods Hole
in 1908. The cross was made to fix thoroughly the char-
acters of a broad leaf and red coloration of sepals pres-
ent in both parents. The two strains (A and B) are es-
sentially similar, differing chiefly in the degree of red
coloration present in the sepals, a character that is var-
iable and probably cannot be depended upon as a fixed
factor. As a matter of fact, strain D in a second genera-
tion has proved very uniform and it is not likely that I
Shall make further use of strains A and B. All three
Strains are representative of the larger proportion of
the plants of grandiflora that have passed under my ob-
Servation, being, however, what a gardener would select
as luxuriant forms with broader and larger leaves than
the average.
204 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
Fic. 6. Mature rosette of @nothera grandiflora, B (10.4a).
In addition to the type represented by the strains A,
B, and D (which is described in the paragraph below)
there have appeared in the cultures from the wild seed
the following three types markedly different from one
another and from the general run of wild grandifloras.
1. A type represented by a large plant (2 m. high)
peculiar for its light green broadly elliptical leaves, gen-
erally green stem, green sepals, and a close rosette of
erinkled leaves strongly resembling a half-grown rosette
of Lamarckiana. This type, represented by a single
plant (grandiflora I) appeared this year, 1910, and is
likely to prove of great interest. It will not, however, be
described until its behavior in later generations has been
noted and its crosses with biennis have been grown.
2. A type represented by a relatively small plant (1.2
m. high) with stiff, broadly lanceolate, revolute leaves,
and sepals deeply blotched with red. This peculiar form
No. 532] GENETICAL STUDIES ON GENOTHERA 205
Fic. 7. Mature plant of @nothera grandiflora, B (10.4c).
(grandiflora R) is too far from the general type of gran-
diflora to be of value in the present study.
3. A type represented by a plant (grandiflora Z) with
narrow lanceolate leaves, much too narrow to give re-
sults, if crossed with biennis, that would approach La-
marckiana.
The chief characteristics of the grandiflora strains A,
B, and D, employed in the hybrid studies of the present
paper, when under good cultivation are as follows:
1. Rosettes—The mature rosettes (Fig. 6), 2-2.5 dm.
broad, have about 20 loosely clustered leaves, broadly
elliptical, irregularly and sometimes deeply cut at the
base, slightly crinkled, and mottled with reddish brown
blotches. The rosettes are transitory, the leaves with-
ering during the development of the main stem.
206 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
Fic. 8. Flowering = branch of @nothera grandiflora, B (10.4a), with a leaf
from the lower portion of the main ste
. Mature Plants—The mature plants (Fig. 7), 1.5-2
m. pns have a more upright habit than biennis. Fre-
quently the branching is profuse, the main stem and
long side branches being covered with short shoots.
Stems reddish, green only towards their tips, the papil-
late glands following the color of the stem. Basal leaves
on the main stem ovate or broadly elliptical, about 15
cm. long (Fig. 8); leaves above broadly lanceolate.
3. Inflorescence.—Bracts early in the season leaf-like
and more than half the length of the buds (Fig. 4) ; later
becoming very much smaller.
No. 532] GENETICAL STUDIES ON (2NOTHERA 207
Fic. 9. Rosette of a hybrid (10.30 La), grandiflora B x biennis A,
F, generation,
4. Buds.—F rom 9-10 em. long, the cone scarcely angled
(Fig. 4). Sepals marked with reddish brown blotches,
sometimes dull and faint; their tips attenuate.
5. Flowers.—Large (Figs. 5 and 8). Petals about 3.3
em. long. Stigma lobes generally 2-5 mm. above the
tips of the anthers.
6. Capsules ——Tapering rather sharply from the large
base, 2.5-3 em. long.
T. Seeds—Dark brown. Those developed in the
ovary of grandiflora, after pollination by biennis, have the
Same color as the female parent.
The above description is so worded as to emphasize the
characters of the grandiflora strains A, B, and D in con-
trast to the biennis strains A and B. It should be com-
pared with the description of the latter forms to under-
stand clearly the conditions that appear in the hybrids,
which will now be described.
208 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
>
Np
a
Fic. 10. Mature plant of a hybrid (10. 30 eae grandiflora B x biennis A,
F, generati
Hysrivs 1N THE F, Generation
The cultures of 1910 in the F, generation were hybrids
of three different combinations of | parents, as follows:
1. grandiflora B X biennis A (10.30), grown at the
Bussey Institution.
2. grandiflora B X biennis B (10.18) and the recip-
rocal cross (10.19), grown at the Bussey Institution.
3. grandiflora A X biennis B (10.17) and its recip-
rocal cross (10.20), grown at the Botanic Garden of Har-
vard University.
Bearing in mind that the biennis strains A and B are
practically indistinguishable and that the grandiflora
strains A and B are essentially similar, the cultures as
a whole would not be expected to differ markedly, which
was the case.
The figures of hybrids published with this paper are
from two plants in the first culture (grandiflora B X
No.532] GENETICAL STUDIES ON ŒNOTHERA 209
1G. - Flowering side branch of a hybrid (10.80 La), grandiflora B x
biennis a, F, generation. At the left is a leaf from the lower portion of the
ste
main
biennis A). They were selected as likely to prove the
most interesting for further cultures in the F, and later
generations. These two plants 10.30 La and 10.30 Lb will
be described in some detail, together with the general fea-
tures of the cultures.
l. grandiflora B X biennis A (10.30). This culture
gave about 400 seedlings from which 57 were selected for
the breadth of the cotyledons and the shortness of their
petioles. These were brought to maturity. The char-
acters of the parents were blended in the rosettes which
had long, broadly elliptical leaves, toothed below, and col-
210 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Vou. XLV
Fig. 12. Rosette of a hybrid (10.30 Lb), grandifora B x biennis A,
F, generation.
ored with large reddish spots and blotches. The mature
plants likewise presented the characters of both parents
blended in the habit, foliage, and flowers, all the charac-
teristics of form and measurements being clearly inter-
mediate. It was possible to distinguish certain rosettes
as being more biennis-like or more grandiflora-like than
the culture in general and the mature plants from these
rosettes also exhibited similar differences. The plants
of the culture therefore presented a certain range, the
extremes being readily distinguished as more like one
parent than the other although never approaching closely
to either. Between the extremes were numerous transi-
tions.
Two rosettes of this culture were selected for their
resemblance in certain particulars to Œnothera La-
marckiana and the mature plants from these proved to be
among the most interesting in the gardens. These hy-
brids, 10.30 La and 10.30 Lb, were representative of a
No. 532] GENETICAL STUDIES ON (ENOTHERA 211
Fic. 13. Mature plant of a hybrid (10.30 Lb), grandiflora B x biennis A,
F, generation.
type of hybrid of biennis and grandiflora that has proved
not uncommon in my cultures. The description of these
two plants will now follow, arranged to bring out the sal-
ient features in comparison with the parent species and
with Lamarckiana.
Hybrid 10.30 La. 1. Rosette-—The mature rosette
(Fig. 9), about 3.3 dm. broad, was persistent. Older
leaves more elliptical and less spatulate than those of
biennis (Fig. 1), deeply cut at the base as in grandiflora
ig. 6), spotted with red. The younger leaves were
markedly crinkled as in Lamarckiana (Fig. 15), but nar-
rower and more pointed.
2. Mature Plant—The mature plant (Fig. 10), 1.8 m.
high, had a straggling habit with long branches arising
from the base, short clustered shoots above (grandiflora-
like), a habit very different from the symmetry of La-
212 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
Fic. 14. Flowering side branch of a hybrid (10.30 Lb), grandiflora B x
biennis A, F, generation. At the left is a leaf from the lower portion of the
main stem.
marckiana (Fig. 16). Stem green above, mottled red
below, occasional regions where red-tinted papillate
glands lay on green portions of the stem as in Lamarck-
iana. Basal leaves on the main stem (Fig. 11) elliptical,
about 22 em. long, only slightly crinkled and not so long
as the much-crinkled basal leaves of Lamarckiana (Fig.
17). Leaves on the upper portion of the plant broadly
elliptical, slightly larger than those of Lamarckiana.
3. Inflorescence.—The inflorescence (Fig. 11) was
strikingly similar to that of Lamarckiana (Fig. 17), the
bracts being of about the same size and shape.
No. 532] GENETICAL STUDIES ON G@NOTHERA 213
Fic. 15. Rosette of @nothera Lamarckiana (10.23c).
4. Buds.—F rom 6 to 6.5 em. long, about the same size as
Lamarckiana and similar in form (compare Fig. 11 with
Fig. 17), sepals green. Intermediate in size between
those of parents.
5. Flowers.—Secarcely distinguishable from those of
Lamarckiana (compare Fig. 11 with Fig. 17) and with
the form and proportions of the parents blended. Petals
about 2.2 em. long. Base of stigma lobes slightly below
the tips of the anthers.
6. Capsules.—About 2.3 em. long, intermediate in size
between those of the parents.
T. Seeds—A shade of color clearly intermediate be-
tween the light and dark brown of the parents.
Hybrid 10.30 Lb. 1. Rosette——The mature rosette
(Fig. 12), about 3 dm. broad, was persistent. Older
leaves much broader than those of biennis (Fig. 1), cut
at the base as in grandiflora (Fig. 6), a lighter green
than the average of the culture, and with relatively few
red spots as in Lamarckiana. The younger leaves were
214 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
Fig. 16. Mature plant of @nothera Lamarckiana (10.23c).
strongly crinkled, almost as broad as those of Lamarck-
iana (Fig. 15), but more pointed.
2. Mature Plant—The mature plant (Fig. 13), 1.7 m.
high, with long branches from the base, had a habit more
spreading than that of Lamarckiana (Fig. 16), but was
otherwise very similar. Stems green above, mottled red
and brown below, the papillate glands of the same color
as the portions of the stem upon which they lay. Basal
leaves on the main stem (Fig. 14) broadly elliptical,
about 20 em. long, without crinkles and not so long as the
No.532] GENETICAL STUDIES ON ŒNOTHERA 215
Fic. 17. Flow ering seas branch of @nothera Lamarckiana cei with a leaf
the lower portion of the main stem
much crinkled basal leaves of Lamarckiana (Fig. 17).
Leaves on the upper portion of the plant broadly ellip-
tical, slightly crinkled, similar to those of Lamarckiana.
3. Inflorescence.—The inflorescence (Fig. 14) had
bracts longer than those of Lamarckiana (Fig. 17), some-
what crinkled and similar to the bracts in figures of
(nothera scintillans (De Vries’s ‘‘mutant’’ from La-
marckiana).
4. Buds.—F rom 6-6.5 em. long, about the same size as
those of Lamarckiana, but with a more pointed cone and
attenuated sepal tips (contrasted in Fig. 18), sepals
green. Intermediate in size between those of the parents.
216 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
Hybrid 10.30Lb Lamarckiana
Fic. 18. Buds and flowers of a hybrid (10.30 Lb), grandiflora B x biennis A,
F, generation, in comparison with those of @nothera Lamarckiana.
5. Flowers.—Scarcely distinguishable from those of
Lamarckiana (contrasted in Fig. 18), and with the form
and proportions of the parents blended. Petals about
2.2 em. long. Base of the stigma lobes slightly below
the tips of the anthers.
6. Capsules.—About 2.5 em. long, intermediate in size
between those of the parents.
7. Seeds—A shade of color clearly intermediate be-
tween the light and dark brown of the parents.
An examination of these two hybrid plants with respect
to the contributions by their respective parents may be
readily made by comparing the illustrations and descrip-
tions of rosettes, mature plants, inflorescence, and flowers,
bearing in mind that the parent biennis A is essentially
indistinguishable from the strain biennis B which is here
figured. It will be found that the hybrids present the
characters of the parents in a blend. By a blend it must
No. 532] GENETICAL STUDIES ON @NOTHERA 217
not be inferred that the characters of the hybrids are a
perfect mean as to the measurement and proportions of
their organs. This is certainly not the case for all of
the characters of the hybrids and it would be a difficult
matter to determine a perfect blend for a single character
because of the fluctuating variations in the parent strains.
All that I desire to demonstrate in the present account
is the fact of blended conditions throughout these hybrids
of the first generation, and the total absence of clear domi-
nance of one parent over the other with respect to any
character.
It would be very difficult and probably impossible to
support satisfactorily a claim that either of the two par-
ent plants exhibited its influence to a measurably greater
degree than the other. To illustrate this point let us
examine hybrid 10.30 La. The rosette (Fig. 9) of this
plant might be said to be more like that of biennis than of
grandiflora, but the habit of the mature plant (Fig. 10)
with respect to its short clustered shoots is more like the
latter parent than the former, and thus two characteristic
stages of the plant suggest opposite conclusions. This
general balance of the influence of one parent over the
other was manifest throughout the greater part of the
culture, but, as previously noted, a small proportion of the
hybrids was readily distinguishable as being more like
biennis or grandiflora although never approaching closely
to either parent form.
The chief points of resemblance between the two hy-
brid plants just described and @nothera Lamarckiana
may be briefly summarized as follows:
1. The inflorescence was very similar to Lamarckiana,
especially in the case of hybrid 10.30 La from which many
branches might have been picked that as herbarium spe-
cimens could not have been separated from a mixed and
varied collection of Lamarckiana branches similarly pre-
par
2i The only essential difference between the buds lay
218 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
in the slightly greater attenuation of the sepal tips espe-
cially in the case of the hybrid 10.30 Lb.
3. The flowers of the hybrids were scarcely distinguish-
able from those of Lamarckiana, the small differences in
the measurement of parts being no greater than might
be expected in any reasonably large and varied culture
of Lamarckiana. The chief difference with respect to
the flower lay in the clear green color of the ovaries of
the hybrids, the glands of which were not tinted red, as is
characteristic of all material of Lamarckiana that the
writer has seen.
4. Although the capsules were somewhat longer and
more pointed than in the forms of Lamarckiana grown
by the writer, they were not so long as in certain ‘‘long-
fruited races’’ described by De Vries, who states that the
fruits of Lamarckiana are highly variable and figures
capsules as pointed as those of my hybrids (De Vries ’09,
p. 528, et seq., Fig. 114).
The points of difference concern chiefly the vegetative
portions of the plants under discussion.
1. The rosette of the hybrids consisted of mixed forms
of leaves, only the younger resembling the markedly
crinkled leaves of Lamarckiana.
2. The habit of the mature hybrid plants was more
straggling, lacking the symmetry characteristic of La-
marckiana. The basal leaves were not so large and were
but slightly crinkled; the upper leaves, especially in the
ease of hybrid 10.30 Lb, were similar to Lamarckiana.
3. The coloration of the stem was green above and
mottled red and brown below, in contrast to the green
stems of Lamarckiana punctate with red-tinted papillate
glands. Similar glands were present in the hybrids, but
their color (portions of 10.30 La excepted) was that of
the regions of the stem upon which they lay.
The hybrids, therefore, resembled Lamarckiana as to
the inflorescence, floral parts, and fruits; they differed
chiefly in certain vegetative characters and in the colora-
tion of the stem. It remains to be seen through further
No. 532] GENETICAL STUDIES ON ήNOTHERA 219
cultures which of the two, the resemblances or the dif-
ferences, are more stable in inheritance and variation.
The type of Lamarckiana which has been compared in
this paper with the hybrids of biennis and grandiflora
is one with which I have been familiar for the past five
years. It has been represented in my cultures by strains
from seed that has come to me through three different
sources, all of the seed, however, originally being de-
rived from the cultures of De Vries. These strains have
not differed materially from one another, and as grown
in my small cultures have not exhibited marked varia-
tion. The rosettes and mature plants have agreed in
habit and foliage with the descriptions of Lamarckiana
in ‘‘Die Mutationstheorie.’’ The flowers have, however,
been uniformly smaller than the measurements and fig-
ures of De Vries, the petals being about 2.5 em. long in-
stead of measuring 3 em. or more. In the flower struc-
ture the position of the stigma has proved more variable
than one would be led to suppose by the figures and de-
scriptions of Lamarckiana, the stigma generally being
but slightly above the tips of the anthers or about at
their level, and in some plants distinctly below.
2. grandiflora B X biennis B (10.18), and the recipro-
eal cross (10.19). From about 200 seedlings of the
first culture and about 250 seedlings of the second cul-
ture, 66 and 70 plants, respectively, were brought to
maturity, being selected for the breadth of the cotyle-
don and the shortness of its petiole. As the rosettes
formed there appeared much variation in the amount
of anthocyan developed in the leaves, the larger propor-
tion being marked with dull red spots and blotches, only
a small number having few spots as in Lamarckiana.
The form of the leaves likewise varied and certain of the
rosettes were readily separated as being more biennis-
like or grandiflora-like than the average. The plants
that developed from these extreme forms of rosettes were
also somewhat more like the respective parents than the
mass of the culture which presented the characters of
220 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
the parents thoroughly blended in the form and propor-
tions of habit, foliage, and flowers. Considering the cul-
tures as a whole, there seemed to be no marked difference
between the first cross and its reciprocal.
The average types of hybrids in both crosses were es-
sentially similar and a number of types were very close
to the hybrids 10.30 La and 10.30 Lb of the previously
described culture. Six plants in culture 10.19 were
selected for special peculiarities, but these will not be de-
scribed unless their behavior in the F, generation should
justify a detailed account.
3. grandiflora A X biennis B (10.17), and the recipro-
eal cross (10.20). From about 200 seedlings of the first
culture and about 150 seedlings of the second culture,
49 and 60 plants, respectively, were brought to maturity,
being selected for the breadth of the cotyledon and
shortness of its petiole. These cultures were grown in
a stiff clay at the Botanic Garden and presented an in-
teresting contrast to the cultures previously described
which were grown in a somewhat sandy well-fertilized
soil. The plants were smaller and less vigorous vegeta-
tively, although they flowered very freely. The rosettes
and mature plants presented the characteristics of the
parents well blended as in the other cultures. There
were also a few extreme types that resembled one or the
other of the parents more closely than the average.
There appeared to be no significant differences between
the first cross and its reciprocal. Two plants with
marked peculiarities were selected from culture 10.17
and will be carried through an F, generation; they will
be described if- their further cultivation proves of
interest.
Although the evidence, not being quantitative in char-
acter, is incomplete, nevertheless the following points
may be noted, at least provisionally, from these observa-
tions on F, generations. (1) There was no indication
from these cultures of a marked preponderance of
either paternal or maternal influence upon the hybrids.
No. 532] GENETICAL STUDIES ON G2NOTHERA 221
(2) No character of either parent was observed to be
dominant. (3) It is doubtful whether there would be any
material difference between a cross and its reciprocal if
each were equally vigorous. (4) Although the extreme
types in the culture, approaching somewhat the respec-
tive parents, could be readily distinguished, they were
connected by transitional forms and a sharp line could
not be drawn between two sets of hybrids, such as have
been described by De Vries (’07, ’08) as ‘‘ twin hybrids’’
and reported for crosses between the Onagra group and
Lamarckiana. From observations on small cultures dur-
ing the season of 1909 (Davis 710, p. 113) the writer was
led to believe that ‘‘twin hybrids’’ might be present in
this cross, but he no longer regards this as probable.
Hyprips IN THE F, GENERATION
In a recent paper (Davis ’10) I described two small
cultures of hybrids between biennis B and grandiflora D
that were grown at the Botanic Garden of Harvard Uni-
versity in the season of 1909. Four of the plants of
these cultures were of special interest as presenting
flowers and inflorescences very similar to Lamarckiana,
although differing markedly in foliage. I unfortunately
was unable to observe the early development of these
plants and for this reason they were not very good forms
on which to base studies of their progeny in the F, gen-
eration. Their seed was, however, sown this season and
the cultures, described below, were of interest as indicat-
ing the probable behavior of hybrid plants of biennis and
grandiflora. These four lines will not be cultivated
further, since I have in the hybrids 10.30 La and 10.30 Lb
material better suited to the purposes of a quantitative
study for the reason that the records of their life history
have been kept in detail. The seeds of these hybrids
proved fertile to a very high degree, but it was practicable
to grow only a small proportion of the seedlings to
maturity.
1. Progeny from hybrid 9ba, biennis B X grandiflora
222 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
D. This hybrid plant (Davis, ’10, pp. 112 and 113),
an excellent blend of the parent forms, was similar to
Lamarckiana in habit and floral structure, but differed in
having smaller, uncrinkled leaves on the lower portions
of the plant and larger bracts upon the inflorescence.
From about 600 seedlings 73 plants were carried
through the rosette stage and set in the ground, being
selected to represent various types. The seedlings were
strikingly diverse, some having long cotyledons similar
to those of grandiflora, others having shorter and broader
ones, and a large proportion with small light yellow, etio-
lated cotyledons. Many of the latter seedlings died before
the appearance of the second leaf, the others developed
very slowly, forming rosettes one-fourth or one-third the
size of the normal with more or less etiolated leaves.
Twenty-three of the dwarf rosettes were set out in the
garden and of these seven finally grew to be large plants
similar to the average of the culture, but with a some-
what etiolated foliage; of the remainder several died and
the others developed into dwarf plants from 2-8 dm. high,
small leaved, sparsely branched, and with flowers smaller
than the average but larger than the biennis parent.
The behavior of these etiolated dwarfs resembled De
Vries’s account of the appearance of the form albida in
his cultures of Lamarckiana.
As the normal rosettes approached maturity it was
possible to distinguish certain ones as somewhat more
biennis-like or more grandiflora-like than the average,
and the mature plants which developed from these showed
similar points of resemblance to the respective parents
of the cross. Nevertheless, the culture as a whole pre-
sented these parental characters well blended, although
exhibiting a much wider range of variation than the F,
generation of this cross. This variation appeared to
indicate a relative segregation of the parental characters
deserving of detail studies upon larger cultures. There
were a number of plants similar to the parent hybrid,
but none markedly nearer to Lamarckiana. }
No. 532] GENETICAL STUDIES ON GNOTHERA 223
2. Progeny from hybrids 9ba, 9bb, and 9be, grandiflora
D X biennis B. These three hybrids (Davis, 710, p. 114)
presented the parental characters well blended. They
were essentially similar to Lamarckiana in flower struc-
ture and inflorescence, but differed in foliage and habit,
the leaves on the lower portion of the stem being but half
the length of those similarly placed on Lamarckiana and
with only slight traces of crinkles; the habit was biennis-
like.
From about 350 seedlings of hybrid 9ba, 76 plants were
brought to maturity, being selected as representative
types of the rosette stages. A small proportion of the
rosettes was dwarfed and the nine selected representa-
tives of this type developed small plants 1-2.5 dm. high,
generally without side branches; these did not flower.
The normal rosettes varied greatly in the forms of leaves
and extent of the red coloration, certain ones being dis-
tinctly more like the respective parents of the cross than
the average; these differences were maintained in the
mature plants, but to a less marked degree. The culture
in general presented a habit more grandifloralike than
biennis-like, but all of the characters remained blended,
although there was a considerable range of variation in
flower structure and foliage. While a number of the plants
were similar to the hybrid parents, none proved to be
appreciably nearer to Lamarckiana.
There were about 550 seedlings of hybrid 9bb, from
which 93 plants, selected as representative rosettes, were
brought to maturity. Relatively few dwarf rosettes were
present in this culture; eleven of these being selected
grew into plants 1-4 dm. high, small leaved and without
prominent side branches, the larger of the dwarfs develop-
ing small biennis-like flowers. The culture in general was
more uniform than the preceding, but certain rosettes and
mature plants were noticeably more like one or the other
of the original parents than the average, which presented
these parental characters well blended. The foliage of
the culture was distinctly crinkled so that the plants re-
224 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
sembled Lamarckiana more closely than those of the other
cultures in the F, generation, differing chiefly in the
smaller size of the basal leaves and in the absence of red
tinted papillate glands on a green stem, the stem being
mottled with red. One plant of this culture (10.12 Lz)
was selected for marked peculiarities, but will not be de-
scribed unless its behavior in an F, generation proves of
sufficient interest.
About 800 seedlings of hybrid 9be appeared in the cul-
ture, from which 95 plants were selected as representa-
tive types of rosettes. A few dwarf rosettes were pres-
ent, six of which set in the ground developed into un-
branched plants about 1 dm. high, that failed to flower.
The culture in general exhibited considerable variation,
the most interesting types of plants being several with
light green, smooth, obtusely pointed leaves, similar in
shape to Lamarckiana, but without crinkles. There was
shown the same previously described tendency on the
part of a few rosettes and mature plants to depart from
the average of the culture towards the characteristics
of the respective parents of the cross, maintaining, how-
ever, a blended structure of their parts.
Considering these cultures of F, generations in com-
parison with the F, generations that have been grown,
the most striking feature is the greater range of varia-
tion exhibited not only by the F, plants as a whole, but by
their different parts. Since the studies were not quanti-
tative in character, because such a large proportion of the
seedlings were necessarily discarded, it has not seemed
best to describe the variations in detail and such an in-
vestigation is deferred for the present. However, 1 in this
increased variation is clearly indicated at least a relative
segregation of the parental characters in the F, genera-
tion.”
2 Extensive cultures from the seed of the two hybrids 10.30 La and
10.30 Lb, described in this paper, are now (February, 1911) seedlings
with 4-5 leaves which already show marked segregation in this F, genera-
tion, with the extreme types closely resembling seedlings of the par
the cross and between these a large range of intermediates.
ents of
No. 532] GENETICAL STUDIES ON ŒNOTHERA 225
THe Posstste Oricin or Œnothera Lamarckiana as a
Hysrip or O. biennis anb O. grandiflora
We have shown that hybrids between certain strains
of Œnothera biennis and O. grandiflora may be synthe-
sized, which approach somewhat closely to Œnothera La-
marckiana, and there is good reason to believe that fur-
ther experimentation will result in the production of
forms with a more perfect resemblance. It is now im-
portant to ascertain, as far as this is possible, whether
there are any historical reasons why Lamarckiana may
not have arisen either accidentally or intentionally from
such a cross.
Œnothera Lamarckiana appears to have been under
cultivation in the gardens of the Muséum d’Histoire Nat-
urelle at Paris in 1797, being described by Lamarck’
under the name grandiflora. Shortly afterwards Se-
ringet renamed the form Lamarckiana, recognizing it to
be distinct from the grandiflora of Aiton.
As previously noted from the investigations of Mac-
Dougal (’05) and Vail (’05), the evidence is very clear
that grandiflora was introduced into England in 1778 and
was at that time under cultivation at Kew. Forms of
(Enothera biennis had of course been in European gar-
dens for many years previous to 1778. There was there-
fore a period of about eighteen years (1778-1797) during
which hybrids between biennis and grandiflora might
have arisen in Europe before the earliest known record |
of the cultivation of @nothera Lamarckiana in Paris.
So striking an American novelty as (nothera grandi-
flora would almost certainly have been passed on from
Kew to other botanical gardens and in the interval be-
tween 1778 and 1797 is likely to have become widely dis-
tributed and cultivated. On historical grounds then
there seems to be no reason with respect to the date of
the first recorded recognition of @nothera Lamarckiana
why this form might not have arisen in Europe as a
hybrid of biennis and grandiflora,
*“*Eneyclopédie Méthodique Botanique,’’ Vol. IV, p. 554, 1797.
* De Candolle’s ‘‘Prodomus,’’ Vol. III, p. 47, 1828.
226 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von XLV
Let us suppose that it should be shown that Œnothera
Lamarckiana was in existence previous to the date 1778,
what effect would such evidence have on the hypothesis
that the form is a hybrid of biennis and grandiflora? It
would not in the writer’s opinion have weight against
experimental proof that Lamarckiana or forms closely
resembling this plant may be synthesized as hybrids of
these wild American species. It would not prove that
Lamarck’s plant in Paris (1797) was not a hybrid. It
would merely indicate that Lamarckiana, having arisen
as a hybrid in America, was introduced as such into Eu-
rope. As already pointed out, the position in grandiflora
of the stigma well above the anthers gives ample oppor-
tunity for chance hybridization in nature. Indeed. the
diverse forms that have appeared in my cultures from
seed of grandiflora collected in the field clearly show that
the species is far from homogeneous in character, a con-
dition that is probably due to a large amount of cross
pollination. It may be expected that careful search, es-
pecially in the southern United States, will bring to light
occasional plants with characters intermediate between
grandiflora and other species, such as, for example,
southern types of biennis, but it is also probable that the
behavior of such plants in culture will show them to be
heterozygous in character, i. e., hybrids.
There have been two attempts to establish the presence
of Lamarckiana in Europe previous to 1778 when grandi-
flora was introduced at Kew. MacDougal (’07, pp. 5, 6)
refers to Lamarckiana a description and figure of an
(Enothera by Miller, Plate 189, Fig. 2, for the ‘‘Gar-
dener’s Dictionary,’’ 1760. This figure, published in
1757, is of a large-flowered Œnothera with petals 2 or
2.2 em. long and by its side (Fig. 1) is a smaller-flowered
form. With respect to the point under discussion, the
most important features of these figures, clearly shown
by the drawing, is the position and form of the stigmas,
well below the tips of the anthers and with the lobes
unexpanded in open flowers. These are peculiarities of
No.532] GENETICAL STUDIES ON GENOTHERA 227
biennis and, in the writer’s experience, are not charac-
teristic of Lamarckiana where the stigma lobes are usu-
ally expanded in the open flower and generally above or
about on the level with the tips of the anthers. Further-
more the size of the petals in the illustration of the large-
flowered type (Fig. 2) is no greater and indeed not so
great as in some forms of biennis. Both of the figures
show the essential characteristics of the flower of biennis
to which they have generally been referred in taxonomic
accounts. For these reasons the view of MacDougal
that the illustration of the large-flowered type (Fig. 2)
is of Lamarckiana and establishes its presence in Europe
previous to 1757, is to the writer not convincing.
The second attempt to establish the presence of La-
~. marckiana in Europe previous to 1778 is the announce-
ment of Gates (710) that certain marginal notes in a copy
of Bauhin’s ‘‘Pinax,’’ 1623, give in Latin an accurate
description of this plant although differing in one or two
minor characters. Gates presents an outline of the
points which indicate to him that the description refers
to Lamarckiana, but the notes themselves are not pub-
lished. A full account is promised, in which we may
expect to see these Latin notes and judge of them for
ourselves, and comments on this announcement will be
reserved for the present.
Finally we must return to the question of whether or
not it appears probable that @nothera Lamarckiana is
at present a component of the American native flora.
De Vries (’05, p. 368) refers to Lamarckiana certain her-
barium material at the New York Botanical Garden and
Missouri Botanical Garden, both collected by A. W. Chap-
man in Florida (1860 or earlier), and also material in the
Philadelphia Academy of Science collected by C. W.
Short at Lexington, Ky. A thorough search (MacDou-
gal, ’05, p. 6) by several botanists in the vicinity of
Lexington Ky., Nashville Tenn., Knoxville Tenn., and
Courtney Mo., in the endeavor to find living plants
that might be identified as Lamarckiana, was unsuccess-
228 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
ful. Later, Miss Vail (MacDougal, ’07, p. 67) came to
the conclusion that the plant from Lexington, Ky., is
grandiflora, and a possible escape from cultivation. I
have not seen the herbarium material mentioned above,
but in the light of the fact that many dried specimens
could be prepared from my hybrids which as such would
be considered Lamarckiana, it is clearly necessary that
evidence from herbarium material should be weighed
with much caution. The average herbarium material of
the G@notheras is generally not sufficient to show the pe-
culiarities of the earlier phases of development (rosettes
and basal foliage) which in the case of Lamarckiana fur-
nish diagnostic characters that are necessary for a full
identification. Unless the evidence of field collections is
followed up by garden cultures, there is the possibility
of numerous errors of interpretation.
A specimen in the Gray Herbarium of Harvard Uni-
versity is stated by MacDougal (’05, p. 5) to agree per-
fectly with @nothera Lamarckiana, but in this view the
writer can not accord. This plant was apparently grown
in the Cambridge Botanical Garden, Massachusetts and
bears the date 1862. The specimens are accompanied by
the significant notes in the hand writing of Dr. Asa Gray
‘‘from seed of Thompson, Ipswich,” and ‘‘said by English
horticulturists to come from Texas.’’ The flowers are
large, with petals about 4.5 em. long and sepals about 5 cm.
long, very attenuate, the tips projecting 1 em. beyond the
folded petals in the manner characteristic of grandiflora.
The stigma lobes are also grandiflora-like in their length,
about 8 mm., and in their position, about 5 mm. above the
tips of the anthers. A large detached leaf, about 18.5 em.
long, with some evidence of former crinkles, suggests by
its form (although rather small) the basal leaves of La-
marckiana. The flowers and upper foliage of this speci-
men, however, agree very closely with broad-leaved types
in my cultures of grandiflora and do not resemble the
Lamarckiana that I have grown from seeds of De Vries,
or with his figures and descriptions in ‘‘Die Mutations-
No. 532) GENETICAL STUDIES ON @NOTHERA 229
theorie.” If this plant could be established as derived
from C£notheras introduced into England by Messrs.
Carter and Co. at about 1860 from seeds said to come from
Texas, it would be a point of great importance, as will
appear in the following paragraphs.
De Vries (’05, pp. 384-385) offers strong evidence that
the strains of Lamarckiana at present cultivated in Eu-
rope have a genetic relation to seed of Messrs. Carter
and Co., of London about 1860. This seed is stated to
have been received unnamed from Texas and plants
grown from it were pronounced by Dr. Lindley to be
Lamarckiana. A specimen from one of these plants is
figured in ‘‘The Floral Magazine,’’ Vol. II, Plate 78, 1862,
this plate being reproduced in ‘‘L’Ilustration Horticole,’’
Vol. IX, Plate 318, 1862. This plate shows an Œnothera
with flowers about 10 cm. (4 inches) in diameter and
with a large amount of red coloration on the sepals and
ovaries; the stigma is figured both above and below the
tips of the anthers. The flowers of this illustration are
larger than those of Lamarckiana, as known to the
writer, and would do for grandiflora except for the posi-
tion of the stigma which is much closer to the anthers
than is typical for this species. The red coloration of
the sepals and ovaries is much too deep for typical La-
marckiana and not unlike some forms of grandiflora, but
the sepal tips, as drawn, are not so long or so pointed as
in the latter form. Indeed the identification of this plate
with any probable (nothera is very difficult and the
reasons why it should be called Lamarckiana are to the
writer far from convincing, although it would perhaps
be as easy to argue for this identification as for any
other.
It is, however, possible that new light may be thrown
on the composition of the cultures of Carter and Co.
through the plant in the Gray Herbarium described
above. The date of this specimen, 1862, together with
the very suggestive notes of Dr. Gray 7 from seed of
Thompson, Ipswich,” and ‘‘ said by English horticul-
230 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
turists to come from Texas,’’ make it appear possible
that this plant was derived from the cultures of Carter
and Co. If this could be established it would indicate
that forms very close to grandiflora were present in the
cultures or seeds of this firm. It is not at all improbable
that Texas with its immense area and very great range
of climatic conditions may harbor grandiflora or related
types especially since it is known to be rich in species of
(nothera and to have a number of large flowered rep-
resentatives.
There may have been thus a second introduction into
England of grandiflora-like types through Carter and Co.
at about the year 1860. While there is of course no
means of knowing whether their cultures were uniform,
it is altogether probable that the results of their sowings
gave a diverse progeny, since that has been my experi-
ence with seed from Alabama. There seems to be no
reason why chance hybrids may not have been present
or why grandiflora-like strains might not have shortly
hybridized with European forms of biennis. These pos-
sibilities are mere matters of speculation to which little
assistance is given by the puzzling plate in ‘‘The Floral
Magazine” and in ‘‘L’Illustration Horticole’”’ referred to
above. A search among the English herbaria might,
however, result in the discovery of specimens which
would materially assist in the solution of a very interest-
ing question—the identity of the plants grown by Carter
and Co. At present the specimen in the Gray Herba-
rium appears to offer the most important evidence bear-
ing upon the question. The contention that Lamarckiana
was introduced in the form of a native American species
at this date, 1860, seems to the writer to be without suffi-
cient foundation.
The American botanist will ask himself why, if La-
marckiana was present in America as a native species mM
1860, no localities are known where it may be observed
in the field. It will be hard for him to believe that so
strong and vigorous a plant, if a wild species, has become
No. 532] GENETICAL STUDIES ON ŒNOTHERA 231
so recently extinct when, as he well knows, the Hnotheras
are established as remarkably successful forms in our
flora. The fact that Lamarckiana is not known as a com-
ponent of the native American flora stands as the most
serious obstacle to the view that this plant is representa-
tive of a wild species. The writer believes it very prob-
able that plants more or less resembling Lamarckiana
will occasionally, or perhaps rarely, be found in parts of
America and under circumstances indicating that they
are not garden escapes, but it seems to him equally prob-
able that these forms when tested in culture will give evi-
dence of a heterozygous, or hybrid nature. The mere
records of such plants as handed down by the average
type of herbarium specimen, unaccompanied by experi-
mental cultures, will have little or no value for the pres-
ent problem—the origin of @nothera Lamarckiana.
SUMMARY
This paper offers a body of evidence which shows that
hybrids resembling Enothera Lamarckiana may be syn-
thesized from certain strains of the American native
species O. biennis and O. grandiflora. The resemblances
of the hybrids to this plant are strongest with respect
to the inflorescence, buds and flowers. The differences
are chiefly manifest in the basal foliage of the mature
plant, in the coloration of the stem, and in the more strag-
gling habit of the hybrids. The rosettes of the hybrids
present mixed forms of leaves, the younger with points
of similarity to Lamarckiana. Bearing in mind that
other strains of biennis have characteristics more La-
markiana-like than those of strains A and B, herein de-
scribed, it is more than probable that the hybrids from
certain crosses made this season (1910), when grown
in future cultures, will come closer to the desired end—
the synthesis of a hybrid so similar to Lamarckiana as
x be practically indistinguishable by the usual taxonomic
ests.
Exception is taken to the claim of MacDougal (’07,
232 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
pp. 5, 6) that Miller’s Plate 189, Fig. 2, for the ‘‘Gar-
dener’s Dictionary,’’ 1760, establishes the presence of La-
marckiana in Europe previous to the date, 1778, when
grandiflora is known to have been introduced into Eng-
land. The view of De Vries that strains of Lamarckiana
were introduced into England about 1860, through seed of
Messrs. Carter and Co. said to come from Texas, is dis-
cussed with reference to certain specimens in the Gray
Herbarium of Harvard University and in the light of the
author’s experience with seed from Alabama, indicating
that Carter and Co. probably had grandiflora-like types in
their cultures which were also likely to have been of a
mixed character. The absence, so far as is known, of La-
marckiana as a component of the native American flora is
emphasized as a point of great importance against the
claim that Lamarckiana was introduced into Europe as an
American wild species.
A working hypothesis is presented as a result of the
writer’s experimental studies and in relation to such his-
torical evidence as is available, to the effect that Gno-
thera Lamarckiana arose as a hybrid between certain
types of biennis and grandiflora, recognizing that under
these names must, for the present at least, be included a
number of races which can only be clearly defined by
laborious genetical investigations. The precise time and
place of such an origin for Lamarckiana is a matter of
mere speculation, but there seems to the writer no good
reason why hybridization between biennis and grandi-
flora might not have taken place in Europe between
1778 and 1797 (when Lamarckiana was first recognized
at Paris) and also at later dates, as for example about
1860. It is also possible that Lamarckiana may have
been introduced as a chance hybrid from America, but
the probability of such an origin is naturally rather
remote.
The bearing of the possible hybrid nature of @nothera
Lamarckiana upon the claim of De Vries that the behav-
ior of this plant demonstrates the origin of new species
No.532] GENETICAL STUDIES ON GENOTHERA 233
by mutation from a form repr tative of a typical wild
species will be sufficiently evident to require no com-
ment at this time. A discussion of the matter will there-
fore be reserved until the writer has proceeded further
with his studies.
CAMBRIDGE, MASS.,
November, 1910.
LITERATURE CITED
Aiton, Willi ’89. Hortus Kewensis: A Catalogue of the Plants
Cu Hiva in the iii Pokak traii a Kew. London, 1789.
Bateson, W., and Saunders, Miss E. R., ’02. Bepo to the Evolution Com-
mittee of the Royal Society. Report I, London, 1902.
Boulenger, G. A., ’07. On the Variations of the Evening Primrose (@no-
thera biennis L.). Jour. of Bot., Vol. XLV, p. 353, 1907.
Davis, B. M., 710. Notes on the Behavior of Certain Hybrids of Gnothera
in the First Generation. AMER. NAT., Vol. XLIV,
De Vries, Hugo, 705. Ueber die Dauer der TE bei (Bacthive
Lamarckiana. Ber. deut. bot. Gesell., Vol. XXIII, p. 382, 1905
De Heed Hugo, 707. On Twin Hybrids. Bot. Gaz., Vol. XLIV, ; p. 401,
1907.
De vag Hugo, ’08. Ueber die Zwillingsbastarde von Œnothera nanella.
r. deut. bot. Gesell., Vol. XXVIa, p. 667, 1908.
De hie ta Hugo, 709. The Mutation Theory. Chicago, Vol. I, 1909.
East, E. E., 07. The Relation of Certain Biological Principles to Plant
Breeding. Conn. Agri. Exper. Sta., Bulletin 158, 1907.
Gates, R. R., *10. The ae a a of Gnothera Lamarckiana.
Science, Vol. XXXI, p. 425,
Leclere du Sablon, Mathieu ae ne la nature hybride de 1’Oenothére de
Lamarck. 910.
MacDougal, D. T., Vail, A. M., Shull, G. H., and Small, J. s 705. Mutants
and apgr of the (Enotheras. Carnegie Inst., Pub. 2 1905.
MacDougal, D. T., Vail, A. M., and Shull, G. H., ’07. wana Varia-
ae and Relationships of the Œnotheras. Oarhegis Inst., Pub. 81
- 1907
Tower, W, L., 710. The Determination of Dominance and the Modification
of Waievins in Alternative (Mendelian) Inheritance, by Conditions
Surrounding or Incident = the Germ Cells at Fertilization. Biel.
Bull., Vol. eae p. 285,
Vail, hie M., Onagra ae (Ait.), a species to be included in
the Noni ody flora. Torreya, Vol. V, p. 9, 1905.
THE GENOTYPES OF MAIZE!
DR. GEORGE HARRISON SHULL
STATION FOR EXPERIMENTAL EVOLUTION, Cotp SPRING HARBOR, N. Y.
Tar doctrine of evolution had to overthrow the con-
ception of permanency of specific types, generally held
when Darwin’s ‘‘Origin of Species’’ was published, be-
` cause that conception was then associated with the idea
of a separate original supernatural creation of each such
type. It was Darwin’s great triumph that he succeeded
in marshaling such an array of facts pertaining to varia-
bility, as to convince the scientific world—and through
the scientific world, ultimately the whole world—that
everything is in a state of flux, and that there is no such
thing as permanency among living things.
Owing to the work of De Vries and the other early
students of modern genetics, permanency of: type again
demands serious scientific consideration, for such per-
manency is no longer incompatible with the doctrine of
evolution, being now associated with some form of the
mutation theory. The old idea of the immutability of
specific types was based upon almost total ignorance of
genetics, as was likewise the Darwinian conception of
fluidity and gradual change, for although many appeals
were made by Darwin to the experiences of plant and
animal breeders, it is now known that these experiences
were the result of no such careful control of conditions
or analysis of results as has been found necessary for
the discovery of genetic laws. The critical work of the
past few years has wrought a great change and the new
idea of permanency is gaining ground with the growth
of experimental knowledge.
Without granting that we have yet reached a position
in which we can say definitely that types are absolutely
*Read before the American Society of Naturalists, December, 1910.
234
THE GENOTYPES OF MAIZE 235
permanent and do not, at least in some cases, gradually
the large accumulation of
change into something new,
ba
ELA teen ae
2:
RA
Self fertilized
during
Five Generation
Without
Self Fertiliza.
toh,
Each ear in this exhibit represents a different pedigreed family.
In e neh family the variation w 1 the ear chosen for the exhibit was
The two self-fertilized ears under
to two distinct strains, the left-hand one being
4 During the last two years this has been
to its own modal number, while the right-hand ear has been selected te
Welve rows throughout the course of the experimer
236 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
experimental data now available makes it necessary to
recognize a clear distinction between the evolutionary
changes in types, on the one hand, and the fluctuations
within each type, on the other hand.
Quite naturally the first experimental evidence of the
existence of permanent hereditary types involved only
such characteristics as are clearly distinguishable upon
inspection. Thus Jordan was able to demonstrate that
within the systematic species Draba verna there are in-
cluded as many as two-hundred hereditary forms, whose
distinguishing characteristics appear unchanged from
generation to generation, in such manner that his pedi-
grees of these forms were clearly and permanently dis-
tinguishable from each other by easily defined morpho-
logical features. Such ‘‘petites espèces”? or ‘‘little
species’’ (afterwards called by De Vries ‘‘elementary
species,” and by Johannsen ‘‘biotypes’’ or ‘‘geno-
types’’), have since been observed by Wittrock and his
students, and by many others, in a great number of wild
species, and they are now quite generally supposed to be
of almost universal occurrence.
About 1890 N. H. Nilsson made a similar discovery in
connection with his breeding of wheat, oats, barley and
other grains at Svaléf, Sweden, but his work remained
practically unknown to the scientific world until it was
brought to light several years ago by De Vries. Nilsson
found in these grains elementary species, each with its
own morphological characters and its own specific ca-
‘pacity to yield crops of given size or quality under given
external conditions. More recently, sharp-eyed taxon-
omists have been rapidly raising many of the elemen-
tary species of wild plants to the rank of systematic
species.
It was natural that the earliest genotypes recognized,
such as those of Jordan and Nilsson, should have pos-
sessed visibly diserete characteristics, and that they
should first have become familiar in normally self-fertil-
ized plants, among which little confusion is occasioned
No. 532] THE GENOTYPES OF MAIZE 237
by the rare crossing of unlike individuals. Great credit
is due to Johannsen? for demonstrating that in such
self-fertilized plants, types also exist which are not
readily distinguishable by simple inspection, but whose
occurrence may be completely demonstrated by the
refined methods of the mathematician. Not only has
Johannsen’s work been so extensive as to justify the
conclusions arrived at by him, but various other investi-
gators, working with different classes of research ma-
_ terial, have shown that the conditions found by Johann-
sen in beans and barley are duplicated in many other
species and varieties. Perhaps the strongest support in
this direction has come from the work of East? with
potatoes and that of Jennings* with various microscopic
organisms, especially with paramecium.
The fact that Draba verna, and many other wild species
in which the existence of numerous elementary species
has been demonstrated, as well as wheat, oats, barley and
beans, are all predominantly self-fertilizing, and that
potatoes and paramecium have an asexual reproduction,
has led some to the erroneous notion that the discrete-
ness, uniformity and permanence of the types which have
been discovered among these and other similar organisms,
are in some way dependent upon the absence of crossing.
It must be admitted that conclusions drawn from self-
fertilized and asexual material do not necessarily apply
to plants and animals whose successful existence is de-
pendent upon repeated crossing. Nevertheless, the con-
ception of pure and permanent genotypes in cross-bred
material has become familiar simultaneously, owing
to the work done in Mendelian heredity ; for homozygous
* Johannsen, W., ‘‘Ueber Erblichkeit in Populationen und in reinen
Linien,’’ 68 Pp., Jena, 1903.
* East, E. M., ‘‘ The transmission of variations in the potato in asexual
reproduction,’’ Conn. Exp. Sta. Report 1909-1910, pp. 119-160, 5
“Jennings, H. $., ‘‘ Heredity, variation and evolution in Protozoa—
IT. Heredity and variation of size and form in Paramecium, with studies
. growth, environmental action and selection,’’? Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc.,
47: 393-546, 1908
238 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
combinations of the various characteristics of plants and
animals ‘‘breed true’’ to those characteristics. Just as
the first recognition of permanent differences in pure
lines involved easily distinguishable characters, so also
these first discoveries of permanent pure-breeding geno-
types in cross-bred plants and animals involved easily
definable morphological characteristics. The demonstra-
tion that in normally pure-bred lines there are distinc-
tions more minute than such easily visible features as
characterize the elementary forms of Draba and many
other species, was an important advance in our analysis
of the populations which make up the species of plants
and animals. A similar demonstration that populations
of cross-breeding plants and animals are composed of
fundamentally distinct types, intermingled but not
changed by panmixia, and capable of being separated by
appropriate means and of being shown to possess the dis-
creteness, uniformity and permanence already demon-
strated for the genotypes of self-fertilized and clonal
races, will add greatly to the importance of the funda-
mental conception of permanency of types involved in
the work of De Vries and Johannsen.
For the study of this problem there is probably no
better plant than Indian corn. It is known to exist in a
large number of obviously distinct strains or subspecies
which cross together with the greatest ease. Many of its
characteristics have been proved by different investiga-
tors to be Mendelian unit-characters; such, for instance,
as the color of the seed-coat, whether red, dark yellow,
light yellow, variegated or colorless, the color of the
aleurone layer, whether blue, red or white; the color of
the endosperm, whether yellow or white; the chemical
composition of the endosperm, whether starchy or sugary,
the color of the silks and cobs whether red or white, ete.
It has become known also, mainly through the excellent
work done at the Illinois State Experiment Station, that
oil-content and protein-content of the grains, the posl-
tion of the ears, the number of ears on the stalk, and
No. 532] THE GENOTYPES OF MAIZE 239
several other characters, are capable of accentuation by
selection, so that different degrees of these qualities
are capable of being made characteristics of particular
strains of corn, without there being the least evidence as
yet that these last-mentioned qualities bear any relation
to the unit-characters with which the student of genetics
generally deals. A further point in favor of maize as a
subject for the study of genotypes among cross-breeding
organisms lies in the fact that its flowers are so arranged
that, while self-fertilization is possible, it is naturally
almost completely excluded, thus ensuring the same re-
lations as are presented by bi-sexual or dicecious plants
and animals, while retaining the means of conveniently
testing the genotypic nature of each individual by con-
trolled self-fertilizations.
I think I have demonstrated during the last five years
that there are many genotypes of Indian corn which,
although they can not always be distinguished by defin-
able external characteristics, can be proved to be just as
certainly and permanently discrete as the types whose
distinguishing | ean be recognized as Mendelian
unit-characters. I shall endeavor to show, in what fol-
lows, a portion of the evidence which leads me to this
conclusion.
In 1905 I undertook a rather extensive series of com-
parisons between cross-bred and self-fertilized strains of
Indian corn for the purpose of discovering the effects of
these methods of breeding upon variability, and these
investigations have been continued each year since that
time. Two phenomena immediately attracted my atten-
tion: First, the well-known fact that the children of self-
fertilized parents are inferior to those of cross-fertilized
parents in height, yield and other characters dependent
in any way upon physiological vigor. In every instance
this phenomenon was plainly evident in the very first
generation after self-fertilization. This decrease in
physiological vigor due to self-fertilization has become an
240 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Von. XLV
extremely important relation in the study of the geno-
types, as will be shown later.
The second phenomenon which quickly made itself
manifest, was first clearly appreciated in the second gen-
eration after the beginning of the experiments; this was
the fact that each self-fertilized family possessed mor-
phological features which clearly differentiated it from
all other families. In most cases the distinguishing
characteristics of these families were of such elusive
nature that it was impossible to recognize definite unit-
characters, and indeed, morphological descriptions of the
several pedigrees could often be made only in terms of
greater or less intensity of the several qualities ex-
hibited. However, the distinctions were real and applied
to every member of the particular family. Thus one
family might have a very slender, poorly developed male
panicle, while another would have more thick and dense
branches of the panicle. This difference might be quite
small when given in actual measurement but inspection
showed that every individual of the one family had the
slender, illy developed panicles, while all of the offspring
of the other family had the thicker, denser type. Simi-
larly, one family might have a slightly broader and
darker green leaf than another, and these characteristic
differences were likewise uniformly present in all mem-
bers of the single families contrasted. No such character
as this is capable of being traced through the generations
following a cross, in the manner usually pursued by the
geneticist, and the matter must be approached by in-
direct methods. The important point to be kept in mind
here is simply that the self-fertilized families, derived
originally from a common stock, do differ by morpho-
logical characteristics, and that there comes to be great
uniformity in regard to the presence of these character-
istics in all the individuals of a given self-fertilized
family.
This relative uniformity, which is so obvious even to
the casual observer, is not sufficient in itself, however,
No. 532] THE GENOTYPES OF MAIZE 241
to positively demonstrate the existence of distinct geno-
types in maize, because the slight variations which must
always be present even in the most uniform progeny,
can not be certainly distinguished as genotypic or fluctu-
ating simply by inspection. Such demonstration must
rest upon a combination of biometric and genetic evi-
dence in order to prove acceptable. Most of the differ-
entiating characters of my several strains of maize are
such that they do not lend themselves readily to bio-
metric methods, but the number of rows on the ear is
well adapted for such study and several important re-
sults have been derived from the consideration of this
character. An important proof that the self-fertilized
families derived from my common original stock of corn
are genotypically distinct, and that they do not owe their
different morphological and physiological qualities to
fluctuations within a single genotype, was quickly found
in the fact that two of these families selected respectively
to 12 and 14 rows of grains on the ears, showed a regres-
sion of row-number toward different centers instead of
toward a common center. The mean of the original popu-
lation was slightly above 14 rows. The selection to 14
rows was very near this mean and-the-selection-to12-
rows was very near this mean and the selection to 12 rows
considerably below it. According to Galton’s well-known
aw of ‘‘regression toward mediocrity,” the mean of a
family whose parents were selected to 12 rows should have
lain somewhat above 12 rows, and that selected to 14 rows
should have retained the mean approximately at 14 rows.
The actual result in the case of selection to 12 rows was
the production of a family having a mean row-number
considerably below the number of rows selected, and the
Subsequent generations have since shown a close ap-
proach to an 8-rowed condition; while the family whose
parents were in each generation selected to 14 rows has
always had the mean very near to 14 rows. As these
families were grown under as nearly uniform conditions
as possible, the fact that the 14-rowed family continues
242 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
to have its mean row-number at 14 shows that the fall in
row-number from 12 to 8 in the other family has been
due to internal rather than to external causes.
The change in variability in number of rows on the
ears has also been studied from year to year. Continued
self-fertilization has resulted in a gradual decrease of
variability in the number of rows per ear in each of the
self-fertilized lines. This is a fluctuating character, and
so far as present evidence goes, the number of rows
per ear in any strain can not be fixed at a definite num-
ber. While it is probable that none of my self-fertilized
families has yet reached an absolutely pure-bred con-
dition, several of them have become so nearly pure-bred
that their various relations can be used to demonstrate
that they are approaching purity as a limit.
In 1909 two of these nearly pure-bred families were
compared with their reciprocal hybrids in the first and
second generations, with reference to the variability in
number of rows.’ It was found that the average varia-
bility in these two self-fertilized families was 9.08 per
cent. The variation in number of rows in their F, prog-
eny was 9.06 per cent., and in the F, 12.63 per cent. A
comparison of these coefficients of variability shows at
once that the variation in number of rows in the F, is
essentially identical with that in the self-fertilized lines
used for the cross. Theoretically this should be so if
the strains used were pure genotypes, because in that
case all germ-cells in each pure strain were alike, and
therefore, when individuals belonging to these two lines
were crossed, equal sperms met equal eggs; consequently
there should be no variability in their offspring due to
germinal differences, but only those due to environment
in the widest sense. As the pure-bred families and their
F, and F, progenies were grown beside each other dur-
ing the same season, they were subjected to as nearly
identical environmental influences as can be attained.
ë Shull, G. H., ‘‘ Hybridization methods in corn breeding,’’ Am. Breeders’
Magazine, 1: 98-107, 1910.
No. 532] THE GENOTYPES OF MAIZE 243
Consequently, when the F, shows the same variability as
the pure lines which entered into it we must conclude
that there was at least approximate equality among the
sperms which came from the one self-fertilized strain,
and among the eggs which came from the other. In the
F., on the other hand, genotypic differences appear,
owing to the segregation of the different characteristics
into the different germ-cells, and to this fact may be
ascribed the increased variability in the F,.
While other characters have not been studied by the
same methods that have been used in the investigation of
the number of rows on the ears, several features asso-
ciated with the physiological vigor of the various pedi-
grees have given evidence which appears to me to be
strongly corroboratory of the uniformity of the germ-
cells produced by plants which have become pure-bred
through continued self-fertilization. The smaller size
and less vigor of the offspring of self-fertilized plants as
compared with those from a normally cross-bred plant
were formerly taken to indicate that self-fertilization is
injurious, and Darwin’s ‘‘ Effects of Cross and Self-fertil-
ization in the Vegetable Kingdom” strongly impressed
this point of view. I have been able to demonstrate,
however, that this supposedly injurious effect of self-
fertilization is only apparent and not real; or at least
that if there is such injurious effect, it is relatively in-
significant as compared with the increased vigor due to
heterozygosis. The most important evidence of this is
found in the fact that the continuation of self-fertiliza-
tion in any pedigree does not produce a corresponding
decrease in vitality and size. The decrease resulting
from a second year of self-fertilization is not as great as
that from the first year. The third year of self-fertiliza-
tion produces still less deterioration, and as this process
18 continued a limit is approached in such manner as to
Justify the inference that when complete purity is at-
tained no further deterioration is to be expected, thus
proving that self-fertilization is not in itself injurious.
244 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
That this is also true of other plants is derivable from
Darwin’s own work.
This decrease in size and vigor is accompanied by the
gradual lessening of variability, and when that state is
finally reached in which there is no further decrease in
size and vigor, it seems probable that there will be also
no further noticeable change in variability. This does
not mean, of course, that there will be no variability, for
even the most uniform group of plants or animals will
of necessity show slight. variations produced by differ-
ent conditions of life, food supply and so forth. But
present evidence does not warrant the belief that such
fluctuations affect in the least the fundamental qualities
of the genotype.
In 1908 I suggested a hypothesis to explain the appar-
ent deterioration attendant upon self-fertilization, by
pointing out that in plants, such as maize, which show
superiority as a result of cross-fertilization, this superi-
ority is of the same nature as that so generally met with
in F, hybrids. I assumed that the vigor in such cases is
due to the presence of heterozygous elements in the
hybrids, and that the degree of vigor is correlated with
the number of characters in respect to which the hybrids
are heterozygous. I do not believe that this correlation
is perfect, of course, but approximate, as it is readily
conceivable that even though the general principle should
be correct, heterozygosis in some elements may be with-
out effect upon vigor, or even depressing. The presence
of unpaired genes, or the presence of unlike or unequal
paired genes, was assumed to produce the greater func-
tional activity upon which larger size and greater effi-
ciency depend. This idea has been elaborated by Dr.
East and shown to agree with his own extensive experi-
ments in self-fertilizing and crossing maize. He sug-
gests that this stimulation due to hybridity may be anal-
ogous to that of ionization.
Mr. A. B. Bruce proposes a slightly different hypothe-
* East, E. M., ‘‘The distinction between development and heredity in
in-breeding,’? AMER. NAT., 43: 173-181, 1909.
No. 532] THE GENOTYPES OF MAIZE 245
sis in which the degree of vigor is assumed to depend
upon the number of dominant elements present rather
than the number of heterozygous elements. While all
of my data thus far are in perfect accord with my own
hypothesis, and I know of no instance in which self-fertil-
ization of a corn-plant of maximum vigor has not re-
sulted in a less vigorous progeny, it is quite possible
that I have still insufficient data from which to distin-
guish between the results expected under these two hy-
potheses. However, for the purpose of the present dis-
cussion, it is not necessary to decide which of these two
hypotheses (if either) is correct. Both of them are
based upon the view that the germ-cells produced by any
plant whose vigor has been increased by crossing are not
uniform, some possessing positive elements or genes not
possessed by others.
Several different characters which are more or less
dependent upon physiological vigor have been taken into
account in my work, each of which gives its own support
to the conception upon which both of these hypotheses
are based. The number of rows of grains on the ears
which has been most extensively used as a measure of
variability, and as a guide in selection, is found to be
somewhat affected by the vigor of the individual, and it
is due to this fact, no doubt, that the row-number is a
fluctuating character, even in the pure genotype. An-
other characteristic which has been used as a measure of
vigor has been the yield of corn computed in bushels per
acre.“ A third characteristic, which was not taken into
account at the beginning of the experiments but which
aig given confirmatory data in the later years, is the
height of the stalks, a character which was much used by
Darwin as a measure of vigor in his study of the effects
of cross- and self-fertilization in plants.
a = understood that this method of stating yields is seriously
thnk Ge ae a st ig peas of a 2o poe noe a
; e each of my igrees has usually oceupie
only about one one-hundredth of an acre. However, I believe that this
defect is more than offset by the advantage of using a unit of yield with
which all readers are familiar. 3
246 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
We may now consider the behavior of these several
measures of physiological vigor in relation to the theory
that distinct genotypes of maize are gradually segre-
gated from their hybrid combinations, by self-fertiliza-
tion, and that the degree of vigor is correlated with the
degree of heterozygosis.
I have kept families selected to given numbers of rows
on the ears—one series of families repeatedly self-fertil-
ized and another series repeatedly crossed with mixed
pollen in such a manner that self-fertilization is pre-
cluded by artificial means. It is not practicable to do
this crossing with mixed pollen in such a manner as to
duplicate the conditions found in an ordinary corn-field
for the simple reason that the number of individuals
which contribute the pollen must be more greatly re-
stricted than is true in the open field. While self-fertil-
ization has been entirely prevented, there has been a
degree of in-breeding somewhat greater therefore than
will occur under non-experimental conditions. This
degree of in-breeding is sufficient to slowly eliminate
some of the hybrid elements which were originally in my
strain of corn and should consequently lead to a gradual
deterioration in case my theory of the relation between
vigor and hybridity is correct. As a matter of fact, such
deterioration has become apparent in the ‘‘cross-bred’’*
families, when measured either by height of stalk or
yield per acre, though both of these measures show that
the deterioration has been slight. It is so slight, indeed,
that it is very much exceeded by the fluctuations from
season to season, and may only be demonstrated by the
application of a correction which approximately elimi-
nates this seasonal fluctuation. When we compare this
continual slight fall in physiological vigor of the cross-
*It should be noted that here and in wlat follows I use the expression
‘‘eross-bred’’ in a special sense, to denote the fact that all self-fertilization
has been avoided. The more usual use of the term ‘‘ecross-bred’’ to denote
a cross between individuals belonging to distinct strains, I replace in this
paper by the expression ‘‘F,,’’ as I ean see no tangible distinction between
such a cross, and hybridization in the older, more restricted, and more
arbitrary sense.
No. 532] THE GENOTYPES OF MAIZE 247
bred families with the changes produced in the self-
fertilized families during the same period, there is a strik-
ing contrast, for in the latter case there was great de-
crease in height and yield in the first year, a consider-
ably less decrease in the second year of self-fertilization,
still less in the third year, and so on, and while I have
evidence that none of my self-fertilized families has yet
reached a state of perfect stability, they are at the present
time decreasing in regard to both of these measures of
vigor somewhat less rapidly under continued self-ferfil-
ization than are the families in which self-fertilization
has been absolutely precluded.
Necessary corollaries of the view that the degree of
vigor is dependent on the degree of hybridity, or, in other
words, that it is dependent roughly upon the number of
heterozygous elements present and not upon any injuri-
ous effect of in-breeding per se, are (a) that when two
plants in the same self-fertilized family, or within the
same genotype, however distantly the chosen individuals
may be related, are bred together, there shall be no in-
crease of vigor over that shown by self-fertilized plants
in the same genotype, since no new hereditary element is
introduced by such a cross; (b) that first generation
hybrids produced by crossing individuals belonging to
two self-fertilized lines, or pure genotypes, will show the
highest degree of vigor possible in progenies represent-
ing combinations of those two genotypes, because in the
first generation every individual will be heterozygous
with respect to all of the characters which differentiate
the two genotypes to which the chosen parents belong,
while in subsequent generations, recombination of these
characters will decrease the average number of hetero-
zygous genes present in each individual; (c) that crosses
between sibs among the first-generation hybrids between
two genotypes will yield progenies having the same char-
acteristics, the same vigor, and the same degree of hetero-
geneity, as will be shown by the progenies of self-fertil-
ized plants belonging to the same first-generation family.
248 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
All of these propositions have now been tested in a
limited way. In 1910 nine different self-fertilized fami-
lies were compared with nine crosses between sibs within
the same self-fertilized family; ten crosses between sibs
in F, families were compared with ten self-fertilizations
in the same F, families; seven families were raised as
first generation hybrids between individuals belonging
to different self-fertilized families; and ten families
were grown, in which self-fertilization had been entirely
precluded during the past five years. The average height
of plants in decimeters, the average number of rows per
ear, and the average yield in bushels per acre, in these
fifty-five families are given in the MS table:
Selfed | ‘Safed F; = Fa |r, x Self |F, X Sibs | cox
Av. Height | 19.28 | 20.00 | 25.00 | 23.42 | 23.55 | 23.30 | 22.95
Av. Rows 12.28 | 13.26 14.41 | 13.67 | 13.615 | 13.73 15,18
68.07 44.62
61.42
Av. Yield | 29.04 | 30.17
An examination of this table indicates to me that on
the whole iny self-fertilized families are not yet quite
pure-bred; for the sib crosses give on the average a
slightly greater height, number of rows per ear, and
yield per acre than the corresponding self-fertilized fami-
lies, as shown by a comparison of the first two columns
of the table. The same fact is apparent from a com-
parison of the ‘‘F, X self” and ‘‘F, X Sibs’’ columns,
except that in this case the heights and number of rows
per ear are essentially equal while the yield per acre is
significantly higher in the sib-crosses than in the self-
fertilized families. An alternative explanation of these
slight differences between the results of self-fertilization
and of sib-crosses may attribute them to an injurious
effect of self-fertilization, but in any event such injurious
effect must be exceedingly slight as compared with the
stimulating effect of heterozygosis. My practise of
choosing for seed the best available ears tends to delay
the attainment of complete genotypic purity, and this
fact favors the view that whatever advantages the sib-
No. 532] THE GENOTYPES OF MAIZE 249
erosses show, are attributable to this lack of purity,
rather than to any advantage gained by crossing per se.
The columns of the table representing the F, and F,
show very plainly the superiority of the former over the
latter in regard to both height and yield per acre. The
fall in average height from F, to F, from 25 decimeters
to 23.4 decimeters and the corresponding fall in yield
per acre from 68.07 bushels in the F, to 44.62 bushels per
acre in the F, show in a most striking way the economic
advantage of using first-generation hybrids for produc-
ing the corn crop. A comparison of the F, hybrids with
the ‘‘cross-breds’’ shows the average yield of the former
to be 6.55 bushels per acre greater than that in the fami-
lies in which self-fertilization had been avoided.
The relation of these results to the experiences of eco-
nomic breeders of corn may now be considered. Perhaps
in no other class of plants has the evidence been so strong
for the possibility of gradual improvement through con-
tinued selection as in corn, and this method has been
generally followed. The selections of particular physical
and chemical qualities which have been carried on at
various experiment stations have produced noteworthy
results. Most important instances of this kind are in-
volved in the breeding experiences of Hopkins, Smith and
other breeders at the Illinois State Experiment Station,
which have been already mentioned. Here selections for
high oil content, low_ oil content, high protein and low
protein, high ears and low ears, and the angle which the
ears make with the axis of the plant, as well as selection
for increased yields, have all led to the production of
strains which possessed the desired qualities to a much
higher degree than that in which they existed in the foun-
dation stock when the selection began. All of these re-
sults may be readily explained on the ground that some
hybrid combinations of genotypes have greater capacity
for the production of the desired qualities than other com-
binations, and that the selection has gradually brought
about the segregation of those genotype-combinations
250 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
which had the highest capacity for the production of
the desired qualities. At least in regard to yield and
not improbably also in regard to the other qualities for
which selections were made, the results were dependent,
not upon the isolation of pure types possessing the de-
sired quality, but upon the securing and maintaining the
proper combination of types. I have shown above that
segregation takes place in a manner at least similar to,
if not identical with, the well-known behavior of Men-
delian characters. As a consequence of this, no strain of
corn can be maintained at a high value with respect to
any quality whose development is correlated with heter-
ozygosis, except by continued selection for the particular
qualities desired. If in any such specialized strain selec-
tions should be made for a few years on the basis of
some character independent of the one used in establish-
ing the strain, the superior qualities for which it was
originally selected would quickly disappear, owing to
the breaking up of the efficient combinations which had
been segregated ‘and maintained by selection.
The principles here presented have very great poten-
tial consequence for the practical grower of corn, and
possibly for the breeder of many other cross-breeding
plants and of animals. Their importance seems not to
have been fully appreciated by any one however, until
recently, though several breeders appear to have glimpsed
the possibilities at one time or another. Thus G. N.
Collins,’ of the United States Department of Agriculture,
has recently shown that several breeders at different
times began experiments to test the value of hybridiza-
tion in the production of high-yielding strains of corn.
The first attempt of this kind which he has found was
that of W. J. Beal’ at the Michigan Agricultural College
in 1876. At Professor Beal’s instance several other ex-
periment stations undertook to work in co-operation with
the Michigan Station in testing the value of hybrids 1m
? Collins, G. N., ‘‘The value of first ~ hybrids in corn,’’ Bull.
191, U. S. Bureau ‘of Plant Industry, 45 pp.,
” Beal; W. J., Reports, Michigan Board i p 1876-1881.
No. 532] THE GENOTYPES OF MAIZE 251
corn breeding, but only Professor Ingersoll,’ of Purdue
University, reported results. Professor Sanborn!” ap-
parently performed similar experiments in the late eight-
ies at the Maine Agricultural Experiment Station. In
1892 G. W. McCluer'*® reported on a number of crosses
made during the preceding two years at the Illinois Agri-
cultural Experiment Station, and during the next two
years Morrow and Gardner'* published bulletins from
the same station, describing the results of a number of
crosses. Apparently none of this work led to the subse-
quent utilization of hybridization methods in corn breed-
ing, as no work along this line appears to have been done
between the time when Morrow and Gardner issued their
second bulletin in 1893 and the publication of the first
report of my work with corn at the Station for Experi-
mental Evolution in 1908. The work of Beal, Ingersoll,
Sanborn, McCluer, and Morrow and Gardner showed that
increased yields from the hybrids, as compared with the
strains used for the crosses, are the almost invariable
result, though both MeCluer, and Morrow and Gardner
found isolated instances in which the hybrids were in-
ferior to the parent. strains. Hartley'® has since reported
that among a number of crosses made by the United
States Department of Agriculture also, some gave poorer
yields than the parent strains used for the cross, while
others gave superior yields, and reached the conclusion,
which I think is justified by my own results, that pro-
miscuous crossing is not necessarily advantageous but
that certain combinations lead to increased yields while
others may prove disadvantageous. Collins'® has
“Seventh Annual Report of Purdue University, 1881, p. 87.
“Sanborn, J. W., ‘‘Indian corn,’’ Agriculture of Maise 33d Annual
Report, Maine Boa ‘a of Agriculture, 1889—90,
p T8.
McCluer, G. W., ‘‘Corn erossing,’’ Bull. 21, Minois Agr. Exp. Sta.,
1892, p. 85.
“Morrow, G. E., and Gardner, F. D., Bulletin 25, ah 179-180, and
Bulletin 31, pp. 359-360, Ilinois Agr. Exp. Sta., 1893 and 1894.
* Hartley, C. P., ‘*Progress in methods of Bei a higher yielding
ered of corn,’’ Yearbook, U. S. Dept. Agr., 1909, pp. 309-320, 4 pls.
p. cit.
252 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
also reported on sixteen hybrid combinations all but
two of which gave increased yields in the F,. From the
work of all these men, especially from my own compari-
sons between F, and F, hybrids, it has become obvious
that the secret of the highest success in corn breeding
from an economic point of view lies in finding those
strains which will produce the largest yield and then
utilizing the first-generation hybrids each year.
The point which most interests us on the present occa-
sion is not, however, the economic importance of using
first generation crosses, but the evidence which appears
to me clearly indicate that a normally cross-bred plant
like Indian corn harmonizes in its fundamental nature
with such normally self-fertilized material as beans,
wheat and other grains, and such clonal varieties as pota-
toes, paramecium, etc., that the egg-cells and sperm-cells
of even the most complex hybrids present a limited num-
ber of different types which can be assorted into homo-
zygous combinations, and that, therefore, the progressive
change resulting from continued selection may be simply
explained as the gradual segregation of homozygous
types or of the most efficient heterozygous combinations.
The fact that yield and perhaps many other qualities
attain their highest development in the case of complex
hybrids naturally leads to the unconscious selection of
heterozygous plants for the next year’s cultures, and the
continual breaking up of these complex hybrids in sub-
sequent generations gives a result which closely resem-
bles fluctuating variation, but which is fundamentally
different from it. The genuineness of the gains made by
selection in corn might naturally lead to the conclusion
that fluctuations are inherited were it not for the abun-
dant evidence now available showing that a considerable
portion of the variation presented is not fluctuational,
but is due to the presence of a mixture of different types
which any selection partially segregates.
NOTES AND LITERATURE
IS THE FEMALE FROG HETEROZYGOUS IN REGARD
TO SEX-DETERMINATION ?
THE evidence that sex is determined by an internal mechanism
in unisexual animals has accumulated rapidly in the last few
years. The one outstanding case is that of the frog. That
extreme variations in the sex ratio occur in this amphibian has
been evident from the early experiments of Born 1881, Pfliiger
1882, and Yung 1883-85. The effects were generally ascribed
by the earlier workers to differences in the food of the tadpole.
Most recent and more carefully controlled experiments, notably
those of Cuénot and of King, have shown beyond doubt that food
is not a factor that determines the sex of the tadpole. On the
other hand, Richard Hertwig has effected astonishing changes in
the sex ratio of the frog by delaying fertilization of the eggs.
Over-ripe eggs produce a high percentage of males. This con-
clusion has been recently confirmed and extended by a student
of Hertwig’s, Sergius Kuschakewitsch.! By delaying fertiliza-
tion of the eggs for 89 hours after the first eggs had been laid
(which gave 53 per cent. of males) there was produced 100 per
cent. of males. The death rate of the larve was so low (from 4
to 6 per cent.) that it could not have seriously affected the results.
The following table gives the outcome of — s observations
and those of Kuschakewitsch.
Author ey Hour | Hours on f Wenn | Hours ‘eave Bonm | Boeri our
Se 0 ‘4. Boy ea a | Mh | | 88
R. Hertwig, 1907| 58% | 54% | — | 55% — | — |87% | — | —
49 =i | — | 58% | — |59 Berl re
: 48.5 37 a fee SOS a 18 =
Kuschakewitsch | 53 da E s E
This evidence shows beyond question that the sex ratio is
affected by delay in fertilization, and may seem to show even that
sex itself is determined by this factor. The evidence will, how-
ever, bear closer scrutiny. The frogs, Rana esculenta, were
captured while pairing, and were allowed to lay a few eggs in
* Hertwig’s Festschrift, 1910.
253
254 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
confinement, when they were separated. After 89 hours the
female was killed, the remainder of her eggs placed on glass
slides, and fertilized with a decoction of the testes of other (one
or more?) males. If many of the eggs soon rotated within their
membranes this was taken as a sign of successful fertilization.
It will be noted that a different male from that employed for the
normal fertilization was necessarily employed, because the
original male had presumably lost his power to further fertilize.
The employment of different males introduces a possible error
into the results, for, if the male is heterozygous for sex determina-
tion, it is conceivable, as I have previously pointed out in review-
ing Hertwig’s results, that in different individuals the sperm
may be differently affected in regard to its fertilization power.
At present we have no evidence to show that in male frogs such
differences exist, and it seems unlikely that such consistent results
as these of Hertwig and of Kuschakewitsch can be explained in
this way. An alternative view is, however, possible. If the
female is heterozygous for sex production, and in consequence
two kinds of eggs are produced, it may be that the female deter-
mining eggs are more injured by delay than are those of the other
class, the male-determining eggs. It becomes, therefore, impera-
tive to know what proportion of eggs were fertilized in these
experiments, Unfortunately this critical evidence is omitted
from Kuschakewitsch’s paper. He states that the death rate of
the tadpoles that emerge is low, but one looks in vain for informa-
tion relating to the number of eggs that were fertilized. There-
fore until this datum is forthcoming it is not possible to draw
any certain conclusions in regard to sex determination from the
evidence published by the author.
T. H. MORGAN.
COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY.
THE MUTATION THEORY
The publication of the first volume of DeVries’s ‘‘ Mutations-
theorie’ in 1901, together with the rediscovery of Mendel’s
principles, served to bring about a period of unprecedented
activity in the study of the problems connected with variation,
heredity and evolution. While the results of this decade of work
have probably raised as many questions as they have answered,
yet the period has undoubtedly been marked by advances of
the first importance, both in methods of investigation and in
No. 532] NOTES AND LITERATURE 255
results and the point of view achieved. This stimulus we owe
in no small measure to the author of ‘‘Die Mutationstheorie.’’
During this period DeVries himself has continued his activities
uninterrupted except by his two visits to America, in which he
did much through his letters and the publication of his ‘‘ Species
and Varieties’’ and ‘‘Plant Breeding,’’ to familiarize his views
to American biologists. However, the actual detailed data upon
which his theory was based, remained largely a sealed book
except to readers of German. Even those engaged in active work
on these subjects frequently failed to acquaint themselves suffi-
ciently with ‘‘Die Mutationstheorie’’ before breaking into the
field of controversy. Particularly is this true of the second
volume, the contents of which have been in large part neglected.
Professor Farmer and Mr. Darbishire have therefore per-
formed an important service in translating this work into Eng-
lish. The first volume of their translation? is the subject of this
review. The second volume is promised for April. The work
will undoubtedly receive a wide reading by English-speaking
biologists, and by others as well. The translation is an excel-
lent one, faithful to the German meaning but rendered into
idiomatic English. Whatever the degree of one’s familiarity
with the German edition, a perusal of the work in English will
be found profitable and stimulating.
A few remarks regarding the contents of the book itself may
not be out of place. In a re-perusal of the work, one is struck
with the optimism of its author and with the brilliancy and
breadth of his exposition of the views set forth. It is not neces-
sary to agree with these views in their entirety in order to appre-
ciate these qualities of the book. The analysis of the data
amassed by Darwin, in which it is shown that Darwin’s single
variations are the same as De Vries’s mutations, seems to the
reviewer particularly effective. The conception of elementary
Species seems also one which will be of lasting value, having
already shed a flood of light on many problems. :
Probably the time will soon come when nearly all biologists
will be ready to admit that mutation, or the sudden appearance
of new forms, has been an important factor at least, in species
formation in plants and animals. Admitting this, it remains to be
discovered what relation these sudden appearances bear to the gen-
1 DeVries, Hugo, 1909, ‘‘'The Mutation Theory.’’ Translated by Pro-
fessor J. B. Farmer and A. D. Darbishire. Volume I. Six colored plates,
figs. 119, pp. 582, Chicago, The Open Court Publishing Co.
256 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
eral trends of evolution, which are apparent in so many phyloge-
nies. This larger problem, which may not be amenable to direct
experimental attack, will probably occupy evolutionists for many
years to come. For, granting the facts of mutation, we have
only accounted for a micro-evolution, and it has still to be shown
that the larger tendencies .can be sufficiently accounted for by the
same means, without the intervention of other factors.
While the supreme importance of DeVries’s investigations on
mutation in Cnothera is fully recognized, his premutation
theory has always seemed to the reviewer unsatisfactory as a
hypothesis to explain the material basis of these phenomena.
The cytological investigations of myself and others on these
forms have determined the events of germ cell formation, some
of which provide a possible basis for the sudden appearance of
new types. They have, moreover, shown that different cyto-
logical processes are involved in the origin of different mutants,
and in this way have thrown much light on the relationships of
some of the mutants to their parent form. It is probable that
the whole question of the relation of the mutants to their parent
will be found to be much more complex than at present supposed.
R. R. GATES.
p ee E re Ea
SECOND EDITION, NOVEMBER, 1910
AMERICAN MEN OF SCIENCE
A BIOGRAPHICAL DIRECTORY
EDITED BY J. McKEEN CATTELL
this aeaa directory r revision if it isto maintain ea ies earl third ofthe names in the ;
apenas nan; and thes he which appeared in the first division have in nearly every case been revised. The —
been as There has nO
work. Greater strictness has been observed in confining its scope to the natural and —
exact sciences, and for this ee a few names included in ea sted see have been omitted. have been exerted to —
make the book as shee panko ages eaa are of course omissions, if only i
even t t is for the information needed. The t ee
a is The his group
i laces on t editor’ s object in selecting this ph enc
the conditions on which scientifie research dependa and 30 so far ie Seta vicar taneiny sea
an appendiz the two statistical studies that have been to the Second Edition. —
` ? This directory should be in the hands of all those who are directly or indirectly interested in mento
(1) Men of Science will find it indisponible: es not only the names, adress, asienta rosaria
and the like of t their fellow workers, but also an A someens of the reach ook of he ona,
in
(2) — in science, ev
terested in en th
Will find much of interest and value to tom
(3) Executives i in institutions of learning
{4) Editors of Newspapers and periodicals will find it to be one of the works of reference that they 9 as
meet oad frequently. |
ties poweesicpenyeed and
rag paper and bound in buckram with i
increased in size by more more than 50 percent. it ie sold at the same pic a the at e
Price: Five Dollars, net,
THE SCIENCE
The American Naturalist
A Monthly Journal, established in 1867, Devoted to the Advancement of the Biological Sciences
Reference to the Factors
with Special
‘actors of Organic Evolution and Heredity
CONTENTS OF THE OCTOBER NUMBER
—- in Urosalpinx. Dr. HERBERT EUGENE
ENRERE ee a te
nosperms. CHARLES J. CHAMBERLAIN
Nuclear Phenomena of Sexual 1 Reproduction in Angio-
sperms, Professor D. M.
Shorter Ar Articles and ET ths Sterility, Dr. Max
Nets and Literatur: Notes on Tebtheysloey; President
‘Davip STARR JORDAN. The Mammals of Colorado,
_ Fotis TeDe A Cocia -
CONTENTS OF THE NOVEMBER NUMBER
Heredity of Skin py cceena dt in Bey GERTRUDE C.
DAVENPORT and DAVENPORT.
paia te Honey Boba Bees distinguish
Colors? JOHN LOVEL
Arithmetic of the
"ONTENTS OF THE DEOEMBER NUMBER
Heredity of Skin P ion in Man. GERTRUDE C.
DAVENPORT an sto amnengearadaceas an
CONTENTS OF THE JANUARY NUMBER
“A Double Heis Eeg. Se esate peace a
_ Notes and Literature : ‘Heredity, Dr. W, J. nik f
VOL. XLV, NO. 533
Hp
e
s
THE
AMERICAN
NATURALIST
A MONTHLY JOURNAL
Devoted to the Advancement of the Biological Sciences with
Special Reference to the Factors of Evolution
CONTENTS
- The Inheritance = — and Sex in Colias Philodice. ee
JOHN H. GER
Nucleus and bpi in Heredity. Professor MICHAEL F. GUYER
A — Study of the Structure of the Photogenic Organs of Certain
Ameri ampyride. F, ALEX. MCDERMOTT and CHAS. G. CRANE -~
Shorter NER and Discussion: A Neglected a on Natural SNES in
the English Sparrow. Dr. J. ARTHUR HARRI
- Notes and Literature: volando Yule’s isis to the Theory of Statis-
PEARL
ties. Dr. RAYMOND
THE SCIENCE PRESS
LANCASTER, PA. GARRISON, N. T.
NEW YORK: SUB-STATION 84
MAY, 1911
Page
284
306
319
The American Naturalist
MSS. intended for publication and books, etc., Intended for review should be
sent to the Editor of THE AMERICAN NATURALIST, Garrison-on-Hudso n, New York.
Articles Se ga rch work bearing on the problems of organic evolu-
tion are especialiy welcome, and will be given preference in publicatie
One hundred el by wg of rs 43+ fran are supplied to authors was of charge.
Further reprints will be supplied at cost
3 a sina = gir hong sho m be sent to niia ar ngese hier
subscription s four rs a year. Fore e
T RO T eaa
> THE SCIENCE PRESS
Lancaster, Pa. Garrison, N. Y.
B NEW YORK : Sub-Station 84
Office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act of
Congress of March 3, 1879.
ees P ria a a TENTH EDITION.
-ical and Pre-historic Specimens. Books on Natural THE MICROSCOPE,
History, Soienoe; rio Voyages, eto. See Tur |% introduction to Microscopic Methods and lio Hister,
z Marine Biological Laborato 7
~ WOODS HOLE, MASS. 3
INVESTIEATION | Facilities for research in Zoology;
Reperat aber
ANA:
THE
AMERICAN NATURALIST
VoL. XLV May, 1911 No. 533
THE INHERITANCE OF POLYMORPHISM AND
SEX IN COLIAS PHILODICE!
PROFESSOR JOHN H. GEROULD
DARTMOUTH COLLEGE
THERE is perhaps no phenomenon of greater general
interest to students of organic evolution than polymor-
phism, yet, although it is of frequent occurrence in
insects, in few cases has it been investigated with long-
continued and thorough experiments in breeding. Ento-
mologists have usually been content to prove that dif-
ferent forms arise from the eggs of a single female, or
of similar females of the same species, without reference
to the male parent or to the immediate ancestors of the
female. The time has come when these interesting phe-
noniena, lying at the very doors of those at least who live
in the country, demand more serious attention than they
have yet received.
Colias philodice, the common yellow butterfly of the
clover, called sometimes the clouded sulphur or roadside
butterfly, is distinctly dimorphic in the female sex, in
that the ground color of the wings is either yellow or
White, the yellow female in most localities being much
the more abundant. As this common species can readily
be bred in large numbers, it affords excellent material
for Studying the inheritance of dimorphism limited to
one sex,
"Read before the American Society of Naturalists, December 30, 1910.
257
258 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vor XLV
Moreover the color pattern, which is the same in both
the typical yellow and the albinic variety of the female,
differs in the two sexes to such an extent that they
may be distinguished even in flight. The wings of the
Fic. 1. Colias philodice. Male. Fic. 2. Yellow female.
male (Fig. 1) are marked with a solid black band of
nearly uniform width extending along their outer mar-
gins, whereas in the female (Fig. 2) the marginal band
is wider on the fore wings and usually invaded by spots
Fic. 3. White female.
of the ground color, but narrower on the hind wings and
dusted with scales of yellow or, in the albinic variety, of
white. The marginal band on the hind wings of the
female in some individuals is absent altogether, the width
of the bands in general in both sexes being very variable.
Besides these pronounced secondary sexual differences
No.533] INHERITANCE IN COLIAS PHILODICE 259
in color and the common occurrence of the albinie female,
a few specimens. have been taken of an extremely rare
mutation, the melanie male, in which the yellow is re-
placed by smoky black, the margin being distinctly paler
than the ground color. In geographical distribution this
aberration does not seem to follow the general rule laid
down by Scudder that melanie forms occur in the southern
part of the range of a species, for two of the specimens
were from near Montreal, three seen and one captured
at Palmyra, N. Y., and one now in the collection of Mr.
H. P. Richardson, of Concord, Mass., was taken at Plain-
field, Mass.
Partial melanism, or a melanistic tendency, often occurs
in the female, though complete melanism has been found
so far only in the male. This tendency reappears in suc-
cessive generations independently of the environment, in
certain strains that I have bred, though I think it pos-
sible that the action of the surroundings on certain indi-
viduals in a plastic condition may turn the germ cells in
this direction. I have not yet had an opportunity to test
this supposition,.and my observations have been almost
entirely directed to the inheritance of the albinic variety
of the female.
Albinism in the genus Colias is due to the replacement
of yellow pigment with another which is white (Fig. 3),
all other pigments (black, red, ete.) remaining the same.
The white is sometimes tinged with yellow, but there is a
Sharp difference between the color of a typical yellow
female and that of the albinic form.
Albinism is not entirely confined to the females, though
among the 900 descendants of white females that I have
raised there has been not one white male. White males
may be expected in regions where the white female is
especially abundant. At Hanover, N. H., the proportion
of white females to yellow is, perhaps, roughly five per
cent. At Ithaca, N. Y., Professor Macgillivray informs
me, the proportion of white females is considerably
larger, being perhaps 10 or 15 per cent., and at Milton,
Mass., Mr. W. L. W. Field estimates them at 20-25 per
cent. In two localities where the white male has been
260 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vot XLV
taken, about 50 per cent. of the females are white. These
regions are Lava, Sullivan Co., N. Y., reported by Mr.
Geo. Franck, and Alstead, N. H., on the authority of Mr.
W. L. W. Field, who has seen only one white male, how-
ever, during several seasons of field work in that region.
Scudder makes the statement that ‘‘In the north this
rarely, almost never, occurs in the first brood of the sea-
son, and is found much more abundantly in the latest
than in the middle brood, the numbers increasing as the
season advanees.’’ If this statement is true, it has an
important bearing on the inheritance of the white char-
acter,? for he means, of course, that the proportions of
the white females to vellow in the spring broods is less
than in the later broods. My observations at Hanover in
1909, and those of my collaborator Mr. P. W. Whiting in
Cambridge, Mass., in 1910, do not bear this out, for we
found the white females in both places quite as common
in the spring brood as in those of summer or autumn.
Edwards likewise states that in the south the white form
is not infrequent in the spring brood. The probable rea-
son for Sendder’s observation is that the population of
the spring brood in the long run may be relatively small,
because many of the hibernating caterpillars perish.
The chances of finding white females in the field in the
spring after a severe winter may therefore be less than
during the flight of the more abundant summer broods
that have not been affected by disastrous winter weather.
One of the most interesting observations that I have
made during the past two seasons was the discovery of
a wild female Colias philodice of the spring brood closely
resembling Colias nastes of Labrador (Fig. 4), with a
greenish-yellow field overspread with brownish scales,
giving a grayish effect. In the margin brown replaces
‘black. This form of female is not common, and I have
seen it nowhere described. It was captured at Hanover,
N. H., on June 10, 1909, and produced a brood of 34
butterflies (Fig. 5) of which 19 are males, all of which
are yellow, 10 are yellow females, 5 are white females.
The yellow and white colors of these offspring are of an
* See foot-note, pp. 266, 267.
No.533] INHERITANCE IN COLIAS PHILODICE 261
unusually clear hue, and quite unlike the color of the
mother.
The progeny of this female show that, supposing her
to have mated with a pure yellow male not carrying
white, as was probably the case, she is a heterozygote for
The upper figure represents a spring form of female of Colias tele
ri rom Hanover, N. H., resembling C. nastes of Labrador, shown in the lo
fig
color, potentially white, though modified probably by the
effect of cold upon the chrysalis in early spring into a
form strikingly like that of the Arctic species, Colias
nastes. I hope to ascertain from caterpillars now hiber-
nating whether this spring form may be produced at will
from larve from a white mother by the action of cold
upon the chrysalis.
My attention was attracted to the problem of inherit-
ance of the white color in this species by certain state-
ments in Edwards’s great work on the ‘Butterflies of
North America.” He says that the progeny of an albino
female are partly albino and partly yellow, or it may be
all yellow. ‘‘In one instance,’’ he says, ‘‘I had five
butterflies from eges laid by an albino, ii there re-
sulted one male and four yellow females, no albino.
262 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ VoL. XLV
In another case of four females one was an albino.
Mr. Mead has met with similar results, and neither
of us have known an albino to be produced from the
eggs of a yellow female.’’ These brief notes pointed
Fig. 5. The spring form of female of Colias philodice (at the top) and her
offspring. The two rows at the bottom are yellow females; the third row from
>» their nastes-like
the bottom are white females. .None of the offspring resemble
mother.
so clearly to Mendelian inheritance that I resolved to
investigate the matter, and I have thus far bred over 900
individuals from white females and from the daughters
and sons of white females. In general my results differ
from Edwards’s observations at two points: (1) The
white females always produce both white and yellow
females, provided the family is large enough to represent
all the possibilities. The family mentioned by Edwards,
four yellow females, no white, was too small to indicate
No. 533] INHERITANCE IN COLIAS PHILODICE 263
that the mother would produce no white offspring. (2)
Yellow females under certain conditions do produce both
yellow and white offspring. Thus the mothers of fami-
lies ‘‘e,’’ “f,” “ʻi,” and ‘‘k,’’ 1910, were yellow, produc-
ing, respectively: 13 white and 14 yellow daughters; 7
white and 5 yellow; 30 white and 14 yellow; 19 white and
19 yellow. The conditions under which these four yel-
low females produced white offspring were alike. The
female and the brother with which she mated were in each
case the immediate offspring of a white female, the male
mate in each case being presumably heterozygous for
color, y(w), the yellow female homozygous for that
color, yy.
1. [NHERITANCE OF THE WHITE FEMALE
Summary of Results
My observations, begun in the fall of 1908 and extend-
ing through the two following seasons, some of the same
stock now being in hibernation, may be summarized as
follows:
1. The white female, of which I have tested 13 indi-
viduals, is in all cases heterozygous for color, producing
when crossed with a pure yellow male (wild, or her own
brother), either equal numbers of white and of yellow
female offspring, in accordance with Mendelian expecta-
tion (stock from Cambridge, Mass., families a, b, ¢, d,
1910), or twice as many yellow females as white (stock
from Hanover, N. H., families a and c, 1909). The male
offspring of a heterozygous white female are all yellow,
though presumably one half are heterozygous, y(w), and
one half homozygous dominants, yy.
2. It is evident from these observations that white is
dominant in the female, yellow in the male, these being
the colors of the respective heterozygotes. This case is
comparable to the results obtained by Wood in crossing
horned Dorset with hornless Suffolk sheep, the male
heterozygote of F, having horns, the ewes being hornless.
The horned condition is therefore dominant in the male,
while in the female hornlessness is dominant.
264 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
TABLE I
WHITE §* [HETEROZYGOUS, W(Y)] X YELLOW ¢ [HOMOzyYGoUS, YY]
N f N b f Whi Yell
Monier ra owed alee. Madrim Fenaies
Wild, white Wild, yellow 1808 3 2 3
y ga 1909 a 39 7 16
Nostee-like formë - 3 "op 19 5 10
Wild, white ef " ee 13 3 7
Total in 1908 and 1909 743 8 178 8 369 9
Mother Father | Brood Males i nl Ae
|
Wild, whiteA | Wild, yellow | 1910 a 18 6 9
B ab T b 79 22 28
4 t C tt 6“ | c 24
(3 t4 D | 6c 64 | d 30 15 13
Total in 1910 | irga 5188) 5899
3. If a heterozygous white female is crossed with cer-
tain other yellow males, her brothers and the sons of the
same white female, that are heterozygous for color (as
indicated by the fact that when mated with homozygous
yellow females both white and yellow offspring result),
a larger number of white females than of yellow are
produced, though not three white to one yellow according
to Mendelian expectation. The oe observed is
approximately two to one (viz., 38:22, 13:8, g and h, 1910,
and probably the 8:4 of family 2w, 1909). This propor-
tion may be explained, as Dr. Castle first suggested to
me, by assuming that in these families no homozygous
whites occur, through infertility or abortion of the
‘‘white’’ germ cells that would naturally combine with
white, so that the offspring consist of:
dod 25 per cent. homozygous yellow, yy, and 50 per cent. heterozygous
yellow, y(w).
92 25 per cent. homozygous yellow, yy, and 50 per cent. heterozygous
white, w(y), no pure homozygous whites of either sex occurring in my
es,
‘The sign 8 stands in Tables I-VI for the white female, ? for the
yellow female.
š This individual is possibly a i apes (yy) 9, modified by cold and
mated with a heterozygous y(w) male. It is pee that this brood should
be included in Table IV.
No. 533]
INHERITANCE IN COLIAS PHILODICE
TABLE II
265
WHITE : [HETEROZYGOUS, W(Y)] X YELLOW & [HETEROZYGOUS, Y(W)]
Mother Fath White Yell
( father ( yellow! = Main Females F Kang
1q3 *1d8 3 l 4 3 3
1q | + 1d38 g 63 38 22
1d | « h 16 13 8
Total 838 3 548 8 339 9
TABLE III
WHITE § [HETEROZYGOUS, W(Y)] X YELLOW g [UNTESTED, YY OR TH
Mothe ka Mal Fonda | Feon
KA Wats | dain | mea | pme, | pomas | ennes
vee | |
aS 3 | asg 1909, 2w 20 8 | 4
w t 1910, m 9 5 | 3
| o 9 : 3 Pea
Total 383 3 1688 1499
Thus here is a case comparable to that of yellow mice,
which, as shown by Cuénot, Castle and others, are always
al roergons. homozygous yellow mice not being pro-
duced; so that the proportions obtained by mating yel-
low mice together is 66.6 per cent. yellow, 33.3 per cent.
non-yellow.
4. The wild white males which occur rarely are pre-
sumably recessive homozygous whites, but none have
yet appeared in my crosses of heterozygous yellow males
with heterozygous white females (g and h, 1910), and I
have not yet had an opportunity to test their possibili-
ties in breeding.
TABLE IV
YELLOW 9 [HoMozyeous, YY] X YELLOW g OT, y(w)]
Setomaneaes ———— n
rell
Tiwa Father Brood Males bac aR
i i I ON
F ag 1910, e 58 13 14
al? al? f 10 7 5
4d% tlds k 46 19 19
lą% t1d'8 i 27 30 uH
oo 14133 6988! 5299
* Tested by crossing with 1d°°9 (yellow). See Table IV.
t Tested Z Eo with 1d Ọ (yellow). See Table IV.
t See Tabl
266
THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
TABLE V
YELLOW ? [HOMOZYGOUS, YY] X YELLOW ¢ [HOMOZYGOUS, vr]
oth | | Whit Yell
( prioni | ne | pees | pare | Fem ales Fem pel
a at, am a | 1909, 27 | 20 Lge eee
OUR) Umber OF MEON iusi i sas wes Ve oe hee ee 507
TO -CUMOr OL OMEA ce isis nae 5 bas oa se oe ee eae 412
TABLE VI
THE RESULTS OF BREEDING EIGHT DIFFERENT PURE LINES OF STOCK
DURING 1908-1910. Brackets enclose designations of individuals
used in subsequent breeding
Mother Father Brood és Females
88
1908
Wild, white Wild, yellow |_...... 3 2
1909
Ag ye H 1909 a |39[a®g,etal.J|} 7[a%}8]
a® 8 ab gf 2w 20 8
atọ Either a®, a”, 2y 20 0
a’6 or af?
1909 B
Nastes-like form | Wild, yellow b 19 5
1909 C
Wild, white a e 13 3
1910 A at
Wild, white teas ee 1910a | 18 [2o] 6
alto a'g e 58 13
al 9 alg f 10 7
1910 B
2 : 4b 3 4b2 8
Wild, white | Wild, yellow | b |79 [tes Z| \22 ib
4b?" 3 4b 3 m 9
1b” 8 is o 9
1910 ©
Wild, white Wild, yellow c 24 8
1910 D 1 la”
Wild, white a ü d “Li de] 15] 14%
1s
148 1d'8 38
1d® 3 ut h 16 13
1d* 9 “ i 27 30
1da% ọ 1a? ż k 46 19
1036 g é l 4 3
Yellow
Females
7?
16 [a% 9}
4
15
If the proportion yellow females to white is really greater in =
spring brood than in ade
would a evident that some of the yellow females of a
states, then it
spring brood are heterozygous for color.
See p. 260.
summer and especi
ially autumn, as Seu
No. 533] INHERITANCE IN COLIAS PHILODICE 267
5. Yellow daughters of a white female are probably all
homozygous for yellow.*? When crossed with certain of
their brothers, presumably heterozygous for color, these
yellow females produce both yellow and white female
offspring, sometimes in equal numbers, in accordance
with Mendelian expectation (broods e, f, k), but some-
times twice as many white as yellow (brood i).
6. Yellow homozygous females, daughters of a white
female, when mated with other brothers presumably
homozygous produce only yellow offspring (brood 2y,
909)
2. INHERITANCE IN Colias Edusa
The numbers of typical orange and of white females of
the European Colias edusa obtained by Frohawk (1901)
from the eggs of four wild white females (var. helice),
viz., 110 white 92 (helice) and 125 orange 92 (edusa)
with 302 $3, are in approximation to equality, and point
to the conclusion that, in this species also, the white
female is heterozygous for color.
Harrison and Main (1905) raised from the eggs of a
white female (helice) of this species 79 3g, 52 99 helice
(white), and 19 99 edusa (orange). The numbers indicate
that in this case both the parents were probably heterozy-
gous for color. All the male offspring were of the typical
orange hue, so it may be assumed that the 25 per cent. of
homozygous white males that would be expected from
mating two heterozygotes together were aborted, though
the numbers indicate that 25 per cent. of the females were
homozygous in whiteness. The expectation in the distri-
bution of the observed number (71) of females would be
* It is of course not impossible that yellow females that are heterozygous
for color may exist, and that this may account for the excess of yellow
females over white in broods a, b and c, 1909. In order to test this matter
and to determine whether, when a pair of yellows throw white, it is the
male or the female that carries the white, the male crossed with any yellow
Should first be mated with a female known to be of a pure yellow strain.
268 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vo. XLV
173 homozygous white, ww, + 354 heterozygous white,
w(o), +17} homozygous orange, 00, — 534} white [ww
+ w(o)] +172 orange, which accords closely with the
actual count, viz., 52 white (helice), 19 orange (edusa).
3. GENERAL OBSERVATIONS ON THE Genus Colias
Since the female color pattern is the one that prevails
in both sexes when there is no differentiation (e. g., Colias
nastes, C. hyale, ete.) I am inclined to the view that in
this genus of butterflies at least, as probably in birds, the
secondary sexual characters of the male represent a more
highly modified, those of the female a more primitive,
condition. We may recognize in this country, as in the
eastern continent, a natural series of species of the genus
Colias, at the beginning of which stands the undifferen-
tiated. Arctic Colias nastes of Labrador, Greenland,
northern British America and Alaska, with the female
color pattern, and a dull greenish yellow ground color
suffused with brown, common to both sexes. This ground
color, as my brood of Colias philodice, 1909, b, shows, is
closely related to white and probably interchangeable
with it. Next in the series are the subarctic C. pelidne
and C. scudderi, in the males of which the yellow color
and black color pattern typical of many species of Colias
attain their full development, while all the females are
clear white, with faint marginal dark bands.
The yellow ground color and the solid black marginal
band probably arose by mutation in an undifferentiated
nastes-like or white stock, and at once became dominant
in the male, while the original colors and color pattern
remained dominant in the female.
Southward from the range of C. pelidne, in the Cana-
dian faunal region, is the closely related C. interior, m
which yellow females (var. laurentina) occur, though
white females are ‘‘on the whole commoner’’ according
to Seudder, and from this region southward extends C.
philodice, in which the yellow females generally are far
more adundant than the white. Finally, the orange color
of C. eurytheme of the central and western states, 1m
No. 533] INHERITANCE IN COLIAS PHILODICE 269
which species a most complicated polymorphism occurs,
probably represents a stage in evolution beyond the yel-
low, as does also the black of the melanic male mutant of
Colias philodice.
The view that the color and color pattern of the male
butterfly diverge more widely from the typical colora-
tion of the group to which the species belongs, than those
of the female, though advocated by Darwin, 1871, was
strenuously opposed by Scudder (’89, Vol. 1, p. 531),
who cites the white female of Colias philodice as evi-
dence to support his position. The case of Argynnis
diana, in which the dark blue female differs much more
widely from the usual tawny color of the fritillaries
than does the male, certainly points strongly to Seudder’s
view, but it may well be that no one rule applies to all
genera of butterflies, though there are in butterflies and
in birds few if any exceptions to the law that the plumage
of the male is more brilliantly colored and more highly
differentiated than that of the female.
4. INHERITANCE IN Papilio memnon
Jacobson’s observations on the Javan butterfly Papilio
memnon, in which there are three varieties of female,
and the discussion of them by de Meijere, 1910, show
that, as in Colias, the dominant form among the females
is the one most unlike the male, viz., the brownish, tailed
Achates; the form that is recessive in the female, as in
Colias also, is the one most like the male, viz., the dark
tailless Laocoon. The intermediate variety, Agenor, is
heterozygous, epistatic to Laocoon but hypostatic to
Achates. In the male the dark color, recessive in the
female, is completely dominant.
Inspection of Jacobson’s results leads one to believe
that two, or probably three, pairs of unit characters are
involved, and that not all of the individuals recognized as
Achates or as Agenor are of the same gametic consti-
tution. The remarkable fact brought out by Jacobson
1s that, in the various combinations made, only two of the
three varieties of female were obtained in any one brood.
As a working hypothesis, I regard the dominant female
270 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
form (the brownish tailed Achates) as the original type,
from which the tailless dark-colored male and the some-
what similar Laocoon have been derived by mutation,
in the same way that the white color, dominant in the
female but recessive in the male of Colias, may be pos-
tulated as the ancestral color in that genus.
5. INHERITANCE oF SEX
Discussion of the inheritance of sex in Colias philodice
at present must deal in part with unverified hypotheses,
because I have not yet secured and tested white males
nor, if they exist, homozygous white females. Since,
however, all other possible combinations have been rea-
lized, these may now be reviewed, and tentative predic-
tions made as to what progeny may be expected in the
future from homozygous white stock in its various com-
binations.
Let us suppose that the male color pattern and all
primary and secondary sexual characters of the male are
dependent upon the presence of a ‘‘determiner’’ for
which the male individual is a homozygous dominant
(xx), while the female individual is heterozygous, one
half of the gametes which it produces containing the
determiner (x) and one half lacking it (o). Thus the
gametic constitution of the female may be represented as
xo, that of the male as xx.
Taking color into consideration, the nature of the pure
yellow male may be represented by the symbol: yyXX,
that of the pure yellow female as yyox. Furthermore,
if yellow is dominant in the male, and white in the female
the male heterozygote would be y(w) xx, while the white
female would have the symbol w(y) ox. Such a white
female, being heterozygous in both color and sex, may be
further assumed to produce in equal numbers gametes
of four kinds. This hypothesis will appear perhaps
more firmly grounded if we imagine that both of the
mitoses which give rise to the polar bodies are dif-
ferential divisions, instead of one being an equation
division and one a differential division, as is usually as-
No. 533] INHERITANCE IN COLIAS PHILODICE 271
sumed or demonstrated to be the case. The eggs of the
white female are, accordingly, to be represented as fol-
lows: yx, yo, wx, wo; those of the yellow female: yx and
yo. It is not necessary to assume in gametogenesis of
the heterozygous white female of Colias any repulsion
between one determiner and another resulting in a coup-
ling such as is believed to occur in Abraxas. The deter-
miner for yellow and that for white have equal chances
of passing into a gamete with the male determiner or
into one without it.
There are, of course, nine imaginable sets of combina-
tions that would take place in the fertilization of the
eges of a species with three sorts of females: yyox,
w(y)ox and wwox by the sperms of the males: yyxx,
y(w)xx and wwxx. We will consider first the combina-
tions that up to the present time actually have been made
in my cultures.
1. THE PURE YELLOW FEMALE X THE PURE YELLOW MALE
ITOR X A IYI
R yo = gametes of the female
yx, yx= gametes of the male
XX, yyox= 50 per cent. pure yellow gg, 50 per cent. pure yellow 99.
(Brood 2y, 1909.)
2. THE PURE YELLOW FEMALE X HETEROZYGOUS YELLOW MALE
yyox X y(w)xx
YX, yo= gametes of the female
yx, wx = gametes of the male
YYXX, yyox, y(w)xx, w(y)ox
25 per cent. pure yellow gg, 25 per cent. pure yellow 99, 25 per cent.
heterozygous yellow dd, 25 per cent. heterozygous white 99, all the
males being yellow, and the females yellow and white in equal num-
bers. (Broods e, f, k, i
3. WHITE HETEROZYGOUS FEMALE X PURE YELLOW MALE
w(y)ox x yyxx
a S
wx, yo hee of the female
yx, cae of the m
y (w)xx, w(y)ox, yyxx, yyox
dS 50 per cent. pure yellow, 50 per cent. heterozygous yellow,
$F 50 per cent. pure yellow, 50 per cent. heterozygous white,
all the male being yellow, the females ee and white in equal
numbers, (Broods a, e, 1909; a-d, 191
272 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
4. WHITE HETEROZYGOUS FEMALE X HETEROZYGOUS YELLOW MALE
w(y)ox X y(w) xx
Wx, Wo, yo= gametes of the female
yx, wx= gametes of the male
y(w)xx, w(y)ox, yyxx, yyox
y (w) xx hig
wox. Assuming that the last two combinations (homozygous
wiles} are cancelled, we should hav
gg 25 "= cent. pure yellow, 50 per Sink heterozygous yellow,
9 25 per cent. pure carat 50 per cent. heterozygous white.
This aki tion has also been accomplished in my cultures, e. g.,
broods g and h, 1910.
The five possible remaining combinations may never be
completely realized owing to partial or complete infer-
tility of the homozygous white stock. However, white
males do occur, and assuming that homozygous white
zygotes might be successfully produced, the resulting
combinations would be as follows:
5. PURE YELLOW FEMALE X Homozygous WHITE MALE
yyox X WWXX
yx, yo= gametes of the female
wx, wx= gametes of the male
y(w)xx, w(y)ox, that is, both males and females would be hetero-
zygous for color, all the males being yellow, all the females white.
6. HETEROZYGOUS WHITE FEMALE X Homozycous WHITE MALE
w(y)ox X wwxx
WX, WO, yx, yo= gametes of the female
wx, wx = gametes of the male
WWXX, WWOX, y(W)xx, w(y)ox, giving
dd 50 per cent. heterozygous yellow, 50 per cent. homozygous white,
99 50 per cent. heterozygous white, 50 per cent. homozygous white,
thus all the females would be white, but the males yellow and white
in equal numbers.
7. Homozycous WHITE FEMALE X PURE YELLOW MALE
WWOX X yyxx
wx, wo= gametes of the loran
yx, yx= gametes of the
Aion w(y)ox, or the males all heterozygous yellow, the females all
erozygous white [the same result as in (5)
No. 533] INHERITANCE IN COLIAS PHILODICE 273
8. HOMOZYGOUS WHITE FEMALE X HETEROZYGOUS YELLOW MALE
wwox X y(w)xx
wx, wo= gametes of the female
yx, wx= gametes of the male
y(w)xx, w(y)ox, Wwxx, wwox, or
g 50 per cent. yellow, heterozygous, 50 per cent. pure white,
99 50 per cent. white, heterozygous, 50 per cent. pure white.
9. Homozycous WHITE FEMALE X Homozygous WHITE MALE
WWOX X wwxx
wx, wo= gametes of the female
wx, wx= gametes of the male
“WWXX, ‘WWox, or ‘the males all homozygous white, the females all
homozygous white.
That the germ cells in the white female, which I have
shown to be heterozygous for color, and which is pre-
sumably also heterozygous for the sex determiner, are
really segregated in oogenesis into four distinct groups
is strongly indicated by the realization of the results of
this hypothesis as shown in §§3 and 4. In this segre-
gation there is no real ‘‘coupling,’’ the sex determiner
(x) being equally distributed among the white and the
yellow gametes, but the chances are also equal that any
gamete may receive the x factor, and become a male
zygote when fertilized, or lack it, and become on fertil-
ization a female organism.
As would be expected, there are similarities between
Colias and Abrazxas* in the method of inheritance of the
white female variety in each. The female in both is
heterozygous for sex, producing in equal numbers eggs
which give rise to males and to females when fertilized
by the like sperms of the homozygous male. But there
are striking differences between the two forms in inherit-
ance, e. g., the dominance of the type color in Abraxas,
compared with its dominance in the male only in Colias,
white being dominant in the female; females of the type
orm that are homozygous for color are found in Colias,
but not in Abraxas, in which all the type females are
heterozygous, just as are all the white females of Colias
that have hitherto been bred. The segregation of the
* Doncaster, L., 1908, Rept. Evol. Committee Roy. Soc., IV, p. 53.
274 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
color and sex determiners in the grossulariata female
and the white female Colias, both of which are hetero-
zygous in these two respects, takes place presumably by
quite different methods. Other differences or similarities
will doubtless come to light when the white male of Colias
is bred. |
The notation which I have here used to express the
gametic constitution of Colias applies equally well to
Abraxas, assuming that maleness is dominant and that
in gametogenesis of the heterozygote for color and sex,
viz., the female glossulariata, GLOX, the male determiner,
X, accompanies into one gamete the determiner for high
color, G; while the determiner for the undeveloped color,
L, is coupled with that for the undeveloped (female) sex,
viz., O. This seems to me to be a more plausible way of
expressing the combinations demanded by the results
than that there is a ‘‘repulsion’’ between the determiner
for femaleness (which is assumed in this view of the case
to be dominant) and that for the dominant strong color,
G, as suggested by Bateson and Punnett.
On the other hand, it is true that their assumption that
in Abraxas the male is a homozygous recessive may be
applied equally well to Colias. However, I am constrained
to adopt the view that the male in both is a homozygous
dominant for the following reason:
Dominance in the male postulates the presence in all
the sperms and in half the eggs of a chemical substance
which in double quantity in an oosperm so stimulates it
that the male characters, both primary and secondary,
one by one make their appearance; while in single quan-
tity (introduced by the sperm only) a lesser stimulus 1s
given, and the organism develops in lesser degree along
different lines into the female form. This hypothesis
carries within itself an ‘‘explanation,’’ feeble though it
be, of the male form and color pattern, as well as of
those of the female. It is in harmony with the fact that
the intenser color of the male butterfly or moth, gener-
ally, represents a more advanced condition in the evolu-
tion of pigment than the paler colors of the female.
If, on the other hand, following the interpretation of
No. 533] INHERITANCE IN COLIAS PHILODICE 275
Doneaster’s results given by Bateson and Punnett, 1908,
and by Castle, 1909, viz., that the male is recessive and
the sperms contain no sex determiner, which is presumed
to be present in half of the eggs only, then we must
imagine that a single quantity of this determiner raises
one oosperm to the female condition, while, in the entire
absence of it, it is understood that another oosperm pro-
ceeds to the development of the frequently more complex
organs and generally brighter colors of the male.
In using a modification of the convenient notation for
sex-limited characters devised by Wilson and modified
by Castle to express the parallelism between recent dis-
coveries in cytology and Mendelian segregation, I do not
wish to imply that the symbol X, as applied to Colias,
refers to any sort of chromosome. Nor is there, so far
as I know, any cytological evidence as to the dominance
or recessiveness of the homozygous male condition in the
possibly large class of cases like Abraxas and Colias in
which the female is presumably heterozygous for the
sex determiner.
As Castle, 1909, has shown, there are two categories
of cases in sex inheritance: viz., (A) those in which the
female is assumed to be a homozygous dominant for the
sex-determining factor (XX), while the male is a hetero-
zygote, producing two sorts of spermatozoa that are not
only physiologically but presumably even morpholog-
ically different. This category is illustrated cytologically
by the extreme case of Anasa, in which one set of sperms,
the male-producing, contain only four chromosomes each,
while the other, the female-producing, have five, the num-
ber characteristic of all the eggs. The second class of
cases (B) is that including Abraxas and Colias, in which
the peculiarities of their inheritance can be explained by
assuming that the female is heterozygous for the differ-
ential sex factor, producing two types of eggs, one des-
tined, when fertilized by the sperm of the homozygous
male to produce only males, the other only females.
Furthermore Castle, following Bateson and Punnett,
1908, regards maleness as recessive, the oosperm contain-
276 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
ing only one sex factor, viz., that brought in by the sper-
matozoon.
The field represented by class A has naturally been well
explored by cytologists, for in spermatogenesis the odd
chromosome was discovered, and there it is expected;
moreover the study of spermatogenesis is attended with
less difficulty than oogenesis. Hence comparatively few
observers have paid any attention to the behavior of the
chromosomes in the maturation of the egg, and cyto-
logical evidence of the occurrence of possibly dimorphic
eggs in the second class of cases is lacking, though Bal-
zer’s 1908 observations on oogenesis in the sea-urchin,
mentioned by Wilson, 1909 b, indicate that something
may be done along this line.
The cytological evidence bearing upon the Lepidoptera,
so far as it goes, however, indicates that the male is
morphologically homozygous. There is no dimorphism
of spermatozoa, the same number of chromosomes being
found in all the spermatids. There is, however, a hetero-
chromosome, interpreted by the various observers as a
pair of equal idiochromosomes, associated with the plas-
mosome in the growth period. According to Dederer,
1907, and Cook, 1910, it ultimately becomes indistinguish-
able from the other chromosomes, though in the butterfly
and the moth examined by Stevens, 1906, its large size
made it visible through the maturation mitoses, in both of
which it divides into equal parts. Thus, in the seven
moths and one butterfly (Euvanessa antiopa) examined
by these observers, there is cytological evidence, if the
chromosome theory of sex determination be assumed,
that the male is homozygous. Unfortunately we have
no exact information, so far as I am aware, as to oogene-
sis in butterflies. If it should be shown that in Lepidop-
tera there is a visible dimorphism of ova as regards the
number of chromosomes, the cytological interpretation
of sex determination would receive an interesting and
important confirmation. :
If such visible dimorphism should be discovered, it
would be most interesting to see what bearing it has, if
any, upon the question whether the homozygous male 1s
No. 533] INHERITANCE IN COLIAS PHILODICE 277
dominant or recessive. If the latter be indicated, then
we may find that a suitable designation of the gametes
of Abraxas and Colias would be that suggested by
Wilson, 1909 b, viz., for the male YY and for the female
XY, Y being the small synaptic mate of X, which is the
large odd ‘‘female-producing’’ chromosome.
On the other hand, if the male is dominant a state of
affairs that is exactly the reverse might be expected, viz.,
an absence of a chromosome, or an abnormally small one,
in half of the eggs would be the visible sign of future
femaleness. If these conditions should be realized, we
might be able to identify the ‘‘equal idiochromosomes’”’
already found in the spermatogenesis of butterflies with
my XX of the male, the corresponding chromosome in
the male-producing type of egg being X, the female-
producing ova either lacking the chromosome altogether
or having one of reduced size.
Dr. Castle, in a recent letter to me, expressed the
opinion that the well-known anabolic tendency of the
female, especially in reproductive activities, renders it
extremely probable, on the other hand, that the female-
producing gamete in every case of disparity should have
the larger chromatic equipment. This seems to me very
plausible, and it may well be that the findings of cytology
in reference to this question can never do more than
demonstrate the presence of this constant anabolic tend-
ency in the female-producing gametes. The appearance
of the large X chromosome in the female-producing
gamete of the Hemiptera may be, therefore, only the
visible expression of a sex tendency already established,
as Morgan’s observations on the cytology of Phylloxera
indicate.
But the demonstration of this anabolic tendency, even
In the unfertilized gamete, does not mean necessarily the
presence of a sex determiner that is absent or deficient
in the male-producing gamete, and hence the dominance
of femaleness. It is just as reasonable to assume that the
constant katabolic tendency of the male, evinced possibly
by deficiency in chromatin at the start and certainly by
the presence of horns, high colors and elaborate plumage
218 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
in adult life in many animals, is due to the excess of some
hormone in a gamete which thereby becomes male-pro-
ducing, in other words, to a dominance of maleness. On
the other hand, in the absence of such an excitant, the
recessive condition of femaleness would result, with a
constant tendency towards quiescence, towards the accu-
mulation of reserves of food to nourish the offspring,
and the absence in the adult of the brilliant colors, horns
and all the well-known and highly specialized secondary
sexual characters of the male.
If it should be proved that maleness is dominant in
lepidoptera in which the female is sexually heterozygous,
may it not be true, on the other hand, that femaleness is
dominant in the forms in which the male is hererorygo ni
for sex, as in Castle’s class A?
I see no inconsistency in these two antithetic categories,
but should expect to find in the latter either that the
female, and not the male, is the more variable, active and
progressive, as in the bee, or that, as in hemiptera, both
sexes are in external appearance and in habits much
alike.
In brief, I have tried to point out in this discussion
that a different interpretation from that of Castle may be
applied to the case of Abraxas, and of Colias also, viz.,
that these cases, and others that may fall into the same
category, differ from those of the well-established class A
of Castle in that one is the exact reverse of the other, the
female in class A being a homozygous dominant for the
sex determiner, whereas in class B the male is a homo-
zygous dominant, and not a homozygous recessive as has
hitherto been assumed. The view here set forth not only
accounts for the facts of Mendelian inheritance in these
two insects equally as well as the other, but has the
added advantage of harmonizing with the facts regard-
ing the secondary sexual characters in lepidoptera and
birds.” The high colors and elaborate plumage of the
* The recent experiments of Goodale, however, described in the Biological
Bulletin, Vol. 20, No. 1, December, 1910, show that the removal of the
ovaries from the Rouen duck produces a gradual tendency toward the as-
sumption of the male plumage which is not in accordance with the view that
No.533] INHERITANCE IN COLIAS PHILODICE 279
male are dominant characters eventually produced in
the adult, according to my view, by the presence in the
oosperm of a double quantity of a male-producing
enzyme or similar substance. This hypothesis does not
depend upon cytology for its support, though it is not
impossible that future discoveries in oogenesis may be
found to be in harmony with it.
6. DIMORPHS
If complete separation of the yellow- and the white-
bearing gametes should fail to occur in the oogenesis of
the white female of Colias, in the differential division of
an oocyte destined after fertilization to become a female
individual, then the right wings of the future butterfly
might be white, the left yellow, or vice versa. Such an
individual, captured by Mr. J. H. Rogers, Jr., of Med-
ford, Mass., is figured in Psyche, Vol. X, Pl. X, Fig. 4.
A similar specimen of Colias edusa, the right wings
being white, is figured by Fitch, 1878, in the Entomol-
ogist (No. 178, pp. 49-61). Fitch shows also a female
with the fore wings white and the hind wings yellow.
A gynandromorph might be produced by similar failure
in the separation of a gamete containing the sex de-
terminer from one lacking it. Various combinations of
color and sex are theoretically possible in one individ-
ual, if we assume that imperfect division of the gametes
may occur in gametogenesis. The discovery of these
combinations in nature, or their production by artificial
disturbance of the ova, is well within the limits of possi-
bility.
The production of a dimorph with one side yellow and
one white is easily explained if we assume, for example,
that the determiners for yellowness and for whiteness,
after synapsis, reside in a single bivalent chromosome,
which fails to divide differentially in oogenesis, but
passes over bodily into one of the gametes, the egg. If
the male in birds owes his more brilliant plumage to the addition of some-
thing to the female type.
280 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
the first cleavage completes the differential division of
the bivalent chromosome, instead of dividing it length-
wise, the right and left dimorphism is easily understood.
Or we might postulate the suppression altogether of the
differential oogenetic division of the egg of a white
heterozygous, w(y), female of C. philodice which nor-
mally results in the separation of color potentials, but it
is questionable whether under such conditions the egg
would develop.
Again, the theory of Boveri, 1902, that a gynandro-
morph is produced if a spermatozoon (sperm nucleus)
unites with one of the two nuclei in the two-cell stage,
instead of with the original egg nucleus; or that of
Morgan, 1907, that two sperms enter, one uniting with
the egg nucleus and (in the bee) determining the female
half, while the other gives rise to the male half, may be
applied to these dimorphs. According to Boveri’s view,
for example, we have to assume in the case of Colias
that a ‘‘white’’ sperm from a heterozygous yellow male
enters a ‘‘yellow’’ egg containing no sex determiner,
and after awaiting the precocious division of the egg
nucleus, unites with one of the two nuclei thus produced,
and determines the character of the white, or hybrid,
half of the resulting female organism.
7. Precocity OF THE MALES
Males of Colias philodice, as in certain other lepi-
doptera, not only appear in the fields earlier than the
females in the spring, summer, and autumn broods, but
also, in every family of this species that I have raised,
a very large proportion of males emerge from the
chrysalis early in the period during which eclosion takes
place. Thus, as shown by Table VII, in brood a, 1909,
28 males emerged from the chrysalis at the beginning of
the period of eclosion, while only 3 females emerged
during the same time, and, of the first half of the brood
to pupate, 26 proved to be males and only 5 females. In
general, 82 per cent. of the first half of the four broods
for which data are here presented to reach the pupal
No.533] INHERITANCE IN COLIAS PHILODICE 281
stage were males, only 18 per cent. females. The re-
maining individuals of these four families, constituting
the second half of each in reaching the pupal stage, were,
on the other hand, largely females (66 per cent.), only
34 per cent. being males.
These facts led me to entertain the idea that the eggs
which are to become males may be laid before the female-
producing ova. To test this hypothesis, I segregated
the successive batches of eggs laid by seven females in
1910, and reared the larve of each successive batch
separately, to see if the lots laid first by each female
would contain a larger proportion of males than those
laid later. It will be seen from Table VII that in fam-
ilies b, c, d and e there was in each case a slightly larger
proportion of male eggs in the first laying than in the
batches laid subsequently, but in families g, i and k ex-
actly the reverse is true, the last lots of eggs laid by each
female (viz., 3g and 4g, 2i, and 3k and 4k) containing
more males than females. It is evident, therefore, that
the male-producing ova are not laid on the average
earlier than those that are female-producing, but that
the larval period of the male is shorter than that of the
female.
In consequencè of this fact it is not surprising to find
that when a brood of caterpillars is exposed to any ad-
verse conditions such as starvation, an excess of male
butterflies, as Mrs. Treat long ago found, will result, for
the simple reason that many females, exposed to adverse
conditions during a longer period of growth than that of
the males, have been eliminated, while the more pre-
cocious male caterpillars survive in greater numbers.
This will explain, I believe, the excess of males in my
cultures, 507, or 55 per cent. of the total number being
males, 412, or 45 per cent. being females. There is no
evidence, however, of any differential death rate be-
tween the yellow and the white females. Neither is more
precocious in larval development than the other, and
tae diseases appear to strike each with equal viru-
ence,
282 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Von. XLV
TABLE VII
PRECOCITY OF MALES IN Colias philodice
| Firat Half of E Second Halfto|
Brood to Pupate| Dates of Pu- | Pupate Dates of Pu-| First Eclo-
Year | Brood | ———————_ pation Pele pation sion
ss |99 $s | 99 :
July 2-9
1909| a | 26 | 5 |June me 13 | 18 Te 20 ]| gå
July 1 98 3
190 b 14 3 | July 2-4 5 12 |July 4-
1909 c 10 1 uly 7-10 3 9 |July 11-13
1910 a 13 4 |July9-13| 5 | 11 July 13-19 eae
Total 633 $139 9 268 8 509 9|
cs eg gts per cent. of first half of all Thirty-four per cent. of the second
broods in reaching the pupal stage are| half of broods in reaching the pupal
ales stage are males
Year Brood | Males | nas Per Cent. of Males | Brood | Males
1910 | 1b | 33 | 12 |73fromistbatch| Ig | 16 | 13 | 55
2b 7 3 | 70from 2d batch 2g 18 23 44
7
3b 9 56 from 3d batch | 3g 21 19 52.5
4b 30 28 |51.7from4thbatch 4g 8 5 61.5
le 20 13 | 60.6 li 13 22
2c 4 3 |57 2i 14 22 38.8
ld 12 10 |54.5 1k 8 11 42
2d 7 6 |53.8 2k 15 12 55
3d li 12 | 47.8 3k 13 10 56.5
4k 10 5 66.6
le 13 3 | 81.2
2e 18 12 | 60 |
3e | 27 12 169 | l
Oi a aa
These investigations are by no means finished, and
any one who should chance to capture any unusual speci-
men of this species, or of any closely allied to it, show-
ing melanistic or other aberrant tendencies, would con-
fer a great favor on the writer of this paper by mailing
to him the specimen alive in a metal box lined with moist
filter paper sewed firmly against the perforated sides.
A white male is, of course, especially desired. _
In conclusion, the writer wishes to express his hearty
thanks to his friend Mr. P. W. Whiting, an accomplished
student of butterflies, for his kind and efficient coopera-
tion in the field work connected with these studies and
in the laborious processes of preparing specimens for
detailed examination. The friendly counsel of Dr. W.
E. Castle has been also of great value to the writer m
No. 533] INHERITANCE IN COLIAS PHILODICE 283
entering this to him new but extremely fascinating field
of investigation.
REFERENCES TO LITERATURE
Balzer, F., ’08. Verh. d. deutsch, Zool. Gesell. [Reference from Wilson,
1909. |
Bateson, bi and Punnett, R. C., ’08. The Heredity of Sex. Sci., Vol. 27,
No, 698, m 785-787, May Ak 1908.
Boveri; T? Ueber mehrpolige Mitosen als Mittel zur Analyse des
Se Vah phys. med. Gesell. Würtzburg, XXXV. [Ref. from
Castle, W. E., ’09. A e View of Sex Heredity. Sci., Vol. 29,
No. 740, March 5, pp. 395-
sa 10. On a Modified PE Ratio among Yellow Mice. Sci.,
Vol. 32, No. 833, December 16, 1910, pp. 868-870.
Cook, M. H, 10. Spermatogenesis in Lepidoptera. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci.
Phila., April, 1910, pp. 294-327, Pl. XXII-XXVII
Darwin, C, "71. Descent of Man. Vol. I, C
LOT: Siicruiateginbels in Philosamia cynthia, Biol. Bull.,
Vol. 13, No. 2, pp. 94-105.
Doneaster, L., and Raynor, ’06. Proc. Zool. Soc. London, Vol. I, p. 125.
` Edwards, W. H., ’68—’93. The Butterflies of North America. 3 vols.,
oston.
Frohawk, F. W., ’01. On the Occurrence of Colias edusa and C. hyale in
1900, and the ge of Rearing the Variety helice from helice Ova.
Entomologist, Vol.
Jacobson, B10. Béo re achtungen über den Polymorphismus von Papilio
57
Meijere, J. C. H. de, ’10. Ueber K IAS bezüglich
a Polymorphismus von Papilio memnon L. 9, und über die raiona
undärer Geschlechtsmerkmale. Ze stik f. indukt. Abstamm. u. Ver
aire Bd. 3, No. 3, pp. 161-181, March, 1910.
Morgan, T. H., ’07. periment Zoology. Chap. 27, p. 407. New York.
-» 789. The Butterflies of the Masters United States and
anada. 3 vols., Cambridge, Mass.
Stevens, N. M., ’06. Studies in Spermatogenesis, II. Pp. 33-58, Pl. VIII-
XV. Carnegie Inst. Washington
Wilson, E. B., Recent Denarni on the Determination and Heredity
of Sex. ha Vol 29, No. 732 , January 8, 1909, pp. 53-70.
Abraxas, Sci., Vol. 29, No. 748, April 30, 1909, pp. 704-706
Note on the Inheritance of Horns and Face-colour in Sheep.
Jour, Agri. Sci., Vol. I, Pt. 3, p. 364.
NUCLEUS AND CYTOPLASM IN HEREDITY?
PROFESSOR MICHAEL F. GUYER
UNIVERSITY OF CINCINNATI
Tat there is a physico-chemical basis of heredity and
that it is, if not exclusively, at least fundamentally bound
up in the proteins of the germ-cells, we know for certain.
If there is anything else than this physico-chemical basis
we do not know it. But.even should there be, it is incon-
ceivable that it is not subject to physico-chemical agen-
cies and limitations, and we are bound, therefore, to con-
tinue our search for these material factors as long as we
can unearth new facts or arrive at new generalizations.
Before undertaking a discussion of the germ-cell, how- ,
ever, I wish to call attention to certain chemical facts
that are frequently overlooked or slighted by the biologist.
In chemical reactions we have not only to take into
account the initial chemical substances and such external
factors as pressure, temperature, etc., but in many in-
stances we must reckon also with the quantitative rela-
tions, especially the concentrations of the various sub-
stances, and the velocities of their reactions, since altera-
tions in either of these factors may profoundly modify
the end-products of the reactions. A very simple ex-
ample of quantitative relations is seen in the combination
of carbon and oxygen. If much oxygen is present, CO,
is formed, if little CO, and these are two very different
substances, particularly when physiologically considered.
Or, when chlorine acts upon methane, CH,, depending
upon purely quantitative relations and physical condi-
tions, any one of four different substitution products
ranging from CH,Cl to CCl, may be secured.
The questions of quantitative proportions and of veloci-
ties are of especially great significance in a sequence of
* Read before the American Society of Naturalists, at Ithaca, December
30, 1910.
284
No. 533] NUCLEUS AND CYTOPLASM IN HEREDITY 285
reactions where a number of associated substances are
concerned and where certain of the materials, before they
can become active, must await the outcome of the reac-
tions between other members of the mixture. For ex-
ample, when hydrochloric acid is passed into an alcoholic
solution of hydrocyanic acid, provided there are suff-
cient quantities of these three ingredients, five definite
crystalline end-products of their interaction result. First
the hydrochloric and hydrocyanic acids combine to form
amido-formyl-chloride, which then adds another mole-
cule of hydrocyanic acid. This product next. reacts with
one molecule of aleohol which to this point has been inac-
tive. The result is what we may call end-product one.
Then end-products two, three and four, respectively, are
formed by the successive additions of a single molecule
of alcohol to separate molecules of a part of the immedi-
ately preceding end-products. The fifth end-product is
not so directly related to the others. It is elaborated
chiefly through the interaction of hydrocyanie acid and
water, but this interaction can not take place until water
is released through dehydration of some of the other
compounds. There is little doubt that such sequential
reactions as these may be taken as simple models of what
goes on on a tremendous scale in the developing germ-
cell,
It is a well-known chemical fact, moreover, that when
two or more progressive reactions are going on simul-
taneously, a quickening or retardation of the velocity of
either, with the consequent precocious development of
certain stages in the sequence, may lead to a partial or
complete deflection of the original trend of the reactions
and the formation of entirely different end-products than
would otherwise have resulted. And velocities may be
varied greatly by such factors as temperature and cata-
lytic agents.
But what has all this to do with the germ-cell? Simply
this, the substance of the germ-cell, in so far as we know
it, is of materials such as proteins, carbohydrates and
fats which we have no reason for doubting are subject
286 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von XLV
to the same fundamental laws of chemical behavior
whether they exist in living matter or in non-living
matter. If in the comparatively simple cases of associ-
ated simultaneous reactions with which we are acquainted
in non-living matter, relative velocities may so modify
the results, we can readily realize of what tremendous
importance regulation of this matter must become in
living protoplasm where doubtless vast numbers of
chemical reactions and interactions are going on at the
same time. In fact, could we locate such a time regula-
ting factor in the germ-cell it would seem that we had
accomplished a long stride toward an understanding of
the controling and coordinating mechanism which in-
sures the appearance of just the proper substance at the
right time in morphogenesis. It would constitute a quali-
tative as well as a quantitative regulator, for by deter-
mining quantity at any given time it determines what the
next chemical reaction will be,and hence in the very doing
of this, it necessarily conditions the chemical outcome of
that reaction. As we have seen, temperature and cata-
lytic agents are important factors in modifying the velo-
cities of reactions in ordinary chemical processes, and
inasmuch as under normal conditions of development the
temperature factor is a fairly constant one, we are left
to face the question as to whether in protoplasmic phe-
nomena there is anything to correspond to catalyzers.
Such substances we find in the enzymes.
While the method of enzyme activity is not positively
known, the consensus of opinion of those who have
studied them most seems to be that they act by catalysis.
For instance, both catalyzers and enzymes are effective
in very minute quantities; neither appears among the
end-products of the substances acted upon, but exists 1m-
dependently and in exactly the same quantity as at the
beginning of the reaction; external conditions such as
temperature affect their activities similarly; and lastly,
the rate, that is, the velocity of the reaction concerned,
depends upon the amount of the catalyzer or enzyme
present. When we have explained the phenomena of
No. 533] NUCLEUS AND CYTOPLASM IN HEREDITY 287
catalysis, therefore, we have at the same time doubtless
gone far toward explaining the action of enzymes.
We know that different ferments act differently on the
same substance and that the same ferments may act on
different substances within certain limits. To realize the
truth of the first proposition we have only to compare the
results of the butyric, the lactic and the alcoholic fer-
mentations of grape sugar. As to examples of the same
ferment acting on different substances, we may point to
the fact that some varieties of yeast will act readily on
d-fructose, d-glucose, and d-mannose. They will not act
on d-galactose, however. Furthermore, none of the other
known aldose hexoses and ketose hexoses are acted upon
by yeasts. In the case of yeast, then, where a given
enzyme acts on more than one substance, the molecular
configuration of the respective substances must be closely
similar. This seems to be a general rule. We do not
find the proteolytic enzyme trypsin attacking anything
but proteids, although it operates on different kinds of
proteids. Even oxidizing ferments are not exceptions
in this respect, for certain of them will yield oxidations
in some compounds and not in others that are readily
oxidizable under the influence of a different oxidizing
ferment.
But granted that in living protoplasm ferments play the
important réle of velocity regulators and consequently of
conditioners of both quantitative and qualitative results,
where should we look for them in the germ-cell? It is
now a matter of common knowledge that probably many
ferments are closely associated with nuclear activity and
presumably originate within the nucleus. The present
tendency is to regard the dissolution of the nuclear mem-
brane from time to time as a means of distributing sub-
stances to the cytoplasm. Particularly in the case of the
germinal vesicle of the egg, upon dissolution of the mem-
brane, there is a copious discharge of nuclear material
into the cytoplasm, and one would naturally infer that
this 1S In Some way a preparation for the subsequent rapid
differentiation which will occur.
288 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von XEY
Various observers have pointed out the predominant
part played by the nucleus in intra-cellular oxidations,
operating apparently by means of oxidases. R. S. Lillie
has shown that in the indophenol reaction the colored
oxidation products in such cells as red corpuscles, and
those of liver and kidney, are deposited mainly in and
around the nuclei. He further points out? that certain
ferments exhibit the properties of nucleoproteids and
that they are apparently concerned with later chemical.
changes in the protoplasm chiefly oxidative in nature.
As far back as 1895 Wilson and Mathews? showed that in
the first maturation division of the starfish egg much
chromatin is set free in the cytoplasm. In 1902 Conklin*
called particular attention to the escape of nuclear
material into the cytoplasm upon dissolution of the
nuclear membrane in the egg of Crepidula, remarking
further upon the large proportion of chromatin that
passes into the cytoplasm during every cell cycle, where
seemingly it plays some important part in the subsequent
changes of the latter. Likewise, F. R. Lillie,® in 1906,
pointed: out that an important part in the development
of Chaetopterus is played apparently by the great quan-
tities of a ‘‘residual substance’’ set free from the ger-
minal vesicle. Lyon® in 1904 showed a rhythmic parallel
between nuclear division and the production of carbon
dioxide by the cleaving egg. And Mathews’ in 1907 sug-
gested as probable that the periodic disappearance of
the nuclear membrane during mitosis brought about a
distribution through the cytoplasm of oxidases which had
been synthesized in the nucleus. Wieman in 1910 has
shown the existence of alternate phases of acidity and
basicity in the process of yolk formation in Leptinotarsa,
due to a succession of oxidation processes which occur in
* Jour. Exp. Zool., Vol. V, pp. 379-428, 1908.
* Jour. Morph., Vol. X, pp. 319-342, 1895.
* Jour, Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., Vol. XII, pp. 1-121, 1902.
* Jour. Exp. Zool., Vol. III, pp. 163-268, 1906.
* Am. Jour. Physiol., Vol. XI, pp. 52-58, 1904.
7T Am. Jour. Physiol., Vol. XVIII, pp. 89-111, 1907.
s Jour. Morph., Vol. XXI, pp. 135-216, 1910.
No. 533] NUCLEUS AND CYTOPLASM IN HEREDITY 289
the basic-staining food-stream as the result apparently
of the discharge of oxidase from the nucleus into the
cytoplasm of the egg. Again, it is of great significance
that in the embryos of seeds the time of greatest fer-
mentative activity in starches and other fermentable
bodies coincides with that of maximum size of the nuclei.
Many other significant facts might be adduced, but I wish
merely to show that there is abudant evidence pointing
to the nuclei of cells as sources of enzymes.
The idea that among other things the nucleus is con-
cerned with enzymic activities in the cell, or, indeed, that
the chromosomes themselves are sources of ferments, is
by no means a new one. The last few years has seen a
steadily increasing tendency to regard them as such. The
latest and most outspoken suggestion of this nature, of
which I am aware, is the argument that Montgomery,’
brings forward in a recent paper. He says in part, ‘‘The
relative constancy of chromatin mass in spermatocytes
and spermatids of very different volumes speak strongly
for its enzyme nature.’’ Then after pointing out the rel-
ative constancy in size between the univalent components
of spermatogonia and spermatocytes in Euschistis and
reminding us of the well-known fact that, although the
egg is many times greater than the sperm, the chromo-
somal contribution of each is the same in size and mass,
he goes on to say that, ‘‘An enzyme possesses among
other properties the power of engendering changes in its
medium while still preserving a constant mass.’? And he
continues, ‘‘Of all the larger cellular compounds that we
know, the chromosomes agree most closely with this defi-
nition, and by reason of this constancy of mass alone
might be considered enzyme masses.”’
My present thesis, however, while in harmony with all
this, is yet different. It is rather just the complement of
such a proposition as Montgomery’s for it is an attempt
to show reasons why there must be a nicely adjusted
Series of such substances in the germ-cells as enzymes.
In any epigenetic conception of the germ-cell—and this
* Biol. Bul., Vol. XIX, pp. 1-17, 1910.
290 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Vou. XLV
in greater or less degree seems to be the only plausible
one to-day—we are forced, in explaining morphogenesis
to postulate the existence of some time-, quantity- and
quality-controlling mechanism. The one evident class of
substances in the germ-cells which can fulfil the neces-
sities of the case are the ferments. For since they will
determine the velocities of chemical reactions they must
in consequence control the quantitative relations of the
cell chemistry at any given unit of time. But from the
very fact that where a large number of associated re-
actions are going on simultaneously, these quantitative
relations at given stages of the chemical interchanges
must profoundly influence qualitative results, we can not
but conclude that this initial control of velocities must
condition the qualitative results.
If we regard the chromosomes as centers of such a
series of velocity-controllers, or, in other words, as
sources of various enzymes, we can at once appreciate
the necessity for having them so accurately balanced off
in size and particularly in their quantitative relations
one to another. For since the velocity of the reaction in
a fermentable substance is determined not only by the
presence of the ferment, but also by the amount of it,
the quantitative relations of the ferments to one another
would have to be very accurately maintained.
What appears to be in a way a non-chromosomal
demonstration of this fact is found in connection with
the chloroplasts of plant cells which seem to exercise
their functions at least in part through the agency of
ferments. As is well known, in cell division these bodies
are each carefully divided and handed on to the daughter
cells so that a constancy in number and in general re-
lationships is maintained.
But, it may be objected, what is to be done with those
cases of nuclear division in which the mitotic divisions
of the germ-cells have been preceded by a series of ami-
totic divisions? Wieman?’ has shown that in amitosis the
appearance of the division figures is by no means the
1 Loc. cit.
No. 533] NUCLEUS AND CYTOPLASM IN HEREDITY 291
same in all cases and that where it occurs among germ-
cells the mechanism is more carefully adjusted than
elsewhere. To quote his own words regarding such
divisions in Leptinotarsa, ‘‘Thus in the odgonia and
spermatogonia, division of the nucleus is preceded by a
very exact division of a large chromatin nucleolus, and
as the halves separate surrounded by a clear area, the
appearance reminds one very much of the division of a
chromosome on a spindle.’’ Other investigators of such
amitosis depict in their figures a mechanism which may
have the same significance. From preparations of my
own showing amitosis in the testes of snails and of
Planaria, a similar interpretation could be given.
On this enzyme conception, however, constancy in
number is not the fundamental necessity. The require-
ment is really constancy of equilibrium between chromo-
somal constituents. It matters not whether this is
maintained in sixteen, eight, four or one chromosome,
so long as the balance between the various enzymic foci,
or the capacity for the restoration of such a balance, is
maintained. The ultimate karyokinetic divisions of such
germ-cells as earlier divide amitotically would seem to
be the restitution of such a balance so that the proper
quantitative conditions exist in the finished germ-cell.
Wieman would account for the appearance of amitosis
in early gerf-cells on the ground of a reduced oxygen
Supply in each individual cell, consequent upon a very
rapid increase in cell multiplication. All that is de-
manded in the enzymic conception which I am present-
ing is the preservation in some way of the general ten-
sion of equilibrium so that each enzymic focus can
resume its customary activities when the occasion de-
mands, or, to express it less teleologically, when the oc-
casion permits.
This conception would seem all the more cali; since
we have had to discard the idea of the continuance of
actual chromosomal individuality in favor of that of
their genetic continuity as expressed by Wilson. The
292 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
demonstration by Bonnevie,'! that while the identity of
the old chromosome is lost in the resting nucleus, never-
theless, each new chromosome arises by a kind of endo-
genous formation from within the substance of its im-
mediate predecessor, is a good point in evidence. That
mere number of chromosomes is not of fundamental
importance is evidenced by the considerable number of
known cases in which closely related species may be
characterized by a considerable difference in the number
of chromosomes. In my own researches on man and
certain birds, I have shown that instead of eight, the
expected number of chromosomes in spermatocytes of
the second order, only four (disregarding the accessory
which may be present) appear, but that they are ap-
parently bivalent in nature.
As associated with embryonic development we should
have to suppose that there are considerable numbers of
these initial ferments, which, however, need not all be
present in an active condition. Certain ones required
for the first stages of development might well be sup-
posed in the course of their activities to produce or free
others, or activate them at the proper time to take up
their part in the progressive chemical activities of de-
velopment. It is probable, too, that many of the fer-
ments of the fully developed organism peculiar to the
special tissues have not existed as such in the germ-cell
at all, but have arisen at a later stage in the cells they
occupy as the outcome of the metabolic activities of the
tissue cell itself. It is a current belief, indeed, that each
kind of cell has its own specific ferments whereby it
shapes up from the common food supply submitted to it
in the lymph the substances necessary for its own intra-
molecular assimilation. Many intracellular enzymes
are now known to exist and it is probable that proteo-
lytic enzymes at least are found within the cells of all
living tissues. This is demonstrated by the fact of
autolysis, or the self-digestion of living tissues which
= Arch. Zellforsch., Bd. I, pp. 450-514, 1908.
No. 533] NUCLEUS AND CYTOPLASM IN HEREDITY 293
have been taken from the body under perfectly aseptic
conditions and kept suitably warm and moist.
There is no obstacle in the way of supposing, further-
more, that if we regard ferments as of nuclear origin,
the cytoplasm of a given tissue may not modify the fer-
ment, as it itself takes on the necessary modifications
for its own specific functions. We have good evidence
that the production of ferments can be modified by even
the substratum on which living organisms grow, and
such a relation as this, close as it is, is certainly less inti-
mate than that existing between nucleus and cytoplasm.
For example, molds cultivated upon starch form dia-
stase, but if provided with albumin they will produce in-
stead a proteolytic ferment. Moreover, by gradually
altering their other nutriments, yeasts can be made to
utilize after a time various foreign compounds.
But granted the necessity of some such set of con-
trollers as the enzymes, and locating them in the chromo-
somes of the germ-cells, does this not commit us to a
rigidly chromosomal theory of heredity? By no means.
If, as all evidence indicates, ferments operate as cata-
lyzers, then we must not forget that it is the very gen-
eral belief among chemists that catalytic agents do not
initiate the chemical reactions with which we find them
associated, but that they only tremendously accelerate
such reactions, or in a few known instances retard them.
Since the nature of the building material must determine
fundamentally the nature of the thing built, we must
look outside the enzymes for much that will determine —
the peculiar individual outcome of the developmental
processes. Leaving out of consideration for the present
other functions the chromosomes may subserve, we
might regard them as a sort of gauge for the feeding out
of enzymes at the proper rate to bring about proper
velocity reactions in the other cellular constituents, and
Perhaps regard the whole matter of mitosis and exact-
hess in chromosomal distribution as a mechanism by
which a quantitative metabolic regulation is maintained.
But because chromosomal influences can regulate the
294 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
activity of other cellular constituents, there is no war-
rant for jumping to the conclusion that they are essen-
tially more important than these other constituents. I
may repeat in this connection what I have had occasion
to say by way of reminder in a former paper, ‘‘A germ-
cell in fact should need no special units to generate the
peculiar genre equilibrium or idiosynerasy of protoplasm
which is distinctive of a particular kind of individual,
since such a germ-cell not only is itself already an indi-
vidual, but from the very fact of having had the same
racial history as other individuals of its peculiar kind
(be they germ-cell, embryo or adult) it must likewise as
a whole already possess this distinctive idiosyncrasy.’’
That is, the individual proteids of germ-cells—globulins,
albumins, nucleoproteids and the like—bear from the
very start the stamp of individual peculiarity, wherever
they may reside in the cell. And since they constitute at
least part of the materials which transform and inter-
act and have their actions modified by enzymes, certainly
they as much as the enzymes are responsible for the out-
come. =
Regarding the specificity of corresponding proteins
in relation to the natural kinships of living organisms,
some very interesting facts are brought to light in the
recent voluminous and painstaking researches of
Reichert and Brown.'!2 They show, for instance, that in
hemoglobin, one of the few crystallizable proteins, the
erystals of each species of any genus, while possessing a
constant individuality, all belong to the same crystallo-
graphic system and generally to the same crystallo-
graphic group of the system. These authors further
point out the fact that this isomorphism must signify in
all probability correspondence in the fundamental chem-
ical constitution and molecular configuration of respect-
ive hemoglobins. In case of the individual species the
difference in the characters of the crystals was found to
be as great as with ordinary chemical salts or minerals
that belong to an isomorphous group. One is seemingly
2 Univ. Cincinnati Studies, September—October, pp. 1-19, 1909.
No. 533] NUCLEUS AND CYTOPLASM IN HEREDITY 295
justified, therefore, in inferring from these results that
the differences between corresponding proteins in dif-
ferent species of a genus are rather to be referred to
differences in molecular configuration than in atomic
composition of the molecule.
The case of hemoglobin is only one of several lines of
evidence that might be brought forward as indicating
the specificity of proteins. The serum-albumins which
constitute the very font of the living molecules of higher
animals, differ very decidedly in different species in the
readiness with which they crystallize. Or, a foreign
serum-albumin injected into the veins of an animal of
different species can not take the place of the correspond-
ing albumin of the blood of that species, but acts rather
as a poison and is quickly eliminated by the kidneys.
Lastly, not unduly to multiply examples of protein
specificity, may be cited the precipitins which as you
know may in general be used to show the degree of re-
lationship of allied forms. For instance, when the
blood-serum of one species of animal, let us say man, is
injected at intervals into some other species, e. g., the
rabbit, the serum of the latter acquires the property of
producing a precipitate in the serum of the first species,
man in this case, but not in the serum of other animals
unless they are relatively closely related to the first
species. Thus the serum taken from rabbit’s blood after
a series of treatments with human blood will produce
precipitation in the blood from any human being. It
will produce some, though less, precipitation in the blood
of the anthropoid apes, still less in monkeys, and none at
all in animals distantly related to man. This implies,
manifestly, that the more akin forms are, the more
nearly identical are their proteins. And from the evi-
dence brought forward in connection with the hemo-
globins we have seen that we are perhaps justified in re-
garding the differences between the proteins of closely
allied forms as ones of molecular configuration rather
than of molecular composition or constitution.
The question may arise in some minds as to whether
296 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
there could be sufficient number of configurational dif-
ferences in the corresponding protein molecules of dif-
ferent species to account for the specificity of the respect-
ive proteins. When, however, we consider that to the
serum-albumin molecule alone—and it is by no means
the most complex protein—estimates assign the capabil-
ity of having as many as ten thousand million stereoi-
somers, there would seem to be in this factor of configu-
ration alone ample possibilities for the necessities of
the case.
Because of imperfect methods it has in the past been
well nigh impossible to tell how nearly chemically iden-
tical corresponding proteins of different species are.
Reichert and Brown'* point out that what formerly
passed current as difference in composition may have
been due in reality to contaminations or mixtures. ‘‘ For
instance,’’ they go on to say, ‘‘the fact that the egg-
white of the egg of certain species remains perfectly
clear upon boiling, while that of other species becomes
opaque, might be taken as meaning a difference in chem-
ical composition, but the difference has been shown to
lie in the different amounts of alkali and saline present.’’
Again, ‘‘The centesimal analysis of corresponding al-
bumins and globulins have failed to show any positive
differences. Oppenheimer states, from the results of a
recent study of serum-albumins of man, the horse and
the ox, that serum-albumin is a uniform and specific ©
substance, and that the elementary analyses point to
one serum-albumin.’’ This would leave the matter of
specificity to be explained solely on the basis of molecu-
lar configuration.
This brings up the whole question of protein consti-
tution and configuration. While this is still pretty much
a terra incognita still many interesting facts have come
to light, and all of them point to the conclusion that we
are in no wise compelled to regard the proteins as out-
***The Differentiation and Specificity of Corresponding Proteins and
other Vital Substances in Relation to Biological Classification and Organic
Evolution: The Crystallography of Hemoglobins,’’ Publication No. 116,
_ Carnegie Institution of Washington, pp. 1-338, 100 plates, 1909.
No. 533] NUCLEUS AND CYTOPLASM IN HEREDITY 297
side the pale of the well-known principles of constitution,
polymerization, stereometry and the like which are
known to obtain in simpler organic compounds such as
the ‘‘ring’’ compounds or aromatic series, and the
straight chain or aliphatic series.
It is a familiar fact that the native proteins are read-
ily broken down through hydrolysis into simpler bodies
which still possess protein characteristics. We may in
fact either artificially or in normal digestion get a whole
series of stages ranging from complex native proteins
to simpler and simpler products. The sequence runs
approximately as follows:
Proteins.
—Meta- or infra-proteins.
—Proteoses.
—Peptones.
—~Polypeptids (a relatively small
number of amino-acids
linked together).
—Individual amino-acids.
Three fourths of the albumin molecule, for example,
may be made to yield members of the large group of
amino-acids.
Because of the great abundance of these bodies, and
because of their universal presence as degradation prod-
ucts of proteins, the conclusion was reached that the
protein molecule is essentially built up by a linking to-
gether of amino-acid molecules. This suggested the idea
that by bringing about such linkage it might be possible
to build up molecules of the protein type. To those who
are familiar with the recent developments of physiolog-
ical chemistry, the fact that the first steps toward this
end have already been accomplished is well known.
Some seven or eight of the amino-acids (leucin, tyrosin,
glycocoll, alanin, aspartic acid, phenyl-alanin, and
amido-valerianic acid) had already been produced
synthetically before Emil Fischer began his work.
Fischer and his pupils have synthesized over twenty
new members. But what is still more significant, they
298 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
succeeded in securing linkages of certain ones of these,
thus producing polymeric amino-acid compounds called
by Fischer polypeptids. Bodies of this same type have
been isolated from natural organic substances. These
polypeptids resemble peptones in appearance and,
moreover, they react in the same way peptones do
toward enzymes and various test reagents. One of the
artificially synthesized polypeptids, furthermore, is ap-
parently identical with one of the known polypeptids
found in digestion, and /-leucyl-triglycyl-l-tyrosin, when
prepared artificially, seems to have all the properties of
the albumoses.
The amino-acids possess both acid and basic proper-
ties. It is this amphoteric condition that renders link-
age possible. The individual amino-acids which consti-
tute the units in such polymerizations are frequently
spoken of as ‘‘nuclei.’’ Linkage has been obtained not
only between similar ‘‘nuclei,’’ but also between ‘‘nuclei’’
of different amino-acids.
The results point clearly to the conclusion that the
peptones and higher proteins are huge molecules formed
chiefly of amino-acid molecules linked together by NH
and CO affinities left unsatisfied as a result of processes
comparable to dehydration. Such a protein molecule
may perhaps be represented as a main chain or ring, of
which the respective links are amino-acid ‘‘nuclei.”’
Glycocoll, NH,CH,COOH, for instance, would through
dehydration have for its nucleus in such a chain
—NH.CH,.CO—. Furthermore, since one H of the CH,
of such ‘‘nuclei’’
(e. g., —NH.CH.CO—)
i
can be substituted by various compounds (acetic acid,
buthane, methylparaoxybenzene, ete.) we are led to con-
clude that to each link of the protein chain, a side-chain,
differing in constitution in different cases, is attached
or is attachable by replacement of this hydrogen atom.
The well-known instability of living protein would seem
No. 533] NUCLEUS AND CYTOPLASM IN HEREDITY 299
to be due to the fact that the chemical systems in such a
giant molecule are never fully saturated at any one time,
so that there is continually an adding and detaching and
shifting of side-chains with perhaps at times more funda-
mental shifts or replacements in the amino-acid ‘‘nuclei’”’
themselves. Quantitative and qualitative differences of
proteins would seem to depend fundamentally on the kind
and amount of the constituent amino-acids and second-
arily on the chemical nature of the various side-chains.
Probably the scheme as outlined is much simpler than
the true conditions in the protein molecule, but it will
serve as a sort of diagram of the relations which exist
there. It is probable, too, that the conditions in differ-
ent proteins vary greatly in complexity. The chief point
to be emphasized is the fact that the results of many in-
vestigators bear out this general conception of the pro-
tein molecule.
It would seem then that in the light of our knowledge
of the complex molecular configuration of the proteins,
the substances which appear to be the most intimately
concerned with life phenomena, we have, without resort-
ing to the idea of mysterious separate entities, ample
basis for that peculiar handing on of metabolic energies
already established which we term heredity. The mech-
anism of heredity would seem to be not so much a local
problem of nucleus or cytoplasm as of (1) fundamental
species substances, probably mainly protein in nature,
together with (2) equally specific enzymic substances
which regulate the sequences of the various chemical and
physical processes incident to development. As develop-
ment progresses, more and more kinds of chemical prod-
ucts are released and in consequence an increasing num-
ber of chemical reactions are set going. After the
germ becomes multicellular such new factors must be
reckoned with as the influences, mechanical, chemical, etc.,
of the various parts of the body on one another. An
even with our present meager knowledge of hormones
we can see that this may be no inconsiderable factor in
modifying the developing organs in complex organisms.
300 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
Looked at this way, the physical basis of heredity could
not be. considered a series of equipotent units, but rather
it must be regarded as being composed of systems of
units of different orders of organization and different
degrees of coordination. Alterations in the configura-
tion, constitution or relative positions of the unit con-
stituents which represent the links of the main protein
chain or ring, for instance, would precipitate much
deeper-seated changes than would replacement of side-
chains by those of different type, and such replacements
would, in turn, doubtless appear objectively as differ-
ences of greater degree than those resulting from shifts
in the composition or configuration of the individual
side-chains.
Our whole scheme of natural classification, in fact,
demands just such a physical basis as is depicted for the
structure of the protein molecule. For morphological
characters are not all equivalent. In any large group
certain characters are more conservative than others and
represent more fully the organization, as a whole, while
in successive subsidiary groups the characters grade
down to less and less inclusive ones until the trivial fea-
tures which make up species differences and varietal
traits are reached. However, this parallel between the
make-up of the protein molecule and the natural classifi-
cation of living organisms can be looked on only as a
suggestive illustration because in addition to proteins
other things often enter into the construction of what we
term characters in plants and animals. These characters,
indeed, are frequently blends of the effects of numerous
influences.
But as an example of how changes in different parts
of the protein molecule might work out visibly in the
organism let us see how such alterations actually work
out in simpler and better known compounds. In the
familiar benzene ring compounds, for example, there
exists (1) the main framework or more stable com-
ponent, the so-called ring itself, and (2) innumerable
substitution groups which can be attached to the ‘‘ring”’
No. 533] NUCLEUS AND CYTOPLASM IN HEREDITY 301
at any one of six places. These substitution groups can
be shifted or replaced indefinitely without disrupting the
ring itself. Still different effects are obtainable by the
union of one or more rings (generally still retaining some
of the substitution groups) directly with one another, or
through the intermediacy of a third element or radical.
In the numerous coal-tar colors, the color, which is one
of the most obvious ‘‘characters,’’ does not lie as such
in the benzene ring itself, but is determined by the rad-
icals attached to the ring, and in certain groups perhaps,
in part by the manner in which two or more rings are
united. If, for instance, into a molecule of azobenzene a
radical of the amido-group (NH,) is introduced, a body
is constructed which through salt formation yields a
dye. If instead of the amido-group a hydroxyl group
is introduced, the result is likewise a dye but one of dif-
ferent color. And so a large series of tints may be pro-
duced by varying the substitution groups which replace
H in the principal molecule.
We have constantly increasing evidence, finding re-
cent expression, for instance, in a paper of Morgan,"* of a
fundamental stereometrical condition of the egg-plasm.
And F. R. Lillie has suggested the possibility that a
specific polarity and symmetry are characteristic of the
ground substance common to all cells of the organism.
Stereochemistry is based on the assumption that the
combining forces of an atom act in certain definite direc-
tions in space. This same conception of orientation must
be carried on to the more complex organic units, the
stereometrical relations of which, in turn, are but the
continued expression, under other conditions, of the
original atomic combining forces. And this being true,
it seems reasonable to look upon the whole organism as
but the further expression of such elemental factors.
In view of the facts regarding the closeness of identity
of corresponding proteins of nearly related species, we
must conclude that between two individuals of the same
* Loe. cit. ;
= Jour. Exp. Zool., Vol. IX, pp. 534-655, 1910.
302 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
species, set apart by mere differences of sex and minor
traits, the basal protoplasmic stereometry and the funda-
mental proteid constitution must be in large measure
identical, so that bi-parental inheritance, if extending to
all the details it has been assumed to embrace, would be
largely a matter of duplicating identical protoplasmic
constituents. It is an obvious fact, however, that the
egg contributes vastly more cytoplasm than the sper-
matozoon, and in consequence the developing organism
is more maternal than paternal in origin. I have argued
this point at some length in a former paper,'® where I at-
tempted to show that we are not justified in asserting
that the entire quota of characters which go to make up a
complete living organism are inherited from each parent
equally, but that rather we must restrict our assertion of
equal inheritance to the sexual and specific differences
which top off, as it were, the more fundamental organ-
ismal features. I further pointed out that since the actual
manifest physical things contributed equally by each
parent were the chromosomes, we might legitimately look
to them as the chief source of the factors which determine
individual differences. We know that a single reduced or
haploid set of chromosomes is sufficient for normal de-
velopment, both from the fact of artificial parthenogene-
sis, and the fertilization of non-nucleated egg fragments ;
hence the egg must contain all the possibilities of a new
organism. But the only measurable things contributed
by the sperm-cell are the individual characters of the
male line.
We may infer then that the chromosomes of both male
and female origin work together on or with the other
germinal contents of the fertilized egg, and these are pre-
dominantly of maternal origin. Or to phrase it as I have
in a former paper:'7 ‘‘Nevertheless, we can see how the
veneer of individual traits may be equally of maternal
and paternal origin if, to express it crudely, we look upon
cytoplasm and chromatin, respectively, as responsive
* Science, June 28, 1907, pp. 1006-1010.
* Univ. Cincinnati Studies, September—October, pp. 1-19, 1909.
No. 533] NUCLEUS AND CYTOPLASM IN HEREDITY 303
mechanism and inciting agent, the character of the re-
sponse depending both upon the constitution of the cyto-
plasm and the material (enzymes? nutritive substances?)
emanating from the nucleus.’’
If we consider that the supplying of the proper amounts
and kinds of ferments is one of the important functions
of the chromosomes, then we may suppose that in bi-
parental inheritance each set of chromosomes is opera-
ting, probably catalytically, on a series of fundamental
cell constituents that are largely common to both lines of
ancestry; and that slight constitutional or configura-
tional differences in corresponding enzymes bring about
individual differences such as we recognize in the adult.
We have already seen that different ferments within cer-
tain limits may act on the same substance and yield dif-
ferent results; consequently, in the intrusion into the
egg of slightly altered enzymes in the chromosomes of
the male, we should expect corresponding structural
modifications to result.
It is not the intention to imply, however, that all char-
acter changes must be chromosomal in origin. Any influ-
ence which could effect constitutional or configurational
changes in other essential constituents of the germ-cell
would doubtless produce corresponding alterations in
the adult. It is probable that not only changes of nuclear
origin are reflected on to the eytoplasm, but that, con-
versely, cytoplasmic alterations may affect the nuclear
constituents, for we have already seen how even the sub-
stratum may modify the enzyme factors in entire organ-
isms such as molds and yeasts. Furthermore, there is
no reason apparent why if the differences, no matter how
produced, are modifications in the fundamental consti-
tution or stereometry of the material affected, they should
not persist permanently in the new germ-cells.
It would seem, in fact, that in the permanent effects of
Such reciprocal influences as here depicted for nucleus
and cytoplasm, we might be able to account in large
measure for the accumulations which have step by step
been grafted on to the primitive protoplasm in its epi-
304 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
genesis toward the complex conditions of to-day, or in
other words, in its racial evolution. Moreover, it is con-
ceivable upon this basis how in later stages of phylogeny,
as new chemical configurations or new chemical substances
were developed, some of these could bridge back into
relations with more primitively established substances
and thus bring about ontogenetic short-cuts in develop-
ment, or how, on the other hand, these abridgments -
might result in part from alterations in the more primi-
tive molecular configurations. Racial reversions would
be interpretable, at least in part, on the ground of the
suppression of recently added processes or materials
rather than on the reassertion of independently existing
germs which had become latent.
The question arises, does not the very fact of the exact-
ness with which the chromosomes are divided show that
they are of greater fundamental importance than the
cytoplasmic substances? Such a conclusion does not
necessarily follow. The cytoplasmic substances of con-
cern in development exist in the unfertilized egg appar-
ently largely in a neutral or relatively inactive condition.
The requisites are that these cytoplasmic substances be
of a certain constitution and that there be a certain mini-
mum amount of each. As insuring the presence of this
indispensable minimal quantity there probably exists
more or less of a surplus, but a surplus of this kind
would not necessarily alter the result, as on my suppost-
tion the necessary quantitative conditions which deter-
mine the directing of the chemical reactions in the devel-
opmental processes are not brought about in this initial
resting substance, but in the products of its fermentation,
and the quantity of these at any given unit of time will
depend upon the quantity of the ferment. Thus it is
evident that by having the series of ferments accurately
apportioned as we seemingly do in the chromosome, there
can be an adequate quantitative and therefore qualita-
tive regulation of the chemical processes without the con-
troller being considered of fundamentally shane im-
portance than the substances controlled.
No. 533] NUCLEUS AND CYTOPLASM IN HEREDITY 305
I do not wish to be understood as maintaining that the
nucleus or the chromosomes have no other than enzymic
functions. We know that the nucleus contains highly
complex proteins and it would seem improbable that all
of them are concerned exclusively with matters of fer-
mentation. There is some evidence, however, that the
ferments themselves may be of the nature of nucleo-
proteids. If this is true it is possible that under certain
conditions they operate as ferments and under other con-
ditions as building or other necessary materials. My
chief desire has been, without entering into a discussion
of the manifold functions the nucleus may perform, to
point out one obviously necessary function, the control
of velocities in cell chemistry, that is explicable on the
basis of enzymic activities, and to bring forward reasons
for inferring that these have their sources in the chromo-
somes.
In conclusion, then, recalling the fact of the inconceiv-
able number of stereoisomers that the proteid molecule
may possess, and the fact that to make up protoplasm
diverse proteins, at least, and various enzymes probably
themselves of proteid nature, are required, we would
Seem to possess in the chemistry of relatively known
chemical substances in nucleus and cytoplasm an ade-
quate basis for interpreting the mechanism of heredity
without resorting to other more hypothetical entities.
Before we embrace out of the void such new phantoms
as “‘psychoids’’ or ‘‘entelechies’’ is it not incumbent
upon us to strive still further to expand our knowledge of
protein constitution and configuration? In the mean-
time it would seem best to look upon the organism,
whether germ-cell or adult, as but the expression of an
extended cycle of processes which are due to the intrinsic
Properties of the chemical constituents of protoplasm.
Such an attitude at least has the merit of keeping within
hailing distance of tangible facts and processes.
A COMPARATIVE STUDY OF THE STRUCTURE
OF THE PHOTOGENIC ORGANS OF CERTAIN
AMERICAN LAMPYRIDÆ
F. ALEX. McDERMOTT anv CHAS. G. CRANE
HYGIENIC LABORATORY, U. S. Pusiic HEALTH AND MARINE
HOSPITAL SERVICE, WASHINGTON, D. C.
Or the great amount of work that has been done in the
production of light by living forms, not a little has been
devoted to the structure of the photogenic organs. The
organs whose anatomy and histology have been the sub-
ject of most of the researches have been those of the
Lampyridæ. Although perhaps twenty-five species of
these widely distributed insects occur within the borders
of the United States proper, but little work has been done
on the anatomy and histology of their luminous organs.
The late Dr. Wm. H. Seaman (1) made some observa-
tions on Photinus pyralis, the insect which is so common
in the parks in Washington in the summer, and a near
relative of the pyralis, Photinus marginellus, has been
made the subject of an extensive study by Miss Town-
send, at Cornell (2). Wielowiejski (4) mentions having
studied two American species, but fails to give their
names. With these exceptions, however, the American
Lampyride seem to have been neglected in the matter of
histologic studies of the photogenic organs. Of the for-
eign Lampyride which have been studied, the principal
species are Lampyris noctiluca, Phausis splendidula,
Phosphenus hemipterus and Luciola italica, all Euro-
pean species, and all belonging to different subgroups
from each other and from the American insects. Many
studies have also been made upon the cucuyo, Pyrophorus
noctilucus Linn., the large tropical elaterid firefly.
It has been thought worth while, therefore, to attempt
some further study of the photogenic organs of such
species of Lampyridæ as are accessible here, having 12
view especially the determination of the similarities and
differences between them and between them and other
No. 533] PHOTOGENIC ORGANS OF LAMPYRIDÆ 307
species which had been studied previously. The two
species most common here (Washington, D. C.) are
Photinus pyralis Linn. and Photuris pennsylvanica
Deg., and the majority of our studies have been made on
them. The classification relationships between these in-
sects and the others that have been studied may be seen
from Oliver’s recent catalogue (3). As already stated,
Photinus pyralis had been studied to some extent by
Seaman, and its near relative, P. marginellus, by Towns-
end, but so far as we have been able to find, no studies
have been made on any species of Photuris.!
A large number of slides have been made, containing
transverse, longitudinal and oblique sections of the two
insects above mentioned, and a few transverse sections
of Photinus consanguineus. With these slides compara-
tive studies of the structure of the photogenic organs
have been made. The most essential result of these
studies is that in these three species the structure of the
photogenic organs is practically identical, and very sim-
ilar to that described for some of the other species of
Lampyride which have been examined. Many of the
drawings given by Townsend of the structures in Pho-
tinus marginellus may represent with equal faithfulness
the corresponding structures in Photinus pyralis and
Photuris pennsylvanica; our slides of Photinus consan-
guineus were not entirely satisfactory, but so far as could
be seen, the structures in this insect are identical with
those in its larger congener, pyralis.
In all three insects the luminous organ is divided into
two distinct layers, the inner one being white and opaque,
and serving as a reflector, and the outer being yel-
lowish and translucent, and containing the actual photo-
genic mechanism. The photogenic organs, as brought
out by prior studies, are penetrated from the interior
of the insect outward, by innumerable tracheæ, which
ramify and anastomose within the true photogenic
tissue, and unite within, above the reflecting layer, to
2 Since this was written, it has been noted that Watasé (9) made a few
; Tvations on the structures in Photuris pennsylvanica, but makes only a
brief reference to them.
308 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
1. Cross-sections at about the middle of the fifth REDEFINE —
of keg Photinus ag and (b) Photuris pennsylvanica, I, intestine; L, photo
genic tissue; M, muscle fibers; R, reflecting layer; S, spiral reni T, tr racher
to se iciaaite ie.
form larger trachee; the latter lie nearly flat against the
inside surface of this reflecting layer, and run diag-
onally outward, finally uniting almost at the spiracle
with the breathing tracheæ, with which they are iden-
tical in appearance. The spiracles are on the dorsal
side of the abdomen, one near either edge of each seg-
ment, and are furnished with some valvular arrangement
at their orifice; the details of this structure have not yet
been clearly made out. The arrangement of the smaller
trachee and tracheoles is much the same in all three
species. The tracheæ pass through the reflecting layer
and the photogenic tissue perpendicularly to the surface.
These tracheæ are furnished with chitinous hairs on the
No. 533] PHOTOGENIC ORGANS OF LAMPYRIDZ 309
interior as far as the point where they enter the reflect-
ing layer; the presence of these hairs in trachee beyond
this point and in the fine tracheoles, has not been ob-
served. In their passage through the photogenic tissue,
the trachee are surrounded by the structure referred to
by Miss Townsend as the cylinder, a cylindrical mass of
cells, sharply differentiated from those of the surround-
- 2. Oblique section near edge of Photinus pyralis. L, photogenic tissue ;
R, reflecting layer; T, trachea to photogenic organ; BT, trachea leading to
ther organs. (Both of these figures are intended only as outline drawings, and
no attempt has been made to show all the internal organs, or any great number
of trachee.)
ing tissue, through which the trachea passes almost cen-
trally. Within this cylinder the trachea throws off the
numerous small branches, which at the edge of the cyl-
inder break into the very fine tracheoles which pass into
the photogenic tissue and anastomose between the cells
with tracheoles from adjoining cylinders. The appear-
ance of the large tracheæ above the luminous organ are
Shown in Fig. 2, drawn from an oblique section, the line
of the cut being nearly parallel to the line of the larger
tracheæ near the edge of the abdomen. At the lower end,
Just next to the superficial chitin covering the luminous
segments, the main trachea subdivide into the large num-
er of branches whose tracheoles radiate into the photo-
genic tissue, usually recurving slightly, so as to penetrate
the tissue a short distance from the chitin.
The entire system suggests that the air is drawn in
through the breathing tracheæ, and forced through the
310 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
fine passages in the true photogenic tissue, where the
oxygen of the air is consumed in a biologic oxidation.
In the sections of pyralis there are clearly seen bundles
of muscle fibers on either side of the center line of
the insect, which pass completely through the abdomen,
almost vertically, and are attached to the exterior chitin
at the top and bottom. At about the same ‘point,
other muscle fibers pass inward from the point of maxi-
mum width at each side; these fibers have not been traced
to their full extent, but they appear to pass upward and
toward the center near the dorsal side of the insect.
These fibers are indicated in Fig. 1, a, at M. No similar
muscle fibers have been observed in Photuris, although
short lengths of muscle fiber passing vertically through
the abdominal cavity have occasionally been noted, and
these may be fragments of similar muscles to those in the
Photinini. The corresponding muscles of Photinus
marginellus are clearly shown in Fig. 1 of Miss Towns-
end’s paper. Externally, the lower terminations of these
bundles of muscle fibers appear as non-photogenic spots
on the ventral surface of the luminous segments.
It may be well here to call attention to certain differ-
ences between Photuris and Photinus, as shown by the
cross-sections of the insects. While there is a general
similarity of outline in the cross-sections of the two
species, the section of Photuris is generally a little
flatter, and the ventral curvature of a somewhat larger
mean radius, than in Photinus. Another difference has
been very marked in our sections. While the thickness
of the reflecting layer is about the same in both species,
the laver of true photogenic tissue is much thinner, both
actually and in comparison with the reflecting layer, 1m
Photuris than in Photinus; this difference is clearly seen
by reference to Fig. 1, a and b. This difference may be
somewhat significant when considered in connection with
the slight differences in the quality of the emitted light,
and in the modes of emission of the two species. (See
reference No. 8.) In Photinus there are two peculiar
organs each consisting apparently of a thick-walled,
No. 533] PHOTOGENIC ORGANS OF LAMPYRIDZ 311
chitinous tube, coiled into a nearly cylindrical spiral,
represented in partial section by S, S, in Fig. 1, a; these
two organs appear to be glands which empty into a com-
mon duct which could be followed to the posterior ex-
tremity, and it seems possible that they are a portion of
the male generative system, as they were not found in
the female pyralis, although no spermatozoids were
seen. The direction of rotation of the spiral was the re-
verse on the left side of the insect from that on the right.
These organs were not found in the Photuris, although
globular, glandular structures were found in approxi-
mately the same portion of the latter insect. This struc-
ture is shown in Fig. 2 of Miss Townsend’s paper on
Photinus marginellus, and in Fig. 1 of Seaman’s
(Photinus pyralis) ; the latter erroneously referred to it
as the intestine; in our studies, the intestine of both
Photinus and Photuris was seen as a nearly straight,
thick-walled tube, indicated in section by I in a and b
of Fig. 1.
The above remarks apply to the male insects. The two
sexes in Photuris are almost indistinguishable exter-
nally; all those which we sectioned appeared to be males.
In Photinus pyralis, however, the female differs mark-
edly from the male. The luminous organ in the male
occupies the entire ventral surface of the fifth and sixth
segments of the abdomen, and the posterior portion of
the fourth segment. In the female, the luminous appa-
ratus is visible externally as a small, rectangular yellow
Spot, occupying about one third of the ventral area of
the fifth segment of the abdomen. This organ obtains its
air supply from a large trachea which extends along its
forward edge, and apparently connects with the spiracles
on the dorsal edges of the segment. In its finer struc-
ture, the photogenic organ of the female pyralis appears
to be exactly like that of the male, as is to be expected.
That the photogenic process is an oxidation is scarcely
to be doubted, in view of the work which has been done
already. The work of one of us (McD.) with Professor
312 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
Joseph H. Kastle, of the University of Virginia, is of
especial interest in this connection (6).
Our histologic methods presented no particularly new
features. Most of our specimens were killed in hot 70
per cent. alcohol, stained entire in acid carmine, and
mounted in paraffin. To secure proper penetration of
the stain, it was found necessary to clip off the tip of the
abdomen, or to slit the dorsal chitin. Osmic acid prepa-
rations were used a number of times, and in the sections
of Photinus consanguineus, which were otherwise un-
satisfactory, one per cent. osmic acid gave very good
results for the fine tracheolar structure. For the study
of the tissues under the dissecting microscope a good
treatment was found to be to allow the detached, fresh
luminous segments to soak in a mixture of equal parts of
ten per cent. caustic soda and ten per cent. formaldehyde
solution for three or four hours. This treatment left
the tissues of both the reflecting and the active layers of
the same gross appearance, though without entirely de-
stroying the cellular structure; after being treated thus,
the trachee and tracheoles can be seen as silvery white
tubes and threads, on a background of dull, pale yellow,
and may be followed down to the point of anastomosis.
It seems possible that the reflecting layer fulfils a two-
fold purpose—that of reflecting the light outward, and
thus increasing its intensity in the desired direction, and
of protecting the insect itself from its own radiations.
It has recently been shown by Coblentz (7) that the
pyralis and other Lampyride contain a fluorescent ma-
terial, and a number of observers have shown that
fluorescent materials injected into a living animal show
a higher degree of toxicity when the animal subsequently
is exposed to light than if it be left in the dark.
To conclude: We have found that (a) the structure of
the photogenic organs in Photinus pyralis, Photinus
consanguineus and Photuris pennsylvanica is practi-
cally the same, and very similar to the structures of the
corresponding organs in some of the other species of
Lampyridx that have been studied; (b) the trachee from
No. 533] PHOTOGENIC ORGANS OF LAMPYRIDZ 313
the photogenic organs connect near the breathing spiracle
with the tracheæ which supply the other organs, and that
they closely resemble the latter trachee in structure;
c) the view that the photogenic process is an oxidation
is borne out by the structure of the photogenic organs.
We wish to express our appreciation of the assistance
of Director John F. Anderson, of the hygienic labora-
tory, and Dr. Norman Roberts and Mr. Geo. F. Leonard,
of that laboratory, and we are indebted to Dr. E. A.
Schwarz and Mr. H. S. Barber, of the U. S. National
Museum, for their kindness in supplying entomologic
information, and to Professor W. A. Kepner, of the Uni-
versity of Virginia, for criticism and advice.
No attempt will be made here to give a complete list
of the references to the literature of even the histology
of the luminous tissues; so far as the latter branch of
the subject is concerned, it is pretty thoroughly covered
by the bibliography given by Miss Townsend, and the
most complete bibliography yet published of the whole
subject of physiologic light is contained in Mangold’s
extensive and interesting review cited as reference No.
5, below.
1. Seaman, The Luminous a of Insects. Proc. Amer. Soc. Micro-
scopists, 1891, Vol. 13, pp.
. perre The Histology of ii Light Organs of Photinus marginellus.
ER. NAT., 1904, Vol. >? aag 127-151.
bo
w
e
a:
D
5
Fe
ae
=F
P>
an’s Genera Insectorum, apaes
A
- Wielowiejski. E zur ah der Leuchtorgane der Insekten.
ool. Anz., 1889, Vol. 12, pp. 00.
- Mangold. Die e von fjal. Winterstein’s Handbuch der ver-
gleichende Sean Vol. III, 24 Half, pp. 225-392, Jena, 1910.
- Kastle and MeDer Some Observations on the Production of Light
by the Firefly. pel our of Physiol., 1910, Vol. 27, pp. 122-151.
über ei n der Feuerfliege herriihrende fluoreszier-
ende Substanz. Physikal. Enue, 1909, Vol. 10, pp. -956.
8. McDermott, A Note on the Light-emission of some American Lampyride.
Canad, Entomol., 1910, Vol. 42 2, pp. 357-363.
9. Watasé. On the Physical Basis of Animal an hese Biological
Lectures delivered at Wood’s Holl, 1895, pp. 101-118.
a or
~q
c
©
EA
®
=
=
z
©
ct
Hi
i2
B
©
SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION
A NEGLECTED PAPER ON NATURAL SELECTION IN
THE ENGLISH SPARROW
In referring to Professor Bumpus’s paper, ‘‘The Elimination
of the Unfit as Illustrated by the Introduced Sparrow, Passer
domesticus,’’! as neglected, I do not intend to imply that it is
unique in this respect. Several other important quantitative
studies of natural selection, for instance papers by Weldon, Di
Cesnola and Pearson, are in the same class. Indeed, the im-
pression gained by reading papers commemorating the birth of
Darwin and the publication of the ‘‘Origin of Species by Means
of Natural Selection”? is that the majority of biologists have
little interest in natural selection as a scientific problem. The
chief reason for this is probably the great development of exper-
imental breeding during the last decade—a development which
is a great source of satisfaction to biologists, but which has tem-
porarily brought the study of evolution to a very one-sided
stage of development.
At the time this lecture was published the statistical methods
which are now considered the most suitable for dealing with
such problems were not in the hands of many biologists. Re-
cently in connection with some other work I had oceasion to
throw Dr. Bumpus’s data? into statistical constants. These are
published in the hope that they may suggest to some unoceupied
biologist the collection of further quantitative data on the sev-
eral problems presented by the introduced sparrow.
The characters dealt with are the following: (1) Total length
in millimeters from tip of beak to tip of tail; (2) alar extent, the
distance in millimeters from tip to tip of extended wings; (3)
weight in grams; (4) length of head in millimeters from tip of
beak to the occiput; (5) length of humerus in fractions of an
inch; (6) length of femur in fractions of an inch; (7) length of
tibio-tarsus in fractions of an inch; (8) width of skull in frac-
tions of an inch; (9) length of sternum in fractions of an inch.
1 Eleventh lecture before the Marine Biological Laboratory, Woods Hole,
1898; published in Biological Lectures from the Marine Biological Labora-
tory, 1898. Boston, Ginn and Co., 1899.
2 Fortunately all the measurements were published.
314
No. 533] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 315
Three classes of birds were distinguished—adult males, young
males, and young and adult females.
We draw the following conclusions from the comparison of the
means in Tables I-III with their probable errors.*
TABLE I
AVERAGES FOR ADULT MALES
Character Survived Porisbod Difference
Total length........... 159.0571+.3154 162.0000 +.3253 —2,9499+ 4531
Alar extent 247.6857 +-.4333 247.3750+.4716 + .3107+.6404
Weight (in grams) 25.4685--.1420 26.2708+-.1966 — .80238+.2424
Beak and head....... 31.6143+.0709 31.6708+.0824 — .0565+.1095
ngth, humerus +.00 .7279 2 | + .0101+.0038
Length of femur. 8-+.00 .7061+.0027 | + .0107+.0037
bio-tarsus. ......... 1.1353--.0041 1.1202+-.0051 +. .0151+.0065
Width of skull....... 6025.0016 .6033+.0017 Í +.
Keel of sternum..... .8576+.0042 .8458+.0045 + .0118+.0062
TABLE II
AVERAGES FOR YOUNG MALES
Character Survived Perished Difference
Total length........... 159.6875 +.4978 162.2499+ .7291 | —2.5621+ .8828
lar extent 246.8125+-.7936 247.9167+1.2976 | —1.1042+1.5213
Weight (in grams ).| 25.4938-+.2040 26.2667+ .38208 | — .7729+ .3801
and head........|. 31.8688-+.1190 31.3249+ .1138 4 5439+ .1646
Length, humerus. 7416+-.0039 .7347+ .0055 | + .0069+ .0067
Length of femur..... .7162+.0046 7153+ .0050 | + .0009+ .0068
Tibio-tarsus........... 1.1367 +.0091 1.1398 .0071 | — .0026+ .0115
Width of skull....... .6078+.0024 5993+ .0035 | + .0085+ .0042
Keel of sternum ..... .8514+-.0060 8427+ .0064 | + .0087+ .0088
TABLE III
AVERAGES FOR ALL FEMALES
Character o Perished Difference
Total length........... 157. 3810.4774 | 158.4286+.4859 | —1.0476+.6811
Alar extent............ 1.0000 +.6009 | 241.5714+.7142 | — .5714+.9333
Weight (in grams).. pr 6190.1531 25.3357 +.2054 | — .7167+.2561
Beak and head... 31.4333--.1047 31.4786-+.1068 | — .0453-+.1495
ngth, humerus .7283+-.0024 260-+.0082 0023+.
Length of femur..... .7148+.0029 7098+.0036
bio-tarsus........... 1.1436-£.0042 1.1310+.0043 | + .0126+.0060
Width of skull .6001=.0019 '6016--.0031 | — .0015+.0036
Seel of sternum..... 8193.0043 82074.0037 | — .0014+.0057
* For the individual comparisons those differences less than the prob-
1e error will be considered of no significance, those between one and two
times their probable errors as possibly significant, and those over thrice
their probable errors as probably significant.
316
STANDARD DEVIATIONS FOR ADULT MALES
a
Character
THE AMERICAN NATURALIST
TABLE IV
Survived
Perished
[VoL. XLV
Difference
Tot:.1 Seii ENN |
2.7666+.2230
2.3629 4-.2300
+4037 -+.3208
LINE GRECO. eeii | 3.8005+.3064 3.4255+.3335 +. nee 4529
Weight (in grams)... 1,2451+.1004 1.4276+.139 1715
Beak and head....... | .6220+.0501 5982.0582 4- “0238, 0768
ngth, leup 0196+.001 .0230+.0022 .0034-+-.0027
Length of femur.. 0222+.0018 9+.0019 +.00. 3.0026
i0-tarsus........... Bs 55.0029 0370.0036 —.0015+.0046
Width of skull ...... | 0317.0011 .0123+-.0012 -+.0194+.0016
eel of sternum | 0366.0030 .0325-+- .0082 +.0041+.0044
TABLE V
STANDARD DEVIATIONS FOR YOUNG MALES
Character
Perished
Survived © Difference
Aa Tength iei- | 2.9521+.3520 3.7444+.5155 — .7923+ .6242
Alar extent 4.7066+.5612 6.6641+.9175 —1.9575+1. 0753
abep (i r wea 1,210] +.1448 1.6474+.2268 — 4373+ .
pose ead., 7060.0842 .5847 +.0805 + 1213+ T
Length, erus.. 0234+-.0028 0282+-.0039 — .0048+ .0048
Length of yrende E 0272+-.0032 8+.0 + .0014+ .0047
Tibio-tarsus........... 0537+ .0064 0365+. 0050 + .0172+ .0081
Width of skull ...... .0141+.0017 .0180+.0025 — .0039+ .0030
Keel of sternum..... .0356+.0042 .0331 +.0046 + .0^254 .0062
TABLE VI
STANDARD DEVIATIONS FOR ALL FEMALES
Character Survived Perished Difference
Tota a a ee 37+. 3.8119-+.3436 | — .5682+.4817
Alar extent............ 4.0825+-.4249 5.5 —1. +.6600
Weight ‘Gn grams) 00+.1082 1.6112+.1452 — 5712+. Hee
nd head.. ..... 7114+.0740 8381+.0755 — 1267+
Length, humerus. 0160.0017 + — pri
Length of femur 0197+.0021 .0279+.0025 — .0082+.0033
ibio- tarsus... .0287 +. 36+.0030 — ,0049+.0042
Width of skull....... .0128+.0013 .0245+.0022 — 0117+.0026
l of sternum...... .0292+-.0030 .0286 +.0026 + .0006+.0040
In all three series the individuals which survive are shorter
than those which perish. The probable errors support in a very
satisfactory manner the conclusion, ‘‘ that when nature selects,
through the agency of winter storms of this particular kind of
severity, those sparrows which are short stand a better chance of
surviving.’’ For weight the results for the three series are also
consistent in sign, and even when taken individually indicate
No. 533] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 317
with a considerable degree of probability that the heavier birds
are the least able to withstand the vicissitudes of the February
sleet and snow. In all three series the length of the humerus is
longer in the birds which survive, and in the group of adult
males the difference is perhaps statistically significant. The
same is true for the length of the femur, but the results are
again insignificant except in the adult males where they are per-
haps statistically trustworthy. In the adult males and in the
adult and young females the length of the tibio-tarsus seems to
be longer in the survivors, but the result is insignificant for the
young males.
If selective elimination be a reality in nature one would not
expect all of the characters of a series of individuals which per-
ished when exposed to a given set of unfavorable conditions to
differ from the same characters in the individuals which survive,
and this for the simple reason that variations in many characters
may not be of vital importance to the individual—in short, not
of selective value.
he constants seem to me to justify no conclusion concerning
the length of the sternum. For alar extent all three differences
individually considered are insignificant; taken comparatively
two are negative and one positive in sign. Apparently varia-
tions in the spread of wing have under the particular conditions*
no significance in determining the chances of survival. The
young males which survived have longer skulls (tip of beak to
the occiput) than those which perished, and the difference seems
to be significant in comparison with its probable error, but in the
other two classes of birds the differences are not merely statisti-
cally insignificant but negative in sign.
Tables IV-VI show the standard deviations and their probable
error, These are essential in calculating the probable errors of
the means and in testing the hypothesis of a reduction in varia-
bility by selective elimination. Bumpus has discussed this ques-
tion in detail in his lecture, but to me it seems that the standard
deviations as given here do not justify any final conclusions con-
cerning the relation of selection to variability : the probiem is too
complicated and the data are too few. As in other evolutionary
problems we need more measurements. When these are available
“Were the eliminative agent, for example, a severe northerly wind of
protracted duration, the alar extent might then enter in as a factor of
considerable selective value. ”?
318 ; THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von. XLV
not only type and variability but correlation® will be open for
investigation.
Looking at the tables of constants, the cautious biometrician
will hesitate to say that Professor Bumpus has proved his point.
The data available are too scanty to justify dogmatic assertions.
But the work is so suggestive and the results so convineing that it
is difficult to understand why zoologists have not followed it up
by other studies of a comparable nature. To be sure, opportun-
ities of this particular kind do not occur every winter, but there
are other sources of elimination active in nature, and one of the
most important tasks before those interested in the problems
which Darwin pointed out to biologists, is to determine whether
the individuals which survive are able to do so because of certain
structural peculiarities, while those which perish are eliminated
because they are in the degree of development or in the correla-
tion of their parts structurally unfit.
J. ARTHUR HARRIS.
5 Compare — Bumpus’s suggestion on this point, the arguments of
Brooks in his ‘‘ Foundations of Zoology,’’ Lectures VI-VIII, and the
hypothesis of ale in Journ. Exp. Zool., 2: 425-430, 1905.
NOTES AND LITERATURE
BIOMETRICS
AN INTRODUCTION TO STATISTICAL METHODS
IN spite of the great development of biometrie work, and of
the application of statistical conceptions and methods in a num-
ber of fields of science other than biological, during the last
decade there has been produced up to the present time no fully
satisfactory introduction to the elementary principles of modern
statistical methods. The books which have appeared in this field
have been, broadly speaking, either (a) too technical and ad-
vanced in their treatment, or (b) compilations of formule
with so little in the way of guiding principles as actually to
lead any but the already expert into many difficulties, or (c)
incomplete, incorrect and superficial at vital points, or finally,
(d) have appealed to a very limited class of readers by develop-
ing the subject in direct relation to a narrow field of science only.
This need for a comprehensive, elementary and sound introduc-
tion to statistical methods is admirably met in a recently pub-
lished book by Yule.
The subject is treated under three main heads as follows:
(I) The Theory of Attributes, (II) The Theory of Variables,
(III) The Theory of Sampling. In the first part the author
deals with the logical basis of statistical theory, a field which is
essential to a proper understanding of the subject, and in which
he is, by the extent and character of his original investigations,
qualified to speak with unique authority. Successive chapters
in this portion of the work deal with Notation and Terminology,
Consistence, Association, Partial Association, Manifold Classi-
fication.
The second part of the book takes up the discussion of fre-
quency distributions and their physical constants, and the ele-
mentary theory of correlation and its applications, ending with
an account of multiple and partial correlation. Here we are
dealing with matters of immediate practical importance in the
application of statistical methods to all kinds of scientific prob-
ms. It would be difficult to say too much in commendation
of the author’s method of treating these subjects. No knowledge
* Yule, G. Udny, ‘‘An Introduction to the Theory of Statistics,’’ Lon-
don (Chas. Griffin & Co.), 1911, pp. xiii + 376.
319
320 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
of mathematics beyond algebra up to the binomial theorem is
presumed, yet the subject is developed in such a simple, lucid
and at the same time thorough way as to give the reader a real
and adequate grasp not only of the technique of the methods, but
also of their origin and significance. Numerical examples drawn
from a wide range of materials are given at every stage and
worked out in detail. Particular attention is paid to guiding
the unwary beginner around the numerous pitfalls which beset
the statistical pathway. Chapters are devoted to the methods
of arranging data in the form of frequency distributions, deter-
mining centering constants (arithmetic, geometric and harmonic
means, mode, median, ete.), variation or ‘‘dispersion’’ measuring
constants, and coefficients of correlation. The treatment of cor-
relation is particularly comprehensive and practical.
The last section of the book deals with the general subject of
‘‘probable errors.’’ The theory of fluctuations in statistical
measures due to random sampling is developed first in relation
to the theory of attributes and then in relation to the more com-
plex theory of variables. The discussion of the simple sampling
of attributes leads up in a straightforward way through the
point binomial to the normal curve of errors, and the normal
correlation surface.
Each chapter throughout the book is followed by a short list
of selected titles of original papers, and a series of practical
problems to be worked out by the student. Appendices give
short bibliographies of calculating tables, tables of functions, ete.,
and general works on the mathematical theory of statistics and
the theory of probability. A list of answers and hints in regard
to the problems and a full index complete the volume.
Altogether the book is a notable one. Those who are familiar
with Yule’s paper ‘‘On the Theory of Correlation’’ (published
in the Journal of the Royal Statistical Society in 1897 ) which
has become one of the classics of biometrie literature will be
prepared to welcome the present work. It is marked throughout
by the same clearness, directness and appreciation of the diffi-
culties of the beginner which distinguished that memoir. For
the non-mathematical student desirous of obtaining a sound
working knowledge of the elements of modern statistical theory
this book will be of the greatest value. In the field which it
covers it is without a peer.
i RAYMOND PEARL.
SECOND EDITION, NOVEMBER, 1910
AMERICAN MEN OF SCIENCE
A BIOGRAPHICAL DIRECTORY
EDITED BY J. McKEEN CATTELL
A Biographical directory requires revision if it is cng bac Nearly a third of the names in the
oe en fe che whch appeared in te ie feo ion ve in nearly every case been revised. The
amount of work required to pr the revision as great as that given to the first edition. There has been no
Sister pd ce general plan of work. Greater strictness has observed 7
in
par k as and as possible. There are of course
even to ri requests for the information needed. The
Da rate hai aare ws po stars have been added tothe
tained places on the list. editor’ s object in 3
the conditions on whi pan object
This directory should be in the hands of all those who are directly ond interested in wink
(1) Men of Science will find it indispensable. m indram borky hares ome ite
tnd the like of their fellow worker, but also an invaluable summary of the research work of the country,
ek (2) Those interested in n science, even though they may not be professionally engaged in research work, _ ee
TaN eh oi Tare and vaian Wem ne bak SE iad Ue aa ere
$: mene of l > d th ; “0 4 £ r ( me g ga Fe cs 2. 1e i, rill ; as
veal), Päikese? Newspapers and periodicals will find it to be
frequently.
{) Libraries will fi
a Sind the book to be a necessary addition 1 to their 1
iia wail inte oma fate Although the
increased in size ira paper and bound it is sold at the Same prioe aa tho tein.
Price: Five Dollars, net,
THE SCIENCE PRESS
ei Meie i
The > American Naturalist
established in 1867, Devoted to the Advancement of the ae Sciences
AON adr Reto Ge Pe
of =a Evolution and H
CONTENTS OF THE NOVEMBER NUMBER
seat’ of Skin leh gmane in Man. meena C.
AVENPORT and C LES B. DAVENPO
The aie Sense = the he Honey Bee—Can Bees PERE
Colors? Jom
Shorter Articles Ser tame : The Arithmetic of the
Product Moment Method of pene amg pane Coeffi-
cient of Correlation: Dr. J. ARTHUR EERE a
Notes and Literature: Schlosser on Fayûm Mammal
ATTHEW. The Ophidian aan Grayia:
Professor T. D, A, COCKERELL,
CONTENTS OF THE DECEMBER NUMBER
— of Skin Pigmentation in Man. GERTRUDE C.
DAVENPORT and CHARLES B. DAVENPORT.
Spawn and Larva of a e EREE TR ts Pro-
fessor W. H. PIERSO
The Inheritance of Sizes a Shapesin Plants. Professor
E. A. EMERSON.
Shorter Articles and Discussion: The Modification of
Mendelian Inheritance p- ne rnal Conditions,
Professor T. D. A. COCKER
Notes and Literature: Heredity, he W. J. SPILLMAN,
Index to Volume XLIV.
CONTENTS OF THE JANUARY NUMBER
Somatic Alteration: Its Origination and Inheritance.
Dr. D. T. MacDoveaL.
The Nature of Graft- hybrids. Professor DOUGLAS
HOUGHTON CAMPBELL.
A Double Hen’s Egg. Dr. J. THOMAS PATTERSON,
Notes and Literature: Heredity, Dr. W. J. SPILLMAN.
CONTENTS OF THE FEBRUARY NUMBER
The —— of the sgn — of Pure Lines to Sex
mited 2 heritance Sexual Dimorphism,
Profeess T. H. Mor RGAN
Pure Linesin afte Study eo Genetics in Lower Organisms.
Professor H. 8. JENN.
Some Effects of ee upon Growing Mice, and
= r e of Such age neces onan a Subsequent Gen-
The Mendelian 1 San Dai. ane agar ER SHINE-
"iay on geez aktiva weg reae te ~ ess of Barred and Self-
colored Fowls, Dr. RAYMOND PEARL.
— Considerations eraen the Ph nic Funt-
tion in Marine Organisms. F. ALEX. MCDERMOTT,
ape — and Discussion : Com rei Correla-
n Cases where Symmetrical — are con”
et Professor H. S. JENNIN
CONTENTS OF THE MARCH NUMBER
The Genotype ——— of Heredity. Professor
W. JOHANNSEN.
The Gen H and Hybridi
e it enu y zation. Pro-
Notes on Gundlachia and Ancylus. Dr. WILLIAM
HEALEY DALL.
Notes and Literature: Mimicry, Dr, Franx E. Lurz.
CONTENTS OF THE APRIL NUMBER
Genetical Studies on Oenothera. II. Dr. BRADLEY
MOORE DavVIs.
The a hag of Maize. Dr, GEORGE HARRISON
SHUL
Notes ad Literature: Is the Female Frog Heterozy
n regard to Sex Determination ? Professor
gou
H. cra The Mutation Theory. Dr. R. R
GATES.
————— aa
Single N Number 35 Cents
NATURALIST
will he s
Yearly leae $4.00
THE SCIENCE PRESS
Garrison, N. Y. Sub-Station 84: NEW YORK Lancaster, Pa. |
Pa.
VOL. XLV, NO. 534 ~~ JUNE, 1911
THE
AMERICAN
NATURALIST
A MONTHLY JOURNAL
Devoted to the Advancement of the Biological Sciences with
Special Reference to the Factors of Evolution
CONTENTS
Page
Inheritance of Fecundity in the Domestic Fowl. - DR. RAYMOND PEARL. 321
The Biometric Proof of the Pure Line Theory. -
The Influence of Changed External Conditions on the Development of Two
r THOMAS H. MONTGOMERY 364
AUSTIN HOBART
Dr. J. ARTHUR HARRIS. 346
Si of Moths.
Shorter Articles and Disoun The he Ontogeny of aye a Genus.
ea
V. Notes and Literature: Recent Contributions to a PEE of the Extinct
Amphibia, Dr, Roy L. MOODIE 37
I - ee ae
- 372
THE SCIENCE PRESS
LANCASTER, PA. GARRISON, N. ¥.
NEW YORK: SUB-STATION 84
The American
Naturalist
intended for publication and books, etc., intended for review should be
MSS.
sent to the Editor of THE AMER
oe research work bearing on the pro
| be given preference in publica
Arti
tion are especialy w elcome, and wil
ICAN NATURALIST r Garrison- -on-Hucson, New York.
blems " beisen evolu-
ndrea reprints of a are supplied to een tre of charge.
e hu
Further repent will be supplie
The
ents and
THE SCIENCE PRESS
Lancaster, Pa.
NEW YORK:
Garrison, N. Y.
Sub=-Station 84
Entered as second-class matter, m 2, 1908, at the Post Office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act of
ngress of March 3, 1879.
THE BULLETIN—Por bargains in Ethnolograph-
ical and Pre-historic Specimens. Books on Natural
History, Science, Travel, Voyages, etc. See THE
BULLETIN post free for 3 cent stamp.
4 Duke St., Adelphi—London—England
TENTH EDITION.
THE MI ciara ime
COMSTOCK PUBLISHING CO., Ithaca, N. Y.
e GN Ante Sa EE
BIRDS’ EGGS
W. F. H. ROSENBERG,
57 Haverstock Hill, London, N. W.,
England
begs to announce the publication of a new
Price List (No. 15) of Birds’ Eggs, con-
taining over 900 species from all parts of
the world. This Catalogue is systematic-
ally arranged, with authors’ names, indica-
tions of localities, and an index to families.
It will be sent post free on application, as
will the following lists:
No. 11, Birds’ Skins, (5,000 species) ;
ee 12, Lepidiiphers: (5,000 species) ; No.
3, Coleoptera ; No. 14, Mammals.
In course of ESS : New Price
List of Reptiles, Amphibians and Fishes.
Largest Stock in the world of specimens
in all branches of Zoology.
Marine Biological Laboratory
WOODS HOLE, MASS.
oology:
INVESTIGATION Facilities for research fi Coin
an
ate labore
JUNE 1 TO OCTOBER 1 to ries šio in Posh paye
es are available oe beginnen
ms got a
h areetan g DT aberi
the go . The fee for such & table
is $50.00.
iv
ction
INSTRUCTION Courses of laboraecred in inver-
JUNE 28 TO AUGUST
&, 1911
tute eones Oi Siea a0
s 0
Te is also o fered.
one d Material
SUPPLY OZY- animals for ciast
DEPARTMENT
OPEN THE ENTIRE
rts and Mosses.
and all information ad
. M. GRAY, Curator, Woods Hole, ng
The annual announcement will be sen ication
sent on app!
Hole,
the Di Director, Marine Biological Laboratory, Woods He
THE
AMERICAN NATURALIST
VoL. XLV June, 1911 No. 534
INHERITANCE OF FECUNDITY IN THE
DOMESTIC FOWL!
DR. RAYMOND PEARL
MAINE AGRICULTURAL EXPERIMENT STATION
THERE are under discussion at the present time two
general views regarding certain fundamental points in
heredity. Each of these points of view has its zealous
adherents. On the one hand, is what may be designated
the ‘statistical’? concept of inheritance, and on the
other hand, the concept of genotypes. By the ‘‘statis-
tical’’ concept of inheritance is meant that point of view
which assumes, either by direct assertion or by implica-
tion, that all variations are of equal hereditary signifi-
cance and consequently may be treated statistically as
a homogeneous mass, provided only that they conform
to purely statistical canons of homogeneity. This as-
sumption of equal hereditary significance for all varia-
tions is tacitly made in deducing the law of ancestral
inheritance, when individuals are lumped together in a
gross correlation table.? The genotype concept, on the
other hand, takes as a fundamental postulate, firmly
grounded on the basis of breeding experience, that two
! Papers from the Biological Laboratory of the Maine Experiment Sta-
tion, No. 25. This paper was read p the meeting of the American Society
of “orga at Ithaca, December, 1910.
*For a more detailed discussion of this point see a paper by the present
Koad cities “*Biometrie Ideas and Methods in E. their Signifi-
ce and Limitations,’’ in the Revista di Scienza (in pres
321
322 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
sorts of variations can be distinguished, namely those
(a) that are represented in the germinal material and
are inherited without substantial modification, as in
‘‘pure lines,’’ and those (b) that are somatic and are
not inherited. By anything short of the actual breeding
test it is quite impossible to tell whether a particular
variation observed in the soma belongs to the one cate-
gory or to the other. As I have tried to emphasize in
other places, it is both to be expected on this view of in-
heritance, and is also the case in actual fact, that the
somatic manifestation or condition of any character is a
most uncertain and unreliable criterion of the behavior
of that character in breeding. Finally under the geno-
type concept, of course, the whole array of facts brought
out by Mendelian experiments find their place.
Now while certain adumbrations of the genotype con-
cept have long been current in biological speculations in
regard to heredity, this general view-point owes its
grounding in solid facts primarily to Johannsen’s work
with beans and with barley. It is to be noted that in
these cases, as well as in most of the investigations of
the pure line theory which have followed Johannsen’s
work, the organisms used have been such as reproduced
either by self-fertilization, or by fission, or by some veg-
etative process. This brings us to the consideration of a
question of great importance, both theoretical and prac-
tical. In cases of diccious organisms, where a “pure”
pedigree line in the sense that such lines are found in
beans or in Paramecium by definition can not exist, has
the genotype concept any bearing or significance? Ina
general way it obviously has. Probably no one (except
possibly some of the ultra-statistical school) could be
found who would deny that in general a distinction is to
be made between variations having a gametic and those
having merely a somatic basis. But specifically how far
has the genotype concept any application in case of
‘‘non-selfed’’? organisms? Johannsen in his ‘‘Ele-
mente’’ has thoroughly analyzed Galton’s material and
No. 534] FECUNDITY IN THE DOMESTIC FOWL 323
shown that it is capable of a satisfactory and reasonable
interpretation on the genotype hypothesis, and East and
Shull have gone far in the analysis of genotypes in
maize. This, however, is only a beginning. There is the
greatest need for careful, thorough investigations of the
inheritance of characters showing marked fluctuating
variation in organisms having the sexes separate. Here
lies one of the crucial fields in the study of inheritance
to-day. Through the brilliant results in Mendelian di-
rections and from the study of really ‘‘pure’’ lines we
are getting clear-cut ideas as to the inheritance of quali-
tatively differentiated characters, such as color, pattern
and the like, on the one hand, and in regard to the in-
heritance of quantitative variation in self-fertilized or
non-sexually reproducing organisms, on the other hand.
But beyond all these lie the difficult cases where in diœ-
cious forms quantitative variations must be dealt with.
If these can be cleared up and brought harmoniously
into a general scheme or view-point regarding inherit-
ance, we shall have gone a long way in the solution of
this world-old biological problem.
For some four years past the writer has been engaged
in a study of the inheritance of fecundity in the domestic
fowl. The problem presented here is an important one
from the practical as well as the theoretical standpoint.
If definite and sure methods of improving the average
gg production of poultry by breeding can be discovered
it will mean much to the farmers of the nation. At the
Same time egg production is a character in some ways
well adapted to furnish definite and crucial data regard-
Ing inheritance. Variations in egg production are read-
ily measured, and can be directly expressed in figures.
The general results of this study of the inheritance of
fecundity may be said, in a word, to be, so far as they go,
in entire accord with the genotype concept, and not to
agree at all with the ‘‘statistico-ancestral’’ theory of in-
heritance. Indeed, so ill is the accord here that the chief
exponent of the latter doctrine has recently attempted to
324 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
throw the whole case out of court? by asserting that
fecundity is not inherited in fowls, and that the present
writer’s investigations show essentially nothing more
than that. It will be the purpose of this paper to pre-
sent some figures sufficient to indicate with some degree
of probability, I think, first that egg production in fowls
. is inherited, and second that it is probably inherited in
accord with the genotype concept, in spite of the fact
that we do not and can not here have ‘‘pure lines’’ in the
strict sense of Johannsen’s definition. In the present
paper, owing to limitations of space, the whole of the
data in hand obviously can not be presented. Only a
few illustrative cases can be given here.
Before entering upon the discussion of the evidence
it is necessary to call attention to two points. The first
is in regard to the unit of measuring egg production
used in the work. For reasons which have been dis-
cussed in detail elsewhere‘ the unit of study has been
taken as the egg production of the bird before March 1
of her pullet year. This ‘‘winter production”? is a better
unit for the study of the inheritance of fecundity than
any other which can be used practically. All records of
production given in this paper are then to be understood
as ‘‘winter’’ records, comprising all eggs laid up to
March 1 of the first year of a bird’s life. It may be said
that the ‘‘normal’’? mean winter production of Barred
Plymouth Rocks (the breed used in this work) is fairly
indicated by the 8-year average of the Maine Station
flock. This average November 1 to March 1 production
is 36.12 eggs. This figure is based on eight years con-
tinuous trap-nesting of the flock with which the present
* Pearson, K., ‘‘Darwinism, Biometry and some Recent Biology, ,”
Biometrika, Vol. 7, pp. 368-385, 1910.
* Bull. Me. Agr. Exp. Sta., No. 165. U. S. Dept. Agr. Bur. Anim. Ind.,
Bul. 110, Part II.
* It should be said that up to and including the winter of 1907 only the
November 1 to March 1 records are available as a ‘‘winter’’ record. Since
that time the small number of eggs laid before November 1 (on the average
two or three per bird) are included in the ‘‘winter’’ totals. These, then,
give, as stated, the total production up to March 1.
No. 534] FECUNDITY IN THE DOMESTIC FOWL 325
work was done, carried out before these investigations
were begun.
In the second place it is desirable to call attention to
some of the difficulties which attend an attempt to analyze
the inheritance of the character egg production. The
most important of these is the fact that this char-
acter is not visibly or somatically expressed in the male.
A male bird may carry the genes of high fecundity, but
the only way to tell whether or not this is so is to breed
and rear daughters from him. All Mendelian workers
will agree that it is sometimes difficult enough to unravel
gametic complexities in the case of characters expressed
somatically. It is vastly more difficult when only one sex
visibly bears the character. In the second place a very
considerable practical difficulty arises from the fact that
egg production is influenced markedly by a whole series
of environmental circumstances. The greatest of care
is always necessary, if one is to get reliable results, to
insure that all birds shall be kept under uniform and
good conditions. Further, on this account, it is neces-
Sary to deal with relatively large numbers of birds.
Some of the important conditions to be observed in work
on fecundity have been discussed elsewhere? and need
not be repeated here.
Turning now to the results we may consider first
THE EFFECT or SELECTION FOR FECUNDITY IN THE
GENERAL POPULATION
On the ‘‘statistico-ancestral’’? view of inheritance it
would be expected that if fecundity were inherited at all
this character would respond to continued selection.
That is, it would be expected, if the highest layers only
were bred from in each generation, that the general flock
average would steadily, if perhaps slowly, increase and
that any level reached would be at least maintained by
continued selection. In 1898 an experiment in selecting
for high egg production was begun at the Maine sta-
“Me. Agr. Exp. Sta. Ann, Rept. for 1910, p. 100.
326 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
tion. In this experiment only such females were used as
breeders as had laid over 150 eggs in their pullet year
(corresponding roughly to an average winter production
of 45 or more eggs) and the only males used were such
as were out of birds laying 200 or more eggs in the year.
This experiment was continued until the end of 1908.
The selection, be it understood, was based on the egg
record alone, and no account was kept of pedigrees or of
genotypes. Every female with a record higher than 150
eggs in the year was used as a breeder regardless of
whether her high fecundity was genotypic or phzno-
typie. -
The results of this selection experiment covering a
period of nine years have been fully reported elsewhere.‘
Here it needs only to be said that the net outcome of the
experiment was to show that there was no steady or
fixed improvement in average flock production after the
long period of selection. There was no permanently
cumulative effect of the eight (in the last year) genera-
tions of selected ancestry. So far from there having
been an increase there was actually a decline in mean
egg production concurrent with the selection, taking the
period as a whole. During parts of the selection period,
however, as for example the years 1899-1900 to 1901-02,
inclusive, and the years 1902-03 to 1905-06, inclusive, an
improvement from year to year was to be noted, but in |
each case the flock dropped back in intervening years.
This is an important point, the meaning of which is now
clear. The flock average from year to year depended
largely upon whether the breeders of the year before had
had their high fecundity genetically represented or only
somatically. In some years the selection was fortunate
in getting nearly all the breeders from good (i. e., ‘thigh
production’’) genotypes or from good combinations of
genes. In other years just the opposite thing happened:
the high layers chosen as breeders came from low geno-
Dept. Agr. Bur. Anim. Ind., Bul. 110, Parts I and II, 1909 and
1911. “Bettechr. f. indukt. Abst. a. Verb: -Lehre, Bd. 2, 1909, pp. 257-275.
No. 534] FECUNDITY IN THE DOMESTIC FOWL 327
types or combinations of genes. The general upshot
was that while the selection of high layers merely as
such was systematic year after vear the result attained
in the general flock production was entirely haphazard
and uncertain. This is exactly what would be expected
on the genotype hypothesis, but not on the ‘‘statistico-
ancestral.’’
TABLE I
MEAN WINTER (NOVEMBER 1 TO MARCH 1) EGG PRODUCTION DURING THE
SELECTION EXPERIMENT
Mean Winter
Year Production
1899-1900 aise os so sien es ee en aa eee a 1.03
WE erie. eee yee E Ces vey secu een 37.88
DOU TAOS EE ARA E Aaa SRR S ea 45.23
BPO OG ns bec ak oak ce cdg E hee E 26.01
BOOP Oh ok tin dks abe Oe E N E Ss 26.55
TIOE UG oss fin hin oe ee ae LE eet oe wee 35.04
ROME ENN vos ce ine bos a cee MERWE IN G whos ee 40.66
ROOT i ea eS on ais le ee dey is 21.44
PIED pik eaea s OAS Cs ba IRS os Ue ES bees 15.92
The actual course of the average winter egg produc-
tion (not hitherto published) during the period is given
by the figures of Table I and shown graphically in Fig. 1.
Certainly the first line of evidence, derived from a
long-continued experiment, involving more than 2,000
individuals, gives no support to the ‘‘statistico-ances-
5
2
9 mM
5 Ty Pai \
23 s
g
$ Y p
: ‘
15 f 7
99-00 œo o-o2 0203 03-04 04-05 05-06 0607 07-08
i YEAR
Fig. 1.
Diagram showing the course of average winter egg poaae during
the period covered by the mass selection experime
328 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
tral’’ theory and indeed is in flat contradiction to one of
the most fundamental tenets of that faith.
Let us next consider the question,
ARE SoMATICALLY EQUAL VARIATIONS IN FECUNDITY OF
EQUAL HEREDITARY SIGNIFICANCE?
In the spring and summer of 1907 were reared 250
pullets, all of which were the daughters of hens that had
laid approximately 200 or more eggs in the first year of
their life. This group of mothers was reasonably homo-
geneous in respect to records of egg production. All had
laid about the same number of eggs. Their daughters
were, however, far from a homogeneous lot with respect
to egg production.’ It is plain from the results obtained
in that experiment that the egg record of a hen is a most
unreliable criterion of the probable number of eggs
which her daughters will lay. This is demonstrated by
examination of individual cases. Thus consider the two
mothers nos. 253 and 14. Their winter production
records were nearly identical (65 and 66 eggs, respect-
ively). Their daughters’ average winter productions
were 23.87 and 2.40 eggs, respectively! Certainly it
seems reasonable to conclude that the gametic constitu-
tions involved in the breeding of 253 and 14 were quite
different, though both these hens laid the same number
of eggs. Again, take birds no. 386 and 911. One had a
winter record of 55 and the other of 52 eggs. Yet their
daughters’ average winter productions were, respect-
ively, 4.88 and 27.33 eggs. Many more instances of this
kind could be brought forward. Taken together, the
whole evidence shows beyond the shadow of a doubt that
the presence of high fecundity in an individual, and that
factor which makes high fecundity appear in the progeny,
are two very different things, either of which may be
present in an individual without the other. We plainly
have here the basis for the distinction of phenotypes and
genotypes just as in beans.
* Full details regarding this experiment have been published as Bull. 166,
Me. Agr. Exp. Sta., 1909. See particularly Table I.
No.534] FECUNDITY IN THE DOMESTIC FOWL 329
THE INHERITANCE or Ece PRODUCTION IN PEDIGREE LINES
Let us now consider some of the evidence that such
things as genotypes of fecundity really exist in fowls.
We may first examine some repr tative pedigrees
covering four generations and showing the occurrence
of high and low fecundity lines.
As a typical example of a high fecundity pedigree line
in which the high fecundity is genotypic, line D5D39 may
be considered. In the presentation of this and other
pedigree tables the following conventions are adopted.
The band numbers of the birds are in bold-faced type,
and following the band number of each female, her
winter egg record is given in italic figures enclosed in
parenthesis. The band numbers of males are given in
italics.
PEDIGREE LINE D5D39
F & 10 (100)
[ $ F255 (48) X 9'564
QG 12 (16)
303 (64) X 7563
( £232 (69 555—0 ee
ọ (69)X #555 — ae oo
L
2 D39 (62) X 7 D5- i 18 (61)
B47 (69) X 7562
911 (36)
248 (67)
9 r Hy dia
| 287 (65) xX r554 4
Mean = 62
363 (74)X a567
` Mean=61
kas se B 74
This line is shown graphically in Fig. 2.
Little comment on this pedigree line is necessary. We
See a certain high degree of fecundity faithfully repro-
duced generation after generation. Different males were
330 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
dah
3U
>
~
v
oo
w
PERCENTAGE FREQUENCY
EIN 90910
855 945 1035 1125
45 #135 2s üs 405 495 585 079 76.5
WINTER EGG PRODUCTION
Diagram showing range of variation and mean fecundity in
The main polygons of variation give the distribution
oss-hatched areas
Fic. 2.
generation of line D5D39.
areas
of fecundity in the general flock in each generation.
nace the pedigree line, and the heavy dotte
represent the mean fecundity of the line in each generati
The
moet gee tee these
No. 534] FECUNDITY IN THE DOMESTIC FOWL 331
used with different females, but in every case the males
used were from high fecundity lines and were believed
to carry this quality in their germ cells either in homo-
zygote or heterozygote condition.
In marked contrast to the last example let us consider
the low fecundity line D61D168. It is a troublesome mat-
ter to propagate the low fecundity lines, because of the
difficulty of getting a sufficient number of eggs during
the early part of the breeding season. The line D61D168
is of interest not alone as an illustration of a typical low
line, but also because there appeared in it a mutation, or
something very like one. We will consider here only the
main line and not the mutant.
PEDIGREE LINE D61D168
r 9 E231 (25) x 7552 Q F283(32) x 75738—0
22 ug
419 (9)X #561 Q F165 (nx seo ~~
é
209(38) X 7555—0 = Mean=9.67
50( 20
313(26)< 7554 Merrie
ier X g 550 abies
F D168(33 D61 9( 18) ean==
(33) 7 D614 163 (93
200( i2)
141 (0)
116( 28)
151( 77)
24( 23)
_Mean=17.5
US ESS (ZS
This line is shown graphically in Fig. 4, in which the
mutant and its progeny are also shown.
A low line in which no mutant has appeared, but in
which also the mean production is not so low as in line
D61D168 is D65D366. Since the egg production has not
been so low in the early part of the breeding season with
this line it has been easier to propagate it.
” This was the mutant referred to. Its progeny will be considered later.
See p. 335,
332 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von. XLV
15 AN 1907-08 |
E N
0 er
30
3
81s Meta ts
2
:
i
[e]
; ; Pian ree
30
15 Fe SOO oad
Betyg. 2 te
30 T
/
15 1910-11 —
r 45 13.5 225 1.5 405 495 58.5 O75 765 855 945 103.5 1125
WINTER EGG PRODUCTION
Fic. 3. Diagram showing range of variati
generation of im teuen Significance of lines and cross
F v
on and mean fecundity in e
hatching as i
ach
n
No. 534] FECUNDITY IN THE DOMESTIC’ FOWL 333
PEDIGREE LINE D65D366
Q F309 (OD)
( 9 B239(24) x 553 | eatp (9634 (4)
216(41)X F569 + A
164 (5)
Q F301 (7)
224 (43) X 71554 | 223 (14)
2442)
2 D366(33)X g7 D65- | 2G 65 (28)
Q F242(27) 209 (33)
: 854(15)X 0'551 Hisao]. 967 (25)
502 (27)
544 (8)
331 (31) X 7552—0 since
Xg560 f
344117) { X S528 1 9 FITUS)
| Mean=26 Mean=33.4 Mean=22.33
This line is shown graphically in Fig. 3.
In the examples thus far given we have had to do with
pedigree lines in which a given degree of fecundity re-
appeared from generation to generation with practically
no change. In two instances quite certainly, and pos-
sibly in several others, a new and distinct variation has
suddenly appeared within a line and thereafter bred
true, thus presenting the characteristic phenomena of
mutation. The most striking instance of this sort oc-
curred in line D61D168 and may be given here in detail.
The main part of this line has already been discussed
(p. 331). It will be recalled that it is a line of low fecund-
ity. In 1908 there appeared in it one individual of dis-
tinctly higher fecundity than any other bird in the large
family of that year. This individual when bred produced
only high layers. In the next generation two of these
daughters were bred to males known to belong to high fe-
cundity genotypes (#554 and 566). One of these matings
unfortunately produced no adult female offspring. The
_ other led to the production of six adult daughters, all of
Which are relatively high layers, with the single excep-
tion of G495, which has a record of only one egg, and
that record is doubtful. This bird has probably never
laid an egg, and almost certainly is pathological.
” Bird died during winter period.
334 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST
[ Vou. XLV
i AN -
J Fag i
o À
30|
\
\
~ \
2. \ :
3 \
g \
k \
z ;
g o \ Poaceae |
a> F
E
15 WA
o ka
7 /
I
/
I
/
4
- ! 1910-11
/
o Tre ls
45 135 225 315 405 495 585 675 765 855 945 1035 112.5
WINTER EGG PRODUCTION
. 4. Diagram of pedigree line D61D168. The significance of lines is coy
same as in Fi nd 3, except that the mutant line is double cross hatche
ye
For the sake of PeR E495 and the daughters of D31 are omitted in the
1910-11 generati
No. 534] FECUNDITY IN THE DOMESTIC FOWL 335
Leaving this bird out of account because pathological,
the mean winter production of the family is 52.8 eggs,
very strikingly different from the average (9.67 eggs) of
the birds of the same generation in the main low line in
which the mutation appeared.
Two other daughters of the mutant E248 were mated
to ¢D31, a bird known not only to belong to a genotype
of mediocre to low fecundity, but to be remarkably pre-
potent in respect to this character, so that practically
regardless of the females with which he has been mated
the get has been uniformly poor in respect to egg pro-
duction. Four adult females resulted from the two
matings under discussion. They have an average winter
production of 23.75 eggs. There are several possible
explanations of this result, but the most probable is that
we have here simply one more instance of the extraordi-
nary prepotency of ¢D31.
The last of the daughters of the mutant was mated to
a cross-bred male, no. 578, and consequently the progeny
can not fairly be compared with the pure Barred Rocks
in respect to fecundity.
The facts here briefly discussed are shown in the fol-
lowing table and graphically in Fig. 4.
It is apparent from the table and the diagram that the
main line and the ‘“‘mutant’’ line are entirely distinct.
Indeed they do not overlap in their ranges even except-
ing only the pathological individual G495. The ‘‘mu-
tant” pullet E248, for some reason or other, possessed
the capacity both to lay a relatively large number of
eggs, and the genes necessary to make this quality ap-
pear in her progeny. Whether this individual is to be
regarded as a true ‘“‘mutation” would appear to be
largely a question of definition. In the writer’s opinion
the most probable explanation is that E248 is a Men-
delian segregation product. That is, let it be supposeđ
that both D168 and D61 were heterozygous with respect
to degree of fecundity, and were producing in some (un-
own) ratio both ‘“‘high fecundity” and ‘‘low fecun-
336 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
PEDIGREE LINE D61D168 (CoMPLETE)
F F308(78) x 7 554—0
(26 - (45)
2 (58)
354 (55) Xo" s08| 11; (46)
| Q E248 (48)X 7558 < rt
Mean of high
line=—52.8"
166(49)x @-Ds1 { ? C GR
Q G229 (28)
141(61) xr. D31{ O58 UD
Mean of D31’s
daughters=23.75
172(50) K 7 578— Cross
ean of mutant
(high) line=56.5
Q E231 (25)X 9552 Q F288(82) T 573 —0
us ete
9)X F551 QF165 (7)X 569
= os 477 (1)
209 (58)X F Mean of main
: 313 ook z g VERIS (low) tine=9.67
363 (11) 7'550 $ sige
(iow) line=22.0
24 (23)
| Mean of main (low) line=17.5 `
dity’’ gametes. Then E248 may be supposed to have
originated from the union either of two ‘‘high fecun-
dity’’ gametes or one high and one low fecundity gamete.
She then would be either a DD or a DR bird, on the as-
sumption, which the facts seem to support, and which I
have more fully discussed elsewhere,'? that high fecun-
dity is dominant over low.
“= Omitting G495. See text.
1 ‘í Inheritance in ‘Blood Lines’ in Breeding Animals for Performance,
with Special Reference to the ‘200-egg’ Hen,’’ Rept. Amer. Breeders’
Assoc., Vol. VI, 1911 (in press).
No.534] FECUNDITY IN THE DOMESTIC FOWL 337
The subsequent breeding history of E248 indicates
that it was probably a DD bird, though the reasons for
this opinion can not be fully gone into here. The general
view, recently emphasized by Nilsson-Ehle,’* that phe-
nomena of mutation are, in many cases at least, merely
cases of Mendelian segregation has much evidence in its
favor.
The pedigrees which have been given are merely illus-
trations. Many other similar ones might be cited from
the records in hand did space permit. In the experi-
ments during the past three years the attempt has been
made to propagate separately lines of high, medium and
low fecundity. In the course of this work it has been
found that lines of high fecundity were nearly if not
quite as likely to have originated with individuals of a
low record of production as with those of a high record.
Similarly, many low fecundity lines have originated with
individuals which were themselves exceedingly high
layers. Indeed one of the highest winter layers which
have ever appeared in the stock evidently belonged to a
genotype of very low fecundity, since it has never been
able to produce progeny of anything but the poorest lay-
ing capacity. The breeding history of this bird (D352)
is indeed so interesting that it may be briefly discussed
here. This bird in her pullet year laid 98 eggs between
November 10 and March 1 and made a record for the
year of over 200 eggs. She was mated and produced
plenty of eggs during the hatching season, but they
hatched very badly. Only one female worth putting in
the house was obtained. This pullet (E356) made a
winter record of only 39 eggs, just about the general
flock average. E356 was not mated. Her mother (D352)
was kept over and bred to another male the next year, in
the hope that as a fowl she might produce more and
better chickens than she had as a pullet. As a matter of
fact she was again able to produce during the whole
* Nilsson-Ehle, H., ‘‘Kreuzungsuntersuchungen an Hafer und Weizen,’’
Lunds Univ. Arsskr., N. F., Afd. 2, Bd. 5, Nr. 2, 1909, pp. 1-122.
338 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
breeding season only one pullet worth putting into the
laying house. This pullet (F163) made a winter record of
but 11 eggs. F163 was bred in 1910, but produced only
one daughter worth saving. This daughter, G429, has
made a winter record of 18 eggs. It would be hard to
get clearer evidence than that afforded by this breeding
history that D352 belonged to a low fecundity genotype,
in spite of her individual high laying record.
THE EFFECT OF THE SELECTION oF FECUNDITY GENOTYPES
Let us now consider the bearing of the results so far
set forth on the problem of selection. Taking first the
question of the effect of selection for fecundity within
a population it is plain that if different degrees of
fecundity have a genotypic basis, as the facts above
presented and a considerable mass of data of a sim-
ilar kind, which owing to lack of space can not be
given here would appear to indicate, then the results fol-
lowing selection will depend entirely upon the genotypic
constitution of the population. If high fecundity geno-
types are present they can be isolated by selection. If
they are not present selection of high laying hens will
not change the average production of the flock.
The aim of the selection experiments since 1907 has
been to discover and propagate separately genotypes of
high fecundity and genotypes of low fecundity, all the
birds being taken from the same general flock. The re-
sults of this work are shown in the following table and
in Fig. 5. This table is to be regarded as a continuation
of that given on p. 327, supra, which shows the results of
mass selection for high fecundity in the same stock.
EFFECT OF SELECTION FOR FECUNDITY WITHIN THE POPULATION
1907-08. Mean winter production of general population ........-- 15.92
1908-09. Mean winter production of all high fecundity lines ...... 54.16
1908-09. Mean winter production of all low fecundity lines ....... 22.06
1909-10. Mean winter production of all high fecundity lines ...... 47.57
1909-10. Mean winter production of all low fecundity lines ......- 25.05
1910-11. Mean winter production of all high fecundity lines ....-- 50.58
1910-11. Mean winter production of all low fecundity lines ......- 17.00
No. 534] FECUNDITY IN THE DOMESTIC FOWL 339
oe ey
a yen
A EA
99-00 00-01 01-02 02-03 03-04 0-05 05-06 06-07 07-08 08-09 0%10 10-0
LAYING YEAR
big Showing the effect of selecting high and low fecundity on a geno-
typic basis. The solid line denotes means of all “high lines”; the dotted line
means of all “low lines.” Up to 1907-08 the attempt had been to increase egg
production by breeding merely from the highest layers, regardless of pedigrees.
In 1907 and subsequent years the attempt has been to isolate genotypes of high
and low fecundity which shall breed true, each to its own type.
The results indicate the effectiveness of this method
of selection. It should be understood, of course, that
only those pedigree lines are included in the high line
averages which uniformly in each generation show high
fecundity. A similar consideration applies to the low
line averages.
_ Let us now consider briefly the question of the effec-
tiveness of selection within the genotype. According to
the ‘‘pure line” concept we should not expect selection
of high or low individuals belonging to the same geno-
type to produce any effect, except in cases where segre-
gation has occurred and the selected individuals are
really gametically different, though having the same
pedigree. An example of this sort has been given in the
case of line D61D168 (cf. p. 331, supra). The ineffective-
ness of selection within the line when something of this
Sort does not occur is illustrated by line D56D407. In
the F, generation in this line there were four birds, of
Which three were good layers and one was a poor layer.
Two of the good layers and the poor layer were bred.
340 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
Large families were reared in F, and F,. The average
results in the three generations are given in the following
table.
EFFECT OF SELECTION OF GOOD AND PooR WINTER LAYERS IN THE
SAME LINE, D56D407
Fi Fə F3
Mean winter record of good layers and their progeny 76.0 46.7 35.57
Mean winter record of poor layers and their progeny 26.0 52.0 36.75"
It is evident that selection within the line here was
quite without effect.
Another example of the same thing from line D31D447
may be given by way of further illustration. In this line
there was in the F, generation a family of ten daughters.
Of these some were very good and some were poor lay-
ers. All were bred. The mean results are shown in the
next table.
EFFECT OF SELECTION OF GOOD AND Poor WINTER LAYERS IN THE
SAME LINE, D31D447
F; Fə F
Mean winter record of good layers and their progeny 62.5 23.75 22.00
Mean winter record of poor layers and their progeny 32.0 28.75 14.75
Here again it is plain that selection within the line was
without effect. Many more examples of the same sort
might be given from the records did space permit. In
general there is no evidence whatever that the selection
of individuals of different laying records, but belonging
to the same fecundity genotype, produces any definite
or permanent effect whatever.
Discussion AND CONCLUSIONS ©
Taking into consideration all the facts which have
come out of this study, one is led to the following view
as to the composition of a flock of fowls in respect to fe-
cundity. In the average flock we may presume that there
will probably be represented a number of fecundity
“If one family of four birds, which ought not in fairness to be included
because they were extremely inbred (brother-sister mating) in connec:
tion with another experiment, is excluded this average becomes 49.0.
No.534] FECUNDITY IN THE DOMESTIC FOWL 341
genotypes, some high, some low, and some intermediate
or mediocre. In an ordinary flock these genotypes will
be greatly mixed and intermingled. Further, the facts in
hand indicate that the range of variation in fecundity
within the genotype is relatively very large, nearly as
great, in fact, as in the general population. Thus while
fecundity genotype means may be and usually are per-
fectly distinct, there is much overlapping of individuals
in the different lines. In consequence it results that the
egg record of an individual bird is of almost no value in
helping to tell in advance of the breeding test to what
fecundity genotype it belongs. Essentially this same
fact has been brought out in all of the work which has
been done with pure lines. The only difference in the
present case lies in the fact that the range and degree of
variation within the line appears to be relatively greater
in the case of fecundity than in the case of most char-
acters hitherto studied, as, for example, size relations in
beans or Paramecium.
The most serious difficulty which confronts one in the
attempt to analyze the inheritance of a character like fe-
cundity lies in the almost inextricable mingling of geno-
types in the great majority of individuals. This, of
course, is a direct consequence of the manner of repro-
duction. The germ plasm of two separate individuals
must unite to form a new individual. By prolonging in-
cestuous mating one may in theory come indefinitely
close to reproductive purity, but in practise even this is
extremely difficult, if not impossible of accomplishment
on any large scale or through any long period of time. —
The fact simply is that a ‘‘pure line” in the strict sense
of Johannsen" can not by definition exist in an organism
reproducing as the domestic fowl does. This, however,
Y no means indicates that the inheritance of fecundity
does not rest on a genotype basis, or, in other words, that
* Johannsen’s definition is as follows: ‘‘Mit einer reinen Linie bezeichne
ich Individuen, welche von einen einzelnen selbstbefruchtenden Individuum
> (‘“‘Ueber Erblichkeit in Populationen und reinen Linien,’”
P. 9.)
342 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
fowls do not carry definite genes for definite degrees of
fecundity.
We touch here upon an important point; namely, the
relation of the mode of reproduction to the mode of in-
heritance. As one reflects upon the matter it becomes
clear that it is only in the sense of a reproductive line
that we can not, by definition, have pure lines in organ-
isms where the sexes are separate. It is perfectly pos-
sible to have a line of such organisms in which all the
individuals are gametically pure with reference to any
particular character. For example, it is the simplest of
matters to establish a line of horses pure in respect to
chestnut coat color. Any individual in such a line
mated to any other will never produce anything but
chestnut offspring. So similarly with any other char-
acter, it is only necessary to obtain homozygous individ-
uals in respect to any character in order to form a
gametically pure strain with reference to that character.
It must further be kept clearly in mind that a repro-
ductive ‘‘pure line” (in the sense of Johannsen’s defi-
nition) may be made up of individuals not gametically
pure (i. e., homozygous). Thus suppose one crosses a
yellow and a green pea and then takes an F, heterozy-
gote individual seed which originated from a self-
fertilized F, individual as the ‘‘single, self-fertilized
individual” with which to start a line. The individ-
ual which starts such a line arose by self-fertilization
and is selfed to produce progeny and would thus fulfil
every requirement of a reproductive ‘‘pure line” as de-
fined by Johannsen. Yet it would produce both yellow
and green offspring. On the other hand, as already
pointed out, a line which is not, and from the nature of
its mode of reproduction never can be, reproductively
‘‘pure’? may be gametically so (i. e., have none but
homozygous individuals with respect to any character).
We then see that the fact that in fowls the sexes are
separate and we therefore can not have reproductive
‘pure lines’’ gives, per se, no reason to suppose that fe-
No. 534] FECUNDITY IN THE DOMESTIC FOWL 343
cundity is not inherited on a genotypic basis. We have
to consider the problem of genetic or gametic purity.
Do we have homozygote lines in such cases as those dis-
cussed in this paper? It plainly is the fact that one can
get lines of birds which, broadly speaking, will breed
true (perhaps throwing occasionally a few individuals
not true to the type of the line) to definite degrees of
fecundity. The same thing is true of milk production in
dairy cattle, speed in race horses, ete. What are these
lines gametically? Theoretically the formation of
gametically pure (homozygote) lines with respect to
definite degrees of fecundity is simple. Practically it is
exceedingly difficult to do this, owing to the fact that
(a) the character studied is not expressed in the male,
and (b) it is subject to a wide fluctuating variability
caused by environmental conditions. The question as to
the gametic constitution of the fecundity lines here dis-
cussed obviously can not be answered finally now. It is
a matter for much further research. One may, however,
form a general conception of the probable gametic con-
stitution of such lines, which has much evidence in its
support. The essential points in such a conception are:
1. Probably no line yet obtained is absolutely pure
gametically in respect to fecundity. It represents a mix-
ture of a greater or less number of fecundity genes.
2. Lines which breed reasonably true to a definite de-
gree of fecundity may in most cases be taken to be made
up of individuals bearing a preponderant number of
genes of the particular degree of fecundity to which the
line breeds true, so that in gametogenesis a great major-
ity of the gametes formed carry only these genes. They
also carry some genes of higher, or lower fecundity,
or both kinds. When individuals of a definite (e. g.,
‘“‘high’’) line thus constituted are bred together the ma-
jority of the offspring will, purely as a matter of chance,
be produced by the union of two high fecundity gametes.
It is quite possible that with families of the size obtained
with poultry nearly or quite every individual produced
344 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
in the line for several successive generations may be of
this kind. In the long run, however, it is to be expected
that a small number of ‘‘off’’ individuals will appear
in the line. These originate by the chance union of two
low fecundity genes, or by the union of a ‘‘high’’ gene
with a ‘‘low’’ gene of great potency (as in the case of
D3l, ef. p. 335).
3. The degree to which such a line will breed true will
depend upon the proportion of genes of one type (or of
very similar types) present. The higher such proportion
the less frequently will the ‘‘off’’ individual segregate
out. The practical goal to be worked towards is, of
course, to obtain several lines not closely related, but all
made up only of individuals homozygous with respect to
either high or low or any other definite degree of fecun-
dity.
Whether a given degree of fecundity is to be regarded
as a single unit character, in the Mendelian sense, or, on
the other hand, as a complex dependent upon a particu-
lar combination of separately segregable unit characters,
ean not yet be determined. Every one must recognize
the fundamental importance of the investigations of
Nilsson-Ehle, Baur and East, which have shown that
many characters which at first glance do not appear to
conform to any determinate law of inheritance are really
complexes, formed by the combination of a number of
unit characters, each of which segregates and otherwise
behaves in a perfectly regular and lawful manner.
There are some facts which indicate that high fecundity
is a character of this kind, but it will require prolonged
analysis to decide this, because of the numerous practical
difficulties which attend the study of fecundity.
A great help in this analysis, as well as a contributory
line of evidence of much weight in supporting the general
conception of the manner of inheritance of fecundity set
forth above, is derived from the study of crosses be-
tween breeds of poultry in which high and low degrees
of fecundity are definite breed characters. Studies of
No.534] FECUNDITY IN THE DOMESTIC FOWL 345
this sort carried out at the Maine station indicate that
the relatively high fecundity characteristic of the Barred
Rock breed is inherited as a sex-limited character. In
this respect it behaves like a simple unit character, but
this does not necessarily prove that it is not a complex.
More data are needed to settle this point. Of much signifi-
cance is the fact that, whether simple or complex, fecun-
dity is shown by these experiments in cross breeding to
be a character resting on a definite gametic basis.
In conclusion, I think it may fairly be said that the in-
vestigations here reported show in the first place that
different degrees of fecundity are inherited in the do-
mestic fowl, and in the second place, that in all respects
wherein it has been possible, considering the inherent
difficulties of the material and the character dealt with,
to make the test, the method of this inheritance is in en-
tire accord with Johannsen’s concept of genotypes.
THE BIOMETRIC PROOF OF THE PURE LINE
THEORY?
DR. J. ARTHUR HARRIS
CARNEGIE INSTITUTION OF WASHINGTON
I. [INTRODUCTION
On this platform I find myself in a somewhat embar-
rassing position. A friend assured me in advance that
this symposium would be somewhat analogous to the
country parson’s ‘‘praise service,’’ and into this pure
devotional atmosphere I must bring a note of agnostic-
ism.
Agnosticism is a term selected after careful delibera-
tion. Johannsen’s propositions are important—if true
—and any candid naturalist must hesitate before oppos-
ing a new theory which may lead to important advances
in biology. Agnosticism is the condition of mind tem-
porarily enforced by the results of my own experiments.
If one is pledged in advance to the pure line theory many
of these observations can be made to confirm Johann-
sen’s conclusions. If one is unprejudiced and seeks to
fit his theories to his observations, rather than to adjust
his facts to his preconceived conclusions, the results are
quite as capable of other interpretation. Possibly more
extensive work may show clear confirmation of his re-
sults. Meanwhile I must withhold final judgment,
merely stating that my own work has greatly shaken my
confidence in Johannsen’s theory.
Here I do not care to dwell upon details of my own
experiments. It seems more profitable to try and state
the fundamental problems of the pure line theory as
they appear to the biometrician and to indicate the
methods of work which seem to him necessary to the
drawing of sound conclusions.
' From a symposium on ‘‘The Study of Pure Lines of Genotypes,’’
before the American Society of Naturalists, December 29, 1910.
No. 534] THE PURE LINE THEORY 347
II. THE FUNDAMENTAL Propositions oF THE Pure LINE
THEORY
Our symposium has for its subject the Genotype or
Pure Line Theory. Some of the speakers have enthusi-
astically urged us to replace the words ‘‘pure line theory’’
by ‘‘pure line facts.’’ If this were done there would be
little need for this program. Pure line facts are as yet
a very insignificant part of biological data. The real
occasion for this symposium is the pure line theory—
the rank vines which have grown from the nineteen bean
seeds which Johannsen planted in 1901. Biologists
would have been little interested by the statement that
selection within the offspring of a single bean has been
ineffective in changing the weight of the seed. It is the
daring generalization of the conclusions drawn from
these limited experiments—the curt characterization of
other researches as of no biological significance or their
reinterpretation (from flounder’s fins to. intelligence in
school children) in terms of the bean experiments, that
forces us to take an interest in these matters.
Our first problem is to ascertain what these generali-
zations—the elements of the pure line theory as con-
trasted with the pure line facts—are. Our second task
is to try to ascertain in how far experimental facts sup-
port the pure line theory.
Davenport? has given a particularly good outline of
Johannsen’s theory:
The fundamental principle of Johannsen is that an ordinary fre-
quency polygon is usually made up of measurements of a characteristic
belonging to a non-homogenous mass of individuals; that it is really
analyzable into several elementary masses each of which has a “ fre-
queney polygon” of its own. In each elementary polygon the varia-
tion is strictly due to non-inheritable somatie modifications, selection
of extremes of which has no genetic significance. But the selection for
breeding of individuals belonging to different elementary polygons,
lying, say, at the extremes of the complex, may quickly lead to an
isolation of these elementary polygons, the constituent individuals of
which reproduce their peculiarities as distinct elementary species.
* Davenport, C. B., Science, n. s., 30: 852, 1909.
348 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
We recognize three essential propositions:
Proposition 1—Most species or varieties are not
homogeneous, but are composed of a large number of
minor forms.
The series of individuals classified as the same
variety or race by the systematist, regarded as homo-
geneous material for experiment by the physiologist,
lumped together to form a single ‘‘population’’ by the
statistician, is designated by Johannsen as a phenotype.
This phenotype may generally be analyzed by pure line
breeding into many constant and indivisible strains
known as genotypes.
Systematists have long regarded certain groups as
polymorphic. Aster, Rubus, Salix and Crategus at once
occur to the botanist and Unio, Salmo and the staphylinids
to the zoologist. But the genotype theory seems to regard
systematic polymorphism as a much wider phenomenon.
ndeed one is sometimes assured that every apparently
uniform cultivated variety is a swarm of constant bio-
types. Johannsen emphasizes the generality of hetero-
geneity. For instance, he says:
Ein gegebener Phaenotypus mag Ausdruck einer biologischen Einheit
sein; es braucht es aber durchaus nicht zu sein. Die in der Natur dureh
variationsstatistische Untersuchungen getundenden Phaenotypen sind
es wohl in den allemeisten Fällen nicht !*
Again on page 162:
In der Praxis wirkt ein Selektion meistens schnell in der beabsichtigen
Richtung—eben weil die Bestiinde oder Populationen fast immer
sind.
One more illustration will suffice:
Der oft ausserordentlich grosse Reichtum genotypischer Unterschiede
in einer auscheinend einheitlichen Population war von Darwin . . . eben-
sowenig in der vollen Tragweite erkannt, als es dem grossen Grandléger
der Mikrobiologie, Pasteur, klar sein gies welche bedeutung es hatte,
***¥Elemente,’’ p. 123.
*On page 121, he remarks on this point: ‘‘Selbst die shénste ‘typische’
aware that this point has been fully recognized by ‘‘ Biometriker’’ for years
No. 534] THE PURE LINE THEORY 349
na iole physiologisch sehr differierende Felersasen in vermeintlich
‘ reinen ’ Hefekulturen koexistieren konnten.
Proposition 2.—These genotypes are separated gen-
erally by differences which are exceedingly minute.
Notwithstanding the constant flood of new species
segregated from the classic Linnean groups, necessita-
ting frequent supplements to ‘‘Index Kewensis’’ and
other works of its kind, many naturalists could hardly
understand the small species discussed by de Vries in
his great work. Indeed, many laboratory men hardly
perceived the usefulness of recognizing species—per-
fectly constant, we were assured—so closely related that
one taxonomist could not identify the species of another
from his descriptions; species so similar that herbarium
material was worthless, and only culture side by side
could distinguish them. Yet after a lapse of only ten
years we find de Vries criticized for not recognizing
even smaller divisions than these! Spillman says: ‘‘de
Vries overlooks entirely those closely related pure lines,
differing frequently only quantitatively, and in a single
character. ... They not only do not differ in all their
characters as the @nothera mutants do, but their norms
present a regular series coming under Quetelet’s law.’’®
As examples of these minute differences both he and
Lang? quote the ‘‘72 Formen einer Population einer
gewissen Heferasse’’ discussed by N acne ce p
Jennings says:?
The work with genotypes brings out as never before the minuteness
of the hereditary differences that separate the various lines. These
differences are the smallest that can possibly be detected by refined
measurements taken in connection with statistical treatment. Johann-
sen found his genotypes of beans differing constantly merely by weights-
of two or three hundredths of a gram in the average weight of the
ed. Genotypes of Paramecium I found to show constant hereditary
differences of one two-hundredths of a millimeter in length. Hanel
***Elemente,’’ p. 318,
“Spillman, W. J., AM. Nar., 44: 760, 1910.
‘Lang, A., Arch. f. Induktive Abstamm.- u. T 4: 15-16, 1910.
5 Nilsson- Ehle, H., Bot. Not., 1907: 113-1
* Jennings, H., AMER. Nat., 44: 144-145, in
8
350 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
found the genotypes of Hydra to differ in the average number of ten-
tacles merely by the fraction of a tentacle. That even smaller heredi-
tary differences are not described is certainly due only to the impossi-
bility of more accurate measurements; the observed differences go
straight down to the limits set by the probable errors of our measures.
Proposition 3—These genotypes are rigid hereditary
units; by a process of mutation one may give rise to
another, but selection within the genotype is incapable
of effecting a change.
This theory is everywhere so prominent in the writ-
ings of the genotypists that discussion or explanation is
superfluous.
II. THe CARDINAL PROPOSITION OF THE GENOTYPE
THEORY
Of these three essential propositions of the genotype
theory of heredity, the first two might be accepted by
Darwinian or Lamarckian or by a member of almost any
school. If the proposition concerning the exceeding
smallness of the differences be true, the theory might
seem to present the greatest difficulty to the de Vriesian,!®
for with smaller and smaller genotypes there is a con-
stant approach to continuity, but we are assured that
continuity is never realized."
The third proposition—that genotypic differences are
rigid and unchangeable except by mutation—is there-
fore the essential one. The most obvious way in which
this hypothesis can be tested against concrete facts is to
determine the effect of selection upon genotypes.
The very heart of the pure line theory is the proposi-
“Jennings (AMER. NAT., 44: 145, 1910) tells us, ‘‘The genotype work
lends no support to the idea that evolution occurs in large steps, for it
reveals a continuous series of the minutest differences between great num-
bers of existing races.’’
= Johannsen (‘‘Elemente,’’ p. 356) says in criticism of the Lamarckian
theory: ‘‘Die Lamarckismus muss kontinuierlich verschiebbare Typen an-
ehmen; wir — aber bei genauer Priifung immer und immer wieder
Diskontinuitat.
No. 534] THE PURE LINE THEORY 351
tion that selection within the pure line is ineffective.t?
The strenuousness with which this has been maintained
has even engendered in some minds the opinion that se-
lection has no rélé at all to play in evolution or in prac-
tical breeding. The attitude of many appears to be that
Darwin was quite mistaken when he wrote, ‘‘The key is
man’s power of accumulative selection: nature gives suc-
cessive variations; man adds them up in certain direc-
tions useful to him.”
Darwin said, ‘‘If selection consisted merely in sepa-
rating some very distinct variety, and breeding from it,
the principle would be so obvious as hardly to be worth
notice.” Fifty years after this was written we hold a
Symposium to celebrate the discovery that selection is
after all merely the isolation of distinct varieties!
Was Darwin right or wrong? Have all practical
breeders except those at the oft-quoted Svalöf station
been chiefly occupied in wasting their time for the last
fifty years? These are very important questions.
The burden of proof obviously lies on the genotypists.'*
Much of the evidence offered is most general and not at
all unzweideutig. Indeed, when closely analyzed much of
the reasoning reduces to a circle of three ares each of
one hundred and twenty degrees: :
l. Definition—A genotype or biotype is an organic
unit, reproducing itself constantly'* except for the transi-
tory, non-inheritable modifications due to environmental
influence.® It is not capable of change by selection.
= Johannsen (‘‘Elemente,’’ p. 137) states the problem: ‘‘Wird Selek-
tion von Plus—oder Minus—Varianten innerhalb reiner Linien eine Typen-
verschiebung bezw. eine Galton’sche Regression hervorrufen?’’
fiat acceptable, the evidence must be quantitative; the observations
must either be numerous enough that variations due to uncontrollable fac-
tors will average out, or the experiments be conducted with such refined
technique that environmental influences are entirely excluded; the statistical
reasoning concerning the observations must be logically sound.
"CA biotype is a group of individuals which do not differ from one
another in any hereditary quality and which therefore constitute a pure
Face.”’—Shull, G. H., Am. Breed. Mag., 1: 100, 1910
*“*Tn a given ‘pure line’ (progeny of a single individual) all detectable
352 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
2. Observation.—Selection has never been known to
produce a change in a genotype. Whenever, as is often
the case, selection does result in modification of type this
proves that the material considered was impure—that
more than one genotype was originally present—or that
others arose by mutation, and entirely aep of
selection.
3. Conclusion.—It is therefore proved that Br
can not modify the characters of a genotype.
Johannsen has written a very thick and a very con-
vincing-looking book, but if one pins himself down to the
task of going from cover to cover he finds that an unfor-
tunate amount of the evidence reduces to this kind of
reasoning—in short, to no critical evidence at all.’° But
behind this citing of examples which are not inconsistent
with his theory although they prove nothing concerning
it; besides this reiteration of testimony which merely ex-
cites in the minds of the court-room spectators suspicions
concerning the integrity of the defendant without en-
titling the plaintiff to a verdict before an impartial
jury," there are certain direct experimental studies
variations are due to growth and environmental action, and are not in-
herited.’’—Jennings, Proc. Am. Phil. Soc., 47: 521, 1908.
‘‘ The standard deviation and écatiaak d variation express in a pure
race mere temporary sagt of no consequence in heredity. If we could
make all conditions of and environment the same throughout our
pure race, all the echoed nap se that net eS deviation and coeffi-
cient of variation would be zero, and t s the positive value of a
assistance in determining what e je w Warisata of the progeny.’’
—Jennings, AMER. NAT., 43: 333,
‘* Wenn es gelinge, fiir alle Individuen einer reinen Linie absolut gleiche
Lebenslage zu schaffen, miisste die Standardabweichung gleich sein. dany
Römer, T., Arch. Rassen- u. Gesells.-Biologie, 7: 437—438, 1910.
* For instance, he (‘‘Elemente,’’ p. 162) refers to the fact that Hallet
was unable to improve Le Couteur’s wheat, although he had succeeded in
ip es seventy other samples from all parts of the world, and explains
it by the assumption that in every case the seventy series of wheat were
mixtures of biotypes while Le Couteur’s was a pure line. This may be true,
but what is it worth as scientific evidence?
"In working over the literature of the pure line theory the lover of
fair play is sometimes on the verge of losing his patience, for although the
experimental data—at least those which are confided to his reader—upon
which Johannsen grounds his own theory are very slender, he is unsparing
No. 534] THE PURE LINE THEORY 353
which have been adduced in support of the genotype
theory. These arguments and the evidence upon which
they rest must be examined. For convenience of treat-
ment I do this under three propositions concerning selec-
tion, which seem so reasonable that I believe few biol-
ogists will feel inclined to deny their soundness. They
are at least so reasonable that no worker can afford to
leave them out of consideration.
A, Characters which are not Inherited at all can not be
Taken to Prove that Selection in General is
Ineffective
This is a point of great importance, generally ignored
by pure-linists. Biometricians have long known that of
the variations of any character whatever not all are in-
herited.1* They have also learned that variations in cer-
tain characters are not inherited.
Suppose now that one takes a character which gives
no correlation between its degree of development in
in his criticism of the pioneer studies which have made his own work
sible. Such bald statements as (‘‘Elemente,’’ p. 285), ‘‘Alle oh ee
Schliisse sind aber fiir die eigentliche iisttisthkslisforsehang pee ohne
Wert,’ seem to have little of profit to contribute to science. Johannsen’s
ipse dixit has been taken as gospel. Woltereck (Verh. Deutch. Kai Ges.,
1909: 115) says, ‘‘ Dieses Resultat erschüttert ernstlich die grundlagen der
statistischen Variations; und Erblichkeitforschung, wie sie von die Galton-
Pearsonschen Schule betrieben wird.’’ A. Lan ng (Verh. Deutch. Zool. Ges.,
1909: 24) asserts, ‘‘Die biometrischen Forschung arbeitet mit unreinen
material.’’ Römer (Archiv f. Rossen- u. Ges.-Biol., T: 427, 1910) tells us,
“‘ Variabilitätstudien sind bis in die neueste Zeit meist an Material ausge-
n
das aber nach dem jetzigen Stande der Wissenschaft als unrein angesehen
werden muss. Soe tritt besonders hervor bei den veilen Untersuchungen
der Biometriker
> This is one ‘ae the facts which has led the biometrician to discuss prob-
abilities while biologists in general clamor for certainty in the individual
instance. One of the results of recent experimental work that has been
hailed with the greatest enthusiasm is that two individuals may be identical
in external appearance and yet produce entirely different offspring: in
Short, that some (somatic) variations are and some are not inherited.
experimental data collected on this point both by pure line and by Men-
elian researches are of high value, but those who hail them as novel simply
eb vat ignorance of much of the pioneer work in variation and
354 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
parent and offspring in a population and selects to in-
erease or decrease it. He will get no result of selection.
If now he takes the same character and selects from the
plus and minus variations within a pure line, he will
again effect no change by selection. Does either of these
cases prove that selection in general is ineffective? Or
does the second support. in any way Johannsen’s geno-
type theory of heredity? Certainly not.
Certain important work of Pearl and Surface seems to -
me to deserve mention in this connection.’® These re-
searches are sometimes referred to as furnishing evi-
dence against the possibility of improvement by selec-
tion, and this they do so far as the character with which
they have dealt is concerned. In the generalization of
their results, however, the greatest caution must be used.
From two series of experiments with the same strain
of Barred Plymouth Rock fowls they show that there is
little hope of increasing the egg-laying capacity by direct
selection for fecundity. These results are doubtless of
much practical importance. Biologically they are of in-
terest in confirming the results of other biometric
studies which have shown that for man, horse, swine and
mice fertility is very slightly inherited in the population.
To consider them as indicating that selection in general
is ineffective would be a very grave error, for fertility—
so far as we may judge from the statistics so far pub-
lished—seems to be a character sui generis in respect to
inheritance. To cite these results in support of Johann-
sen’s genotype theory of heredity, as has sometimes
been done, is absurd.
Is it not possible that Johannsen’s results with beans
may be due to seed weight being a character which is not.
inheritable at all in the population, and which can not,
therefore, reasonably be expected to be inherited within
the pure line?
» Pearl, R., and F. M. Surface, ‘‘ Inheritance of Fecundity,’’ Bull. Me..
Ag. Exp. Sta., 166, 1909. Pearl, R., and F. M. Surface, ‘‘Is there a Cumu-
lative Effect of Selection?’’ Zeitschr. Ind. Abstamm.- u. Verebungsl., 2:
257-275, 1909.
No. 534] THE PURE LINE THEORY 355
Biologists will agree, I believe, that to test critically
the effectiveness of selection in the population and in the
pure line, the experimental material must be an appar-
ently homogeneous wild species or a garden variety the
individuals of which are not differentiated into sub-
races by characters other than those under considera-
tion. Conclusions drawn from any experiments in
which these simple precautions are neglected seem of
doubtful value.
From Professor Johannsen’s first memoir, that of
1903, we have no reason to suspect that his material is
not, so far as the biologist can judge, homogeneous.*!
We are told nothing of any vegetative differences seen
during the two generations grown in 1901 and 1902. Ap-
parently all the numerous reviewers have considered his
material perfectly homogeneous except for differentia-
tion into genotypes with respect to seed characters.
Tn his book, however, one notes with some surprise the
casual information (‘‘Elemente,’’ p. 311) that his Pure
Line I also has curiously bent seeds, a special ‘‘Ver-
halten” in germination and a ‘‘groben Habilus”’ in the
vegetative organs. Indeed Johannsen states that from
the form and method of germination, etc., of a seed—
even though a strong ‘‘minus Abweicher’’—he can gen-
erally recognize an individual belonging to Line I.
These points should have been made clear at the be-
ginning. If Professor Johannsen’s lines really differ in
their vegetative characters, so, for instance, that they
can be distinguished as they grow in the field, it seems to _
me that their significance for the efficiency of selection is
= Surely we can all agree that the population is to be an apparently homo-
geneous one, i. e., such that all the individuals would be classified together
by a keen taxonomist. If this is not the case, if by definition, ‘‘popula-
tion °’ means to the pure linist a mixture of several conspicuously different
oa there seems little need for further discussion
= Of the seed he says, ‘‘Der Ausgangspunkt dieser kappe war
eine gekaufte Partie, etwa Skg, brauner ‘Prinzessbohnen,’ wohl eine der
altesten Kruppbohnen unten den vielen Kulturformen von Prisons vul-
garis. Die betreffende Ware... war rie REN! wae und so gleich-
mässig, wie es überhaupt hier erwartet werden konnte
356 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
greatly reduced. We do not know to what extent the dif-
ferences in seed weight which give the low correlation in
his population are due to the mixture of races slightly
differentiated with respect to their vegetative characters.
If this differentiation be considerable, the seed weight
character with which Professor Johannsen has chiefly
worked, may not be inherited at all in the population
providing this population be one composed of individuals
with the same vegetative characters. It is not sufficient
to be assured that these classic beans differ ‘‘nur (oder
fast nur)’’ in seed characters; more detailed information
is much needed, and until it is forthcoming I must differ
from most biologists in my opinion as to the importance
to be attached to the conclusions drawn from them.
B. Improvement for any Single Character can not be
supposed to be Unlimited
This is a fundamental consideration too often neg-
lected.??. A wheat is selected up to its maximum pro-
ductiveness, perhaps by getting the uppermost attain-
able limit at one choice from a large field. Then because
it can not be made to yield all grain and no stubble we
are told that selection can only isolate already existing
types. A sugar beet can not be all sugar and the cow
can not give pure cream.
In arguing for Johannsen’s theory East?* concludes
that since Illinois is no longer making progress in high
= The principle, however, has been clearly seen by some biologists. For
instance, in his ‘‘ Foundations of Zoology,’’ Brooks says 65) sore
breeder of domesticated animals or of cultivated plants, who devotes his
attention to one or two characteristics, must soon reach a point where no
for a single point quickly grows less and less effective, and soon reaches a
maximum; but this is no proof of any ‘principle of e ee or
anything we except the truth that long ages of natural selection have made
the organism such a unit or coordinated whole that no great se continuous
change in one feature » possible unless it be accompanied by general or
oren Ss e?
, E. M., ‘‘The Rôle of Selection in Plant Breeding,’’? Pop. Sci.
Mo., Tis apes 1910.
ana
EI
No. 534] THE PURE LINE THEORY 357
and low oil and protein selection in maize, their work has
been merely the isolation of pure and constant strains—
‘*sub-races’’—with the characteristics in question as
strongly developed in the beginning as we now find them,
but continually intercrossing. The case is too compli-
cated for discussion in detail, but certainly the fact that
the characters can no longer be increased by selection**
is no strong argument for the biotype idea. Under its
present morphological and physiological organization we
have no reason to suppose that the corn grain can be
made to contain as much oil as the castor bean.
Again Pearl and Surface announce concerning their
selection work with corn,
e find the results of this experiment or investigation to be very
dificult (if not altogether incapable) of rational explanation in accord-
ance with the biological implications of the “law of ancestral inherit-
ance” and conclude that the results agree better with the genotype
theory of Johannsen than with that of the cumulative theory of selection
with, of course, the limitations implied by the fact that it is an open
fertilized plant
What Pearl and Surface have actually done is to take
a desirable sweet corn which they for convenience desig-
nate as Type I, and attempt—with initial suecess—to
improve it for yield in ears and stover, for configuration
of ears, and especially for earliness. But this Type I
corn is descended from a few ears, the offspring of which
have been grown in Maine for fifteen to twenty-five years.
The variety originally introduced must have been an
“That changes due to selection are at first rapid and then smitty has
long been recognized. Indeed, as early as 1869 Hallett stated as two
laws of the action of selecti ion, ‘‘ The improvement which is at first ik
gradually, after a long series of years, is diminished in amount, and even-
tually so far arrested that, plasticity speaking, a limit to the improvement
in the desired quality is reached. By still continuing to select the improve-
ment is maintained and practically a fixed type is the result.’’
Darwin’s views on this question are partly expressed in a letter of 1869
prised that Hallett has found some varieties of wheat could not be improved
in certain a qualities as quickly as at first. All experience shows
this with animals.
* Pearl, R., and F. M. Surface, ‘‘ Experiments in Breeding Sweet Corn,’’
‘Me. Ag. Exp. Sta. Bull., 1910.
358 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Von. XLV
early one as compared with sweet corn in general, to be
able to survive at all in Maine. During the fifteen to
twenty-five years the ancestors of the Type I corn were
grown in Maine it must have been?® subjected to an oc-
casional natural selection, for seed could be taken by the
farmers from only plants which had ripened their ears.
The somatic organization of some plants is such that
they require only a few hours for their life cycle, but so
long as sweet corn has the general characteristics of
root, shoot and leaf that identify it as Zea Mays it seems
reasonable to suppose that there is some limit to the re-
duction of the time required for germination, growth
and fruiting—an irreducible minimum beyond which
selection can not carry it. Surely the fact that Pearl
and Surface could not continually reduce the time re-
quired for growth while at the same time maintaining
a selection for yield of ears and stover may indicate
that the irreducible minimum for earliness has been
reached in a variety of the physical type they wish to
breed. Speaking for myself alone, I must say that the
data before us prove nothing against the theory of cumu-
lative effect of selection, and they certainly do not fur-
nish any critical evidence for the Johannsenian theory.
It seems to me that Pearl and Surface again tacitly
make this unjustifiable assumption that the modification
attainable for any single character is practically un-
limited when they consider that their failure to increase
egg production by selection is a legitimate argument
against the potency of selection. Indeed they say of ‘‘200
egg hens,’’ which lay an egg fifty-five per cent. of the
days of the year, ‘‘This figure is of some interest as indi-
eating what a relatively small proportion of the theo-
retically maximum character is being selected to, when
200-egg birds are bred.’’27
But why, pray, is two hundred and sixty-five and a
quarter eggs per year the theoretical maximum? One
~ ™Judging from the account of the difficulties of growing sweet corn
which the authors give us.
7 Pearl and Surface, Bull. Me. Ag. Exp. Sta., 166: 55.
No. 534] THE PURE LINE THEORY 359
ignorant of the physiology of reproduction in the do-
mestic fowl might innocently suppose that even a hen
needs a rest. If this be true, may it not be that 200 eggs
is about the attainable maximum (the physical or physi-
ological limit of the organism) of this variety under the
environmental conditions available and that the Maine
strain of poultry will not do better than it has? If this
is not the attainable limit, why not assume over an egg
a day as the theoretical maximum?
C. Selection can not in general carry a Character be-
yond a Degree Consistent with the Optimum
for Maintenance and Reproduction
This proposition is perhaps in a sense explanatory of
the one immediately preceding. A characteristic is not
independent of, but correlated with the other character-
istics of the organism, and if it increases or decreases
unduly they must also change or the organism be made
more or less unfit for survival.
Have those who claim to have found selection ineffect-
ive been selecting against the morphological or physio-
logical balance of the organism, that is in a manner to
render the organism less capable of maintenance,
growth and reproduction?
If this be true their failure to obtain results will be in
some measure explained.
A possible illustration of this case may be furnished
by the work of Pearl and Surface on egg production in
the domestic fowl. Their work is again chosen not be-
cause of any malicious desire to differ from them?> in
interpretation, but because in a brief discussion of the
evidence for the genotype theory one must confine his
attention to the most important of Johannsen’s sup-
porters.
The data are: (a) The results of an eight years’ selec-
= The criticism presented here must not be interpreted as drawing into
question the scientific value of the data or the practical importance of the
results of the studies criticized, or be extended to other work of the same
authors, but is to be limited to the question of interpretation in relation to
the pure line problem.
360 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou XLV
tion for high egg production; (b) a correlation between
the egg production of thirty-one individual mothers and
the egg production of their daughters, and the compari-
son of the egg production of these daughters with that
of a large number of pullets of unregistered female
parents.
We note the following details:
1. During the eight-year selection experiment”? some
unfavorable environmental accidents occurred in certain
of the laying years. The averages for these years are
perhaps too low, and both the actual means and a series
of corrected means are given. The corrected means
show an insignificant increase, but the unmodified means
show a pronounced decrease in mean number of eggs as
the result of the eight year selection.
2. In correlating between the egg production of the 31
highly selected mothers and their 217 daughters there
is not trustworthy evidence of any relationship between
the fertility of the mothers and that of their daughters.”
If these constants show any deviation from 0 whatever
it is on the negative side.
3. In comparing the daughters of these ‘‘200-egg¢”’
hens with three other series of the same strain but not
of such highly selected female parentage, both for winter
and spring egg production, it is shown that in five cases
out of six the offspring of less highly selected parentage
are better layers than those of the less stringently se-
lected parents.
us all three comparisons indicate that the high lay-
ing mothers tend to produce low laying daughters; se-
lection to increase egg production actually decreases it.
=<‘ The practise in breeding was to use as mothers of the stock bred ın
any year only hens which laid between November 1 of the year in which
they were hatched and November 1 of the following year, 160 or more eggs.
Af e first year, all male birds used in the breeding were the sons of
mothers whose production in their first laying year was 200 eggs or more.
Since the normal average annual egg production of these birds may be
taken to be about 125 eggs, it will be seen that the selection Leas was
fairly stringent.’’ Zeit. Ind. Abst.- u. Verebungsl., 2:
From a knowledge of the biometrie work of the last poe years this
is just the result which one would have expected to get.
No. 534] THE PURE LINE THEORY 361
Such a run of results as this can hardly be due to
chance.*! They indicate rather the presence of some as
yet undetermined physiological factor.*?
Candidly viewed and considered in comparison with .
other biometric work on the inheritance of fertility and
fecundity, I think these experiments can not be held to be
strongly opposed to the theory of the effectiveness of se-
lection in general. However this may be, they certainly
afford no substantiation for ‘Johannsen’s genotype
theory of heredity.
IV. Summary AND CONCLUSIONS
By the genotype theory of Johannsen one understands
the following propositions:
An apparently uniform population or phenotype is
generally not homogeneous, but is composed of a large
number of differentiated types, which are to be desig-
nated—within limitations to be laid down immediately—
as genotypes.
Externally, the genotype can not be distinguished
from the phenotype. Both may have normal variation
curves, but while that of the phenotype may by proper
selection be broken up into constituent genotypes, the
variation curve of the genotype. can not be modified by
selection. In short, the genotype is from the standpoint
of heredity a rigid unit. All individuals belonging to
the same genotype have the same potencies as parents.
Only discontinuous segregations or transformations—
mutations—may modify them.
“The argument that this observed decrease as the result of selection to
merease egg production is due to chance must rest chiefly on one or both o
two assumptions. First, that the eight-year selection experiment is abso-
lutely untrustworthy because of the accidents which may have affected the
number entirely too small to give significant results in the case of a char-
acter like fecundity. These admissions would vitiate entirely any conclusion
Poenis selection to be drawn from these experiments.
= To me it seems that some of Pearl and ate ’s published data are
most suggestive of the nature of this factor, but they doubtless have in
progress experiments that will throw light on these matters and biologists
will await their results with interest.
362 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
The keystone of the pure line arch is the proposition
that selection is ineffective except as a means of sepa-
rating already existing genotypes. If this keystone-
proposition be not sound the whole structure of the
theory crumbles.
The propositions of the genotype theory are such that
scientific proof or disproof is rendered particularly diffi-
cult. By theory selection can not effect a change in a
pure line; by a slippery process of reasoning in a circle
any venules attained by selection are at once discredited
by the assertion that the original material was impure.
If, on the contrary, any selection experiment is ineffec-
tual it is by some process of reasoning quite incompre-
hensible to some of us, at once chalked up to the credit
of the new theory. If heritable differences appear within
a pure line known to be so, these results are also dis-
credited by the assertion that the observed change is a
mutation or has been produced by the action of the en-
vironment. Truly the unbiased investigator is between
the devil and the deep sea!
The actual experimental data upon which the genotype
theory rests are as yet few. Johannsen’s conclusions
for beans depend chiefly upon the offspring of only
nineteen seeds, and so far as I am aware no other in-
vestigator has confirmed his results on Phaseolus.
Hanel had only twenty-six original Hydra, and Pear-
son’s analysis of his data with more adequate methods
than he used, evidences against rather than for the geno-
type theory. Jennings gives us the records of only six
selection experiments involving altogether only a few
actually selected Paramecia. Considering the large en-
vironmental and growth factors, his conclusions can not
be considered as beyond question.*? The work of Pearl
and Surface with poultry and maize seems to me to have
“In offering this FERNE I wish to express the highest admiration for
Professor Jennings’s two memoirs on variation, heredity and evolution in
the protozoa. The co fs of refined statistical with careful experimental
methods in the investigation of these organisms marks a great advance in
biology.
No. 534] THE PURE LINE THEORY 363
no critical bearing on the pure line problem.** This is
also true of numbers of other smaller experiments which
can not be cited.
If one turns from the strictly pure line side of the
problem to the more general questions of the ‘‘some-
thing’’ or ‘‘Etwas’’ in the germ plasm which determines
in large degree the somatic characters of the individual
which develops from it, one can only suggest that nothing
whatever is explained by giving another name to a well-
known fact. Ever since the time of Darwin, and before,
we have known that there was ‘‘something’’ in the germ
cells which determined the character of the offspring.
We have had a dozen different names for this something,
and by adding a thirteenth, ‘‘Gene,’’? Johannsen has
merely burdened us with another cloak for our igno-
rance. Unfortunately biological closets are full of such
cloaks, once in fashion—now out.
Finally, I must make my own position quite clear.
With Professor Jennings’s contention that pure line cul-
tures are of fundamental importance in many fields of
physiology and genetics, I am in hearty agreement.
Like other breeds of facts, ‘‘pure line facts’’ can not be-
come too abundant. Indeed, a priori, I am not opposed
to the genotype theory. As a theory it is most attract-
ive, but one can not accept it without proof on that ac-
count. Personally, I am one of ‘‘that last small rem-
nant’ who believe that in a problem of this kind the
proof must be biometric. This means merely three
things. In so far as the nature of the material permits,
all the data considered must be quantitative. The data
must be numerous enough that biological relationships
will not be obscured by the errors of random sampling.
The data must be analyzed by logically sound methods.
Judged by these standards, I must express the convic-
tion that as yet there is no adequate justification for the
genotype or pure line theory.
“ Naturally, this is purely a matter of interpretation, and does not
diminish in the slightest degree the value of the work.
THE INFLUENCE OF CHANGED EXTERNAL
CONDITIONS ON THE DEVELOPMENT
OF TWO SPECIES OF MOTHS
PROFESSOR THOMAS H. MONTGOMERY, Jr.
UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA
THESE experiments were carried out in the fall and
winter of 1908-09, and their results are not without in-
terest even though no marked changes in the insects
were effected.
I. Attacus cecropia Linn.
Cocoons of this large Saturniid were collected in New
Jersey in December and January. The controls, kept
in their cocoons, were hung out-of-doors exposed to rain
and sun until the latter part of April, then placed in a
hatching cage in a room at out-of-doors temperature,
when they hatched in May. The pupe to be experi-
mented upon were removed from the cocoons and kept
in horizontal positions unless otherwise specified.
A. Experiments with Light
Direct Sunlight.—Four pupe, lot no. 86, of which only
one was healthy in appearance, were placed in direct
sunlight in a warm room (21° C.) on February .5; one
of them hatched on February 10 and laid eggs, while the
other died. Evidently direct sunlight is not fatal to
them.
Direct Sunlight behind a Heat Filter—Twenty pup2,
lot no. 83, were laid horizontally on their dorsal sur-
faces with heads directed towards the sunlight, behind
a vertical flat glass jar containing a saturated aqueous
solution of alum, in a warm room (21° C.). They were
thus placed on January 22, and all hatched in March
following.
364
No. 534] INFLUENCE OF CHANGED CONDITIONS 365
Diffuse Sunlight—Five pupæ, lot no. 65, were placed,
each vertical with head up in a test-tube in a room that
never sank quite as low as freezing; all hatched between
May 15 and June 2.
Five pupe, lot no. 66, were kept under similar condi-
tions, but placed with their heads down in the test-tubes;
four of these hatched in May, the fifth being infected
by parasites. Three pupe, lot no. 69, were placed verti-
cally in separate tubes within a moist chamber near a
steam radiator in my private laboratory; two hatched
in February, the third died.
B. Experiments with the Tracheal Stigmata Covered
Twenty pupæ, lot no. 85, were placed in a warm room
(21° C.) in diffuse sunlight. On January 22 the stig-
mata, of which there are eight easily recognizable pairs
counting those of the head, were covered with a gum-
arabic solution, but this peeled off and was replaced the
next day by pure Canada balsam. It is, however, quite
doubtful how efficient the balsam was in excluding air
from the respiratory tubules, for it does not adhere very
well to the greasy surface of the cuticula. Four of these
pupe, lot 85A, had seven stigmata of the right side cov-
ered, and all hatched. Four others, lot 85B, had the first
pair of stigmata covered, and all hatched. Four others,
lot 85C, had the second and third pairs of stigmata cov-
ered, and all hatched. Four others, lot 85D, had the
sixth and seventh pairs covered, and three hatched.
Four others, lot 85E, had the fourth pair covered, and
three hatched.
C. Experiments with Higher Temperatures
Ten pupe, lot no. 68, were placed within a closed and
dry glass jar in diffuse light, kept thus at 28° C. for 23
days, then removed from the jar and kept in diffuse light
in a room at 21° ©. All hatched, except three that were
parasitized.
Twenty-two pupe, lot no. 80, were placed on January
366 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
5 in an egg incubator at 39° C., kept there for varying
periods, then removed into a warm room (diffuse light,
21° C.) until hatching. These were divided into lots as
follows:
80A, 4 pup, incubator 1 day, all hatched in March.
80B, 3 pup, incubator 2 days, all hatched in February and March.
80C, 3 pupe, incubator 3 days, 2 hatched in March.
80D, 3 pup, incubator 4 days, all hatched in March.
80E, 3 pupæ, incubator 6 days, 2 hatched in February.
80F, 3 pup, incubator 7 days, all hatched in February and March.
80G, 3 pup, incubator 28 days, all hatched in March.
Twelve pups, lot no. 84, were placed in an egg incu-
bator from January 22 to February 18, then removed
to diffuse light in a warm room (21° C.) for hatching;
the temperature in the incubator was 39° C. until Jan-
uary 28, after that 39.5° C. Nine of these hatched in
March and April.
D. Experiments with Lower Temperature
Seven pupa, no. 41, were placed in a tight covered and
dry glass jar in an ordinary ice refrigerator from De-
cember 7 to March 29, afterwards removed to a warm
room; three hatched May 17, the others were destroyed
by an accident.
Thirteen pupæ, no. 67, were treated similarly; two
hatched on May 17, the others were killed accidentally.
E. Results of the Experiments
The pupe were exposed to unusual external condi-
tions: removed from the cocoon, exposed to direct sun-
light with and without a heat filter, to diffuse light, to
various temperatures ranging from 0° C. to 39° C., with
the stigmata covered with balsam, in horizontal and
vertical positions. Yet nearly as great a proportion
hatched as in the ease of the controls. Higher tempera-
tures hastened the rate of development. Further, the
pupe so abnormally treated did not differ in coloration
from the controls or to no extent that could be measured;
No. 534] INFLUENCE OF CHANGED CONDITIONS 367
this result applies to the pattern as well as to the in-
tensity of the coloration. For in the controls quite as
great a range of color variation was found as in the
others. Also the unusual conditions of life did not ap-
pear to effect the dimensions of the hatched moths. To
decide this I took as the most convenient measurement
the length of the fore wing, measured from its point of
insertion against the thorax to the most anterior edge
of a dark spot placed anteriorly near the apex of the
wing; I did not measure to the extreme free edge of
this wing, for that portion is very flexible and liable to
become folded during the process of mounting the moths.
The right wing was measured unless it happened to be
misshapen. Only about a hundred moths were pre-
served, too few for any statistical study of this wing
length, consequently in the following table only the ex-
tremes of variation of this length are given (expressed `
in millimeters, and accurate to within a half millimeter).
Lot 40 (1g, 59) control ¢ length 67.5 Ọ length 69.0-74.5
Lot 64 (23, 62) control ¢ length 61.0-65.0 2 length 61.0-75.5
Lot 68 (4g, 39) g length 58.0-64.0 2 length 64.0-73.0
Lot 69 (23) g length 66.0-67.0
Lot 79 (3g, 39) control & length 59.5-65.0 ? length 69.0-75.0
Tia 80 (7g, 79) g length 61.5-70.0 2 length 61.0-73.0
Lot 82 (34, 69) control & length 67.0-69.0 Ọ length 66.5-74.0
Lot 83 (124, 69) g length 60.0-68.5 2 length 67.0-73.0
Lot 84 (24, 49) 3 length 67.0-67.5 Q length 68.0-71.5
Lot 85 (124, 39) g length 63.0-69.0 9 length 65.5-73.0
It is probable that this late pupal stage is so advanced
in its development that it can not become much modified
by external changes.
Il. Thyridopteryx ephemereformis STEPH.
This psychid is the common ‘‘bag-worm”’ or ‘‘basket-
worm.’’ The larva immediately on hatching constructs
a bag or cocoon of silk covered with portions of leaves
or chips, and increases the size of the bag as it grows
and carries it about. At the end of the summer each at-
taches its bag firmly to the twig of a tree, and the male
368 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
emerges as a winged insect; probably the male does not
overwinter. But the female neither forsakes her bag
nor acquires wings, she is impregnated by the male
within her bag. Each female produces a large number
of small eggs but does not oviposit, for she dies within
her bag and her dead body becomes a case for the eggs;
at her death her viscera change into a soft cottony mass
that acts as a further protection for the eggs. Among
some 200 cocoons collected on November 24 I found
about half a dozen in which the egg case, the degenerate
female, was still living. This species is then a very fav-
orable insect for obtaining eggs and early embryos in
large abundance during the colder season of the year,
and should prove a valuable object for experimentation.’
The controls were kept within their cocoons out-of-
doors, and hatched in the end of May. In the experi-
“ments sometimes the eggs (in early embryonic stages)
were removed from the egg cases, sometimes kept in
them.
A. Experiments with Sunlight
Direct Sunlight.—Lot no. 77, collected January 4, con-
sisted of egg cases placed in closed dry bottles in the
south window of a warm room (21° C.). 77C, kept three
weeks in this sunlight, did not hatch; 77A, an untimed
period in sunlight, hatched. Lot 78, collected January
4, consisted of freed eggs in corked vials without mois-
ture, with similar exposure to the light; they were di-
vided into four lots, placed in the sunlight for 3, 7, 10
and 14 days respectively, and all hatched about March 1.
Direct Sunlight behind an Alum Heat Filter—Four
lots of freed eggs (nos. 51, 53, 49, 50) collected January
4 were used, placed in the sun behind a heat filter for 2,
7, 18 and 28 days, respectively, and all hatched in Jan-
uary.
“A good popular account of this species is given by McCook: ‘‘ Tenants
of an Old Farm,’’ New York, 1885, and this is illustrated with excellent
figures. But he makes the common mistake of other naturalists in sup-
posing that the female oviposits. See also Howard and Chittenden, circular
No. 97, U. S. Department’ of Agriculture, 1908.
No. 534] INFLUENCE OF CHANGED CONDITIONS 369
Diffuse Sunlight—A considerable number of lots of
egg cases and freed cocoons, collected November 4, were
placed in diffuse north light in a warm room (21° C.).
and all hatched in January and February.
B. Experiments with Colored Light
Freed eggs, collected November 4, were placed within
vials immersed in colored solutions within larger bottles,
the vial passing through the cork of the larger bottle
and held by it. The solutions employed were: acid
fuchsine in 50 per cent. and 70 per cent. alcohol; Berlin
blue in distilled water; safranine O in 95 per cent.
alcohol; orange G in 50 per cent. alcohol; eosine in 70
per cent. aleohol; methylen green in distilled water;
picric acid in 50 per cent. alcohol; scarlet 12 gm. in
1,000 c.c. water, this last giving monochromatic light.?
In Sunlight behind an Alum Filter, then removed to
diffuse light in a warm room (21° C.). Lots 43, 46, 47
were immersed in a scarlet solution, as follows:
Lot 43 in sunlight 4 days, hatched January 15.
Lot 46 in sunlight 28 days, hatched January 9.
Lot 47 in sunlight 32 days, hatched January 11.
In Diffuse North Light.—The following experiments
were made in a breeding room of which the temperature
was a few degrees above that out-of-doors. Two differ-
ent lots were raised in a fuchsine solution, one in saf-
ranine, one in orange G, one in eosine, one in picric acid.
All hatched in May.
Others were placed in a room at 21° ©. One series
were immersed in a fuchsine solution for 7, 18, 28, 35
days, respectively, then removed to ordinary daylight;
these hatched in the latter half of January and first half
of February. Others were kept continuously immersed
in the following solutions: Berlin blue, methyl green,
scarlet, and these hatched in the first part of February.
*Vide Pennington, W. E., 1897, ‘ʻA Chemico-physiological Study of
Spirogyra nitida,’* Publ. Univ. Penna. Contr. Bot. Lab. 1.
370 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
C. Experiments with High Temperatures
Freed eggs, from cocoons collected November 4, were
placed in an egg incubator at 39° C. for varying periods,
then removed to the dark of an ordinarily warmed room
(21° C.). Those kept in the incubator for periods of 1,
2, 3, 4, 5, 7 days hatched in February; those kept in the
incubator for eight and eleven days did not hatch.
Ten unopened cocoons and ten egg cases placed in a
dry covered slide box, and ten egg cases placed in a dry
closed jar, all at 32° C., did not hatch. Five egg cases
placed in a moist chamber at 28° C. hatched December
15 (these had been collected November 24). Four other
ege cases, treated like the last but with less moisture,
hatched in January.
D. Experiments with Low Temperatures
Six egg cases were placed out-of-doors in a closed tin
box, protected from the rain. They hatched, as was to
be anticipated, at the same time as the controls.
Fourteen egg cases were placed in a closed jar within
an ordinary refrigerator from November 24 until March
29, then removed to a warm room (21° C.); these also
hatched at the same time as the controls.
E. Results of the Experiments
I tried to raise the small hatched larve by placing
them upon arbor vite within a moist chamber; but owing
to the great time consumed in transferring them to fresh
pieces of the food plant, I was obliged to relinquish the
attempt, and they all died. Consequently I did not de-
termine whether those hatched under the abnormal con-
ditions differ from control larve of the same age.
The eggs of this species develop into larve under
direct sunlight with and without a heat filter, in diffuse
light, in all the colored lights employed, at a tempera-
ture of 39° C. provided it be not continued longer than
seven days, as well as at temperatures at and slightly
below freezing. But what seems to be a necessary con-
No. 534] INFLUENCE OF CHANGED CONDITIONS 371
dition for development is a certain amount of moisture,
for the insects die when subjected to higher tempera-
tures within dry vessels. The main effect of increase of
temperature seems to be to hasten the rate of develop-
ment. Probably it is the relative thickness of the
chorion of the eggs that proves their chief protection
under changed external conditions.
The experiments on this moth and on Attacus would
show that the cocoon can have no particular value by ex-
cluding the sunlight, for we have found that sunlight is
not injurious to the eggs and pupæ. Probably the main
value of an insect cocoon is that of protecting against
enemies, though it may also be of service in preserving
a proper amount of moisture; for cocoons soak up the
rain and melting snow, and would retain it for a con-
siderable while.
SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION
THE ONTOGENY OF A GENUS
In the systematic work of to-day there is noticeable a tendency
toward undue magnification of the importance of the smallest
units, the species, subspecies, varieties or whatever they are
called, to the great detriment of the larger and more important
units, the genera, families and higher groups. While there is a
very general agreement among systematists as to what consti-
tutes a species or a subspecies or variety, the concept of a genus
is found to vary widely; we have not yet brought ourselves to
see the necessity of bestowing that care upon the genera which
we use in the study of species and minor divisions. Yet after
all the genera and the families are the units of paramount impor-
tance, for they are the units with which the majority of workers
must eventually deal. Zoology has become such a vast field that
he who would occupy himself with species must of necessity re-
strict himself to a very small section of the animal kingdom.
t has therefore become essential for us to examine the char-
acteristics of natural genera, and to analyze them carefully in
order that we may discover certain general truths which will aid
us in determining what genera are logical and valid and what
are mere artificial aggregations, brought together solely for the
sake of convenience.
As commonly accepted, a genus is a group of species which is
separated from all other similar groups of species by some char-
acter common to all the component units, the latter being differ-
entiated inter se by the unequal development of the specific, or,
more accurately, intergenerie variables. In case a group of
species uniformly differs from another similar group in the
majority of the characters available for systematic purposes,
that group is properly considered a family or a subfamily.
Immediately upon its appearance, a genus (at this stage
merely a vigorous species) spreads in every direction just as far
as it is possible to maintain itself, that is, until it encounters on
every side insurmountable barriers. But the conditions found
throughout this habitable area are not uniform. This causes
many local races to develop, each grading insensibly into all
those surrounding it. Thus a genus in its infancy is in reality
a well-marked species, differentiated into many geographical
races. = ,
372
No. 534] NOTES AND LITERATURE BTO
These races do not long maintain themselves in their original
relationships. There is somewhere within the range of this
young genus, normally at or near the center, an area of optimum
conditions, where life is easy and there is no severe struggle for
existence. Here various more or less aberrant types arise and
are able to perpetuate themselves, spreading out in every direc-
tion as did the original stock, but never so far, as they are not so
well prepared to encounter adverse conditions. Thus in the
second stage a genus is in reality a well-marked species, differen-
tiated into many geographical races, and in the center of its
range being secompanied by several additional closely allied
species.
After the formation of these several supernumerary species,
each usually with a few races of its own, the genus soon reaches
maturity. Each of the numerous component forms increases in
numbers so that in its own little sphere the struggle for existence
becomes acute, and any variation from an arbitrary type is
unable to maintain itself. The forms occupying the limits of
the range of the genus as a whole (geographical or bathymet-
rical) are continually trying to colonize new territory, both from
their own initiative and as the result of pressure from behind.
This encounter with generically unfavorable conditions induces,
in the border forms, a more or less pathological condition, in-
ducing great individual variation ; and so we normally find that
the species which occupy the outer borders of the area inhabited
by the genus as a whole, just as in any species the individuals
from the edge of the area inhabited by it, are much more variable
than those from any other part.
If we take the species of any genus which has reached the
stage of maturity just described and arrange them according to
the proportionate value of their specific characters, we find in
the center a single species, or a group of closely allied species,
whose range is coterminal with that of the genus as a whole.
This species is, moreover, typically the most variable of any in
the genus, and probably is very close to the original stock.
The period of maturity being passed, senescence begins to.
assert itself. By long existence under fixed conditions the vari-
ous component species become, as it were, delicate, and are
unable to withstand any changes in their environment. Such
changes are, however, of constant occurrence, affecting greater or
lesser areas; and therefore discontinuance of distribution creeps
in, species being cut off from the main zoogeographie area inhab-
374 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
ited by the genus, one by one, by the extirpation of the inter-
mediate forms. It often happens, also, that changing ecological
conditions at the center of distribution of the genus, such as the
local development or introduction of predaceous forms, or of
external or internal parasites, destroys the typical form there,
leaving only aberrant types; or they may even obliterate all
traces of the genus.
Very old genera are thus characterized by having but few
species in widely separated localities, each widely different from
the others. These are usually (and rightly) regarded as repre-
senting a family composed of a few monotypic, or nearly mono-
typic, genera.
Very often old genera undergo what has aptly been termed an
‘‘explosion’’ of the intergenerie characters, and are then com-
posed wholly, or almost wholly, of curious and eccentric species;
again a genus in its senescence often is marked by a great devel-
opment of certain characters at the expense of others, which
usually leads to prompt extinction. In certain localities large
numbers of species are remarkable for their eccentric develop-
ment, and the exaggeration of certain characters out of all pro-
portion to the others, which, so far as we can see, serves no useful
purpose. Such localities from a zoological point of view must be
considered as old and to have persisted in their present state be-
yond the normal life cycle of the genera which have given rise to
the erratic species. Just as the life cycle of different animals
varies enormously, so does that of species and of genera. Scores
of genera belonging to the higher groups of the animal kingdom
may arise, grow strong, decline, and finally, with a grand ‘‘ex-
plosion’’ of their characters, disappear, before a genus belonging
to one of the lower groups, of earlier origin, has reached the
summit of its strength.
In discussing genera, as well as species, one must always keep
in mind that for all animals there are two, and for aquatic
animals three types of distribution, viz., (1) geographical, with
purely inorganic physical barriers; (2) ecological, with wholly
organic barriers, consisting of presence or absence of food and
-predaceous or parasitic enemies; and (3) bathymetric, again
with purely physical barriers of pressure and temperature, the
latter commonly being the more important with lower animals,
the former with the higher.
Austin HOBART CLARK.
U. S. NATIONAL Museum.
NOTES AND LITERATURE
RECENT CONTRIBUTIONS TO A KNOWLEDGE OF THE
EXTINCT AMPHIBIA
THE past few months have witnessed an unusual activity
among paleontologists in behalf of the extinct Amphibia. There
have been several rather extensive papers and an important
memoir on the group issued within the last twelve months. It is
to be hoped that many other investigators will come to be inter-
ested in this group of vertebrates, for it is only by descriptions
and discussions that we shall ever attain any adequate conception
of the relationships of these highly interesting and important
forms. The writer is of the opinion that the present conception
is capable of considerable improvement and in order to facilitate
this improvement he offers a review of the recent literature on
the group.
Dr. A. Smith Woodward (1) has described an interesting new
amphibian from the ‘‘ Oil Shale, at Airly, New South Wales.” Dr.
Woodward locates his form in the genus Bothriceps of Huxley.
The skull and greater part of the vertebral column with the ribs
and a portion of the right arm are preserved. It is described
as a new species under the name Bothriceps major, but as this
term had already been used by Lydekker for the reception of the
uncertain Petrophryne major of Owent it will be necessary for
the Australian specimen to receive a new name, for which the
term Bothriceps woodwardi would not be inappropriate. Dr.
Woodward allies the form with the Archegosauride, but the
reviewer is rather inclined to think that the Tuditanide would
be its nearer relatives. This is the third form described from
the Hawkesbury formation of New South Wales. Further
search will undoubtedly reveal other Paleozoic amphibia. It will
be noticed in this as in so many other Paleozoic localities where
fossil amphibia are found, that nearly every new specimen repre-
sents an unknown form, thus indicating the diversity and age of
the group. The known species from the Hawkesbury formation
are: Bothriceps australis Huxley, Bothriceps woodwardi and
Platyceps wilkinsoni Stephens.
Dr. S. W. Williston has described in some ken ne the
*Cat. Fossil Amphb. and Rept. Brit. Museum, Pt. IV, p.
375
376 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
remains of Dissorophus multicinctus Cope which has recently
been recovered from the reputed Permian of Texas. His
material greatly increases our knowledge of the genus and of the
anatomy of the Permian amphibia. He describes a complete
skull, in which, unfortunately, the sutures are not discernible.
Nor are the lateral line canals to be found, a fact to be regretted
since we shall undoubtedly be enabled to base considerable impor-
tance on these structures did they occur. The skull roof is pitted
like all other of the Permian amphibia from Texas. A large
portion of the carapace is described with its attached vertebre.
The dermal shield is broad, continuous and pitted, forming a
covering over the thoracic region of the animal. Limb bones, a
scapula and a portion of the interclavicle are described. The
form is closely related to another animal recently described by
Dr. Williston and the two are placed in the new family Dissoro-
phide. The paper closes with a taxonomic list of the Permian
amphibia from Texas for which paleontologists will be grateful.
There are three orders, nine families and thirty-four species so
far known in the fauna.
The same writer has described (3) a nearly complete skeleton
of a new temnospondylous amphibian from the Texas Permian.
The form is very remarkable in several of its characters. The
following are the chief unusual characters of the new genus: a
median unpaired rostral opening leading into a palatine vacuity,
greatly enlarged antorbital vacuities, temporal fenestre, appa-
rent absence of the parasphenoid bone, osseous carpus and tarsus
and the possession of short heavy ribs borne on transverse pro-
cesses. The skeleton is greatly similar to that of Eryops, but the
skull shows decided differences.
The temporal fenestra is not homologous to the superior
temporal fenestra of reptiles, but it is rather to be considered as a
greatly elongate and closed epiotic notch. The median unpaired
rostral opening is similar in structure to the one found in the
skull of Dasyceps bucklandi Lloyd from the Permian of Kenil-
worth, though in the present form the opening is much further
forward and smaller. The antorbital vacuities in the present
form, on the other hand, are much larger than the same openings
in Dasyceps.
Dr. Williston was able to make out the complete anatomy of
the skull and has figured it in three views. The most remarkable
feature of the palatal structure is the apparent absence of the
parasphenoid. The vertebral formula is 22 for the presacral
vertebræ, an uncertain number of caudals and a single sacral. The
No. 534] NOTES AND LITERATURE Sti
sacral rib is much like that of Eryops in which the structure
takes a very unusual form for a rib. The phalangeal formula
for the foot is 1, 2, 3, 4, 2. The complete number of digits in the
hand is not preserved. The carpus has nine possibly eleven
osseous elements, and the tarsus has twelve osseous elements.
he paper is well illustrated. There is a restoration of the
skeleton of Trematops milleri and an outline drawing of the
scapula of Eryops latus Case. The new genus Trematops is the
type of a new family Trematopsidæ in which the form described
by Cope as Acheloma cumminsi is doubtfully associated.
The same writer (4) has redescribed from more complete
material the species named by Cope as Diplocaulus limbatus from
the Permian of Texas. The paper is based on several more or
less incomplete skeletons. These include several additional
features to our knowledge of the anatomy of the peculiar Diplo-
caulidæ. Limbs have heretofore been unknown in the group
although their presence has been suspected from the presence of
pectoral girdles preserved with some specimens. Dr. Williston,
however, for the first time actually describes well-formed limb
bones for the group. The humerus is very remarkable in that
it has an epicondylar foramen, a character known in only one
other amphibian, Acheloma. The complete morphology of the
skull with the exception of some features of the palate are made
out and represented in two plates. The clavicular girdle, man-
dible, vertebre and limb bones are represented in other plates.
The paper coneludes with remarks concerning the relationship:
of the group to which Diplocalus belongs and associates the
Oklahoma Permian form Crossotelos with the Diplocaulus. He
remarks that in the Microsauria the capitulum of the rib is
always attached intercentrally and suggests that Diplocaulus
must be retained among the Microsauria.
The same writer (5) has given an extensive paper on new
Permian forms in which he describes a new genus and species of
amphibia under the name Cacops aspidephorus. This form he
locates in the family Dissorophide. The paper opens with a
rief discussion of the ‘‘Character of the Permian Beds of
Northern Texas,’’ ‘‘Conditions of Fossilization’’ and ‘‘ Asso-
ciated Vertebrates.” The form described in the paper is repre-
sented by a skeleton which is remarkably complete ‘‘with no
more plaster in its construction than was necessary to cement the
freshly broken parts . . . save of many of the phalanges. .. .””
It was so complete and well preserved as to be capable of being
mounted like a recent skeleton which has been well executed by
378 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
Mr. Paul Miller with remarkable success. A photograph of the
mounted skeleton is given in one of the plates.
There are four skulls. The most remarkable feature of the
dorsum is the presence of a closed otic notch which resembles a
temporal fenestra. In none of the skulls was it possible to
determine the sutures and the structure of the skull had to be
determined more by topographic features. The structure of the
palate is of the stegocephalian type, though remarkable in some
of its features, such as the large size of the palatal openings. The
vertebre were preserved practically complete and the vertebral
formula is—presacral, 21; sacral, 2; pygals, 6, and chevron
caudals, 15 or 16. Fifteen of the vertebral spines are elongated
and expanded and serve to support a carapace of shield-shaped,
seute-like plates which overlap shingle-like. They greatly
resemble in structure the dermal plates of Dissorophus. A dis-
cussion of the ‘‘carapace in allied forms’’ is given and the dermal
elements of Aspidosaurus, Zatrachys, Dissorophus are discussed.
Plates are suggested by the expanded neural spines of Euchiro-
saurus and Eryops.
The vertebral column is fully discussed. This includes some
unusual features, such as two sacral vertebrae and a well-pre-
served atlas which is composed of a single piece. The writer
discusses also the significance of the hypocentra and pleuro-
centra, one of the most perplexed questions in connection with
the extinct amphibia. The pectoral girdle consists of the fused
scapula-coracoid, a cleithrum, clavicles and interclavicle. The
humerus and its use in diagnosis is discussed at some length.
Among the material studied are many humeri, some of which
suggest unknown forms of amphibia. Two new families, the
Trematopside and Dissorophide, are proposed and the characters
given. The paper closes with a discussion of the restoration of
Cacops and the description of a peculiar form of reptile in which
the vertebre are intermediate between what is known in temno-
spondylous amphibia and reptilia.
The same writer (16) in a discussion of the faunal relations of
the early vertebrates, presented before Section E of the American
Association in 1909, gives the relations of the American Permian
and Carboniferous amphibian faunas with those known else-
where. He reaches the conclusion that the Permian fauna is
especially isolated. In his discussion of the Microsauria he says,
“Tt has been assumed on entirely insufficient evidence that they
too were all amphibians’’—and later: ‘“We may be assured that
some of them before the close of the Pennsylvanian were inhabit-
No. 534] NOTES AND LITERATURE 379
ants of high-and-dry land regions where fleetness of movement,
rather than obscurity, preserved them from their enemies,
crawling reptiles in everything save some insignificant technical
details of their palates.’? This has been recognized by many
students of the fossil amphibia and Gadow placed them in a new
group which he has called Proreptilia, but his classification does
not seem to have been accepted. Dr. Williston says further,
“Specialization of the microsaurs had reached the extraordinary
extent of snake-like limbless forms.’’ These snake-like forms
have been usually associated in another order, the Aistopoa, but
the reviewer has shown elsewhere that the group is a hetero-
geneous one and is made up of specialized microsaurian forms
of diverse relationships.
Dr. E. C. Case (6) has described three, perhaps four, new forms
of amphibia from the Permian of Texas. The forms as a whole are
very insufficiently described. One species, Trimerorhachis alleni
is described in ten lines and no figure given. This manner of
descriptions should be subjected to the severest criticism as it
imposes many heavy burdens on the shoulders of succeeding
workers. The new genus Tersomius is not defined at all. While
we may not doubt that the genus is new, judging from the single
outline figure, yet it would have been much better, for those who
are not so well acquainted with the Permian fauna as is Dr. Case,
had he given in what ways it differs from the other amphibia.
He allies the genus with Trimerorhachis at least so far as resem-
blances are concerned. The new genus and species are given in
fifteen lines of less than ten words each.
A new form, Gymnarthrus willoughbi, is much better
described. Its relations are uncertain. Dr. Broom allies it with
the amphibia, but Dr. Case does not regard the form as such. He
. remarks its close alliance with Cardiocephalus sternbergii, which
is amphibian. If @ymnarthrus is not amphibian it is certainly
a very remarkable amphibian-like reptile.
Dr. E. B. Branson (7) has described and figured, in an excel-
lent photograph, footprints of possible amphibians from the
Mississippian rocks of Giles Co., Virginia. Five well-preserved
tracks are represented in the figure. The author proposes the
new specifie name Dromopus aduncus and gives a list of the
amphibian footprints known from the Mississippian.
The most notable attempt on the part of paleontologists, to
elucidate an entire amphibian fauna, is that of Armand Thevenin
(8) in the most important memoir on fossil amphibia for many
months. The National Academy of France awarded him a prize
380 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou XLV
for the presentation of the memoir. The paper was published in
successive issues of the Annales de Paleontologie and in complete
form contains sixty-three quarto pages and nine photogravure
plates, illustrating all that is known of the Paleozoic amphibian
fauna of France up to the present.
The author divides the amphibian forms into four groups: the
Phyllospondyles, which is a subordinate group of the ‘‘Stegoce-
phales’’; the Temnospondyles; the Aistopodes, and the Micro-
saurians, which unfortunately he ranks in with the reptiles, and
describes under this heading a form which a few years ago he had
concluded was a rhynchocephalian. Dr. Williston was more
inclined to regard it as a Cotylosaurian. Whatever reptilian
group it belongs to the reviewer is unable to say, but he is quite
certain it is not a Microsaurian
Dr. Thevenin discusses, under the heading, Phyllospondyles,
the forms Protriton fayoli Thevenin, P. petrolei Gaudry, and
Pelosaurus laticeps Credner. The second group consists of
Actinodon brevis, A. frossardi and Euchirosaurus rochei. The
Aistopodes are represented by a single new form which is
unnamed. e specimen strikingly suggests the snake-like
amphibians of Ohio and Ireland. There are no true representa-
tives of the Microsauria known in France.
Our author discusses some general questions in regard to the
amphibia, such as—‘‘the relations of the Autun amphibia to those
of other countries,’’ ‘‘the homologies of the temnospondylous and
the phyllospondylous vertebre,’’ ‘‘homologies of the elements of
the pectoral girdle,” ‘‘the ancestry of the Stegocephalia” and
‘‘the descendants of the Permian Stegocephalia.”
Nothing new is added to our previous knowledge of the com-
plex relations of the elements of the temnospondylous vertebra,
which is one of the most vexed and most discussed questions in
connection with the extinct amphibia. His homologies of the
elements of the pectoral girdle are the ordinary interpretations.
The ancestors of the Stegocephalia are possibly the crossopte-
rygian fishes, although this is no new conclusion nor does our
writer claim this. Perhaps the crossopterygians will do as well
as anything. At least they will serve until we find what the real
ancestors were.
In a discussion on ‘‘the descendants of the Permian Stego-
cephala’’ he concludes that the branchiosaurian forms were the
ancestors of the modern Urodeles and that the Temnospondylia
gave rise to some of the reptiles, possibly some of the Cotylo-
sauria. Our author, on a later page, gives the stratigraphic dis-
No. 534] - NOTES AND LITERATURE 381
tribution of the amphibians and reptiles of the Permian of
France. His final conclusion is that the diversity of the reptiles
and amphibians shows that the groups had arisen long previously
and the existence of similar forms in Europe and America would
indicate some land connection of the two continents during the
Permian.
Dr. Friedrich von Huene has redescribed the skull of Dasyceps
bucklandi (Lloyd) (9) from the Permian of Kenilworth. This
skull was previously studied by Huxley, but rather inadequately
described. After a careful description of the elements of the
skull Dr. Huene locates the form in the family Melosauride,
although the form has characters which are unusual for the
other members of this group. He discusses the character and
significance of the ‘‘facialgrube’’ or internasal opening, which
has been described in another Permian form by Williston.
Huene finds the same opening occurs in many living urodeles
and lists nineteen species in which the opening has been described.
He says that it has also been observed in certain members of the
Permian Microsauria described by Fritsch from Bohemia. Its
Significance is possibly the same as in the living amphibia, that
of receiving the glandula intermaxillaris. Since this gland in
living land-dwelling amphibia secretes a sticky substance used
in capturing insects, Dr. Huene suggests that perhaps Dasyceps
also captured insects. This may, of course, have been possible,
but to the reviewer it suggests a greater activity than could be
expected of such a sluggish creature as Dasyceps undoubtedly
was, since it would require many insects to feed an animal three
or four feet long and it would be necessary to secure them in
some quantity. Dr. Huene suggests that the insects ‘‘im Perm
und Carbon sehr bedeutende Grössen erreichten’’; such was
undoubtedly the case with a few species, but the great majority
of insects of the Carboniferous and Permian do not greatly
exceed the modern insect fauna, so that Dr. Huene’s argument
on that score is not a good one. Dasyceps was probably a land
animal and Dr. Huene thinks this is indicated by the presence
of the internal opening which occurs only in the land-inhabiting
forms among recent Amphibia. Perhaps the analogy may be
carried so far.
Dr. R. Broom (10) compares the Permian amphibian fauna of
North America and Europe and finds little similarity. He
regards the American types as more highly developed. He
divides the Permian amphibia of North America into four
groups.
382° THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
He discusses again the relationship of Lysorophus and in his
discussion quotes the reviewer as saying what he did not say.
The point of the reviewer’s criticism of the reference of Lysoro-
phus to the Urodela was not the presence of ribs nor yet the
snake-like character which Dr. Broom explains in a very elemen-
tary way, but it was the character of the ribs. Their long, curved
condition is unknown among other Caudata and the reviewer
does not feel satisfied that Lysorophus is a Urodele even though
limbs should be discovered.
Dr. Broom suggests for the newly described Gymnarthrus of
Case an amphibian relationship. The dorsum of the skull shows
characters, however, which apparently ally it with Pariotichus.
Dr. Broom’s other essay (11) on practically the same subject
matter gives the additional suggestion that the American and
African amphibia are ‘‘two different modifications of the same
earlier fauna.’
Mr. Robert Dunlop (12) has given some interesting notes on
Carboniferous and other Paleozoic amphibia of Scotland con-
tained in the Kilmarnock Museum before they were destroyed
by fire. His notes are accompanied and illustrated by two excel-
lent half-tone plates of photographs of type specimens of
Loxomma, Pteroplax and Anthracosaurus, all of which is very
welcome information.
Jaekel (14) has proposed a new classification for the Chordata _
which he calls Vertebrata. He divides the ‘‘Stamm’”’ into three
subgroups Tetrapoda, Pisces and Tunicata, and makes no allow-
ance for amphioxus. He proposes two new classes of ‘‘Tetra-
poda,” Hemispondyla and Microsauria with the ordinary classes
Amphibia, Reptilia, Aves and Mammalia. The forms he groups
in his new class Hemispondyla are the branchiosaurs and a new
_ group which he calls Sclerocepholi. Dr. Jaekel has made several
bad blunders in this classification. The first one is to separate
the branchiosaurs from the Amphibia, to which they belong with-
out the slightest shadow of a doubt. The next one is the alliance
of Amphibamus to the Branchiosauride, to which it is not so
closely allied as it is to the Cotylosauria. Amphibamus is far
removed in structure from the Branchiosauride. His next
error is the inclusion of Acanthostoma in the same group with
the Branchiosauride. Their structures do not indicate relation-
ships at all.
His class Microsauria is wholly untenable, as Dr. Williston well
says (17). The group which we call Microsauria now will un- _
doubtedly require revision and it looks as if it were going to get
No. 534] NOTES AND LITERATURE 383
it, but that the animals now included in that group represent a
class distinct from all other vertebrates I, for one, will not for a
moment concede.
The fundamental error made by Dr. Jaekel, as the reviewer
sees it, is the attempt to base a classification of vertebrates on a
single character. This has always failed in the the past and
must, in the nature of the case, fail in the future; since classifica-
tion, if it is to mean anything, must take into consideration the
entire organization. The paper is full of many other smaller
errors, errors of knowledge and errors of judgment. One of
these errors is relating such widely distinct forms as Cerater-
peton and Diplocaulus.
The same author has given a study of the limbs of the oldest
vertebrates in which (15) he attempts to sustain his classification,
but his facts and arguments are not at all convincing and the
paper is little ‘more than a republication of parts of the essays
of other investigators.
Dr. Williston (17) has recently published another essay on
the Permian fauna of Texas in which he gives especially a study
of the vertebre and adopts the view of Cope as to the ultimate
fate of the elements of the rhachitomous vertebra. He regards
Eosauravus copei Will. (Eosauravus punctulatus (Cope)) as
allied to Hylonomus and for that reason ‘‘the oldest known
reptile’’ is a microsaur. Just what his reasons for this alliance
are he does not say. In the present imperfect state of our
knowledge of Hylonomus and its Canadian brothers such a refer-
ence would be very uncertain. In the last paragraph he records
the interesting discovery of limbs in Lysorophus.
A general review of the above essays shows that more than half
of them represent pioneer work, that is, descriptive and classifi-
catory investigations. Five of the essays bear more largely on
the faunal relations as exhibited by the Amphibia. One gives
us new light on the significance of a structure found in the
ancient forms. This is where work is greatly needed. ir
knowledge of the ancient amphibian fauna will increase as time
goes on but the greater part of the pioneer work is already done.
The way is now open for some good investigations on the struc-
ture of the ancient Amphibia and the meaning of these characters
as interpreted in the light of modern comparative anatomy and
embryology.
REFERENCES
1. Woodward, A. S. On a new Labyrinthodont from Oil Shale, at Airly,
New South Wales. Records of the Geological Survey of New South
Wales, Vol. VIII, Pt. IV, 1909, pp. 317-319, Plate LI.
384 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
2, a. S. W. Dissorophus, Cope. oe of Geology, Vol. XVIII,
No. 6, pp. 526-536, Plates I-III,
a Williston, E W. New or Little-known gane Vertebrates, Trematops,
: New bss Journal of Geology, Vol. XVII, No. 7, pp. 636-658,
909.
4. Williston, S. W. The Skull and Extremities of Diplocaulus. Transac-
tions of the oe Academy of Science, Vol. XXII, pp. 122-131,
Plates I-V, 1909.
5. Williston, S. W. Cacops, Desmospondylus, New Genera of Per
Vertebrates. Bulletin of ep Geological Society of America, Vol. a,
pp. 249-284, Plates 6-17, 1910.
6. Case, E. ©. ner ew or Little- ot epe and Amphibians from the
Permian (?) of Texas. Bulletin of the American Museum of Nat-
ural History, Vol. XXVIII, Actes XVII, pp. 163-181, Figs. 1-10,
910
¢ Beans, E. B. Amphibian Footprints from the Mississippian of Vir-
ginia. pana = Geology, Vol. XVIII, No. 4, pp. 356-358, 1 figure,
1910.
8. Thevenin, Armand. Les plus mt EPAM de ma Annales
Paleontologie. iam V, pp- Plates I-IX
9. EAS Friedrich von. Neubeschre P ie des pe mish ae
Dasyceps bucklandi (Lloyd) aus Kenilw nl yer logische und Pale-
ontologische Abhandlungen a geb E. Koken. Neue
Folge, Bd. VIII, Heft 6, pp. 325-337, Pls mi "XLIV-XLY, 1910.
10. Broom, R. A Comparison of A mech Reptiles of North America
with those of South Africa. Bulletin of the American Museum of
Natural History, Vol. XXVIII, Art. XX, pp. 197-234
m, R. On th
u
to those of other Parts of the Wor g Transactions of the Royal
Society of South Africa, Vol. I, Part 2, pp. 473—477.
12. CENE Robert. The Fossil Amphibia in the Kilmarnock Museum
,
13. Schönfeld, G. Bericht über einen neuen Stegocephale aus d
sichischen Rothliegenden und a entwickelungsgeschicht. Stellgang
er Stegocephalen. Isis, Dres PP-, F
14. Jk Otto. Ueber die Klassen "Ge Tetrapoden. Zoologischer An-
r, Band XXXI . 7/8, pp.
15. Tail. fo Ueber die ältesten Gliedm n Tetrapoden, ae
ungsberichte des Gesellschaft Natw SE Freunde zu Ber
No. 10, pp. 587-615, with 20 figures, 1909.
16. Williston, S. W. The Faunal Relations of the Early Vertebrates. Jour-
nal oF Geology, Vol. XVII, No. 5, pp. 389-402, 1 figure. Published
also in ‘‘Outlines of Geologie WAA: Willis and Salisbury, PP-
163-175.
17. Williston, S. W. New Permian Reptiles: Rachitomous Vertebræ. Jour-
nal of Geology, Vol. XVIII, No. 7, pp. 585-600, 1910.
Roy L. MOODIE.
UNIVERSITY OF eee
The American Journal of Science
Established by Benjamin Silliman in 1818
The Leading Scientific Journal in the United States
Devoted to the Physical and Natural Sciences, with special reference to
Physics, and Chemistry on the one hand, and to Geology and Mineralogy
on the other.
ins, Editor: EDWARD S. DANA.
es Editors: Professor GEORGE L. GOODALE, JOHN TROWBR nnar, W. G. FARLOW and WM. M. DAVIS
yn eg e; rnas sors A. E. RILL, HENRY S. WILL S and L. V. PIRSSON, of New
; Professor 0. F. BARKER, of Philrdelphia ; promeaer JOSEPH S. AIMES,
e imore; MR. J. S. DILLER, of Washington.
Two volumes annually, in monthly numbers of about 80 pages each.
This Journal ended its first series of 50 volumes as a quarterly in 1845; its second
series of 50 volumes as a two-monthly in 1870; ge its third series as a monthly ended Dec-
ember, 1895. A Fourth Series commenced in 1
Subscription price, $6 per year or 50 cents a BEET postage prepaid in the United States ;
$6.25 to Canada ; $6,40 to Countries in the Postal Union. Back numbers at reduced prices.
s&@Ten-Volume Indexes, Vols. I-X XI-XX, fourth series, price one dollar. Address
The American Journal of Science
New Haven, Conn.
SECOND EDITION, NOVEMBER, 1910
AMERICAN MEN OF SCIENCE
A BIOGRAPHICAL DIRECTORY
EDITED BY J. McKEEN CATTELL
A Biograph
iphical d Sen requires revision if it isto maintain its usefulness. owen pi of the names in the
cena edition are new á hie mata which a Babe in the ge division have in revised. The
Chaat of work required i o ore re the revision has been as great as that given to the free ‘dion. There has been no
: : ni scope t
: - s
eet sciences, and for this — a fos — included in the first edition have been omited. Efforts st been exerted to
as com ssi men will not
ethods that wer R
e, and stars sane been added to the #1 subjects of research in the case pi 269 new men who
iene al pl plases on. on the li list. pa The editor’ s object in selecting this group of scientific men has been to make a study of
— which scientific research depends and so far as may be to improve these conditions. ‘There are printed in
appendiz the two statistical studies that have been made. — From the Preface to the Second Edition.
The seeond edi 5
Te; ition $ the Directory extends to more than 600 pages and contains more than 5500 sketches.
ks well Printed on all rag paper ae bound in buckram with leather label. ae, the work has been
sed in size by more than 50 per cent., it is roid at the same price as the first edition
Price: Five Doliars, net, Postage paid
THE SCIENCE PRESS
GARRISON, N. Y. LANCASTER, PA.
SUB-STATION 84, NEW YORK CITY.
The American Naturalist
A Monthly Journal, established in 1867, “tired to the A
with Special Reference to th
dvancement of the a Sciences
of Organic Evolution and Heredity
CONTENTS OF THE DECEMBER NUMBER
aap i = = Pigmentation in Man. GERTRUDE C.
and CHARLES B. DAVENPORT.
Spawn aa: Larva of coma Jeffersonianum. Pro-
fessor W. H., PIER:
The Inheritance of Sizes a Shapesin Plants, Professor
R. A. EMERSON,
Shorter Articles and Discussion : The Modification of
rome erat ee cae aa External Conditions.
Notes and Literature: Heredity, Dr. W. J. SPILLMAN.
Index to Volume XLIV.,
CONTENTS OF THE JANUARY NUMBER
Somatic Alteration: Its Origination and Inheritance,
Dr. D. T. MacDougat.
The Nature of ones ers Professor DOUGLAS
Ho
UGHTON CAM
A Double Hen’s Egg. Dr. J. THOMAS PATTERSON.
Notes and Literature: Heredity, Dr. W. J. SPILLMAN,
CONTENTS OF THE FEBRUARY NUMBER
The Application of the ne — of Pure Lines to Sex
Limited Inheritan Sexual Dimorphism,
Professor T. H. reed
igs sort in ah ye yg a ofa Genetics in Lower Organisms.
Siac’ cach of Temperature acca Growing Mice, and
soars Seago o — Effecis in a Subsequent Gen-
Dr. Francis B. SuMN
The Mendelian 1 Ratio aF Blended Inheritance. SHINK-
A Solf.
Diis on ths ERAN Conspicuousness of Barred
colored Fowls. Dr. RAYMOND PEARL.
Some Caia — the eee ic Fu
tion in Marine Organism fA ~ MeDants ore:
stage 9 — s goi “Diseuani on: Oom mating Pos ger
on in Cases w metrica 1" Ty abl
monly used. Professor H. 8. JENNIN ‘gether:
CONTENTS OF THE MARCH NUMBER
The Gen mony Be ae aps of Heredity. Professor
W. Jon
The Pcie See Hypothesis and Hybridization. Pro-
E. M. East.
Notes on — and spre
EALEY D
Notes and Literature: Mimicry, Dr. Frank E. LUTZ.
Dr. WILLIAM
A
CONTENTS OF THE APRIL NUMBER
Genetical Studies on Oenothera. I. Dr. BRADLEY
Moore Davis.
The Genotypes of Maize. Dr. GEORGE HARRISON
HULL,
Notes and Literature: Is the Female Frog Heterozy-
gow
s in regard to Sex Determination ? Professor T.
H. Morean, The Mutation Theory, Dr. R. RB.
TES,
ENTS OF THE MAY NUMBER
The Inheritance of Polymorphism = = in Colias
hilodice. Professor JOHN H. GEROULD.
‘cae and Cytoplasm in Her aes Professor
MICHAEL F. GUYER. ¢the Phowr
A eee Study of the Structure 0 the Pho
enic Organs of “certain Anes can Lampr" rida.
ee McDermotr and C G. CRAN aban
Bhorter 4 Articles and iga g awa
yo we Benoa i in the English Sparrow-
etrics, Yule’s Introdue-
Notes and aiea: Biom Dr RAYMOND
LAS Theory of Statistics.
Single Number 35 Cents
The NATURALIST will be sent t
OO O
Yearly Sina $4.00
sh
THE SCIENCE PRESS
Sub-Station 84: NEW YO
i ea E
four months f iU: One
, Pa
VOL. XLV, NO. 535 i JULY, 1911.
THE
AMERICAN
NATURALIST
A MONTHLY JOURNAL
Devoted to the Advancement of the Biological Sciences with
Special Reference to the Factors of Evolution
CONTENTS
Pag
Germ-cell Determinants and Their Significance. Professor R. W. HEGNER - 385
em
II. Further Observations on the Pose of the Sauropodous Dinosaurs. OLIVER P.
We a ee ee ee ee
HI. Shorter Articles and Correspondence: Computation of the Coefficient of Cor-
relation. Professor H. a JENNINGS. Note on Batrachoseps attenuatus
Esch. Dr. C. V. BURK - - = « - - < - 413
IV. Notes and Literature: Some Recent Studies on m and Correlation in
Agricultural Plants: Dr. RAYMOND PEAR On Sex-chromosomes in
Hermaphroditism : Professor W. E. CASTLE. aa on Ichthyology : Presi-
dent DAVID STARR JORDAN. Some Recent zew on er Plants: Pro-
fessor DOUGLAS HOUGHTON CAMPBELL - -415
THE SCIENCE PRESS
LANOASTER, PA. GARRISON, N. Y.
NEW YORK: SUB-STATION 84
e American Naturalist
MSS. intended for publication and books, etc., intended for review ee be
sent to the sages THE AMERICAN NATURALIST, Garrison-on-Hudson, New York.
research work bearing on = presna of organi evolu-
tion are especially welcome, and will be given preference in publicati
_ One hundrea reprints of contributions are coal te authors free of charge.
Further reprints will be supplied at cost.
~ Subscriptions and advertisements —_— be sent to the publishers. The
subscription price is four dollars a year. reign postage is fifty cents and
Canadian postage t -five cents Jaitional.. "The charge for single copies is
thirty-five cents. The rtising rates are Four Dollars for a page.
= THE SCIENCE PRESS |
- Pa. Se Garrison, N. Y.
NEW YORK: Sub-Station 84 Bae
pepe A EE : : pril 2, 1908 ter, Pa., under the Act ot
ao s s = prae 1879.
TENTH EDITION.
THE MICROSCOPE,
THE
AMERICAN NATURALIST
VoL. XLV July, 1911 No. 535
GERM-CELL DETERMINANTS AND THEIR
SIGNIFICANCE!
PROFESSOR R. W. HEGNER
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN
Investications of the origin of the germ cells in a num-
ber of animals have brought forth certain phenomena
which indicate that these cells are determined as such at
a very early period in embryonic development, and that
im some cases the material which apparently determines
the germ cells is visible at this time. Conclusions can
be drawn from these observations which are of consider-
able interest.
The frequently repeated statement that the germ cells
are derived from the mesoderm or from the entoderm
1s of course erroneous in those instances where the germ
cells can be identified before the formation of the germ
layers, and it seems probable that the primary cell differ-
entiation, i. e., the separation of the germ cells from the
Somatic cells, takes place at an early period in the em-
bryonie development of even those animals where this
has not been actually observed. A few of the most pro-
nounced cases of the early differentiation of germ cells
are briefly described in the following paragraphs and
Several general conclusions arrived at from this evidence.
The best known example is Ascaris, as described by
* Contributions from the Zoological Laboratory of the University of
Michigan, No. 135. From a paper read before the Research Club of the
University of Michigan, November 9, 1910.
385
386 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
Boveri (792). The first cleavage division of the egg of
Ascaris results in two daughter cells, each containing two
long chromosomes (Fig. 1, 4). In the second division
the chromosomes of one cell divide normally and each
daughter cell receives one half of each (Fig. 1, B, s).
The chromosomes of the other cell behave differently ;
the thin middle portion of each breaks up into granules
matin in
A, two-cell
stage dividing; s, stem-cell, from which arise the germ cells. B, the same from
the side, later in the second cleavage, showing the two types of mitosis and the
casting out of chromatin (c) in the somatic cell. ©, resulting four-cell stage;
the eliminated chromatin at ¢. D, the third cleavage, repeating the foregoing
process in the two upper cells.
(Fig. 1, A) which split, half going to each daughter cell,
but the swollen ends (Fig. 1, B, c) are cast off into the
cytoplasm. In the four-cell stage there are consequently
two cells with the full amount of chromatin and two with
a reduced amount. This inequality in the amount of
chromatin results in different sized nuclei (Fig. 1, C);
those with entire chromosomes (s) are larger than those
that have lost the swollen ends (c). In the third division
No. 535] GERM-CELL DETERMINANTS 387
one of the two cells with the two entire chromosomes
loses the swollen ends of each; the other (Fig. 1, D, s)
retains its chromosomes intact. A similar reduction in
the amount of chromatin takes place in the fourth and
fifth divisions and then ceases. The single cell in the
thirty-two-cell stage which contains the full amount of
chromatin has a larger nucleus than the other thirty-one
cells and gives rise to all of the germ cell, whereas the
other cells are for the production of somatic cells only.
The primordial germ cell of Ascaris, therefore, con-
tains two entire chromosomes; every other cell possesses
two chromosomes which have lost part of their substance.
In other words, the germ cells possess a certain amount
of chromatic material not present in the somatic cells.
There is also an early differentiation of the germ cells
in the fresh water crustacean, Cyclops (Haecker, ’97).
According to Haecker, ‘‘Aussenkérnchen”’ arise at one
pole of the first cleavage spindle (Fig. 2, A, ak); these
A
Fig. 2. Origin of the primordial germ cell in Cyclops. (From Haecker.)
A, the first cleavage division, showing the “ Aussenkérnchen” (ak) at one pole
of the spindle. B, the thirty-two-cell stage; the primordial germ cell (Kz) con-
tains all of the “ Aussenkérnchen ” (ak)
are derived from disintegrated nucleolar material and
are attracted to one pole of the spindle by a dissimilar
Influence of the centrosomes. During the first four cleav-
age divisions the granules are segregated always in one
cell (Fig. 2, B, kg); at the end of the fourth division these
‘‘Aussenkérnehen’’ disappear, but the cell which con-
-tained them ean be traced by its delayed mitotic phase
and is shown to be the primordial germ cell.
In this ease, as in that of Ascaris, the primordial germ
cell and the germ cells derived from it possess certain
nuclear materials not present in the somatie cells. The
388 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
latter seem to be limited because of their absence to the
performance of vegetative functions, and the germ cells
appear to have the power of reproduction because of
their presence.
A recent paper by Elpatiewsky (1909) deals with the
early embryonic development of the arrow worm, Sag-
itta. This investigator finds that, at the stage when the
two pronuclei are in the center of the egg, a body appears
at the vegetative pole lying near the periphery (Fig. 3,
Fic. 3. Origin of the primordial germ cells in Sagitta. (From Elpatiewsky. )
A, egg with conjugating pronuclei; polar bodies (I Rk. and II Rk.) and “ beson
derer körper” (æ) embedded in cytoplasm. B, thirty-two-cell stage; the jt
mordial germ cell (G) contains the “besonderer vo et eye estas cell
t
it is also dividing e Epei cell has already divided (E). D, two germ
cells (G) resulting from the first division of the primordial germ cell; each con-
tains part of the “ besonderer soning (@)..
A). This body, which is termed ‘‘besondere körper,”
consists of coarse granules which do not stain quite so
deeply as the chromosomes. During the first four cleav-
age divisions the ‘‘besondere kérper’’ does not divide,
but is always to be found in one blastomere. In the
fourth division the blastomere which contains this body
divides unequally; the larger cell is destined to produce
the entoderm (Fig. 3, B, E); the smaller cell, which con-
No. 535] GERM-CELL DETERMINANTS 389
tains the ‘‘besondere kérper’’ is the primordial germ
cell (Fig. 3, B, G). The first division of this primordial
germ cell (Fig. 3, C) results in two daughter cells, one of
which obtains a larger portion of the ‘‘besondere kör-
per’’ (X) than the other (Fig.3,D). This is interpreted
as the differential division, the cell which possesses the
larger amount of the divided ‘‘besondere kérper’’ giv-
ing rise to the male germ cells, the other to the female
germ cells in the hermaphroditic adult. The ‘‘beson-
dere kérper’’ now gradually becomes paler and finally
disappears. Buchner (710) and Stevens (’10) have con-
firmed Elpatiewsky’s observations. The origin of the
‘‘besondere kérper’’ was not determined.
of the egg. B, an egg containing a number of cleavage nuclei. ©, the cells
which come under the influence of the nucleolus (N) become the primordial germ
cells (G)
.
These investigations show the germ cells of Sagitta to
be similar to those of Ascaris and Cyclops in that they
contain a darkly staining material not present in the
Somatie cells.
In Oophthora and other parasitic hymenoptera, Syl-
vestri (’09) finds that the nucleolus of the germinal
vesicle passes to the posterior end of the egg during
maturation (Fig. 4, A). Here it remains until the cleay-
age nuclei reach the periphery (Fig. 4, B). The cells
which then come under the influence of the nucleolus be-
390 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
come the primordial germ cells (Fig. 4, C, G) and give
rise to the germ glands of the adult. The similarity
between this process and that described for Ascaris, Cy-
clops and Sagitta is obvious.
Finally in chrysomelid beetles the primordial germ
cells are differentiated at a very early period (Hegner,
09). At the posterior end of the eggs of Calligrapha
multipunctata and allied species there is a disc-shaped
mass of granules which stain like chromatin. I have
called this the pole dise
(Fig. 5, A, gc. d). When
thecleavagenucleireach
the periphery of the egg
they fuse with the super-
ficial layer of cytoplasm
everywhere except at
the posterior end; cell
walls then appear and a
blastoderm is formed.
---gn When the cleavage nu-
clei which reach the pos-
__khpt terior end of the egg en-
counter the pole disc
y. granules they gather
these granules about
~m them and continue their
migration (Fig. 5, B,
gc); cell walls are
formed, and they finally
come to lie entirely out-
side of the egg (Fig. 5,
C, gc).
There are sixteen cells
ged. which separate from the
P egg in this manner, and
: bie they take out of the egg
with them practically all of the pole dise granules (Fig.
5, C, pd.g). These sixteen cells divide to form thirty-two ;
in- this division apparently one half of the granules con-
tained in each cell pass to each of the daughter cells (Fig.
No. 535] GERM-CELL DETERMINANTS 391
5, D, pd.g). A second division results in sixty-four cells;
this number is constant until a late stage in embryonic
development.
These sixty-four cells have been traced through the
early embryonic stages. First they migrate back into
the egg through a ‘‘pole cell canal” (Fig. 5, C, pe) sit-
Fic. 6. Origin of the primordial germ cells in chrysomelid beetles. A, longi-
tudinal section through a freshly laid egg of Call.grapha bigsbyana, showing
pole (ge.d) at posteri longitudinal section through the pos erior
end of ultipunctata eighteen hours after deposition in e
disc granules within the primordial ge ge). O, udinal section
i i lon:
through the posterior end of an egg of C. bigsbyana twenty-four hours after depo-
Sition, ion the primordial germ cells containing pole dise rennin (pd.g).
D, a mordial germ cell of C. multipunctata in anaphase of mitosis E p=
disc pes a (pd.g) are apparently equally ae ae at either end.
germ cells (gc) and neighboring mesoderm cells (m) and ectoderm cells a son
an embryo of Ọ. multipunctata. F, longitudinal ae ih rough an egg of Lep-
tinotarsa decemlineata twenty-four hours after the posterior er had been killed
with a hot needle, any preventing the pole disc granules (pd.g) from taking
part in the developmen No germ cells are formed sensi AR with C). bl=
blastoderm ; vita spea cell; ge =germ cell; ge.d=germ cell So
gn = conjugating pronuclei ; khbl = keimhautblastem ; m = mesoderm p=
posterior end of egg; pbl = pseudoblastodermic seers p.c = pole oat fae
pd.g = pole disc granules; vm =vitelline membrane; y= yolk.
392 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von. XLV
uated near the posterior end of the ventral groove. Then
they separate into two apparently equal groups, one on
either side of the embryo, which are soon recognizable as
the two germ glands.
Because only those cells which gather in the pole dise
‘granules become germ cells, I have called these granules
‘‘germ cell determinants’’ (Hegner, ’08). This term has
been objected to by Wieman (710) because ‘‘the term im-
plies the attribute of certain potentialities that these
granules have not been shown to possess’’ (p. 180). The
morphological evidence is, I believe, strong enough to
warrant the use of the term; recent experiments, how-
ever, add to the convincing facts already published
(Hegner, ’08, 09). It is possible to show that if the pole
disc is prevented from taking part in the development
of the egg, no germ cells will be produced. Attempts to
extract the pole dise by means of pricking the freshly laid
egg and allowing them to flow out were only partially
successful (Hegner, ’08). A new method was later em-
ployed which absolutely prevented the cleavage nuclei
from encountering the pole disc. In these experiments
the posterior end of the egg was touched with a hot needle
and that portion containing the pole dise was killed. In
every instance the development continued and in the eggs
so far examined the blastoderm formed normally over
all of the surface except at the posterior end; here it was
built at the end of the living substance as shown in Fig.
5, F, bl. No germ cells were produced. I conclude from
this that the pole dise granules are necessary for the
formation of germ cells, and that they are really ‘‘germ
cell determinants.’’ Of course it might be argued that
some other substance lying at the posterior end of the
egg is responsible for the differentiation of the germ
cells, but this seems highly improbable. Wieman
(710) states that in Leptinotarsa signaticollis, a
species I have not studied, ‘‘the granules are not all
taken up by the cells in their migration and the greater
part of them remains behind after the cells have passed
through’’ (p. 186). This is certainly not the case in the
many eggs that I have examined, and a reexamination
No. 535] GERM-CELL DETERMINANTS 393
shows that only a few of the pole dise granules remain
in the egg after the germ cells are formed, as was clearly
pointed out in a former paper (Hegner, ’09, Plate II,
Fig. 16).
The origin of the pole dise granules is not known. It
seemed to me probable that they came from the nucleus
of the egg just before maturation and consisted of nuclear
material. This conclusion was reached (1) because these
granules stain like chromatin, (2) because in many insects
the nucleus of the oogonium casts out chromatic material
(Nebenkerne), and (3) because the substance which deter-
mines the germ cells in Ascaris, Cyclops and Oophthora
is of nuclear origin, and in one case (Ascaris) is chro-
matin. Wieman believes that ‘‘the granules of the pole
dise consist of particles derived from the food stream of
the ovum that form an accumulation in the protoplasm in
its posterior part’’ (p.187). This possibility was pointed
out in a former paper (Hegner, 09, p. 274), a fact Wie-
man seems to have overlooked. It was also suggested
in the same place that if the granules are derived from
the nurse cells they probably come from the nuclei of
these cells. The pole disc granules gradually disappear
after the germ cells are formed.
It may be of interest to mention the results of opera-
tions performed upon eggs in which the germ cells had
already differentiated at the posterior end (Fig. 5, C).
Such eggs, when touched with a hot needle, continued to
develop, and produced embryos and larve without germ
glands. This I believe is the earliest stage on record on
which surgical castration has been performed.
The visible presence of germ cell determinants in the
primordial germ cells of the animals described above sug-
gests two possibilities as to their importance: (1) They
may represent idiochromatin, i. e., germ plasm, or (2)
they may influence the metabolism of the cells and thus
determine their character.
1. The history of the germ cells in chrysomelid beetles
illustrates in a remarkable way the theory of germinal
continuity as expressed by Weismann (’04). Weismann
believes with Niigeli that ‘‘there are two great categories
a
394 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
of living substance—hereditary substance or idioplasm,
and ‘nutritive substance’ or trophoplasm, and that the
former is much smaller in amount than the latter’’ ( Weis-
mann, 704, Vol. I, p. 341). The idioplasm of the germ
cells he calls germ plasm, a substance which is ‘‘never
formed de novo, but it grows and increases ceaselessly ;
it is handed on from one generation to another like a long
root creeping through the earth, from which at regular
distances shoots grow up and become plants, the indi-
viduals of the successive generations” (Vol. I, p. 416).
‘This splitting up of the substance of the ovum into a
somatic half, which directs the development of the indi-
vidual, and a propagative half which reaches the germ
cells and there remains inactive, and later gives rise to
the succeeding generation, constitutes the theory of the
continuity of the germ plasm (Vol. I, p. 411). Accord-
ing to this theory, the body or somatic cells serve only to
protect, nourish and transport the germ cells which con-
tain the germplasm. Later the germ cells separate from
the body and develop into new individuals and the body
subsequently dies.
In the eggs of chrysomelid beetles the germ cells are
- formed at an extremely early period in embryonic devel-
opment. They separate entirely from the embryo and
come to lie in a group at the posterior end; at this time
germ cells are quite distinct from somatic cells. Later
the germ cells migrate back into the embryo, where they
are protected, nourished and transported until they be-
come mature, leave the body and give rise to a new gen-
eration.
What particular part of the germ cell represents the
idioplasm or germ plasm? is a question of fundamental
importance. Weismann recognizes the chromosomes as
the germ plasm and has built up a complex theory as to
the constituents of these bodies. The present discussion
is not concerned in any way with the structure of the
germ plasm as conceived by Weismann, and the writer
does not wish to become involved in a consideration of
idants, ids, determinants and biophores. The theory of
dichromaticity (Dobell, 09) may aid in answering this
No. 535] GERM-CELL DETERMINANTS 395
question. This theory holds that the chromatin of the
germ cells is of two kinds—(1) idiochromatin, which is
for reproductive purposes, and (2) trophochromatin
which performs vegetative functions. In many Protozoa
these two kinds of chromatin are separate throughout
the life cycle. For example, in Paramecium the micro-
nucleus is thought to represent the idiochromatin, the
macronucleus, the trophochromatin (Calkins, ’09). Dur-
ing conjugation and the subsequent reorganization of the
nuclear apparatus the macronucleus breaks down and
disappears, whereas the micronucleus gives rise not only
to new bodies like itself, but also to new macronuclei.
In most animals idiochromatin and trophochromatin
are supposed to be contained in one nucleus and are in-
distinguishable except in a few cases during the differ-
entiation of the germ cells at an early developmental
period of the egg. One is tempted to interpret as idio-
chromatin (1) that part of the chromosomes of Ascaris
which is lost by the somatic cells (Fig. 1, B,c) but retained
by the germ cells, (2) the nuclear material which is pres-
ent in the primordial germ cell of Cyclops (Fig. 2, B, ak)
but is absent from the somatic cells, (3) the similar sub- |
stance in the primordial germ cells of Oophthora (Fig.
4, n), (4) the ‘‘besondere kérper’’ in the egg of Sagitta
(Fig. 3, x), and (5) the pole dise in the eggs of chryso-
melid beetles (Fig. 5, A, ge.d).
One difference between these substances and the germ
plasm as Weismann conceives it should be pointed out.
In the cases cited above the material interpreted as germ
plasm is only in one instance chromatin, and in this
animal (Ascaris) it does not constitute the entire chro-
matin as Weismann’s theory demands. If these extra
nuclear bodies really represent the iodioplasm our loca-
tion of the germ plasm must be transferred from the
chromosomes to this material.
2. The second theory mentioned above, namely, that
the extra material possessed by the germ cells determines
these as such because of some fundamental principle of
metabolism, seems more plausible than the theory just
outlined. It is worthy of note that the primordial germ
396 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
cells of several animals belonging to widely separated
groups are supplied with extra nutritive material. This
is true in the Diptera, Chironomus (Weismann, ’63) and
Simula (Metschnikoff, ’66), in the Lepidopteron, Endro-
mis (Schwangart, ’05), in the Elasmobranchs (Beard,
702), in the Teleosts (Eigenman, ’92), in the Amphibia
(Nussbaum, ’80), and in the Reptilia (Allen, ’06).
It has already been pointed out (Hegner, ’09) that the
pole dise granules may be nutritive material. ‘‘That the
pole-cells need special means of nourishment is doubtless
the case, for contrary to the condition in the blastoderm
cells, they are at an early period entirely separated from
the yolk, and later use up energy in their migration” (p.
275). If this is true, and as Wieman (710) claims, the
pole dise granules are derived from the yolk stream, our
germ cell determinant hypothesis is not weakened, but
gains a distinct argument in its favor.
It is interesting to note in this connection that two of
the foremost investigators of the relation of the acces-
sory chromosomes to sex determination are inclined to
believe in the quantitative hypothesis, i. e., that the egg
which is fertilized by the spermatozoon containing the
accessory develops into a female because there is more
chromatin present, and that this plus amount influences
the metabolism of the cell and its descendants (Wilson,
"10; Morgan, 710). This hypothesis suggests the theory
of sex advocated by Geddes and Thomson (’89), that
‘‘the female is the outcome and expression of prepon-
derant anabolism, and in contrast the male of prepon-
derant katabolism” (p. 132). In Sagitta (Elpatiewsky,
’09), however, it is the male primordial germ cell and not
the female that acquires the larger part of the ‘‘beson-
dere körper.”
Although neither of the two possibilities advanced in
the foregoing pages may be correct, nevertheless it seems
certain that the peculiar bodies in the primordial germ
cells of the animals described above should be named
‘‘germ cell determinants.” In any event, the attention
of investigators ought to be directed toward the problem
of discovering the origin and complete history of these
No. 535] GERM-CELL DETERMINANTS 397
bodies, since their bearing upon theories of heredity is of
fundamental importance.
LITERATURE
Allen, B. M., 1906. The Origin of the Sex-Cells of Chrysemys. Anat.
.„ 1902. The Germ Cells. Part I. Raja Batis. Zool. Jahrb.,
16
Boveri, T., 1892. Die Entstehung des Gegensatzes zwischen den Geschlechts
zellen und den somatischen Zellen bei Ascaris megalocephale. Sitz.
- Morph, Physiol. München, Bd. 8.
eae, P., 1910. Keimbahn und Orogeno von Sagitta. Anat. Anz.,
. 35,
Calkins, G. N., 1909. Protozoology. Philadelphia.
Dobell, C. C., 1909, Chromidia and the Binuclearity Hypothesis: a Review
and a Criticiam. Quart. Tous Micr. Sc., Vo
2. On
Bigenan, C., 1892. the Precocious Segregation of the Sex-Cells of
icrometus aggregatus. Journ. Morph.,
Blpatiswicy, W., 1909. Die Recor naieh anc Er bei Sagitta. Anat.
35.
NZ., f
Geddes, P., and Thomso , J. A., 1889. The Zvolaution of Sex. London.
Haecker, V., 1897. Die ALEE von Cyclops. Arch. Mikr. Anat.,
Bd. 49
Hegner, R. W., 1908. The Effects of Removing the Germ Cell Determi-
nants from the Boyt of Some Chrysomelid Beetles. Biol. Bull., Vol. 16.
he R. W., 1909. The Origin and rhs History of the Germ Cells
in some Pon is cD ourn. Morph., Vol. 20.
Matson E., pi Rinlinviliipiedhé <a an Insekten. Zeit. fe
wiss. PR Bd.
?
Morgan, T. H., sey aa AS and Heredity. American Naturalist,
Vol.
Nussbaum, Zi 1880. Zur Differenzirung des Geschlechts im Thierreich.
h 18.
3
Be’
3
h
z
mS
ch, :
Schwangart, F., 1905. Zur Entwicklungsgeschichte der Lepidopteren.
i . 26.
Silvestri, F., 1908. Contribuzioni alla conoscenza biologica degli Imenot-
teri Parassiti. Boll. Lab. zool. gen. e agraria. Portici, Vol. 3.
Stevens, N. M., 1910. bby ge Studies on Reproduction in Sagitta.
ourn. Morph., Vol
Weismann, A., 1863. a P der Dipteren im Ei. Zeit. f. wiss.
13.
ool., Bd.
Niola, A., 1904. The Evolution Theory. 2 vols. London.
Wieman, H. E 1910. The Pole Dise of Chrysomelid Eggs. Biol. Bull.,
Vol. 18.
Wilson, E. B., 1910. The pepe in Relation to the Determination
of Sex. Seienes Troe Vol.
FURTHER OBSERVATIONS ON THE POSE OF
THE SAUROPODOUS DINOSAURS
OLIVER P. HAY
WAsHINGTON, D. C.
Sıxce the publication! of my paper on the manner of
locomotion of the Sauropoda a number of communica-
tions have appeared which treat of the same subject.
Two of these I wish especially to notice here, both of
which have appeared in the AMERICAN NATURALIST, one
of these being written by Dr. W. J. Holland;? the other
by Dr. W. D. Matthew.’ A third interesting and instruc-
tive paper, from the pen of Dr. O. Abel, appeared in
March, 1910, in the Abhandlungen der k. k. zool.-botan.
Gesellsch. in Wien, Volume V, Heft 3, pp. 1-60.
Dr. Holland experiences many difficulties in his at-
tempts to articulate the bones of Diplodocus so as to give
the animal a pose like that of the crocodile and of the
lizard. His Fig. 9, on page 268 of his communication, is
intended to illustrate some of his perplexities. ‘‘Of
what earthly use,’’ he says, ‘‘the hind limb of the Diplo-
docus could have been to him in such a position I leave
you to determine for yourselves.’? Now, although the
proximal ends of those femora are not all placed as they
are in the lizard or the crocodile, nevertheless, taking
them as Dr. Holland has placed them, it is difficult to see
why, if they were not ankylosed with the pelvis and the
animal had not contracted locomotor ataxia, it could not
lift itself out of the hole provided for it. Furthermore,
it is not necessary for lizards to carry their knees above
the level of their backs; no more was it necessary for
sauropods to do this. Dr. Holland finds trouble also at
* Proc. Washington Acad. Sci., XII, 1910, pp. 1-25.
* AMER. NATURALIST, XLIV, pp. 259-283.
* AMER. NaTurRAList, XLIV, pp. 547-560.
398
No. 535] THE SAUROPODOUS DINOSAURS 399
the knee-joint, when the leg is flexed, as shown in his
Fig. 11, in which case, as he states, the tibia and the
fibula come into contact with the condyles of the femur
at two points not larger than as many sixpences. But
we must suppose that the Diplodocus did sometimes lie
down, and in so doing did bend its legs as much as Dr.
Holland has represented,.or more. Whoever has ob-
served the effort required by a horse in regaining a
standing posture can imagine the strain that would come
on those femoral condyles and lower leg bones when the
reptile endeavored to get on his feet again; but we can
hardly suppose that the bones and cartilages of the
knees were crushed every time the animal arose from its
slumbers. Dr. Holland appears not to appreciate the
fact that all these articular surfaces were invested with
abundant cartilage.
Dr. Holland’s Figs. 15 and 16 illustrate the embarrass-
ments encountered by him in his efforts to adapt the
bones of the fore leg to the positions that they have in
the lizard. He would have had fewer difficulties had he
not been laboring under the misapprehension that the
upper end of the radius articulated with the inner
condyle of the humerus instead of the outer. Such a
transposition of the radius and ulna would present
something unique in anatomy and, in the case of the
Sauropods, would be wholly unnecessary.
From the compressed form of the body of Diplodocus
Dr. Holland has derived an argument against the propo-
sition that the reptile had a creeping mode of locomotion.
Dr. Abel also formulates the generalization that among
the reptiles which in locomotion do not lift the belly and
thorax from the ground but drag it, the cross-section of
the thorax is transversely oval. It is true that most
creeping animals have the body depressed, but they vary
greatly with respect to the amount of depression. On
the other hand, there are lizards which have the body
strongly compressed and which nevertheless progress
as do other lizards. A species of the genus Gonyocepha-
+
400 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
lus shown me by Dr. L. Stejneger has the thickness of the
body only .57 of the height; so that it is nearly as much
compressed as Dr. Holland has represented Diplodocus to
be. Various other genera of lizards include species with
much compressed bodies. Some of the tortoises belong-
ing to the genus Testudo have the shell about twice as
wide as high, while in T. abingdonii, from the Galapagos
Islands the shell is fully as high as wide. Nevertheless,
this tortoise shows no tendency to assume a mammalian
gait. I see no reason why, if the necessities of the ani-
mal required it, the shell might not, in the course of time,
become still higher.
It is of great value to have, from one so competent as
Dr. W. D. Matthew, a statement regarding the value to
be attached to the form of the femur in relation to the
pose of the sauropods. Dr. Matthew seems to agree
with me that straightness alone of the femur does not
prove that these animals walked erect on either two or
four legs, only, he appears to hold that the larger mam-
mals and dinosaurs have in general straighter femora
than their smaller and more agile ancestors. This state-
ment is, of course, subject to the condition that the femur
was not straight in the ancestors themselves. And when
we come to apply the statement to the dinosaurs we are
likely to dispute whether the femora of Tyrannosaurus
are or are not less curved than those of some earlier
dinosaurs. Dr. Matthew describes the hinder limb of the
elephant and asserts that all gigantic mammals show
some approach to this type; also, that in the sauropods
the resemblance in form and proportion of the hinder
limb to that of the elephant is very marked. However,
a number of the genera that he mentions as illustrating
his views seem to me not to conform well to the specifi-
cations. Titanotherium does not, if we may rely on the
restorations, have post-like legs nor, in comparison
with the elephant, short feet. Coryphodon does not have
straight legs, nor is it a gigantic mammal, being ex-
* Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., VII, pls. VIII, X, XI.
* Bull. Amer, Mus. Nat. Hist., X, pl. X.
No. 535] THE SAUROPODOUS DINOSAURS 401
ceeded in size by some of the rhinoceroses, which again
have very angulated legs. It is to be noted, too, that most
of the genera mentioned by Dr. Matthew as being gigantic
mammals of diverse stocks are extinct, and there might
be some differences of opinion as to the exact form of
their legs and even of the feet.
Nor is it certain that the type of limb found in the ele-
phant is the result of the great size of the animal. The
limb has probably not changed greatly since Middle
Eocene times, when elephants were small animals; al-
though its angulation has probably become somewhat
reduced, the femur relatively somewhat longer, and the
digits a little shorter. The femur of Meritherium, sup-
posed to be a relative or even an ancestor of the ele-
phants, from the Middle Eocene of Egypt, is only eleven
inches long and is as straight as that of the living ele-
phant. The type of leg possessed by the elephant is
rather primitive in its structure and is found in such
animals as are slow of movement. All animals have
some means of protecting themselves more or less effec-
tively from their enemies. Horses, deer and oxen have
developed angulated limbs, with short humeri and femora
and elongated metapodials, combinations that confer the
power of rapid flight. The elephants have found their
safety in their great size; and extensive modifications of
their legs have not been required.
As is well known, the lizards have straight-shafted
femora, which are longer than the tibiæ, and the digits
are long. As, however, the land tortoises may have short
digitigrade feet, it is difficult to see why some lizards
might not develop such feet. And it is not improbable
that such a lizard might attain a great size and continue
to retain its straight femora, short feet, and angulated
limbs.
In short, it seems to the writer that Dr. Matthew’s
proposition as regards the significance of the straight
femur is loaded with so many conditions and subject to
so many exceptions, known and supposable, that it must
402 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
be applied with great circumspection to the dinosaurs.
It is frequently asserted that the pelvis and the limbs
of the diplodocus possessed analogous resemblances to
those of the elephant. In the pelvis these are confined,
I believe, to the great size and to the convex iliac crest.
In the sauropod the ilia are directed from front back-
ward; in the elephant almost transversely. The pubes
and ischia in the two animals are utterly different. The
acetabula are different in form, size and position. The
femora of the two animals are alike large and straight-
shafted. That of the sauropod, however, has no great
trochanterial process; and whether, as my critics con-
tend, only the inner angle of the proximal end of the
femur or, as I insist, the whole of the proximal end, is to
be regarded as the head of the bone, this head is very dif-
ferent from that of the elephant. The size of the radius
relatively to the ulna and of the fibula to the tibia is
very different in the two animals. The digits of the ele-
phant, in general, are far less reduced than those of the
sauropod. That the limbs of the sauropods were
straight like those of the elephant has been assumed;
but we are now discussing that proposition.
On the outer border of the upper end of the femur of
Diplodocus is a rugose area which extends downward a
distance equal to one fifth the length of the bone, per-
haps somewhat more. This, or at least its lower end,
represents the trochanter major. According to Dr. v.
Huene’s figures, this trochanter occupied about the same
level in the Triassic dinosaurs, but it was placed some-
what more on the dorsal surface of the bone. Osborn®
represents this trochanter in approximately its eorrect
position, but not extended far enough downward, as is
evident from the photograph reproduced on his Plate
XXIV. Dr. Matthew speaks of this trochanter as a
‘clearly marked rugosity around the proximal external
angle of the head.’’ I find this rugose surface on other
sauropod femora. The upper half of a large femur in
* Mem. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., I, p. 210, Fig. 14.
No. 535] THE SAUROPODOUS DINOSAURS 403
the U. S. National Museum measures 510 mm. across the
bone just below the rough proximal end. On the fibular
border the rugose surface that represents the great
trochanter runs down on the bone a distance of 390 mm.
At this point there is a decided angle in the border on the
bone. A rough surface just like this in position and ex-
tent is found on the femur of the erocodile.
This being settled, we may turn our attention to what
Marsh and Hatcher called the great trochanter, the
outer half, or nearly as much, of the rough proximal end
of the femur. Those who do not believe that this formed
a part of the head of the bone and was not inserted in the
acetabulum ought to explain what it represents.
As regards the distal end of the femur of Diplodocus,
I do not see in what way it is essentially different from
that of the lizard. Dr. Matthew says that in the latter
the distal articulation for the tibia and the fibula are on
the back of the femur, not on its end. As I see the femur
of Diplodocus and that of the lizard, both have a broad
articular surface on the end; and this surface is con-
tinued around on the ventral side of the bone, being
there divided into two parts by the intercondylar fossa.
It must not be supposed that I see no differences among
the femora of the diplodocus, the crocodile and the liz-
ard; but these are much nearer one another than that
the diplodocus is to the femur of the elephant.
Dr. Holland has made the objection that in articula-
ting the leg bones of Diplodocus so that there might be a
right angle between the femur and the tibia there would
be no surface against which the end of the femur might
articulate. However, the same condition would exist in
the flexed knee of the horse or of man were it not for
the patella. In the flexed knee of the lizard and of the
crocodile the end of the bone is covered by the tendon of
the extensor muscle and the ligaments; and certainly
the same was true in the sauropods. On account of the
deep body of Diplodocus it would not probably often
happen that the angle between the femur and the tibia
404 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
would be less than a right angle. When the leg was ex-
tended forward it would be nearly straight and again
straight when directed backward. Also, the body would
be lifted somewhat. It is an erroneous idea, held ap-
parently by both Dr. Matthew and Dr. v. Huene, that in
walking the crocodiles, lizards and turtles do not lift the
body from the ground. Probably all do so; even the
gigantic Galapagos tortoises carry their bodies free
from the ground.
Inasmuch as the arrangement of the bones of the fore
leg has been brought into this discussion, I shall make a
few remarks on the subject. Few of the figures of the
humerus give a correct notion of its form. Those pub-
lished by Osborn and Granger? show well the characters
of the bone, seen from the front only, in three genera of
sauropods. A humerus in the U. S. National Museum,
supposed to be that of Diplodocus, has the proximal
border broad and convex and very rough, showing that
it was covered by cartilage and doubtless formed a con-
tinuous articular surface. This surface played in the
glenoid fossa or notch of the shoulder girdle. About
the middle of this convex surface the bone is much thicker
than at the ends and the thickening is on the dorsal face
of the bone. This thickened portion quite certainly corre-
sponds to a rounded elevation seen on the upper surface
of the proximal end of the humerus of the crocodile, and
this in its turn is probably homologous with the more nar-
rowly limited head of the humerus in mammals. In the
crocodile this elevation fits well into a depression in the
scapula, in the roof of the glenoid fossa. When, however,
the leg is brought well forward the elevation slips out of
the glenoid notch and a part of the head farther forward
takes its place and supports the weight. I believe that
the same movements took place in Diplodocus.
Now, in the restoration of Diplodocus in Pittsburgh
and in that of Brontosaurus in New York, the humerus
is placed in the glenoid notch in an approximately verti-
* Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., XIV, p. 203.
No. 535] THE SAUROPODOUS DINOSAURS 405
cal position, with the deltoid border directed outward.
the opposite border inward, and the primitively dorsal
surface directed forward. This leaves the inner, prob
ably lesser, tuberosity projecting far within the inner
surface of the shoulder girdle. An examination of a lot
of mounted skeletons will show that in all mammals that
walk by moving the limbs in sagittal planes the inner
tuberosity is greatly reduced and removed to a position
in front of the head of the bone, and little or none of the
humerus projects beyond the inner surface of the scap-
ula. In two mammals I find a large process which cor-
responds, in position at least, to the inner one of the
sauropods. These are the echidna and the duck-bill, and
both of these mammals move the legs as the creeping
reptiles do. I believe that the prevailing manner of
articulating the humerus of the sauropods is wrong. It
ought to be placed in a plane approximately horizontal,
with the lower and upper faces in their primitive posi-
tions, with the deltoid border forward, and, when the leg
is in a median position of its swing, with the thickening
of the proximal articulatory surface in contact with that
part of the glenoid notch that is formed by the great
ridge that passes across the scapula. In case the leg is
placed further forward or further backward, correspond-
ing parts of the convex articular end of the’ humerus
ought to pass under this ridge. There was no need at
any time of life that the lesser tuberosity should project
against the ribs or into the muscles. The arrangement
that I have described is that which may be observed in
the crocodile also.
If now the ulna and the radius are articulated prop-
erly with the humerus the whole leg will function as it
does in the lizard and the crocodile. In the U. S. Na-
tional Museum is a specimen, shown me by Mr, Chas.
W. Gilmore, which consists of the radius and the ulna,
somewhat crushed, but preserving nearly their original
relations to each other. These bones differ somewhat
from those of the crocodile, as might be expected. The
406 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
principal difference is found in the fact that the upper
end of the ulna extended across the lower end of the
humerus and has a concavity in front for the head of the
radius. The ulna and radius appear to have been more
closely bound together at the lower ends than in the croc-
odile; nevertheless, the bones of the two reptiles re-
semble one another closely. When to those of the sauro-
pod a humerus of corresponding size is fitted, with the
outer (anterior) condyle in contact with the head of the
radius, the leg is strikingly like that of the crocodile.
In my opinion, Marsh’s arrangement of the bones of the
fore leg of Brontosaurus’ is more nearly correct than
later restorations of this limb in the same animal and in
Diplodocus. In the figures referred to, the humerus, in
the middle of the step, presents the dorsal surface out-
ward; whereas, in the Pittsburgh and New York res-
torations this surface looks backwards and the deltoid
border looks outward. If Marsh’s figure were modified
so that the humerus were horizontal or nearly so, the
leg would have nearly its natural position.
Various opinions are held regarding the question
whether the sauropods were strictly aquatic, strictly ter-
restrial or amphibious. In my paper published in the
Proceedings of the Washington Academy of Science 1
called attention to a figure that illustrates Cope’s views
and to another published by Matthew that elucidated
Osborn’s ideas. Dr. Matthew’s views seem to differ
from those of Osborn in that the former maintains that
these reptiles usually preferred not to be wholly sub- —
merged and that they could not leave the water without
endangering the integrity of their limbs. He finds his
reasons for his opinion as to the depth of the water pre-
ferred in the fact that the bones above a line drawn from
the hip joint to the shoulder blade are of light construc-
tion, while those below this line are thick and heavy.
This line is his ‘‘water-line’’ and indicates the average
depth of the water haunted by these reptiles. The heavy
° The Dinosaurs of North America, Pl. XLII.
No. 535] THE SAUROPODOUS DINOSAURS 407
bones of the legs were intended, according to Dr. Mat-
thew, to hold the animal down in the water, as the lead
in the diver’s shoes holds him on the bottom. However,
it occurs to the present writer that if the sauropods
were accustomed to wade in water that came only a little
more than halfway to their backs the weight of the un-
submerged part of the body would suffice to hold them to
the bottom. A man who wades in water only waist-deep
does not need leaden soles. To maintain the theory, it
Seems necessary to keep the reptiles more deeply sub-
merged. To do this it is only necessary to suppose that
they crawled about at the bottom of the water as croco-
diles do. If we suppose that the sauropods walked
wholly submerged and erect on four legs the differentia-
tion observed by Dr. Matthew in the obsification might
be explained on the supposition that it was for the pur-
pose of ballasting the animals. However, it does not ap-
pear that the hippopotamus, an eminent wader, needs
to be steadied in this way. Furthermore, why should
it have disturbed such facile swimmers as the sauropods
probably were to heel over occasionally?
Notwithstanding the means employed by nature to
reduce as much as possible the weight of the skeleton,
the bodies of the sauropods were very heavy. The bones
of the legs were well-developed and I recognize that they
were not as hollow as those of a horse, for example.
Can we not, after all, most reasonably explain the case
by supposing that the sauropods went about more or
less on land and needed strong legs to hold up their
heavy bodies?
In my former article I expressed the opinion that it
was hardly possible for a diplodocus to walk about
wholly submerged. It appears that Cope and Osborn
and Matthew have thought that the animal would have
no difficulty in doing this. Perhaps the question can
never be definitely decided. The hippopotamus is said
to walk beneath the water and probably does really do
so; at least they remain for considerable periods be-
408 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
neath the water and move about. They are active
swimmers and it is possible that their movements along
the bed of the river or lake are to a considerable extent
due to the action of their feet against the water. They
have massive skeletons which have evidently been de-
veloped to bear them down in the water. Nevertheless,
it is to be questioned whether the animal exerts any con-
siderable pressure on the bottom. If the specific gravity
were any considerable amount above that of the water
the animal would have difficulty in coming to the surface
for air and to get a view of its surroundings. ‘Tapirs
too are said to be great swimmers and divers and to run
along on the bottoms of streams; but these mammals
have no special modifications of the skeleton to enable
them to do this.’ Possibly they lay hold of the bottom in
some way with their hoofs, or, while running they may
incline the head and body downwards and forwards, like
a descending aeroplane. That the hippopotamus with
his heavy skeleton has a specific gravity little above the
water is proved by the following fact related in Brehm’s
Thierleben: When a hippopotamus is killed he at once
goes to the bottom. Nevertheless, in many cases the
body comes to the surface within from 30 to 60 minutes,
a result of the development of gases within the cadaver.
Hence, it is extremely doubtful whether the animal can
exert much pressure on the bed of the stream. So too,
even if the sauropods did walk about at the bottoms of
streams, wholly submerged, they must have rested there
very lightly.
Now what conclusions can we draw from the facts
above established? Dr. Matthew’s strongest argument
in favor of the erect pose of the sauropods is derived
from the supposed resemblance of their limbs to those
of the elephant, the long straight femur, the short digiti-
grade feet, and the slight angulation of the limb. ‘‘Ob-
viously,’’ says he, in deseribing rectigradism, ‘‘a special-
ization of this kind will occur only in an animal which
habitually rests its weight on the limbs.” But we are
No. 535] THE SAUROPODOUS DINOSAURS 409
dealing here with animals that are supposed to have the
whole, or at least nearly the whole, of the weight taken
from their limbs.
Moreover, does not the one part of Dr. Matthew’s
theory contradict the other? He has told us that the
parts of the skeleton below the water-line were heavy
for the purpose of overcoming the buoyant effect of the
water, as the lead in the diver’s shoes does. . Then, as
shown in the preceding paragraph, he maintains that
there was pressure enough to produce such legs as the
elephant has, an animal whose legs must support its
whole weight.
We may now be permitted to inquire whether or not
aquatic life is likely to have produced either of the ef-
fects attributed to it by Dr. Matthew. The hippopota-
mus is an animal far less aquatic than Cope and Osborn
and Matthew have supposed the sauropods to have been.
Its limbs are almost ridiculously short, so short that
when it is quitting or entering the water its belly leaves
broad and deep channels in the mud through which it
wades. The leg bones are indeed very strong, a result
conditioned by the frequent excursions made on the
land. The feet are the most primitive possessed by any
living artiodactyl, and the digits are bound together by
a short web. The aquatic performances of the tapir have
not contributed to its structural uplift, for its feet are
among the most primitive of those of the perissodactyls.
Let one only view with some attention a series of
mounted skeletons and one will soon be struck with the
fact that degenerative changes begin to affect the limbs
of animals very shortly after they begin to confide to the
water the support of their bodies; and these degenera-
tive modifications continue to manifest themselves until
the limbs have been converted into paddles and flippers
or reduced to vestiges or even extirpated.
That the sauropods had originally been amphibious
and then became strictly aquatic seems to the writer
highly improbable. Those short digitigrade feet, with
410 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
toes having a reduced number of phalanges, seem to fur-
nish almost positive proof that their possessors had for
many generations been accustomed to travel on solid
ground. It is probable that their resort to the water had
not endured long enough yet to affect to any great de-
gree their organization, except as to size.
Dr. Matthew believes that at some stage the ancestors
of the sauropods were bipedal and that later they became
secondarily quadrupedal. He grants that the indica-
tions of former bipedalism in this group are less appar-
ent than in the quadrupedal Predentata. It is easy to
agree with the latter opinion. As to the hinder limbs,
we ought to expect that bipedal locomotion would have
led to the development of smooth, well-finished articular
surfaces and of a trochanter major standing out as a
distinct process near the upper end of the femur. Why,
on the resumption of quadrupedal locomotion, should
these acquisitions have disappeared as if they had never
existed? This has not happened even in the walruses,
seals, porpoises and manatees, which forsaking the
land, have betaken themselves to the water. The inevi-
table result, if not the prerequisite, of bipedalism is a con-
siderable reduction in the size of the fore legs and vari-
ous transformations of the hands. But the fore limbs of
Diplodocus and of Brontosaurus show no reduction in
size. Are we to suppose too that while the fore legs
were held from contact with the ground and were prob-
ably employed for other purposes than locomotion, they
continued to progress in digitigrady? Those fore feet
look as if they had been walked on fully as much as the
hinder feet.
From a photograph of the fore foot of a Diplodocus
in the American Museum of Natural History Dr. V-
Huene concludes that this foot was exaxonic. It would
be interesting to learn more about this foot, especially
whether or not the bones were found in their natural
relations. The foot differs from that of some other
sauropods, certainly. With the ulna and radius before
No. 535] THE SAUROPODOUS DINOSAURS 411
mentioned, in the U. S. National Museum, there are
present all the metacarpals and some of the phalanges.
Through pressure two of the metacarpals, the fourth
and the fifth, have had their hinder faces squeezed
against the hinder faces of the other three. Otherwise,
the bones retain their original relationships. Of these
the first is distinctly larger than the fifth. The lower
end is especially enlarged, to support the phalanx and
the great claw. It is proper here to say that Dr. v.
Huene has very justly criticized the representation of
the feet of Diplodocus as presented in my plate pub-
lished in the Proceedings of the Washington Academy
of Science.
Dr. Matthew refuses to accept my explanation of the
tracks made by the supposed iguanodon. Those tracks
are certainly in need of explanation. So far as I am
aware, no one has as yet ventured to mount a dinosaur
with the toes pointing inward after the manner of those
tracks.
Neither does our author accept my suggestion that
some of the tracks found in the Triassic sandstones of
the Connecticut River Valley were made by birds. The
conclusion appears to be that, because a few dinosaur
bones have been found in that region, therefore all the
tracks are those of dinosaurs. Dr. Matthew does not
attempt to show how animals built as were the Triassic
dinosaurs that we know, with short diverging femora,
rather short lower leg bones, and short metatarsals,
could put one foot directly before the other in walking
or running. It is much to be doubted whether a running
duck or penguin could do this. And are we to suppose
too that those Triassic dinosaurs were always running?
It may be easy in mounting the skeleton of a dinosaur to
place the femora parallel or even to bring the knees to-
gether. In life the thighs could not take this position,
unless on each side there had been a considerable exca-
vation at the junction of the ponderous belly and the
thick tail, a sort of little wheel-house for the thigh to
412 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Vor XLV
play in. It seems quite doubtful whether the carnivorous
dinosaurs of even the Jurassic period had the erect
bird-like bearing that is usually attributed to them.
The extraordinary development of the pubic bones of
Ceratosaurus, whose expanded and ankylosed distal ends
reached nearly half-way to the fore legs, seems to me to
indicate that these animals, when in repose, had a prone
position, resting much of the weight on the pubes, and
that when running their legs straddled considerably.
Dr. Matthew thinks that the sauropods had too great
a bulk to have lived on land. The law to which he gives
expression does, of course, prescribe a limit to the size an
animal can attain, but who has yet determined what
that limit is? Larger elephants have lived than those
now living, and it is not certain that we have discovered
yet the largest that have lived. Animals do not attain
a great size simply to test the laws of mechanics.
SHORTER ARTICLES AND CORRESPONDENCE
COMPUTATION OF THE COEFFICIENT OF
CORRELATION
In Dr. Harris’s recent note’ suggesting a helpful modification
of the method of computing the coefficient of correlation, the only
objection mentioned is the fact that his method results in very
large product-numbers. This difficulty can be considerably re-
duced by a procedure based on the fact that the calculation of
the standard deviation and the coefficient of correlation does not
depend upon the absolute dimensions of the things measured.
All that is required is a given series of successive grades; the
standard deviation will then be obtained in terms of the units
Separating the grades, whatever they are; while the coefficient
of correlation is a relative number, quite independent of the
value of the units. We may therefore give to the lowest grade
of both sets of measurements (x and y) the value 0, for the
succeeding ones the values 1, 2, 3, 4, etc., instead of the real
values; the labor of computation will then be greatly reduced,
while the same value will be found for the two constants in
question. The values which Dr. Harris calls As and Ay will by
this method not be the means of x and y (so that they may well
be designated rather d, and d,), but the means can be obtained
from them without labor by simply adding to each the absolute
value of the lowest grade of x and of y, respectively (since we
had reduced all grades by this amount, in substituting 0 for
the lowest grade).
This much simplifies the computations when the absolute di-
mensions are represented by numbers considerably greater than
unity. Thus, in Dr. Harris’s Table III., in finding the standard
deviation we should for the third grade have to multiply by but
4, instead of by the square of 28.
H. S. JENNINGS
NOTE ON BATRACHOSEPS ATTENUATUS ESCH.
Batrachoseps attenuatus is the most abundant salamander in
the vicinity of Stanford University. During the rainy season
* This journal, November, 1910.
413
414 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
it can be found under nearly every rock and log on the neighbor-
ing foothills. No one has, so far as I am aware, discovered and
described its egg-laying habits. The author obtained some of the
eggs of this salamander and the following brief note is published
with the hope that it may attract the attention of some student to
this problem.
The first eggs obtained were discovered by T. Kimura during
January, 1906. They were found partly buried in depressions
under rocks on a moist hill side. On January 5, 1907, the author
found some eggs under a log in a moist ravine well up in the
hills. The eggs were deposited in small pockets in the ground;
21 were in one group and 10 in another group about 2 feet dis-
tant, while 4 were scattered between, suggesting that all were
deposited by a single female. These eggs were round or slightly
oval and about 6 mm. in diameter. Development was well ad-
vanced. The first individual to issue from the egg appeared on
January 28, and was 17 mm. in length and of a dull black color.
By May 22 it had doubled in length and was 35 mm. long. The
majority of the eggs, when found, were covered with a fungus
and failed to develop. This suggests that they may have been
under abnormal conditions. It seems very likely that the major-
ity of the eggs of this species are deposited just beneath the sur-
face of the ground, as is the case with earthworm eggs and so
escape detection. Diligent search at the proper season should
settle this question.
_ Batrachoseps attenuatus disappears from this region with the
approach of the dry season and appears suddenly in the fall after
the first heavy rains. I have been informed that it can be
obtained at any season in the moist coast region near Pacific
Grove. It seems probable that in the dry regions this salamander
burrows into the ground as the earthworm does to escape the
ught. This theory is supported by the shape of the body,
which is elongate, slender and roundish, suggesting that of the
earthworm. It appears that we have here a parallel development
of form and habit between B. attenuatus and the earthworm due
to a struggle against the same physical environment.
C. V. BURKE.
NOTES AND LITERATURE
SOME RECENT STUDIES ON VARIATION AND
CORRELATION IN AGRICULTURAL PLANTS
From the nature of his material the student of agricultural
problems has an unexcelled opportunity to collect large masses
of statistical data. Domestic animals and plants, particularly
the latter, can be easily propagated in vast numbers under con-
ditions controlled in all sorts of ways. Not only the opportunity,
but also the desirability, of collecting data on a statistical seale,
has been recognized by agricultural investigators from the begin-
ning of experiment-station work in Germany, and still earlier by
individual students in this field. Much of the early statistical
material relating to agricultural objects or problems still remains
unanalyzed and undigested, because of a lack of adequate statis-
tical methods, on the one hand, and a lack of acquaintance on the
part of the collector of the data with what mathematical methods
did exist for the analysis of such material, on the other hand.
It was obviously to be expected that a system of adequate bio-
metric methods, such as that which has been developed by Pro-
fessor Karl Pearson, would in due time come to play a conspicu-
ous part in agricultural investigations. This time is coming.
One who follows the current literature of agricultural science,
in a broad sense of the term, can not fail to be struck with the
rapidly increasing use of these mathematico-statistical methods
during the last few years. In so far as the methods are correctly
and appropriately used this is a most commendable movement.
But it must always be kept in mind not to let admiration for the
method per se blind one as to the real significance and impor-
tance of the biological problem attacked. The futility of dealing
biometrically with data or problems which lack a sound bio-
ogical basis is obvious. The indiscriminate application of bio-
metric methods to all kinds of data is easily seen upon critical
examination, to have only so much value or validity as resides
in the original data themselves. It is particularly important that
this point be kept in mind in agricultural work along biometric
lines, because of the great ease with which mere statistics can be
collected i in this field, and the consequent temptation to collect
them without critical consideration of their meaning and worth.
415
416 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Vor XLV
It is the purpose of the present review to discuss some of the
recent work which has been done along biometric lines with
agricultural materials and on problems relating to the science of
agriculture. The list of literature at the end or the review based
on it does not aim at completeness either in respect to the period
or the field covered. Rather it is the aim to indicate the general
trend of work in this field and to discuss its points of strength
and of weakness.
At the outstart should be mentioned a number of papers
which have dealt with the general subject of statistical methods
as applied to agricultural material. The general purpose of
such papers has been, on the one hand, to call the attention of
agricultural workers to the existence of such methods and to the
desirability of their use, and, on the other hand, to give some
account of the nature of the methods themselves. Here are
to be noted the papers of Albrecht, Roemer (introductory por-
tion), Schoute, Quante, Rietz and Smith, and Zaleskiego. The
last three papers are especially worthy of attention. The paper
of Rietz and Smith gives an excellent elementary discussion of
correlation. It further furnishes a most hopeful sign of the
rapid development in research standards in agricultural work
in this country. Zaleskiego makes keen analytical use of fre-
quency polygons in his breeding work. He calls special attention
to the prime importance of not lumping together non-homo-
geneous material. Rather he urges studying the frequency
polygon derived from the progeny of each ‘‘pure line’’ by itself.
Then later these separate polygons may, if there is reason for it,
be summed together to make a ‘‘general population’’ polygon.
But to start with the latter and neglect the biological units (pure
lines) which go to make it up is wrong. This insistence on the
strict biological or gametic homogeneity of material to be studied
by statistical methods is worthy of all commendation.
Quante discusses from a general standpoint some of the prob-
lems of variation in agricultural plants. He considers that a
definite morphological difference is certainly present between
species, varieties or groups when their means differ by five or
more times the probable error. He shows that in a number of
characters of barley and wheat which he studied the variation is
distinctly skew. In a selected strain of rye he found clear
evidence of a ‘‘normal’’ or Gaussian symmetrical distribution of
_yariation,
Turning our attention next to special investigations we may
No. 535] NOTES AND LITERATURE 417
consider different crops separately and take wheat first. Here
the studies of Roberts and his students take a leading position.
For some years this investigator has been engaged upon a very
comprehensive biometrical study of wheat. Only fragments of
this work have as yet been published. We may first consider
his paper on ‘‘A Quantitative Method for the Determination
of Hardness in Wheat.’’ An apparatus was devised by
which the weight in grams necessary to crush a grain of wheat
could be directly determined. The problem was to find out how
large a random sample of kernels must be taken in order to
reach a reliable result as to mean crushing weight for a variety
or strain. Samples of from 100 to 500 kernels each were tested
and the mean for each sample determined, two varieties of wheat
—a hard and a soft—being used. It is shown that the mean
crushing weight diminishes regularly and rapidly as the size of
the samples increases, until a minimum at a sample of 450 kernels
is reached. Samples of 500 kernels show an increase in mean
crushing weight over the 450 kernel sample. Why the mean
crushing weight should regularly diminish with increasing size
of sample is not clear, and is neither explained nor even discussed
in the paper. That the error of the mean crushing point would
diminish with increasing size of sample is obvious. The error
of the mean is found, as a matter of fact, to diminish according
to a hyperbolic curve. A mathematical discussion of this curve
of the errors of the means is given, and examination of the
second differential shows that the rate of diminution of the error
becomes negligible after a sample or group size of 350 kernels. It
is then concluded that 350 kernels is a sufficiently large sample
to use practically in determining mean crushing points.
Roberts’s paper on ‘‘Breeding for Type of Kernel in Wheat’’
is a very thorough and extensive biometrical study of the form of
the wheat kernel in many different pure lines or races. Means
only are given in this paper, but the amount of measuring and
computing involved must have been literally stupendous. Only
such a biometrical organization as that maintained at the Kansas
Station could have managed it. Data are given on mean length,
width, length/width index, volume, weight, and specific gravity
of the individual kernel, samples of 500 kernels being taken in
5 separate 100-kernel lots for each pedigree strain (pure line).
Also determinations were made of the weight of 100 c.c. of grain,
of a packed and a struck bushel of grain, and of the percentaga
volume not occupied by grain when a 100 c.c. measure is filled
418 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
with grain. This last determination was made by the alcohol
method. The upshot of this elaborate study is to show that the
shape of the grains as measured by the length/width index is a
very significant factor in determining how wheat will grade
according to commercial standards. It is shown that ‘‘a differ-
ence of at least as high as three pounds per bushel may exist
between different pure-bred wheats having identical average
kernel-volume and kernel-weight.’’ The final conclusion is that
the percentage volume of grain in a packed measure would be a
much more just and scientific basis for market grain grading
than the present system of test bushel weight. This paper illus-
trates in a very striking way how the scientific method can solve
in a precise and final manner a practical commercial problem.
Lill has made a quantitative study of the relation of size,
weight and desirability of kernel to germination in wheat. His
data indicate that germination capacity is not correlated with
size of kernel, but is correlated with density of kernel. No bio-
metrical analysis of the data is attempted.
Waldron has made an interesting and significant biometrical
study of the correlation between weight of grain and other plant
characters in oats and wheat, using his own measurements for
the former cereal, and published data for the latter. He shows
that in oats the mean grain weight per head is negatively corre-
lated to a rather high degree with (a) number of grains per
head, (b) length of head and (c) length of culm. This obviously
leads to a somewhat paradoxical result, namely, that when
plump, heavy seed is sown, it is seed which is taken from mother
plants which are below the average in size and yield. Yet care-
ful experiments, covering a period of years, have shown that
planting heavy seed gives increased yields. In other words, a
practise which amounts to continued selection of the poorer
yielding of plants as parents results in increased yield in the
progeny. This paradoxical result needs analysis by careful
pedigree breeding.
Clark has published a general biometrical study on variation
and correlation in timothy, the material being gained in connec-
tion with the extensive breeding experiments with this grass
which have been in progress for some years at Cornell University.
The point of chief interest and novelty in the work is that each
of the 3,505 plants which furnished the data was under observa-
tion during three consecutive years. The material thus gives
some basis for an estimation of the relative influence, on the one
No. 535] NOTES AND LITERATURE 419
hand, of germ-plasm (i. e., germinal determinant factors of
whatever sort), which presumably was identical for each plant
during the three years, and environmental factors, on the other
hand, in determining observed degrees and kinds. of variation in
the adult organism. The results taken as a whole show that what
might be called the general variation facies of a population of
Phleum must depend to a very high degree upon
rather than ‘‘nature.’? The degree of variation, the degree of
skewness of the variation curves, the closeness of correlation
between different characters of the plant—all these are changed
by general environmental conditions to a marked extent. Thus
to take an example: the coefficient of correlation between weight
and height of plant is given as .274 + .011 in 1905 and as .718
in 1907. This is a relative change of nearly 200 per cent. In
another case a significant positive correlation one year becomes
significantly negative two years later. In general the heights (or
weights) of timothy plants in any one year are correlated with
the heights (or weights) of the same identical plants in another
year only to about the degree indicated by a coefficient of around
-5, Which is but 50 per cent. of perfect correlation.* In other
words, it appears on the basis of this result that in determining
what a given timothy plant shall be like next year in respect to
such characters as height and weight the innate constitutional,
hereditary factors within the plant are on the whole of neither
greater nor less importance than external environmental cir-
cumstances. In this case, and in respect to the characters dealt
with, ‘‘nature’’ and ‘‘nurture’’ are about evenly balanced, with
what advantage there is on the side of ‘‘nurture.’’ The author
emphasizes the practical significance of a result of this kind to
the man who is carrying on selective breeding, and who obviously
must make his selections at the outstart on the basis of the
visible somatic characters as they are developed at the particular
place and time at which he is doing his selecting. The paper is
unfortunately marred by arithmetic errors.
It is a well-known fact that European workers (other than
English), generally speaking, have very little acquaintance with
biometric technique. A good example of this fact is afforded by
a paper of Grabner on the problem of correlated variation in
barley. The investigator desired to learn what relation existed
between the economically valuable characters of this cereal. He
collected a vast lot of statistical data regarding such characters
1 Cf. Clark’s Table VIII.
420 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
as yield of grain, hectoliter weight, weight of 1,000 kernels, size
of kernel, protein content and ‘‘mealiness’’ or softness of grain.
Instead of proceeding by the straightforward method of forming
a correlation table and deducing therefrom the coefficient of
correlation the author follows the laborious, inaccurate and in-
conclusive plan of averages. Virtually what is done is to
calculate the observed regression line of one character on another.
The general result reached, though in no wise critically supported
by the evidence presented, is that all of the purely physical char-
acters are correlated together to a high degree. The chemical
and chemico-physical characters protein content and ‘‘mealiness”’
are not demonstrably (by the method used) correlated with
other characters, though they are mutually definitely correlated.
The chief scientific value of the paper is to illustrate in a striking
manner how crude and clumsy were pre-Galtonian methods of
attacking a simple statistical problem.
Turning now to corn, we have a number of studies of a more
or less biometrical character. Apart from the primarily genetic
studies on maize of East, Shull, Collins, and Pearl and Surface
which are quantitative in character and to some extent? biometric
in the treatment of the data, there have appeared recently two
special studies on variation and correlation in this plant. The
first of these is the paper of Rietz and Smith and the second that
of Ewing. The objects of the two papers are apparently some-
what dissimilar. Ewing’s is primarily a biological investigation,
whereas Rietz and Smith apparently desire primarily to set orth
the method of measuring correlation, and incidently to illustrate
these principles by means of some corn data which they have on
nd. The only general result of particular biological signifi-
cance brought out in the work of Rietz and Smith is that the
degree of correlation between various ear characters (length,
circumference, number of rows, weight) is very markedly influ-
enced by environmental conditions surrounding the growing
crop. This paper is to be commended for its clear exposition of
the method of calculating a correlation coefficient.
Ewing’s paper contains more matter of general biological
interest. Especially to be mentioned is the valuable discussion
of the literature of correlation. The general problem which
formed the basis of this investigation was to learn in how far the
* Shull gives some very interesting data in the form of variation con
stants (mean, standard deviation, and coefficient of variation) for variation
in number of rows on ear in pure and cross-bred (F, and F,) maize.
No. 535] NOTES AND LITERATURE 421
determination of statistical correlations between different parts
of the maize plant might be of use to the practical breeder. The
general conclusion to which the author comes in TE to this
point is as follows:
Considerable study of the subject has forced upon the writer the be-
lief that it is improbable that much use can be made of correlation in
practical breeding. There are rare cases in which the coupling of unit
characters may aid the breeder in making selections at an early period,
but the existence of correlation in the fluctuating variability of two
different characters is not likely to prove of much assistance. Nothing
more than a moderate degree of correlation is likely to be found in
these cases, unless some such relation as cause and effect exists between
them. This is especially true of correlation between seed production
and other characters, since the former depends upon a large number
of other characters and conditions.
The correlations studied were those of weight of grain per
plant (measuring yield) with each of the following characters :
(1) Diameter of stalk, (2) length of leaf, (3) breadth of leaf,
(4) height of mature plant, (5) height of seedling, (6) number
of internodes, (7) average length of internodes, (8) percentage
of internodes below the ear, (9) length of ear at appearance of
silks, (10) date of appearance of tassel, (11) date of appearance
of pollen, (12) date of appearance of silks, (13) duration of
flowering period (pistillate flowers) in days, (14) number of
branches in the tassel.
The coefficient for correlations 1-6, inclusive, 9, 10 and 12, are,
in each case, from 5 to 19 times the respective probable errors.
They are thus statistically significant. In view of this fact the
statement in the general discussion of results that ‘‘in most
cases the coefficient of correlation is so small that it is probably
not worth while to try to classify it or even to conclude that there
is correlation,’’ seems not to have been very well considered. The
same criticism is to be made against the paper of Clark discussed
above. These authors appear to overlook the fact that whether
$ correlation is statistically significant (i. e., whether correlation
‘‘exists’?) depends not upon its absolute ‘vali. but upon its
relation to its probable error. A coefficient of .0009 + .0001
would be to a high degree of probability statistically phar Dg:
though absolutely small.
he garden pea (Pisum sativum) has been the subject of
Several recent biometric studies. At the Massachusetts Station
Waugh and Shaw have been for some time engaged in an
422 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
investigation of inheritance in this form, conducted along bio-
metric lines. In their first paper here reviewed they present
variation data regarding the four following characters: length
of vine, number of pods per vine, length of pod, number of peas
per pod, and total peas. The raw data are not given and the dis-
cussion is very meager. Graphs of the variation curves are given,
but instead of making these plottings of the actual frequency
data as polygons, the authors connect the plotted points by free-
hand sweeping curves. This is certainly a simple and expedi-
tious, if somewhat naive, method of curve-fitting! It is much to
be regretted that such an inadequate, and indeed absolutely
incorrect, method of presentation of statistical results should
have been resorted to. In the discussion of heredity stress is
laid upon the varying degrees of prepotenecy observed in the
ae of characters by individual plants. To measure
this a new ‘‘coefficient of heredity’’ is proposed. The formula
for this is
C= Wep,
where C is the proposed coefficient, o the standard deviation
of offspring and D the difference between the parental character
and offspring mean of the same character. It is obvious that
the more nearly the offspring are like each other, and like the
parent the larger will C become. It is somewhat unfortunate
that this is called a ‘‘coefficient of heredity,’’ since this term
is in common biometrical usage for a very different constant.
Indeed, in their own paper Waugh and Shaw use this term not
only for their proposed constant, but also for the correlation
coefficient between parent and offspring. A satisfactory measure
of individual (not average) prepotency is a thing which is badly
needed in breeding work. While the constant © proposed by
Waugh and Shaw meets some of the conditions which such a
measure must fulfill, it unfortunately appears to be of rather
restricted significance and usefulness. The numerical value
which it takes for different characters are not comparable one
with another. The reason, obviously, is because the numerical
value will change in accordance with the absolute rather than
the relative variability of the character. An elephant and a
mouse each equally prepotent with reference to the transmis-
sion of any character, say skull breadth, would have very differ- °
ent values of C for this character. Further, the constant becomes
rather difficult to manage in cases of biparental inheritance, Or
No. 535] NOTES AND LITERATURE 423
in those cases of undoubted prepotency, which are of the greatest
interest and importance both theoretically and practically,
wherein the prepotent individual does not itself have the char-
acter with regard to which it is prepotent expressed in its own
soma. An example here is the dairy bull, prepotent in respect
to milking qualities.
A continuation of this work on peas is reported in the second
paper by the same authors. Data are presented showing the
relation between observed variability and environmental (sea-
sonal) conditions. The interesting point is brought out that
there is less variation, and a higher correlation between parent
and offspring, in respect to vine length, than in respect to either
number of pods per vine or total peas per vine.
Roemer gives a very detailed biometrical study of pure lines
in peas. The work is essentially a confirmation, with another
plant, of Johannsen’s epoch-making investigations on beans,
though it lacks any extensive studies on the effect of selection
within the pure line. The essential objective point of Roemer’s
research is rather to determine the biometric characteristics of
pure lines as such in relation to the general population. Among
the more important general results are the following:
1. The different biotypes in a population arrange themselves
in frequency distributions in accord with Quetelet’s law.
2. No relation was found to exist between the variability of
the biotypes (i. e., variation within the general population) and
variation within the pure lines.
Shaw has made a very thorough biometric study of variation
in the Ben Davis variety of apples and presents a mass of data
of considerable general biological interest. When one recalls
that commercial apple varieties are propagated by vegetative
processes entirely, the importance of a careful study of this varia-
tion under different environmental conditions is obvious. Shaw
shows that the mean size and shape of apples of the Ben Davis
variety are distinctly different for different trees of the same or-
chard and even for the different parts of the same tree. There
are very marked differences in apples of this variety in respect
to size and shape characters when they are grown under widely
different soil and climatic conditions. In the south the Ben Davis
is a short round apple; in the north it is an elongated apple. Not
only are the means different in different environments, but also
the variability (as measured by the coefficient of variation) is
changed. This paper of Shaw’s, while itself purely deserip-
424 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
tive, is of great value not only for the interesting data regard-
ing variation which it presents, but also in indicating clearly the
rich reward which may be expected to follow a combined experi-
mental and biometric attack upon the fundamental biological
problem of the effect of stock on scion.
In the papers so far discussed there has been in every case some
attempt at biometric analysis of the raw statistical data. There
are constantly appearing in agricultural literature papers in
which a great mass of first-class statistical material on variation
and correlation in agricultural plants is presented but not
analyzed biometrically, or only incompletely so. Examples of
this are found (to mention but two) in the interesting papers of
Kohler on potatoes and Westgate on alfalfa. A conspicuous
instance of failure to make profitable use of elementary bio-
metrical methods is seen in the paper of Stockberger and
Thompson on hops. These authors put their data in form for
calculating variation and correlation constants (e. g., they give
a correlation table for the correlation between number of vines
to the hill and yield per hill) but do not determine the constants.
It is evident from what has preceded that biometrical methods
are rapidly gaining a place among the agricultural investigator’s
working tools. Keeping always in mind the caution expressed at
the beginning of this article that biometric zeal be not allowed
to outrun biological discretion this movement merits only com-
mendation and further encouragement. The agricultural investi-.
gator has an almost unique opportunity to make significant and
profitable application of biometric methods of research.
RAYMOND PEARL.
REFERENCES TO LITERATURE
L B K. Die Fehlerwahrscheinlichkeitsrechnung und ihre Anwen-
auf die Pflanzenzüchtung. Fühlings Landw. Ztg., 1908, pp.
ie
2. Clark, C. F. Variation and Correlation in Timothy. Cornell Agr. Expt.
Stat., Bul. 279, pp. 301-850, 1910.
3. Collins, Œ. N. The Value of First Generation To in Corn. U. 8.
Dept. Agr., Bur. Plant Ind., Bul. 191, pp. 7-45,
4. East, E. M. A Mendelian Tutevpretation of audi which is Appar-
ently Continuous. AMER. NAT., Vol. XLIV, pp. 65-82,
5. Ewing, E. C. Correlation of- Hin caine in Corn. cy ae Agr.
Expt. Stat., pa 287, pp. 67-100, 1910.
6. Grabner, E. Wechselbeziehungen zwischen den wertbestimmenden
sarsie der Braugerste. Jour. f. Landw., Bd. 57, pp. 321-
No. 535] NOTES AND LITERATURE 425
ts ara A. R. Potato ees and Studies at lene Farm in
1909. Minn. Agri. Expt.. Stat., Bul. 118, pp. 65-141,
8. Lill, T. G. The Relation of Size, oaks and Density Bf Kaia to
Germination in Wheat. Kansas Agr. Expt. Stat., Cire. 11, pp. 1-8,
1910.
9. Pearl, R., and Surface, F. M. Experiments in Breeding Sweet Corn.
Me. Pe Expt. Stat., Ann. Rpt., 1910, pp. 249-307.
10. Quante. Varigtionsstatistischs Untersuchungen über den Bau der Getrei-
dearten unter Zergrund vi ng der Kollektivmasslehre. Die landw;
Versuchs-Stationen, 1910, ae
11. Rietz, H. L., and Smith, L. “TL On the Measurement of Correlation
with Special Reference to some paves of Indian Corn. Ill. Agr.
Expt. Stat., Bul. 148, pp. 291-316, 1910.
12. Roberts, H. F. A Quantitative Method for the Determination of Hard-
ness in Wheat. Kansas Agr. Expt. Stat., Bul. 167, pp. 371-390, 1910.
13. Roberts, H. F. Breeding for Type of terns l in Wheat. Kansas Agr.
Expt. Stat., Bul. 170, pp. 99-138, 1910.
14. Roemer, Th. Aaea ions Arch. Rass.- u. Gesellsch. Biol., T
Ja
15. Schoute, J. C. Die i a fiir die Praxis der
Versuchsstationen. Die landw. Vers.-Stat., Bd. LXX, pp. 161-180,
1
16. Schoute, J.C. Zur (commen Reinheitsbestimmung von Leinkuchen
und oo Ibid., pp. 171-247, 1909
17. Shaw, J. K. Variation in A rer second Ann. Rpt. Mass.
pples.
Agr. Expt. Stat., Part I, pp. 194-213, 1910.
18. Shull, G. H. Hybridization Methods in nae eda Amer. Breeder’s
Mag., Vol. I, pp. 98-107, 1910.
19. idskbes per, W. W., and Thompson, J. Some Conditions Influencing the
Yield of Hops. U. S. Dept. Agr., Bur. Plant Ind., Cire. 56, pp. 1-12,
20. Waldron, L. R. A Suggestion Regarding Heavy and Light Seed Grain.
MER, NAT., Vol. 44, pp. 48-56, 1910.
21. Waugh, F. S., and Shaw, T. K. Variation in Peas. Twenty-first Ann.
Rpt. Mass. Agr. Expt. Stat., Part II, pp- 167-173, 1909.
Pl Bree St
22. Waugh, F. A., and Shaw, J. K. Plant ding Studies in Peas.
Twenty-second Ann. Rpt. Mass. Agr. Expt. Stat., Part I, pp. 168-
175, 1910.
23. Westgate, J. M. Variegated Alfalfa. pe S. Dept. Agr., Bur. Plant
nd., Bul. sah pp. 1-63, Pl. I-IX, 1
24, Zaleskiego, E . I. Zastosowanie EARL Czestotliwosei do selekcyi
oslin. (Application of Frequency of Polygons in Plant Breeding.)
month 1909, pp. 1-32. Autoreferat in German, pp. 1-6.
ON SEX-CHROMOSOMES IN HERMAPHRODITISM
RESEARCHES by Boveri and his pupils have shown in certain
nematodes, as in arthropods, the existence of two sorts of sperma-
tozoa, one of which contains one more chromosome or chromosome
426 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
component than does the other. Eggs fertilized by the one sort
of sperm develop into females, those fertilized by the other sort
develop into males, as is shown by a cytological study of the two
sexes, the female invariably containing the greater number of
chromosomes or chromosome components.
Some results of especial interest have been obtained by Boveri*
from studies of a little nematode (Rhabditis nigrovenosa) which
occurs as a parasite in the lung of the frog. A free-living genera-
tion alternates with the parasitic one. It has long been known
that the parasitic generation consists exclusively of females, but
the free-living one of both sexes. According to Leuckart and
Boveri, parthenogenesis may occur in the parasitic generation,
though it is not the exclusive method of reproduction in this
generation. For Anton Schneider, recently confirmed by Boveri,
found spermatozoa in the genital tract of the parasitic female,
and further established the remarkable fact that these sperma-
tozoa develop in the ovarian tubules of the young female herself,
which therefore, though a female in external form, is really a
hermaphrodite. The close-fertilized eggs of the parasitic worm
develop into embryos which are voided with the feces of the host
and form the free-living generation, consisting of sexually sepa-
rate males and females. These produce in turn, from fertilized
eggs, the parasitic generation composed exclusively of hermaph-
roditic females.
The question which Boveri studied was this—how is sex deter-
mined in the parasitic generation? Are the spermatozoa of the
self-fertilized mother dimorphic, and if so how do they arise?
First of all he established the fact that the spermatozoa found
in the parasitic females are of two sorts. The chromosomes may
be counted even in the mature sperm, and were found to be in
part of the spermatozoa siz in number, in part of them five.
In the egg and polar cells were found always six elements. The
fertilized egg therefore must contain either twelve or eleven chro-
mosomes. From one of the former sort doubtless develops a
female, from the latter a male. For in the male of the free-living
generation Boveri found 11 chromosomes disposed as follows in
the spermatocyte of the first order: 5 tetrads, 1 dyad (x chromo-
some), an arrangement explained as due to splitting of each of
the 11 elements, ten of which were disposed in five pairs, forming
'‘‘ Ueber das verhalten der Geschlechtschromosomen bei hermaphroditis-
ee Verh. d. phys.-med, Gesellschaft zu Würzburg, N. F., 41, pp. 83-97
11.
No. 535] NOTES AND LITERATURE 427
in their split condition tetrad groups, the eleventh being the un-
paired x element, as split a dyad. The x chromosome (dyad)
passes entire into one of the spermatocytes of the second order,
the end result being the formation of spermatids of two sorts,
those which contain six and those which contain five chromosomes.
Now arises the first difficulty. If the male individual forms
two sorts of spermatozoa, why are not offspring of both sexes
produced by the free-living generation, instead of females alone?
Boveri finds no evidence of degeneration in the spermatozoa
containing only 5 chromosomes, and he finds that both sorts are
received by the female at copulation, but assumes that the 5-
chromosome sort is for some reason incapable of fertilizing the
eggs, because from these develop only females containing 12
chromosomes. He relies here upon an analogy with the case
of aphids and phylloxerans worked out by Morgan and von
Baehr. In those cases, namely, the spermatids with the smaller
number of chromosomes fail to develop. In the present case,
though developed, they fail, in Boveri’s opinion, to function in
the fertilization of the egg.
Now comes the second difficulty. If the cells of the (hermaph-
roditic) female contain twelve chromosomes, how does she form
spermatozoa containing five chromosomes, which is less than the
half-number? Boveri finds that it is by a peculiar method of
cell-division in spermatogenesis. In oogenesis there appear in
the oocyte of the first order 6 tetrads which are distributed
equally at the maturation divisions. The egg accordingly always
contains 6 elements. But in spermatogenesis, in the same her-
maphrodite generation, there form 5 tetrads and in place of the
sixth a pair of separate dyads which are identified as x-elements.
These lag behind the tetrads in division, so that when the five
other elements have been distributed in cell-division these two
remain at the equator of the spindle. Boveri was unable to
ascertain just what does become of them but he assumes that
one spermatid lacks them altogether, and this becomes the male-
determining sperm. What Boveri failed to observe seems to
have been observed by W. Schleip,? who finds that one x-element
passes into half the spermatids, but the other remains on the
Spindle and does not enter a spermatid. Hence only half the
spermatids contain six elements, the others contain five. :
Why one process of reduction occurs in spermatogenesis and
* Ber. d. Naturf. Gesell., Freiburg i. Br., 19, 1911.
428 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
another in oogenesis is unknown. Boveri makes several sugges-
tions without adopting any of them as (1) position of the cells in
the egg-tube, (2) seasonal conditions (sperm-production occurs
first, egg-production later), (3) unequal plasmatic cell-divisions
in the young worm, differentiating sperm-producing from egg-
producing tissue.
As regards hermaphroditic animals in general, Boveri main-
tains that these, when they have the secondary characters of one
sex only have that of the female rather than of the male, citing
as examples gastropods and cirripeds. Females may retain the
capacity to develop sperm, but males do not retain the capacity
to develop eggs. For the male state is due to retrogressive varia-
tion, loss of cell-constituents, as for example of an x-chromosome.
Now in the female this loss may occur in certain reproductive
cells only, which then become reproductive cells of the male, i. e.,
spermatozoa. But in the male individual, since all its cells are
in the reduced state, reproductive bodies characteristic of the
female (eggs) can not be produced. Nevertheless the male,
though unable to form eggs (which we may assume can come
only from a 2x cell) is able to form female-producing gametes,
those with the full half number of chromosomes. |
In its bearing on general theories of sex-determination
Boveri’s paper is important. It provides a way of reconciling
the opposed views that sex-determination is independent of
environmental influences and that it is dependent upon them.
Both views are correct in part.
Sex is apparently in all cases controlled by cell structure, a
clear index of which is afforded by the number of the chromo-
somes found in the nucleus. The more complete, or fully duplex,
state is in all cases characteristic of the female; a more reduced
state, either partially duplex or simplex, is characteristic of the
male. But external conditions may influence the cell-constitu-
tion, and so indirectly determine sex. This is known to be the
case in parthenogenesis and according to Boveri’s observation in
this paper it may be true in hermaphroditism also. Thus in
rotifiers and daphnids abundant nutrition causes the unfertilized
egg to develop without undergoing reduction, i. e., in the fully
duplex (2N) condition, and a female results; poor nutrition
causes the unfertilized egg to delay development until matura-
tion is complete and it has passed into the simplex condition, and
a male results. The protoplasmic differences in the two cases
are not confined to differences in chromosome number, the cell
No. 535] NOTES AND LITERATURE 429
size is also different, the female egg being larger. But the size-
difference is not all-important, either, for the winter egg of the
rotifers or daphnids is still larger, yet undergoes complete reduc-
tion, but will not develop in this condition unless fertilized ; then
it produces a female, being in the fully duplex, 2N condition.
Sex in such cases is correlated with a particular cell-constitu-
tion, but this cell-constitution may be influenced by the environ-
ment; hence the environment may indirectly control sex.
Boveri’s present contribution adds another important case to
those previously on record. In the nematode, too, protoplasmic
conditions control sex, but it is quite possible that external
agencies as yet not identified may in this case also determine
those protoplasmic conditions and so indirectly determine sex.
The question naturally arises whether the same may not be
true in the higher animals also, those which are sexually sepa-
rate. This idea has been strongly advocated from time imme-
morial, and still has its adherents, but a really critical analysis of
the evidence shows that it rests on a very insufficient basis. In
fact the experimental evidence is almost conclusive against it.
There is no a priori reason why the cell structure which
differentiates male-producing from female-producing gametes
or zygotes should not be controllable through environmental
agencies in the higher animals, as in parthenogenetic animals.
But is it? This is a question of fact, in determining which we
must weigh evidence. The really critical examination of such
evidence was begun in 1900 by Cuénot in a notable paper pub-
lished in in the Bulletin Scientifique, and has been followed up
by several others who have carried out carefully planned experi-
mental researches, as, for example, Oscar Schultze. Their evi-
dence is almost wholly against the idea that sex in the higher
animals can be controlled either direetly or indirectly. Russo,*
indeed, still maintains this view. He holds that by feeding or in-
jections of lecithin the structure of the ovule in the rabbit ovary
may be altered, and that a female embryo develops from such
altered ovules. Now here are two questions of fact involved in
this evidence, first whether the cell-structure described by Russo
is induced by the lecithin treatment or by some other agency. This
is a question for cytologists to answer. The second question is
whether the cell structure described has anything to do with sex-
determination. This is a question in part for the experimental
a. to answer. From this point of view I have elsewhere
* Biol. sibs. 1911.
A an Sa
430 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
discussed Russo’s data. Two independent repetitions of his
breeding experiments, one made in Italy, the other in England,
have failed to confirm his conclusions, which therefore, as matters
stand, have slight weight.
W. E. CASTLE.
BUSSEY INSTITUTION,
HARVARD UNIVERSITY,
June 12, 1911.
NOTES ON ICHTHYOLOGY
IN the Abhandlungen of the Akademie der Wissenschaften, in
Bavaria, Vol. IV, Münich, 1910, Victor Franz has an elaborate
account of the bony fishes collected in Japan by Haberer and
Döflein. This is an important paper, containing descriptions
and figures of numerous new species.
In the Contributions from the Zoological Laboratory’ of
Indiana University, No. 76, part 2, Dr. Carl H. Eigenmann gives
a ‘‘Catalogue and Bibliography of the Fresh-water Fishes found
in Tropical and South Temperate America,’’ including all south
of the latitude of the mouth of the Rio Grande. Dr. Eigenmann
gives a discussion of the valid reasons which have led him to
retain the generic name Æquidens in place of Acara.
In the Bulletin of the Bureau of Fisheries, Vol. XXIX, 1909,
Jordan and Evermann discuss the ‘‘Salmonoid Fishes of the
Great Lakes,” with numerous plates, some of them in color.
The name Leucichthys of Dybowski is adopted in place of the
earlier name, Argyrosomus, of Agassiz, which was first used for
a marine fish. Four new species of Leucichthys or lake herring
are described, L. supernas from Lake Superior, L. cyanopterus
from Lake Superior, L. manitoulinus from Lake Huron, and
L. ontariensis from Lake Ontario. A new variety, L. harengus
arcturus, is described from the west end of Lake Superior. Two
new sub-generie names are adopted: Thrissomimus Gill for the
ordinary lake herring, the name Argyrosomus being preoceu-
pied; and Cisco for the deep-water forms.. In this paper it 1s
shown that the shore lake herring, instead of constituting 4
single species, are really several in number, at least six of them
in the Great Lakes deserving recognition as species.
In the Bulletin of the Bureau of Fisheries, Vol. XXIX,
1909, Dr. Charles W. Greene discusses in detail the migration
of the salmon in the Columbia River, treating with considerable
fullness the methods by which individuals may be marked.
No. 535] NOTES AND LITERATURE 431
A number of tables are given illustrating the movement of the
salmon, an average in the Lower Columbia being about seven
and a half miles per day.
In the Bulletin of the Illinois State Laboratory of Natural
History, Dr. Stephen A. Forbes gives a table and a series of
maps illustrating the distribution of the different species of
fishes, as traced in the state of Illinois. One hundred and fifty
native species are recognized, all of them represented in the
neighboring states, variously extending into the rather monot-
onous basin of Illinois, in accordance with the character of the
water. In the absence of geographical barriers, the causes
influencing their distribution are climatic, geologic and ecolog-
ical. A number of other generalizations are developed.
The British Museum of Natural History has issued the second
volume of George A. Boulenger’s important ‘‘Catalogue of the
Fresh-water Fishes of Africa.” This covers the catfishes, and a
portion of the carp family. Most of the species are illustrated
by good drawings.
In the Annales de L’Institut Oceanographique, of Prince
Albert of Monaco, Dr. Louis Fage gives an account of the many
forms of larval fishes taken in the deep- sea work of the Prince
of Monaco.
In the Philippine Journal of Science, Vol. V, July, 1910,
Mr. Alvin Seale describes four new species of fishes from Ban-
tayan Island.
In the Memoirs of the Indian Museum in Calcutta, Vol. III,
1910, Dr. N. Annandale and J. T. Jenkins describe and figure
numerous fishes taken in deep water by the steamer ‘‘Golden
Crown.’’
In the Memoirs of the Museum of Comparative Zoology, at
Harvard University, Vol. XXVI, 1911, William C. Kendall and
Edmund L. Goldsborough record the species of shore-fishes taken
by the Albatross in the South Seas, when in charge of Professor
Alexander Agassiz. Numerous new species are described, and
valuable notes are given on those recorded by previous authors.
In the Proceedings of the United States National Museum, Vol.
38, 1910, Jordan and Thompson discuss the ‘‘Gold-eye of Lake
Winnipeg,” an excellent food fish which has been generally over-
looked by authors, Amphiodon alosoides.
In the same Proceedings, Vol. 39, 1911, Jordan and Thompson
discuss the ‘‘Fishes of the Families Lobotide and Lutianide,’’
found in the waters of Japan.
432 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
In the same Proceedings, Vol. 39, 1911, the same authors dis-
cuss the species of the family Sciwnidw found in the waters of
Japan.
In the same Proceedings, Vol. 38, 1910, Barton A. Bean and
Alfred C. Weed discuss.the ‘‘Venomous Toadfishes of South
America’’ belonging to Thalassophryne and related genera, with
figures of the different species and a discussion of the venomous
spines by which they are armed.
In the same Proceedings, Vol. 39, 1911, Theodore Gill discusses
the ‘‘Structure and Habits of the Wolffishes.’? The genus
Lycichthys, based on Anarrhicas latifrons, is here fully defined.
A new species, Lycichthys fortidens, from the North Atlantic, is
described an
In the same Provaddingi, Vol. 38, 1910, William Converse Ken-
dall describes a collection of fishes made in Labrador by Owen
Bryant. Among these are certain sea trout not belonging to the
ordinary brook-trout species, Salvelinus fortinalis. The species
in question is provisionally identified as Salvelinus stagnalis, but
it is possible that it is a species still undescribed. The name
Salmo immaculatus was probably originally given to this species,
but the name is preoccupied.
In the same Proceedings, Vol. 38, 1910, Barton W. Evermann
and William C. Kendall compare the chub-mackerels, Scomber
colias, of the Atlantic, with those of the Pacific, called S. japoni-
cus. They find the two species different, in measuring the speci-
mens examined, the head being especially larger in the Pacific
fish—about 34 instead of 33 in the length of the body. Com-
parison of other specimens made at Stanford University does not
seem to bear out these differences, and the propriety of separating
the Atlantie species from the earlier named Japanese form as
Scomber colias is still doubtful.
In the same Proceedings, Vol. 37, 1910, Barton A. Bean and
Alfred C. Weed discuss the Japanese genus Anteliochimæra, in
which they show that the genus is probably identical with
Harriotta, an Atlantic genus of Chimera.
In the same Proceedings, Vol. 39, 1910, Barton W. Evermann
and Homer B. Latimer give a ‘‘Catalogue of the Fishes,’’ forty
in number, known to inhabit the Lake of the Woods.
In the Annals and Magazine of Natural History, November,
1910, C. Tate Regan discusses the families of Zeide and
Caproide.
In the same Annals Mr. Regan discusses the origin and evolu-
tion of the order of the flounders. He regards them as descende
No. 535] NOTES AND LITERATURE 433
from perchlike fishes—the genus Psettodes with a spinous dorsal,
being the most primitive of the group. He divides the flatfishes
into four families, Bothide, Pleuronectide, Soleide and Cyno-
glosside. He finds no evidence that the flounders are related
to Zeus, as suggested by Boulenger. The relation to the fossil
genus Amphistium seems to be possible. In Regan’s judgment
this fish is a percoid, allied to Psettus or to Platax. The adjust-
ment of the genera of flounders is somewhat different from that
usually accepted.
In the Proceedings of the Biological Society of Washington,
Professor T. D. A. Cockerell discusses the scales of various soft-
rayed fishes. He finds in the structure of the scale valuable
characters for the distinction of genera and subgenera, in differ-
ent groups of fishes. This is the first critical study of scales with
a view to using their characters in the classification of genera,
and Mr. Cockerell’s observation should be extended throughout
ichthyology.
In the Bulletin of the American Museum of Natural History,
Vol. XXVIII, 1910, John Treadwell Nichols discusses the
occurrence of the pelagic pipefish, Siphostoma pelagicum. They
occur especially in the drifting Gulf weed of the mid-ocean. Mr.
Nichols has also examined the type of Caranx forsteri from the
Ile de France. He considers that this species is identical with
the marginatus of Gill; the rhabdotus of Jenkins; and the elacate
of Jordan and Evermann. The specimen called forsteri in
Jordan and Evermann’s Hawaiian report, he thinks identical
with the Atlantic species latus.
In the Bulletin of the American Museum of Natural History,
Vol. 28, John T. Nichols describes two new blennies from Florida,
Stathmonotus tekla from Key West, and Blennius fabbri from
Miami.
In the Annals and Magazine of Natural History, 1910, Holt
and Byrne describe a new deep-water fish as Grammatostomias
flagellibarba.
In the Bulletin of the American Museum of Natural History,
Vol. XXVIII, 1910, Russell J. Coles describes an interesting col-
lection of fishes from Beaufort, N. C. One of these is Mobula
olfersi, the small devil fish. Several other rare West Indian
Species are recorded by Mr. Coles..
In the American Naturauist, 1909, E. W. Gudger records a
number of species of interesting fishes found also at Beaufort.
In the Proceedings of the Royal Society of Queensland, 1910,
434 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
Mr. J. Douglas Ogilby describes a number of new species of
fishes from the neighborhood of Brisbane.
In the Notes from the Leyden Museum, Vol. XXXII, Professor
Max Weber describes a number of new species of fishes from New
Guinea.
In the Revista do Museu Paulista, Vol. VIII, 1910, Professor
Rodolpho von Ihering describes a number of new eatfishes from
the neighborhood of Sao Paulo, in Brazil.
In the Bulletin of the American Museum of Natural History,
Vol. XXX, 1911, Dr. Charles H. Gilbert describes a number of
lantern fishes. One of them, Lampanyctus nicholsi, is new, taken
near the Falkland Islands.
In Science, Vol. XX XI, Dr. George Wagner, of the University
of Wisconsin, describes a new Cisco, from Lake Michigan, under
the name of Argyrosomus johanne. Of this species a colored
figure is given by Jordan and Evermann in the article noticed
above.
In the Annals of Scottish Natural History, January, 1911, Mr.
C. Tate Regan discusses the giant pike of Loch Ken, in Scotland,
which reaches a weight of over seventy pounds.
In the Annals and Magazine of Natural History, Vol. VII, Mr.
Regan discusses the ‘‘Systematie Position of the Genus Macrist-
ium.” M. chavesi is a deep-water fish which represents a family
related to Alepocephalus.
In the same Annals, Vol. VIII, Mr. Regan discusses the ‘‘Lam-
preys of the World.’’ He regards Bathymyzon as an ordinary
lamprey with the teeth feeble. In Ichthyomyzon he recognizes
two species, bdellium and castaneus, rejecting the name concolor
as being based on a larva, perhaps of Lampetra. The species,
spadiceus, japonicus and wilderi are referred to the genus
Entosphenus instead of Lampetra.
In the Annals of the Carnegie Museum, Vol. VII, 1910, Dr.
Jordan describes a series of fossil fishes belonging to the Car-
negie Museum, and obtained by Dr. John C. Branner in Brazil.
These fishes are from Eocene rocks at Riacho Doce in Brazil.
Two new genera are described, Ellipes and Dastilbe, both of these
being based on diminutive herring.
In the Transactions of the New A ealand Tastitule, Vol. XLII,
1909, Edgar R. Waite gives a ‘‘Catalogue of Fishes from
Kermadec and Norfolk Islands.’’
In another paper in the same Annals he gives notes on various
New Zealand fishes.
In the Annals of the Carnegie Pushing Vol. VII, Jordan done
No. 535] NOTES AND LITERATURE 435
Thompson describe a collection of fishes made by Professor J. F.
Abbott at Irkutsk in Siberia. Several figures of rare species are
given.
In the Proceedings of the Biological Society of Washington,
William C. Kendall shows that the trout-perch should be called
Percopsis omiscomaycus. The forgotten name of Walbaum
(Salmo omiscomaycus) clearly belongs to this curious fish.
In the ‘‘Fortieth Annual Report of the Fisheries of Rhode
Island,’’ Dr. Henry C. Tracy gives a list of the fishes known to
inhabit that state. Among these are several rare forms from
the West Indies.
In Science, Vol. XXXII, George Wagner discusses the stickle-
back of Lake Superior, and shows that Eucalia pygmea from
Lake Superior is not distinct from the ordinary Eucalia incon-
stans.
In the Bulletin of the American Museum of Natural History,
Vol. XXIII, 1907, Newton Miller describes the fishes of the
Montagua River in Guatemala. The following new species are
recorded: Pecilia amates, Thyrina meeki, Cichlasoma spilurum,
Cichlasoma globosum, Cichlasoma mañana, Cichlasoma acutum.
In the Arkiv for Zoologie Band 4, Ribeiro describes some cat-
fishes from the Iporanga River, near São Paulo in Brazil.
In the Proceedings of the Biological Society of Washington,
Barton W. Evermann and T. D. A. Cockerell deseribe three new
species of minnows, Richardsonius thermophilus from Warm
Springs, Ore. ; Notropis kendalli from Cross Lake Thoroughfare,
Me. ; and Notropis universitatis from Boulder, Col.
In the same Proceedings, Mr. Cockerell and Mr. Otis Callaway
describe the scales of various minnows of the United States. A
subgenus, Coccogenia, is established for Notropis coccogenis.
In the Annals and Magazine of Natural History, Vol. VII,
1911, Mr. Regan discusses the families of Berycide and their re-
lationship. He proposes to regard the Berycomorphi as forming
a distinct order, and a second order, Xenoberyces, is established
for the Stephanoberycide, Melamphaide and other relatives.
In the Proceedings of the United States National Museum, Vol.
38, 1910, Professor E. C. Starks and W. F. Thompson review the
flounders of the genus Pleuronichthys, with two new species,
P. nephelus from San Juan Islands, Puget Sound, and P. ocella-
tus from the Gulf of California.
In the Annals and Magazine of Natural History, Vol. VII,
1911, Mr. Regan discusses the ‘‘Anatomy and Classification of
the Teleostean Fishes of the Order Iniomi,’’ bringing the various : | :
436 | THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
groups into clearer relations with each other. He places the
genus Ateleopus among the Iniomi.
In the Philippine Journal of Science, Vol. V, 1910, Alvin Seale
describes a collection of fishes from Borneo.
In the Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Phil-
adelphia, April, 1910, Henry W. Fowler describes and figures the
types of many species of American fishes of the genus Notropis.
In the same Proceedings, Mr. Fowler describes Paralepis barra-
cudina, a new species from Corson’s Inlet, New Jersey.
In the same Proceedings, Mr. Fowler describes various little-
known fishes from New Jersey, and also a number of new species
of ganoid fishes. He divides the garpikes into two genera,
Lepisosteus and Cylindrosteus. Instead of the three species
usually recognized, Mr. Fowler discussed twelve. It has been
evident for some time that the number of species in this group is
much greater than the three admitted by Jordan and Evermann.
The value of the different species defined by Mr. Fowler, however,
is yet to be proved. It will be necessary to have a very large
amount of material before these questions of identity can be
fully decided.
The species recognized by Mr. Fowler are: Lepisosteus
huronensis, L. osseus, L. treculii, L. clintonii, Cylindrosteus
platostomus, C. scabriceps, C. productus, C. agassizii, C. castel-
naudii, ©. megalops, C. tristæchus, O. tropicus.
In the same Proceedings, Mr. Fowler describes Dixonina
nemoptera, a new species of albuloid from Santa Domingo. This
genus differs from Albula in having the last ray of the dorsal
and anal filamentous.
In the Proceedings of the National Museum, Vol. 40, 1911, W.
C. Kendall describes two very rare species of sole, Gymnachirus
fasciatus, from Long Key, Fla., and G. nudus from Tisbury
Great Pond, on Marthas Vineyard. Both are doubtless strays
from the Gulf Stream.
In the Bulletin of the University of California, Geology, Vol.
V, James Z. Gilbert describes a fossil flounder, Evesthes jordani,
notable for its large mouth, from Miocene rocks near Lompoc, in
California. This is one of the oldest-known of fossil flounders,
and its relations are evidently with the halibut tribe, and with
the genera still represented on the California coast.
In Science, Vol. 30, H. H. Newman shows clearly that the killi-
fish Fundulus majalis is never viviparous.
In the Proceedings of the United States National Museum for
No. 535] NOTES AND LITERATURE 437
1911, Barton A. Bean and Alfred C. Weed discuss the habits of
the electric ray, Narcine brasiliensis.
In the same Proceedings, for 1911, Dr. Hugh M. Smith and
Lewis Radcliffe describe three new species of butterfly fishes from
the Philippines.
In the Mémoires de l’Académie Royale des Sciences et des
Lettres de Danemark, Dr. Hector F. E. Jungersen describes in
great detail the anatomy of the pipefishes and trumpet fishes, and
their relatives. In this, numerous errors of interpretation made
by different authors are corrected, and the paper is one of high
merit.
In the Annals and Magazine of Natural History, Vol. VII,
1911, Mr. C. Tate Regan discusses the fishes related to the silver
gar and flying fish, in the order of Synentognathi. He recognizes
two suborders, the one containing the families of Belonide and
Scomberesodine, the other containing the Hemirhamphine and
Exoccetide. He suggests the close relation or possible identity
of the fossil genus Cobitopsis with Chriodorus. Regan regards
Esos lucius, the supposed Esos of Pliny, as the type of Esox.
He retains Belone for the European silver gar, rejecting Ram-
phistoma as a nomen nudum.
In the same Annals, Mr. Regan describes the new order Micro-
cyprini, containing the Amblyopside and the Peciliide, each of
which families represents with him a distinct suborder. This
leaves in the order of Haplomi only three families, the Esocide,
Umbride and Dalliide. He thinks that the Haplomi are related
to the isospondylous fishes, while the Microcyprini are nearer to
the Synentognathi. Mr. Regan notes that the genera Retropinna,
Microstoma and Salans lack the mesocoracoid characteristics of
the other salmon-like fishes. Nevertheless, he regards these along
with the fresh-water trout-like fishes of the southern hemisphere,
the Galaxiide and the Haplochitonide, as true Salmonoids, al-
though these latter have also lost the mesocoracoid. The fossil
family of Enchodontide, Regan regards as an ally of the
Stomiatide. The Kneriide he regards as near to the Chanide.
Regan regards Panchax as a genus distinct from Aplocheilus.
Aplocheilus originally contained two distinet types, but the name
was definitely restricted by Bleeker to the group having no
vomerine teeth. Oryzias, which belongs to the latter group,
Regan regards as a synonym of Haplochilus. Apparently the
short jaws of Oryzias should distinguish it from Aplocheilus,
though it may be identical with some of the African genera.
In the same Annals, Mr. Regan discusses the order of Salmo-
438 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
peree. Beside Percopsis and Columbia, he adds to this group a
genus Aphredoderus, this form without an adipose fin consti-
tuting a distinct family. He notes that the study of the anatomy
of the last genus does not indicate any real affinity with the
sunfishes.
In the same Annals, Mr. Regan discusses the allies of the
genus Cirrhites. In this group he finds five distinct families.
Over thirty years ago, when the great house of Godeffroy, of
Hamburg, was dominating the trade of the South Seas, this
company undertook the establishment of a natural history mu-
seum in Hamburg, and with this the publication of a journal
ealled the Journal des Museum Godeffroy, in which the life of
the South Seas should be set forth. This journal was sumptu-
ously printed, and illustrated with expensive colored plates. One
of the important articles was that descriptive of Andrew Gar-
rett’s Fische der Südsee, Andrew Garrett having made an ex-
tensive collection of fishes in various islands, and having made
colored paintings of a large number of the species. During the
time, 1876-1881, the first two volumes of the Fische der Süd-
see appeared, the author being Dr. Albert Gunther, keeper of
the British Museum. The work ended abruptly in the middle
of the family of Labridw. The great house of Godeffroy, having
undertaken in Europe enterprises beyond its control, went into
collapse, and the publication of its journal was suspended. In
1909, under the management of Friedrichsen & Company (pub-
lishers), the work has been resumed and brought to completion,
with the assistance of Mr. C. Tate Regan, of the British Museum.
This has been made possible by the ‘‘munificence of the family
of Dr. Wilhelm Martin von Godeffroy.’’
This completed work is a monument to the industry and keen
intelligence of Dr. Gunther, and it is the most important treatise
concerning the fishes of the region between Hawaii and Borneo
known as the South Seas. In the different papers by Jordan and
Evermann, and their associates, Snyder, Fowler and Seale, much
of the same ground has been covered, and Dr. Giinther gives
special credit to ‘‘the energy’’ of these American authors in
their investigations, particularly of the Hawaiian and Samoan
archipelagos. Comparing this work with Jordan & Seale’s
‘‘ Fishes of Samoa,’’ we find a general agreement on all matters
where adequate material is present. The American writers gen-
erally have given proposed new species the benefit of doubt, by
not reducing them to synonymy until it is shown that the new
name is a mere synonym. On the other hand, Dr. Giinther has
No. 535] NOTES AND LITERATURE _ 439
consistently left new species in synonymy unless their right to
independent rank has been made clear. In general, the British
Museum publications have been characterized by the assumption
that a species is not valid until it is represented in the collections
of the museum. There is room for many differences of opinion
in regard to the relation of certain forms, and in regard to mat-
ters of nomenclature, but there can be no difference of opinion
as to the great value of this work, and as to the accuracy of these
fine plates, most of these being copies of the colored drawings
of Mr. Garrett.
In the Zoological Magazine of Tokyo, Dr. Kishinouye has a
paper on the Sparoid fishes of Japan. It is probably a valuable
paper, but, being written almost entirely in Japanese, it becomes
inaccessible to naturalists of the rest of the world, and it is
hoped that this will not establish a precedent, at least unless a
résumé in some modern language can accompany the descrip-
tions of new species, and the new material which the writer is
able to add.
Davip STARR JORDAN.
STANFORD UNIVERSITY.
| SOME RECENT BOOKS ON FOSSIL PLANTS
THE appearance within two years of three general works on
paleobotany, is a sufficiently marked indication: of the’ great
interest which this phase of botany at the present time is exciting
in England.! Much of the most important work which is now
being published by the British botanists deals with fossil plants.
The English botanist is in some respects at a great disadvan-
tage compared with his American colleagues. The comparatively
meagre flora of the British Islands has already been exhaustively
studied, and is a strong contrast to the extensive and varied
flora of North America, which, except in the older parts of the
country, still offers a rich field to the systematist and plant-
geographer, as well as to students of morphology and physiology.
This difference in the natural advantages of the two countries no
doubt explains to some extent the greater interest in fossil
plants shown by the English botanists. But unquestionably
much more important is the availability of great collections of
— fossils awaiting investigation; and the important
* Scott, D. H., ‘‘ Studies in Fossil Botany,’’ 2 vols., London, ER and
Charles k 190 908-9. Seward, A. C., ‘‘ Fossil Plants, ”? Vol. II, Cam-
bridge University Press, 1910. Stopes, Marie C., ‘‘Ancient Plants,’’
Blackie & Son, London, 1910.
440 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
results already obtained by workers in this field offer great in-
ducements to the young botanist. It must not be inferred that
no interest is shown in the study of fossil plants by American
workers, but paleobotany has not received o same attention
here as in England.?
The many important contributions to the study of fossil plants
by Scott and Seward are familiar to all students of paleobotany,
and their treatises have the stamp of authority. Miss Stopes has
published papers of much value, and her little volume presents
in clear and fairly untechnical language some of the most impor-
tant topics of the science. While the books of Professors Scott
and Seward are designed primarily for botanical students, and
are necessarily technical in their treatment, Miss Stopes’s volume
is intended mainly for the layman, and seems well suited to its
purpose.
Professor Scott’s two volumes deal almost entirely with the
vascular plants, especially the Pteridophytes, which, as might be
expected from the author’s intimate knowledge of these forms,
are handled in a thoroughly adequate fashion. The first volume
treats of the Pteridophytes proper, while the second deals with
the seed-bearing forms, including a very full and satisfactory
treatment of those seed-bearing ferns, the ‘‘Pteridosperms’’ or
‘*Cyeadofilices,’’ the investigations of which during the last ten
or fifteen years have made such profound changes in our con-
ceptions of the nature of the fern-like plants of the Paleozoic.
The Cycads and their fossil relations, the Benettiteæ, or
Cycadeoides, are also treated at length, and the Cordaitales
receive ample treatment; but the Conifers are passed over very
briefly, and no account at all is given of the fossil Angiosperms,
a group which is in woeful need of careful treatment by com-
petent investigators.
ofessor Seward’s work is on a somewhat larger scale, and
takes into account the whole vegetable kingdom. The work is,
however, incomplete as yet. The present volume, the second of
a proposed series of three, is devoted mainly to the Lyeopods and
ferns. The former volume comprised the Thallophytes and
Bryophytes, together with the most of the Equisetiner. The
third and concluding volumes proposes to deal with the seed-
bearing plants, including the Pteridosperms.
*In Coulter and Chamberlain’s recent valuable treatise on the Gymno-
sperms, the fossil forms are treated at length, and this section of the book
is one of its most valuable features. The important work of Wieland,
Jeffry and other students of fossil plants in America must not be overlooked.
No. 535] NOTES AND LITERATURE 441
With these three books, at the same time reliable in their state-
ments, and attractively written, English and American students
can have no excuse for ignorance of the present status of paleo-
botany.
The attitude of botanists toward the study of fossil plants has
undergone a marked change of late years. It is now no longer
true that the students of fossil plants know little or nothing
about living ones, and the great advancements of late years are
largely due to the fact that recent students of fossil plants are
thoroughly trained botanists. Moreover, as in other branches
of botany, greatly improved methods have been developed, and
the microscopic study of sections of petrified plant-tissues now
make it possible in many cases to examine accurately the tissues
of the fossil plants, and to compare them with the living forms
supposed to be related to them. The perfection of some of these
sections of fossil tissues is quite astonishing.
Of course it is the firmer tissues, like the epidermis and woody
structures of the vascular plants which are most commonly pre-
served, and it is not strange that the paleobotanist should lay
great stress upon the importance of the vascular skeleton which
is so perfectly preserved. Students of living plants sometimes
think that the great morphological importance attributed to the
vascular system has been rather exaggerated, and there is no
question that some of the far-reaching conclusions drawn from
what to the layman seems very inadequate evidence, are not
justified when they are taken in connection with the evidence
furnished by a study of living forms. One can not accept with-
out reserve many of the conclusions drawn from the study of
fragmentary material, often very badly preserved. Neverthe-
less, no one can dispute that great advances have been made in
our knowledge of the history of the development of the plant
kingdom resulting from the discoveries made by students of
fossil plants.
The problems which confront the student of fossil plants, and
the difficulties which he encounters, are well set forth in the
introductory chapter of Dr. Scott’s book. The extremely frag-
mentary character of the record, and especially the great differ-
ence shown by different periods in the preservation of plant
remains, are clearly set forth. The Carboniferous, as the stu-
dents of fossil plants are aware, affords the richest fossil flora
known, and it is especially with the Carboniferous flora that
Dr. Scott concerns
As it is among the Paluoanio Pteridophytes that we are to
442 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
look for the ancestors of the modern seed-bearing plants, the
rich pteridophytie flora of the Carboniferous naturally takes
first place, and it can be readily understood that an absorption
in the study of these interesting fossils should perhaps over-
shadow the importance of other forms. One ‘can not help feeling
that if the search for remains of the Bryophytes in the Paleozoic
rocks had been pursued with the same zeal as has been shown in
the study of the vascular plants, something more than the ex-
tremely fragmentary evidences of their existence would be forth-
coming.
Professor Seward, in his first volume published in 1898, has
given an admirable account of the different methods of fossiliza-
tion, and also the distribution of fossils. He points out in a very
interesting and convincing way the evidences of the existence
of the same factors at work at the present day as in times past.
Perhaps the most striking fact brought out in the distribution
of plant remains is the at first puzzling occurrence of fresh-
water and land plants in deposits of evident marine origin. Pro-
fessor Seward, however, shows that the great rivers of to-day,
like the Amazon and the Mississippi, are carrying out to sea
rafts of vegetation which may very well at some distant time be
discovered as fossils covered by marine deposits, to puzzle the
geologists of that future epoch. :
The history of the fossil Thallophytes remains very much as it
was at the time Professor Seward’s first volume was published,
a rather significant comment on the neglect of these important
plants when compared with the great advances made in our
knowledge of the fossil Pteridophytes and Gymnosperms during
the past decade.
As most of the Thallophytes, especially the alge, are extremely
delicate and perishable organisms, the rarity of recognizable
fossil remains is not to be wondered at. Where there is a cal-
careous incrustation, as in the coralline alge and many
Siphonex, very perfect fossils have been preserved. The latter
group is especially well represented in a fossil state and has re-
ceived considerable attention from the paleobotanists. Some of
these Siphonew can be traced back to the Silurian, and the
order is evidently a very old one. A study of these alge shows
that, as at the present day, they played a by no means unim-
portant rôle as reef-builders.
Among the most characteristic of fossil plants are the Diatoms.
While these have left enormous deposits of their flinty shells 10
the Cretaceous and later rocks, they are practically unknown in
No. 535] NOTES AND LITERATURE 443
the earlier formations. It is highly probable that in spite of
their simple structure the Diatoms are really comparatively re-
cent types. Their enormous numbers and practically universal
distribution at the present time, indicate that they are admirably
adapted to existing conditions. They particularly abound in the
Arctic and Antarctic seas.
While the Fungi are rarely preserved in a very satisfactory
condition, there is abundant evidence of their presence in the
Paleozoic rocks.
The geological history of the Bryophytes is in a very unsatis-
factory condition. Of the liverworts only a few impressions are
recorded, and these, according to Seward, are all from Mesozoic
or Tertiary formations, and so closely resemble the living species
that they throw no light upon the early history of the group.
Very few fossil remains which can with certainty be referred to
the true mosses are known, but the possibility of confusing the
remains of mosses with small Lycopods or even fragments of
coniferous branches has to be taken into account.
It has been suggested that the very small number of unmis-
takable Bryophytes which has been recorded in a fossil state
might be explained in the same way as we have suggested for
the absence from the Paleozoic rocks of Diatoms; but the cases
are hardly parallel since the Bryophytes, particularly the liver-
worts, give every evidence of being old and: generalized types,
and do not appear to be particularly well adapted to modern
conditions, except as these duplicate what we may assume to
have been the conditions during the Carboniferous. It is only
in the extremely moist, even climate of the mountain tropics,
where the other Paleozoic type, the Pteridophytes reaches its
greatest luxuriance, that the liverworts form a conspicuous
feature of the flora. Moreover, the liverworts are far less
plastic, the number of species, even of wide-spread genera (ex-
cept in the leafy forms) being usually very small. Both their
distribution and their structures point unmistakably to their —
being a primitive group.
The absence of liverworts from the early geological forma-
tions can most readily be explained on the score of their great |
delicacy, which would prevent their being preserved in a recog-
nizable form. .Even were we to admit that the liverworts are
modern types, we should still have to explain why their progeni-
tors, and the presumably similar progenitors of the ferns, have
not been found in a fossil condition. A parallel case is found in
the Cretaceous and Tertiary formations, where the great deposits
444 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
of perfectly preserved plant remains are almost entirely referable
to trees and shrubs, while the host of herbaceous plants, like the
grasses and delicate herbs forming the carpet of the forests, are
conspicuous by their absence. If magnolias and maples were
abundantly developed in the Tertiary forest, we may be sure
that there were also buttercups and violets, although we have no
impressions of their leaves and flowers. The same explanation
for the extreme scarcity of impressions of herbaceous plants in
the Cretaceous and Tertiary formations may be applied to the
much more delicate hepatic flora of the Paleozoic.
In the light of comparative morphology, we think most botan-
ists will agree that it is in the highest degree probable that the
simpler liverworts, like Anewra and Pellia, are extremely ancient
types, which, like the majority of the alge, owing to their very
delicate and perishable tissues, simply have failed to leave recog-
nizable fossil traces. The only structures of the liverworts which
one might hope to recognize in a fossil state are the elaters. It
may be that a careful examination of sections of the masses of
petrified vegetation resulting from the débris of the Carbonifer-
ous forests, may show liverwort elaters, but as yet no such discov-
ery has been recorded. It is also by no means impossible that
among the numerous beautifully preserved leaf impressions of
the Paleozoic ferns, some might under specially favorable condi-
tions show traces of epiphyllous liverworts, such as are common
on fern leaves at the present day in wet tropical forests.
It is the Pteridophytes and their allies among the simpler
seed-bearing plants that have largely monopolized the attention
of the paleobotanists during the past decade or two. The results
of these investigations have been to quite readjust the views long
held as to the real nature of many of the Paleozoic fossils. These
changes have been mainly among the fern-types, although among
the Equisetineæ and Lycopods there have also been important
discoveries.
The history of the fossil Equisetinee need not be dwelt upon
here. It is sufficiently well known that this class, at the present
day reduced to some twenty-five species belonging to the single
genus Equisetum, was an important factor in the rich Paleozoic
flora. Professor Scott, in the first volume of his studies, gives an
excellent account of the present status of our knowledge of this
class.
The Lycopods, also a comparatively degenerate group at the
present day, showed much greater range of structure and size
than at present. The most important discovery of late years
No. 535] NOTES AND LITERATURE 445
among the fossil Lycopods is the fact that some of the great fos-
sil club-mosses, e. g., Lepidocarpon, bore unmistakable seeds.
This adds one more instance of the independent origin of seeds
in quite unrelated orders of Pteridophytes.
It is among the ferns, however, that the interest of the paleo-
botanist has been especially centered, both in England and on
the continent. The abundance and perfection of the fern-like
fossils of the Paleozoic, especially those of the Carboniferous,
are sufficiently familiar, but a very large percentage of them are
merely impressions of sterile fronds. Numerous investigations
of these supposed fern-leaves have proved beyond question that
they are not ferns in the strict sense of the word, but are the
sterile leaves of fern-like plants which bore true seeds. It has
become apparent that these seed-bearing ferns, ‘‘Pterido-
sperms,’’ formed a very important feature of the Carboniferous
flora, perhaps outnumbering the true ferns. Indeed, some en-
thusiastic students of these interesting plants have gone so far
as to doubt whether true ferns existed at all at this period !—
a conclusion with which it is needless to say few botanists would
be inclined to agree. True ferns must have preceded Pterido-
sperms, and it is hardly likely that none of them should have
left fossil remains, not to mention the fact that many of the
fossil fronds bear sporangia of whose true fern nature there can
be no reasonable doubt.
Of the living ferns, the Marattiacee are best represented
among the Paleozoic fossils, and their primitive nature is also
shown by a study of their structure and development. Most of
the Pteridosperms were probably derived from ferns of this
type, and it is in many cases apparently not possible to decide
whether certain leaves bearing sporangia of the Marattiaceous
type are true ferns, or whether they represent the microsporangia
of some Pteridosperms. It does not follow, however, as some
students of Pteridosperms have argued, that because the
sporangia of one doubtful Marattiaceous fern have been shown
to belong to a Pteridosperm, that therefore we must suspect all
of the sporangia of the Marattiaceous type.
The geological history of the other living family of the euspo-
rangiate ferns, the Ophioglossacex, is extremely unsatisfactory.
The great rarity of recognizable fossils belonging to this family
may perhaps be explained by the perishable nature of their
leaves. The soft leaves of Ophioglossum and Botrychium and
the absence of indurated cells from the sporangium would make
these plants very poorly fitted for preservation in a fossil state.
446 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
It is, however, by no means impossible that some of the earliest
known ferns, the Botryopteridew, may have been related to the
Ophioglossacee. Both the form of the leaves, and the sporangia
which were borne on special leaf segments, are suggestive of the
Ophioglossacew, and there are also certain anatomical resem-
blanees.
One of the earliest fern-like fossils is the Devonian genus
Archeopteris. This fossil in the venation of the leaves suggests
the simpler types of Botrychium, and the sporangia are borne on
special leaf segments, which, however, it must be said more
nearly resemble Osmunda than they do Botrychium. Professor
Seward is inclined to believe that the sporangia of Archwopteris
are really pollen-sacs of a Pteridosperm, stating that they are
much larger than the sporangia of any known fern, being two or
three mm. in length. It is evident that Professor Seward over-
looked the Ophioglossacee in making this comparison, and it is
with these that the comparison really should be made. The
sporangia of Archwopteris are described as pear-shaped sacs,
two to three mm. in length. These are nearly equalled in size by
some species of Botrychium, such as B. Lunaria and B. silai-
folium, in which the globular sporangia may be 1.5 mm. in diam-
eter, while the sporangia of the large species of Ophioglossum
very much exceed in size these figures. In O. pendulum the
sporangia are probably larger than those of any other living
Pteridophyte, and may reach a diameter of four millimeters.
It is clear then that the mere question of size is not a valid argu-
ment for considering Archwopteris a Pteridosperm rather than
a homosporous fern.
The evidence of the fossil record entirely bears out the conclu-
sions based upon a study of the living ferns that the condition
in which the sporophyll, or parts of it, are entirely devoted to
spore-production, as in Ophioglossum and Osmunda, is a more
primitive condition than that in which the sporangia are pro-
duced upon the backs of unmodified leaves.
There is abundant evidence from a study of rutin Arche-
goniates that the sporophyte of the fern is the result of the
elaboration of the sporogonium of some bryophytie ancestor.
This being the case, it necessarily follows that the sporophylls
are older phylogenetically than the sterile leaves, and are not
secondary modifications of the latter. It is to be hoped that stu-
dents of the Botryopterideæ and other archaic fern types will
make a thorough comparison of these with the existing. Ophio-
glossaceæ, in the light of the most recent developmental studies
No. 535] NOTES AND LITERATURE 447
on the latter. Whether or not we admit the relationship of
Ophioglossum with these ancient ferns, there is no question that
both in regard to the early history of the sporophyte and in the
structures of the adult sporophyte, Ophioglossum most nearly
represents among living ferns what we may fairly assume to
have been the primitive type from which the higher ferns have
sprung.
In view of the abundant evidence of the primitive nature
shown by the living Ophioglossacer, we can not believe that
these plants did not exist in the earlier geological epochs; and
the failure te record them is due either to the complete disor-
ganization of their delicate tissues, or to a failure by investiga-
tors to recognize the ferns allied to them which may have been
found in a fossil state.
Dr. Scott in his second volume gives an excellent account of
the Cordaitales and the Cyeads, but it is to be regretted that his
treatment of the Conifers is so brief. He explains this by stating
that the present knowledge of the fossil Conifers is not suffi-
ciently exact to make a satisfactory general treatment feasible.
It is to be hoped that in the concluding part of Professor Sew-
ard’s treatise they will receive adequate attention.
The Cordaitales, the earliest known seed plants and com-
pletely extinct at the present time, are remarkable for the per-
fection with which their floral structures, as well as their vege-
tative tissues, have been preserved. They evidently represent a
more or less synthetic type with apparent connections with sev-
eral of the other great groups, but their exact place in the
system is still not quite satisfactorily settled.
The advance in our knowledge of the ‘‘Cyeadophytes’’—the
Cycads and their relations—during the past ten years has been
very great, largely due to the labors of an American paleobotan-
ist, Dr. Wieland. His remarkable studies on the wonderfully
preserved Mesozoic Cycads of the Black Hills Region of South
Dakota and Wyoming, form one of the most notable contribu-
tions to fossil botany that have been made for many years.
These Mesozoic Cycads are separated from the recent type of
Cycads as a distinct family, the Benettitee or Cycadeoider. It
is the floral structures of these plants that have attracted the
greatest attention, as they show a curious similarity in their gen-
eral structure to such a flower as a magnolia, although they are
gymnosperms. This resemblance is so striking that some stu-
ipag G. R., ‘‘ American Fossil Cycads,’’ Carnegie Institution of
ashington, Publication No. 34, 1906.
448 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von. XLV
dents have even gone so far as to assume an origin for the lower
Angiosperms from some similar type. Much more evidence,
however, is necessary before so startling a theory can be ac-
cepted.
Professor Scott gives only a brief summary of the fossil his-
tory of the Conifers. The order can be traced back to the Per-
mian and it is possible that some types are still older. The oldest
recognizable Conifers were apparently allied to the modern
Araucarias, and it may be noted in this connection that Seward
has expressed the opinion that the Araucariacee show sufficient
similarity to the Lycopods to warrant the hypothesis that they
may have descended from some of the great seed-bearing Lyco-
pods of the Carboniferous. True Araucariacee occur from the
Triassic, and probably existed in still older formations.
The Taxodineæ to which our bald cypress and Sequoia belong,
may go back to the Permian, but there seems to be some doubt
of the real relationships of the earliest fossils placed in this
family. The Abietineæ, i. e., the pines and firs, do not occur
before the later Jurassic and early Cretaceous formations, and
the true cypresses seem to be of about similar age. The Taxacee,
the Yew family, is apparently the most recent of the Conifers,
not being found below the Cretaceous.
The geological history of the Angiosperms is very incomplete,
and they have received very much less attention than the
Pteridophytes and Gymnosperms which have so largely monop-
clized the attention of the paleobotanist. It would seem as if a
critical investigation of the abundant Cretaceous and Tertiary
remains of the Angiosperms, comparable to the many complete
studies on the Paleozoic and Mesozoic Pteridophytes and Gymno-
sperms, should yield results which would throw some light upon
the origin of the predominant plant-type of the present day.
Dovetas HOUGHTON CAMPBELL.
STANFORD UNIVERSITY.
The American Journal of Science
Established by Benjamin Silliman in 1818
The Leading Scientific Journal in the United States
Devoted to the Physical and Natural Sciences, with special reference to
Physics, and Chemistry on the one hand, and to Geology and Mineralogy
on the other.
Editor: EDWARD S. DANA.
Associate Editors: Professor GEORGE L. GOODALE, JOHN TROWBRIDGE, W. G. FARLOW and WM. M. DAVIS
of Cambridge; Professors A. E. VERRILL, HENRY S. WILLIAMS and L. V. PIRSSON, of New
aven; Professor 0. F. BARKER, of Philrdelphia; Professor JOSEPH S$. AIMES,
of Baltimore ; MR. J. S. DILLER, of Washington.
Two volumes annually, in monthly numbers of about 80 pages each.
This Journal ended its first series of 50 volumes as a quarterly in 1845; its second
series of 50 volumes as a two-month} y in 1870; its third series as a monthly ended Dec-
ember, 1895. A Fourth Series commenced in 1896, `
Subscription price, $6 per year or 50 cents a number, postage prepaid in the United States ;
$6.25 to Canada ; $6,40 to Countries in the Postal Union. Back numbers at reduced prices.
se" Ten-Volume Indexes, Vols. I-X XI-XX, fourth series, price one dollar. Address
The American Journal of Science
New Haven, Conn.
SECOND EDITION, NOVEMBER, 1910
AMERICAN MEN OF SCIENCE
A BIOGRAPHICAL DIRECTORY
EDITED BY J. McKEEN CATTELL
A Biographical directory requires revision if it is to maintain its usefulness. Nearly a third of the names in the
Oaoa are ne sleckas which appeared in the first division have in nearly every case revised. The
change of work required to re the revision been as great as that given to the first edition. There has been no
general j 3 observed i
make the Bong Tor this reason a few names included in the first edition have een omitted. Exforts have been exerted to
as possi rse om n ;
to repeated requests for the information needed. The thousand leading men of science have been again selected
ere
The second edition of the Di i han 5500 sketch
i a e Directory extends to more than 600 pages and contains more than etches,
— well printed on all rag paper aaa bound in buckram with leather label. Although the work has been
n size by more than 50 per cent., it is sold at the same price t edition.
Price: Five Dollars, net, Postage paid
HE SCIENCE PRESS
T
GARRISON, N. Y. LANCASTER, PA.
SUB-STATION 84, NEW YORK CITY.
The American Naturalist
A Monthly Journal, established in 1867, Devoted > the Advancement of the — Sciences
Factors o ity
with Special Reference to the
f Organic Evolution and H
CONTENTS OF THE JANUARY NUMBER
Somatic Alteration: Its Origination and Inheritance,
. D. T, MacDoucat,
The Nature of Graft- hybrids. Professor Dove.as
HIUS
A Double Hen’s Egg. DR. J. THOMAS PATTERSON,
Xotes and Literature: Heredity, Dr, W. J. SPILLMAN,
CONTENTS OF THE FEBRUARY NUMBER
The opena of the Conception of Pure Lines to Sex
me y the wees and to Sexual Dimorphism,
Pro THM SaN
Pure i in eis PSE o tics in L
Professo bam = denies
Some Effects of rof Such upon Growing Mice, and
= Persistence = par ‘Effects In a Subsequent Gen-
ration, Dr. s B. SUM
The Mendelian 1 Af aoee Blended TR SHINK-
Organismā
Daai on em “Relative Comptia = or and Self-
colored Fow . RAYMON
Pome Considerations concerning aa ‘Photogenic Func-
n Marine iien s. F. ALEX. MOTT,
Shorter Articles Discussion : Computi a p
tion in Caen pe Symmetrical abies are com”
only used. Professor H. S. JENN
CONTENTS OF THE MARCH NUMBER
The reie Conception of Heredity. Professor
. JOHANNSEN,
was” Geno Hypothesis and Hybridizati P
cen EL pos y ization. TO-
a on Gundlachia and Ancylus. Dr. WILLIAM
HEALEY DALL.
Notes and Literature: Mimicry, Dr. Franx E. LUTZ,
CONTENTS OF THE APRIL NUMBER
mare pe on Oenothera. I. Dr. BRADLEY
Moo.
The ane = Maize. Dr. GEORGE HARRISON
HUL
Notes and Literature: Is the Female Frog Heterozy-
gous in regard to Sex Determination ? Professor T.
H. Morcan. The Mutation Theory. Dr, R. R
GATES,
CONTENTS OF THE MAY NUM
The Inheritance of Polymorphism and Be r Coli
Philodice. Pro Jace oun H. GEROU 3 2 ee
in Sontag "poi
A eee sot of the Structure of the hes
ei oe rtain — Lamp
Shorter peie sm apa cease
oe ana. occas; A Neglected Paper
on Natural Selection in the 1 parr
. Dr. J. ARTHUR HARRIS, Siem wii
otes and Literature: Biometrics, Yule's Introduc-
ot the Theory of Statistics, Dr, RAYMOND
CONTENTS OF JUNE NUM
reece! a — in the aes pir Dr
The poate Froot tot the Pure Line Theory. Dr. J.
A
be ged External Conditions 0B
the Dev — of Two Species of Moss. Pro-
fessor Tuomas H. MONTGOMERY.
Shorter pE mi Discussion : The Ontogeny of #
Genus. AUSTIN HoBART CLA
Notes and Literature: Recent Contributions to &
Knowledge of the Extinct Amphibia, Dr, ROY
L. MOODIE.
gee Number 35 Cents
NATURALIST
“11 Lio
——— ot
Yearly Subscription, $4.00
One Dollar
four months sue
THE SCIENCE PRESS
Sub-Station 84: NEW YORK er, Par
ile
VOL. XLV, NO. 536
ped
t
his,
AUGUST, 1911
THE
AMERICAN
NATURALIST
A MONTHLY JOURNAL
Devoted to the Advancement of the Biological Sciences with
Special Reference to the Factors of Evolution
CONTENTS
Page
Pg baft Di bad Girė
A Comparative Microscopic Study o i
with special bee to the Questions of Color Inheritance among Mulattos.
449
Professor H. E, Jor
- A Coefficient oat veal: ee for Students of Saget oh Dr. £
- 471
ArTHuR HA
The Adaptations of the Primates. Professor F. B. LOOMIS Oe ye kas
Jean Marchant, an Eighteenth Century Mutationist. Dr. HENRI Hus - - 493
Notes and Literature: Notes on Heredity. Dr. W. J. SPILLMAN
THE SCIENCE PRESS
LANOASTER, PA. GARRISON, N. ¥.
NEW YORE: SUB-STATION 84
The American Naturalist
intended for Pate and books, etc., intended for review should be
MSS,
sent to = Editor of THE A
icles containing research
MER sie NATURALIST, Garrison- -on-Hudson, New York
work bearin
n the problems - ‘organo evolu-
tion are especialy welcome, and will be given sreterinoét in publica
reprints of a are supplied to authors pe of charge.
e hu
F arier Fariáta “will be supplied at c
Subscriptions and advertisements nin in sent to the publishers. The
subscription price is four dollar:
a yea
Canadian postage twenty-five ph additional.
thirty-five cents.
Lancaster, Pa.
postage is fifty cents and
char
eign
"The arge ür sep copies is
The advertising rates are Four Dollars for a pa
THE SCIENCE PRESS
Garrison, N. ¥.
NEW YORK: Sub-Station 84
Entered as second-class matter, April 2, 1908, at the Post Office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act of
Congress of March 3, 1879.
THE BULLETIN—For bargains in Ethnolograph-
ical and Pre-historic Specimens. Books on Natural
History, Science, Travel, Voyages, etc. See THE
BULLETIN post free for 3 cent stamp.
4 Duke St., Adelphi—i en¢on—England
TENTH EDITION.
THE MICROSCOPE,
tion to Microscopic Meth thods and to Histology,
= ane Rury aac po of Saas Universit is now
350 large octavo and above
and fally szara pe e ea Price $2.00, postpaid. `
COMSTOCK PUBLISHING CO., Ithaca, N. *-
o a
BIRDS’ EGGS
W. F. H. ROSENBERG,
57 Haverstock Hill, London, N. W.,
England
begs to announce the publication of a new
Price List (No. 15) of Birds’ Eggs, con-
taining over 900 species from all parts of
the world. This Catalogue is systematic-
ally arranged, with authors’ names, indica-
tions of localities, and an index to families.
It will be sent post free on application, as
will the following lists:
No. 11, Birds’ Skins, (5,000 species) ;
No. 12, Lepidoptera: (5,000 species) ; No.
18, meaty, No. 14, Mammals.
I of preparation: New Price
List of Repic eaS and Fishes.
Largest Stock in the Ss of specimens
in all branches of Zoolog
Marine Biological Laboratory
WOODS HOLE, MASS.
Facilities a research in Zoolo ey;
INVESTIGATION ests bore
JUNE 1 TO OCTOBER 1 Earlene
bles
instruction
Courses of laboratory ver-
ectures are ofe erpryologY,
a
INSTRUCTION
JUNE 28 TO AUGUST
&, 1911 Tax
ogy
rse
cts of Biolo
Par anhe also offered
terial
—Presery: for cae
Zoology— of animals
SUPPLY be all ty PS
DEPARTMENT
OPEN THE ENTIRE Zool
YEAR Ma
rts and Moem
ké all information
ag
GEO. M. GRAY, ciee Woods we?
nual announcement will be as ae
the! e Director, Marine Biological Borban e on apia
THE
AMERICAN NATURALIST
VoL. XLV August, 1911 No. 536
A COMPARATIVE MICROSCOPIC STUDY OF THE
MELANIN CONTENT OF PIGMENTED SKINS
WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO THE
QUESTION OF COLOR INHERIT-
ANCE AMONG MULATTOS
PROFESSOR H. E. JORDAN
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA
INTRODUCTORY, WITH A STATEMENT OF PROBLEMS
NVOLVED
Tue comparative histologic study of pigmented skins
was undertaken with the hope of discovering evidence
that might throw more light on the problem of color
inheritance among the descendants of crosses between
whites and negroes. The primary point at issue, until
very recently, was whether human skin color in inherit-
ance conformed more closely to the alternative (Men-
delian), or the blended scheme; or perhaps to the ances-
tral (Galtonian) scheme. The studies of G. C. and C.
-B. Davenport show conclusively that there is a measure
of segregation among the individuals of the third gen-
eration, hence a Mendelian-like inheritance.
This study, suggested to me by the above-mentioned
investigators, is, consequently, more especially an at-
tempt to test, as critically as microscopic data will allow,
the theory of discrete unit characters in color inherit-
ance (discontinuity theory; segregation theory), as op-
posed to the theory of continuity of the pigment char-
acter with interruption of the pigmentation process at
: 449
450 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
various stages. The study involves two incidental prob-
lems: (1) Source of the epidermal pigment, (2) cause of
degree of coloration of skin. These matters must re-
ceive consideration first. Then follows a discussion of
the bearings of the determined facts on the question of
color inheritance in crosses between whites and blacks,
or mulattos.
Material—The material studied comprises 18 pieces
of skin taken from near the mid-line of the abdomen,
including 5 pieces from full-blooded negros of varying
grades of color, 6 pieces from mulattos of various
shades, 4 pieces from brunets, 2 from blonds, and 1 piece
Fic. 1. Camera lucida drawing of unstained section of negro skin (speci-
men No. 14), showing the distribution of the pigment granules in the epidermis.
Nuclei drawn according to their appearance in stained preparation. Dermal
eleidin and keratohyalin granules of the stratum granulosum not shown. x 750.
of pathologically pigmented skin; also a melanotic sar-
coma, several pieces of pigmented skin of incomplete
history, sections of infant’s scalp and eyelid of new-
born mulatto. Individuals were classified as blond or
brunet according to color of hair. Mulattos were so ad-
judged in most cases from general appearance, ù. e-
absence of distinct negro features, e. g., thick lips, flat
nose, etc., though in several cases the individual con-
No. 536] COLOR INHERITANCE 451
tributing the skin admitted to me being ‘‘mixed.’’ All
ut one piece of mulatto skin were tested by the Bradley
color top before embedding. In only one case (No. 2)
could the individual contributing negro skin be ques-
tioned by myself in regard to purity; the remaining
four pieces are so classified on the assurance of pathol-
ogist and surgeon. Four pieces were tested with the
color top. Sections were cut both in celloidin and par-
affin, and studied unstained and stained (with 1/12 oil
immersion lens) in carbol fuchsin or the hematoxylin
and eosin combination. The following is a list of the
specimens and the essential points of interest regarding
each:
2. Drawing of section of light brown mulatto skin (specimen No. 3)
showing distribution of the pigment granules in the rete mucosum Malpighi.
Darker and lighter mulatto skins differ from this only in the greater and smaller
number, respectively, of melanin granules. 0.
1. Pure negro; from postmortem by Dr. H. Marshall
(professor of pathology, University of Virginia) ; Zenk-
er’s fixation; color (matched by mixing yellow, white,
red and black on the Bradley color top)—yellow, 4 per
cent. ; ; white, 8 per cent.; red, 22 per cent.; black, 66 per
cent.
2. Pure negro woman; from abdominal operation by
Dr. Harvey Stone (adjunct professor of surgery) ; fixed
in 95 per cent. aleohol; a shade lighter than No. 1.
3. Light mulatto woman; abdominal operation by Dr.
Stone; 95 per cent. alcohol fixation; color—yellow, 10
per cent.; white, 18 per cent. ; ; red, 22 per cent.; black, 50
per cent. (Fig. 2).
452 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
4. Light mulatto; abdominal operation by Dr. Stone;
95 per cent. alcohol fixation; a shade darker than No. 3.
5. Blond; abdominal operation by Dr. Stone; 95 per
cent. alcohol fixation.
6. Pathologically pigmented (grayish yellow) skin of
white individual; postmortem (thyroid adenomata) by
Dr. Marshall; 95 per cent. alcohol fixation.
7. Brunet; abdominal operation by Dr. W. H. Good-
win (adjunct professor of surgery); 95 per cent. alcohol
fixation.
Fig. 3. Drawing of section of skin of blond (“cross between blond and
brunet ’"—specimen No. 13). In lighter blonds (e. g., specimen No. 5) fewer
basal cells contain still fewer granules; in darker brunets the basal cells contain
-more granules. x 750.
8. Light mulatto male (age 80); postmortem (acute
eystitis) by Dr. W. Thalhimer (instructor in pathology) ;
Zenker’s fixation; color—yellow, 10 per cent.; white, 17
per cent.; red, 30 per cent.; black, 43 per cent.
9. Pure negro; abdominal operation by Dr. Stephen
H. Watts (professor of surgery)—95 per cent. alcohol
fixation.
10. Brown mulatto boy; abdominal operation by Dr.
S. H. Watts; 95 per cent. alcohol fixation.
11. Brunet; abdominal operation by Dr. S. H. Watts;
95 per cent. alcohol fixation.
12. Brunet female (gray); postmortem (goitre and
old age) by Dr. W. Thalhimer; Zenker fixation.
13. Dark blond male—age 30 years—(‘‘cross between
blonde and brunet’’); from postmortem (pyemia and
perinephric abscess) by Dr. W. Thalhimer; 95 per cent.
alcohol fixation (Fig. 3).
14, Pure negro; abdominal operation by Dr. S. H.
No. 536] COLOR INHERITANCE 453
Watts; 95 per cent. alcohol fixation; color—yellow, 5
per cent.; white, 7 per cent.; red, 19 per cent.; black, 69
per cent. (Fig. 1).
15. Pure negro; abdominal operation by Dr. S. H.
Watts; 95 per cent. alcohol fixation; slightly lighter than
No. 14.
16. Brunet; abdominal operation by Dr. S. H. Watts;
95 per cent. alcohol fixation.
17. Mulatto; abdominal operation by Dr. S. H. Watts;
95 per cent. alcohol fixation; color—yellow, 14 per cent.;
white, 14 per cent.; red, 35 per cent.; black, 37 per cent.
18. Mulatto; abdominal operation by Dr. S. H. Watts;
95 per cent. alcohol fixation; a shade lighter than No. 17.
Ranged according to degree of coloration, judged
macroscopically, the 17 pieces of skin (omitting AN 6)
take the following order:
Negro 9, 14 (B, 69), 1 (B, 66), 2, 15.
Mulatto 4, 3 (B, 50), 8 (B, 43), 17 (B, 37), 10, 18.
Brunet 7, 11, 12, 16, Blond 13, 5.
This list could have been enlarged indefinitely, but
more material was not deemed requisite to the demands
of this study. Number 6 took rank between numbers.
18 and 7.
Sources of Epidermal Pigment.—There are obviously
three distinct views which might be held—and as a mat-
ter of fact have been held—in regard to the origin of the
pigment of the skin: (1) In the epithelial cells of epi-
dermis; (2) in the connective tissue cells of the dermis,
and secondarily transferred to the cells of the rete
mucosum Malpighi; (3) in both the epithelial and con-
nective tissue cells. The second view more especially
further involves the question as to whether the pigment
arises in the connective tissue cells as a result of cellular
(secretory) activity or whether the cell extracts the pig-
ment (fully formed or unsynthesized) from the blood;
also the manner of the transference of the pigment to
the epithelial cell.
There are two works which bear upon this point more
directly: (1) That of Karg (1888) who ably supports the
second view on the basis of findings from a microscopic
454 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
study of white skin transplanted to a negro and vice
versa, i. e., negro skin transplanted to a white individ-
ual; (2) that of Meirowsky (1908), who studied the origin
of melanic pigment in the skin and eye and, more espe-
cially, on the basis of experiments with pigeons and find-
ings in pigmented skin kept alive for several days in a
paraffin bath at a temperature of 56 degrees, urges the
first view. These two masterly papers advance dia-
metrically opposing views. Karg unqualifiedly put aside
the idea that pigment may be formed within the epi-
dermal cell. He says, ‘‘Es gelang so, festzustellen, das
es nur eines Modus der Entstehung des Pigments giebt.
Aus der Lederhaut dringen pigmentirte Zellen in die
Epidermis, veristeln sich hier weit und geben ihr Pig-
ment an die Epithelzellen ab,’’ p. 370. Meirowsky de-
scribes conditions more in conformity with our later
ideas of cellular physiology. According to him, the
melanie granules are passed out of the nucleus of the
epidermal cell into its cytoplasm, i. e., pigmentation is
an intracellular process, both dermal and epidermal.
Historically Riehl (1884) appears to have been the
first to describe the condition afterwards interpreted by
Karg as supporting his view of epithelial pigmentation,
viz., invasion of processes of pigmented connective tissue
cells among the epidermal cells. Riehl studied more
especially the pigment of hair. He did not generalize,
however; and while he thought it improbable, he did
not regard it impossible, that pigment may arise out of
the protoplasm of epithelial cells. He seems rather to
incline to the third view above stated. Moreover, on the
basis of findings in a study of three cases of Addison’s
disease, where the adventitia of blood vessels was richly
infiltrated with pigmented cells coincidentally with a
hemorrhagic aggregation of red blood cells, he concludes
that the pigment arises from the hemoglobin of the red
cells. Aeby (1885) likewise describes the transporta-
tion of pigment to the epidermis by wandering cells.
Ehrmann (1885-86), who studied the pigmented epi-
thelium of amphibia, differs from Riehl and Aeby only
in holding that the pigmented stellate cells of the cutis
No. 536] COLOR INHERITANCE 455
are non-motile. He describes a network of pigmented
cutis cells (chromatophores) connected with the epi-
dermis by processes through which the pigment granules
stream into the epithelial cells of the rete mucosum
Malpighi. He also concludes that the pigment arises
from the hemoglobin of the red cells, since the pigment
cells are most abundant in the vicinity of the blood ves-
sels. The reception of the pigment granules by the
epithelial cells he regards a phagocytic process, the epi-
thelial cells being described as corroding the processes
and assimilating the contents as part of their own organi-
zation. The important observations of Jager (1885) on
pigment spots in dog and rabbit after inflammation, and
those of R. Krause (1888) on apes, are in substantial
accord with those of the afore-mentioned investigators,
more particularly in regard to the secondary origin of
pigment in the epidermis, and the primary source of the
same in the blood. For further information regarding
literature of pigment cells, more particularly in the lower
vertebrates, the reader is referred to the splendid article
by Karg.
It remains to outline more fully Karg’s position as _
repr tative of the second view above stated. Pig-
mentation of epidermis and its appendages (hair, ete.)
is a secondary process. The pigment is transferred to
the epithelial cells through cells which have their origin
in the cutis (i. e. chromatophore, Ehrmann). They
wander into, or, remaining on border line between epi-
dermis and cutis, send processes into the intercellular
spaces of the epidermis. They end in the epithelial cells
(capable of a certain amount of ameboid motility) to
which they surrender their pigment through process of
absorption causing streaming from process to cell.
These pigmented cells are wandering cells of the nature
of connective tissue cells. They are thought to obtain
their pigment from the blood. This, however, is not re-
garded as hæmoglobin since no red corpuscles are ever
seen in these cells. There is here (i. e., in transplanted
human skin) no network of pigment cells as described
by Ehrmann in amphibia. Nor can the pigment cells be
to THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vor. XLV
pigmented leucocytes since they have no similarity to the
latter, nor are pigmented leucocytes found in negro
blood. In the cutis he claims to be able to see all the
transition stages between pigment-free connective tissue
cells and such as are strongly pigmented. On the basis
of his findings he thinks it appears only reasonable that
in the pigmenting skin (transplanted white) the earlier
unpigmented granules (Reinke’s trophoplasts; Alt-
mann’s bioblasts) of the chromatophore take on a dark
color (by as yet unknown ways) and that this is connected
with the presence of blood; and that it can not, however,
be regarded as the product of fragmentated red cor-
puscles. Melanin may be hemosiderin, but is the product
of a living cell. His final position thus approaches some-
what to Meirowsky’s, though they still differ as to the
cell that elaborates the pigment for the epidermis. It is
important in this connection to note that while Karg de-
seribes numerous branching pigmented connective tissue
cells (wandering cells) among the epidermal cells of the
transplanted white skin, he failed to find such in the nor-
mal skin of the negro. He thinks it probable that such
may be found in the skin of the negro embryo.
Meirowsky in his monograph also gives a very com:
plete review of the literature to date. He uses experi-
mental methods mainly. His findings supporting the first
view may be briefly summarized: Pigmentation is pos-
sible in the epidermis without the agency of ‘t melano-
blasts,” or even any aid from the cutis. There are both
epidermal and cutis melanoblasts, and they are inde-
pendent of each other. Pigmented epidermal cells are
capable, under certain stimuli, to assume irregularly
branching forms (filling the intercellular spaces) simu-
lating mesodermal chromatophores (so-called melano-
blasts) which might have wandered into the epidermis.
This is probably the correct interpretation of Karg’s
figures. He brings forth cytological evidence to show
that the pigment arises from a reddish nuclear sub-
stance (a ‘‘pyroniuroter Kernsubstanz’’)—he does not
commit himself as to its chemical nature—which passes
into the cytoplasm and gradually assumes the yellowish `
No. 536] COLOR INHERITANCE 457
brown color of the melanie granules. These results from
experimental procedure are confirmed by findings in the
retina of the calf embryo, where the identical stages in pig-
ment formation are observed. He thinks it more probable
that the pigment has origin in an albuminous substance
(this is in complete accord with the work of Chittenden
and Albro—1903) of the nucleus than that hemoglobin
has any contributory rôle. The earlier stages in such a
process can be observed in carcinoma without progress to
the final stage of pigmentation. This indicates that we
are probably dealing with a nuclear substance, which, shed
into the cytoplasm, under the influence of an oxidation
enzyme, becomes a melanic substance.
As bearing on the point of the origin of pigment my
own observations are as follows: No undoubted branching
pigmented cells can be seen among the colored epidermal
cells in any of my specimens. Occasionally a process of a
pigmented connective tissue cell of the cutis is seen to
extend for some distance into the rete mucosum Malpighi
(Fig. 1). But their number seems very much too meager
to supply the pigment of the many colored cells of the
epidermis. There is a nice correspondence between the
relative abundance of pigmented cells in the dermis and
epidermis of the several specimens of skin. In light skins
there are few of each type in each layer; in darker skins
there is a decided increase in both. But this proportional
increase is as reasonably interpreted as due to the same
cause influencing both layers, as that the increased number
of pigmented epidermal cells demands an increased
number of cutis melanoblasts. Moreover, when one con-
siders that there is a continual exfoliation of the super-
ficial layers and a replacing of the same from the lower
layers, the number of epidermal pigmented cells in colored
skins seems out of all proportion to the number of the
cutis melanoblasts which are supposed to furnish the
pigment.
The pigment cells of the cutis are most abundant along
the border between dermis and epidermis and along the
capillaries of the vascular papille. This first point would
seem to indicate the function ascribed to them by Karg
458 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
and others, but when one assumes (as all investigators
agree in doing) that pigment formation is somehow
related to the blood as source of nutrition or supply, the
segregation of the pigmented cutis cells at this level
becomes intelligible on other grounds, t. e., necessary
closeness to the capillaries of papillae. Only those layers
of the epidermis next the border line (7. e., next the capil-
laries) have the pigment granules of the prevailing size
and color for normal pigment cells. Thus my evidence
points to a dependence of both cutis and epidermal cells
upon the same source (the blood of the capillaries) for a
sine qua non of pigment formation, and an independence
of each with respect to the other as a necessary source
of supply or even as an aid to pigmentation. That the
blood constituent is not hemoglobin the arguments
of Karg and the observations of Meirowsky seem con-
clusively to prove. That it is not an iron-containing
element (e. g., hemosiderin) I have demonstrated by
the method of testing with potassium ferricyanide as
used by Brown (1910) for the liver. Chemical analy-
sis by Abel and Davis (1896) also has shown that the
melanie pigment of the hair and skin of the negro
is free of iron. The evidence at hand, as furnished by
Chittenden and Albro, von Fiirth, Spiegler, Gessard,
Riddle, Meirowsky, and others seems to render it very
probable that in vital melanogenesis we are dealing with
a proteid substance (tyrosin; trophoplast; chromo-
gen) acted upon by an enzyme or oxidase (tyrosinase) and
that one (probably the former) is supplied by the cell
(nucleus) and the other by the blood.
The fact that the pigment granules, in epidermal cells
that are not packed with them, are segregated in the distal
portion, indicates that they are responsive to the influence
of light. However, the further discussion will not be com-
plicated by a consideration of this possible factor. The
following discussion will accept as well supported the
position that pigment is formed in the epidermal cells—
the analogous formation of pigment in ganglion cells
gives further support—by virtue of a cellular metab-
No. 536] COLOR INHERITANCE 459
olism made possible by close association with the nutri-
tive source, i. e., blood vessels.!
1A specimen of leucoderma from a dark negro obtained at autopsy
through the kindness of Dr. W. Thalhimer gives further evidence in
toa of this position. Macroseopically, the two leucodermic areas, abou
m. in diameter, and bilaterally symmetrically placed over the ae
ces perfectly normal Sn for their very much lighter color (grayish
yellow). A section through the transition area shows the following his-
Pii conditions: (1) The leucodermic area contains a comparatively very
large number of pigmented cells in the corium. (2) In the epidermis the
comparatively small amount of pigment present is confined to some of the
columnar cells of the stratum Malpighi. (3) The corium of the pigmented
skin has only a moderate amount of pigmented cells. (4) In the epidermis
of the normal skin, the columnar cells are laden with melanie granules, and
all of the more superficial layers of cells contain a considerable amount
of melanie pigmen (5) The PAPA granules are everywhere the same
in respect to ki and size. e epidermal cells appear identical,
except for the legers abundance > the pigment granules, in the two
regions. In v of the above facts, it seems clear that lack of pigment
in the an a the leucodermic patch is not due to a dermal deficiency
(supposing the derma to be its source of supply) » nor to an inability on
or)
©
small am ets speak in favor of the epidermal origin of the
epidermal pigment, and indicate a local inability on the part of the
epidermal cells to manufacture in normal quantity (for this individual) the
melanie granule rmore, interpreting melanogenesis in terms of
tyrosin and tyrosinase, the ts indicate a local ciency or inhibition
0 e these factors more reasonable to supp
f es tg m
columnar cells of the epidermis of the leucodermie areas were for some
obscure cause (nervous?) unable to elaborate the granules (‘‘pyroninroter
Kernsubstanz,’’ Meirowsky) which, ace the influence of an oxidase
probably everywhere ghee turn mel
recent work of c An Diala on Cutaneous Pigmenta-
tion in Normal and Pathological SS Journ. Path. and Bact., 15:
3, 1911) in the main also confirms Mei owsky’s findings regarding t the
spaces’’ (p. 314). The ‘‘pyronin-red’’ substance he interpre
ably the TEENY proteid portion of the complex granules from which the
lipoid portion has been dissolved by his (Meirowsky) method of preparing
his airt 7 i, e., use of alcohol (p. 316). In origin melanotic m
is then a lipochrome, the melanin being the chromatic proteid a
460 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
Cause of Degree of Coloration.—Theoretically at least
six possibilities are conceivable: (1) Number of pigmented
epidermal cells, or, indirectly, (2) number of pigmented
connective tissue cells of cutis, (3) number of pigment
granules in pigmented epidermal cell, (4) coloration of
granules in pigmented epidermal cells, (5) numbers 1 and
3, (6) combination of 1 or 3 and 4, or a combination of the
three. It is also theoretically possible that a difference in
the size of the granules may play a part in determining the
degree of coloration. In view of what was said under the
previous heading, number 2 can be disregarded and there
remain five plausible possibilities. Which ‘‘ possibility ”’
or set of possibilities expresses the reality will become
clear from the description of the several types of skin.
In anticipation of ensuing results it may be said in brief
that there seems to be only one factor in skin coloration,
viz., the number of the pigment granules, a greater num-
ber of granules of course involving a greater number of
cells—with a small and possibly negligible variation in
size.
DESCRIPTION or NEGRO SKINS
The several samples of skin will be described in the
order of their degree of coloration as seen from the sur-
face. This agrees almost absolutely with the degree (i. e.,
quantity) of the pigmentation factor, as will appear below.
its separation from the complex lipoid granules. In several points my
aie E
may be true that the pigment granules of the cutis cells are slightly
coarser, I can not regard them as ea than those of the epidermis.
(2) In no case have I been able to discern melanie granules in the nuclei
(studied in unstained preparations). (3) I find a greater relative amount
of cutis pigment in the specimen of leucoderma, whereas Dyson reports no
pigment in the cutis of his two samples of leucoderma. (4) Consequently
(and for still other reasons) I can not accept his position that eutis pig-
ment is secondary to epithelial, i. e, that pigment passes from epidermis
via lymph channels to the derma where it is supposed to be taken up by
wandering cells. If this were true the cutis underlying the more highly
pean epithelium should contain relatively (to leucodermic area) more
pigment. But just the reverse is the case in my ‘specimen. In fact the
cone of pigment in the epidermis would seem to be too meager to supply
the cutis pigment present under the leucodermic patch. All the evidence
indicates that the path of pigment transportation is from depth to surface
of epidermis.
No. 536] COLOR INHERITANCE j 461
All the samples being taken from the same body region,
there is a very close correspondence in the number of
epidermal layers involved.
Number 9: Here all the epidermal strata of cells are
pigmented. In the basal layer the cells are packed with
the yellowish brown spherical granules to such an extent
as partially to obscure the nucleus and cause the cell to
bulge. In the more superficial layers, the granules are
massed distally and more scattered proximally, the
nucleus appearing very prominently. In the cutis, chro-
matophores are abundant, their granules being similar in
shape, size and color to those of the basal epidermal layer.
These cells are always in the near vicinity of the blood
vessels. In the upper layers of the epidermis the pigment
granules become darker, finer and frequently of oblong
shape. These several differential features are ascribed to
the several factors of desiccation, pressure and keratiza-
tion that the containing cells undergo in their passage to
the exfoliating surface. The same explanation probably
(at least to some degree) applies to the invariably darker
bacillary pigment granules of the shaft of the hairs ap-
pearing in all of the sections of this first group.? In sec-
tions of child’s scalp, however, both shaft and bulb contain
- the same yellowish-brown granules as found in the skin,
the only appreciable difference being a considerable ir-
regularity in shape and size. It must be noted here that
not all the basal cells (though in negro skin the excep-
tions both in dermis and epidermis are rare) are equally
packed with granules. The optical effect of a small num-
ber of granules is a lighter shade of brown than that
given by a denser mass of identically colored granules.
The objection may be raised that discrimination or lack
of discrimination between a darker and lighter pigmented
granule is the result of an interpretation where the ‘‘ per-
sonal equation ’’ may factor largely. It is not denied that
it is difficult to satisfy oneself absolutely that the granules
dividing cells of the choroid, epidermis, connective tissue generally, and
bone marrow contain absolutely black pigment granules.
462 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Voi XLV
of the various basal cells of the same and different
samples of skin are of identically the same color (the color
difference between the skin pigment granules and those
of the sections of attached hair is decided enough) but all
possible caution was observed to offset the personal factor.
In short, when the writer after much study was still some-
what undecided as to a definite stand, the slides were
shown to three different professors, all with long training
and much experience in the use of the microscope. These
men were asked to answer the following questions with
respect to the basal cells of the eighteen samples, and this
without knowledge of what the other men had written:
Are the pigment granules of the samples of skin of the
same color or of different colors? Name the color or
colors? The replies were uniform in recognizing only one
type of granules, and in describing it as ‘‘ yellowish
brown,’’ ‘‘ brownish yellow ’’ and ‘‘a dark golden or
yellowish brown—amber—somewhere between brass and
copper,” respectively. One man noted the slightly
darker shade of the granules of the more superficial
cells.
Number 14 (Fig. 1) : All the layers are again pigmented,
but there is a slightly smaller amount in the upper layers
than in number 9. The pigment cells of the cutis are here
somewhat more numerous, showing many anastomosing
processes, and forming in places a network of pigmented
strands just beneath the scarf skin. A variation in
amount of pigment in different regions of the basal layer
is again evident. The deeper color of number 9 as com-
pared with 14 seems due to the greater amount of pigment
present in the superficial layers.
Numbers 1 and 2 are very like the foregoing except that
there is a slight decrease in the number of greatly packed
basal cells.
Number 15: This sample shows a quite appreciably
smaller number of pigment cells in the epidermis and a
yet more pronounced decrease in the corium.
Description or Murarro SKINS
Number 4: The number of granules in the great major-
ity of the basal cells of the epidermis is somewhat less
No. 536] COLOR INHERITANCE 463
than in the last of the foregoing group. Cells also now
appear in the lower layers with only relatively scattered
granules. There is an almost complete absence of gran-
ules from the cells of the superficial layers. There are
decidedly fewer pigmented cutis cells. Hair in section
again shows the same sort of pigment granules as above
described. This statement holds good for hair wherever
they have appeared in these sections (not seen in the
samples of blond skin).
Number 3 (Fig. 2): The pigmented basal cells of this
specimen contain still fewer granules than in number 4.
The very small number and size of the chromatophores of
the corium is striking. Here again only the cells of the
rete mucosum Malpighi contain the granules.
Number 8 is almost identical with number 3.
Number 17 is like number 8 with slightly less pigment in
the rete mucosum Malpighi; but here the superficial layers
again contain a considerable quantity of melanin granules
and the melanic cutis cells are more abundant than in
numbers 3 and 18.
Numbers 10 and 18 are both very like number 8, show-
ing only a slight decrease in the quantity of pigment.
This seems the best place for a brief discussion of the
foregoing facts. What is the fundamental cause of the
difference in the degree of color of the skins described?
Plainly, I believe, a difference in the abundance of the pig-
ment granules in the basal cells of the rete mucosum Mal-
pighi. A densely packed mother cell of this layer gives
rise to two daughter cells of very similar constitution which
are only slightly altered as they pass to the upper layers.
Hence in skins where the basal cells manufacture much
pigment, the entire rete mucosum Malpighi, formed of its
descendants—the factors of desiccation and cornification
not being able at once to produce a very appreciable des-
truction or modification of the granules—will appear pig-
mented. But between negro and mulatto skin there does
not seem to be any apparent difference as to the number
of epidermal cells producing pigment, but only as to the
quantity of pigment produced by the same basal cells, an
initial greater quantity determining a secondarily persist-
ing greater quantity, and thus an apparently greater num-
464 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
ber of epidermal pigmented cells. Probably also, the cells
generally of the rete mucosum Malpighi retain in small
degree the property of the basal mother cell to produce
pigment granules.
DESCRIPTION OF SKIN OF BRUNET
Number 6 (pathologically pigmented skin) : Here one is
unable to determine just how much pigment is due to the
normal (‘‘ midway between blond and brunet ’’) and how
much to the pathologic condition (‘‘thyroid adenomata’’
—‘‘gall stones, but not jaundiced’’). The specimen con-
tains fewer granules than number 18 and more than
number 7.
Number 7: Here the granules are very few in number
and confined exclusively to the basal layer. There is great
variation in the number of granules held by the basal
cells. Only very rarely does a small pigmented cutis cell
appear in the sections.
Number 11 has still fewer granules than 7 and
Number 17 shows only occasional cells of the basal layer
slightly pigmented (few melanin granules).
Number 16 is more like the blond skin to be described.
There are very few granules in only occasional cells; and
no pigmented cutis cells are seen in the section. This
skin could not be told from blond.
Description oF BLonp SKIN
Number 13 (Fig. 3): Here the layer of distinctly pig-
mented basal cells is fairly complete. The section is very
like number 7 of the brunet series. :
Number 5 is almost identical with number 16. The pig-
ment granules are very. rare; and only a few to a cell.
It must be emphasized at this point that the melanie
granules of number 5 are in point of shape, size and
coloration indistinguishable from those of number 9.
_ There is a continuous gradation in color (and the num-
ber of pigment granules) from negro to blond skin with an
overlapping at the extremes.
The melanic granules of the specimen of melanotic sar-
coma were of the same yellowish-brown color (perhaps
of a trifle lighter shade), but of very irregular shape and
No. 536] COLOR INHERITANCE 465
with great variations in size (the larger ‘‘granules’’ may
be the result of fusion of smaller masses).
STATEMENT OF RESULTS AND RELATED Facts
The facts whose interpretation is sought in terms of
some principle of heredity are these: (1) The degree of
skin coloration is due to the variable number of pigment
granules in the cells of the rete mucosum Malpighi involv-
ing incidentally a variable number of more superficial
cells. (2) The pigment granules (melanic) of all skin
(albinos excepted) are identical in size (practically),
shape and color (without qualification). (3) The ascend-
ing scale of morphological conditions paralleling a pro-
gressively deepening grade of pigmentation may be
described as follows: (a) few cells of basal layer pig-
mented with few granules—blonds, (b) more cells contain-
ing more granules—brunets, (c) a more or less complete
basal layer of cells with many and very many melanic
granules (mulattos), (d) the cells of basal layer packed
and distended with pigment granules; the cells of the more
superficial layer also with very many granules.
Or, restated and explained, (4) The progressive in-
crease in progressively darker skins both in the number
of granules and in the number of the pigmented cells.
That these two facts are related to each other as cause
(number of granules) and effect (number of pigment
cells) is strongly indicated by the fact that in light mulatto
and brunet skins, where only the basal cells are distinctly
pigmented, the number of granules per cell in general de-
creases with the progressively lighter shades.
(5) The results recently published by the Davenports
showing a segregation of the original skin colors (grand-
parental colors) among the individuals of the third gen-
eration, 7. e., children of mulatto parents.
6) The accumulation of the pigmented cells near the
border line between the dermis and epidermis or in the
vicinity of the blood stream.
(7) Melanin formation is an intracellular metabolic
process going on independently and in a measure propor-
tionately in both dermis and epidermis. This seems
demonstrated by the researches of Meirowsky and others,
466 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
and the view is indirectly supported by the comparative
findings above described, viz.: (a) absence of connective
tissue cells (chromatophores) among the epidermal cells
(admitted by Karg for normal negro skin), (b) compara-
tive rarity of pigmented processes from cutis cells, and
(c) an apparently disproportionate number of chromato-
phores as compared with the epidermal pigment cells.
(8) The agreement between the cytologic facts of
Meirowsky and the chemical results of Chittenden and
Albro, and others, that the antecedent of melanin is some
form of proteid.
(9) The observations of Meirowsky showing a passage
of granules from the nucleus to the cytoplasm as the
initial step in melanogenesis, and a progressive colora-
tion of these granules to a final stage of yellowish-brown
pigment.
(10) The production of artificial melanins (‘‘mela-
noidins’’—Schmiedeberg) by Chittenden and Albro and
others from ‘‘antialbumid’’ and various proteids, and the
results described by Spiegler and Riddle and others indi-
eating an interaction of a chromogen (tyrosin compound)
with an oxidizing enzyme (tyrosinase) in the formation
of melanin.
Discussion
There appears, then, proximately to be only one factor
in skin-pigmentation, viz., the number of granules of
identical shade (yellowish-brown), incidentally the num-
ber of cells containing such granules. The granules
would seem to be the result of intracellular activities
(Meirowsky) and to have origin in cell proteids (Chit-
tenden and Albro, and Meirowsky). In terms of chro-
mogen and oxidase, the granules may be thought of as
tyrosin which under the influence of tyrosinase from the
blood or tissues generally becomes melanic.
The melanogenetic process seems to stop at the same
point in all grades of colored skin, from negro to blond—
in hair of the same it may possibly proceed slightly
further, though even this seems doubtful in view of ap-
pearances in the hair bulb. One seems to be dealing, then,
with a continuous process, i. e., the production of melanie
No. 536] COLOR INHERITANCE 467
granules; and the numerical point at which the process
stops determines the color of the skin. But thought of in
terms of greater and lesser ability for tyrosin production
(intervention of a tyrosinase-producing factor would
modify the results, but not fundamentally alter the
mechanism of inheritance) ; and attributing such factor to
a specific cell-organ which may be a chromosome or part
of such (‘‘teleomorph’’—Spillman), the segregation
noted by the Davenports becomes as intelligible as other
Mendelian phenomena. From the standpoint of the num-
ber of granules some mulatto skins are certainly different
from a ‘‘blend’”’ between negro and white, and this is true
in the direction both of more and of less—from the stand-
point of the amount of pigment some mulattos are iden-
tical, on the one hand, with negros and on the other with
brunets—and evidences a measure of segregation of
“strong melanogenesis’’ and ‘‘slight melanogenesis.”’
A plausible interpretation of Karg’s experimental find-
ings might be made on the basis of a larger and smaller
amount of tyrosinase in negro and white blood, respect-
ively—or more likely perhaps on the basis of more and
less pronounced stimulation by negro and white blood,
respectively, to tyrosin production.
The occurrence of melanotic sarcomata in albinos and
white horses forces the assumption that in both cases
tyrosinase is present, as in ordinary colored animals.
In albinos there is evidently an absence generally of
tyrosin in usual events (production of tyrosin locally ac-
cords better with our present knowledge than a hypoth-
esis of local tyrosinase production). If Spiegler’s view
represents the veritable condition, viz., that in white
horses there is present a white melanin—rendered quite
doubtful by Gortner’s recent work—the end-result of an
oxidation process of tyrosin, the presence of melanotic
tumors in white horses may be explained in the same way
as in ordinary cases, as shown by the work of Gessard.
Accordingly, when one considers the question of color
inheritance among crosses between ordinary white indi-
viduals and albinos, two factors (at least—these most
prominent and apparently most important; a ‘‘multi-
plicity of units’’ or factors may be involved in color-in-
468 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
heritance as the Davenports suggest) appear to be in-
volved, i. e., a tyrosin-producing factor and a tyrosinase-
producing factor, one at least a function of the epidermal
cell, and both having as likely a chromosomal representa-
tive (a ‘‘teleomorph’’—Spillman) as any other cell organ
or function. The tyrosin-producing factor is probably
generally absent in albinos, locally appearing abnormally
in tumor cells, hence two albinos can never produce col-
ored offspring, as amply shown by the results of the
experimental breeders.
The observations of Stedman, reported by Bateson
(p. 227) ‘‘to the effect that an albino negress married to
a European had children all mulattos’’ does not neces-
sarily imply that the factor determining the blackness
of the negro (tyrosin production) was carried by the
albino. Mulattos are frequently so classified on the
basis of marks other than color of skin. Many mulattos
are no darker than many white brunets. In the above
case the factor controlling tyrosin production may very
well have been contributed by the father alone. This
instance does not necessarily controvert the assumption
that albinos lack the factor of tyrosin production.
Moreover, crosses between albinos and pigmented in-
dividuals result in families where albinism greatly pre-
ponderates, as shown in the recent “dissertation” by
Stainer. In crosses between whites and blacks one deals
apparently more especially with the factors of great and
small capacity for tyrosin production—tyrosinase being
probably of more general distribution. J udging from
the pedigrees published by Stainer, absence of capacity
for tyrosin production (albinism) in man behaves more
like a dominant character (or at any rate, not like a pure
recessive) to the presence of such capacity. This is not
in accord with the results of the Davenports, which seem
to indicate that ‘‘internal conditions that lead to deeper
pigmentation dominate over the weaker conditions’’s
similarly as regards color of hair and eyes, ‘‘the more
pigmented condition tends to be dominant over the less
pigmented’’ according to the earlier investigations of
Holmes and Loomis as well as the more recent work of
the Davenports. Nor does it accord with the results of
No. 536] COLOR INHERITANCE 469
the experimental breeders with lower mammals. It may,
of course, be found that all mammalian albinos have the
white pigment (melanin) described by Spiegler for
white horses. Such a result would seem to correlate a
number of apparently discordant facts. It would obvi-
ate the further assumption of an ‘‘antioxidase’’ sug-
gested by Gortner, and render more intelligible the non-
recessive behavior of human albinism.* No theory of
color-inheritance is satisfactory that can not embrace all
the facts of albinism, and such is the present state of
affairs.
In crosses between whites and negroes there is gener-
ally a partial dominance of the deeper pigmented condi-
tion over the lighter in the second (mulatto) generation;
the third generation showing a measure of segregation
of the original colors. The partiality and incomplete-
SEE: of dominance and segregation may be due to a
‘‘myriad’”’ other factors modifying and obscuring more
or less the final results.*
Seeing that we are dealing with only one kind of col-
ored granules, the apparent segregation noted in the
families of mulatto parents does not here seem to be due
to a condition of unstable equilibrium in the chemical
constitutions of the parental melanin and an attempt at
readjustment to an original state of greater stability, as
suggested by Riddle.
The apparent continuity of the melanogenetic process,
as seen in the continuous numerical gradation of the
same colored pigment granules where a graded series of
skins is examined, rests, in fact, where single families of
mulattos are considered, upon discontinuities or discrete
? In the second part of Davenport’s paper on ‘‘ Heredity of Skin Pig-
furnishes the most cogent argument yet offered for the recessive nature
of albinism.
t Professor L. W. Lyde, in an article on ‘‘ Climate and Racial Skin Color’’
(Contemporary Review, February, 1911), states his conclusion that ‘‘pig-
ment is latent in all humans and depends for its development on relative
um.
Influence of a Tropical Climate on Europeans,’’ Eugenics Review, April,
1911) believes that ‘‘there is no reason for assuming that a dark com-
plexion is due to climate.’’
470 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
‘‘unit characters’’ controlling conditions of a more and
a less numerous production of melanic granules, which
conditions conform more or less closely to an alternative
mode of inheritance.
LITERATURE CITED
1. Abel, J. and Saps W.: 96. The paap of the Negro’s Skin and
Exp. Med., Vol. I, p.
2. Aeby, "4 185. Die Her kunti des RR im Epithel. Centralblatt
für die medicinischen Wissenschaften, 23, S. 273.
3. Bateson, W. ’09. Mendel’s Principles of Heredity. Cambridge, Uni-
He
a
-
H
own 10. Changes in the Hemosiderin Content of the Rab-
bit’s Liver during Autolysis. Jour. Exp. Med., Vol. 12, No. 5, p. 623.
. Chittenden, R. and Albro, Alice H. ’99. Formation of Melanins
or Melanin- like peipei from Proteid Substances. Amer. Jour.
Phys s p. 291
i Hasenpert, Gertrud C. and Charles B. ’07. Heredity of Eye-color in
Man. Science, n. s., 2 . 289.
709. Heredity of Hair Color in Man. Am. Nat., Vol. 43, No. 508,
93.
or
a
P.
710. Heredity of Skin Pigmentation in Man. Am. Nart., Vol. 44, No.
i.
-<q
. Ehrmann, 8. ’86. Untersuchungen über die Physiologie und Pathol-
ogie des Hautpigmentes. Vierteljahrsschrift für Dermatologie und
Syphilis, ipes 885, N. F., 12,
' Gessard, M. C. ’03. Sur la formation sa pigment melanique dans les
tumeurs du cheval. Compt. rend. soc. biol., T. 136, p.
- Gortner, R. A. 710. Spie epler?s s Whit 6 Melanin’? as related to Dom-
inant or Recessive White. AM. a Vol. 44, No. 524, p. 497.
i M. 0 “The Tiag ~ Eye Color and
Hair Color in Man. Bio l. Bull., ei. 18, 1;
11. Karg. ’88. Studien über transplantirte ae ih “Anah u. Entwkl.,
Anat. Abth., T. 20, S. 369.
. Meirowsky, E. ’08. Ueber den Ursprung des melanotischen Pigments
der Haut und des Auges. Leipzig.
13. Riddle, O. ’09. Our Knowledge of Melanin Color Formation and its
Bearings on the Mendelian Description of Heredity. Biol. Bull., Vol.
s p. 316.
b ù
H
©
=
2
3
E
m
t
2
=
a
5
©
y
RZ
È
bo
14. Riehl, G. 84, Zur Kenntniss des Pigmentes im menschlichen Haar.
Vierteljahrsschrift fiir Dermatologie und Syphilis. Wien, 1884,
i, 8. 33.
15. Spieler, E. ’03. Ueber das Haarpigment. Hofmeister’s Beiträge,
16. Spillman. W. J. ’10. A Theory of Mendelian Phenomena. Am.
Breeders Mag., Vol. 1, No. 2, p. 113.
10.
er, E. e Hereditary Transmission of Defects in Man.
Pre
18. von Fürth, O., und Schneider, H. 7°10. Ueber tierisches Tyrosinasen
und ihre Beziehungen zur Pigmentbildung. Hofmeister’s Beiträge,
Bd. 1. ,
A COEFFICIENT OF INDIVIDUAL PREPOTENCY
FOR STUDENTS OF HEREDITY
DR. J. ARTHUR HARRIS
STATION FOR EXPERIMENTAL EVOLUTION, COLD SPRING HARBOR, N. Y.
I. THE Conception OF PREPOTENCY
THE term prepotency conveys the general idea that cer-
tain individuals ‘‘are particularly apt to impress their
personal characters upon their offspring.” Like most
terms of general biology it has been applied in several
different connections. The much-needed threshing over
of the literature to separate the few measures of wheat
from the stacks of straw and weeds falls outside the scope
of this note.
One may follow Vilmorin, Hallett, Hays and many
other noted breeders in the recognition of the practical
importance of the fact that two individuals may be
externally exactly alike and yet produce quite dissimilar
offspring, without pledging himself to any of the theories
of heredity in support of which it is sometimes cited.
The aim of the practical breeder is not to formulate or to
test theories of heredity but to get a strain of wheat
which will draw the maximum amount of flour from an acre
of soil or a breed of beasts that will yield the largest net
dividends in milk, eggs or steak. His problem is pre-
eminently a practical one, and one of the greatest services
the student of biology can render him is to provide the
criteria which enable him to select as easily as possible
the parents of a race which will meet his requirements.
The purpose of this note is to call the attention of stu-
dents of heredity to certain formule’ which may be of
1 These formule have heretofore been used in anthropometric surveys in
testing the divergence of the inhabitants of a restricted community from
the population of the whole area under consideration. They are equally
471
472 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vor. XLV
service in estimating the desirability of individual
parents.
By individual prepotency? we understand for present
purposes the phenomenon of certain individuals, or pairs
of individuals in bi-parental inheritance, being excep-
tional in their capacity for producing offspring of any
given characteristic.
As used here the term prepotency is most general. It
implies nothing concerning the somatic similarity? of
parent and offspring and is in no way dependent upon
any theory of heredity. It merely expresses a fact well
known to practical breeders for half a century. -
By a coefficient of individual prepotency one under-
stands a statistical constant which measures the degree
of superiority (with respect to the capacity for the pro-
duction of offspring of any desired type) of any single
parent or pair of parents.
well adapted to determine the significance of the deviation of an individual
family from its generation.
The fundamental — are:
Pearson, K., ‘‘On some Properties of the Hypergeometrical Series, and
on the Fitting of such ede to gaining Polygons in the Theory of
Chance,’’ Phil. Mag., February, 1899, p. 239.
Pearson, K., ‘‘On the Curves which are most Suitable for Describing
the Frequency of Random Samples of a Population,’’ Biometrika, Vol. V,
pp. 172-175, 1906.
Pearson, K., ‘‘Note on the Significant or Non-significant Character of
a Sub-sample drawn from a Sample,’’ Biometrika, Vol. V, pp. 181-183,
1906,
Pearson, K., ‘‘On a space af Class Heterogeneity or Divergence,’’
Biometrika, Vol. T pp. 198-203,
Tocher, J. F., ‘‘Tho Ant ae oe of the Inmates of
Asylums in Seotland, ’? Biometrika, Vol. V, pp. 315-318, 190
Tocher, J. F., ‘‘ Pigmentation Survey School Children in Scotland,’’
Biometrika, Vol. VI, pp. 143-146, 162-164.
The disadvantages of using a word which has been so variously em-
ployed as prepotency are offset by keeping the terminology as simple as
possible. The important thing is to have all terms carefully defined and
unambiguous wherever used.
° In any study of heredity the correlation between the somatie characters
of the parents and their offspring must be taken into account. Prepotency
may, a be estimated solely from the germinal characters of the
as expressed in their respective arrays of offspring.
No. 536] COEFFICIENT OF INDIVIDUAL PREPOTENCY 473
II. Tue MEASUREMENT or INDIVIDUAL PREPOTENCY
However well one may know the somatic characters of
an individual or however intimate his knowledge of its
ancestry the ultimate test of its value as a starting point
for a new race is the quality of its offspring. The proof
of the parent is its produce has been recognized as valid
by various breeders since the time of Louis Vilmorin, who
separated the parent beets and judged them individually
by their offspring. The ‘‘ear-to-row’’ test in corn breed-
ing, Petkus von Lochow’s row-tests in rye and Hays’s
‘‘centgener power’’ all represent attempts by practical
breeders to obtain measures of individual prepotency as
the term is used here. Galton’s study of the distribution
of prepotency in horses falls in the same class.
The method of estimating prepotency directly from the
mean value (e. g., sugar content) of the offspring, or
from the number of offspring surpassing a given stand-
ard (e. g., a mile in 2:30, or better, on the track) has dis-
advantages which will be obvious to those acquainted
with elementary statistics.
So far as I am aware the credit of first recognizing the
need of taking into account both type and variability in
the criterion by which the relative desirability of the indi-
vidual parents should be judged is due to Waugh.
In discussing some results secured on experiments with
peas he remarks :*
There were, as always, some exceptional cases of individual
vines which showed a marked ability to transmit their individual char-
acters to their offspring. The selection of such prepotent plants is
evidently an important matter in plant breeding. In order to exhibit
this difference we have computed a coefficient of heredity for each
parent and for each character under study.
Waugh’s formula is
C =1/eD,
where
C = coefficient of individual heredity,
e — standard deviation of offspring,
_ * Amn. Rept. Mass. Ag. Exp. Sta., Vol. 21, p. 172, 1909.
474 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von XLV
D = difference between numerical value of the parent
character and the mean of the same character
in the offspring.
In a later report he makes use of this formula ‘‘in an
attempt to answer the question whether prepotency is in-
herited or not.’”
Now while Waugh deserves all credit for suggesting
the need of a coefficient of individual prepotency, I think
the formula he proposes can not be justified theoretically
nor regarded as practically satisfactory.®
The requirements of a coefficient of individual pre-
potency are at: least the following:
(a) The comparison must be made between the off-
spring families, not between the individual parent and
its offspring.
(b) The comparison must be so drawn as to attach
importance only to differences significantly greater than
the probable errors of random sampling.
(c) The coefficient expressing prepotency should be
relative, i. e., it should be comparable from character to
character.
Proposition (b) and (c) will be granted without argu-
ment. In justification of (a) it is only necessary to point
out that from the standpoint of the man who wishes to
decide which families to continue to propagate and which
to burn, the ideal method is one which may be applied to
the individuals of any one generation entirely indepen-
dently of those of any other. Of course this is not to be
interpreted as a recommendation that in the routine work
of practical or experimental breeding only one generation
should be considered. What is meant is that it is desira-
ble to have formule which permit of a consideration of
prepotency on the data of any (offspring) generation
independently. Such a formula does not preclude or
render inadvisable the study of many ascendant genera-
tions.
* Wangh, loe. cit., Vol. 22, pp. 172-175, 1910.
° Indeed he himself has pointed out some of the difficulties and has sug-
gested that a better formula might be found.
No. 536] COEFFICIENT OF INDIVIDUAL PREPOTENCY 475
The necessity of dealing with each generation inde-
pendently is also imposed by the possibility of a differen-
tiation between any two generations due to purely envi-
ronmental (meteorological or edaphic) influences. Taken
as a whole the entire offspring generation may be superior
or inferior to the parental generation; and this because
of no hereditary influence of the parents at all, for all
families may be raised or lowered proportionally. This
fact vitiates at once any comparison between individual
parents and individual offspring unless the type and
variability of both parental and offspring generation are
taken into account.
In the practical work of calculation two cases may be
conveniently recognized: in the first, the character is
capable of direct measurement on a quantitative scale,
in the second, the character is not capable of direct
measurement but the individuals may be grouped into
satisfactorily defined classes. In the first case the means
may be compared; in the second case the proportional
frequencies of one class must be used.
(a) Case of Characters Measurable on a
Quantitative Scale
It is well known that the standard deviation of a mean
is ¢/VN and its probable error is .67449 «/VN. Given
two uncorrelated means m and M, their difference and its
probable error is given by
oe. S
m — M+ .67449 Ta + WV?
where v and 3 and n and N represent the standard devia-
tions and the numbers of individuals involved in the
series. Thus it is quite easy to test the significance of
differences in means between any two samples, or fam-
ilies in our case. But with a large number of families the
labor of a series of such comparisons is prohibitive.
What we need is some easily calculated criterion of the
biological significance of the deviation of the mean of ar
476 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
individual family from the mean of the population to
which it belongs.
Suppose a population composed of N individuals with
a mean of M and a variability of = is due to P parents.
Now if this population be divided into two random
samples of n and N’ individuals, m and M’ means, and
o and %’ variabilities the differences in their means
will be
2
í Fa + f
(m — M’) + .67449 Ni =- y
But Pearson has shown that the difference between the
mean of a sub-sample m which in our case may represent
the offspring of a single parent (or pair of parents) and
the population mean M is not given by the preceding
formula since n is included in N. The formula for such a.
case as this he has shown to be
o (: F) ~ n(M— mọ?
z U-7 >.
2
(m — M). .67449 = 4$ -WN À
This is the formula which we are seeking, the probable
error of the difference between the mean for any family
and that for the whole population. By calculating
(m — M)/Em-m for every family we should have a
criterion of its superiority or inferiority—the individual
prepotency of the parent in question—relative to the
average condition in the series to which it belongs. _
Tocher has pointed out advantages in using
(m—M)/om—s instead of (m — M)/Em-m, but this 18
merely a matter of convenience. The significance of the
ratios can be tested by tables of the normal curve.
(b) Case of Characters not Measurable on a
Quantitative Scale
For characters not quantitatively measurable two
methods of treatment are available. The first consists m
testing the divergence of a family from the general popu-
lation on the basis of the relative frequency of a given
character. The second consists in testing the deviation
No. 536] COEFFICIENT OF INDIVIDUAL PREPOTENCY 4i7
of a family from the population with respect to the dis-
tribution of a character. At present the second of these
methods seems of little practical importance for our
purpose because of the relatively small numbers of indi-
viduals available in breeding experiments, even with
plants, and because of the arithmetical routine.
Consider the first method. Let N be the number of
individuals in a population due to P parents. Let X be a
character common to all but appearing in different inten-
sities (say from 0 development to the greatest possible
intensity) in the several individuals, not measurable but
capable of division into m classes. Let s,,85,8;-°-: Sm be the
classes and Y, Ys» Ys * +Y, be the frequencies in the popu-
lation as a whole. Now if a single family of n members
be observed the probability of an individual belonging to
any class, say sa is y,, /N = p, while the probability of its
not belonging to that class is (1—p)—gq. The actual
number of individuals with character s, in the family
should be np—y,, , while the frequency for the m—1
remaining classes within the family will be given by
Yur Yas Yn >*> You providing (a) that the family is not
differentiated : from the population, e. g., that there is no
individual prepotency in the sense that we have used the
term, and (b) that n is so large that the probable errors
of random sampling are negligible. In actual work (b)
can never, or almost never, be realized. Our problem is
to determine whether differences between the theoretical
class frequencies, ys’, and the actually observed class
frequencies, ys”, in the family are to be regarded as due
to chance merely or whether they are so large that they
can reasonably be considered as indicating a differentia-
tion of the family from the population to which it belongs.
In short, our problem is to test (7,— 7.) against its
probable error.
Pearson has shown that the standard deviation of
(ys” — y’) for any grade is
a ; a—t \
=, —¥,) = npg (1 -y 1)
478 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von. XLV
and Tocher has pointed out that as a test for significance
of divergence we may use either of the three ratios
(a) (ys” — ys’)/Vnpq(N —n)/(N — 1).
(b) 100{(ys”/n) — p}/V1002pq(N — n)/n(N — 1).
(c) 100{(4s” /ye’) —1}/100Vq(N — n) /np(N —1).
The significance of these ratios can be judged from the
tables of the probability integral."
III. RECAPITULATION
/ Individual prepotency is here used to designate the
superior capacity of certain parents for producing off-
spring of any desired character. The conception is most
general, and does not imply a similarity in soma between
parent and offspring, but the prepotency of the parent is
judged entirely by the offspring it produces. The term
is used merely to describe a long-known phenomenon,
and no theoretical explanation is suggested.
Various breeders have tried to obtain a measure of
individual prepotency in its present significance. The
purpose of the present note is to point out certain bio-
metric formule, in use for other purposes for several
years, which seem well adapted for this purpose. They
at least obviate several of the objectional features of
some of the methods which have been employed. Their
applicability in practical work will probably be limited by
the arithmetical routine, but in experimental studies their
importance may be very considerable.” Illustration of
their application will be published soon.
CoLD SPRING HARBOR, N. Y.,
May 19, 1911.
TOf course a statistical formula is not applicable to cases not covered
by the assumptions on which it was developed. - It seems unnecessary to
discuss these here. Those using the formulæ should familiarize themselves
with the limitations laid down by Pearson and Tocher in proposing the
formule.
THE ADAPTATIONS OF THE PRIMATES
PROFESSOR F. B. LOOMIS,
AMHERST, Mass.
THE development of the primates has taken place in
regions of comparatively high temperatures, especially
in tropical and semitropical climate. This is chiefly due
to their arboreal adaptation, which keeps them where
the trees throughout the year offer food either as fruit,
leaves, blossoms, insects or small animals.
The first primates are yet to be found, but they doubtless
lived either during the last of the Cretaceous or in the
earliest Eocene; for during the Lower Eocene of the Wa-
satch epoch there suddenly appear in America two well-
distinguished families of primates, the general feeders
or Notharctide, and the fruit eaters or Anaptomorphi-
dæ.! Between these no intermediate or ancestral group
is known, but the wide divergence in form would indicate
a considerable time element for development. The gen-
era Anaptomorphus and Pelycodus appear in America
as a part of the wave of migration which introduces for
the first time representatives of the modern groups of
mammals. Somewhat later the primates appear in Eng-
land and France, apparently part of the same original
stock but differing slightly as a result of independent
development.
The original group of primates or ancestral stock seems
to have been a large-brained arboreal insectivor, some-
what similar to the tree shrews (Tupaiide). Appar- —
ently their home was to the north in the Hudson Bay
*The considerable group termed Proglires by Osborn and including
Mixodectes, Microsyops, Cynodontomys, Indrodon, Olbodotes, ete., all hav-
ing in common the gnawing adaptation and a very primate-like set of
premolars and molars, are now assigned by Matthew and Osborn to the
Insectivora.
479
480 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
region or further north in the forest areas; and under
the decidedly tropical climate which is evidenced by the
palms and ferns, crocodiles and primates themselves.”
From this ancestral center the first primates, along with
other groups, migrated in all directions possible, climate
and land bridges being considered. This opened three
paths, one south into America, a second southeasterly
into England and France, and a third southwesterly into
Asia, thence ever southerly across China and India and
along the Indo-Madagascar isthmus (or chain of islands)
to Madagascar and Africa.
—> General Feeders >— Fruit Eaters
Fie. 1. Diagram of the radiation of the primates in the Eocene.
The first primates, as indicated, separate into two
groups, first a group of long-headed (dolicocephalic) gen-
eral feeders with unspecialized teeth, which probably took
fruit, leaves, insects and small animals: and second a
group of short headed (brachycephalic) fruit-eaters
with crowded and rather high pointed teeth. These are
* For a discussion of the climate see Wortman, Amer, Jour. Sci., 1903,
Vol. 165, p. 417; and Wieland, same journal, Vol. 166, p. 401, 1903.
No. 536] ADAPTATIONS OF THE PRIMATES 481
the first adaptations of the primates and it probably took
some time to arrive at the degree of difference found in
the Wasatch of North America.
The fruit-eating brachycephalic group includes Anap-
tomorphus of American Eocene, Necrolemur and Micro-
cherus of the European Eocene, and Tarsius, now living
in southeast Asia. During the Eocene the climate was
progressively colder, becoming at least temperate by the
ayeuwg Je4yjsaouy
/
6 \
J
2
£
7
“ee,
¥ Aone | aes reso (Af)
&, Sage a
Anthropoidea (Ey) (A) (Af)
ay
wa
Cebidae (S Amer)
Fic. 2. Genealogical relationships of the Eocene primates.
end of the Eocene in the northern parts of America.
This climate acted to force southward all the primates
_ of the north and also several other groups, so that dur-
ing the Lower Eocene we have the whole primate group
pushing down, the Anaptomorphidæ all over North
America, the Microchoeridæ on to what there was of Eu-
rope and the ancestors of Tarsius? on to eastern Asia,
* Earle, Amer. Nart., Vol. 31, pp. 569-575 and 680—689, 1897.
482 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vot XLV
which through the lower and middle Eocene was sepa-
rated from Europe. The fact that Tarsius is confined
to islands possibly explains why it has remained in so
primitive a condition in many ways, though specialized
in the limbs which are as yet unknown in any others of
this group.
The general feeders are a larger and more abundantly
preserved group. It includes the Notharctide* of North
America (to which belong Pelycodus and Notharctus) ;
the Adapiide of Europe (including Adapis and Plesa-
dapis); the Homunculide® of South American Miocene
(including the genera Homunculus, Pitheculites, Ho-
munculites) and lastly the living lemurs of southern
Asia, Madagascar and Africa. All have the dentition
%, 1, %4, 34 — 40, and long heads, and apparently ate both
vegetable and animal food. The group originated like
the foregoing in northern America and migrated south-
ward, driven by the change in climate. The earliest
known forms are those in the Wasatch of western Amer-
ica, and they are likewise the most primitive. Though
preserved only in Wyoming and New Mexico, they prob-
ably occupied pretty much all of our western plains coun-
try, then forested. South America seems to have been
isolated from early Eocene times, so that some repre-
sentatives of this group probably got into that continent
by early Eocene times, i. e., the radiation over Nort
America must have been pretty rapid and general by
lower Eocene times. Those in North America after the
separation of South America flourished for some time,
being especially abundant in the Wind River and Bridger
epochs, but with the cold of the Uinta epoch they were
crowded south and finally exterminated in North Amer-
ica, never more to be widely distributed on that continent.
*See Osborn, Bull. Amer. Museum Nat. Hist., Vol. 16, pp. 169-214, 1902,
ro he mea and Loomis, Amer. Jour. Sci., Vol. 171, pp. 217-
*See Schlosser, ‘‘Die Affen, Lemuren, Chiropteren, ete.,’’? des Euro-
päischen Tertiiirs, Theil 1, s. 19-54, 1887.
*See Ameghino, Anal. d. Museo Nac. d. Buenos Aires, Vol. 15, PP-
424—429, 1906.
No. 536] ADAPTATIONS OF THE PRIMATES 483
Those in South America quickly differentiated by the
loss of the first premolar, making a dental formula of
%, 1, 3%, °4—36. With this also goes a deepening of the
ramus of the lower jaw, a shortening of the face, and a
tendency to develop the occipital region so that it over-
hangs widely the foramen magnum. This group of
forms is termed the Cebide. On becoming successfully
adapted to the South American continent and during the
long isolation of that area, these early forms have
gradually adapted themselves in various directions, often
paralleling old world types. In size they have developed,
the largest forms having a body of 27 to 28 inches in
length, and legs as long, making a height of 41% feet,
which is a good-sized monkey. They have always re-
mained arboreal with opposable thumbs and a prehensile
tail; but they vary from the slender spider monkeys to
the robust and powerful woolly monkeys (Lagothrix).
From the above has been specialized the family of mar-
mosets (Hapalide), by the loss of the last molar (mak-
ing the dentition %, 4, 3%, %2 — 32), by the development of
a broad nasal septum, the loss of the prehensile character
of the tail and opposability of the thumb.
The southwesterly wave of migration crossed the Beh-
rings connection and moved down the easterly part of
Asia across the Indo-Madagascar isthmus and into
Africa. This isthmus or series of islands sank at or
toward the end of the Eocene, leaving lemurs stranded
all along the area occupied by the isthmus. Those on the
islands and especially on Madagascar have remained
very much as they were, adapting themselves in minor
ways, but being always arboreal. Some peculiarities
must have developed very early for they are common to
the group, like the having of the lower incisors project-
ing forward (proclivous), the lower canine small and
like an incisor, while the first premolar acts as a canine
tooth. Then the fourth digit of the hand is longest, and
the second one of the foot is clawed instead of having a
nail. In this lemur group we know only the immediate
484 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vov. XLV
ancestors of the living forms, and as yet no record has
been found of the forms intermediate between those on
America and the living types. In the case of the Mada-
gascar form, Chiromys or the aye-aye, we have a repre-
sentative of the group which has adopted a gnawing habit
to get grubs, etc., under the bark, and a great change
has resulted in the dentition, by which the first incisor
has become specialized into a rodent-like gnawing tooth
and there is a reduction in the teeth so that the formula
is only %, °/o, 1/o, 4=18.
The easterly wave of migration is represented by sev-
eral species of Adapis found in the middle and upper
Eocene of England and France. Apparently. the prog-
ress of this easterly migration was slower, so that they
reach Europe considerably later than the same latitude
in America. The primates are not in the front wave of
immigration on the European side, so that it is possible
that the forested condition was not as favorable. The
Adapiide in Europe, small primates with a long low
skull and the ancestral dental formula %, 4, %, *4—=40,
the teeth being very generalized.
With the close of the Eocene the first adaptive radia-
tion of the Primates was complete, and they had achieved
an almost world-wide distribution. At the end of the
period the North American contingent was extinct, the
South American group was isolated, the Asiatic and
African forms were scattered on islands and on the Afri-
can continent, and the European contingent was located
in central and southern Europe, or what land there was
at that time in those regions (see Fig. 3) ; and it is among
these that the next act in the great primate drama took
place.
The Oligocene period is one in which there was a grad-
ual rising or emergence of continental areas so that the
southern part of Europe was an archipelago, which to-
ward the end developed into a long peninsula, extending
from the present Asia Minor (see Fig. 3). During this
period the change in the Adapiide is but little known, but
No. 536] ADAPTATIONS OF THE PRIMATES 485
during that time they shortened the skull and lost the
first two premolars, and made a considerable increase in
size. In Europe their remains are very scarce and con-
fined to the Lower Oligocene when it was the true Adapis
which was holding over from the Eocene. Schlosser has
just reported some primates from the Fayûm formations
of Oligocene age in northern Africa. These he gives new
generic names, Meripithecus, Parapithecus and Proplio-
pithecus, assigning the first two to the Cercopithecide
and the last to the Simiide. They seem from the de-
scriptions to be primitive members of the Cercopithecide,
which would indicate that the change to the modern type
by the loss of the first two premolars was accomplished
in the early Oligocene, perhaps in Africa as the two areas
are in connection at the time across Gibraltar.’
At the beginning of the Miocene the European primates
had the dental formula %, 4, %, #432, a shortened face,
and a shortened tail, but were still arboreal forms. Dur-
ing the Lower Miocene two divisions arise, the one adher-
ing to the quadrupedal gait, the heavy jaws and longer
snout: the other acquiring the bipedal gait, and shorten-
ing the face with a corresponding broadening of the
teeth. In both divisions there is a tendency to come
down to the ground.
- The former group is the Cercopithecide in its broad
sense, or ‘‘old world monkeys’’; while the latter are the
Simiide or apes.
The Cereopithecide seem to run back to some such form
as the Oreopithecus, found in northern Italy, and present-
ing dental characteristics resembling the baboon, but at
the same time having a shortened face suggesting the
Simiide. A second form belonging to this group is
Mesopithecus found in considerable abundance in the
Lower Pliocene of Greece. This form seems to be in-
termediate between the macaques and langurs, resem-
* For geography see Matthew, Bull. Amer. Museum Nat. Hist., Vol. 22,
p. 364, 1906. For the Fayum Primates, see Zoologischen Anzeiger, Bd. 35,
for March, 1910, and Matthew, Amer. Nat., Vol. 44, Nov., 1910, p. 700.
486 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vot XLV
bling the former in the stout limbs, the latter in its den-
tition. Considering the different subfamilies it would
appear that the Cercopithecide originated in southern
Europe, that it was fairly successful, and that as a result
of this, the family adapted itself in three directions; first
one group left the trees and took to life on the ground,
giving rise to Cynocephalus and Macacus; the second
group became leaf feeders, and developed a pouched
stomach and for some reason also disproportionally long
hind limbs, giving rise to Semnopithecus and Nasalis of
Asia and Colobus of Africa: while those remaining in the
trees and changing but little are Cercopithecus and Cer-
cocebus of Africa.
The differentiations took place in the Miocene and are
fundamentally based on food supplies. Those forms
which had developed strength enough to defend them-
selves, their fore and hind limbs being approximately
equal in length, and their food including insects, lizards,
frogs, etc., as well as all sorts of vegetable life, like
leaves, fruit, blossoms, etc., came down from the trees.
The terrestrial forms which continued to live in the
forests make the genus Macacus, or macaques, which
during the Pliocene spread pretty well all over Europe,
even up into England, and also into western Asia where
they still live. In the Pleistocene some representatives
of the genus went with the great wave of migration from
southern Asia into Africa, but they have become extinct
in that continent except for one species, the Barbary ape.
Those members of the group which left the woods and
took to the more open country developed great strength
and powerful jaws and are the baboons (Cynocephalus )
These too originated in southern Europe and migrate
during the Pliocene eastward into Asia, and during the
Pleistocene on down into Africa, to which continent they
are now confined.
The second subfamily of the Cercopithecide are the
langurs (Semnopithecus, Nasalis and Colobus) which,
while remaining largely arboreal, have specialized as her-
No. 536] ADAPTATIONS OF THE PRIMATES 487
7
Fic. 3. Diagram of the radiation of the quadrupedal old world monkeys.
— c j line ~— Cynocephalus Macacus line SP te ee eee Semnopithecus üne
488 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST Von.. XLV
bivors among the primates, feeding exclusively on leaves;
in response to which they have developed a stomach of
several pouches comparable to that of a sheep or cow.
Like the preceding subfamily, they originated in southern
Europe and during the Pliocene moved over into south-
ern Asia, where the langurs and the nasal monkeys live
to-day. Some members of the group, however, moved
during the Pleistocene in Africa where the thumb was
much reduced, which feature distinguishes the genus
Colobus.
of eo
rays
Cree Macacvs (Eu) (A) (AN
oF
s 8
2 V:
F Eoo e Cercopithecus (Af)
& G
&
f
2
Pleistocene Recent
Miocene | Pliocene
Fic. 4. Genealogical relationships of the quadrupedal old world monkeys.
Lastly the unspecialized subdivision of the family, the
Cercopithecus genus, followed the same lines of migra-
tion and reached Africa where they now live, having
spread over the major part of the continent.
Turning back to the early Miocene, we find that there
No. 536] ADAPTATIONS OF THE PRIMATES 489
was another group of primates which tended to come to
the ground, and these tended to assume a more or less
upright position, with a bipedal gait. The hands thus
free to take hold of objects, were free to develop a deft-
ness and adaptability, which seems to be the key to the
progressive development of the apes. It seems however
that this handling of objects (food, sticks, stones) began
before they left the trees and was really the cause of
taking the bipedal gait. The climbing offered an ever
changing grasp and carrying food to the mouth was a nat-
ural starting point; so that, with the front paws used as
hands, there is a good reason for exempting them from
the heavy work of locomotion. Contributory to this idea
is the eolith development. These crude flaked flints*
begin back in the Miocene at least, and as Penck?’ sug-
gests the only known primate which might be suggested
as an eolith-maker is Dryopithecus. It seems highly
probable then that the hands had begun to be used as such
before the first apes came to the ground and that this
specialization of the hand was the cause of the upright
position and bipedal gait. Of course the varied exper-
ience resulting from taking up all sorts of objects and
using them for different purposes tended to develop the
intelligence, and that furthered handling, the two acting
and reacting on each other.
In the early Pliocene of southern Europe three divi-
sions of the simian group have already arisen,” one
group remaining arboreal, or more probably reverting
again to the trees, a second group developing great mus-
cular and skeletal strength, the third group developing
especially the brain and central nervous system.
The first of these groups, i. e., the retrogressive or
aboreal group, is represented in the Upper Miocene of
southern Europe by Pliopithecus, a form ancestral to the
modern gibbons, and one which during the upper Miocene
3 See MacCurdy, Amer. Anthrop., Vol. 7, n. s., pp. 425-479, 1905.
° Science, Vol. 29, n. s., p. 359, 1909.
See Schlosser, Zoologischen Anzeiger, Vol. 22, p. 289, 1900.
THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
490
apes.
>— Gorilla Simia
Fie. 5. Diagram of the radiations of the bipedal primates or
— > Anthropithecus
Bat to Mao
No. 536] ADAPTATIONS OF THE PRIMATES 491
and lower Pliocene spread over a large part of Europe
(France, Germany, Switzerland). However when the
colder climate of the Pliocene developed, the European
contingent was exterminated, and only those in Asia
have survived as the gibbons of to-day.
The second group which developed especially strength
is rare both in prehistoric and recent times: but it seems
gi
oe pir
picus
phop?
Anthropithecus — Chimpanzee
. — Dryopithecus —Anthropithecus
SNAJP
Gorilla
S;
N i
Miocene Pliocene Pleistocene Recent
Fic. 6. Genealogical relationships of the anthropoid apes.
to have originated first in southern Europe though no
representatives have yet been found. In the Pliocene
however the genus Simia has been found in southern
Asia where its representatives still remain as the orang
utan. During the Pleistocene representatives of the
group seem to have reached Africa where they have per-
sisted as the gorilla.
The third group has at its base Dryopithecus, the
middle and upper Miocene ape which ranged over a con-
492 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
siderable part of Europe: but at the end of the Miocene
this form became extinct and with it the last of the chim-
panzee line in Europe, the next repr tative being
Anthropithecus, the true chimpanzees, found in the Pli-
ocene of India. This first chimpanzee makes a slightly
closer approximation to man than the living species.
During the Pleistocene the wave of immigration into
Africa included Anthropithecus, which has survived only
on that continent. In 1896 Dubois found in Java in beds
now generally called early Pleistocene, the top of a skull,
a femur, and a few fragments of a transitional form
which is in many ways like the apes and in others like
man. This he called Pithecanthropus erectus, and it
stands as either a very high grade ape or as a low grade
man, the latter being the usual designation. If not the
actual ancestor of man, it is at least a typical stage in his
development.
From the distribution of Anthropithecus and Pithecan-
thropus it seems certain that man originated in southern
Asia, at least by the beginning of the Pleistocene: and
that he radiated from there westward across Europe
where such remains as the Heidelberg jaw, and those of
the Neanderthal type have been found so widely. He
probably also migrated easterly into North America, and
thence south with the Pleistocene fauna into South Amer-
ica where very primitive remains have recently been de-
scribed by Ameghino as Diprothomo platensis, and Homo
pampensis. Remains have been strangely scarce 1
North America, though the fauna, with which early man
usually associated is present in various parts of the
continent.
JEAN MARCHANT; AN EIGHTEENTH CENTURY
MUTATIONIST!
DR. HENRI HUS
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN
Jean Marcuant was the son of Nicholas Marchant
(died, Paris, 1678), director of the Jardin du Roi, the
principal author of the famous ‘‘ Mémoires pour servir a
l’histoire des Plantes,’’ published in 1676 under the aus-
pices of l’Académie royale des Sciences and edited by
Dodart.?
The name Marchant is perhaps most familiar in con-
nection with the genus Marchantia, which, though not
unfrequently attributed to Linnæus, was named by Jean
Marchant in honor of his father,’ when, because of his
discovery of the ‘‘flower’’ and ‘‘seeds,’’ he removed it
from the genus Lichen, under which it formerly had fig-
ured as Lichen petreus stellatus.*
4 AGENDY EE the Botanical Laboratory of the University of
egn No.
s, D., as trois premiers botanistes de Leora ae des
Sciences, Dodart et les deux Marchant,’’ Bull. Soc. bot. France, 35: 285,
1888. In this paper Clos a to great length in aien petik to
show that Nicholas Marchant was the chief aii to the work just
referred to, though a ae reference to a statement on the a of the
academy and which curiously enough seems to have escaped him, would at
once have settled the matter beyond question. In “Table en a des
matières contenues dans 1’Histoire et = Mémoires de l’Académie Royale
des Sciences,’’ publiée par son ordre, 1: 200, 1666-1698, 1778, one reads:
‘‘ Marchant [M. Nicholas] a fourni a le Botanique des Mémoires pour
servir à l’Histoire des Plantes. T. 4, p. 122
* Marchant, J., ‘‘ Nouvelle découverte dee fleurs et des graines d’un
anp rangée par les botanistes sous le genre du Lichen,’’? Mém. de Phoil.
. d. 8c., 1713, pp. 229-234. ‘‘Nous établirons pour cette plante un
nouveau genre que nous appellerons Marchantia du nom de feu M. Marchant,
mon père, qui le premier eut l'honneur d’occuper une place de botaniste
dans cette Académie, Se le Roy en 1666 créa sith Compagnie. ’’
*Caspar Bauhin, Pin.
493
494 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
It was indeed a discovery far beyond mediocrity and
indicative of excellent powers of observation. For since
the days of Cxsalpino but little advance seemed to have
been made as to the organs of reproduction. Even one
of Linneus’s first papers, ‘‘Preludia Sponsaliorum
arborum,’’ deals with the sexes of plants, and, attracting
the attention of Olaf Rudbeck (1729), secured for the
‘‘father of botany’’ in spe, the position of assistant.”
Darwin, in the introduction to his ‘‘Origin of Species,”
points to Buffon as the first transmutationist, though, as
he says, it was the views of Lamarck which first at-
tracted general attention. But long before their time,
when Buffon was but a boy of twelve, Jean Marchant
had made some very pertinent observations on the sud-
den origin of species. Believing genera to have been
created as such, a view expressed in his early days by
Linnæus himself in his ‘‘Systema Nature,’’® he was able
to see new ‘‘species’’ originate suddenly. He had at his
disposal a garden, probably already used by his father,’
who was an ardent collector and introduced the seed of
many foreign plants, growing and describing them.’ His
observations were made upon Mercurialis annua, the
dog’s mercury, a plant long known as possessing certain
reputed virtues.!°
° Wittrock, Veit B., ‘‘ Nagra ord om Linné och hans pees för den
ater a Vetenskupes: ”? Acta Horti Bergiani, 4: No. 1, sane
omne est naturale, in primordio tale creatum
cP the ‘‘ Jardin du Roi.’’ ‘Il [Nicholas Marchant] faisoit
campagne,’’ Hist. de 1’Acad. roy. d. Se., 1666-1686, 1: 200, Paris, 1733.
<‘ Hist. de 1’Acad. roy. d. Se.,’’ 1680, p. 307
°’ This term is also pe for M. perennis, in which case the name French
BPA is given to M. ua.
* It was supposed Der ie juice of species of PANTENE especially of
the ARR ll M. tomentosa, had the power to determine the sex of
children, according to whether the mother drank the juice ng the male or
of the female plant. sins the true sex of the plant was not
known, as also is apparent from Marchant’s paper. Thus boy’s mercury
was the name applied to a female plant of M. oe girl’s mereury the
name given to the plant ser staminate flow Also, staminate flowers
repeatedly have been observed on the PeR via (f. ambigua, Duby,
"Bot, Gall.,’’ 1: 417),
No. 536] JEAN MARCHANT 495
In 1715 Marchant noted in his garden" the appearance
of a laciniate form of Mercurialis annua, which he desig-
nated Mercurialis foliis capillaceis. The next year, in the
same part of the garden, this plant reappeared, being
represented by four individuals. There appeared
further two plants, the foliage of which, though also of a
laciniate character, was sufficiently different to permit of
their being readily distinguished. To these plants he
applied the name Mercurialis foliis in varias et inequales
lacinias quasi dilaceratis. The description of the leaves
at once leads us to recognize this plant as a typical
laciniate form, especially his reference to ‘‘a large num-
ber of leaves, which, because of their irregular outline,
resemble mere remnants of leaves torn or gnawed by
caterpillars,’’ curiously enough, the same expression
which I used to describe the appearance of the leaves in
the flowering shoot of Arctium minus laciniatum.
In an attempt to explain the successive appearance of
these two new forms of Mercurialis we could assume
` that both forms had been created in 1714, but that the
seed of one had germinated in 1715, while that of the
other remained dormant for a year. It is, however, far
more probable that but one plant of the first laciniate
variety had been allowed to grow up, and that in the
next year special orders were given to the gardener who
had the care of this particular portion of the garden, to
allow to grow all seedlings which in the least resembled
those of Mercurialis. Still another possibility is that
the first form, created in 1714, gave rise, in 1715, through
a second mutation, to another, less laciniate form, which
appeared in 1716.
After reporting these plants in 1719, Marchant makes
no further mention of them, but de Candolle!? refers to
them, under Mercurialis annua, in the following terms:
“Presumably the Jardin Royal. ‘‘Jean Marchant avait, ainsi que son
père, le titre de directeur de la culture des plantes du Jardin du roi.’’
Michaud, ‘‘ Biog. Univ.,’’ 26: 486, 2d ed.
mt A a O 263.707.
496 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von XLV
Mem, de tAcad 1729: FL 6 Per 64.
Xj
KA \
DA
l và ; xf
Wf
S
SARTA
Fre, 1.
Monstrose occurrit: 1° laciniata, foliis laciniato-dissectis. © In Gallia
(Marchant). — March. in Act. Acad. Paris, 1719, p. 59. t. 6. — 2° capil-
lacea (Guep. “ Flore Maine-et-Loire,” ed. 3, p. 401), foliis ad lacinias
auguste lineari-lanceolatas, lineares v. capillaceas integras reductis. © In
hortis Andegaviæ et ad Issy-l’Evéque (Guepin, J. e., Gren. et Godron,
No. 536] JEAN MARCHANT 497
Mem. de lAcad. 1729. F a pag. by
Mercuriahe altera, folar in vartas ct murquates lacinias y
the “ e
Frc. 2.
“Flore de France,” Vol. 3, p. 99). — Marchant in Mém. de l’Acad.
Paris, 1719, p. 64, t. 6
This discovery on the part of Marchant is particularly
interesting for various reasons. In the first place be-
498 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
cause it is the second historical case of mutation on rec-
ord. Further, because of a certain analogy with Spreng-
er’s discovery of Chelidonium majus laciniatum.
Sprenger, an apothecary of Heidelberg, cultivated a
large number of plants in his garden as was the custom
in those days, and, about 1590, observed there a type of
Chelidonium majus formerly unknown to him and to
which he gave the name Chelidonia major foliis et flori-
bus incisis. Tournefort, in his ‘‘Schola botanica,’’ men-
tions three forms, Chelidonium majus vulgare ©. B.,
Ch. majus foliis quernis C. B. (Ch. folio laciniato J. B.)
and Ch. majus foliis et flores minutissime laciniatis Hort.
reg. par. The second of these was identical with the
variety discovered by Sprenger, the third a form which
had originated in the Paris Botanic Garden and was dis-
tinguished from the other by the greater reduction of
the leaf blade. Of the laciniate varieties of both Cheli-
donium majus and Mercurialis annua there exist there-
fore two forms. While those of Chelidonium majus, and
especially the first, are fairly well known and may be en-
countered in almost any botanie garden, it is not so in
the case of either of the laciniate varieties of Mercurialis
annua. At least I do not remember seeing them, nor do
I recollect the occurrence of their names in the seed-ex-
change lists annually published.
In at least one instance the claim has been made that
one of the laciniate varieties of Chelidonium majus orig-
inated de novo" a claim which to Korschinsky™® appears
to lack foundation. No such claim has been made for one
of the laciniate varieties of Mercurialis annua. How-
ever, as seen from de Candolle’s account, given above, at
least one of the laciniate forms was reported as occur-
ring both in the botanic garden at Angers and also at Issy-
IEvéque. These two towns, the first in Maine-et-Loire,
“Roze, E., ‘‘Le Chelidonium lacimiatum Miller,’’? Journ. de Bot., 9:
296, 1895.
“Clos, D., ‘‘Réapparition de la Chélidoine à feuille de Fumeterre,’’
Compt. rend. 115: 381, Paris, 18
5 Korse rechinsky, 8 y + Hpeabocedesis und Evolution,’’ Flora, 89: 240, 1901.
No. 536] JEAN MARCHANT 499
the other in Saône-et-Loire, lie more than 200 miles
apart. It is possible, perhaps, that the seed was
brought from Paris to Issy-l’Evéque and from there
transported accidentally to Angers. Or is it more prob-
able that the variety originated a second time? It isa
question which forever must remain unanswered, though
it is not improbable that a French student, who most
readily commands the means of research in this direc-
tion, could, by delving into historical records, perhaps
throw some light upon the subject.
The work of Jean Marchant gives evidence, not only of
great exactitude, but also of excellent powers of observa-
tion. Thus, a few years after his discovery of the lacin-
iate forms of Mercurialis annua, he was able to give an
account, and, as I believe, the first, of a myxomycete, of
the ‘‘flowers of tan.’’!®
As is evident from the description and drawings, he
was dealing with a Fuligo. He recognized the vegetable
character of the organism, but unfortunately places it
with the sponges, giving it the name Spongia fugax,
mollis, fora et amoena,in pulveri coriari nasceus. In this
case, as in the other, Marchant’s ambition did not lead
him beyond a mere, apparently most accurate, descrip-
tion, something decidedly pleasing when we remember
that in the same year Jean Marchant was elected to mem-
bership of the Académie (1678), there appeared Father
Kircher’s Mundus subterraneus," and that one of his
contemporaries was de Maillet (1656-1738), who ‘‘de-
rived birds from flying fishes, lions from sea-lions, and
man from l’homme marin, the husband of the mermaid!’’
Believing genera to have been created as such, Mar-
chant did not go beyond this point, but realized that
species were derived from preexisting ones. His own
* Marchant, J., ‘‘Observation touchant une végétation particuliére qui
nait sur l’écorce du chêne battue, et mise en poudre, vulgairement appelée
du Tan,’’ Mém. de Math. et de Phys. de l'Acad. roy. d. Sc., 1727: 335,
Paris, 1729. ‘
" Osborn, H. F., ‘‘From the Greeks to Darwin,’’ 109, 1908. ‘‘The
worthy priest describes orchids giving birth to birds, ete.’’
500 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vot XLV
words should be quoted here. As far as I am aware,
there exists but one account of any length of Marchant’s
discovery, that of Korschinsky.!S Godron refers to
him’? as does de Vries.”
Since the original papers are rather inaccessible to the
majority, it was deemed of interest to give here a trans-
lation of Marchant’s two articles dealing with his dis-
covery. The translation of course has been made as
literal as possible. The first paper is merely a résumé
of an address made before the academy by Marchant.
The second gives a detailed account as published in the
Mémoirs.
-Ox THE Propuction or New Spectres or Prants”
In the month of July, 1715, Mons. Marchant noted
in his garden a plant which he did not know, and which
attained a height of from five to six inches.?? It per-
sisted until the end of December, when it dried up and
died. He believed to be able to class it only with the
genus to which the mercury belonged; and since it
was entirely new and thus far had not been described by
authors, he called it Mercurialis foliis capillaceis.
The following year in the month of April, and in the
same place where this plant had been, he saw appear six
others, of which four were quite similar to the former,
and two others sufficiently different to make another
species of mercury, which he named Mercurialis foliis
in varias & inequales lacinias quasi dilaceratis. It per-
sisted until the end of December, in which respect these
two species are different from the common mercury,
which, though annual like these, does not last as long.
* Loe. cit.
» Godron, ‘‘ De l’espéce,’’? 1: 160 (not seen).
* De Vries, H., ‘‘Die Mutationstheorie,’’ 1: 136, 1901. tí Mercurialis
annua laciniata ist 1719 von Marchant als neue Form entdeckt worden;
sie ist seitdem samenbestandig geblieben.’’
_ ” “Fist. de 1’Acad. roy. d. Se.,’? 1719, p. 57, Paris, 1721.
=“ The French ‘‘ pied’? is sist to 1 foot 14 inch of our measure and 7
divided into 12 ‘‘pouces,’’ each ‘‘pouce’’ being divided into 12 ‘<Jignes.”?
Pouce and ligne are translated inch and line, respectively.
No. 536] JEAN MARCHANT 501
These two new plants since have multiplied in a space
of seven or eight feet, and, which is astonishing, never
has Mons. Marchant been able to discover any signs of
seed upon them. At the same time the slight extent of
the plot upon which they reappear every year sufficiently
shows that they must have been derived from seeds which
probably fell upon it from preceding plants. Since some
time ago were discovered the secret means which sev-
eral plans make use of to hide their seed, it is all the
more marvelous that there still are some which can suc-
ceed in hiding them.
But the principal reflexion of Mons. Marchant upon
these two plants is that it would not be impossible for
new species to be formed; for these have all the appear-
ance of being such; how else could they have escaped all
botanists? Art, culture and, still more, chance, that is
to say, certain unknown circumstances, every day bring
about novelties in interesting flowers such as the anem-
ones and buttercups, and these novelties are treated
by botanists as varieties only, which do not deserve to
change the species; but why should nature be incapable
of novelties which went thus far? It seems she is less
constant and more diverse in plants than in animals, and
who knows the limits of this diversity?
At this rate the old-time botanists would not have been
wrong in describing so few species in a single genus;
they were not acquainted with more, and it is time which
has brought new ones. For the same reason the future
botanists would be overwhelmed, and finally obliged to
abandon the species to limit themselves to the genera.
But ere forecasting that which will be, one must assure
oneself of that which is.
OBSERVATIONS ON THE NATURE OF PLANTS
By Mons. MARCHANT”
The researches which are made in Natural Science frequently demand
long series of observations to arrive at a perfect knowledge of the sub-
*%¢<Mém. d. Math. et de Phys. tir. d. Rég. de 1’Acad. roy. d. Se. de
1’Année, MDCCXIX,’’ p. 59, Fy. 1, 1719, Paris, 1721.
502 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
jects which one undertakes to deal with; and it is for this reason that one
must not be astonished that the botanists have not yet discovered the
seeds of a number of plants, though they knew these plants long since.
One must be the less surprised about this since among these plants,
there are several which can not be cultivated, and with which one meets
accidentally only, and others which, because of their smallness, also bear
only exceedingly small seeds, which frequently escape even the most
observant. The observation of which we are about to speak is related
to these kinds of investigations. It is in fact a matter of two plants
which we deem to be of the same genus, but of different species, of
which during the four years which we have known them, which we have
studied them, it has been impossible for us to observe the seeds. These
plants showed themselves to us for the first time in our garden; I had
never seen them before, neither there nor in other places, and I do not
know that botanists have made mention of them.
Yet they are sufficiently tall to be observed by those who apply them-
selves to a knowledge of the Simples, if they grew commonly in our
gardens, just as are a number of other common plants; these new plants
finally have reproduced themselves in our garden, from the time above
mentioned, without one having been able to find seed upon them.
According to the smell of these plants and the structure of their
flowers, I am satisfied they belong to the genus of the Mercury of which
we here represent the flower (Fig. A, Pl. 1). To make known the
nature of these herbs, we will begin by describing the first species which
-we observed in the month of July of the year 1715, and we shall name
it Mercurialis foliis capillaceis.
The plant was five to six inches high, its stem was about two lines
än thickness, bare at the base, round, of a pale green color, smooth,
shiny and nearly transparent, provided with five branches, two of which,
parallel and placed towards the base of the stem, were longer than two
inches. The others were unequally shorter. The stem and the branches
were rather irregularly beset with leaves without petioles, some alone
and bare (les unes seules et nues), the others attached in bunches and
intermixed, accompanied at their point of origin by several flower buds,
which together, or leaving some spaces between them, surrounded the
stem and the branches of this plant. The longest leaves ending in a
sharp point measured about one inch, their width was half a line in the
middle, some were wider at their base; some others were dissected
towards the point in two very narrow strips of different lengths, and
horizontally. All were rather stiff, notwithstanding their delicate tex-
ture, and they appeared more or less like the prineipal veins of leaves
No. 536] JEAN MARCHANT 503
which had been stripped of their lateral veins and of their parenchyma.
The flowers which were collected in small clusters (B. nat. size) opened
successively only. Their color approached a greenish yellow. They
consisted of a calyx of three leaves C of an oval shape, shell-like, sepa-
rated from each other at their point of origin by a cluster of ten or
twelve very fine and very short filaments D which had no tips.* The
flower was but a line in diameter and its pedicel was so short that it
was hardly visible.
The root of this plant was a little less thick than its stem. It was
from four to five inches long, twisted, forming slight undulations
era
undulating and hairy, which branched of in all directions. Its internal
substance was very white, hard and covered with a more or less fleshy
bark of a white-yellow color.
The entire plant on being rubbed had a rank unpleasant odor and a
nauseous flavor having something nitrous about it, closely approaching
the taste of the common Mercury.
This plant persisted until the end of the month of December, after
which it dried up and perished entirely.
This observation put me on the alert to discover this plant the follow-
ing year. Until the end of the month of March I noticed nothing of
that for which I was looking; but in April I saw appear six “an of
which four seemed to be the plant which just now has been d d.
The two others were slightly different from the preceding, in that in
had larger leaves. These and the others increased in size, and I had the
pleasure to observe among these six plants a second species which as
yet was unknown to us, as will be seen from the following description ;
and since this time these two species of plants reappear every year
without cultivation in the same portion of the garden. We shall name
this second species, Mercurialis altera foliis in varias & inequales
nias quasi dilaceratis.
It produces a root three or four lines in diameter and six inches long,
knotty, provided from its upper portion with several fibrous roots of
the same length, much contorted in small equal undulations, which twist
towards the bottom of the soil, skog by a quantity of hairy fibers,
which extend laterally around the root. Their surface is ew of
a chapped, fleshy pellicle of a ames oe which covers a cori-
aceous and very white woody body, without the slightest in of
pith. From this root there arises immediately a stem about a foot high,
a little less thick than the root, hard and woody, covered by a fleshy
bark, shiny and smooth, of a pale green color, containing a greenish
pith. This shoot from its point of origin to its extremity is furnished
uic., qui n’avoient point de sommets’’ ; sommets, transl. tips, anthers,
apices of Dodoneus.
504 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
with a number of branches, which together form a sort of very small
tufted bush, about eight to ten inches in diameter. These branches are
arranged upon the stem without regular order, just as the other little
branches which they bear, which frequently are subdivided; and nearly
all these branches are slightly thickened at their point of origin. An
infinite number of clusters of leaves, arranged along the branches and
their divisions and subdivisions, covers this little bush. The leaves
resemble each other but little. The larger ones, placed near the base
of the branches are an inch long and more, measuring one, two or three
lines at their greatest width, and in the whole lot there are some which
do not measure a third of the width of the preceding. They are all
without petioles, and terminate in a very sharp point, having but very
slight traces of veins in the middle, which nevertheless are firm and
hard, in comparison with their thickness.
The larger of these leaves have as many as four or es incisions.
Some are very deep, forming sharp gis angles and rounded lobes
(formant des angles, rentrans aigus, & des saillans arrondis). he
other incisions, on the other hand, rite obtuse reentering angles and
very sharp lobes (les angles rentrans obtus, & les dentelures saillantes
fort aigués). Several others of these leaves have but one or two in-
cisions, or even but slight erenations not very deep or undulating; and
finally a large number of leaves because of their irregular outline,
resemble remnants of leaves torn or gnawed by caterpillars.
From the center of each cluster of leaves appears a mass of from
twelve to fifteen or twenty flowers collected together, from between
which there arise some small, simple and very narrow leaves, in the
manner of small strips terminating in a sharp point.
The flower A (natural size, Pl. 2), of which the pedicel is very short,
consists of a calyx composed of three small leaves (Fig. C) of an oval
shape, shell-like, of a green-yellow color. In their axils occur from
twelve to fifteen filaments B of the same color, without tips and two of
these filaments always diametrically opposite, being twice the length of
the others. The full-blown flower is about one line in diameter. The
entire plant is of a brown-green color, mixed with a yellow tinge. Its
taste is insipid with a slight nitrous flavor.
These two plants are annuals; at the same time they last much longer
than the common Mercury, since they have been observed to germinate
in April, and remain green until the end of the month of December.
They resemble each other greatly because of their flowers, their smell
and the consistency of their leaves; but they differ exceedingly by their
aspect, and, as has been said, in regard to the outline of their leaves.
The opinion commonly held by botanists is that the male Mereury
bears seeds and produces no flowers, and that it produces equally the
male and the female Mercury, instead of which the female Mereury
No. 536] JEAN MARCHANT 505
bears sterile flowers only, that is to say, that it does not produce seeds.
On this principle, our two new plants on which we have seen flowers
only, would be female Mereuries, resulting from seeds of the male Mer-
cury; but under these circumstances it would be rather difficult to under-
stand why these two plants reappear in this garden only in the same
space of seven or eight feet of ground, where they were discovered the
first time, since the common male and female Mercuries germinate and
grow in great abundance in all the gardens; which would lead one to
believe, contrary to the opinions of modern botanists, that the two
plants of which we here give descriptions, bear seeds, because they
reproduce themselves without aid in this spot, for certainly they are not
found anywhere else.
We shall continue our observations on this phenomenon; and in the
meantime, we shall propose a few conjectures on the large number of
species we believe plants may give rise to.
The men of science who are interested in plant culture, and especially
those who are fond of plants which bear beautiful flowers, such as the
anemones, tulips, carnations and other flowers, well know that the seeds
of these plants, being sown, frequently produce pleasing and interesting
diversities. Nature, without regard to the beauty of the flowers, be-
haves in the same manner in the diversity of the species of which it
inereases the number in the Herbs or Simples.
The instance of our two plants indieates this sufficiently, since in four
years we have witnessed the birth of two constant species which were
unknown to us.
Because of this observation there would be reason to believe that the
Almighty once having created individuals of plants as a model for
each genus, made up of all imaginable structures and characters, capable
of reproducing their like, that these models, I say, or types of each
genus, in perpetuating themselves, finally had produced varieties, among
which those which have remained constant and permanent, have consti-
tuted the species, which as time went on and in the same manner, have
made other different productions which have so increased Botany in
certain genera, that it is a fact that to-day there are recognized in some
genera of plants as many as one hundred, one hundred and fifty, and
even as many as more than two hundred distinct and constant species
belonging to a single genus of plants.
The proof of that which is suggested on the subject of the production
of species seems all the more well founded, when one remembers that
the most ancient botanists have mentioned but about four hundred types
of genera of plants, to which they add few species, which leads one to
believe that at that time the species were as yet not very numerous;
since at present we know more than eight hundred types of genera, to
which must be added thirteen or fourteen thousand species or more,
506 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
among which, it is true, several are mere repetitions, and others are but
simple varieties.
ne may be sure that botanists, in going through countries which
formerly were unknown, will discover new types of genera of plants
from the point of view of the physicians, though created many centuries
ago, as well as an immense number of species which will have arisen
from them. Which, in time to come, and according to the conjectures
made above, would tend to reduce Botany to a knowledge of the types
of the genera only, giving up the species, to evade the confusion to
which they might give rise in this science.
Yet whatever might result from this, we must profit by the new dis-
coveries, to illustrate the history (evolution) of plants.
e species may have still other uses, though it is true that the
majority of plants, of which use is made in medicine, are ordinarily
those which are called type of the genus, because they are the first in
which certain virtues and distinctive characteristics have been recog-
nized, which constitute each genus of plants; but since because of lack
of genera, species frequently are substituted for them in Pharmacy, one
must not neglect a knowledge of the species, even though there are no
living organisms in Nature which increase more abundantly and who
make more diversities than do plants, as has been said, always if one
excepts Insects, which apparently reach a greater number, but which are
not so well known to us as are plants.
NOTES AND LITERATURE
NOTES ON HEREDITY
Miss WHELDALE presents an interesting theory concerning the
formation of anthocyanin. The theory for which a good deal
of evidence is presented is that of the reversible reaction
Glucoside + water — chromogen —+ sugar,
which is controlled by one or more enzymes.
Whether this reaction shall go forward or backward depends
upon the relative amount present of the various substances enter-
ing it and upon the nature and quantity of the enzymes which
bring about the reaction. She points out that certain species
having flowers, leaves, ete., slightly or not at all colored give rise
to colored varieties which are recessive to the type. These facts
are explained if we assume that the colored forms arise because
of the absence in the color tissue of the enzyme which causes the
synthesis of the glucoside. Under these conditions, chromogen
which is formed would be free and available for oxidation into
pigment. In the type the enzyme is supposed to be present, and
the condition of equilibrium is such that all, or nearly all, of the
chromogen unites with sugar and hence can not be oxidized.
In the Journal of Morphology for March, 1911, Wilson gives a
very interesting discussion of the chromosome behavior in Nezara,
following which he gives a discussion of the possible ways in
which the idiochromosomes may be changed in number.
One of the most interesting things in this paper to the student
of genetics is the high degree of probability which Wilson shows
to exist that the behavior of the idiochromosomes is not only
accountable for sex inheritance, but for the inheritance of certain
sex-limited characters. He points out that cytological considera-
tions render it probable that the morphological dimorphism of
the spermatozoa in certain species has arisen by the transforma-
tion of a single pair of chromosomes, producing an XY pair. He
also shows that in certain species the XY pair of chromosomes
*M. Wheldale on ‘‘The Formation of en Journal of
Genetics, I, No. 2, March, 1911.
507
508 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
may be interpreted as an X chromosome attached to one member
of a pair of Y chromosomes, thus one of the members being an
XY combination, the other Y.
He then calls attention to the very interesting case of the
inheritance of white eye found by Morgan in one of his Droso-
phila mutants. This mutation appeared first in the male. When
this male was crossed with the normal red-eyed female the pro-
geny all had red eyes; but in the next generation some of the
males showed white eye again. Morgan has shown that in a cross
of this kind it is only the female progeny which transmits the
abnormality, and although she transmits it to half of both sexes
of her offspring it does not appear in the female. It is possible,
however, to secure females with white eyes.
These facts are all explainable on the following basis. Let WF
represent the X element in which white eye is associated with the
female determiner. RF would then represent the X element in
red-eyed individuals. The formula for the white-eyed male
would be WF.Y. The formula for the normal female is RF.RF.
These mated give WF.RF females and RF.Y males; but since R
is dominant to W these females have red eyes.
If now these heterozygous females be mated with ordinary
males, the following four types of progeny are produced:
WF.RF females, RF.RF females, WF.Y males, RF.Y males.
Thus half of the males in this generation will have white eyes.
But if a heterozygous female be mated with a white-eyed male,
half of the female progeny and half of the male progeny will
have white eyes.
Wilson points out that these phenomena exactly parallel be-
havior which he has found in the X and Y chromosome elements
of certain species, where the X element plainly consists of an X
chromosome united to a Y chromosome, while the synaptic mate
is a Y chromosome. If in such a species a mutation like that of
the white eye of Drosophila occur as a result of the loss of some
characteristic on the part of the Y chromosome which constitutes
a part of the X element, then such mutation would behave
exactly as Morgan found this white-eye mutation to behave 1m
Drosophila.
In referring to this parallel in the behavior of the chromo-
somes and of this mutation Wilson remarks: ‘‘So precise is the
correspondence of all this with the course of sex-limited heredity
of this type that it is difficult to resist the conclusion that we have
before us the actual mechanism of such heredity—in other words.
No. 536] NOTES AND LITERATURE 509
that some factor essential for sex is associated in the X element
with one that is responsible for the sex-limited character.’’
The author points out other important parallels of a similar
nature. To the cytologist probably the most interesting part of
Wilson’s paper is the suggestion he makes regarding the possible
origin of the X and Y elements. On the whole, this paper
greatly strengthens the hypothesis that there is some kind of
definite relation between the chromosomes and Mendelian factors
in heredity.
Doneaster, in the Proceedings of the Cambridge Philosophical
Society? gives a short note on the spermatogenesis of Abrazis
grossulariata (currant moth), in which he had previously shown
that the grossulariata character is a sex-limited, dominant Men-
delian factor, not borne by eggs bearing the female determiner.
He finds the mitoses very small, and was unable to count the
chromosomes satisfactorily, but says there are between fifty and
sixty. Two kinds of primary spermatocytes are found, in differ-
ent follicles. One of these appears to be abnormal and is thought
not to be functional in fertilization. There is no evidence that
the male produces two kinds (male and female determining) of
spermatocytes, such as are found in many species. The number
of chromosomes visible in the equatorial plate of the first sperma-
tocyte division, as well as in the second, is twenty-eight. The
oogonial mitoses do not differ recognizably from the spermato-
gonial.
In this moth the female produces two kinds of eggs, one female
producing and wanting in the grossulariata character, the other
male-producing and with or without this character according as
the female is of the grossulariata or the lacticolor type. It is to
be expected that the chromosomal provision of the two kinds of
eggs would be different; yet, as Wilson and others have shown in
some species for males, the differential chromosomes may not be _
distinguishable. Doncaster’s results are consistent with the
latter suggestion.
Doneaster also gives some interesting results of a test of a
theory of sex inheritance which has gained considerable popular
eredence.* The theory is that one ovary produces female-pro-
ducing eggs, the other male-producing eggs. The test was made
on female albino rats. In one individual the right ovary was
removed, in the other the left. Both females subsequently pro-
*Vol. XVI, Pt. I.
* Journal of Genetics, Vol. I, No. 1, November 18, 1910.
510 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
duced offspring of both sexes. Post-mortem dissection of the two
females showed that the operation of removing an ovary had
been entirely successful, and new ovarian tissue had not been
regenerated. These results disprove the theory so far as concerns
these animals.
In the March number of the Zeitschrift fiir Induktwe Abstam-
mungs- und Vererbungslehre Dr. Gates presents a very interest-
ing paper on the inheritance of pigmentation in Gnothera. He
shows that some quantitative variations in the pigmentation of
the calyx of O. rubrinervis are not hereditary, while other quan-
titative variations are hereditary. One striking case of a mutant
which produces an increased amount of anthocyanin was found
in his investigations.
To most students of genetics the most interesting part of Dr.
Gates’s paper will be his discussion on pages 367-8 of the prob-
able nature of the differences between genotypes which furnish
us our Mendelian character pairs. The evidence he presents is
strongly against the assumption that all of these hereditary dif-
ferences are due to the loss or origination of definite cell organs
which can be looked upon as the physical basis of the separately
heritable characters. Rather, ‘‘Everything points to its being
what it appears to be, namely, a positive variation in some
physiological factor concerned in anthocyanin formation. It is
not necessary to think of a form as having lost an inhibitor, but
rather has there been a quantitative readjustment of the relation
between the substances which by their chemical interactions pro-
duce anthocyanin, and those which decompose it as soon as
formed, or which by their presence divert the metabolic processes
and bring about chemical reactions of a different sort.’’
He states that the appearance and behavior of the mutant
above referred to (O. rubricalyx) can not be explained on the
basis of the presence or absence of any factor or substance in this
mutant which is not also present in O. rubrinervis. ‘‘ Obviously
the germinal change has been rather in a quantitative readjust-
ment, and it would seem that many, though not necessarily all,
the cases of Mendelian color inheritance are explainable on a
similar quantitative basis rather than by a presence-absence
hypothesis. ”’
He calls attention to the well-known fact that, especially in
organic chemistry, many reactions may go in quite different
directions according to the relative amounts of the reacting sub-
stances present, and suggests that many of the phenomena of
No. 536] NOTES AND LITERATURE | 511
_ heredity are due to changes in the relative amounts of substances
produced by the metabolic activities within the cell.
Even white varieties, which are frequently referred to as
having lost the factor for color, may originate merely from a
change in the quantity of some substance or substances present.
That many white flowers do not owe their lack of pigment to the
absence of a pigment-producing factor is shown by the fact that
such flowers frequently show pigment in exceptional individuals,
and many white flowers develop more or less pigment with age.
Presumably, as the flower passes its prime, there may be changes
in the rate at which various metabolic processes go forward, and
this may induce pigment formation.
In Science for May 31, 1911, Professor Morgan gives some
interesting data concerning the origin of a number of mutations
in Drosophila. In a culture treated with radium one fly was
produced the marginal vein of whose wings was beaded, and this
character appeared in a very small proportion of the next
generation. The proportion of beaded wings increased from
generation to generation until a stock was produced that gives,
in certain cultures, nearly 100 per cent. of the new character.
In the seventh generation of the beaded-wing stock a fly ap-
peared with the end of the wings cut off nearly squarely, and
indented at the ends, or somewhat scalloped. This character is
confined almost exclusively to the female line. In the next gen-
eration twenty-one flies, with truncated wings, appeared along
with 230 having normal wings. In the third generation some of
the truneated-winged flies produced nearly 50 per cent. of
truncated wings.
In the second generation of the beaded-wing flies a male ap-
peared with wings shorter than the abdomen. A similar muta-
tion occurred in a related stock. These abnormal flies bred
together have produced 964 normal males and females, six short-
winged males and two females.
In the seventh generation of the beaded-wing stock a fly
appeared with wings like the normal in form but extending no
further than the end of the abdomen. This character proves to
be sex limited.
Occasionally flies have appeared, especially in the truncated-
wing stock, with each wing swollen up to a balloon or a bladder
filled with fluid. Practically a pure stock of this mutation is
now on hand.
Several times flies have appeared that failed to develop black
pigment in the body. These flies have produced no offspring.
512 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vot XLV
A melanistic mutation has also occurred, and a pure stock of
it was easily produced.
male appeared in the melanistic stock having gold and
yellow wings: ‘‘In fact, the entire fly is conspicuously yellow.
This color proves to be sex-limited. Thus far it has appeared
only in the males.’’
Professor Morgan has undoubtedly uncovered some new and
interesting facts, and it is hoped that he will be able to discover
something concerning the underlying causes of these mutations.
In Science, May 19, 1911, Loeb and Bancroft report experi-
ments on the production of mutants in Drosophila. They secured
four types of mutation; a dark form, a pink eye, a white eye, and
a short-winged form. The dark form and the pink-eyed form
occurred also in control cultures, and the authors think it is
probable that the white-eyed mutation originated before the
treatment. The short-winged mutants have appeared thus far
only in cultures treated with radium, but in only two out of sev-
eral hundred such cultures. The treatments used were high
temperatures, exposure to radium, and exposure to Roentgen
rays. Where mutations were obtained in the treated cultures
they occurred in only a very small proportion of the cultures,
and the authors appear to doubt whether or not the treatment
was responsible for the mutations.
Professor Cockerell, in the Annals and Magazine of Natural
History, Series 8, Vol. VII, April, 1911, describes a very inter-
esting case in which apparently a female bee, in a genus
(Megachile) in which the female appears to be heterozygous for
the secondary sexual characters, with the female characters
dominant, has lost these secondary sexual characters and assumed
those of the male. He proposes a new genus (Androgynella)
for this marked variation from allied forms. Cytological study
of these two related genera might reveal something of marked
interest.
I wish to draw special attention to the very able article by
Professor Michael F. Guyer which appeared in this journal for
May, 1911, under the title ‘‘Nucleus and Cytoplasm in Hered-
ity.” Professor Guyer in this article gives the best presenta-
tion I have seen of the relation of the various parts of the cell
to the phenomena of heredity. It is not necessary to review the
paper here in full, since it is available to the readers of this
journal
— W. J. SPILLMAN.
The American Journal of Science
Established by Benjamin Silliman in 1818
The Leading Scientific Journal in the United States
Devoted to the Physical and Natural Sciences, with special reference to
Physics, and Chemistry on the one hand, and to Geology and Mineralogy
on the other.
Editor: EDWARD S. DANA.
Associate Editors: Professor GEORGE L. GOODALE, JOHN TROWBRIDGE, Y. a FARLOW and wE. x. DAVIS
of —— — iy aasa A. E. VERRILL, HENRY 5. WILLIAMS a . V. PIRSSON, of N
; Professor O. F. BARKER, of Philrdelphia ; Professor JOSEPHS . AIMES,
Itimore; MR. J. S. DILLER, of Was
Two volumes annually, in monthly numbers of about 80 pages moe
This Journal ended its first series of 50 volumes as a quarterly in 1845; its second
series of 50 volumes as a two-monthly in 1870; its third series as a monthly ended Dec-
ember, 1895. A Fourth Series commenced in 1896.
Subscription price, $6 per year or 50 cents a number, postage prepaid in the United States ;
$6.25 to Canada ; $6,40 to Countries in the Postal Union. Back numbers at reduced prices.
tas Ten-Volume Indexes, Vols. I-X XI-XX, fourth series, price one dollar. Address
The American Journal of Science
New Haven, Conn.
SECOND EDITION, NOVEMBER, 1910
AMERICAN MEN OF SCIENCE
A BIOGRAPHICAL DIRECTORY
EDITED BY J. McKEEN CATTELL
A sis AnS directory requires to maintain its alee Nearly a third of the names in the
present ed’tion are new, a reg Ads ois pave ipl e h e aiy ony cao tae a The
t The sila aed of the punting ress to more than 600 pages and contains more than 5500 sketches.
tis wal. Printed on all rag paper and re in buckram with fe label. Althongh the work has been
increased in size by more than 50 per cent., it is sold at the same price as the first edition
Price: Five Dollars, net, Postage paid
THE SCIENCE PRESS
GARRISON, N. Y. LANCASTER, PA.
SUB-STATION 84, NEW YORK CITY.
The American Naturalist
A Monthly Journal, established in 1867, Devoted to the Advancement of the Biological Sciences
Factors of ity
with Special Reference to the
Organic Evolution and Her
CONTENTS OF THE FEBRUARY NUMBER
The ES merger of = Sas tion of Pure Lin
eraran mited aa to Sexual Dimorphism,
Te ev aads in or Hi pas of Genetics in Lower Organisms.
Se ae eee, upon Growing Mice, and
mee! Persistence o of Such Effec = ene 'Gen-
The pe ie Pa Bonded pae SHINK-
ISHI HATAL
aee bd ae Conspicuousness of semna and Self-
red Fowls. Dr. RAYMOND PEAR
ore e Considerations mpa NE the Phase nic Func.
m in Marine Organi . ALEX. MCDERMOTT,
Articles —_ "Disgussion : Computing Correla-
tion in Cases where Symmetrical cal Ta H
monly used. Proieess r H. 8. JENNINGS.
CONTENTS OF THE MARCH NUMBER
The Nag tf Conception of Heredity. Professor
W. JOHANNSEN,
The Pe dy Hypothesis and Hybridization. Pro-
r E. M. East,
Notes on Gundlachia and Ancylus. Dr. WILLIAM
HEALEY DALL.
Notes and Literature: Mimicry, Dr. FRANK E. LUTZ.
CONTENTS OF THE APRIL NUMBER
cal Studies on Oenothera, II.
Moore Davis.
The Ppa of Maize. Dr, GEORGE HARRISON
Dr. BRADLEY
“Ghee oe Literature: Is the Female Frog Heterozy-
x ag ? Professor T.
CONTENTS OF THE MAY NUM
The A a amg of Polymorphism ad Ser = Colias
Philod Professor JoHN H. GER
— is and, — in natin Ppt
EL
Bananai e Study of the pos of the Photo-
enic Aa y of T cerai American Lampyridæ
FA . MCDER ae end CRAS G. CRANE. cies
Shorter ected and pote sion; A Neglected
on Natural Selection in the English Sparrow.
Dr. J. ARTHUR HARRIS.
og EN otes and Literature: Biometrics, Yule’s Introduc-
pmo to the Theory of Statistics, Dr. RAYMOND
at
eee E oe CONTENTS OF JULY NUMB
h c Fowl. Dr
RAYM
The iene Prost rol the Pure Line Theory. Dr. J.
RTHUR HARRIS
The Influence of Changed External Conditions on
the De Pro-
LARK
vse speach Recent Contributions to a
Knowledge of the Extinct Amphibia, Dr.
LM phi Ror
Germ-cell a and Their ceaarae St Pro-
Further Ot Observations on pn the Pos Pose of the Sauropodous
urs. OLI ie
sags well omer rrespon ađeice: Sorenoe H: $
the reg h = Correlation. Professo
sun Snos ee arpg on Batrachoseps attenuat us Esch.
Recent Studies on Var?
Notes ae Litera + Some
ation and Correlation in Agricultural Plan lant: mgr
RaYMOo On Sex -chromosomes Em pe
maphroditim > Professor W. E. CAST NODAR
Ichthyology: President DAVID STARR
Some eH eta me on Fossil Plants : Professor
Dovetas HOUGHTON CAMPBELL.
Single Number 35 Cents
The NATURALIST will ha 2:
Oo ai
Yearly Subscription, $4.00
One Dollar
four h
THE SCIENCE PRESS
N. Y. Sub-Station
84: NEW YORK Lancaster, Pe
VOL. XLV, NO. 537 SEPTEMBER, 1911
THE
AMERICAN
NATURALIST
A MONTHLY JOURNAL
Devoted to the Advancement of the Biological Sciences with
Special Reference to the Factors of Evolution
CONTENTS
Page
I. Inheritance of the “Eye” in Vigna. Dr. W. J. SPILLMAN. - - - - -513
- 524
Il. Heredity of Hair Form among the Filipinos. Dr. ROBERT BENNETT BEAN
TII. The Zoogeography of the East Indian Archipelago. Dr. P.N. VAN KAMPEN- 537
Shorter Articles and Discussion : Biometric Arguments regarding the Genotype Con-
cept. Dr. RAYMOND PEARL. On the Formation of nas nag and Contingency
Tables when the Number of Combinations is Large. Dr. J. ARTHUR HARRIS.
Acquired Characters defined. - 561
Notes and Litera : The Present Day e and Sady of Animal Pr
A Useful aa Bibliography. V. L. K.
THE SCIENCE PRESS
LANOASTER, PA. GARRISON, N. ¥.
NEW YORK: SUB-STATION 84
The American
Naturalist
MSS intended for publication and books, etc., intended for review should be
sent to the Editor of THE AMERICAN NATURALIST, Garrison-on-Hudson, New York.
Articles containing research work bearing on the problems of organic evolu-
tion are especially welcome, and will be given preference in publication.
hundrea reprints of contributions are supplied to authors free of charge.
One
Further reprints will be supplied at cost.
Subscriptions and advertisements should be sent to the publishers.
subscription price is fsur dollars a year. i
anadian postage twenty-five cents additional.
The
postage is fifty cents and
The charge for single copies is
thirty-five cents. The advertising rates are Four Dollars for a page.
THE SCIENCE PRESS
Lancaster, Pa.
Garrison, N. Y.
NEW YORK: Sub-Station 84
Entered as second-class matter, April 2, 1908, at the Post Office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act of
Congress of March 3, 1879.
THE BULLETIN—Por bargains in Ethnolograph-
ical and Pre-historic Specimens.
BULLETIN post free for 3 cent stamp.
4 Duke St., Adelphi—London—England
BIRDS’ EGGS
W. F. H. ROSENBERG,
57 Haverstock Hill, London, N. W.,
England
begs to announce the publication of a new
Price List (No. 15) of Birds’ Eggs, con-
taining over 900 species from all parts of
the world. This Catalogue is systematic-
ally arranged, with authors’ names, indica-
tions of localities, and an index to families.
Tt will be sent post free on application, as
will the following lists:
No, 11, Birds’ Skins, (5,000 species) ;
No. 12, Lepidoptera, (5,000 species) ; No.
13, Coleoptera ; No. 14, Mammals.
In course of preparation: New Price
List of Reptiles, Amphibians and Fishes.
Largest Stock in the world of specimens
in all branches of Zoology.
Books on Natural
History, Science, Travel, Voyages, etc. See THE
TENTH EDITION.
THE MICROSCOPE,
an introduction to Microscopic Methods and to Histology,
by SIMON HENRY GAR, —— Catv oer
350 e octavo and above gures 1
and fully revised edition. Price $2.00, postpaid.
COMSTOCK PUBLISHING CO., ithaca, N. Y.
Back or Current Numbers
of any American or Foreign technical
or trade journal and magazine fur-
nished on short notice at moderate
rates; all kinds of Government and
State Reports in stock. Clippings 0u
special subjects furnished promptly.
Large stock of American Naturalist,
Science and Popular Science on hand.
Magazines, Books and Papers
of all kinds bought
Special Subscription Price List on BEU
Information concerning any periodical
furnished free of charge.
A. W. CASTELLANOS
259 Armstrong AVe.,
Jersey City, N.J-, U.S.A.
THE
AMERICAN NATURALIST
Vou. XLV September, 1911 No. 53
INHERITANCE OF THE “EYE” IN VIGNA
DR. W. J. SPILLMAN
U. S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE
CERTAIN races of the cowpea (Vigna unguiculata)
have the seed coat completely pigmented, others have
no pigment, while others have pigment confined to cer-
tain areas. In this paper the fully pigmented races are
referred to as having solid color, those without pig-
ment as white, while the pigmented area of the partially
pigmented :seed coats is called the ‘‘eye.’’ This eye,
when small, is always confined to the region of the
hilum, and when large always surrounds the hilum. It
varies widely in size and form, as shown in the accom-
panying illustrations, which show the principal types
of eye. In a the pigmented area is confined to two
patches on opposite sides of the hilum. In b the area
surrounds the hilum except at its micropylar end.
OEE
Fic. 1. Forms of the “eye,” or pigment area, in the seeds of the cowpea.
In c the hilum is completely surrounded, but there is
a broad indentation at the lower end of the pigmented
area. In d the eye covers nearly the entire ventral!
1 The terms ventral and dorsal are used in this paper to describe respect-
ively the side of the seed showing the hilum and the opposite side.
513
514 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
surface of the seed, but has a characteristic notch at the
micropylar end (lower end in the figure). In e the area
has extended over the micropylar end of the seed. In
this form and the next there are usually some isolated
spots of pigment in the non-pigmented area. In f the
pigmented area covers all except the dorsal portion of
the chalazal end of the seed. Between the forms a and
f there is nearly a complete series of connecting links
represented in the material in my possession, but in the
present paper I shall not attempt to deal with this whole
series, because the genetic relation between some of its
members is not yet worked out. Forms a-c will here be
considered as one, under the name ordinary eye or small
eye. Forms e and f will be treated as one, under the
name Holstein, from the color pattern of a variety hav-
ing this name. The evidence thus far available indi-
cates that form d, which is here called large eye, is al-
ways heterozygous between Holstein and small eye.
Perhaps other of these forms of eye are also hetero-
zygous; material which it is hoped to obtain from the
crop of 1911 (F,) will probably determine this point.
There is some evidence that forms a, b and c are the
DD, DR and RR of a Mendelian pair. The same is prob-
ably true of e and f and a type intermediate between
them. Form g of Fig. 1 represents a genetically dis-
tinct type of eye. In it the pigmented area surrounds
the hilum, but the micropylar end of the area has the
margin very indistinct; fine dots of pigment extend over
the micropylar end of the seed. In races of this type
that are black pigmented the pigment extends over the
whole surface of the seed, but it is much denser in the
region of the eye than elsewhere. The reduced pigmen-
tation in such cases varies from very dark, rendering
close inspection necessary to detect the eye, to very pale,
making the eye as conspicuous as it is in buff or red pig-
mented races. Whether these variations in intensity of
pigmentation have genetic significance is not yet deter-
mined, but investigations now in progress will, it is
oe hoped, settle this point. This type of eye, in which an
ill-defined area of pigment extends over the micropylar
No.537] INHERITANCE OF THE “EYE” IN VIGNA 515
end of the seed (see g, Fig. 1), is here called the Watson
Eye, from a variety known as Watson’s Hybrid, which
has this type of eye. This variety, as well as the Hol-
stein variety, is said to have originated from crosses
between black varieties and Black Eye. My investiga-
tions show that both these color patterns occur in the
second generation of all crosses of this kind, as will be
seen later, thus confirming the supposed origin of both
these varieties.
The Watson type of eye has not heretofore been recog-
nized. But since the essential difference between it and
other eye types was noticed, the writer has found in the
collection of cowpea varieties in the office of the agros-
tologist several races having this type of eye. The ex-
istence of this type was discovered as a result of the
discovery that in several crosses between eyed and com-
pletely pigmented races the ratio of fully pigmented to
individuals with eyes in F, was 3:1 in certain cases and
9:7 in others. The latter ratio suggested that two
genetically distinct types of eye were present in certain
crosses. A careful study of the rather extensive mater-
ial at hand revealed the types of eye already described,
and a tabulation of the statistical data relating to the
inheritance of each of them revealed the relations be-
tween these types which are discussed in this paper.
STATISTICAL Data
Cross: Small Eye X Solid Color (fully pigmented)
In all, 21 crosses of this kind were made. In all cases
F, was solid color. It happened that in classifying the
individuals of the F, generation, before the types of
eye present were fully recognized, Large Eye and Small
Eye individuals were not separated in 5 of the 21 fam-
ilies. In the remaining 16 families, taken together, the
proportion of the various types of color pattern in F,
was as follows:
Solid Watson Large Small
Color Eye Holstein Eye e
Number of individuals in the 16
families taken together ..... 127 41 12 34 12
Highest expectation ........... 126 42 14 28 14
516 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
on the assumption that the ratio between these various
types is 9:3:1:2:1. The reason for assuming this ratio
will be given later.
In the 5 families in which the large and small eyes
were not separated, and in which the corresponding ex-
pectation is the ratio 9:3:3:1, the results were:
Solid Watson Large and
. Color Eye Holstein Saali Eye
Number of individuals in 5 families
CARER OVO o ea e aaa 100 30 34 16
Highest expectation .............. 101 34 34 11
In both these groups the actual numbers are in close
accord with the theoretical numbers called for by the
assumed ratios.
Cross: Holstein X Solid Color
Six crosses were made between various types of the
Holstein pattern and solid-colored races. The F, plants
all produced seeds that were fully pigmented. In F,
taking the six families together, there were 75 individ-
uals bearing fully pigmented seeds and 25 with Hol-
stein seeds, or exactly the ratio 3:1.
Cross: Watson Eye X Solid Color
Two of the 4 Watson parents used in these matings
proved to be heterozygous. The other two, taken to-
gether, gave 56 solid color and 13 Watson individuals in
F,. F, in all these cases was fully pigmented. The 3:1
ratio for the number of individuals in F, is 52:17, which
agrees fairly well with the experimental results.
Cross: Small Eye X Holstein
Only one cross of this character was made. It gave
F, with large eye; in F, there were 3 Holstein, 4 Large —
Eye and 1 Small Hye individuals, which is near the ratio
1:2:1 for these three types of color pattern.
MENDELIAN FACTORS INVOLVED
We may bring together here the various ratios found
in the above classes of matings. For convenience let us
designate the various color patterns as follows:
No.537] INHERITANCE OF THE “EYE” IN VIGNA 517
ee aged te pigmented seed coat).
a Wats
ae er ais stds
ig = Large Eye.
H = Holstein.
Crosses Rati
EXS skera oi.
HXS 3:1.
wxs 3:1.
EXH 1:2:
These ratios point clearly to the following conclu-
sions:
1. Types E and S differ from each other in two fac-
tors each of which exhibits the phenomenon of domi-
nance or partial dominance.
2. Types H and S differ in one factor which shows
dominance.
3. Types W and S differ in one factor which shows
dominance.
4. Types E and H differ in one factor, the heterozy-
gote being intermediate between the parental types.
It is not difficult to formulate, in terms of the cus-
tomary hypothetical factors, an hypothesis that readily
explains these facts. In fact, I have been able to formu-
late four such hypotheses. In each of these a certain
set of factors is assumed, each factor being assumed to
have the power of producing a particular effect on the
color pattern of the seed coat. But such explanations
offer no suggestion as to the real nature and modus
operandi of these factors. Unfortunately we do not
know much concerning the complex chemical processes
that go forward in the living cell. But enough is known
to show that differences such as are exhibited by the
various color patterns here considered may be due to
Some such cause as slight difference in the rate at which
some enzyme may be produced in the cells of the seed
coat. For instance, it is known that an enzyme may
cause certain sugars and chromogens to unite to form
a glucoside, thus removing the chromogen from the
sphere of action of an oxidizing enzyme that might con-
518 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
vert it into pigment.? Another enzyme, or, under ap-
propriate conditions, the same enzyme that brought
about the synthesis of sugar and chromogen into gluco-
side, may hydrolyze glucoside into sugar and chromo-
gen. It is also known that the rate at which a chemical
reaction determined by an enzyme goes forward de-
pends on the amount of enzyme present.. It is there-
fore readily seen that the rate at which a given enzyme
is produced in the cell may determine whether or not
chromogen shall be available for conversion into pig-
ment. It is also highly probable that a principal func-
tion of the chromatin of the cell is to produce the
enzymes which govern at least the rate of many of the
metabolic processes in the cell.*
It is certain that environmental conditions during
ontogeny determine whether pigment shall be produced
in a given tissue, even when the potentiality of pigment
production is known to be present. Thus, in seeds that
have pigmented coats, pigment may not occur, say in the
endosperm. Causes similar to those which determine
the particular tissue to be pigmented may also deter-
mine what portion of that tissue shall be pigmented.
The sugar in the pigment cells of the seed coat is pre-
sumably transported there by osmosis from cells some
distance away. Other materials necessary to the reac-
tions may be brought from other parts of the organism,
and some of the products of a reaction the accumula-
tion of which might retard the reaction may be trans-
ported to other parts of the organism as they are pro-
duced. We thus have to deal with an exceedingly com-
plex problem, many of the elements of which can not
even be conjectured in our present ignorance of cell
metabolism. It would therefore be idle to attempt to
formulate a definite theory of the processes involved.
A slight change in the permeability of certain cell walls,
_a change in the size of certain cells, the substitution of
***On the Formation of Anthrocyanin,’? M. Wheldale, Jour. of Gen.,
1, No. 2.
* Guyer, M. F., ‘Nucleus and Cytoplasm in Heredity,’’? AMER. NAT.,
May, 1911..
No. 537] INHERITANCE OF THE “EYE” IN VIGNA 519
a slightly different group of atoms for a single side
chain in a molecule of chromatin or one of the constit-
uents of chromatin, or any one of numerous other
changes, might determine whether pigment is to be
formed in a given cell, or whether it may be produced at
all. But if the change which is responsible for the dif-
ference between two related organisms is a change in
any permanent organ of the cell, then the difference in
question will be hereditary. If it occurs in the material
of a chromosome, or any other cell organ that behaves
as a chromosome does in the reduction division, the dif-
ference in question will Mendelize.
Let us suppose, merely for purposes of illustration,
that the difference between fully pigmented seed coat and
the Holstein coat pattern is due to a difference in the
rate at which a particular chromosome manufactures
a particular enzyme under given conditions. Then when
these two patterns are crossed we should get the usual
phenomena of monohybridism, with the ratio 3:1 (or
1:2:1). Thus the Holstein pattern is not necessarily
due to the ‘‘loss’’ of a ‘‘factor’’; it may be due to some
such cause as a difference in the quantity of an enzyme
produced by a particular chromosome. The use of such
expressions as ‘‘presence of a factor’’ and ‘‘absence of
a factor” in what follows is therefore not meant to
imply the presence of a morphological entity in one race
and its absence in another. It rather means that in one
race some cell organ, probably a chromosome in Men-
` delian inheritance, performs a certain function differ-
ently, or under different conditions, in the two races.
Since the phenomena of Mendelian inheritance point
clearly to the physical behavior of some cell organ, I
prefer to think of the symbols used in expressing the
genetic constitution of a type as representing the bodies,
differences in the functions of which give rise to the
character ‘‘pair.’’
Thus the symbol W in what follows may be considered
as representing a cell organ which, under certain con-
ditions, performs a certain function in such a way as to
account for the difference between Small Eye and Wat-
520 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Von. XLV
son Eye, while w represents the same cell organ, or
rather the corresponding organ, in another variety,
which does not perform this same function in the same
way under similar conditions. The symbol w need not
imply that the power of performing any function is lost.
It is here meant to imply only that the function is not
performed in such manner as to produce the effect that
W would have produced had it been present. Another
way of putting it is that W represents a function per-
formed, while w represents that the function is not per-
formed. With this understanding of what is meant by
a Mendelian ‘‘factor,’’ we may proceed to examine the
hypotheses which explain the statistical results given
above.
The behavior of the cross: small eye X solid color in-
dicated that these two types differ in two factors which
are transmitted independently of each other. Let us
represent these factors as they appear in fully pig-
mented peas by W and H, and in small-eyed peas as W
and h. This implies, according to my conception of
Mendelian factors, that some cell organ (W), probably
a chromosome, performs a certain function in certain
races of peas that is either not performed, or is per-
formed differently, by the corresponding organ (w) in
another race of peas. A similar remark applies to H
and h. With reference to these two factors, the formula
of fully pigmented peas may be written WWHH, and of
small-eyed peas wwhh. We have already seen that the
Holstein type differs from the type with small eye in
one factor; also from fully pigmented in one factor.
Hence it must have either the formula WWhh or wwHH.
That is, in one of the two factors concerned it is like
Solid Color, in the other, like Small Eye. We may
therefore take wwHH as the formula of the Holstein
type. In an exactly similar manner we arrive at the
formula WWhh for the Watson type. We may bring
, these formule together for purposes of comparison.
: (1) Solid Color H
(2) Watson Eye : WWhh.
(3) Holstein : wwHH.
(4) Small Eye : wwhh.
No. 537} INHERITANCE OF THE “EYE” IN VIGNA 521
These formule give the ratios previously assumed in
dealing with our statistical data for the F, generation,
provided we assume W and H dominant respectively to
wand h.t An interesting deduction from them is that the
cross between the Watson and the Holstein types should
give the same ratio in F, namely, 9:3:1:2:1, that the
cross between solid color and small eye gave. In the
original crosses, the cross Holstein Watson was not in-
cluded, but it is included in crossings now being made.
These formule give some hint as to the nature of the
effect produced by the factors W and H. Comparing (4)
and (3), the factor H has the effect of enlarging the pig-
mented area from the small eye type to the Holstein type
(see b and e, Fig. 1). Comparing (2) and (4), W is seen -
to have the effect of enlarging the pigmented area of the
Small Eye type, changing it to the Watson type (see g,
Fig. 1). W and H together, even in the hybrid WwHh,
have the effect of spreading pigment over the whole seed-
coat.
We have seen that the heterozygote between Holstein
and Small Eye, which has the formula wwHh, is inter-
mediate between the parent forms. In earlier pages this
type has been designated Large Eye. It therefore ap-
pears that H duplex enlarges the pigment area about
twice as much as H simplex does. Whether the same is
true of the factor W has not yet been determined. As the
ratio 9:3:1:2:1 is somewhat unusual, it may not be out
of place to illustrate the manner of its occurrence. In
the cross: Small EyeX Solid Color, F, has the formula
WwHh, and is solid color. Generation F, is as follows:
F, OF THE Cross SMALL EYE X SoL Color. == wwhh X WWHH
Solid Color Watson Holstein Large Eye Small Eye
1 WWHH 1 — — —-
2 WWHh 2 — cake
1 WwWhh — 2 = — —
2 WwHH 2 oe tie! a wk
4 WwHh 4 ew aa wen al
2 Wwhh _ 2 — —- —
1 wwHH — saan Í — ave
2 wwHh — sas jae 2 Mee
1 wwhh — — = oa 1
9 3 1 2 1
t The dominance is only partial in the case of H and h.
522 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von XLV
Should it later prove possible to separate the two Watson
F, types, WWhh and Wwhh, as we can the corresponding
Holstein types, we should then have the interesting ratio
$2 251-251.
There is evidence in my material that the Holstein and
Small Eye types are still further influenced by one or
more additional factors. This matter is now under inves- -
tigation. These additional factors appear to act in a
manner entirely similar to the factor H, but have less
effect. Taking the formula for Small Eye and adding a
factor I, similar in effect to H, we should have the three
types wwhhII, wwhhli, and wwhhii, all three of which
appear to be distinguishable, giving probably the three
. types a, b and c of Fig. 1. This point will be studied in F,
of the original crosses, of which a vast quantity of ma-
terial is growing, as well as in new crosses now being
made.
OTHER HYPOTHESES
In the above hypothesis the factors W and H were
assumed to have the property of enlarging the pigmented
area. The facts can also be explained by assuming that
w and h have the power of reducing the pigmented area.
In fully pigmented races, on this hypothesis, these factors
are absent. When w is introduced the pigmented area is
reduced to the Holstein pattern. h, without w, reduces
it to the Watson pattern, while w and h together produce
the Small Eye pattern. It is necessary in this case to
assume W and H dominant, respectively, to w and h, as
in the first hypothesis.
We may also assume a factor W for Watson Eye, a
factor, E, allellomorphie to W, for Small Eye, and a
third factor, S, which tends to enlarge the pigmented
area, converting Small Eye into Holstein, and Watson
Eye into Solid Color. Here, W must be epistatic to E.
Under these assumptions the formulæ of the principal
color patterns would be:
Solid Color : WWSS.
Holstein EESS.
No. 537] INHERITANCE OF THE “EYE” IN VIGNA 523
A fourth hypothesis is as follows:
H =a factor for Holstein pattern.
E =a factor for Small Eye pattern.
S—a factor which enlarges the pigmented area, converting E into
Watson, and H into Solid Color.
H is here epistatic to E.
All four of these hypotheses are in complete agreement
with the statistical data, and lead to exactly the same
types, and the same ratios, in all generations.
If we look upon the symbols as representing cell organs,
differences in whose functions are responsible for the
phenomena observed, then these four hypotheses are
identical. They all provide exactly the same set of cell
organs. The differences between the hypotheses are
found only in the nature of the functions which these cell
organs are supposed to perform. As we know nothing
definite about these functions, the hypotheses are essen-
tially identical within the range of present knowledge.
The functions assumed for the bodies represented by the
symbols of the first hypothesis seem to the writer to
accord more nearly with our meager knowledge of cell
chemistry.
The author desires to acknowledge his indebtedness to
Mr. G. W. Oliver, who not only performed the cross-
fertilizations planned by the writer, but freely made
available similar extensive material of his own, which is
included with my own in these studies. Mr. Oliver also
grew the F, hybrids. He is also under obligations to Mr.
J. W. Froley, Mr. E. D. Carmack and Mr. W. R. Hum-
phries, who grew the F, plants and made the necessary
field notes; to Mr. E. P. Humbert, who rendered valuable
assistance in classifying the F, material, and to Pro-
fessor C. V. Piper, agrostologist of this bureau, who fur-
nished seeds of the varieties used as parents in these
investigations, and made many helpful suggestions con-
cerning probable ‘‘factors’’ present in the varieties.
HEREDITY OF HAIR FORM AMONG THE
FILIPINOS
ROBERT BENNETT BEAN, M.D.
ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR OF ANATOMY,
THE TULANE UNIVERSITY OF LOUISIANA
Warme connected with the Philippine Medical School in
Manila, in the year 1909 two of my pupils, Maria P.
Mendoza and Manuel Ramirez, became interested in the
heredity of hair form through the work of Gertrude C.
Davenport and Charles B. Davenport! and they collected
the records of 36 families, largely Chinese-Tagalog
crosses, although two families were Negritos who had
married Filipinos.
They tested the hair form by making sections of hair
dipped in thick celloidin hardened in 70 per cent. alcohol
and cross-sectioned with a hand microtome, after which
the sections were examined under the low power of the
microscope, the measurements being made with an ocular
micrometer. They divided the forms of hair into—
Straight, with diameters of 100: 90 or over,
Wavy, with diameters of 100: 70-90,
Curly, with diameters of 100: 60-70.
They decided that wherever a union occurred between
individuals with straight and wavy hair the straight hair
predominated. It seems expedient, however, to consider
the hair form in single families as wel] as en masse.
In any discussion of heredity it seems necessary to
consider individuals rather than the mass, except in the
formulation of laws that take into consideration prob-
able errors in the mass. In Table I, showing the result, in
mass, of crossing different hair forms, we should expect,
if Mendel’s laws prevail, where wavy and straight are
_ crossed or where.curly and straight are crossed, to get an
= equal number of offspring with straight and curved hair
z AMERICAN Naturauist, Vol. XLII, April, 1908.
No. 537] HAIR FORM AMONG FILIPINOS 525
TABLE I
COMPILED By MENDOZA AND RAMIREZ
2d Sa PE Children Expectation
No. F eae Me
MF M | s
P ante c w S c s
Cie ye S,
| |
tie sa si 4 iD] R 3i as
| |
pas a 3 is | RR 6
wW |
on |
s {Ss
sjal 1 SR È 3
Pee a i be ioe Rk | BR a
c lw
Poe he hoe te 1 o COR DR! 53 | 1.7
S iie.
A E | ed i R DR 1
10 | -¢ a ee ipni pR gs] Se
RR e 1 | 1 RH] R 2(?)
Reis oig i 1) DR DR ea 7
o eee Wag oe ili DR niis] 35
: {5 3
a| i 2 1 1 [DR(?)) R | 2 2
15 P i Ili ti R 1g] ià
C C
wis a 2 1 1i DRR]? 2
mie © {8(C)| 4 DR | DR | 4 0
18 se $| É DR I6] l6
: :
9 g ea wt g 8
20 x 3 BIE 4
21 ~ ee TOR 6
ae IW
22 W z Yvi? 4i i T OR | DR 88| I7
23 : o ; 1 1 1 | R | DR|15 | 15
24 5 sigil 6 ni DD]: 2
a a Se 5 | RADR 25| 25
#3]. bik | OR a5 | 25
8l oii
Hig A y; ete PRT is L5
526 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
| "n | Parent Children Expectation
No. | —| -E gers ba 3
| FF M a
| FM MM | “3 bod 8 Tone S
e| a ia
28 c | s | ¢ 1 ¢ | BR | DBT 416 [18
| S C
Mie F 2 i DR} BR iIi
Sirag)? 3 | BR | DR/| 25 | 25
e 8
hf. ele ilija ET
KI eK
32 £l g 4 DD | BR| 4
3, = 2 1 1 DE. B |2? 2
34 T aitai 1s m n ee
e = a Yi ég] Ss imirt i
arp
SiS signar S do
meai T Y
- : Wo. o 3 + 4 DE | PRE 3 1.25
eli
"Ie ey sizing o AO ee
cath A
Nw) = ate 13 R | DR |15 |15
40 sijil] i| E] f i:
Soa
Uiz 0i 1 5 * DEE C 3
ulo =) 6) 2 DR | DR | 1.5 | 5
eee Bier ba ie oe ee ee
wsi vw ‘
M.S oe | @ tt | 1.) 2. DR nnn
t 2 eigi iois
n 5 | 35
46 L al? iit o oe
F= father, M= mother, D= dominant, R= recessive, S= straight,
W=>wavy, C=curly, K=kinky.
where the curved variety is a dominant heterozygote and
the straight is a recessive homozygote. Such is the case,
for of the 31 families examined in which wavy is crossed
with straight or curly with straight, there are 157 chil-
dren of whom 84 have straight hair and 73 have hair curly
= or wavy. Where the wavy and the curly are crossed, if
each is a heterozygote with the straight recessive, we
should expect to find three children with the curv ed
No. 537] HAIR FORM AMONG FILIPINOS 527
proportion, for of the five families where wavy hair is
crossed with curly, there are 33 children with hair of the
curved variety and eight with straight hair.
When individual families are considered, however,
there seems to be an alteration of the dominance in some
eases. Straight hair is dominant in some families, whereas
in others the wavy or curly is dominant. In Table I
straight hair appears to be dominant in the families num-
bered 3, 6, 11, 18, 24, 25, 26, 27, 31, 34, 38 and 45. In the
first three of these families where both parents have
straight hair, and particularly in family 6, curly hair is
evidently recessive. If the gametic composition of the
two parents in family 3 is DrX Dr, in which D = straight
hair dominant and r= curly hair recessive, then the
expected proportion of offspring would be 3 straight to 1
curly haired child. The number of curly-haired children
is 3 instead of 1, which is greater than it should be. But
if the straight hair be recessive in this family, the gametic
composition must be rrXrr where r is straight recessive,
and all of the children should have straight hair, which
is not true. In any case the number of curly-haired chil-
dren is in excess of what it should be.
The curved form of hair seems to be dominant in a
greater number of families than is the straight, as in
families numbered 1, 4, 10, 12 to 16, 22, 28, 29, 33, 35, 36,
39, 41, 43 and 44. In family 1 the proportion of curly-
haired children is in excess (excessive dominance) of
what it should be even though the curved be dominant.
The same is also true for families 4, 10, 13 and 39. There
is, on the other hand, imperfect dominance (recessive
dominance) of the curved hair in families 14, 15, 16 and
29; or, in other words, there are fewer children with
curved hair in these families than would be anticipated
if the curved form be dominant.
When kinky hair and straight hair are crossed, as in
families 17 and 32, there results an intermediate form—
in one family all the children have curly hair, in the other
all have wavy hair. The result of crossing two of these
528 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
intermediate forms is not known unless such a cross is
represented by families 8, 12, 22, 37, 42,43 and 44. There
is a tendency toward segregation in these families, but
no kinky hair appears.
Judging from this cursory analysis of the families
under consideration, the inferences are that in the cross-
ing of different grades of hair-form there is a tendency
towards segregation or alternate heredity, a modified
Mendelism, for there is not a perfect dominance, nor the
opposite, for either of the extreme grades of hair form,
kinky (woolly) or straight.
It would be of interest to know what relationship the
curly, wavy or kinky hair of the European bears to the
same sort of hair of the Negrito. Presumably all of the
curly or wavy hair in the families under consideration is
of European origin except in families 17 and 32 of
Negritos, but in no instance can the previous inclusion
of Negrito blood be absolutely excluded. Some of the
wavy or curly hair may therefore be due to previous
crosses of the Filipino and Negrito. Presumably, also,
all of the straight hair is derived from the Filipino, but
again the European or Chinese straight hair can not be
excluded. It may be that the straight hair of the Chinese
and of the European would each have a different re-
action in heredity with the curved variety of both the
European and the Negrito. Unfortunately, observations
to determine this may not be possible owing to the mixed
condition of the population at the present time. 3
It may be well to tabulate the families in which the
parents are alike and unlike in hair form and to note the
kind of hair of the children; in order to determine some-
what exactly the relative behavior of the different forms
of hair in heredity. The following crosses will be con-
sidered: Group I, straight straight; group II, curly X
curly; group III, wavyXwavy; group IV, straightx
_ curly; group V, straight < wavy; group VI, curly x wavy-
In this and subsequent tables F. = father, M.=
mother. C.— curly. W.= wavy, S. = straight, EF. =
No. 537] HAIR FORM AMONG FILIPINOS 529
TABLE II
Group I, STRAIGHT X STRAIGHT
| Children Parents
No FF | EM M.F. M.M s
| C. W. STE Oe y M.
3 — |} — — —- 3 aS S
6 Bones S S 1 2 S S
11 Cc S S S 1 1 | S S
19 S S S A . 3s S
20 S S Si B | 4.558 S
21 S S G o Boa Oi 9S S
father’s father, F.M. = father’s mother, M.F. =
mother’s father and M.M. — mother’s mother.
Here are three families (3, 6, 11) in which the parents
appear to be simplex or heterozygotes, and three (19, 20,
21) in which they appear to be duplex or homozygotes,
and the straight hair is dominant to the curved variety.
The parents in the first three families would have a
gametic composition of Drx Dr in which D represents
the dominant character, straight hair, and r represents
the recessive, curved hair. In any cross of this nature an
equal number of children with straight hair and with the
curved variety would be expected and the expectation is
realized. The parents in the second three families would
have a gametic composition of DD DD, where D repre-
sents the dominant character, straight hair, and only
straight-haired children should result from such unions.
The gametie composition of the last three families could
be rrXrr, where r is recessive straight hair, but if
straight hair acts as the dominant character in the first
three families there is no reason to suppose that it would
be recessive in the last three.
TABLE III
Groups II anp III, CURLY X CURLY AND Wavy X Wavy
Children Parents
No. F.F. | F.M M.F. | MM,
C. W. sS. F. M.
42 — — — — 2 Cc C
22 — Ww — — 2 4 1 WwW WwW
43 — S (0 ao 1 1 2 Ww Ww
44 WwW C S wW 2 1 2 W WwW
Total 7 6 5
Jf
530 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
Family 42 is apparently duplex or homozygote with a
gametic composition of ceXce, but there is nothing to
indicate whether the curly hair is dominant or recessive.
The wavy haired families behave as if simplex or hetero-
zygote, producing both straight and eurly-haired children.
If wavy hair is produced by a combination of straight
and curly it should behave as it does, representing the
heterozygote of the F! generation, and in the next genera-
tion (F?) there is a return of the two original forms of
hair, curly and straight, and a continuance of the wavy.
TABLE IV
Group IV, STRAIGHT X CURLY
Children Parents Children
No F.F. | F.M. | M.F. | M.M. | paze
Wii & | Be E N wees
7 = p C S 1 3351 ¢
14 C Y S S Ce + a | 1
15 C WwW S S GIB Ei 1
16 c wW S S CiS 21 Fi
18 a 8 S S 3| 8 C
23 S Cc C S C Fi 1
26 S S S — 1 67°81 4
27 S S C S 3i S C
28 S Ç S S 1 21A iO
29 C © S S OS 2 1
30 S S — — 2 Sip 2,
33 -— —_ ini EIB Aa 1
39 — — S Cc sic 3
40 — — sone sew | a. 7.6 t 1
45 BER m C — | 2 8| B C
Total | Pe lg | H o LL
In some straightX curly families, curly hair seems to
be dominant, as in 14, 16, 29, 33 and 39. Whereas m
others straight hair seems to be dominant, as in 7, 18, 26,
27, 28, 30 and 45. It will be noted that whatever the
character of the father’s hair, that character is dominant
except in family 39. It is also to be noted that straight
hair is dominant when three of the grandparents have
straight hair, whereas curly hair is dominant when only
two of the grandparents have curved hair. If the hair
form of the dominant parent is duplex no recessives. are
to be expected, but if the dominant parent is simplex half
No. 537] HAIR FORM AMONG FILIPINOS 531
of the children will have little or no dominant hair form.
Neither of these expectations is met, except in the
families where curly hair appears dominant and there
the latter hypothesis fits the facts—14 children have curly
hair, 13 have not. We may be dealing with a case of
dihybridism in which there is one masked character.?
The two pairs of characters may be: straight dominant
to its absence (curly), and straight dominant to wavy.
We should expect on this supposition to get straight,
wavy and curly in the proportions: straight 9, wavy 3 and
eurly 4. The actual number of children with the different
kinds of hair is straight 33, wavy 6 and curly 21.
The results of crossing straight and wavy hair may
profitably be considered at this point.
TABLE V
GROUP V, STRAIGHT X CURLY
Children | Parents Children
No F.F F.M. | M.F. | M.M
CIW FB | F. | MCW 8
1 W S S S wis 3 1 1
2 — — wi — 3 4i WIIS
4 ee — WwW S S W 1 5 2
5 — — — WwW 1 LES iW.
9 S — — S 1 1; 8 W
10 C S S S WIB 4 1 2
13 —— — S W wis 2 2 1
24 S S — — Ji Si 8 WwW
25 S S — = 5IS |W
31 S S S S T 1 4-80 W
34 — a = — } 1 5}; wis
35 == ae — ma wis 1 3 2
36 — — S S 1 2 8158 WwW
38 S S — w 3 TIS W :
41 os S S Cc wis 1 5 6
46 — aan C S 3 4-85 W
Total att | 13°) 171 44
The father is again prepotent, but there are more ex-
ceptions in the straight wavy cross than in the straight
<eurly cross. A great many more curly-haired children
(20) appear in the former than wavy-haired children (6)
in the latter. The additional factor of dominance asso-
ciated with the male parent should be noted.
***Mendelism,’’ by R. C. Punnett, Cambridge, 1907, pp. 44-52.
532 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von XLV
Davenport and Davenport? have apparently overlooked
the fact that the mother rather than the father seems to
favor dominance in the American families in which the
hair form is recorded by them. When the mother has
straight hair in a cross of curly and straight, the number
of children is 4 curly to 24 straight, but when the mother
has curly hair in a similar cross, the number of children
is 10 curly to 22 straight. It may be significant that in
America, where curly hair is dominant and straight reces-
sive, the female parent is associated with dominance,
whereas in the Philippines, where straight hair is domi-
nant and curly recessive, the male parent is associated
with the dominant hair form.
It is to be regretted that no observations as to the sex
of the children were made by either Davenport and
Davenport or Mendoza and Ramirez, because if that had
been done the repulsion of maleness or femaleness to one
form of hair or another might have been determined, in
view of similar conditions that exist in the currant moth
and in canaries. It appears, however, that femaleness
exerts a repelling influence upon the dominant character
among Filipinos but maleness exerts the same influence
among Americans.
Returning to the cross of straight and wavy hair, it is
to be noted that if straight hair is duplex and wavy hair
simplex, then the supposition is that half the offspring
shall have straight hair and half wavy hair, and there
shall be none with curly hair. But if straight and wavy
hair represent two different stages of hair-form either of
which may be epistatic to curly, then a certain proportion
(usually more than 25 per cent.) of the offspring should
have curly hair. Actually there are many children with
curly hair ( a little over 25 per cent. of all offspring) and
consequently the second supposition is favored. We
Op. cit.
‘<*Mendelism and Sex,’’ by C. C. Hurst, pp. 1-34, an address delivered
to the Mendel Society, March 29, 1909.
*Cf. Davenport and Davenport, ‘‘Skin Pigmentation in Man,’’ THE
AMERICAN Natura.ist, Vol. XLIV, No. 527, November, 1910.
No. 537] HAIR FORM AMONG FILIPINOS 533
may suppose that the gametic composition of the wavy
hair is that of the intermediate form between curly and
straight, a heterozygote, cs, and that half of the straight
hair is simplex, Se, and half is duplex, SS. The result of
mating curly and straight hair would be offspring in the
proportion and with the gametic composition of 285-
straight hair, 1cc-curly hair, Ies-wavy hair, and this pro-
portion is approximately the truth. There are in Table
V 51 children with straight hair, 20 curly-haired, and 28
wavy-haired children.
Only three families occur with a cross of curly and
wavy hair. Therefore no conclusions may be safely
drawn from them. The curly hair does appear to be
dominant in these families, and the straight hair reces-
sive, however, because there are 11 curly-haired children,
3 straight-haired, and 1 child with wavy hair.
The two Negrito families where kinky, or woolly, hair
is crossed with straight, have four children with curly
hair in the family where one grandmother probably had
curly hair, and four children with wavy hair where no
such presumption exists. There can be no doubt that in
a cross of straight and woolly hair the hair-form blends
in the first generation. Curly and wavy hair appears
wherever the Negrito and the Malay have been in contact
for any length of time in the Philippine Islands, and espe-
cially among those who are called Negritos, as the Bataks
of Palawan, the Negritos in Mindoro, Panay, Zambales,
Cagayan and among the Ilongots. Inferences from the
present study are that straight hair predominates in
families where the ancestry has a predominance of
straight hair. Therefore, the inverse of this should be
true, namely, that woolly hair should predominate where
the ancestry shows a predominance of woolly hair. This
question might be decided by records from Negrito fam-
ilies where both parents have wavy or curly hair. The
dominance of straight hair over curly has been indicated
in previous studies by the author as in the proportion of
534 . THE. AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
84 straight-haired to 24 curly-haired Filipinos of the
Primitive type.®
To compare the results obtained from the previous
records they may be assembled in one table.
TABLE VI
THE DISTRIBUTION OF THE HAIR AMONG THE CHILDREN OF
DIFFERENT MATINGS
Doeurresie Relative Proportion
Mating = | —— |
Total | Curly | Wavy | Straight} Curly | Wavy | Straight
Curly X curly 2 2 100
ur WHOS A ERE E N, 15 1 1 3 73.8 6.6 6.6
CUNY KNPI ii asorin 60 21 6 33 35.0 | 10.0 | 55.0
WEY SERIEA E 16 5 6 5 31.2 1 37.6 1
avy X straight 99 20 28 51 20.2| 28.3 | 51.5
Straight X straight 29 4 1 24 | 18.8] 34.5 i?
Kinky X straight... 8 4 4 50.0 | 50.
Total 229 | 67 46 116 | 29.2} 20.1 | 50.7
Three classes may be segregated, taking the relative
proportions of curly hair alone. In the first class neither
parent shows the dominant character and 100 per cent. of
the children have curly hair, which would be anticipated
from Mendelian crosses of RX R. In the second class
only one parent shows the dominant character and the
curly-haired children constitute approximately 50 per
cent.—curly<wavy 78 per cent. and curlyXstraight 34
per cent.—which would be anticipated from Mendelian
crosses of RX DR. In the third class both parents show
the dominant factor and the curly-haired children con-
stitute approximately 25 per cent.—straight X straight 12
per cent., wavy X straight 20 per cent., wavy <wavy 40
per cent., which is to be expected from DRX DR matings.
The proportions are not exactly those to be expected if
the straight hair is dominant, due no doubt to the small
number of individuals observed, but a tendency towards
dominance on the part of straight hair and recessiveness
on the part of curly hair is to be noted. Some discord-
*Filipino Ears, this journal, See. A, Vol. IV. No. 1, January, 1909.
pp. 27-53.
No. 537] HAIR FORM AMONG FILIPINOS 535
ance in the proportions may be due to the fact that when
the father has curly hair and the mother straight, the
curly hair is dominant, while at other times it acts as a
recessive. The fact that 46 families have 47 parents with
wavy or curly hair and 45 parents with straight hair, and
113 children with wavy or curly hair and 116 with straight `
hair indicates that either the curved or the straight may
be dominant unless curly and wavy are separable forms,
in which case, straight hair should be considered domi-
nant. There are, however, twice as many known straight-
haired grandparents as there are curly- and wavy-haired
combined. Curly and wavy hair seem to have been latent
(recessive) in the grandparents, and predominance of
straight hair in the ancestry may make straight hair
dominant in heredity.
SUMMARY
There can be no doubt that hair form blends in hered-
ity when different forms are crossed, and there can also
be no doubt that segregation of hair form occurs to some
extent in heredity, and one form or another may be
dominant under different conditions. There is no exact
conformity to Mendel’s laws, although there is a tend-
ency in that direction.
There is evident potency in the male when curly and
wavy hair are crossed: when the father has curly hair,
that form is dominant, and when the father has straight
hair, straight is dominant. Wavy hair seems to be a
blend of curly and straight in the condition of a hetero-
zygote, each of the two forms, curly and straight, reap-
pearing when the parents are wavy-haired. Wavy hair
is epistatic to curly and hypostatie to straight; it may
carry hypostatie curly while straight may carry either
hypostatic curly or hypostatic wavy. There is evidence
of unusual activity of the curly determiner, in spite of
the fact that curly hair is usually recessive among the
Filipinos. :
In conclusion the results observed for Filipinos are
536 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
not the same as the results recorded by Davenport and
Davenport in America but, in general, they are the re-
verse. When two curly-haired Filipinos are united in
marriage the chances are that all their children will
have curly hair. Two wavy-haired parents may have
` straight, wavy or curly-haired offspring. Two straight-
haired. parents may have children with either straight,
wavy or curly hair and the proportion of straight-haired
children will probably be large. When one parent has
curly hair and the other straight, the greater part of
the offspring will have straight hair if the father’s hair
is straight, but if the father’s hair is curly, the propor-
tion of curly-haired children will be larger. But the
families of straight- and wavy-haired parents will prob-
ably have curly as well as straight and wavy hair, for
waviness is usually heterozygous.
Note-——Wherever I may have used the construction
and wording previously used by Davenport and Daven-
port, it was done to emphasize the fact that the results
of the observations on the hair-form of the Filipino are
different from those found by the two authors in Amer-
ica. I have reversed the terms in applying their lan-
guage to the facts.
A large number of records would be desirable, both
of Filipinos and of Europeans, and records of Negrito
and Malay or Negro and European would be especially
desirable. The hereditary reactions of different kinds
of straight and curly hair may differ, but this could be
determined only by more numerous records. Let us
hope the records will be forthcoming.
THE ZOOGEOGRAPHY OF THE EAST INDIAN
ARCHIPELAGO!
DR. P. N. VAN KAMPEN
TRANSLATED FROM THE DUTCH BY
THOMAS BARBOUR
TRANSLATOR’s NOTE
Neary a year ago I received from my friend Dr. van
Kampen a paper which seemed at once of such present
interest and general excellence that I believed it should
be made available for English-speaking students of zoo-
geography. Its original publication in Java makes it
inaccessible to many. The essay was written to be read
before the Debating Club of the Batavian Royal Natural
History Society; and I am under obligation to both Dr.
van Kampen and the president of the Koninklijke
Natuurkundig Vereeniging for permission to make and
publish this translation.
THE ZoockoGRAPHY OF THE Hast [INDIAN ARCHIPELAGO
Even a superficial examination shows us that a very
considerable faunistice differentiation exists between the
western and eastern halves of the Indo-Australian archi-
pelago. Perhaps this differentiation is most evident
amongst the mammals. If one compares, for instance,
Sumatra with New Guinea, one finds at once upon the
first-named island a number of large mammals, such as
the tiger and the leopard, the rhinoceros and the tapir,
which are of course unknown upon New Guinea. Here,
on the other hand, certain marsupials are found, as well
as the strange egg-laying ant-eaters, of which there is no
sign upon Sumatra. One finds similar phenomena upon
* Original title: ‘‘De Zoogeografie van den Indischen Archipel door
Dr. P. N. Van Kampen. Overgedrukt uit Bijblad No. 3 en 4 van het
Natuurkundig Tijdschrift voor Nederlandsch-Indié.’’ Weltevreden, Boek-
handel Visser & Co., 1909.
537
538 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
studying most of the other groups of animals. Faunis-
tic differences comparable to these which we have here
mentioned for the Indian archipelago are naturally
found in other regions of the world. It is not long ago
that zoologists gave little or no consideration to these
phenomena of distribution, but simply busied themselves
with describing hundreds of new species without caring
whence these species came. It was only at the beginning
of the nineteenth century that a change came about.
Luc io alas KÀ S
i Bg Scleropages sele S ’ Cae
do?
ce
Welles riri paides
m
Amphibians.
No.537] ZOOGEOGRAPHY OF THE EAST INDIES 539
ty Fic een
: we Aan:
Felis , “apis Bar; arn
——
ne lee ikers
me,
Mammals.
EXPLANATION OF THE Map
On the map are given the easterly boundaries of a num-
ber of Indian groups of animals, shown by continuous
line; and the westerly boundaries of some Australian
forms, shown by broken lines. Map No.1 is based on fresh-
water fishes; No. 2, upon amphibians; No. 3, upon mam-
mals. On all three maps, Wallace’s line is shown as an
extra heavy one; and it will be seen by comparing this with
the lines bounding the ranges of other classes that it has
no value as a zoogeographic boundary. The Indian
animals in very many cases reach to the eastward of it,
while the Australian forms do not reach out to it, so
naturally do not cross it. One sees at once that the Indian
and Australian components of the fish fauna are widely
differentiated; and that among amphibians and mammals
it is necessary to take nearly the entire eastern half of the
archipelago as the transition region which we have men-
tioned before.
540 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
They then began to divide up the earth into a larger
number of ‘‘kingdoms,’’. by separating one fauna from
another according to its similarities or differences.
These divisions differed not alone according to their
originators, but also greatly in accordance with the
group of animals upon which they happened to be based.
Finally, it became generally agreed that Wallace, the
founder of the zoogeography of the present day, had
found a division which held for all land animals. That
this opinion was in reality incorrect will be shown later
on.
The divisions proposed by Sclater date from about
1858. Founded on the distribution of birds, it has been
held by almost everybody up to the present time as cov-
ering the distribution of birds and mammals. This
division of the earth is, with a few minor changes, as
follows:
1. Palearctic Region—Europe; the greater part of
Asia; Africa to the north of Atlas and Sahara.
2. Ethiopian Region—Africa to the south of the
Sahara; Madagascar and the neighboring islands; South
Arabia.
3. Indian or Oriental Region—India to the south of
the Himalayas; south China; the western portion of the
Indian archipelago.
4. Australian Region.—Eastern portion of the Indian
archipelago; Australia; New Zealand; Polynesia.
5. Nearctic Region——North America as far as north-
ern Mexico. .
6. Neo-Tropical Region.—Southern Mexico; the An-
tilles; South and Central America.
The subdivisions of these regions need not be taken
up in more detail here. But it should be mentioned that
Huxley in 1868 proposed the name of Notogæa for the
Australian and Neo-tropical regions taken together as
contrasted to the others, which he combined under the
name of Arctogea.
Yoogeography deals not alone with the question of
how animals are spread over the face of the earth, but
No. 537] ZOOGEOGRAPHY OF THE EAST INDIES 541
rather attempts to explain the reasons for the peculiari-
ties of their distribution. At first men sought the ex-
planation especially in climatologie factors, or else they
considered each zoogeographic region to be a particular
center of special creation. Finally the theory of evolu-
tion in this, as in so many other subjects, spread a new
light. Zoogeography has become, then, especially since
it came under the leadership of Wallace, an essentially
historical study.
Every type of animal has come into existence upon
some specially circumscribed part of the earth, and has
spread itself thence over a greater or lesser extent of
surrounding territory. Only very seldom does it happen
that one spreads itself over the whole earth or even
a considerable part of it; the great majority are hin-
dered by unsurmountable obstacles, and inhabit only a
limited region. Zoogeography, then, on the one hand,
must deal with the means of dispersal, and on the other
hand with the hindrances which species may encounter.
These obstacles are, in general, spoken of as being of
a climatic or orographic nature. The latter are not sur-
prising; for if the surface of the earth were homogene-
ous in character, then the animals would naturally have
distributed themselves in girdles or zones at even dis-
tances from the equator. Indeed, this is to a consider-
able extent the case with the marine fauna, against the
spread of which such hindrances as we have mentioned
play a minor rôle. Thus we can differentiate and recog-
nize an arctic, a cireumtropical, and an antarctic zone
(Ortmann). The Indopacifie Ocean, obviously belong-
ing to the cireumtropical belt, is faunistically a single
entity, and to this our archipelago belongs.
While in earlier times climate and natural conditions
were held as being most answerable for differences in
land and fresh-water faunas, they far more slowly took
the orographie factors at their true value; though nat-
urally the first- named influences must not now remain
unheeded.
Great deserts, high mountain ranges, and extensive
542 THE AMERICAN. NATURALIST [Von XLV
bodies of water are all impassable to most land animals.
We can not then wonder that the fauna of North Africa
is sharply differentiated from that which les to the
south of the Sahara; and so also that the Himalayas
form a boundary between two zoogeographic kingdoms.
How, now, are we to explain the cases where two simi-
lar faunas are separated from each other by what seems
to be a similarly impassable barrier? How is it pos-
sible, to draw an example from our own archipelago, to
make comprehensible the fundamental similarity of the
fauna of Sumatra and of the Malay Peninsula? In this
case only two possibilities are thinkable: either by some
means or other the animals have been able to get across
the sea, by flying or swimming, by the aid of wind or
drift-wood, or through transport by human agency; or
else there has been an earlier land connection which has
now completely disappeared.
Above all others this last mentioned explanation is the
most fruitful for further investigation, as in general it
involves calling to aid geologic factors to elucidate the
reason for zoogeographic evidences of differentiation.
To Wallace belongs the credit of having brought to light
the true import of these factors. Zoogeography, then,
may now be considered as a science auxiliary to geology.
It is evident after stating the foregoing premises that
it is quite impossible to divide up the earth into sharply
defined areas of distribution which hold alike for all
groups of animals. Different groups owe their spread
over the earth to different reasons. Some may pass
easily over mountains; others (notably birds) may as
easily cross the sea; some are far more dependent upon
climate and the pen dition of the ground on which they
exist than others; the oldest groups of animals, speaking
geologically, hove had far more time to distribute them-
selves than have the younger; ete. We must, however,
confess that, following in the footprints of Wallace, per-
verted conceptions have long held sway regarding the
Indian archipelago.
No. 537] ZOOGEOGRAPHY OF THE EAST INDIES 543
As to the worth of zoogeographiec data in explanation
of these phenomena of dispersal, we must consider the
frequent impossibility of gathering all the evidence
bearing on the subject. This is not the place to do more
than set forth in merest generality the justification for
the assertions made in the following outline. These
drawbacks, moreover, surely should not hinder us from
continuing, with careful circumspection, to compare
most inquisitively all the available facts, being certain
that many important conclusions will be reached in the
end. In this manner I purpose to give here a review of
that which has already been learned regarding the Indian
Archipelago.
The Indo-Australian Archipelago is, from a zoogeo-
graphic point of view, a region of the highest impor-
tance. It owes this special prominence to its lying upon
the boundary of two great kingdoms, the Indian and the
Australian, which show a greater faunistic differentia-
tion between one another than the rest of the old world.
Sal. Miiller first noticed this difference which exists
between the western and the eastern portions of the
Archipelago; and, following the teachings of his time,
he laid this distinction to the influence of climate and
natural conditions; so that while the western half has a
purely Indian character, the eastern portion—the is-
lands of which, generally speaking, are smaller—form
an area of transition to the conditions which obtain in
Australia. Müller in his conclusions came in reality
nearer to the present opinion than did Wallace; but the
real, underlying causes of the differences remained, of
course, hidden from him. The boundary between both
regions he drew through the Straits of Macassar, and
in the south between the islands of Sumbawa and Flores;
while with some doubts he placed the island of Mindanao
in the eastern, and the remaining Philippine islands in
the western, section of the group.
The first to bring geologie explanations to aid in ex-
plaining the faunistice. differences between the eastern
and the western parts of the archipelago was Earl. But
544 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
Wallace was the foremost really to back up his opinions
with valid evidence in setting forth the theory which has
proved so pregnant with suggestion.
Wallace, who made long journeys among the islands,
was the discoverer of the famous ‘‘ Wallace’s Line,’’ as
it was named by Huxley, which still, to the present day,
is carefully explained in many text-books; though in
reality it is disproved, and Wallace himself is not so sure
of its existence during the later years of his life.
According to Wallace’s original opinion, based espe-
cially upon the distribution of mammals, birds and in-
sects, he saw a sharp faunal boundary that could be
drawn through the archipelago, which ran to the east-
ward of the Philippines, continued between Borneo and
Celebes, and on between Bali and Lombok. The fauna to
the west of this line was said to be Indian; to the east,
Australian. Wallace’s dictum is well known, that the
faunas of Bali and Lombok are more sharply differenti-
ated from one another than those of England and Japan.
Wallace sought the explanation of these phenomena
in the fact that the western half of the archipelago had
in earlier times been connected with the Indian main-
land, the eastern islands with Australia; and that they
remained joined together until they were divided by
narrow arms of the sea. The exceptions which existed
Wallace explained in part through transport across
water, part as their being remains of the earliest fauna
which had lived upon the old land connection between
Asia and Australia.
According to the researches of more recent times,
among which should be mentioned especially those of
Von Martens, Max Weber, and the Sarasins, it becomes
evident that such a sharp boundary as Wallace drew does
= not exist. Not only is there none where he drew it, but
no such line exists anywhere in the archipelago. Of
course it is possible to draw a line which apparently
bounds the distribution of some single group; and Pel-
seneer, upon the ground of the dispersal of molluscs, has
constructed a new line which runs eastward of Celebes
No. 537] ZOOGEOGRAPHY OF THE EAST INDIES 545
and Timor, and which has been named by its author
‘*Weber’s Line.” But taking the fauna as a whole it is
quite certain that no line may be drawn; but, rather, we
may lay out a transition zone in which the fauna of
India and that of Australia are mingled, and wherein
from the west to the east the Australian components in-
crease more and more in number; and on the other hand,
the Indian tend to die out. All of this region belongs to
the eastern half of the archipelago from Celebes to New
Guinea, and included in it we find a part of the Poly-
nesian? Islands; but it is necessary to keep in mind that
even the boundaries of this transition region are not
sharply defined.
The justice of the position taken here will presently
be sustained by some examples gleaned from among
vertebrate animals, especially from fresh-water fishes,
amphibians and mammals. All three groups, on account
of the small likelihood of their being spread abroad over
the sea, are of much importance to us.
First of all, however, the origin of the fauna of Aus-
tralia merits a word. It is now commonly agreed that
in past times this island formed an essential part of Asia,
connected by a previously existing land-bridge which in-
cluded the archipelago as it exists to-day. Formerly this
connection was considered to have occurred during the
Jurassic period (Neumayer’s ‘‘Jura-Continent’’). The
ding, however, of deep sea deposits laid down in
Jurassic times in different parts of the archipelago (e. g.,
on Borneo, Celebes and Buru) has made it seem more
probable that the mooted connection was delayed until the
Cretaceous period; and along this connection, then, the
marsupials and lung-fishes spread to Australia; as well as
also the teleost, Scleropages leichardti, of which a near
relative, Scleropages (= Osteoglossum) formosus, is now
found upon Borneo and Sumatra, but upon no other
* Van Kampen uses the word Polynesian in a sense which is to us funda-
mentally wrong. He means to include the Melanesian Islands of the Bis-
marck and Solomon groups.
546 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
islands in the region lying between. It is not at all impos-
sible that also a considerable portion of the present fauna
of the Australian part of the Archipelago exists as a Relic-
tenfauna coming down from the earliest times, although
the geologic data warn us that Celebes and a considerable
portion of the remaining archipelago was also covered by
the sea during the Cretaceous period (Sarasin, 1901). So
that, according to the latest geological evidence, it becomes
apparent that in the Cretaceous period the archipelago
could not all have been above water. Australia may well
have received its ancient fauna from South America
(Sarasin), or may equally well have had a connection with
nearer India lying to the southward of the existing Archi-
pelago (see Verbeek’s Molukkenverschlag).
However that may have been, in any case the Indo-
Australian continuity may well have been broken in Ter-
tiary times, and thus the penetration of the Indian fauna
into Australia have been brought to an end. Animals
which up to that time had reached out into the archipelago
would be unable any longer to reach Australia.
To such a class belong, for example, among the fresh-
water fishes, the family Cyprinide ; among the amphibians,
the Ranide ; both of which are present in the Indian region
by numerous representatives, while they are wanting in
Australia. It is thus of importance for us to search out
what may be the easterly boundary of such groups in the
archipelago. Following Wallace’s theory, the line which
he constructed should answer this purpose. As a matter
of fact the Cyprinide have served as one of the most
important arguments for his opinion, since they did really
stop at the supposed boundary line; since then, however,
upon Bali we find a single pair of species of this family
(Barbus maculatus and Raspora argyrotenea). During
the expedition of the Siboga, Professor Weber, happened
by chance to collect Rasbora upon Lombok (Weber, 1902,
_ A); and I myself lately found the Gurami fish-ponds of
the old pleasure-palace of Narmada filled with another
No. 537] ZOOGEOGRAPHY OF THE EAST INDIES 547
species of Raspora,® so that the boundary of the Cyprinide
is thus moved to the eastward of Lombok.
Absolutely different is the real condition of the Ranide.
This family has penetrated throughout all of New Guinea
and western Polynesia; one single species, indeed (Rana
papua), having reached the Cape York Peninsula of
Queensland. Other Indian families of amphibians (Engy-
stomatide, Pelobatide) have also reached to New Guinea.
We see here then the boundaries of this transition region
well defined, the westerly by the Cyprinide, the easterly
by the Ranide.
Among the families of the strictly fresh-water fishes
conditions are similar; and some have even reached
Wallace’s | | rot
S 9 Line | A a” | g 5 £ 2
sE il js ig a 4181 &
Sie eee ae SsS al ahe
ajg O Tera
FISHES
Notopteridæ ... ee ee —
Osteoglosside .............. +iei—}—-f—|—}—i} mye ict
Cyprinidae: oeil. titi ti +t] tp mye Klar i cy
Siluride ee ee ee ee ee
Symbranchi a + —l—i-]—
Siriar g aa: +4 i++. +l-
elanoteniide............. NE ee ee eS ee
Ophiocephalide............ ee ee ee er Tir ee
bantidee Piet epee le el
Pe ae eo re a eed ee a a
Mastacembelide ........... ++ +i—-ļ—-il—-l- cy cs ese
Osphronomenide. ......... ti tit pe pe |] i] ee |
AMPHIBIANS
te paar aba sid T -)—f—| Hiei -| Het ey
Pelobatide nacio # r a am sa ee o o a a
T EEAS SE >]|—]=— |-|- +i mi titi +ist
Bufonidee +/+}/4+/}4+]}]4+/}/—-|}+/-l[-|-[-
Engystomatide............. ee ne ee HM
bide. o aca tite ep eH es ee er i ee
i a shang ease a +|+ {49
*It is entirely possible that these may have as brought in as eggs,
along with the Gurami rae elon olfax, from J:
* Anabas, sp. found by me a nan.
ë Betta pugnas, occurring eon Ternate according to Steindachner
: Hyla dolichopsis, recorded from Java by me (1907 A), undoubtedly
introduced with plants brought into botanical gardens.
* Confined to the Cape York Peninsula.
548 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
farther than the Cyprinide. In these families one should
include only those whereof all, or by far the greater
majority, of the species are exclusively confined to fresh
water. It is naturally evident that in other cases the pos-
sibility of their fortuitous transportation across the sea
is not to be excluded. The appended table gives in outline
the distribution of fresh-water fishes in the archipelago.
It is gleaned, for the most part, from Weber (1894,
1897A), who has done more than any one else to add to
our knowledge of the dispersal of the fresh-water fishes
throughout the islands. For comparison a table is added
giving the distribution also of the families of amphibians.
The eastern portion of the archipelago, including Cele-
bes, possesses a very small fresh-water fish fauna. Those
which are found most commonly in the rivers and lakes
are, as Weber has pointed out, for the greater part
‘‘marine immigrants,’’ that is to say, sea-fishes which
have passed over to a fresh-water life. Of the true Indian
fresh-water fishes which occur to the eastward of Wal-
lace’s line and Lombok are the Siluride; the New Guinea
species, however, related to those of Australia and hence
being in reality outside of our present range of discussion.
The remaining ones are almost exclusively those which are
able to withstand a drying-up—if this is not too long
continued. These are, in truth, only a few species.
Haplochilus celebensis among the Cyprinidontide does not
get further than Celebes, nor does Notopterus kapirat; and
two species of Syml Symbranchus bengalensis
and M onopterus sabimenste Oghiocophihi striatus,
Anabas scandens and Anabas microcephalus and possibly
Betta pugnax are spread further to the eastward. The
last-mentioned species have alla peculiar structure of the
gill cavity which makes it possible for them to remain
for a considerable time without water; and it has been
-shown by Volz for Monopterus that it may even live over
through the dry monsoon without water.
= The distribution of mammals in the eastern half. of the
Tndian Archipelago i is evidently not yet completely known.
— for New Guinea itself, with the exception of bats,
No. 537] ZOOGEOGRAPHY OF THE EAST INDIES 549
only a few species of mice and two of pigs (Sus niger and
S. papuensis) have been discovered. Both of these last
mentioned forms may perhaps have arisen from tame
individuals which ran wild. Upon the Moluccas the only
Indian mammals that occur are bats and mice, a single
species of deer, perhaps also introduced; a few shrews,
Viverride (Viverra tangalunga and Paradoxurus her-
maphroditus), and wild pigs. Among the swine the well-
known Babirusa is especially noteworthy, which is found
only upon Celebes and Buru. The Moluccas (Batjan)
have a single ape (Cynopithecus niger) in common with
Celebes. But even here again it has frequently been sug-
gested that this form was probably also introduced. In
comparisen with the richness in mammals of the Greater
Sunda Islands, Celebes falls in with the Moluccas as show-
ing their paucity. oS |
The eastern half of the archipelago, in accordance with
its character as a transition region, is not alone habited
by immigrants which have come in from the west, but has
received its fauna in part from Australia. If we take the
three classes of animals which we have mentioned before,
we then find here also a strong element which has spread
itself even further from its origin, in this case Australia.
Upon New Guinea the Melanoteniide among the fishes,
the Hylidæ among the amphibians, and the marsupials and
Monotremes among the mammals are well represented.
These fishes have not dispersed themselves very far (the
Melanoteniide not being known to have reached beyond
the Aru Islands). The amphibians themselves are also
almost as narrowly confined to the nearby islands, and
have not even got as far westward as Celebes. The mar-
supials have got as far as Celebes and Timor. Although
fifty-one species have been made known from New Guinea.
itself, so that only a small portion of these have gone
farther westward; of these two have got to Celebes, both
of the species belonging to the genus Phalanger. The
fauna of New Guinea has, when one considers the Indian
elements in it, about as much derived from the fauna of
550 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
Australia as that of Sumatra, Borneo and Java has de-
rived from the mainland of Asia.
A general survey of all conditions leads to the conclu-
sion that in post-Cretacean times there was a broad con-
nection between the three Greater Sunda Islands and
Asia on the one hand, and between New Guinea and Aus-
tralia upon the other; that further also between the
Sunda Islands and New Guinea a connection must have
existed which was really less easy to pass over. The con-
figuration of the bottom of the ocean supports this,opin-
ion. The western half of the archipelago is united with
Asia, standing ona plateau of not more than fifty fathoms
depth; New Guinea is separated from Australia by a`
similarly shallow sea. An elevation of the sea bottom
of 45 meters would connect the Greater Sunda Islands
with the mainland of Asia; while on the other hand a rise
of 20 meters is all that is necessary to bring about the
joining of New Guinea with Australia. The seas inter-
vening between these two regions have, on the contrary,
for the most part a great depth.
There still remains much to do in substantiation of the
proof of these conclusions; and the islands and island
groups of the archipelago are still a fruitful field of in-
quiry for those who may be interested.
As already remarked above, Sumatra, Java and Borneo
lie upon a shallow submarine plateau which binds them to
further India. Upon this same plateau lie also a host of
lesser islands such as Banca and Billeton, Madura and
Bali. All of these islands, as well as those which lie along
the west coast of Sumatra, and which are surrounded by a
sea of considerably greater depth, possess a fauna which
in all its principal characteristics is essentially that of the
Malay Peninsula. Here alone one finds the great Indian
mammals, such as the Orang Utan, the tiger, the leopard,
the Malayan bear, elephant, tapir, rhinoceros and bantang.
Even still more evident is the relationship of the mainland
when one takes into account the finds among the fossils.
Dubois has uncovered a Tertiary fauna upon Java that
bears the most marked resemblance to the Pliocene Siwalik
No. 537] ZOOGEOGRAPHY OF THE EAST INDIES 551
fauna of Hindustan. Here he found, for instance, re-
mains of Hippopotamus, Stegodon, a species of antelope,
Hyena, Gavialis, ete.
Taking the present condition alone into account, Su-
matra and Borneo more than the others have a fauna that
is almost identical with the fauna of the Malay Peninsula.
Java shows a greater difference; whereupon one may
draw the conclusion that it broke off earlier than the other
islands from the mainland, since between Java and Su-
matra there was more migration than between Java and
Borneo, so that it was separated earlier from the last
mentioned island than from Sumatra. The Javan Sea,
as the Sarasins have determined from a study of the land
snails, is of very ancient date.
On the other hand, Java has some mammals, Rhinoceros
sundaicus, Trajulus stanleyanus, Viverricula malaccensis,
Helictus orientalis, in common with the mainland, which
up to the present have not been found upon either Sumatra
or Borneo. So far, for this state of affairs absolutely no
satisfactory explanation has been found.
We might also say of Borneo that it has received a small
portion of its fauna evidently by way of Palawan and the
Sulu Archipelago from the Philippines, and so directly
from south China, and indeed from the Himalayan region
itself.
Celebes has always been the great bone of contention
from a zoogeographic point of view. We have already
seen that Sal. Müller and originally Wallace considered it
as belonging to the Australian half of the archipelago.
Now, especially through the labors of Max Weber and the
Sarasins, it has been made evident that its fauna is essen-
tially Indian, even though it may be mixed with a few
Australian types.
But even so, the fauna of Celebes is as yet only partly
elucidated. We find here an astonishing number of pecul-
iar types which no one has been able to find upon the
other larger islands of the archipelago; and so there must
always be a question as to the origin of its fauna.
The first peculiarity is the occurrence of a number of
552 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
animals which find their nearest relatives not in the
further Indian Archipelago, nor yet even upon the conti-
nent of Asia, but in Africa itself. Taking the number of
these species of animals together, we must conclude that
they are of very ancient origin indeed. Among the birds
which must be grouped in this way are such species as
Coracias temmincki and Cittura, the most primitive king-
fisher; among the mammals two species of monkey,
namely Macacus maurus, and its next of kin, M. arctoides,
which belongs in Hindustan, and Cynopithecus niger, most
closely related to the African baboons;$ in addition, the
strange Babirusa, a pig that is more like the African wart-
hogs than any other variety of swine. The dwarf-buffalo,
or Anoa (Bos depressicornis) may also be considered as
a relic-species, of which its only near living relative, Bos
mindorensis, inhabits the Philippines.
The explanation of this relic-fauna the Sarasins take to
be an old invasion evidently spread out from Java, which
most likely happened in the Miocene period. It can not
have taken place earlier, since the same investigators were
astonished at the geologic evidences that Celebes in
Eocene times was wholly covered by the sea. The more
recent fauna (that which shows itself among mammals in
the abundance of species of squirrels) arrived later, and in
all probability entered Celebes along the same land con-
nection. This explanation is not entirely satisfying, since
it does not make evident why these animals that we have
mentioned exist on Celebes, but have died out everywhere
else. On the other hand, that such things really can occur
is proved by the abundance of the finds of fossil remains
of animals in places where they no longer exist. The
epoch-making discoveries of Dubois are of weighty import
in this connection.
A further peculiarity of the fauna of Celebes is its
great difference from that of Borneo. The Sarasins
* Matschie brings the monkeys of Celebes together into one genus
at , While he differentiates a number of new local races upon the same
Trouessart, in the supplementary part of his ‘‘Catalogus mam-
pea has united all these forms as varieties of one single species.
No. 537] ZOOGEOGRAPHY OF THE EAST INDIES 553
have announced that both islands have not one ‘single
species of animal common to them which is not also
found upon Java, Sumatra or the Philippine Islands.
There is not the slightest possibility of there having
been a direct land bridge between Celebes and Borneo
across the Straits of Macassar since the very earliest
geologic times. This difference between Celebes and
Borneo is beyond doubt one of the real reasons for the
unjustifiable opinion of Wallace and for the placing, as
he did, of his boundary line.
That the Java sea is, according to the Sarasins, of
great age is shown by the fact that a curved line may be
drawn through this sea and continued into the Straits
of Macassar, which terminating blindly, so to speak, at
both ends, cuts the archipelago into two portions, or, we
might better say, bounds one part where the islands of
younger geologic age have apparently had no connection
with the mainland. It has thus an entirely: different sig-
nificance from the boundary line as it was formerly
drawn.
A third peculiarity of Celebes upon which Weber has
laid particular stress is the paucity of certain groups of
animals in comparison with the three Greater Sunda Is-
lands. Weber has considered the fauna of Celebes as
being essentially an impoverished Indian one.. This
poverty appears best brought out by the appended table,’
wherein the comparison as regards the approximate ex-
tent of the islands is given.
Sumatra Borneo Java Celebes
Surface in sq. km 431,000 | 733,000 126,000 | 179,000
True — water fishes"? UE ccs 212 22 | 181 4
Sopi 50 78] 37 25
RT O T Gis ec oe E S 175 191 | 129 87
Maitai (exclusive of bats).......... 115 133 | 68 39
*These data in this table are drawn for the most part from Weber
(1894), Popta (1905-6), and Volz (1907), for the fishes; Van Kampen
(1907 B), for the amphibians; Sarasin (1901) for the reptiles; Tjeenk
Willink (1906) and Schneider (1905), for the mammals.
* These are drawn from the same families that were mentioned in the
table upon page 547.
554 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Von. XLV
This difference is noticeable among the fishes above all
others. On the other hand, the difference is less among
the birds, and the opposite holds for land and fresh-
water molluscs whose number is reckoned by the Sar-
asins for Sumatra as 129 species; Borneo, 311; Java,
_233, and Celebes, 238.
Weber explains the poverty of fauna in this manner:
that Celebes, as we understand it to-day, has not long
been in its present condition, but rather that it was
formed by the uniting of a number of small islands
which, as is always the rule in such cases (especially
among the fresh-water fishes) possess a sparse or poor
fauna. In this same wise is it made evident why the
fresh-water mussels (Unionide) which occur upon the
continent of Asia and Australia, and upon the Greater
Sunda Islands, are lacking on Celebes. Von Martens
comes to this same conclusion, that they (along with
other generally distributed families of fresh-water mol-
luses) do not occur upon small islands. They are want-
ing thus upon the Moluccas and on Celebes, where the
entire fauna has been made up by the merging together
of those of several smaller islands to form a single one.
The opinion of the Sarasins is somewhat different
from the explanation of Weber. They are of the opin-
ion, brought forward as especially important, that be-
tween the different parts of the island ancient faunistic
differences are demonstrable, a peculiarity of the fauna
of Celebes which has been thoroughly investigated by
them. The Sarasins have taken this up especially from
the point of view of distribution of land and fresh-water
molluscs. Von Martens had already noticed that north
and south Celebes possessed hardly a single species of
molluse in common; and the Sarasins made evident that
there existed an easterly mollusc fauna, besides a well-
differentiated fauna in the great lakes of central Celebes.
Other animals exist, divided from each other in this same
manner. So among the mammals, the Babirusa and the
crested baboon, Cynopithecus, are found in the northern
No. 537] ZOOGEOGRAPHY OF THE EAST INDIES 555
portion of Celebes only; as is also that remarkable bird
Megapodius cumingi, as well as some others.
Another point emphasized is the fact that the molluses
of the different peninsulas of Celebes show closest rela-
tionship with the island lying near them. The Sarasins
found among the groups of animals which they studied
that the species which have survived and which have be-
come peculiar now to Celebes, as well as those which
have a wider spread at the present time through the
archipelago, show in part a relationship to species from
Java, in part to those from the Philippines, or from the
Moluccas, or again from the Lesser Sunda Islands, espe-
cially Flores. The proportion of these four components
of the fauna of Celebes is about the relationship of
4:3:2:1. Here again is emphasized the overwhelmingly
Indian characters of Celebes, since alone among these
last two mentioned smaller groups no Australian species
have been found. A close relationship with Borneo is,
as we have mentioned previously, entirely non-existent.
The explanation of the Sarasins is this. Celebes rose
from the sea in Eocene times, and in Pliocene times es-
pecially received its fauna along four land bridges, each
of which connected the island with one of the previously
mentioned islands or island groups. The position of
these bridges is still traceable through submarine shal-
lows, or else by groups or chains of islets. The Java
bridge ran from the southern peninsula out through >
what are now Postillon, Paternoster and Kangean Is-
lands, to eastern Java. The Philippine bridge bound
the northern peninsula with Mindanao, and included the
present Sangi and Talaut groups. The Moluccan bridge
went off from the eastern peninsula; and united together
the Peling and Sula Islands, and apparently then split
up into two bridges, one of which ran off to the Obi and
Halmahera groups, the other to Buru. This last connec-
tion is postulated by the geographic distribution of the
Babirusa, and also by the birds. The latter, from the
mountains of Buru, show a close relationship with
Celebes. However, during the expedition of the Siboga,
556 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von. XLV
the strait between Buru and the Sula Archipelago was
found to be of considerable depth (about 4,100 meters),
an argument against any such land connection.
It occurs to me that the past events which have been
reconstructed by the Sarasins are just as well explained
by Weber’s opinion, which is that the separated islands,
which gave rise to Celebes, by consolidation, have re-
ceived their fauna in the way which the Sarasins have
suggested. The point of difference is indeed simply a
question of interpreting the significance of the earlier
history. In either case it is entirely plausible that
Celebes has received its fauna from the south," the
north, and the east; not directly from Borneo, but rather
by means of small islands or narrow land bridges; which
fact has had a great influence on the impoverishment of
the fauna. On the other hand, animals from Celebes
have been enabled to spread out along these same land
connections, so that occasionally we find evidences among
the Philippines and the Lesser Sunda Islands of this
having happened by their having certain common animal
types.
It is peculiar that the truly Indian character of
Celebes (the great westerly island of the transition re-
gion) remained unsuspected for so long; while on the
other hand, no one doubted, but rather laid stress upon,
the Australian relationship of that vast easterly island,
New Guinea, the fauna of which is fully as Indian as
that of Celebes is Australian. It simply happened that
those groups of animals which at once were most evi-
dent, and which had been most frequently used in eluci-
dating zoogeographical questions—especially birds and
mammals—are preponderatingly Australian upon New
Guinea, and happen to show upon Celebes also a con-
siderable Australian admixture. Had earlier investiga-
“ Weber brings into existence two different land bridges as an argument
to explain the difference between the fauna of Java and Flores. He is
inclined to the opinion that there was here a land mass of considerable
extent which has given rise to the great depths of the Flores Sea by an
extensive sinking.
No.537] ZOOGEOGRAPHY OF THE EAST INDIES 557
tors laid more stress upon the amphibians, then an en-
tirely different result would have been arrived at: New
Guinea possesses here again 39 species which belong to
Indian families as against 24 Australian.'? Among other
groups of animals New Guinea is more Indian than Aus-
tralian. This is the case with the scorpions and the earth-
worms.
New Guinea, then, has a mixed fauna, whereof the
Australian elements are explained by the existence of a
now broken connection with Australia; and whereof the
Indian elements evidently arrived from the Moluccas.
The Sarasins have constructed, in explanation of this,
two bridges, one of which connected New Guinea with
Halmahera—the New Guinea bridge of Kuckenthal
(1903) ; the other, with Ceram. The Aru and Ke islands
range themselves along with New Guinea. Upon both,
for instance, we find a true kangaroo, Macropus brunii
[sic], an animal which does not occur further to the west
of New Guinea. The Aru Islands possess a fresh-water
fish of the family Melanoteniide, the remaining mem-
bers of which are confined to Australia and New Guinea
(Weber, 1907B). This same relationship is shown by
birds such as crown-pigeons, birds of Paradise, and
cassowaries, as well as among amphibians and other
groups. One can, therefore, take it for granted that at
the same time as New Guinea both of these two island
groups were united with Australia, although the Ke Is-
lands are cut off by a greater depth of sea.
From the already mentioned faunistice difference be-
tween Celebes and New Guinea, it follows that for many
families and genera of animals both the westerly as well
as the easterly boundaries must lie in the Moluceas.
Here one would expect to be able to place a boundary
line which would exactly fit each special case. But here
we are hindered further by the fact that just these is-
“In this are included the species described by me a a memoir the
preliminary of which will appear in Nova Guinea. See also Van Kampen
(1906). [The paper in ‘‘Nova Guinea’’ has already ise published.—
Translator. |
558 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
lands are the ones which are still only incompletely
known. With the exception perhaps of certain groups
of animals—birds, butterflies, ete—which on account of
their value are specially sought for, there are great gaps
in our knowledge. Only during the last few years have
Halmahera, Ternate and Batjan been systematically
studied by Kuckenthal. These islands then are the best
known. Obi, Buru, Ceram, the Sula Archipelago and
others are no more than zoologic blanks upon the map.
It is a fact that upon the Sula Islands a short time ago
19 species of land snails were collected, while only a
short time before only one single species was known
(Schepman). These last-mentioned islands are of im-
portance as having belonged to the Molucea bridge of
the Sarasins.
Another question is whether the Moluccas have re-
ceived their Indian fauna along this Molucea bridge from
Celebes, as the Sarasins claim, or along still a different
way, as perhaps through the Talaut Islands from the
Philippines, as some cases tend to show.
These questions must wait for a definite answer until
researches have brought more light to bear upon them.
Before this we can only go so far as to say with certainty
that the fauna of the Moluccas is a mixed one, as is that of
New Guinea; and that in large part on account of the
generally small size of the islands both the Indian and
Australian components are found impoverished in com-
parison with the neighboring greater islands.
Hardly more complete is our knowledge of the Lesser
Sunda Islands. Weber (1902) placed them among the
very least known of any in the archipelago. Here remain
a number of knotty questions still to be explained, al-
though it has been definitely proved that the sharp line
which Wallace drew between Bali and Lombok must be
given up for good and all. The existence of one of the
most fundamental supports of this boundary was dis-
proved by the expedition of the Siboga; and that was
regarding the great depth of the Lombok Straits. Indeed,
this strait is somewhat deeper than that between the other
No.537] ZOOGEOGRAPHY OF THE EAST INDIES 559
islands of the series from Bali to Ombaai; and the Sara-
sins believe that it was in reality one of the oldest, al-
though more recent than the Strait of Macassar, and thus
well within the Secondary Epoch. This allows us to
explain a certain faunistie differentiation between Bali
and the other islands; for we know, for instance, that
cockatoos do not occur further to the westward than Lom-
is was one of the weightiest arguments which
Wallace used. However, cockatoos live in the Philip-
pines, and thus well to the westward of his own line.
Weber points out that the fauna of the Lesser Sunda
Islands is in large part an impoverished Indian one
derived from Java, beside which there occurs a small
element from Celebes (along the Flores bridge). So also
by the same means has come a slight infiltration of Philip-
pine forms. Here also we find a few Papuasian or Aus-
tralian species. Timor appears, indeed, to have received
some animals directly from New Guinea or Australia
(birds, Hyla).
TITLES OF BOOKS REFERRED TO
Dubois, E. Voorloopig Bericht omtrent het egg naar de pleistocene
en tertiaire Vertebraten-Fauna van Sumatra en Java, gedurende het
goth 1890. Nat. Tijdschr. Ned.-Indié, LI, 1891.
s geologische Alter m ee oder Trinil-Fauna. Tijdschr.
Poi Nederl. Aardr. Gen., 0
Earl, W. On the day seth nn arrangement of the islands of the
Indian Archipelago. Jrn. Royal Geograph. Soc., London, XV, 184
Huxley, T. H. On the Cinisi and Distribution of Aectoreninr ies
and ST Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1868.
Jentink, F. Mammals dillon by the Dutch New Guinea Expedition
1907. ved Guinea, I
Van Kampen, P. N. Asiplishien: Nova Guinea, V, Livr. 1, 1906.
Hyla ae a an von Java. Bull. Depart. Agricaltute Indes-
Neerland., VIII 7 (a).
—— Amphibien des pls! Archipels. Webers Zoolog. Ergebn., IV,
1907 (b).
Kiikenthal, W. — in den Molukken und in Borneo. Frank-
fort a/M., 1896.
Schlusswort, Abh. Senckb. Naturf. Ges., 25, 1903
Von Martens, Ed. Siiss- und Brackwasser- Mollusken dion Indischen Archi-
pels. Webers Zoolog. Ergebn., IV, Vol. 1, 1897.
Matschie, P. Die Säugetiere der von W. Kükenthal auf Halmahera, Batjan
560 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
and Nord-Celebes gemachten Ausbeute. Abh. Senckenb. Naturf. Ges.,
25, Pl. 2, 1901. :
Müller, Sal. Over de Zoogdieren van den Indischen Archipel. Verhand. v.
`- d. Nat. Geschied. der Ned. Overzeesche Bezittingen, Leiden, 1839-44.
—— Ueber den Charakter aor Thierwelt auf den Inseln des Indischen
Archipels. Arch. f. Naturgesch., XII, 1846.
Ortmann, A. E. Grundziige der marinen Tiergeographie, 1896.
Pelseneer, P. La Ligne de Weber, limite zoologique de VAsie et de 1’Aus-
tralie, C. R. Sixième Congrès Internat. de Zoologie tenu à Berne 1904.
Genève, i
Popta, ©. M. L. - Résultats ichthyologiques des Voyages scientifiques de
- Monsieur le Professeur Dr. A. W, Nieuwenhuis dans x Centre de
Borneo (1898 et 1900). Notes Leyden Museum, XXVII,
Sarasin, F, Tiergeographisches, Biologisches und AEEA aus
ag ©. R. Sixième Congrès Internat. de Zoologie tenu à Berne
1904. OEN 1905.
Sarasin, P. und F. Materialen zur Naturgeschichte der Insel Celebes. III.
Ueber die OOS POS Geschichte der Insel Celebes auf Grund der
Thierverbreitung, 1
Schepman, M. M. Ona ee of Land- and Freshwater Mollusks from
Taliabu (Xulla-Islands). Notes Leyden Museum, XXVIII, 1906-7.
Schneider, G. Ergebnisse zoologischer ae an a in Sumatra. 1.
_ Säugetiere, Mammalia. Zoolog. Ja
Sclater, P. L. On the general eea pie of the elass Aves.
rn. Linnean Soc., II, 1858. Zoology.
wickcdaskiles Fr. Fische. Abh. Senckenb. Naturf. Ges., 25, 1901
Trouessart, E. L. Catalogus Mamma lium, Quinquennale. Supplementum,
904.
Verbeek, R. D. M. Molukken- ae Jaarboek. v. h. Mijnwezen in Ned.
0.-Indié, 37, 1908
Volz, W. Der Oixeulations- und Respirationsapparat von Monopterus java
nensis Lac. Zoolog. Jahrb., Abt. Anat., 23, Vol.
—— Catalogue of ihe Fishes of Doren: Nat. Tijdschr. Ned. Indie.
» 1907,
Wallace, A R. The Malay Archipelago, 1869,
The Geographical Distribution of Animals, 1876.
8
Weber, Max. Die Sikini rfische des Indischen Archipels. Zoolog.
Ergebn. einer Reise in Niederl. Ost.-Indien, IIT, 1894.
—— Introduction et Description de 1’Expedition. Siboga-Exp., Monogr.
I, 1902 (b). ;
—— Der Indo-autralische ee und die Geschichte’ seiner Tierwelt,
- 1902 (b).. aoe
Géswanberhieths von Neu-Guinea. Nova-Guinea, V, book 2, 1907 (a).
Mine zoogeographische Prophezeiung. Zool. Anz., XXXII, 1907 (b):
Willink, H. Tjeenk. Mammalia a in, ‘Nederlandseh-Indié
Nat. - Tider. Ned.-Indié, LXV, 1906. :
SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION
BIOMETRIC ARGUMENTS REGARDING THE GENO-
TYPE CONCEPT"
Some . persons vainly seek by dialectics and far-fetched argu-
‘ments, either to upset or establish things that are only to be founded
on anatomical demonstration, and believed on the evidence of the senses.
He who truly desires to be informed of the question in hand, and
whether the facts alleged be aiil, visible, or not, must be held bound
either to look for himself or to take on trust the conclusions to which
they have come who have looked; and indeed there is no higher method
of attaining to assurance and certainty.—William Harvey, Second Dis-
quisition to John Riolan, Jun.
In a recent number of this JourNar? Dr. J. Arthur Harris
has published a general attack on the pure-line or genotype
concept of inheritance. In the course of this paper its author
sees fit to criticize certain work done by the present writer and
his former colleague, Dr. Frank M. Surface. These criticisms
in the main seem to me, upon analysis, to rest on either a mis-
conception of what our results actually are, or else a lack of
understanding of the real facts regarding certain of the bio-
logical points involved. If this is the correct view, it means that
our presentation of pertinent. data has been either obscure or
incomplete or both. It is the purpose of this note to endeavor,
if possible, to remedy this defect in some degree at least.
The points made by Harris in criticism of the work done in
this laboratory may be considered seriatim.
1. In a section entitled ‘‘ Characters which are not Inherited
at all can not be Taken to Prove that Selection in General is
Ineffective,” Harris very cautiously avoids the direct statement
that fecundity in fowls is not inherited, but since about one half
of the section (pp. 353-356) is devoted to a discussion of the
work of the Maine Station on this matter, it is not unfair to
suppose that he is of opinion that this work illustrates and ex-
emplifies the dictum which stands as the title of the section. He
concludes in a later section that the present writer’s investiga-
_ * Papers from the Biological Laboratory of the Maine Experiment Sta-
tion, No. 28.
2 AMER. Nat., June, 1911.
561
562 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
tions indicate ‘‘that the high-laying mothers tend to produce
low-laying daughters; selection to increase egg production actu-
ally decreases it.”
Definite numerical data tending to show that fecundity in the
domestic fowl is inherited has been presented by the writer in
the June, 1911, number of the AMERICAN NATURALIST (pp. 321-
345). It obviously need not be repeated here. Any interested
person may examine the data and draw his own conclusions as
to whether ‘‘selection to increase egg production actually de-
creases it,’’? when this selection takes the form of isolating geno-
types of high fecundity.
2. The second point made by Harris is against what was in-
tended to be a popular bulletin on sweet corn? in the introduc-
tion to which the following statement was made: ‘‘It is the
purpose of this bulletin to give a brief account of the general
features of the experiments carried on during the past three
years in sweet-corn breeding. Further discussion of the technic-
ally scientific results of this work is reserved for later publica-
tion.” No such publication has appeared.
The criticism of this bulletin is included in a section headed
‘‘Improvement for any Single Character can not be Supposed
to be Unlimited.’’ The facts are these: In 1907 selection was
begun for earliness in an excellent strain of sweet corn. A
marked gain was made in the quality after one year’s selection.
No further gain has been made though selection has been con-
tinued.
It is Harris’s contention that probably after one year’s selec-
tion the strain had reached its physiological limit in earliness,
and that the result obtained can not be urged against the bio-
metric theory respecting selection, nor in favor of the genotype
concept. He further gives the reader the impression that
Surface and I regarded these results on earliness as having an
important and critical bearing upon theories of selection and
inheritance. For the benefit of those readers who do not follow
agricultural literature it may be well to quote the final conclu-
sion (numbered 14) S on p. 307 of the bulletin Harris
criticizes:
No attempt is made at present to discuss the biological basis of the
improvement in earliness observed to follow selection for that charac-
_ ter in these experiments. We are inclined to the belief that much, if
"Me. Agr. Expt. Station, Bulletin 183.
No. 537] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 563
not all, of this improvement is in reality a physiological rather than a
genetic or hereditary phenomenon.’ The whole subject of breeding for
earliness is one which needs more critical discussion and experimenta-
tion than has hitherto been given it.
The same opinion is expressed in the body of the bulletin (p.
302). How one could take a more emphatically agnostic posi-
tion than this regarding the interpretation of the results of the
selection of maize for earliness is not evident.
In regard to characters other than earliness, such as ear con-
formation, fineness of grain, yield, ete., which Harris does not
mention in his critical remarks, it was and is our conclusion
that the results in hand indicated that these characters were
not inherited in accordance with the so-called ‘‘law of ancestral
inheritance,’’ but that our results with these characters gave
support, so far as they went, to the genotype concept, thus agree-
ing with the findings of other students of maize. Whether from
too hasty reading of the bulletin criticized or some other reason,
Harris has made it appear in his paper that we had earliness in
mind in drawing this conclusion. I trust that our position is
now clear.
Harris assures us (p. 359) that he has ‘‘no malicious desire
to differ’’ from us. This it is a pleasure to know for two rea-
sons: one is that a person would dislike to think that he was the
butt of malicious and persistent personal attack from a scien-
tific worker: the other is that since there is no intention on his
part to be personal and since ours is the only work on maize
with which he finds fault or feels it even necessary to mention, it
must mean that he finds nothing to object to in the only critical,
analytical evidence on genotypes in maize which, so far as the
writer is aware, has ever been published, namely, that of East
and Shull. It is a distinct gain thus to find that there is one
body of evidence in favor of the genotype concept which its
critics unreservedly accept.
3. It is suggested by Harris that 200 eggs per year repre-
sents about the attainable limit of egg production in fowls, and
that the reason no improvement was made in our selection ex-
periment was that this physiological maximum had been reached.
Here two points need to be made plain. The first is that 200
eggs per year is not the physiological maximum of egg produc-
tion in the domestic fowl. As evidence here the case of a pullet
* Not italicized in original.
ç
564 ` THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
which laid over 300 eggs in a year may be cited. While the
case did not oceur in the poultry yards of this station, there is
no doubt as to its correctness. Furthermore, the case is by no
means an isolated one, similar records having been obtained
under controlled conditions in other parts of the world. This
record was made by a cross-bred Orpington pullet in New Jer-
sey. The history of her laying is as follows: She began laying
on November 20, 1909. Up to August 25, 1910, she laid prac-
tically continuously, producing in that period 275 eggs. She
then went broody, and in late September and October moulted.
The September record was 13 eggs; the October record 12 eggs,
and up to November 9, 6 eggs, making a total production of 306
eggs in 11 days less than a full year.
Further evidence of the same sort is furnished by the report
of the last Queensland (Australia) laying competition which
has just come to hand.’ In this competition 150 pullets took
part, comprised in 25 pens of 6 birds each. The aggregate egg
production of 12 months, from April 1, 1910, to March 31, 1911
(the natural ‘‘laying year’’ in the southern hemisphere), was
31,165, or an average per bird, taking the whole lot together,
of 207.77 eggs. The three highest pens (of 6 birds each) made
average records per bird of 253.33 eggs, 238.83 eggs and 218.67
eggs, respectively.
The second point is that the Maine Station flock never at-
tained an average production of 200 eggs per bird, or anything
like it. But it can not be supposed that a physiological limit of
selection for production is reached until the mean egg produc-
tion per bird for the flock has reached about the physiological
limit of the individual. The point apparently not clearly
grasped by Harris is this: for a long period of years prior to
1898 when the mass selection experiment at the Maine Station
was begun, the strain of birds with which it was begun had been
under the observation of the man who inaugurated the experi-
ment, the late Professor Gowell. The mean annual production
of this flock had been, according to his statement, which there is
no reason to doubt, about 125 to 135 eggs per bird. Now there
were then known and are now known many flocks of birds which
produce an average of 150 to 160 eggs per bird per annum. To
= attempt to raise the average production of the Maine Station
_ flock from say 130 to say 150 eggs per bird per annum by mass
: T> * Feathered Life, Vol. 12, p. 450, 1911.
No. 537] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 565
selection could hardly by any stretch of the imagination be con-
sidered to be approaching the physiological limit of fecundity of
the fowl. This is precisely what was attempted during a perio
of eight years, and was not accomplished. While there is no
doubt in all organisms a physiological limit beyond which selec-
tion of any kind can not carry the strain or race, such a limit
was most certainly never even remotely approached in the
course of the mass selection experiment at the Maine Station.
4. Harris emphasizes by the use of italics the fact that the
only correlation coefficients between mother and daughter in re-
spect to egg production which I have ever published, while
sensibly equal to zero having regard to the probable errors (with
a single exception where daughter averages are used), yet devi-
ated in the negative direction® when they departed from zero at
all. Lest some one should attach some importance to this cir-
cumstance it may be said that these coefficients to which he
refers cover only one year’s work (1907-08). Since that time I
have calculated the coefficients of correlation in respect to fe-
cundity between mother and daughter and grandmother and
granddaughter for the years: 1908-09 and 1909-10, for various
age classes of mothers, ete. These correlations involve over
1,000 daughters and over 200 mothers. All of these correlations
are sensibly zero, having regard to their probable errors. Of 11
such coefficients 8 deviate from zero on the positive side and 3
on the negative side. Putting the 1907-08 published coeff-
cients with these it gives, out of 16 coefficients, 10 deviating from
zero in the plus direction and 6 in the minus direction. Cer-
tainly it is difficult to see how this could be made to indicate that
‘“‘high-laying mothers tend to produce low-laying daughters.’’
By way of conclusion it may be said that the writer hopes
that what is here set forth will make clear the facts regarding
the points criticized by Dr. Harris in the work from the biolog-
ical laboratory of the Maine Station. So far as concerns his
argumentation respecting the genotype concept as a whole, or
his personal opinion of the critical value of the work done in
this laboratory no discussion will be entered upon by the pres-
ent writer. Since the merits of both cases rest upon nothing
° Harris implies that this was true of all 1907-08 correlations. This is
not so, as any one may see by turning to p. 71 of Bulletin 166, where of
the five coefficients published, and these are all which have been published
up to the present time, three are negative and two are positive.
566 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
but an accumulation of plain, unadorned facts available to any
one’s inspection, it seems useless to try to bolster either of them
up by the dialectic methods of a lawyer’s appeal to the jury.
RAYMOND PEARL,
June 21, 1911,
ON THE FORMATION OF CORRELATION AND CON-
TINGENCY TABLES WHEN THE NUMBER OF
COMBINATIONS IS LARGE
In earlier numbers of this JOURNAL two papers on that use-
ful tool, the correlation coefficient, have appeared. The first* ex-
plains and illustrates a convenient method of carrying out the
arithmetical routine of calculation, while the second, by Pro-
fessor Jennings,” describes a method for obtaining the coefficient
for symmetrical tables without the labor of actually rendering
the tables themselves symmetrical.
The purpose of this note is to point out a method of prepar-
ing correlation tables where the number of combinations is
large. Such tables are not infrequently needed, Suppose, for
* Harris, J. Arthur, ‘‘The Arithmetic of the Product Moment Method
of Caiveteiing the Coeficient of Correlation,’’?’ AMER. Nat., Vol. 44, pp.
693-699, 1910.
In a note on this method of calculating a coefficient of correlation,
Professor Jennings (AMER ., Vol. 45, p. 413, 1911) suggests reduction
in size of the moments by amet’ the lowest grade by 0 and the suc-
ceeding ones by 1, 2, 3, ... n. In this he is quite justified. I have fre-
quently used the scheme he suggests grind the last several years, but I
did not refer to it particularly in my note, and for two reasons. First, I
thought the point sufficiently covered by the statement that the rough
moments may be taken about any arbitrary point as origin, and by the
suggestion that. when the range is very great it may pay to use the con-
ventional methods in calculating the standard deviations. Second, accordin
o my Bai it is better, whenever possible, to keep the actual values.
When uses a mechanical calculator the arithmetical routine is (after a
little es not out of proportion to the advantages. Under many ĉit-
cumstances these are very great: (a) all the values have a direct biological
(physical) significance, (b) the means of arrays may at e be obtained
for testing linearity of regression, (c) tables for senii mire of material
may be combined or separated at will by merely summing or segregating
their moments, and finally (d) I shall show in a forthcoming paper how
t oments, once calculated, may be of much service in obtaining some
of the more difficult correlations,
i os -? Jennings, H. S., ‘‘Computing Correlation in Cases where Symmetrical
oe are Commonly Used,’’ AMER. NAT., Vol. 45, pp. 123-128, 1910.
No. 537] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 567
instance, that one wishes to correlate between the hatching qual-
ity of the eggs of sisters in the domestic fowl, as Pearl and Sur-
face? have actually done. If each family be composed of only
ten pullets and there be only fifty families the number of entries
in the symmetrical correlation table will be 10 X 9 X 50 == 4,500.
Or again, if one be interested in determining whether the di-
mensions or proportions of the blood corpuscles differ from in-
dividual to individual in an animal, say the tadpole,* and have
measurements of twenty-five corpuscles in each of 100 individ-
uals, he may have to form a correlation table of 60,000 entries.
Much larger tables than this have been formed. The labor is of
course excessive, and this has been one of the factors limiting
their application to problems of morphology, physiology and
heredity.
In many eases the routine, as I have found from considerable
experience, can be profitably carried out as follows.
The individuals of each class are seriated separately and the
frequencies entered in horizontal rows in a table of vertical col-
umns, each devoted to one of the grades of variates, gm... Jmiss
- +» Jmn. A second table, exactly like the first in width of col-
umn and row is prepared and cut into strips by columns. Each
of these columns is moved successively across the surface of the
original table, and the frequencies which are in juxtaposition
are multiplied together and their products summed and entered
on a correlation blank; in the compartment corresponding to the -
captions of the two columns. This is repeated for all the col-
umns except the one identical with the strip. If the strip be for
grade gm;», the multiplications and summations from once pass-
ing it over the original table give the whole relative array
associated with it as subject, except the frequencies of the diag-
onal cell, Gm.o—Qmso-° To obtain these each frequency on a
strip is multiplied by itself less one and the products summed.
It is not absolutely necessary, since the table is symmetrical, `
* Pearl, R., and Surface, F. M., ‘‘Data on Certain Factors Influencing
the Fertility and Hatching of Eggs,’’ Bull. Me. Ag. Exp. Sta., No. 168,
pp. 147-151, 1909.
‘For actual cases, see K. Pearson, ‘‘A Biometric Study of the Red
Blood Corpuscles of the Common Tadpole (Rana temporaria) from the
Measurements of Ernest Warren,’’ Biometrika, Vol, 6, pp. 402—419, 1909,
* Diagonal cell is the term applied to a compartment of a row extending
diagonally across the correlation surface. In symmetrical tables they con-
tain the frequencies for identical values of the subject and relative.
ee Fae
568 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
to obtain the products of the frequencies of all of the columns by
all the strips, but by doing so a check is obtained for all entries
except those of the diagonal cell.
The great advantage of this method is that it replaces mental
and pencil drudgery with rapid mechanical calculation. Clip-
ping the movable column by the side of the one with which it
is to be compared in the table, one can obtain the products and
the sum of the products simultaneously on a Brunsviga,® by
merely multiplying the successive pairs of frequencies together
and allowing the products to accumulate. Of course the fre-
quencies for the diagonal cell can be quickly obtained, by sum-
ming the n(n— 1) values for the individual column, in pre-
cisely the same manner.
Purely as an illustration of method the intra-individual or
homotypie correlation for number of seeds developing per pod
in a series of Broom plants (Cytisus scoparius)” collected at
Woods Hole in the late summer of 1907 will now be determined.
TABLE I
SEEDS PER POD FOR TWENTY-THREE INDIVIDUAL PLANTS
0/1/2|314/516|7j)|8{|9/|10/11|12|13/14 15/16|17/ 18/19/20
Itel Er arara or eee Gta Ol Til 4 3.3) 3) 1) =) 45 oe
2|- |- |[—|—|—|—| 1| 3 3| 6) 12| 6 14| 13| 12) 5) 5|11| 5} 3) 1 100
3 ziak] 1} | a a al at ao P47] ta ti 19, 19) Tl 2ra = ee
kl- (pia! i Bh FP ra] tS ta 161 16 PF et 100
5 1/—| 1] 1{ 4 5} 8 10) 10] 13] 12; 10} is} 4) 2} 1; —|—|-|-] 10
Bler Fs) tiie 8 i 8 g 7 76a | — | =e
71=—1-{—1 11 1]: a S gl 101 7] 16 7} oto 9} 2] 8} 1+ -|-7 S
Si tit} Bl '1t 4b a at og 9 iio 7) Al i) ee
glll- == a) 7) OF al 7] itl 26) ial 16) A A a) 31 — le ee aa
10i- 1-131113 Bi 8! 9 7) Gl 14] 11 19] 10) 6 5| 11 —i=]-1-1 =
i-iii o4 ans so et alo n 6 S Be 2 —|-| 100
i2}-] -f 2! 1] 6| 10! 17] 17] 15| 10 11 4 rE oats a ey ee ae
13] -= rrr 1) 2] 3} 19] 14} 12! 14] 101 12) 12) 3) 3| 1;—|-|-] 10
ial- -la 6) BO 6 a atl of oan sl of} SL 2l ti—t- 1} ae
15 en eg eee Fe a A 4| si 10! 8| 8 13] 13} 9| 5| 3} —|-]| 100
Pd Genes Eee me es ae 9 8 gi of 8) 4) 21-1 m
Ph-i-i—kal 1:9 9 i0 7 12} 10 14 13] m 3 Dalel aa
is{-|-|—|—|—| 2| 1} 3| 6| 12) 15| 13| 13| 7| 15| 8| 4| 1/—|-|- pe
19} — | -|—|~] 2] 5] 5] 7} 15) 12) 11) 14) 18) 11) a aoa cae
201—1]-{|—| 3] 4i 6 10) 12] 6 6 12) 10) 1 6 a si 21— - a
Hi-il- ratai i a at e GE AM) 381-10) OF) 8 81 1-1 a
i- [12/5 5113| 6 Bl 6 is} 5 6 23 —|—|—|—|—|-|-] 3
23 =| 2|14|12| 11| 11) 9| 6 7 1) 14 —|— — 1—|—|—] - | =]
2 | 4 |24 |43| 5 9101/63 |47 |14] 3 | 1 | 2,289
a Oompinmeter will also do. a
~ "The variability of these has already been compared with that of Pear- a
son ’s English series. See ‘‘Variation in the Number of Seeds per Pod in .
ee Cytisus scoparius,’? AMER. NAT., Vol. 43, pp. 350-355, 1909.
SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 569
No. 537]
ZES'91Z | 66 267 98E'T|ZE9'F G81'9/9Z6‘6|GE9'FI |9ZO'ST POLIZ |G09'ESS SES'S Z49008 |GTLZ‘° LT |TSS‘9T |6S9'ST 0OZZ'ZI lozpe CLL'8 PSZ'S OLE S61]
66 € |g m le g ZI EI pI 9 ZI 9 £ g I 0z
L267 c9 A be Si jet m 6£ Z? SI 98 SI 6 6 g 6I
ose‘l |¢ |91 jog igor (66 |SIT [Sct IFL |El JZE Jet 198 Z9 OL 68 oF 9 £ ? 8I
L9 | IL/€€ igor |pog {82g |19€ jost [Ssh iz? iter izor [She OFS jege |I9T oot [8h joe er. fe LI
68SI'9 1G IST 66 |Sze ooe j909 sto i869 i¢zS i129 (6099 i297 i998 itoe (e0e igoz i024 jee ist r E ii
926'6 |¢ |SI igir tog i909 loro letre |8z6 i696 I8ZT T |FOL‘T |FI8 1999 |s6G lScr iter Mir Pa IIE iti otio
6E9'FI | ZI 9E SST |OSP |ST9 |616 ISZZ'T |2Z6E‘T |S8F'T |P89'T |IZL9T JOZE'T |g90‘T ie8gs (679 |989 80g |ezt |88 [OT IIT | FI
9Z9'8ST | E16 SPI 8GP |869 |8Z6 |Z68'T IZIS‘T |9G6'T |OLI'S |6SI‘Z |P69'L |OLP'TI |L9Z'T iSh6 |PZ8 JOZE |S6I ZPE OF IIZ | eI
FOL‘'IZ | FL Ish |GET ZFP |G49 |6c6 I88P'T |9G6'T |FG0'% |ShF'S |68FZ |8E0'S IZILI |ETG'T |OGS‘T |6F0'I |ZIF loPZ IEZI 19g '6I [ZI
goo'es 19 |ST IGZI |F6F |1Z9 ISZT'TP89T |OLI's |gPr's |ZI9Z 80L [OS'S |G96'T |LL9'T |8ZET |Lzz'Tt l9FF jooge |'20G [OF IIS | IT
GGs‘eZ |Z 9E ISET |Z9F |699 |POL'T/IZ9'l [68'S [68F'% |80L'% |Sh9'S |9677 [066I |6FL'T [SEPT |FOS'T |68F |947 |ZIZ [PP [ře 1 OT
49:02 |9 81 6g |gre izor IFIS loze‘t |Pe9'T |ggo‘g jogs’s j96z‘% 1800% |GE8'T |ISG'I |PZg'T Isoc't |11¢ lgze |zoz i6 161.16
6IZ‘ZT |g |6 izo óZ ig9g |999 |s90‘T lozF'T |Z9L't |996 T |066‘T [ees't |9IS‘T |9PF'T Ocg |990'T lesr jere |z6T ise Ist is
ISS'9T Ie 16 J04 Jeez jtoe |s6e |988 |LOZ'T ISTOT |Z29'T |6FL‘T |ISS'L |9PF'T (SSE'L iPS T OET T 1099 106E ES E£ [eT |Z
6SS‘eI |T |€ jeg itor igoz isor 679 [Sh6 JOZZT |SZS'T |SEF'L IPZE'T lOkZ‘I |P8z‘T 1900 1t |600‘'L |989 lFZE 96T igg ist fo
OZZ‘ZI Ch |991 lees |For |989. [PZS — |GPOʻT |LZZ'I [POZI |89Z'T |990'T JOET'T |600't |868 |44 ose |10Z lez JOT |g
GaP‘ 9 87 OL |ZFT |803 [OZE |cIh [Ohh 68h IIS |gs jeso ge |LLh 986 |L8Z ject FI Ig |?
CLL‘ € Og 98 [FL jezı |S6T. jorg [00 j9az jese jete jose pae joee |483 jose SOT j6 jt je
FS2'S F st ieg MO- Ike LT |ELT |407 |gīigZ |403 j26r jeez [961 jroz ezt SOL 89 9 Z |ë
928 £ $ it joi OF 9g OF ad 68 Ze Eg GG 8% rt oo 9 Pat
861 ¢ lor m z let. me m a ae a ee 0
ogler| st jador joa] st | en | er | at | O86 1 8 | 2b a is | ee aie
wooug FHL NI GOJ Wd SAAG UOA NOMLVIGAHOD OIdALOWOF{T BO 'TVAGIAIANI-VULNT
IT Wiavi
570 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
The original data appear seriated by individual plants in
Table I. From this we derive the symmetrical intra-individual
correlation surface, Table IT.
Working by the conventional product moment method, but
taking all moments around 0 as suggested elsewhere in these
pages, we get:
S(x) = 2,179,781, v= 10.0524= 4,
ae") — 24 578 235, ' —- 113.346284,
> (2’ en === 9D 438, 814, — 12.295679 =o’,
= 216 842. 3(x'y') Raa — 103.480018.
The y moments are of course the same as the z, and we have:
S(ay) _ S(a’y')/N — vrn __
9
a
Nee
8(a'y’)/N — A?
Be
ose’, 1968;
Or we may use a short formula for the difference method.?
o 2
Peel —4 ^= 1 — 8024 — .198,?°
Or
Where o, is the standard deviation of the difference between
pairs.
Where the number of individuals in an array is very small
the method presents no very marked advantages, but when the
arrays are large it may be very useful and its range of applica-
bility very wide.
For instance, one of the tests of the genotype theory of in-
heritance is to compare the correlation between parents and off-
spring with that between the parents co-fraternity and the off-
spring in a population of self fertilizing or vegetatively
5 AMER. NAT., Vol. 44, pp. 693-699, 1910
’ Harris, J. Arthur, ‘‘A Short Method of Calculating the Coefficient of
Correlation in the Case of Integral Variates,’’ Biometrika, Vol. 7, PP- 2
218, 1
X On iho basis of N = 2239, r= .198 + .014, and we may conclude that
the individual plants are slightly but distinctly ee in their
i oom, Pearson
series, some, or possibly all, of the individuals of which may have come
from the same parent plant. The case is an illustration of arithmetical
w method “ul
No.537] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 511
propagating individuals." The correlation surfaces are very
easily prepared. Two seriation tables, one for the arrays from
which the individual parents were drawn and one for the off-
spring arrays corresponding to each parental fraternity, are
prepared. The first table is cut into strips by columns, passed
strip by strip over the offspring seriation table, the frequencies
which are in juxtaposition are multiplied together and summed
simultaneously, and the resulting totals entered in the proper
compartments!? of a correlation table. This may be called an
ascendant-descendant correlation surface. It includes both
‘‘ parental” and ‘‘avuncular’’ relationships. The ‘“‘avuncular”’
relationship is the one sought, and is quickly gotten by subtract-
ing the surface for the relationship between individual parents
and their offspring (which will have been already prepared for
other purposes) from the ascendant correlation surface just de-
scribed.
In a forthcoming paper I shall show how various correlations
may sometimes be most easily determined from the first two
moments for the individual classes or families without the labor
of drawing up tables. J. ARTHUR HARRIS.
CoLD SPRING HARBOR, N. Y.,
July 7, 1911
ACQUIRED CHARACTERS DEFINED
Ir is believed that if the term ‘‘acquired characters” is care-
fully defined, and the matter considered in view of that defini-
tion, a new light will be cast upon a generally misunderstood
subject. The things to be defined are the verb to acquire, which
means to obtain by effort, and the noun character, which means
something forming part of an individual. The point of view
here involved may be illustrated by the following quotation:
‘‘ Some are born great,
Some achieve greatness, and
Some have greatness thrust upon them.’’
This shows three ways in which an individual obtains great-
ness. The same three ways apply to the different characters
“For an illustration see K. Pearson’s analysis of Hanel’s data for
Hydra grisea, ‘‘Darwinism, Biometry and Some Recent Biology,’’ Bio-
metrika, Vol. 7, pp. 368-385, 1910
“The compartments corresponding to the captions of the two columns
dealt with, :
572 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
which an individual has. Some characters are born in the
individual, some are acquired, and some are thrust upon him.
oman nose or a pug nose is neither acquired nor thrust
upon the individual. They are born to the individuals which
possess them. The same is true of gray eyes or blue eyes, and
many other characters. They are inborn and are matters of
heredity.
A mutilation is not born to an individual or acquired by him.
It is thrust upon him by accident or by the action of some other
person, and against the will of the individual. A person is not
born gray, nor does he achieve grayness. It is thrust upon him
by age or by mental distress. We sometimes say that a person
acquires a sun-burned face, but the statement is inaccurate.
Sunburn is thrust upon the individual by the action of the sun’s
rays.
Those things which are acquired are obtained by the efforts,
either physical or mental, of the individual which acquires them.
But not all things which are acquired by efforts are ‘‘ characters. i
Thus, a person may acquire wealth by his individual efforts, but
wealth is not a character. It is a possession. An education is
also acquired by efforts, but an education is a possession and not
a character. So also athletes and race horses acquire records of
various kinds, but these records are also possessions and not
characters.
Characters are those things which pertain to and form a part
of the individual as an individual. Acquired characters are not
new characters, but characters which are changed from their
normal inborn condition by their own functional activity, and
are to be clearly distinguished from characters thrust upon a
passive individual. Using a generic term to cover many specific
qualities, it may be said that strength is the main if not the sole
acquired character under this definition. Weakness is negative
strength correlated with negative efforts.
Physical strength above the inherited strength is acquired by .
special physical efforts, such as training, and mental strength
above the inherited mental strength is similarly acquired by
special mental training. Conversely, physical strength is lost
by the absence of physical efforts, and mental strength is lost
by the absence of mental efforts. Efforts are something we can
= see and measure, and the relationship between these acquire-
‘ments and the efforts by which they are obtained is such that we
can measure the acquirements in terms of efforts.
No.537] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 573
It has been demonstrated beyond all question that those char-
acters which are thrust upon the individual, such as mutilations,
are not inherited. But how about those characters which are
not thrust upon the individual but are acquired in accordance
with the above definition? That there is a clear distinction
between characters which are acquired and those which are
thrust upon the individual is evident from the fact that neither
mental nor physical strength can be thrust upon the individual.
Irritation thrust upon an individual may in fact produce a great
display of mental and physical strength, but the circumstance or
the person who produced the irritation does not augment the
strength which previously existed.
The above analysis shows that the individual after birth does
or may come into possession of two kinds of characters, one of
which is obtained by acquirement and the other of which is
thrust upon him. Also, that those characters which are acquired
can not be thrust upon him, and those which are thrust upon him
can not be acquired. The distinction between the two kinds of
characters is clear cut and marked. Evidence that one of these
kinds is not inherited is not even presumptive evidence that the
other is not. What is demanded is some clear and precise
evidence in regard to those characters which are acquired and
can by no possibility be thrust upon the individual.
R. L. REDFIELD.
NOTES AND LITERATURE
THE PRESENT-DAY CONCEPTION AND STUDY OF
ANIMAL PSYCHOLOGY
THE latest issue—or one among the latest issues—in that long
series of admirable books called the ‘‘ Bibliothèque de Philosophie
Contemporaine’ (Felix Alcan, Paris) is Professor Georges*
Bohn’s ‘‘La Nouvelle Psychologie Animale.’’ In 1909 Bohn
published his interesting ‘‘La Naissance de 1’Intelligence,’’? in
which he set out with characteristic French lucidity his position
in the field of the new animal psychology, a position based at
once on a considerable amount of personal observation and
experimentation and on a thorough familiarity with the work of
the whole modern school of experimental animal psychologists.
In the present smaller and simpler or more general statement
—by general I do not mean vague—Professor Bohn restates with
admirable understanding, restraint, definiteness and clearness,
the conditions and the conclusions of the modern experimental
study of animal reactions of the psychic and pre-psychic order.
The conclusions, to be sure, can be held to be those of no other
student than Bohn himself until other students give their formal
adherence to them. But despite the inevitable disagreements
about details, and the reluctance to subscribe to any man’s dicta
in toto, Professor Bohn’s conclusions and attitude will find the
adherence of a considerable body of animal psychologists.
The essentials of this position are its strongly ‘¢mechanical’’
tendency, i. e., its attempt to make physics and chemistry and
mechanics go as far as possible in explaining both stimuli and
reactions; its strong leaning away from finalistic explanations,
i. e., the explanations of adaptation and of Darwinian selection ;
its rather sharp classification into three separate categories of the
behavior of the invertebrates less the articulates, the articulates,
and the vertebrates, respectively; its conception of these three
categories of behavior as standing not as three successive stages
in one grand line of evolution, but as of marking three fairly
disparate lines of development, that is, of differing not so much
* Bohn, Georges, Pey yet Psychologie Animale,’’ pp. 200, 1911,
Felix Alcan, Paris, 2 fr.
? See review by the Stee writer in Science, November 5, 1909.
No. 537] NOTES AND LITERATURE 575
quantitatively as qualitatively; and, finally, its sharp and clear
conceptions of what is meant by tropisms, by differential sensi-
bility, by association of sensations and associative memory.
I have referred to the ‘‘strongly mechanical tendency’’ mani-
fest in Bohn’s attitude toward behavior explanations. This is
not to align Professor Bohn with those representatives of the
extreme mechanical school, such as Beer, Bethe and Uexkull.
Recognizing the great service of these men in showing “‘the
errors and the exaggerations” of the anthropomorphic or
anthropocentric school of animal psychology, he expressly parts
company with them when they push their way to the rigorously
logical—or is it illogical ?—extreme. Bohn says:
With the vertebrates the psychic activity acquires, thanks to the brain,
a very great PTPRE It becomes useless to speak, in their case, of
tropisms and of the elementary forms of agate sensibility, for one
can no longer ‘assets these elements from the total activity. The memory
has reached a considerable development, and, on the since hand, the chemism
has lost its primitive simplicity; each remembrance, each idea can provoke
new forms of sensibility.
Even with the articulates the ‘‘rudiments of associative
memory are developed to the point of masking more or less the
tropisms and the differential sensibility.’’ Thus by the side of
survivals of the older or simpler activities, the articulates reveal
new psychic acquisitions due to associative memory
For the behavior of the lower invertebrates, however, Bohn’s
explanations hold closely to those of the true mechanical school,
those who rely on tropisms and differential sensibility. Bohn is
highly appreciative of Loeb’s pioneer work, the work that indeed
marked the opening of the present epoch in animal psychology
study. The originality and genuinely Bahn-brechend character
of Loeb’s work is freely recognized. Indeed, the whole work and
activity of the present American school of animal psychology is
referred to and praised over and over again in all of Professor
Bohn’s writings.
‘‘La Nouvelle Psychologie Animale’’ has been ‘‘crowned’’ by
the Académie des Sciences Morales et Politiques. It may also
well be crowned by that reading publie which likes its science
authoritative and yet simple and clear and interesting at the
same time.
Vids. E.
STANFORD UNIVERSITY, CAL.
576 ; THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
A USEFUL EVOLUTION BIBLIOGRAPHY
Tue Bulletin Scientifique de la France et de Belgique
(founded by Giard and now conducted by Blaringhem, Bohn,
Caullery, Mesnil, Perez and others) has begun the issuance of a
‘‘ Bibliographia Evolutionis’’ that promises to be of very great
usefulness. Now that L’Année Biologique is irrecoverably out
of date in its annual issues—has it indeed officially expired ?—the
new ‘‘Bibliographia Evolutionis’’ will be especially welcome.
It is published as a specially paged part of each issue
(quarterly) of the Bulletin, so that at the year’s end it can be
gathered and bound up together either at beginning or end of the
Bulletin volume, or, and better, separately.
The ‘‘Bibliographia’’ was begun in 1910 and in its first year
(January—-December, 1910) comprised careful abstracts and —
evaluations of 345 books and papers treating of such evolution
subjects (the abstracts are arranged by subjects) as experimental
biology, general cytology and fecundation, general embryology,
phylogeny, evolution of instincts, general ethology, mimicry,
symbiosis, parasitism, heredity and hybridization, influence of
the environment and adaptations, regeneration, sex, castration
and parthenogenesis, variation, teratology, general evolution.
The books and papers reviewed are almost exclusively issues of
1910, only a few 1908 and 1909, references being included.
The ‘‘Bibliographia Evolutionis’’ apparently may not be sub-
scribed for or purchased separately. To obtain it, then, one must
subscribe for the Bulletin Scientifique de la France et de la Bel-
gique, 32 franes a year, Redaction du Bulletin Scientifique, 3;
rue d’Ulm, Paris. The Bulletin is, however, an admirably con-
ducted journal, containing important original papers, by French
and Belgian scholars, on evolutionary matters. It is at present
in its forty-fifth volume (fifth volume of its sixth series).
_ Interesting item: the title page of the ‘‘Bibliographia Evolu-
tionis’’ bears on its title page, as stamp of its recognition, @
likeness of the face of Jacques Loeb.
2 Vi
STANFORD UNIVERSITY, CAL. .
The American Journal of Science
Established by Benjamin Silliman in 1818
The Leading Scientific Journal in the United States
Devoted to the Physical and Natural Sciences, with special reference to
Physics, and Chemistry on the one hand, and to Geology and Mineralogy
on the other.
Editor: EDWARD S. DANA.
Associate Editors: Professor GEORGE L. enn! JOHN TROWBRIDGE, W. G. FARLOW and WM. M. DAVIS
of Cam saka Professors A. E. VE L, HENRY 8. WIL LIAMS and L. V. Farei of New
; Professor O. F. BARKER, vot ge op phia ; Professor Aten. . AIM
of Baltimore; MR. J. S. DILLER, of Washington
Two volumes annually, in monthly aonda of about 80 pages at
This Journal ended its first series of 50 volumes as a quarterly in 1845; its second
series of 50 volumes as a two-monthly in 1870; its third series as a monthly ended Dec-
ember, 1895. A Fourth Series commenced in 1
Subscription price, $6 per year or 50 cents a nibii, postage prepaid in the United States ;
$6.25 to Canada ; $6,40 to Countries in the Postal Union. Back numbers at reduced prices.
sa Ten-Volume Indexes, Vols. I-X XI-XX, fourth series, price one dollar. Address
The American Journal of Science
New Haven, Conn.
SECOND EDITION, NOVEMBER, 1910
AMERICAN MEN OF SCIENCE
A BIOGRAPHICAL DIRECTORY
EDITED BY J. McKEEN CATTELL
A Biographical directory requires revision if it is to maintain its usefulness. arapi ta a the names in the
present edition are new, and the sketches which a peared in the a division have in nearly ev revised. The
amount of work required to prepare the revision been as as that given to the first pet Aa Thee as been no
— in the general plan of the work. Greater strictness has yin served in confining its scope tothe natural and
; possi
reply even to repeated requests for the information need. The thousa ety boing men of science have been again selected
methods that wer
an perma the iwo statistical srr im that priy zk n made.—From the Preface to the Second Edition.
The second edition of the Directory extends to more than 600 pages and contains more than 5500 sketches.
Tt is sce gee printed on all rag paper and bound in buckram with feather label. Altho = the work has been
increased in size y more than 50 per cent., it is sold at the same price as the first editio
Price: Five Dollars, net, Postage paid
THE SCIENCE PRESS
GARRISON, N. Y. LANCASTER, PA.
SUB-STATION 84, NEW YORK CITY.
The American Naturalist
1867, ae to the Advancement of the
Factors of Organic Evolution and Heredity
Journal, establish
with Special =r TR to the
Biological Sciences
-
CONTENTS OF THE MARCH NUMBER
The E p a o Ee menan of Heredity. Professor
The, Geno Soes and Hybridization. Pro-
aser E M, Ea
oo: on Gundlachia and Ancylus. Dr, WILLIAM
HEALEY DALL,
Notes and Literature: Mimicry, Dr. FRANK E. LUTZ.
CONTENTS OF THE APRIL NUMBER
Genetical Studies on Oenothera. II. Dr, BRADLEY
Moore Davis.
The Sore of Maize. Dr. GEORGE HARRISON
R ae Literature: Is the Female Frog Heterozy-
gous in regard to Sex Determination ? Professo i
H. Moroan. The Mutation Theory. Dr. R.
GATES.
CONTENTS OF THE MAY NUMBER
The etre erage of Polymorphism and ax in Colias
Philodice. Professor JOHN H. GERO
ae as and —— in Heredity. Weck
UYER,
Oea Study of the poiniei — the Photo-
agers Organs of Certain A
. McDERMOTT and i ce Ge
Shorter Articles and segge iE ee a
on Natural Belectio = e English Sparrow
Dr. J. ARTHUR HAR
Notes and Literature: -iapeivtoe Yule’s Introduc-
tion to the Theory of Statistics. Dr, RAYMOND
Cc ENTS OF JUNE NUMBER
Inheritance a Fecundity in the ae Fowl.
OND FEAR J
The Biometric Proof of the Pure Line Theory. Dr. 3
Dr
ARTHUR HAR
The Influence oe che nged External 1 Conditions on
the Development of Two a of Moss. Pro-
fessor THomas H. MONTGO
Shorter Articles and haia the Ontogeny of &
Genus, AUSTIN HOBART CLARE.
otes and Literature: Recent Contributions to &
—— of the Extinct Amphibia, Dr. Ror
L. Moo
CONTENTS OF JULY NUMBER
Germ-cell ge eg
fessor R. W. HEGNER.
aan Observations on the Pose of the Sauropodous
OLIVER P. HAY.
Dao pa and Correspondence : a z
the Poeet £ of state Armond H.
JENNINGS. on Batrachoseps aiten ay te
cance. Pro-
Dr. C,
Notes and Titeratuee : Some Recent Studies on Vari”
ation and ee in Pae aeee Plants: Dr
RAYMOND osomes er
maphroditism : ag Er lie g E. CASTLE. Notes on
Ichthyology: President DAYID STARR JORDAN.
Recent Books on a To Plants: Professor
Seip prea
F AUGUST NUMBER
CONTENTS O eee
oseopie Study of the 3
. GF rs ni pi em Skins, meritan special Te ren
ence to to the Question of Colo:
Mulattos. r H. E. E Jos aii
A Coefficient of í Tndvidual acca for Btu
of Heredity. Dr. J. ARTH he
The a er the Primates Professor
Mutationist.
= ee an Eighteenth Century
Dr, Henri HUS. Dr. W. je
Notes — Literature : Notes on Heredity. i
SPI
T,
Yearly Subscription, $4.00
One Dollar
four months f aa.
THE SCIENCE PRESS
Garrison, N. Y. - Sub-Station 84: NEW YORK
VOL. XLV, NO. 538 OCTOBER, 1911
THE
AMERICAN
NATURALIST
A MONTHLY JOURNAL
Devoted to the Advancement of the Biological Sciences with
Special Reference to the Factors of Evolution
CONTENTS
Page
I. Mutation in Œnothera. Dr. R. R. GATES - 577
Il. Some Experimental Observations concerning the soem of Various Bees
in Their Visits to Cotton Blossoms. H. A. ALLA - 607
Ill. Reproduction in the Brown Rat. NEWTON MILLER - re o - +623
IV. Shorter Articles and Discussion: Data, PA Un Other TEE
Dr. J. ARTHUR HARRIS - + 636
- 639
V. Notes and Literature: Darwinism and Human Life. V. L. K. -
THE SCIENCE PRESS
LANCASTER, PA. GARRISON, N. Y.
NEW YORK: SUB-STATION 84
The American Naturalist
MSS intended for publication and books, etec., intended for review should be
sent to the Editor of THE AMERICAN NATURALIST, Garrison-on-Hudson, New York.
rticles containing research work bearing on the problems of organic evolu-
tion are especially welcome, and will be given preference in publication.
hundrea reprints of contributions are supplied to authors free of charge.
Further reprints will be supplied at c
criptions and advertisements should be sent to the publishers. The
subscription price is four dollars a year. Foreign postage is fifty cents and
Canadian postage twenty-five cents additional. The charge for single copies is
thirty-five cents. Thea vertising rates are Four Dollars for a page.
THE SCIENCE PRESS
Lancaster, Pa. Garrison, N. Y.
NEW YORK: Sub-Station 84
Entered as second-class matter, April 2, 1908, at the Post Office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act of
Congress of March 8, 1879.
THE BULLETIN—For bargains in Ethnolograph- TENTH EDITION.
ical and Pre-historie Specimens. Books on Natural | THE MICROSCOP
i i an introduction to Microscopic Methods and to Histology
History, Science, Travel, Voyages, eto. See THE Sy SOMON Haney Giese, pi E UAN Over
BULLETIN post free for 3 cent stamp. rs rai onte popie aae shovs E
4 Duke St., Adeiphi—London—England COMSTOCK PUBLISHING CO., Ithaca, N. Y.
Ree Eue
BIRDS’ EGGS |Back or Current Numbers
of any American or Foreign technical
: ine fur-
W. F. H. ROSENBERG, or trade journal and magazine i
57 H tock Hill, Lond w nished on short notice at moders
averstock Hill, London, N. W., rates; all kinds of Government and
England State Reports in stock. Clippings 0n
begs to announce the publication of a new special subjects furnished promptly.
Price List (No. 15) of Birds’ Eggs, con- Large stock of American Naturalist,
taining over 900 species from all parts of : hand.
i nce on
the world. This Catalogue is systematic- | arap ee y
ally arranged, with authors’ names, indica- M agazines, Books and P apers
tions of localities, and an index to families. .
It will be sent post free on application, as of all kinds bought 5
will the following lists: Special Subscription Price List on reques
No. 11, Birds’ Skins, (5,000 species); | Information concerning any periodical
No. 12, Lepidoptera, (5,000 species) ; No. furnished free of charge.
13, Coleoptera ; No. 14, Mammals, NOS
n course of preparation: New Price TELLA
List of Reptiles, Amphibians and Fishes. A. W. CAS
Largest Stock in the world of specimens 259 Armstrong AVe.,
_ in all branches of Zoology. Jersey City, N.J., U.S.A.
THE
AMERICAN NATURALIST
Vout. XLV October, 1911 No. 588
MUTATION IN GENOTHERA
DR. R. R. GATES
INTRODUCTORY
I Have been for some time interested in tracing the
history of the various species and races of (nothera
from the early records of their introduction into Europe.
This method is accompanied with many difficulties
which only those know who have attempted it. Con-
clusions which seem justified in the light of the data
in hand sometimes require modification when further
records are examined. In a previous note in Science
(710), and especially in a longer paper (’1la) since pub-
lished, I have brought together much of the data on
which our knowledge of the early introduction of these
forms into cultivation must rest! Since that time I
have been able to supplement those data by an examina-
tion of further records, and particularly of some of the
type specimens of these plants in European herbaria.
These have confirmed some of my previous conclusions
and necessitated modifications of others. Herbarium
specimens, where available, are of course the final court
of appeal concerning the characters of any plant, but
unfortunately they are not infrequently incomplete or
even entirely lacking. My examination shows that prob-
ably a number of @nothera races existed two or three
1 Hill (’11) has also briefly discussed the subject and added some data. _
577
578 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Voi XLV
centuries ago which are not known to occur in America
to-day.
The O. Lamarckiana of de Vries’s cultures is not the
only nothera which is no longer known to be wild in
this country. The same is true of the ‘‘European bi-
ennis ’’ so-called, and of a race of O. biennis having very
erinkled leaves, which I have cultivated from the Chelsea
Physic Garden. It is not sufficiently kept in mind that
the collector or species-maker necessarily abstracts.
One form, or at best a very few, are selected for seeds or
for description as types, from a population containing
often a large number of closely allied races; for nature
does not select between these races unless the differen-
tiating characters are of value in the survival of the
organism, and this appears often not to be the case. In
this manner two or three centuries ago various races of
(Enothera were selected and taken to Europe to be
propagated in botanical gardens, but it is evident that
many more races were left behind, and since the incom-
ing of civilization some of these have probably disap-
peared. In nature, among open-pollinated (allogamous)
plants (and presumably among a great many animals)
there is no such thing as a ‘‘pure’’ species which will
breed true in all its characters, showing only purely
fluctuating variability. It is only by selecting and in-
breeding for a few generations, that we get ‘‘pure lines.’’
The only pure lines in nature are to be found among
strictly self-fertilized (autogamous) forms. This idea,
which has been emphasized by Cook (’07), seems to be
too frequently lost sight of in evolutionary studies. The
pure line, while a valuable and necessary means of
analyzing various problems of heredity, is essentially a
laboratory product seldom duplicated in nature among
allogamous plants. By continued inbreeding and selec-
tion to smaller and smaller differences, races which are
more and more uniform may be obtained, as the ‘‘pure
line” work tends to show. But the natural wild species
- must (unless regularly self-fertilizing) be looked upon
No. 538] MUTATION IN 2NOTHERA 579
as an intercrossing population of races, whose appear-
ance is ever changing (within limits) from generation
to generation, according to the particular series of crosses
or selfings which happen to occur in each generation.
Some of the races are likely to fluctuate in numbers or
be dropped out entirely as conditions change. The way
in which the face of the population changes from one
generation to another will, of course, depend upon how
the character-differences are inherited, but we need not
consider that question here.
It therefore seems to be idle to inquire whether in
this sense crossing of the allogamous cenotheras, such
as O. Lamarckiana and O. grandiflora, has taken place,
for we must assume that it has occurred, in the wild
condition as well as in gardens. Our ‘‘species’’ (par-
ticularly the earlier ones, when less fine distinctions
were drawn than now) are founded upon certain chance
combinations resulting from such crosses, which have
attracted attention and been abstracted and rendered
uniform by continued self-pollination. Nature herself
is oblivious of the boundaries between ‘‘species’’ so
long as, when crosses occur, the progeny are fertile, and
this is frequently the case in Ginothera.
I am greatly indebted to Dr. B. Dayton Jackson, gen-
eral secretary of the Linnean Society, for the privilege
of examining the type specimens of Linnzus’s ‘‘Species
Plantarum,’’ and to Dr. A. B. Rendle and his colleagues
of the British Museum (Natural History) for courtesies
in connection with the examination of extensive Œno-
thera collections, including the plants of Linnæus’s
‘‘Hortus Cliffortianus’’ and various early American
collections.
The species of @nothera which need particularly to
be accounted for are what we now know as O. muricata
L., O. biennis L., O. Lamarckiana Ser. and O. grandi-
flora Ait. Each of these ‘‘species’’ is really an aggre-
gation of a large number of races, differing in many
characters but having certain features in common. It
580 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von XLV
becomes a question how many of these races are to be
included in each ‘‘species,’’ and it is often a purely arbi-
trary matter whether the line between two of the species
shall be drawn so as to include certain races in one or
the other.
As an instance of this I may cite the case of O. biennis
L. and O. muricata L. I have cultivated many wild races
of both, including races of O. muricata from such locali-
ties as Woods Hole, Mass., Gay Head, Mass., Seal
Harbor, Me., Middleton, N. S., St. John, N. B., Winni-
peg, Man., and St. Paul, Minn. Certain of the races, for
instance from St. John and Winnipeg, appeared to be
identical, but in most cases they produced uniform races
differing constantly in such features as width and color
of leaves (varying in different races from very narrow
to very broadly lanceolate) and average height of the
plant, as well as other characters. The only feature in
which all agreed was in certain flower characters, all hav-
ing a smaller flower than O. biennis. In most cases the
leaves are also narrower than in O. biennis, but as certain
races having smaller flowers than O. biennis also have
broad leaves, it becomes an arbitrary distinction whether
these races be included in O. biennis on the basis of their
broad leaves or in O. muricata on the basis of their
smaller flowers. The latter course has been followed
and they are accordingly classed as O. muricata races.
On this basis, the only distinction between O. biennis
forms and O. muricata forms is in the size of the flow-
ers, and even this distinction is an arbitrary one. I will
not discuss in this connection certain interesting ques-
tions relating to the geographical distribution of these
races.
My cultures have similarly isolated a number of races
of O. biennis, some of which differ from each other in
most unexpected characters. There is a wide range of
variation in flower-size in the different races of O. bi-
ennis, as there is also to a less extent in O. muricata.
The general distinction is usually drawn, that self-polli-
No. 538] MUTATION IN CENOTHERA 581
nating forms (i. e., those having a short style so that the
anthers surround the stigma in the bud) shall be classed
as O. biennis, and forms with a long style, hence open-
pollinated, shall be included in the O. Lamarckiana or
O. grandiflora series of forms. Yet O. Simsiana Ser. is
a species having large flowers and a short style. The
‘‘ European biennis’’ has flowers which are larger than
any known American races, but it is conveniently classed
as O. biennis on the basis of its short style. The ques-
tion as to the characters of the particular plant on which
the species name was originally based, also of course
enters here. In connection with the early records, her-
barium specimens and figures are the chief means of
determining approximately the race to which a plant
under a given name belonged. The present paper con-
tains the writer’s further conclusions concerning these
various races and species, and the reader will constantly
be referred in this connection to the extensive data al-
ready brought together in the paper previously men-
tioned (Gates, ’1la).
Earty Recorps anp HERBARIUM SPECIMENS
We may now consider the identity of these various
forms in succession. In the paper just mentioned I have
given the nine species of Onagra listed by Tournefort
in his ‘‘Institutiones Rei Herbarie,’’ 1700. Of these the
first five are cnotheras. Species number five, Onagra
angustifolia, caule rubro, flore minori, I have already
concluded (loc. cit., p. 87) is our present O. muricata L.,
on the basis of Barrelier’s figure (Lysimachia angusti-
folia, spicata, lutea, Lusitanica, fig. 990 in ‘‘Plante per
Gall., Hisp. et Italiam observate,’’ 1714). This conclu-
sion is now shown to be correct by Plukenet’s figure in
the ‘‘Almagestum’’ under the name Lysimachia lutea,
corniculata, angustifolia, flore minore (t. 202, f. 7),
which represents a small-flowered Œnothera with nar-
row leaves. The final proof is given by an examination
582 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
of the specimen (probably the one from which the figure
was drawn) in Plukenet’s ‘‘Herbarium,’’ Vol. 96, f. 167,
which is in the British Museum. The flowers of this
specimen are much smaller than in O. biennis and the
leaves are narrow, making it evidently a race of O.
muricata. Linneus afterwards (quite incorrectly)
(‘‘Sp. P1,” p. 346) combined it with his species O. fruti-
cosa. <A type of the latter species is a specimen collected
by Clayton in Virginia, and is from the herbarium of
Gronovius in the British Museum. It represents a race
of the modern O. fruticosa L. That the error of com-
bining Tournefort’s species with this was afterwards
recognized is shown by the fact that in an annotated
copy of the ‘‘Species Plantarum,’’ 2 edition, 1762, in the
possession of the Linnean Society, the citation of
“Onagra angustifolia, caule rubro, fore minore Tournef.
inst. 302” under O. fruticosa L. is crossed out. Type
specimens of both O. fruticosa and O. muricata for the
‘‘Species Plantarum’’ are to be found in the Linnæan
Herbarium. The latter differs from the type specimen
of O. biennis (which will be referred to later) in having
somewhat smaller flowers, more numerous long hairs on
the sepals, narrower and more pointed leaves, and nu-
merous conspicuous murications (long hairs arising
from papillæ) on the stem.
Ve may now take up the consideration of Tourne-
fort’s first three species and their synonyms. In my
former paper I was strongly of the opinion that species
(I) represented a plant which was more closely related
to O. Lamarckiana than to O. biennis, although not
identical with any known form, except possibly O. levi-
folia. The large flowers and quadrangular buds, as well
as a consideration of the synonymy, seemed to demand
that it be placed with the O. Lamarckiana series of forms,
rather than with O. biennis or O. grandiflora. A subse-
quent examination of certain early specimens has thrown
doubt upon this opinion. I have shown (l. c.) that the
No. 538] MUTATION IN ŒNOTHERA 583
Lysimachia lutea corniculata of Bauhin,? which Tourne-
fort cites as a synonym. for his Onagra latifolia, is the
same plant, or at any rate the same description, as
Morison’s Lysimachia lutea corniculata non papposa
and Ray’s Lysimachia lutea Virginiana. The crucial
point in this early synonymy seems to be in Barrelier
(1714), who gives rather accurate figures of three
species of cnothera, together with their synonymy (see
Gates, ’1la, p. 102). His species (1) is quite certainly a
race of O. biennis, his species (2) is with equal certainty
a race of O. muricata, and (3), which has much larger
flowers, must, I think, belong somewhere in the series of
large-flowered forms represented by O. grandiflora and
O. Lamarckiana. The fact that the name Lysimachia
lutea, corniculata, latifolia, Lusitanica under which Bar-
relier figures his species (3) is almost identical with the
name Lysimachia Virginiana latifolia, lutea, cornicu-
lata under which Morison figures his large-flowered
form (Fig. 7), made it probable that Barrelier’s species
(3) referred to the same plant as Morison’s figure. How-
ever, this can not be certain. But I regard it as quite
certain that the plant figured by Morison (Fig. 8) under
the name Lysimachia Virginiana angustifolia, cornicu-
lata (see Gates, ’1la, p. 99) is O. muricata. The diam-
eter of the flowers in his Fig. 7 is exactly three times that
in Fig. 8. Now Gray’s ‘‘Manual,’’ ed. 7, gives the
length of petals in O. muricata as 12-20 mm., in O. bi-
ennis as 15-25 mm., and in O. grandiflora as 40-60 mm.,
so that the flowers of O. grandiflora (or O. Lamarckiana)
would be approximately three times the diameter of
those in O. muricata, while even the ‘‘ European biennis’’
could searcely reach these dimensions. This appears to
be an additional reason for supposing that Morison’s
larger-flowered plant came in the series represented by
*On inquiry from Professor A. Fischer, director of the Botanische
Anstalt, Basel, Switzerland, where Bauhin’s Herbarium is kept, I find that
the specimen of Lysimachia lutea corniculata, along with about two thirds
of his collection, was discarded as spoiled when the Herbarium was reno-
vated several years ago.
584 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
O. grandiflora and O. Lamarckiana rather than in O.
biennis, but as already stated, an argument of this nature
can not reach finality. Whether Morison’s Fig. 7 repre-
sents one of the grandiflora-Lamarckiana series or the
‘“‘ European biennis,” it seems certain that Barrelier’s
species (3) came in the large-flowered, open-pollinated
series represented by O. grandiflora or O. Lamarckiana.
Unfortunately, the actual specimens in the British
Museum, which bear these early names of Tournefort
and are supposed to have served as the types for the
‘‘Hortus Cliffortianus,’? are not fully authenticated.
The handwriting is said not to be that of Linneus, and
certain differences between the names employed and
those which Linneus himself would probably have used,
seem to indicate that they were written by an amanuen-
sis or that some mistake occurred in the naming. This
deprives us of certainty in regard to the names they
bear. The characters of the specimens themselves are
very well preserved. The first specimen (which I shall
refer to as specimen 1) bears on the label the name
‘““Onagra latifolia flore sulphureo’’?; the second speci-
men (2), ‘‘Onagra latifolia. T. 302,’’ and beneath it is
written “‘@nothera octovalvis.’’ But O. octovalvis was
a species of Jussieua. These two specimens are identi-
cal in every character. They represent evidently a race
of the ‘‘European biennis’’ having larger flowers than
American forms of O. biennis, though not so large as O.
Lamarckiana. The style is short so that the stamens
surround the stigma, the buds bear some long hairs, red
papillae occur on the stem, and the leaves are rather
broadly lanceolate. The stigma lobes are remarkably
long in all the flowers on both specimens. These two
specimens may have served as the types of Linneus’s
species (1) in Hort. Cliff. (see Gates, ’1la, p. 102). As
far as the characters of these specimens are concerned,
they really resemble O. Lamarckiana more than they do
_ the American races of O. biennis, but are classed with
~ O. biennis because the flowers are self-pollinating.
No. 538] MUTATION IN ŒNOTHERA 585
The next specimen (3) in this series is one bearing the
label Onagra latifolia, flore dilutiore T. 302. As a mat-
ter of fact, it differs remarkably little from the two
specimens just described. The leaves and stem show no
visible difference at all, but the petals appear to have
been slightly smaller. The flowers differ markedly,
however, in having longer styles, so that the stigma pro-
jects some distance beyond the stamens. The stigma
lobes are also very short, differing conspicuously in this
respect from those of the specimens above. This speci-
men is something of a puzzle. It was apparently open-
pollinated because of its long styles. Yet its flowers
were no larger than those of the ‘“‘ European biennis.”
It shows that races may have existed and disappeared,
which were quite different from anything we know at
present. Whether this form shall be classed with the
‘European biennis” on account of the size of its flow-
ers, or with O. Lamarckiana on account of its long style,
appears to be an arbitrary matter. Such specimens
serve to show that the range of ‘‘variability’’ of these
cenotheras in certain directions may have been formerly
much greater than would be supposed from a study of
those races which have survived to the present day.
Another interesting specimen (4) in this collection is
one marked Onagra latifolia Tourn. with the date 1743
and a number, 1082. I am indebted to Dr. Rendle for the
explanation of the history of this specimen. Sir Hans
Sloane contributed to the Herbarium of the Royal So-
ciety each year for a number of years, fifty specimens
from plants grown at the Chelsea Physic Garden, and
these were numbered consecutively. This plant was
therefore grown in the Chelsea Physic Garden in 1743.
It is apparently the same as specimens (1) and (2) al-
ready described as probable types for the ‘‘ Hort. Cliff.”
Some of the stem leaves have short petioles and sloping
base, others are apparently sessile with broadened base.
The next specimen (5) has the same history as the
last. It bears the date 1779 and the number 2878. The
586 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Von XLV
label reads “@Œnothera biennis foliis ovato-lanceolatis
planis, caule muricato subvilloso Lin.: Spee. Plant. 492.
Lysimachia lutea corniculata. Bauhin: pin. 245.’’ This
specimen has smaller flowers than the previous ones, the
flowers being the same size as the American races of O.
biennis. The leaves are very broadly lanceolate, sharply
narrowed at base to a very short petiole, and appear to
be of a different shape from those of any American
biennis I have seen. The stem bears scattered papille
from which long hairs arise.
A consideration of these five specimens makes it
highly probable that Tournefort’s Onagra latifolia and
Bauhin’s Lysimachia lutea corniculata belonged to what
we now for convenience call the ‘‘Huropean biennis”?
rather than to the larger-flowered, longer-styled, O.
Lamarckiana. Yet specimen (3) with its long style
though the flowers are the same size as in the European
biennis, makes it impossible to be dogmatic as to where
the line is to be drawn between the O. Lamarckiana and
the O. biennis series of forms. If these specimens are
correctly labeled, then there must have been compara-
tively little difference between Tournfort’s species (1)
and (2), (1) representing the ‘‘Huropean biennis’’ and
(2) a form probably open-pollinated but with flowers
smaller than the present O. Lamarckiana. The ‘‘long
and narrow pale green leaves’’ of Bauhin’s and Parkin-
son’s plant (see Gates, ‘lla, pp. 91 and 95) would indi-
cate that it differed in certain features from any race of
the European biennis now known.
As already pointed out, the synonymy as well as the
flower-size would indicate that Morison’s larger-flow-
ered plant Lysimachia Virginiana latifolia lutea, corni-
culata was the same as Barrelier’s Lysimachia lutea,
corniculata, latifolia, Lusitanica which is undoubtedly a
_large-flowered form. However, it seems on the whole
more probable that Morison’s plant was the same as
Bauhin’s, whose description he copies. In any case it
seems clear that Barrelier’s Lysimachia lutea, cornicu-
No. 538] MUTATION IN C2NOTHERA 587
lata, latifolia, Lusitanica was a large-flowered form be-
longing in the grandiflora-Lamarckiana series, and there
is no reason to doubt that his citation of Tournefort’s
Onagra latifolia, floribus amplis as a synonym is cor-
rect. It is therefore highly probable that Tournefort’s
species (3) represents O. grandiflora, or perchance O.
Lamarckiana or some race between these two as we now
know them. eos
The type specimen of Linnæus’s O. biennis in the
‘‘Species Plantarum’’ (to be found in the Linnean Her-
barium) is, however, not the ‘‘ European biennis,” but
a smaller-flowered form representing one of the Ameri-
can races of O. biennis, having rather narrowly lanceo-
late stem leaves. I have already pointed out (’1la, p.
104) that Linneus does not cite figures of this form in
his synonymy, although a good figure by Barrelier was
in existence. Instead he cites Morison’s figure which
now appears most probably to have been the ‘‘ European
biennis,” and in the ‘‘ Hort. Cliff.’’ he cites Barrelier’s
figure of Lysimachia lutea corniculata latifolia lusitanica,
which was undoubtedly a large-flowered form.
To summarize briefly the conclusions which seem
justified from all the available data, it appears that the
earliest introduction, as represented by the plants of
Bauhin, Parkinson, Morison and Ray, belonged to a
race of what we now know as the ‘‘ European biennis,’’
having flowers larger than the present American races
but self-pollinated, although an open-pollinated form
with long style appears also to have occurred (speci-
men 3). O. muricata was recognized by Tournefort in
1700, and both O. muricata and the ‘‘ American biennis’’
were figured by Barrelier in 1714, in addition to a large-
flowered species which must have been related to O.
grandiflora or O. Lamarckiana. This large-fiowered
form appears to have been first recognized and briefly
described by Ray in 1686 (see Gates, ’1la, p. 100). Dif-
ferent hypotheses as to the relation between O. grandi-
flora and O. Lamarckiana will be considered later in this
paper.
588 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Vor: XLV
O. grandiflora Ait.
In a previous paper (’lla, p. 110) I reproduced the
manuscript of L’Heritier’s description of O. grandi-
flora, which was written about 1788 but was never pub-
lished. The type specimen of O. grandiflora in the Brit-
ish Museum was grown in the garden of Dr. Fothergill
in 1778. It has narrowly lanceolate leaves and slender
hypanthia, agreeing exactly with some of the plants in
my cultures of O. grandiflora from Alabama. Solander
really did the descriptive work upon this form, and the
species should have been given his name instead of that
of Aiton. In Vol. IX, p. 387, of the Solander manu-
scripts, which are in the British Museum, he gives the
following additional notes on this plant of Bartram and
Fothergill: ‘‘(Enothera grandiflora foliis lanceolatis
denticulatis villosiusculis, petalis cuneiformibus, calyci-
bus aristatis, pilis caulinis basi tuberculosis. Habitat in
America septentrionalis prope Mississippi. Bartram
Junr.’’ These characters serve further to identify the
plant with the present O. grandiflora, the words ‘‘petalis
cuneiformibus’’ and ‘‘calycibus aristatis’’ being partic-
ularly distinctive.
Evidence from Later Herbarium Specimens.—I may
now refer to a number of specimens in the British Mu-
seum, which are of special interest for one reason or
another. The first of these specimens was marked
““(Enanthera grandiflora Lin: Willd.,’’ the species name
being crossed out and ‘‘longiflora’’ written above it.
On the back of the page is written ‘‘Herb. Demidoff.
Pallas.’? This applies to plants grown by Demidoff in
his garden, founded at Moscow in 1756. This specimen
differs frou the type specimen of O. grandiflora in hav-
ing larger stouter buds, very much stouter hypanthia,
larger flowers, leaves narrow but shorter than the type
of O. grandiflora. It appears to resemble O. rubrinervis
more than any other form, but has stouter hypanthia
_ than I have ever seen in this mutant.
Another specimen bears the following label: ‘‘Bar-
No. 538] MUTATION IN ŒNOTHERA 589
clay. (nothera sp. Shrubby, 3 feet high, flowers yel-
low. Hab. hilly. Bodegas.” This plant from Ecuador
has flowers the size of O. Lamarckiana, many long hairs
on the sepals and young leaves, the leaves being rather
narrowly lanceolate, petiolate. The plant must have
been very much like O. rubrinervis, though differing
somewhat in leaf characters. Ecuador is an unexpected
place to find plants having these characters.
A very interesting sheet bears the name O. biennis L.
var. muricata Torr. & Gray. It was collected by Dr.
Wm. M. Bell, of London, in the Raton Mountains (which
extend from southern Colorado to New Mexico) in 1867.
There are two specimens and several extra flowers and
buds. The flowers are as large as those of O. Lamarcki-
ana, the style is long so that the flower is open-polli-
nated; the hypanthium and bud cone bear numerous
long hairs; the buds are the precise size and shape of O.
rubrinervis; the stem leaves are more narrowly lanceo-
late than O. Lamarckiana but are often broad and sessile
at base like that form. This plant is strikingly like O.
rubrinervis in every particular, except that the upper
stem leaves are perhaps a little narrower. The pre-
sumption is that these plants were collected in the wild
condition, and I have found no reason for supposing
otherwise. This would seem to support the view that
these Lamarckiana forms were formerly found wild in
the western region, although it has been suggested that
the Texas plants, from which de Vries’s cultures appear
to have originated, were perhaps descended from
garden seeds.
Another very interesting specimen is marked ‘‘Onagra
guttata Greene n. sp., New Mexico, 1904. Alt. 6600
feet.” Its leaves are very narrowly lanceolate (much
narrower than O. levifolia); the stems red, with many
red papille bearing long hairs; the flowers are large,
style long, and there are many long hairs on the sepals,
which also have red bands like O. rubrinervis.
These specimens show that forms having large flow-
590 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vor. XLV
ers, which belong i in the O. Lamarckiana series, occur in
the western region. One of these specimens is scarcely
if at all distinguishable from O. rubrinervis. Contrary
to the opinion sometimes expressed, I have found her-
barium specimens of great value in determining the ex-
act characters of many of these races. There would be
no excuse for one familiar with the characters of the
plants from cultures, failing to discriminate easily be-
tween, for example, O. grandiflora and O. Lamarckiana,
from herbarium specimens showing merely a flowering
shoot. And much less conspicuous differences than
these, for example in the width or shape of leaves, can
be determined with equal accuracy. For example, no
one who is familiar with the plants in cultures would
confuse typical herbarium specimens of O. Lamarckiana
and O. rubrinervis.
Hypotheses Concerning the Origin of O. Lamarckiana.
—There has long been a disposition to look upon O.
Lamarckiana as a ‘‘hybrid’’? and to suppose that, on
this account, the phenomena of the sudden appearance
of aberrant types (as described by de Vries), displayed
by this form, are necessarily deprived of evolutionary
significance. This latter view is one which I do not
share. As already pointed out, I consider it necessary
to regard open-pollinated forms as hybrids in the sense
that their immediate ancestry has been participated in
by many races differing in various characters. The germ
plasm of such forms is like an unpurified chemical or
mixture of chemicals and can only be ‘‘purified’’ by con-
tinued self-pollination. This ‘‘impure’’ condition is the
one under which the evolution of open-pollinated plants
or interbreeding animals goes on, and any assumption
*It might be pointed out that the flower characters (which are the crucial
characters in many Gnothera crosses) of the ‘‘ European biennis’? are such
as might be expected if it were a ‘‘hybrid’’ between some race of the
American biennis and some large-flowered form in the O. Lamarckiana
series. Perhaps it originated as such a hybrid, but the contemplation of
the fact is, in itself, of little value for the study of progressive pao
For practical evolutionary studies, the only universal criterion of a spec
must be that it breeds true to its peculiarities.
No. 538] MUTATION IN ŒNOTHERA 591
to the contrary merely distorts the facts. If it be as-
sumed that O. Lamarckiana is the sudden product of a
single cross between two rather more widely separated
species, the situation is slightly though not fundamen-
tally changed. As regards O. Lamarckiana, the only
forms we know which could reasonably be supposed to
be its ancestors in this way would be O. biennis and O.
grandiflora, as I have already pointed out (Gates, ’1la,
p. 119). There have doubtless been plenty of opportuni-
ties for these species to cross in Botanical Gardens and
they have doubtless done so, since the evidence seems
clear that certain races belonging to these two ‘‘species’’
were recognized as early as 1686 by Ray as under culti-
vation. But these species both came from the Virginian
region, where there is ample evidence that O. grandi
flora as well as O. biennis originally grew wild, and
where the former species was commonly found as late
as 1820 (Barton’s ‘‘Flora of North America,” plate 6).
Under these circumstances there must have been plenty
of opportunities for O. grandiflora to be pollinated from
O. biennis (these forms are visited by moths in the even-
ing when the flowers open), and it would be a bold as-
sumption to suppose that such crosses had not taken
place centuries before the white man came to America.
Hence if this were the manner of origin of O. Lamarcki-
ana, it must have originated in nature long ago. Of
course itis well-known that many such species-hybrids are
sterile so that when they occur they fail to bridge the
gap between species or to take any part in those species’
subsequent history and evolution. Assuming that O.
Lamarckiana originated in this way, its fertility makes
its presence in the population of forms of equal im-
+I have grown cultures of enotheras from nearly all the European botan-
ieal gardens. The self-pollinating forms are generally quite uniform, while
the open-pollinating forms frequently show much variability, which is evi-
dently in part at least the result of crossing. My cultures of O. grandiflora
from its wild locality in Alabama also show that it contains various aber-
rant types. On the other hand, it is also true that the self-pollinating
O. biennis in some localities contains more than one type, but in the case
of O. biennis it is not probable that these types have arisen through crossing.
592 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von XLV
portance with that of the two parent species, for it will
take an equal part in producing descendants. Further-
more, crossing between the new hybrid forms and the
parents will go on indefinitely, producing a host of inter-
breeding races, and this population will constitute the
material for further evolution.
I have been studying this process by means of cul-
tures from seeds of plants on the sand dunes near Liver-
pool, England, where biennis, Lamarckiana and grandi-
flora have been interbreeding freely for at least a cen-
tury, producing a host of races (including several of the
mutants of O. Lamarckiana), some of which split, but
many are found to breed true for at least two genera-
tions. It seems to me that the question to ask regarding
these races is not as to whether they have originated in
connection with crossing, for it is certain that they have
originated at least in the presence of conditions in which
crossing is taking place in every generation. The ques-
tion is rather what relation (if any) these races bear to
the previous evolution of these forms, whether any of
them are progressive in the sense that they will supplant
the other races and become the progenitors of future
generations, to the exclusion of those which were for-
merly progenitors. In other words, are the new races
progressive in the sense that they show some further de-
velopment of any character or some new departure in
comparison with the parental types, and are they also
capable of surviving, propagating themselves and ulti-
mately becoming important elements of the population,
from which new races may in turn develop? Does
crossing ever lead to the appearance of new and pro-
gressive types by the disturbance it produces in the germ
plasm, rather than by the mere combination and redis-
tribution of the characters of the forms it brings to-
gether? Or is mutation a process apart from any germ-
inal disturbance resulting from crossing? The answers
to these questions are often very difficult, but upon these
answers depends in large part the status which will ulti-
No. 538] MUTATION IN ŒNOTHERA 593
mately be given to the mutation phenomena in O. La-
marckiana as an evolutionary factor.
Is O. Lamarckiana obtained from O. grandiflora X O.
biennis?—Before pursuing further the subject of the
cause of the mutations in O. Lamarckiana, let us ex-
amine the hypothesis that O. Lamarckiana is the result
of a direct cross between O. biennis and O. grandiflora,
for while, since-O. Lamarckiana must be assumed to
have undergone crossing in any case, it is not of vital
significance just what those crosses may have been, yet
it would be of interest if it could be shown that O. La-
marckiana has arisen and can be synthesized, as the re-
sult of a single cross. Davis (’11) has recently at-
tempted to produce O. Lamarckiana in this manner. His
descriptions, however, fail to state the points in the
characters of his hybrids, which any one who is familiar
with these plants would like to know. Particularly does
he omit to state how the bud characters of his hybrids
differ from those of O. grandiflora. It is stated that the
hybrids are in general intermediate between the parent
species. This would be expected, at least as regards the
flower characters, from the behavior of other hybrids in
cenothera, e. g., O. Lamarckiana X O. biennis. The
flower characters in this cross are nearly intermediate,
though resembling biennis more than Lamarckiana. I
have observed closely the flower characters of many
crosses, including hybrids between series of forms be-
longing respectively to O. grandiflora and O. La-
marckiana, and the flowers are usually intermediate in
their characters, though sometimes nearer one parent
than the other. If the flowers of Davis’s cross are also
"It might be assumed that O. biennis and O. grandiflora were the original
forms to become naturalized on the English sand dunes, and that O. La-
marckiana has since appeared as the result of crossing between these races.
If this is the ease, then O. Lamarckiana (and many related races which
have resulted from further crossing and mutation) has since been successful,
under the new conditions, in supplanting a pe forms to a large extent.
We should, therefore, in any case, expect these O. Lamarckiana forms to
become the progenitors of the future SRR aS and to determine in
greater part the future evolution, whatever that might be.
594 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
a blend of the parents, as he states (’11, p. 213), then
they can not be the same as the flower characters of O.
Lamarckiana. If, on the other hand, the flowers are as
he states, ‘‘searcely distinguishable from those of O. La-
marckiana,’’ then they are not a blend of the parental
characters.
I have previously pointed out the differences between
O. grandiflora and O. Lamarckiana (Gates. ’99a, pp.
131, 132) and Miss Vail (in MacDougal, Vail and Shull,
07, p. 66) has described the characters of O. grandi-
flora in detail. For convenience, the flower differences
between O. biennis, O. grandiflora and O. Lamarckiana
may be summarized here. O. biennis has small flowers,
in which the stamens surround the stigma in the bud.
The anthers are in contact with the stigma in the bud
and are ruptured before the bud opens, so that when the
opening of the flower occurs, and the anthers move away
from the stigma, viscous strings of pollen are found
running from each anther to a lobe of the stigma in the
newly opened flower. Self-pollination thus invariably
takes place in O. biennis. In neither O. Lamarckiana
nor O. grandiflora does this happen, for the reason that
the style is longer so that the stigma lobes, instead of
being surrounded by the anthers, are projected above
them. The anthers are ruptured as early as in O. biennis,
but not being in contact with the stigma lobes, the
strings of pollen seen in the opening biennis flower never
occur in O. Lamarckiana or O. grandiflora. Tf, as Davis
states (see Z. c., p. 216), the anthers in O. Lamarckiana
touch the lower part of the stigma lobes, then these
strings of pollen and self-pollination would occur. But
this condition is not found in O. Lamarckiana, though
it does occur (as would be expected) in the hybrid O-
biennis X O. Lamarckiana.
As regards the size of the flower, the statements of
Davis also need some revision. He assumes that the
flower of O. Lamarckiana is smaller than that of O.
grandiflora, whereas the O. Lamarckiana of my cultures
No. 538] MUTATION IN C2NOTHERA 595
is on the average somewhat larger than O. grandiflora
from Alabama grown under the same conditions. The
same thing is shown by the measurements of Miss Vail.
I should first point out that in all the cnotheras the
flowers in the early part of the season are uniform in
size, but towards the latter part of the blooming-season,
with dwindling vitality they steadily decrease in size
until the latest-blooming flowers in O. Lamarckiana, for
example, have petals no larger than O. biennis. The
style in O. Lamarckiana does not, however, decrease in
length at as fast a rate as the petals, the result being
that in late-blooming flowers it not infrequently pro-
trudes from the unopened bud. But there is no time in
O. Lamarckiana (in my cultures) when the ‘‘base of the
stigma lobes is slightly below the tips of the anthers.’’
Davis’s Fig. 18 (’11) is misleading as a typical flower of
O. Lamarckiana, its petals being much too small. He
states (p. 216) that the hybrid whose flowers are
‘‘searcely distinguishable from those of O. Lamarcki-
ana’’ has petals 2.2 em. long. By choosing flowers
towards the end of the blooming-season it will be pos-
sible to find petals of any desired size, down to that of
O. biennis itself, but in stating the size of petals for
comparison with O. grandiflora, it is only fair to choose
the typical flowers which are characteristic of the greater
part of the season, and which O. biennis never produces.
MacDougal (’03) states the length of the petals in O.
Lamarckiana to be 4-5 cm., and Miss Vail in O. grandi-’
flora (°07, p. 66) 3.5-4.0 cm., which agrees with my cul-
tures, while in Gray’s Manual the petals of O. grandi-
flora are given as 4-6 cm. In my cultures the flowers of
O. Lamarckiana have been certainly not smaller, but on
the whole larger, than in O. grandiflora. O. Lamarcki-
ana is therefore not intermediate between O. biennis and
O. grandiflora, either in length of style (though the style
may sometimes be slightly shorter than in O. grandiflora)
or size of petals, but is almost in agreement with Q.
grandiflora in both these characters. As already pointed
596 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
out, the petals of O. grandiflora are also characteristic-
ally narrower and more cuneiform than in O. Lamarcki-
ana, though this is not always the case.
na number of other flower characters O. Lamarckiana
is more in agreement with O. biennis, and contrasted with
O. grandiflora. Both the first-named species have quad-
rangular buds with a prominent median ridge on each
sepal, while in O. grandiflora the buds are rounded and
the median ridge much less prominent. Also these two
species agree in bearing on the sepals, hypanthium and
ovary a conspicuous long, pointed type of trichome aris-
ing each from a papilla and giving the bud a rather
strongly pubescent appearance; while this type of hair
is, in my experience, always absent from the buds of O.
grandiflora, which therefore have a glabrous appearance,
although a small inconspicuous type of hair is often
present, as is the case always in the other two species.
O. biennis and O. Lamarckiana also agree in having
rather thick sepals and rather stout šepal tips, while in
O. grandiflora the sepals are thinner and more delicate,
and the sepal tips longer and more setaceous. These dif-
ferences give the buds of O. grandiflora a very different
appearance from those of O. Lamarckiana, so that even
in ordinary herbarium material there is not the slightest
difficulty in distinguishing them.
These contrasting flower characters are brought to-
gether for greater convenience of reference, in the table
below: —
FLOWER CHARACTERS
O. biennis 0O. Lamarckiana O. grandiflora
Petals 12-16 mm. Petals 40-50 mm. Petals 35-40 or
long. long. 60 (?) mm. long.
Stigma surrounded Stigma lobes above Stigma lobes above
by the anthers, in- the anthers, so that the anthers, so that
variably causing self- self-pollination in the self-pollination in the
pollination before the ud does not oceur, bud does not occur.
opens. though the style ma
ora.
*In some races of O. biennis there is instead an intermediate type of
trichome arising from the even surface of the buds.
No. 538]
Buds quadrangular.
n
a
appearance.
Buds quadrangular.
Same as O. biennis.
MUTATION IN ŒNOTHERA 597
Buds rounded.
Buds bearing only
e (1), or some-
times entirely free
from hairs. Type (2)
is never seen to occur
on the buds of this
form, unless previ-
ously cade with O.
biennis or O. La-
kiana.
Sepals thinner and
sepal tips more se-
taceous.
Sepals rather thick
: Essentially the same
and sepal tips rather
stout
as O. biennis.
Thus O. Lamarckiana agrees with O. biennis in certain
features of the flowers, while agreeing equally with O.
grandiflora in certain other features. We know that
these three species when crossed give more or less blended
or intermediate hybrids, as appears to be frequently the
case in crosses between ‘‘Linnean’’ species.’ This being
the case, we should not expect to derive O. Lamarckiana
from a cross between the ordinary races of O. biennis and
O. grandiflora, for this would imply alternative rather
than blended inheritance of the various flower charac-
ters. Davis has not taken into account the important dif-
ferentiating features between the buds of O. Lamarcki-
ana and O. grandiflora, merely telling us that the ‘‘in-
florescence was very similar to O. Lamarckiana,’’ and
that ‘‘the only essential difference between the buds lay
in the slightly greater attenuation of the sepal tips.”
But his hybrids can not be, as he states, and as would be
anticipated from the results of similar crosses in ceno-
"In an extensive series of crosses between O. Lamarckiana and O. grandi-
flora races, the results of which can not be presented here, the flowers of
the F, are shown to be, in many cases, at least, a blend of the parents.
The buds are less conspicuously quadrangular than in O. Lamarckiana, the
sepal tips more slender, and the long type of hair is about half as numerous.
The casual observer would consider these buds to be the same as in O.
Lamarckiana. Closer inspection, however, shows that this is not the case.
In certain of these crosses, however, a type occurs in the F, having buds
which closely resemble O. grandiflora.
598 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vot XLV
thera, a blend of the parental characters, and at the same
time agree with O. Lamarckiana.
Similarly, in the description of the foliage of his hy-
brids, Davis fails to take into account the leaf-differences
involved. O. grandiflora agrees with most American
races of O. biennis, in having stem-leaves which are
lanceolate and tapering at both ends, forming a petiole.
In O. Lamarckiana the stem-leaves are, on the contrary,
usually sessile and broad, almost clasping, at the base, in
addition to being crinkled.
A form which would resemble O. Lamarckiana much
more closely than the hybrids of Davis, could doubtless
be synthesized by using a race of O. biennis which I have
cultivated from seeds obtained from the Chelsea Physic
Garden. This race differs strikingly from any other race
of O. biennis I have seen, in having stem-leaves sessile,
very broad at base and very much crinkled. If such a
race were crossed with O. grandiflora, hybrids might be
expected whose foliage at least would closely resemble
that of O. Lamarckiana, though the flowers would prob-
ably be intermediate between O. Lamarckiana and O.
biennis.
One feature which has always made it appear improb-
able that O. Lamarckiana. originated as the result of the
single cross O. grandiflora X O. biennis, is the way in
which the mutants of O. Lamarckiana all agree with that
form in certain characters; and not one of them, so
far as I am aware, shows any indication of a reversion
towards either O. biennis or O. grandiflora. That the
mutants all have certain features in common, which they
do not share with O. biennis or O. grandiflora, and that
all may be grouped around O. Lamarckiana, was shown
in my analytical key to these forms (Gates, 09a, pp. 126,
127). While there are wide departures from O. La-
marckiana in many characters, in no case does this ap-
pear to bring them nearer either O. biennis or O. grandi-
flora races. It is difficult to understand why this does not
_ occur, on the theory that O. Lamarckiana is such a
No. 538] MUTATION IN CENOTHERA 599
simple hybrid.’ These facts that, so far as now known, O.
biennis, O. Lamarckiana and O. grandiflora all behave
alike in crosses with each other (that is, they give blends),
together with the fact that none of the mutants revert
towards either O. biennis or O. grandiflora, have always
seemed unfavorable to the view that O. Lamarckiana has
originated suddenly from such a single cross. On the
other hand, it by no means follows that O. Lamarckiana
or various other species of (Enothera could not be pro-
duced by sufficient crossing of races under suitable condi-
tions. My studies of a colony of œnotheras from the Eng-
lish sand dunes, show that numerous races which breed
true and have numerous entirely unanticipated characters
(often differing from each other conspicuously in every
organ) can be obtained as the result of indiscriminate
crossing. Some of these races when crossed give blends
and have thus far defied Mendelian analysis. I have been
able to synthesize at least one of these true-breeding
forms by crossing of races. A number of the other pecu-
liar constant races have doubtless had a similar origin,
though too complex to be easily repeated. The character-
differences of these races do not appear to be Mendelian
and the races come true except for varying percentages of
*‘mutants.’’
The mutants of O. Lamarckiana themselves, when
crossed with their parent form, show apparently a differ-
ent type of behavior from the species, but that is a matter
I will not enter into in the present paper.
How do the Mutants of O. Lamarckiana Originate?—
Tower’s experience (710, p. 315) in crossing species of
Leptinotarsa and thus synthesizing a new race which
breeds true except for sporadic ‘‘mutants,’’ appears to
‘In my cultures of œnotheras from the sand dunes of the coast of
England, I have obtained occasional mutants having many of the flower-
characters of O. biennis. But in this case there was abundant opportunity
for recent crossing with O. biennis to have taken place, and this would seem
to be the most probable explanation of their oceurrence. I have more re-
cently seen similar occurrences in forms from botanical gardens which have
obviously undergone much crossing.
600 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
be similar to the behavior just described, and increases
the probability that O. Lamarckiana may have had a
similar origin in nature and perhaps also in gardens.
As already pointed out in this paper, it must be assumed
that O. Lamarckiana has undergone crossing which has
determined its present characters, and that its ancestry
is therefore ‘‘impure.’’ Whether it has resulted from
any particular cross is of less interest from the evolu-
tionary standpoint. As I have tried to show in the in-
troduction to this paper, it probably must be conceded
that the mutations of O. Lamarckiana are connected with
previous crossing in the ancestry. This crossing was ac-
companied by a disturbance of the germ plasm, such
disturbance manifesting itself in the occasional pro-
duction of various aberrant types displaying whole
series of new characters. But there are certain reasons
why the resulting ‘‘disturbance’’ appears to be some-
thing more than a case of hybrid splitting. I shall not
go into the details of this question in the present paper,
but I may point out one or two facts. Even if (as is
quite possible) certain mutants, such as O. lata and O.
nanella, which are evidently retrogressive forms, could
be so accounted for; there are at least two forms which
could not be brought into this category. The first of
these is O. gigas with its tetraploid number of chromo-
somes and a new series of characters, in part, no doubt,
the result of the chromosome doubling. I (’09b) have
suggested that this origin is probably similar to that of
many tetraploid species in nature. Ordinary hybrid
splitting will not account for it. ,
Another mutant which is clearly positive or progres-
sive, and which can not be explained as a result of hy-
brid splitting, is O. rubricalyx, which appeared in my
cultures in 1907 as a mutant from O. rubrinervis, show-
ing a great increase in anthocyanin production (see
Gates, ’11b, for an account of its behavior). These two
cases alone make it necessary to assume that ‘‘muta-
No. 538] MUTATION IN CENOTHERA 601
tion’’ is due to a more general disturbance of the germ
plasm than would occur in hybrid splitting.
The mutation process, therefore, while probably a re-
sult of previous crossing in the ancestry of O. Lamarcki-
ana, is not a simple case of the splitting off or reappear-
ance of types which entered into that ancestry. It is
probable that much of the hybridization-behavior of the
genus (Hnothera, including particularly crosses which
involve the mutants of O. Lamarckiana as one of the pa-
rents, will ultimately be harmonized with Mendelian
categories.? But it is also probable that the appearance
of the ‘‘mutants’’ of O. Lamarckiana is not a case of
Mendelian splitting as we understand that process at
present. The origin at least of such mutants as O. gigas
and O. rubricalyx can not be explained on this basis, and
at present can only be ascribed to a general disturbance
or condition of instability, which probably resulted from
previous crossing. The change in climate to which O.
Lamarckiana has been subjected may also very well have
had something to do with this disturbance, although this
is less probable since this plant when brought back to
America continues to exhibit the same mutation phe-
nomena.
I have tried to show (1) that O. Lamarckiana, like
other allogamous forms, has undoubtedly undergone
crossing in its ancestry, and (2) that, whatever may have
been the relation between these crosses and the appear-
ance of mutants, the important matter to decide from the
evolutionary standpoint is, Will these forms survive in
nature and become the starting points for new races?
As regards O. gigas, I have pointed out (Gates. ’09b)
many cases among plants, of species which have probably
originated in an analogous manner.
There is one further phase of the mutation process
°A recent paper of Miss Saunders (‘‘Studies in the Inheritance of
Doubleness in Flowers—I, Petunia,’’ Journ. of Genetics, I, 57-69, 1910)
makes it probable that some at least of the alternative inheritance in crosses
between O. Lamarckiana and its mutants will find an explanation in
this way.
602 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vor XLV
which I may touch upon very briefly. That is, the exact
method of origin of the various mutants, from the cyto-
logical standpoint. It is now certain that the nature of
the change involved is not the same in all cases. In the
case of O. gigas, the most striking change, which brought
with it many size changes, is the doubling in the chromo-
some number. This most probably occurred either in
the fertilized egg or in the megaspore mother cell, which
then developed apogamously (Gates, *1lc). On the
other hand it seems most probable that several other
mutants are the results of changes occurring during the
reduction divisions. All the retrogressive mutants may
be accounted for in this way, as I have shown (Gates,
’08), as the results of occasional irregularities in the dis-
tribution of members of the chromosome pairs, if we as-
sume the chromosomes to differ in their chemical activ-
ities. O. rubricalyx again is a mutant from O. rubri-
nervis in which a marked quantitative change in one
character (namely, capacity for anthocyanin produc-
tion) has taken place. We have here the mutational ap-
pearance of a new dominant character. A change of
this kind is not likely to be concerned with a new chro-
mosome distribution, but is perhaps due to a cyto-
plasmic difference. As far as can be determined, the
external conditions under which this mutant appeared
and developed differed in no way from those of the rest
of the culture, although it is impossible to deny that
some local soil-difference might possibly have actuated
this germinal change. This would, however, necessitate
the assumption that the change took place in the germi-
nating seed.
Mutation appears, therefore, to be not a simple uni-
tary process of splitting, but to be the result of a condi-
tion of instability in the germinal material, which is
again probably a result of previous crossing, and which
leads to various types of departure from the parental
race. That this process will account for much species-
formation, and the polymorphism of many genera, can
No. 538] MUTATION IN ŒNOTHERA 603
not be doubted; but it is not clear that adaptation and
the larger evolutionary trends can be sufficiently ac-
counted for in this way, although occasional real germ-
inal advances are seen to occur.
SuMMARY
It must be assumed that crossing has taken place in
the ancestry of @nothera Lamarckiana, as well as in all
forms whose flowers are open-pollinated. Among open-
pollinated plants (and the same is probably true of ani-
mals) there is no such thing as a ‘‘pure’’ species, but
rather, many interbreeding races whose combinations
vary from generation to generation make up the popu-
lation.
Further studies of historical records, and particularly
of early herbarium specimens, make it probable that the
‘‘ European biennis” so-called, rather than O. Lamarcki-
ana, was the first @nothera introduced into Europe.
Herbarium specimens show, however, that forms closely
resembling if not identical with O. Lamarckiana and O.
rubrinervis, formerly occurred wild in the western re-
gion of Colorado and New Mexico, and that other forms
which, from their flower characters, must be closely re-
lated to O. Lamarckiana also occur there even now.
Granting that O. Lamarckiana must have undergone
crossing in its ancestry, it does not necessarily follow
that it has been synthesized by a single cross, such as 0.
grandiflora X O. biennis. The fact that the characters
of the parents are usually blended in crosses between
Linnean species of (nothera, while O. Lamarckiana
agrees with O. biennis in certain bud characters and with
O. grandiflora in certain other flower characters, does
not favor the hypothesis that O. Lamarckiana originated
from this cross; and the evidence offered by Davis is not
supported by a sufficiently critical study of the char-
acters of the three species concerned, the flowers of his
hybrids being little more than half the size of ordinary
O. Lamarckiana flowers. By selecting certain other
604 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
races of O. biennis for crossing with O. grandiflora, hy-
brids more closely resembling O. Lamarckiana, at least
in foliage, could doubtless be obtained. It would appear
that, as far as the characters are concerned, the ‘‘ Euro-
pean biennis’’ is as likely to have originated by a cress
between O. biennis and O. Lamarckiana, as O. Lamarcki-
ana is to have originated from O. grandiflora X OQ. bi
ennis. 3
From the evolutionary standpoint, however, the im-
_ portant question is not whether a given ‘‘species’’ has
arisen through crossing, because this is the condition
under which the evolution of open-pollinated species
must have taken place. Whether or not we assume that
mutation is the result of previous crossing, it is neces-
sary to determine whether the new types which appear
are progressive and will form races which will become in
turn the progenitors of future types.
Even if it be assumed that O. Lamarckiana originated
from a cross between O. grandiflora and O. biennis, such
crosses must have occurred in nature in North America
centuries before the advent of the white man. For there
is ample evidence that both these species originally occu-
pied the Virginia-Carolina region.
The natural and necessary tendency of systematists
and collectors is to abstract a few from many existent
types, as the foundation for their species. The result is
that the actual limits between Linnewan species appear
well-defined until the discovery of intermediate races
bridging such gaps makes it appear that, in many cases
at least, the lines drawn between Linnean ‘‘species’’ are
purely arbitrary. This is shown by cultures of many
races belonging to O. biennis L. and O. muricata L. from
various parts of North America.
One piece of negative evidence which does not favor
the hypothesis that O. Lamarckiana originated from O.
grandiflora X O. biennis, is the fact that none of the mu-
tants from O. Lamarckiana have hitherto shown any
tendency to revert to either of the putative parents. but
No. 538] MUTATION IN G2NOTHERA 605
rather, all seem to agree with O. Lamarckiana in a cer-
tain constellation of flower characters. From plants
from garden seeds, however, which have evidently un-
dergone crossing (e. g., O. suaveolens from the Nantes
Botanical Garden), I have occasionally obtained ‘‘mu-
tants’’ with large petals and short styles.
It seems that the mutation phenomena in O. Lamarcki-
ana are due to a disturbed or unstable condition of the
germ plasm, which has probably resulted from crossing
in the ancestry. It is not probable, however, that the
retrogressive mutants, such as O. nanella and O. lata
are due to simple hybrid splitting of types which entered
into the ancestry. The chromosomal irregularities dur-
ing meiosis (maturation), which I described, furnish a
possible basis for the occasional appearance of retro-
gressive mutants in each generation.
Certain cases, however, can not be explained as the re-
sult of hybrid splitting or loss of characters, and show
that O. Lamarckiana has experienced a more general dis-
turbance of its germ plasm. Of these cases, O. gigas
with its tetraploid number of chromosomes, probably
originated through a germinal change at another point
in the life cycle. A number of tetraploid species among
angiosperms and ferns have probably originated in an
analogous manner. Also O. rubricalyx, a mutant from
O. rubrinervis showing a large positive variation in red
pigment productiong, is not likely to have originated
through a new chromosome combination, but more prob-
ably through some quantitative cytoplasmic change.
Mutation in O. Lamarckiana, therefore, appears to be
a condition of germinal instability and not a simple
process of hybrid splitting, although this condition of
instability has probably been brought about through
previous crossing in the ancestry. . There is, however, at
present no satisfactory evidence that O. Lamarckiana
has originated from a single cross.
Mutation, whether or not always preceded or accom-
panied by crossing (of which it is probably a result),
606 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
will thus account for much species formation, and for the
polymorphism of many genera. That it will account for
the larger evolutionary trends and for many adaptations,
remains to be shown.
MISSOURI BOTANICAL GARDEN,
Sr. Louis, Mo.
LITERATURE CITED
Cook, O. F, 707. Set of Kinetic Evolution. Proc. Washington Acad.
97-4
Davis, BM 10. ea on the aoa of Certain Hybrids of Gnothera
in the First Generation. AMER. , 44: 108-115.
’11. Some Hybrids of Œnothera il and O. Agta sa Re-
semble O. Lamarckiana. AMER. NAT., 45: 193-233. Figs. 1
De Vries, Hugo. ’09. The Mutation Theory. i Vols. Trans. Farmer
and Darbishire. Chicago and London
Gates, R. R. ’08. A Study of PEPES in p rubrinervis. Bot.
Gazette, 46: 1-34, Pls. 1-3.
09a. An Analytical Key to some of the Segregates of Gnothera. 20th
Rept. Mo. Bot. Garden, 123-137,
’709b. The Stature and Chromosomes of Ginothera gigas de Vries. Arch.
f. Zellforsch., 3: 525-552.
’09e. Further Studies of CEnotheran Cytology. Science, 29: 269.
710. The Earliest Description of Œnothera Lamarckiana, Science, 31:
425-426,
"lla, Early sets botanical Records of the Ginotheras. Proc. Iowa
Acad, Science, 5-124, Pls. 6.
’11b. Studies on ge Variability and Heritability of Pigmentation in
Gnothera. Zeitschr. f. ind. Abst.- und Vererbungslehre, 4: 337-372.
Figs. 5.
"lle. Pollen Formation in @nothera gigas. Annals of Botany, 25:
Hill, E. J. 11. Gnothera Lamarckiana: its Early Cultivation and De-
seription. Bot. were: 51: 136-140.
MacDougal, D. T. ’03. Mutation in Plants. AMER. NAT., 37: 737-770,
Figs. 10.
1gs.
pees hh Shull and Small. ’05. Mutants and Hybrids of the
(no Carnegie Pub. No. 24, pp. 57, figs. 13, pls. 22.
ERE yan and Shull. ’07. Mutations, Variations and Relationships
of the CEnotheras. Carnegie Pub. No. 81, PP. 92, pls. 22, figs. 73.
Tower, W. L. ’10. The Determination of Dominance and the Modification
of Behavior in Alternative (Mendelian) tuhecitance e, by Conditions
Surrounding or Incident upon the Germ Cells at Fertilization. Biol.
Bull., 18: 285-352. Pls. 8.
SOME EXPERIMENTAL OBSERVATIONS CON-
CERNING THE BEHAVIOR OF VARIOUS
BEES IN THEIR VISITS TO
COTTON BLOSSOMS. I
H. A. ALLARD
U. S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE
Iw the past a great deal of experimental work has been
carried on to determine how flowers attract insects. The
conclusions reached have been various and have served
to provoke lively discussions as to the relative impor-
tance of the visual sense and the olfactory sense in guid-
ing insects to flowers.
Beginning with the notable work of Sprengel, an
extensive literature has developed attempting to explain
the relative importance of colors and odors in attracting
insects to flowers. The conclusions reached have served
to provoke lively discussions as to the relative importance
of the visual and olfactory sense in guiding insects to
flowers. Herman Müller, Delpino, L. Errara, Lubbock,
Knuth and others firmly supported the view that flowers
advertised their location to passing insects by their con-
spicuous colored portions and considered odors of only
secondary importance. In 1879 Gaston Bonnier ad-
vanced the opinion that colored petals were of slight
importance in attracting insects to flowers. Later, after
much experimenting, Felix Plateau promulgated his
extreme views that the colored structures of blossoms
were of practically no use as a means of attracting insect
visitors, but that odors were the chief means by which
bees and other insects were led to find blossoms. Plateau
radically expressed himself as follows:
Dans les rapports entre les insectes fécondateurs et les fleurs ento-
mophiles la coloration plus au moins vive des organes floraux n’a pas
le réle prépondérant que Sprengel, H. Miiller et leurs nombreux
adeptes lui ont attribué. Toutes les fleurs de la nature pourraient étre
607
608 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Voi XLV
vertes comme les feuilles sans que leur fécondation pas les insectes fut
compromise. L/’odorat si développé chez la plupart des insectes loin
d’être un facteur accesoire est vraisemblement le sens principal qui
leur fait découvrir les fleurs renfermant du pollen ou du nectar.
It is pretty generally conceded, however, that the
corolla of flowers and many other conspicuous floral
structures possess a very important function in serving
. to attract various insects. Many odors likewise serve the
same purpose, even to a very considerable extent, as
shown by the interesting experiments of Plateau and
others.
In connection with experimental cotton breeding inves-
tigations in northern Georgia, the writer has had occa-
sion to give considerable attention to the visits of bees
and other insects among cotton blossoms in this region.
The large number of certain species of bees regularly
visiting cotton blossoms and the ease with which observa- _
tions could be made in the field led the writer, during the —
summer of 1910, to make a series of experiments in order
to learn more definitely, if possible, just how cotton
blossoms attract bees, whether mainly through the visual
or the olfactory sense.
These experiments were made at the beginning of the
blooming season when blossoms were very scarce and
bees very numerous. The first experiment was begun in
the forenoon of July 26, and others followed throughout
July and early August. Each day the period of observa-
tions began at eight or nine o’clock and terminated about
twelve or one o’clock, at which time the blossoms were
beginning to close and bee visitors were much less fre-
quent. For each test a period of half an hour or an hour
was usually allowed, thus making the number of insect
visits sufficiently numerous for valid conclusions.
By far the majority of bee visits were made by Melis-
sodes bimaculata, although other species of Melissodes
were no doubt casual visitors. The big wasp (Elis plum-
ipes Drury) and a Bombus or an Entechnia occasionally
*<*Les Insectes et la Couleur des Fleures,’’ L’Année Psychologique,
13, 1907.
No. 538] THE BEHAVIOR OF BEES 609
appeared. Later in the season the visits of the extremely
common Melissodes bimaculata suddenly fell off, and the
common honey bee (Apis mellifica L.) became more fre-
quent in its visits. For reasons rather difficult to explain,
honey bees at the beginning of the experiments were
very rare visitors.
The observations and conclusions apply mainly to the
behavior of species of Melissodes. A count was made of
- every bee which gave definite evidence that it had per-
ceived the blossoms under observation. These records
also included the number of times bees actually alighted
upon or entered them. Many bees which do not enter a
blossom frequently indicate that they have perceived it
by a sudden pause or quick turn toward it momentarily.
The manner and thoroughness of these inspections by
bees ranges from the merest swerve and hesitation in
their flight to a close and scrupulous scrutiny of the
blossoms from all sides as they hover over them. At all
times it is evident that the actual number of entrances
into a blossom is small when compared with the number
of inspections without entering. Just why so many bees
inspect a normal blossom and refuse to enter is not clear.
This is more particularly the rule with species of
Melissodes.
It is not long till one can readily identify the more
important bee visitors within certain limits by their
different flight characteristics. Bees of the species
Melissodes bimaculata appear as black, swift-flying,
nervous bees, and are readily determined by their hasty
movements among the cotton plants. The species of
bumble bees, the common honey bee and Elis plumipes ,
are more labored in their flights from blossom to blossom.
The wasp, Elis plumipes, usually flies very slowly and
seems to find it necessary to alight on a blossom in order
to inspect it to advantage.
At the beginning of the experiments three blossoms
Were arranged in such a way as to form a triangle
were they connected by straight lines. In some of the
610 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
later tests the blossoms were arranged in a line on the
same row of cotton. When the triangular arrangement
was followed, the points (a) and (b) were on plants in
the same row and about four feet apart. Point (c) was
situated on the next row back, equally distant. from (a)
and (b). The writer was concealed in the cotton directly
in front of these points so that each could be kept readily
under observation at all times (see Fig. 1). In each test
nC
,
,
r
Colia rox.
`
> Sstion rox
va
%
Qyserver
the only changes made were concerned with the blossoms
at the points in question. One blossom at least in each
experiment served as a control. See the accompanying
triangular diagram.
Experiment No. 1—July 26. Time of observation, one
hour—from 9 to 10 a.m.
At (a) a normal blossom was growing in situ as a
control.
At (b) a normal blossom was ine in situ as a
control.
At (c) petals only of a blossom were carelessly pinned
to a stem.
An Elis plumipes once alighted on the petals of (c),
but immediately discovered the deception and flew away.
The species of Melissodes in no instance alighted. These
bees, it would seem, possess rather keen discerning
‘powers, since without alighting they quickly detect the
difference between a normal and a mutilated flower. In
many instances, however, they inspect very carefully
No. 538] THE BEHAVIOR OF BEES 611
a suspicious blossom before passing on. From this test
it is evident that the petals alone, as used at (c), were
quite as efficient in inviting inspection as the normal
blossoms themselves. The blossom at (b) received fewer
inspections, probably because it was less readily per-
ceived among the leaves which nearly surrounded it.
The bee visits were distributed as follows:
DATA FOR EXPERIMENT No. 1
Distribution by Species —
Distribution by Species
Total Entrances
Points of Triangle
Total Inspections
Elis plumipes
_ Honey Bees
Bumble Bees
Unidentified
Bees
Melissodes sp.
Elis plumipes
Honey Bees
Bumble Bees
Unidentified
Bees
N | Melissodes sp.
he |
SE
0
p
O m
OO e
m A
Deo
A
(c) 1
Experiment No. 2.—July 26. Time of observation
one half hour, from 10 minutes past 10 to 10:40 a.m.
Blossoms in the triangular arrangement as before. See
diagram.
At point (a) same blossom with petals removed.
At point (b) same blossom entire as a control.
At point (c) petals alone as in preceding experiment.
DATA FOR EXPERIMENT No. 2
Š% z Distribution by Species z Distribution of Species
a © e paunu et anes
38 = : % a z g H =
Cl errare E Tr
Sot Bot S 1S) al She. | e
ee ee ee ee ee ee a
= Š Š s els| Bs G Š & S 2e
à = = ee =)
(a) 4 4 0
(b) 5 50 5 5
( 62 0 TU ee eo!
The removal of the corolla of (a), which in the past
experiment received 81 inspections, reduced the number
of inspections at once to 4 as compared with 62 inspec-
tions of the detached petals at (c).
Exactly similar results were obtained by Darwin in
612 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von XLV
his experiments with Lobelia erinus. He says: “I cut
off the petals of some and only the lower striped petals
of others and these flowers were not once again sucked
by the bees, although some actually crawled over them.
The removal of the two little upper petals alone made
no difference in their visits.’’
Experiment No. 3—July 26. Time of observation one
half hour, from 10:40 to 11:10 a.m. Blossoms in the tri-
angular arrangement.
At point (a) 3 petals are replaced loosely.
At point (b) same blossom entire as before. Control.
At point (c) petals alone as in preceding experi-
ments.
DATA FOR EXPERIMENT No. 3
EA = Distribution by Species xt Distribution by Specie
a E : $ PORET A E N
5 E 2 ee | E ; 2 n| is
AYE} e/a lglale + é-}@48 lag
y a Š = m| 4! Za a 3 = a; |) se
xi i © = Ble BS = 3 = Be go
3 au a & D w | 2A = a a Q 2 ah
S41 it te Boat ele ee Se ee
S S = = 5 > <4
À x = a IH a p = S SE p
(a) | 53 51 2 | 0
(b) 51 1 | oi
(e) 67 65 4 |
= With these petals now carelessly affixed to the blossom
at (a) from which the corolla had been entirely cut
away, the number of inspections is at once as frequent
as for the control at (b). It appears that color and
texture more than normal form and arrangement first
direct the bees to inspect the blossoms.
_ Experiment No. 4—July 26. Time of observations
one half hour, from 11:15 to 11:45 a.m. Blossoms in the
triangular arrangement with the following change from
the preceding experiment.
At (a) cloth petals of an artificial rose are carefully
arranged and pinned in position to simulate an open
cotton blossom. The color of those petals approximated
the creamy yellow of a natural cotton blossom; the tex-
ture, however, was very different.
At (b) control. Same blossom entire as in the preced-
s ing , experiment.
-
No. 538] THE BEHAVIOR OF BEES . 613
DATA FOR EXPERIMENT No, 4
|
||
3 a. Distribution by Species n Distribution by Species
e | 3 :
© i 3
S oot j ú 3 2 a Po i
TRS ee eae Sale gy BE; eo THp
= S È -EE-D Z 3 = =
coe n Š = +2 rs Š = = Pn
° = 3 Š w) et SS a > Š A N i
2 cs S < | 8121 8a "a A x S| S| £s
a 3 3 $ ee be 2 3 3 | 3/8! 3
£ È ` 5 | Hilal Pe = = S qi a |»
(a) 6 6 o |
(b) 48 45 I 2 9 Lox
_© 65 62 | I o |
At (c) control. Petals only as in the preceding ex-
periment.
Bees have been very little attracted by the artificial
cloth petals at (a). Although the color is not precisely
that of a cotton blossom, several bees gave evidence of
having perceived them. The texture, which is that of
coarse meshed cloth, is quite unlike that of cotton petals,
however, and may have been readily perceived as un-
real by the bees. The few inspections were without
doubt invited by the color of the artificial petals, since
no odors could be considered operative unless of a repel-
lent nature.
Experiment No. 5—July 26. Time of observation
one half hour, from 11:45 to 12:15 a.m. Blossoms in the
triangular arrangement with the following changes:
At (a) five cotton petals (normal number) are care-
lessly placed over the artificial cloth petals.
At (b) control. Same blossom entire as in the pre-
ceding experiments.
At (c) petals alone as in the preceding experiments.
DATA FOR EXPERIMENT No. 5
3 á Distribution by Species g Distribution by Species
a £ s
s +. i = F i
ei; Ele) eann tF T:
3 8 = E m] o| 58| a $ 7 ote P
~ iA 22 z S p S| Z| 25
= a 3 Gs 2 = S $ a ke
g 3 = a 16189 3 S = 3 |8| 8/3
Eie [g| a Re) al a Ble
(a) 48 45 3 1
b) 44 43 1
(e) 50 | 48 1 1
614 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
It is now evident that all the blossoms serve equally
well to invite inspection. It is plainly indicated that the
artificial cloth petals could have possessed little or no
repellent odor, although they received very few inspec-
tions in the experiment just preceding. It is not improb-
able that the different texture of the material revealed
the artificial nature of the cloth petals to the bees.
Experiment No. 6.—July 27. Day cloudy, showery in
forenoon, thus greatly interfering with frequency of
visits. Blossoms in the triangular arrangement.
At (a) control. A normal blossom pinned in position.
At (b) control. A normal blossom growing in situ.
At (c) a single petal pinned to a stem.
Observations were begun at 9:00 a.m., but rain inter-
vened at 9:15. A single inspection was recorded for (c).
Observations were again begun at 10:25, lasting for
one half hour until 11:05. The blossoms were arranged
in the triangle as follows:
At (a) control. A normal cotton blossom pinned in
position. |
At (b) control. A normal cotton blossom growing in
situ.
At (c) a half opened bud simulated by pinning normal
petals together, the calyx being represented by a por-
tion of a green cotton leaf carefully wrapped around
the base. In this way it was absolutely certain that no
unaccustomed odors were introduced. This bud-like ar-
rangement prevented all chances of examination of the
inner details by bees until they had actually squeezed
down between the petals.
DATA FOR EXPERIMENT No. 6
ea Distribution by Species Fa Distribution by Species
See E S
So n S í | a i m
E i Fiir |e) fre ig ais
s | 3 E a] 3 5 š E |AIM] Za
a E ties ae tS 3 s Lye
ee ee A elol £ = z = o| 2] «wm
ie i g BRS ite es Ne a
i. etm |e imal E eo) | [Rae
ØF 24 | 0
No. 538] THE BEHAVIOR OF BEES 615
A record of the kind of bees was not accurately kept,
but species of Melissodes were almost the only visitors.
The blossom at (b) was less visible than those at (a)
or (c), both of which were in plain view of each other.
The blossom at (b) was not visible either from (a) or
(c), so that many bees which inspected (a) and (c) fre-
quently failed to perceive (b).
Experiment No. 7—July 27. Period of observations
one half hour from 11:08 to 11:38. Blossoms in the previ-
ous triangular arrangement changed as follows:
(a) Normal blossom used in the preceding experiment
concealed by fastening the surrounding leaves in such
a manner that the blossom would be visible only by bees
passing directly over it.
(b) Control. Normal blossom growing in situ.
(c) Artificially constructed bud as used in latter half
of experiment 6.
The inspections were as follows:
(a) Received a single inspection from a bee flying
directly over.
(b) Received 12 inspections, two of these being en-
trances.
(c) Received 40 inspections, none being entrances.
Experiment 7 differs from experiment 6 in no partic-
ular whatever except in the change which has rendered
the blossom at (a) invisible, except from a certain posi-
tion. The number of inspections at (b) and (c) re-
mained practically constant for each half-hour period.
It is interesting to note, however, that (a), receiving 48
inspections in experiment 6, received but a single inspec-
tion in experiment 7. A change in surroundings which
makes a blossom less visible to the visual sense of bee
visitors at once decreases the number of inspections.
| Experiment No. 8—July 27. Time of observations
ten minutes from 11:38 to 11:48 a.m. Blossoms in the
triangular arrangement, with no change whatever from
the preceding experiment except in making the blossom
616 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von XLV
at (a) again as visible as in experiment 7 by pushing
aside the surrounding leaves.
(a) Is inspected 15 times, including one entrance.
(b) Is inspected 7 times, including two entrances.
(c) Is inspected 13 times with no entrances.
The blossom at (a) has now become as attractive to
the bees as those at (b) and (c) which serve as controls.
Experiment No. 9.—July 27. Period of observation
15 minutes, from 10:50 a.m. until 12:05 p.m. Triangular
arrangement as in preceding experiments with the fol-
lowing changes:
(a) Petals of (a) in experiment 8 are removed and
artificial crêpe paper petals of nearly the same color are
substituted.
(b) Artificial blossoms growing in situ as a control.
(c) Artificial floral structure used at (c) in experi-
ments 7 and 8.
(a) Receives only two inspections.
(b) Receives 16 inspections, including two entrances.
(c) Receives 3 inspections, including one entrance.
The artificial nature of the paper petals at (a) was
at once perceived by the bees in their passing flights.
The few inspections noted were indicated by a momen-
tary pause in flight quite unlike the more prolonged
hovering movements over the blossom at (c).
Experiment No. 10—July 27. Period of observations
20 minutes, from 12:05 p.m. to 12:25 p.m. The same tri-
angular arrangement was used as before. The only
change from experiments 8 or 9 consisted in placing three
real cotton petals carelessly upon the paper petals at (a)
in such a way that only part of the paper petals was con-
cealed. Blossoms (b) and (c) were left unchanged.
(a) Receives 11 inspections.
(b) Receives 7 inspections, including one entrance.
(c) Receives 21 inspections.
Passing bees were at once led to inspect the real petals
placed at (a), although these very imperfectly covered
_ the artificial paper petals beneath. No very decided re-
No. 538] THE BEHAVIOR OF BEES 617
pellent odors can be held to reside in the artificial paper
petals which failed to attract passing bees when used
alone.
Experiment No. 11.—July 27. Observations for this .
experiment continued 10 minutes, from 1:26 to 1:36 p.m.
The triangular arrangement was used.
At (a) a single real cotton-blossom petal is pinned to
a stem.
At (b) a cotton bud and calyx simulated by neatly
wrapping a portion of a cotton leaf around the base of
five real petals rolled together.
At (c) a normal open cotton blossom growing in situ
as a control.
DATA FOR EXPERIMENT No. 11
D am OT = a m
E) Z | Distribution by Species s Distribution by Species
a S So
~ . | a Í
= ; ee be baeri g z S S tel sis
Pete a ee.
pej S N } a:
Smee) Eee ae ee a cl eres
2} 3/3) 2} Fe 24] 314) 2 843) 34
- 1s feo ee eee > > @ te | sigts
a a = 3 pa & | = 5 lah es ond es
ees | | | —
@ 12 | 2 bode bees
6 | 8 | 8 ae |
() | 3 3 | | |
The single petal at (a) is sufficient to invite the in-
spection of passing bees, although there is little more
than a fraction remaining of the size and color of a
normal open cotton blossom. The writer has observed
that a partly opened bud, as represented at (c), appears
to invite more frequent inspection and entrance than a
fully expanded blossom which has been much oftener
entered by bees. It is possible that bees in their en-
trances leave traces of odors which are detected by later
visitors, causing them to pass on in search of fresher
blossoms. ;
Experiment No. 12—July 27. Period of observations
one half hour, from 1:36 to 2:06 p.m. In this test, which
practically duplicates experiment 11, two blossoms were
used in the same row and on plants about three feet
apart.
618 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
At (a) a single petal was pinned to a stem.
At (b) control. A normal cotton blossom in situ as
grown. :
The single petal at (a) received 16 inspections, some
of which were very thorough, as a number of bees ap-
peared to examine the petal intently from all sides. The
control blossom at (b) received 26 inspections, including
8 entrances within. In both cases the visiting bees were
all species of Melissodes.
Experiment No. 13.—July 27. Period of observations
one half hour, beginning at 2:06 p.m. and ending at 2:36
P.M. Two blossoms were arranged in the same row as in
the preceding experiment.
At (a) a perfect cotton blossom was pinned in the
same relative position as the blossom at (b).
At (b) control. A perfect cotton blossom growing in
situ.
The blossom at (a) received 7 inspections, including
one entrance. The blossom at (b) received 12 inspections,
including 5 entrances. Species of Melissodes were the
only visitors. '
Experiment No. 14.—July 28. Time of observations
one half hour, from 9:15 to 9:45 a.m. Three blossoms
were arranged on three consecutive plants in the same
row. Throughout this series of experiments for July
28, these positions were unchanged. See the diagram.
At (a) control. A perfect cotton blossom pinned in
position.
At (b) large blossom of a wild convolvulus (white
with a deep purple throat) was pinned in position.
DATA FOR EXPERIMENT No. 14
Distribution by Species
© A Distribution by Species 3
ee i
g 3 ; a :
— Q -1 a n a mn co
eS Tisina: EF S ae:
w n $ = am) i) 3 g 3 2 ‘Sn
pa j = = Be ae a E 3 biS E
ES WG ae ee a ee ee ee
5 = = si S S 3 = Biel E
& g = R | 21 a!5 a S 5 al p
6) | B] L 1
(b) 14 12 2 0
(c) 14 "AL
No. 538] THE BEHAVIOR OF BEES 619
At (c) control. A perfect cotton blossom pinned in
position.
Although strikingly unlike a cotton blossom in color
and general appearance, the convolvulus blossom at-
tracts attention quite as often. It is hardly to be ex-
pected that the bees would enter it as frequently as a
cotton blossom, if at all, since it is a well-known habit of
many bees to confine their visits pretty constantly at
any one time to blossoms of the same species of plant.
Especially has this been shown true for the honey bee
by Hermann Miiller and others. M. H. Mendleson, of
California, affords an instance where a single colony out
of 200 visited solely mustard flowers, while the rest
gathered from sage blossoms alone.?
Experiment No. 15.—July 28. Time of observation
one half hour, from 9:45 to 10:15 a.m. Blossoms ar-
ranged in the same row as before with the following
changes:
At (a) petals removed from the blossoms of preced-
ing experiment. |
At (b) same white convolvulus blossom used in the
preceding experiment.
At (c) control. Same cotton blossom of preceding
experiment pinned in position.
DATA FOR EXPERIMENT No. 15
= : Distribution by Species | g Distribution by Species
o9
s 3 2 R ;
pai 5 2 ù% mn g A = e; o
ETETE AIT rE E N
5 s Š Š A a Š § alsa
Sig | 3 s | Sfel ea) 1 3 1 rn
= S 3 3 SSF S Š 2 18181 3
& | R| 2 1.8 | Pia a | § | & |) a] 2
(a) 0 | 4
() | 19 | 17 2 | 0 |
() | 20 | 20 0 | | x
By the removal of the petals of a cotton blossom as at
(a), the blossom no longer advertised itself to the atten-
tion of bees, as has been demonstrated in previous ex-
periments. In the present test, although the white con-
* Mendleson, M. H., ‘‘Gleanings in Bee Culture,’’ October, 1908, 36.
620 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
volvulus blossom had completely wilted and collapsed,
its noticeable color alone continued to invite inspection
by passing bees quite as often as the control blossoms
at (c).
Experiment No. 16.—July 28. Period of observation
one half hour, from 10:15 to 10:45 a.m. The three points
in the preceding experiment were used as follows:
At (a) a single cotton petal was placed on the
blossom of the preceding experiment, from which all
the petals had been removed.
At (b) a single cotton petal was loosely pinned to a
stem.
At (c) control. A normal cotton blossom pinned in a
conspicuous position.
The blossom at (a) receives 8 inspections.
The petal at (b) receives 9 inspections.
The normal blossom at (c) receives 27 inspections
with no entrances. All visitors were Melissodes, except
a small bee which inspected (c).
As the blossom at (c) was conspicuous from all sides,
the writer judged that this fact accounted for the much
greater number of inspections given this blossom, since
(a) and (b) were visible almost wholly from one side
only. In the next experiment this question was further
tested.
Experiment No. 17.—July 28. Period of observation
one half hour, from 10:45 to 11:15 a.m. In this experi-
ment the only changes from the preceding consisted in
an interchange of material.
DATA FOR EXPERIMENT No, 17
2 a Distribution by Species a Distribution by Species
=) 3 g i a
3 pej A | | a : !
eli fii pis ts th 8. diag
ey oe 3 Sa ae eee lies Meee |
i 4 ieS 8s 3 | 2 tele i
siaii S OG UE le ee ee ge
2\/8|818 [8iai5 | 6 | § | & lelals
raii Å | | EN ELD A
(a) 8 8 | 0 |
@) | 22 | 21 xa 0
() | 27 | 25 a eee |
No. 538] THE BEHAVIOR OF BEES 621
At (a) single detached petal pinned to leaf stem.
At (b) control. Normal cotton blossom pinned in
position.
At (c) the cotton blossom with its single replaced
petal at (a) in preceding experiment.
In this experiment the more exposed position (c) ap-
pears to be of considerable advantage to a blossom lo-
cated here, even though its normal appearance is greatly
changed by mutilation. The general form and appear-
ance of a cotton blossom, as a whole, does not appear to
play a very important rôle in initiating the procedure
of inspection by passing bees, since a single detached
petal receives quite as many inspections as a normal
blossom.
Experiment No. 18.—July 29. Observations continued
one hour, from 8:20 to 9:20 a.m. In this experiment
three blossoms were used, as in previous experiments,
and arranged on consecutive plants in the same row.
A blossom of an Asiatie cotton (Hawasaki) was com-
pared with two ordinary American upland blossoms as
controls.
(a) control. Normal American upland blossom pinned
in position. ;
(b) Hawasaki blossom entire pinned in position.
(c) control. Normal American upland blossom pinned
in position.
DATA FOR EXPERIMENT No. 18
= | 2 | Distribution by Species | z Distribution by Species
z S | 9 '
3 2 Ba ae | | a er hase |
E mo Kd 3 = l 9 s?
a krri el tle HEE
B E 3 E || e| Zs a oe ee $ o| 38
an 3 Š wiat § N Eon s > 3| og
E 3 | 4 S | | 8 se | 3 a3 1613/3"
= honed . {=} © = a
LRS 8] RAP | & ERMES
iii Sarees | | | | | !
(a) | 20 | 19 io ad | | | |
Oy) I4 | 12 1 1 0 | | |
(c) | 29 | 24 pause. 2 | | L jij
Experiment No. 19—July 29. Observations con-
tinued one half hour, from 9:25 to 9:55 a.m.
622 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
(a) Control. Normal American upland blossom pinned
in position.
(b) Control. Normal American upland blossom pinned
in position.
(c) Hawasaki blossom entire (af b) in last experi-
ment.
DATA FOR EXPERIMENT No. 19
å 4 Distribution by Species 2 Distribution by Species
S S ò
==) 3S k =I 3 |
rie Baltes Ones Ai he ee ee ee e
eB | 8 8 E IA R Se | & s E AIM] 3s
Qa lam S = es ag = 3 >! 2 Es
egos Pe eat ee tego & Pee ee
= > = 5 © ‘a © e S Eo = =
À £ = § |Rlals į = a | Rl alo
(a) | 11 8 0 |
(b) 0 7 1 1 |
(c) 2 |
Experiment No. 20—July 29. Observations con-
tinued one half hour, from 10:50 to 11:20 a.m.. Three
blossoms arranged in the same row as for previous ex-
periments.
(a) Control. Normal American upland blossom pinned
in position.
(b) Hawasaki blossom entire at (c) in experiment 19.
(ce) Control. Normal American upland blossom pinned
in position.
DATA FOR EXPERIMENT No. 20
A a Distribution by Species 2 Distribution by Species
re S o SOE
lon : 2 2 = a : 2 n ke]
Sa $ ie oe ae ae Bo) Big +i ge
a9 =| G g = Se | Š = = Bm
Che 4 s = mi 2| dE m Š 2 hi ej 8s
an a S a e
na = 2 o = > os 2 o ya
a e | & a E |e 1 Ra S
(a) 20 8 1 1 0 3 1
(b) 10 8 2
(c) 16 6 Lid 8 1
REPRODUCTION IN THE BROWN RAT (MUS
NORWEGICUS)
NEWTON MILLER
CLARK UNIVERSITY, WORCESTER, MASS.
1 Mirodutton oon ov n.d Ns 0 METRE RS Vcd beak DAE LEE PORN oe 623
By Apparatus ss bn ORR E EGG iy os we a Fk ee ee AAS 623
S Raproduction s.. aran aaa ho eek a i es ee hes 624
Oe OES irrena rere eee eis oe r eee Pe Ao ye 625
bi Period. of Gestation ceri vie ck oak eee ca ones anes a= oe 626
C. Mating Habits 6s ee a I N ees 627
d. Eating the Young -nre eoe ve be coe nee eee oe aes eed 630
2. Care: of the: Young irii. Wik incense es Ce cas oe es a ee es 632
Di Growth Os Oe a eee ack pu wees oe dase 632
G- Conelasions iS. wy casa ee kd eke ona ken bd A E 635
In view of the fact that the brown rat is playing such
an important réle in the economic field and the medical
world at the present time, it is of interest if not of prac-
tical value to know the details of its reproduction. The
life history of this species as lived in its natural envi-
ronment is as yet imperfectly known. It was to bridge
this deficiency in our knowledge that data were obtained
on a number of rats kept in the laboratory from No-
vember 5, 1909, to December 8, 1910. My results may be
much different from those of natural conditions, yet I
am convinced that the results obtained are not radically
different from what actually takes place in nature where
shelter is good and food abundant.
Two sets of cages of four each were built. The first
consisted of revolving cages, a foot wide and eighteen
inches in diameter with nesting boxes, measuring
855 inches, suspended from the axles. These
cages were similar to those used by Slonaker. The sec-
ond set of cages were rectangular, measuring 24 X 24 X 8
inches. These were made of screening, three wires to
the inch. For the sake of cleanliness the cages were
suspended, as shown in Fig. 1. Newspapers were spread
623
624 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST Von XLV
beneath all the cages to catch the excrement and removed
as occasion demanded.
In all the cages, siphon watering troughs were used;
i. e., bottles held upright with their mouths dipping into
shallow dishes. Open vessels were objectionable because
rats drop their excrement as they climb about in the
cage, thus polluting the water.
Fic. 1. Showing the plan of the cages.
The experiment was started November 5, 1909, with
seven pairs of rats which had just been caught. For
convenience, each pair was numbered, the first four
being in the revolving cages and the other three in the
stationary. The pairs numbered 1, 2 and 5 were old
(adults), the females apparently having given birth
to young. The others were probably in their third to
sixth months and had not given birth.
Female No. 6, after giving birth to young on December
31, 1909, was severely injured by her mate. The wound
was not yet healed September 12, 1910, when she was
killed, at which time she was found pregnant. The fol-
lowing table is the reproductive record of the other six
pairs.
No. 538] REPRODUCTION IN THE BROWN RAT 625
REPRODUCTIVE RECORD. FIRST GENERATION
= je ie DO 2
SOnlodioOg| © |S
D: ie] 2l, =
Feb. 4, 1910 | 1] 1 All eaten February 5. Male not taken away.
Feb. 26,1910 | 7 | 2 All dead-part eaten February 28. Male
way Febru
Feb. 27, 1910 | 1 | 3/11] 5 | 6 ale taken aar February 27.
Mch. 14, 1910 2| 4 All dead July 21. Male Ls taken away.
ch. 22, 1910/3 | 5 Male taken away Marc
Mch. 22, 1910 |4 | 6| 7| 4
REE E os Ge All dead April 10.
May 4, 1910 li a All eaten May 9.
May 16, 1910 |2] 9
May 22, 1910 | 3 |10
May 22, 1910 | 1 |11| 12| 4 | 8 | Male not removed.
June 1, 1910 | 7 |12 a oram June 3. Male removed before
June 4, 1910 | 5/18 an eaten June 4. Male removed before
June 30, 1910 | 7 | 14 All jord, July 6. Male removed before
irth. ;
July 23, 1910 | 7 |15 All dead July 24. Male removed before
birth.
Aug. 24, 1910 | 4 |16 All eaten August 27. Male not removed be-
fore birth.
Sept. 3, 1910 | 5 |17
Sept. 5, 1910 |7 |18|11| 4 | 7 | Male removed before birth.”
Sept. 8, 1910 | 2 |19/10 All meee espamegioas 29. Male removed be-
fo
Sept. 20, 1910 |.1 | 20 Four still alive. Male removed before birth.
Sept. 20, 1910 | 3 |21|10| 6 | 4 | Ninestill alive. Male removed before birth.
Sept. 26, 1910 | 4 | 22 All eate removed before birth.
Sept. 26, 1910 | 5 | 23 All eaten ale not removed before birth
Oct. 17, 1910 | 2 | 24 All eaten. Male not removed before birth
- 20,1910 | 5 | 25 All eaten. Male removed before birth.
Nov. 26, 1910 | 4 | 26 All eaten. Male removed before birth.
Nov. 26, 1910 | 7 | 27 Part eaten. Male removed before birth.
REPRODUCTIVE RECORD. SECOND GENERATION
Females of Litter No. 11
ep, | es bo =
Hoo | SS E eis
~~ Female 2333 S £
Oct. 15, 1910. 11-2 | 28 All eaten. Male removed.
Oct. 17, a 11-5 29 All eaten. Male removed
Oct. 24 1 910. 11-6 30; 9 art eaten — others oved.
: Male remov
The works of Lantz and Boelter lead us to infer that
the brown rat breeds the whole year round. My rats
gave birth to young from February to December, inclu-
sive, and, since they were seen mating in November, De-
626 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
cember and January, it is safe to say that they produce
young in January, also, which gives their breeding
period as the whole year.
The gestation period was found to be 234 to 254 days,
counting from the time of the first copulation. If 234
days is the shortest time, then females Nos. 1 and 7
must have mated on February 4 and June 30, respec-
tively, the days they gave birth and also ate their young.
Frequently a female eats her young and when she
does so, she may breed immediately. It is seen from
the table that female No. 7, which had the habit of de-
vouring her young, gave birth to seven litters at inter-
vals of about thirty days; i. e., taking February 2 as the
date of conception for her first offspring, she produced,
seven litters in seven months.
If the young are reared, a second litter may be pro-
duced in two months. Some do not give birth so soon,
which may be due, largely to the fact that a female is
not sure of conceiving at any given copulation. Daniel’s
experiment with white mice seems to have some bearing
on this point. He found that a female suckling a large
litter, carried the second longer, as much as ten days
over the average gestation time. According to my data,
the brown rat does not conceive before the last ten days
of the lactation period, which should not have so marked
an effect on the gestation period as is found in the case
of the white mouse, which becomes pregnant as soon as
a litter is born.
The number of young in the eight litters which I was
able to count varied from seven to twelve, with an aver-
age of 10.5. Boelter quotes Brehm as recording a litter
of twenty-one. Lantz gives two cases where seventeen
embryos were found in one female and nineteen in
another. He also thinks that for temperate regions the
average litter is not under ten. From the data at hand,
we can conclude that a pair of adult rats is capable of
rearing fifty to sixty young per year. Zuschlag’s theo-
retical table, as quoted by Boelter, gives sixty-four as
No. 538] REPRODUCTION IN THE BROWN RAT 627
the possible number of young at the end of the year, the
product of a single pair. In this table Zuschlag assumes
eight to be the average number of young per litter, and
eight litters per year to be the product of a single pair.
On this basis the number of offspring at the end of the
second and succeeding years is far in excess to the num-
ber computed on experimental data.
Rats begin mating, as a usual thing, about five o’clock
P.M., and to obtain the period of gestation, males were
placed with the females every day at this hour. If a
female was in heat, she was removed to a separate cage
with one to three males. At first females were left with
the males not more than two hours, in which time many
copulations had taken place, but in no case did a preg-
nancy result. Later, they were left with the males
twelve to fifteen hours, and even then, failures to be-
come pregnant far outnumbered the pregnancies.
I have not observed a single case of a female mating
with a male smaller than herself. It is not common for
an old female, even when in heat, to chase a young male
about the cage as though he were a female, not letting
him come near her. This same female, if placed with
a larger male, which could boss her, would mate with
him at once without any opposition. Mating in this case
seems to be, to some extent, dependent upon the domi-
nating ability of the male.
The number of coitions during a single period of heat
is, apparently, great. In one case a female, placed with
four males, mated with them in such rapid succession
that fifty attempted coitions per half hour would be a
conservative estimate. It is impossible to say how many
of these attempts were successful, because the rat re-
quires such a short time (four seconds being a long
time) to perform the act, thereby making the details of
the process difficult of observation.
The following table is a month’s record of seven fe- —
males kept to determine the frequency of the mating
periods. Such periods are indicated by an X. It is
XLV
d :
Z
NN
E yuejuĝojiq | X x $ =x
fe que suaig - x X x L'N
O ‘Jolaıd-u oN x x x x 8 ON
x ‘3 |ad-ujoN | X x x xX GIL ON
i xX ‘3əa|d-ujoy X 1x F-1L ON
a quBluse tg | 4 PIM
x X | TI OK
S a a al alm sermo els|t|o|o|»]|e]|z]|r]1e]|o 6g | 92 | zz |o |s | ve | ez | ex |t | oc | or sr j| er
heat
= JOquiaaon 1aqo~O
x WIV
S
5i
628
No. 538] REPRODUCTION IN THE BROWN RAT 629
seen that only one pregnancy occurred as a result of
each six times of mating. The table indicates, also,
either that the mating periods come irregularly, or that
the females come in heat about every five days.
I am convinced that odor is the final test for sex rec-
ognition. When rats are placed together, the males as-
sume an aggressive attitude and fight all those that op-
pose them. The females may, usually do, for a little
while, resist the males; but they soon yield. They then
lie on their backs entirely passive, while the males nose
them about the head and smell of their genital organs.
This attitude is frequently taken by pregnant females.
The males in such cases have shown their superiority
and the females recognize it. From now on there is little
fighting on the part of the males, and afterwards they
will often permit themselves to be severely punished by
the females without injuring them. Copulation does
not usually follow the above proceedings.
When males meet, there is a battle royal until one is
recognized victor. The conquered, then, tries to elude
the stronger, and will not submit to be smelt of as a
female. Often males smell of each other, probably de-
termining one another’s sex, before beginning the fight.
I am sure there is no sex recognition when the fight is
begun at once, for the females are treated in the same
way.
There is very little courtship among the rats. The
male is absolutely silent and the female almost so during
the period of heat. A pair which had been together for
several months, were seen to arouse from their sleep at
- five-thirty o’clock, p.m., and begin copulating at once
without any preliminaries at all. They had not mated
previously during the day.
When a female resists the advances of the male, she
does so by fighting him away, as shown in Fig. 2, or by
kicking him away with her hind foot; or she may lie on
her back, as previously described. On the other hand, a
~ female in full heat is the more active of the two. In one
630 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von XLV
instance, she was seen to clasp the male. If he is not ag-
gressive, she throws herself before him in a crouching
position, a procedure which she repeats until he takes
notice of her. Again, she may strike his head, as though
fighting, until he follows her. A female in full heat is
much more active and less pugnacious than at other
times.
Fic. 2. Rats in a fighting attitude.
We find the anomaly of mammals eating their young
carried to an extreme in the case of brown rats kept in
confinement. My records show a large per cent. eaten,
almost fifty, which has much to do with the number of
litters per year, consequently the number of young.
This infanticide has usually been attributed to the male,
but the young are eaten whether the male is or is not
No. 538] REPRODUCTION IN THE BROWN RAT 631
present at the time they are born, which throws the
blame on the female. In fact, I have no direct evidence
against the male.
The young, when eaten, may be devoured at birth or
any time within the next four days. It has been sug-
gested—I think with a little basis for the statement—
that disturbing the parents causes them to eat their
young. W. T. Hornaday, in a letter, and Bostock state
that the large carnivora are kept from all disturbing
influences at and about the time they are giving birth.
In rare cases some species devour their young if dis-
turbed, but more frequently the young are deserted.
My rats were in a room which was kept locked and free
from any disturbing influences except my morning visits.
Frequently, females by themselves, which built their
nests in closed boxes, have had their young and eaten
them between my visits. In such cases these females
could not have been disturbed. On the other hand, I
have taken the young from the nests, weighed them, and
even handled them without the mother injuring them
when replaced.
Another suggestion is that the rats have not had
enough flesh diet and, when the young are born, eat
them to satisfy their desire for meat. Here again I
think there is no truth, provided plenty of grain and
vegetables are accessible. My rats have eaten their
young when on a meat-grain-vegetable diet, as well as
when on a grain-vegetable allowance.
Dr. Slonaker suggests that the same motive, which
leads the rats to eat their dead under natural conditions,
might also cause them to eat their helpless young.
This is in accord with the rat’s habit of killing off its
weak,
One of the reasons for eating the young, I think, might
be found in the habit that mammals have of thoroughly
licking their young, and in many cases eating the embry-
onic membranes, even among the herbivorous animals.
It seems but a little step from the eating of the placenta
to the devouring of the young. There may be some
632 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
truth in all these theories, but I doubt if the principal
cause has yet been suggested.
CARE OF THE YOUNG
Before the young are born, the female builds a nest as
elaborate as the means at hand will permit. Almost
any sheltered nook about buildings is a suitable nesting
place for the brown rat. On the farm, in addition to
breeding about buildings, it digs its burrows in the field
and nests in old straw stacks and grain still in the shock.
The nest consists for the most part of a coarse sub-
stance such as straw or corn husks, with a lining of a
softer material, especially feathers when obtainable.
Blue found that where rats use run-ways, they nest in
a branch leading off from the main course. This branch
is in the form of a Y with the nest in one arm and a
storehouse in the other.
The young at birth are entirely helpless. The mother
gets them all together and then huddles over them for
hours at a time. She never lies on her side to let the
young suck; she always crouches over them while the
young lie on their sides or backs to get hold of the teats.
Usually all the young nurse at the same time, and a
litter of twelve, at about weaning time, almost holds the
female off her feet while they suck.
The female can easily be induced to move her young
elsewhere by disturbing the nest. The young only a few
days old are caught around the body by the mother, but
if they are a week or so old, she takes hold of them by
the skin. In the latter case they are carried much as a
kitten is carried by its mother.
In the laboratory the female spends most of her time
with the young; some even carry all their food into the
nests. Taking food into the nest is a common habit of
the rat and must not be considered as a trait peculiar to
females with young.
GROWTH
The young at birth weigh on an average 6.4 grams.
The males are a little the larger, measuring in body
No. 5388] REPRODUCTION IN THE BROWN RAT 633
length 52 mm. as compared with 49 mm. for the females.
They also weigh more, and by the end of the second
week are as much as two grams heavier.
Very little change is noted in the appearance of the
young the first two days, save a gain in size and strength.
On the third day a change in color can be detected. The
flesh tint is being replaced by a darker hue with a de-
cided tinge of blue on the distal portion of the tail.
Curiously enough, the tail is the first to show any marked
change of color. On the fourth day, the tail is still
darker and the flesh color of the dorsal parts has been
replaced by a gray with a touch of blue. Up to this time,
no hair is noticed except the vibrisse. By the end of
the week the body is covered with a thin coat of very
fine hair, which gives a delicate bluish-brown color. The
coloring of the legs begin about this time with the palms
of the feet, the joints of the toes and legs turning a
bluish tint. The tail, in the meantime, has darkened al-
most to the base and the nose turned nearly black. On
the eighth or ninth day, the gray of the adult is noticed
on the back of the head and neck, and with this as a
center, it spreads until about the eighteenth day, when
the whole color is that of the adult with the exception
that it is darker and softer.
The following is a diary of litter No. 18 for the first
twenty-five days. The weights given are the averages
for the whole litter.
Day Wt. Grams Notes
1 6.1 Flesh color; blind; ears closed; helpless.
2 6.4 Able to right themselves if turned over.
3 7.2 Color changing to bluish tint on the dorsal parts; tail color-
ing from the distal end; no hair except vibrisse.
4 8.1 Flesh color limited to the ventral parts; creeping about in
t
he nest.
5 9.0 Color a bluish-brown on the back and sides.
6 9.8
ESM
So 416 Sparsely covered with short fine hair.
9 123 Faint brownish tinge on the back of the head and neck; tail
a dull blue except about 4 mm. at its base; joints of the
feet and legs, also the palms of the hind feet, blue;
under parts, pinkish.
634 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vot XLV
10 = 13.0 Dorsal Re a delicate coin nose, almost black; incisors
appear in the upper jaw
Ft 138 Heels Gat black; rest of wiag the same as yesterday;
one seen sitting up and washing its face
12 14.8 Lower incisors appear (all the incisors appear on the same
day in some cases; usually the lower appear a day later
than upper).
13 15.1 All the dorsal parts are brown.
10 PTY Eyes beginning to open; one young attempted to bite me.
Lt 18.8 All have their eyes open; color the same as that of the adults
except that it is darker and softer.
18 -19.8
19 202
20 BLO
21 209 Found the young hungry and when given a dog-biscuit, they
ate it greedily. It is probable that they began taking
solid food the first or second day after cutting their lower
incisors, and judging from their weights, yesterday was
the first day they did not have food they could eat
22. 23.0
23 239
24 24.9
25 25.9 From now on there is little change noticed except increase in
size. The young have grown rapidly from the first with-
out the initial loss of weight as found in human infants,
or even a marked retardation as found in guinea-pigs
by Minot.
During the sixth week the young are weaned. At this
time they weigh fifty to seventy grams, and are able to
take care of themselves, provided food is abundant. I
have seen a number of rats of about this age and size
wandering about, in or around farm buildings, appar-
ently, in a starved condition. Presumably, these had
just been weaned and were unable to find suitable food.
If food has been abundant the males, by the end of the
sixth month, weigh 230 to 290 grams while the females
weigh 170 to 240 grams. The male and female of one
of my pairs, kept throughout the year and which I
judged to be in their third month when caught, weigh
337 grams and 223 grams, respectively. My old male
No. 5 weighs 460 grams and my oldest female, 345 grams.
These data indicate that a rat does not reach its full
growth before the end of the eighteenth month.
No. 538] REPRODUCTION IN THE BROWN RAT 635
Sexual maturity is attained much sooner than full
growth. One female of litter No. 11 conceived on the day
she was four months old, hence giving birth to her first
young in her fifth month. The males are sexually mature
as soon as the females, and I have seen some indications
that they may be mature early in their fourth month.
CONCLUSIONS
: The brown rat breeds in every month ot the year.
2. The gestation period is 234 to 254 days.
3. The number of young per litter varies from six to
nineteeen with an average of between ten and eleven.
4. Five or six litters may be reared by a single pair in
a year.
5. Seven litters were born in seven months by one
female and, presumably, twelve would be produced in the
course of a year when all the young perish at birth.
6. There is very little courtship among the brown rats.
7. Odor is the primary factor in sex recognition; the
aggressiveness of the male is second.
8. Brown rats in captivity eat almost fifty per cent. of
their young at birth. Most of the young eaten, if not all,
are eaten by the females.
9. Full growth is attained not under eighteen months.
10. Sexual maturity is reached at least by the end of
the fourth month in both sexes.
REFERENCES
Blue, R., 08. The Underlying Principles of Anti-plague Measures. Cali-
fornia State Journal of Medicine, a Reprinted in ‘‘ Eradicating
lague from San Francisco,’’ 1909, p. >
Boelter, W. R., ’09. The Rat Problem, pp. . (note), 88.
Bostock, F. R., 04. The Training of Wild Animals, pp. 40, 50.
Daniel, J. F., ’10. Observations on the Period of Gestation in White Mice.
Journal of Smem Zoology, Vol. 9, No. 4, p. 868
Lantz, D. E., Natural pii of ra Rat. Publie Health and Marine
Hospital Service of U. S., pp.
Minot, C. S., ’08. The Problem fr ye Growth and Death, p. 94.
Slotmiee: J. R., 708. A Description of an Apparatus for Recording the
Activity of Small Mammals. Anatomical Record, June, Vol. 2, pp.
116-122.
SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION
DATA, DIALECTICS AND OTHER DIGRESSIONS
Some... persons vainly seek by dialectics and far-fetched arguments,
either to upset or establish things that are only to be founded on
anatomical demonstration, and believed on the evidence of the senses.
He who truly desires to be informed of the question in hand, and
whether the facts alleged be sensible, visible, or not, must be held bound
either to look for himself or to take on trust the conclusions to which
they have come who have looked; and indeed there is no higher method
‘of attaining to assurance and certainty—William Harvey, Second Dis-
quisition to John Riolon, Jun.
To THE EDITOR OF THE AMERICAN NATURALIST:
My reasons for asking you to publish the above from your Sep-
tember, 1911, issue are two: the text is excellent; the sermon is
wide of the mark.
The text, the reader will have noted, heads a latest contribu-
tion to our knowledge of egg production in the domestic fowl*
which Dr. Pearl has been prevailed upon to write up by the con-
viction that certain criticisms? ‘‘rest on either a misconception
of what our results really are, or else a lack of understanding of
the real facts regarding certain of the biological points in-
volved.’’ For his ‘‘endeavor, if possible, to remedy this defect in
some degree at least’’ those biologists who are thereby instructed
in matters of fact will doubtless be grateful.
The obvious implication of Dr. Pearl’s quotation from Harvey
and of his concluding remarks is that my arguments concerning
the genotype concept are of a purely scholastic and ‘‘far-
fetched’’ order.
In consideration of these implications and in justice to my
paper which appeared in your June number may I call your
readers’ attention to the following points?
First. I certainly did not ‘‘. . . seek by dialectics and far-
fetched arguments, . . . to upset . . . things that are only to
* Pearl, R., ‘‘ Biometric Arguments —* the Genotype Concept,’’
AMER. NAT., Vol. 45, pp. 561-566, 1911
2 Harris, x Arthur, ‘‘The Biometric “Proof of the Pure Line Theory,’’
moe NAT., Vol. 45, pp. 346-363, 1911
636
No. 538] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 637
be . . . believed on the evidence of the senses.’ Unfortunately
for Pearl’s excellent-in-itself quotation, the genotype theory is
not a pickled specimen concerning the structure of which all the
anatomists who can crowd around the table will agree. Quite
to the contrary, it is a far-reaching generalization of the kind
which should not be accepted until it has been shown not only to
describe and epitomize the results of great series of actually ob-
served facts but to stand every test which can reasonably be ap-
plied to it. A careful examination of all the pure line literature
known to me had convinced me that in the enthusiasm for the
new theory the elementary principles of scientific reasoning were
often ignored and matters of plain common sense overlooked. I
had frequently found biologists enthusiastically supporting the
popular theory without knowing what its essential implications
are. It seemed useful, therefore, to ‘‘state the fundamental prob-
lems of the pure line theory as they appear to the biometrician’
and to call attention to some of the weak points in arguments in
its support. Judging from some of the vagaries encountered in
the genotypic literature since then, I fear that my plea for more
caution, less assumption and less reasoning in circles in our
theorizing about ‘‘sensible, visible’’ facts was rather wasted
ort
Second. My paper was written before Pearl’s preliminary
publication of the results of individual pedigrees in the same
number of the AMERICAN NATURALIST, and before his advance
statements concerning correlation in the paper just issued. If
new and pertinent facts prove that my views were wrong the
views will be discarded. When Dr. Pearl has given us all the
data and not adumbrations merely—when all the cards are down,
face up on the table—it will be time for a eritic to show reasons
for differences of opinion or to admit that he was wrong. Until
that time it seems foolish—in fact dangerously near dialectics—
to squander in argument space that might be used to publish
tables of data. In passing, I must remind the reader that our
present sore need is not possible illustrations of the genotype
theory if valid but critical evidence® for or against it.
è Very unfortunately Pearl’s sentence, ‘‘So far as concern
sonal opinion of the critical value of the work done in this orator no
discussion will be entered upon by the present writer’? cuts tw o ways.
Some of those who have not read what I really said will conclude that
T-
638 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vö XLV ©
Third. Insinuations concerning dialectics may perhaps justify
a digression concerning data. During the past five or six years
some 100,000 countings, weighings, measurements, ete., bearing
directly on the problem of pure lines in garden beans—the
species on which Johannsen based his studies—have accumulated
in my notes. These data have taught me how idle it is to discuss
the pure line problem without the most refined biometric analysis
of large masses of data. Such analysis necessarily proceeds with
disheartening slowness. But I have been able to see no advan-
tage in dragging this material through a long series of prelimi-
nary papers necessarily based upon uncompleted work. When
the data are all in, and arranged in an orderly manner they will
be honestly set forth as ‘‘an accumulation of plain, unadorned
facts, available to any one’s inspection.’’
J. ARTHUR HARRIS.
COLD SPRING HARBOR,
September 15, 1911.
actually. or tacitly—and quite unfairly—I ar rew in question the accuracy
il Pea
or trustworthiness of the observations. Others will do Dr. rl the in-
J e of thinking that if a criticism was made there was probably some
ustification for it. Both will be quite wrong. ve different places I
‘‘The work of Pearl and Surface with poultry and maize seems to me to
have no critical bearing on the pure line problem.’’ Critical bearing which
I wrote seems to me to convey a meaning quite different from critical value
which Dr. Pearl writes. A judge might recognize the critical value of an
expert’s observations and yet fail to see that his testimony had any eritical
bearing in a case
NOTES AND LITERATURE
DARWINISM AND HUMAN LIFE
PROFESSOR JAMES ARTHUR THOMSON’s recent! book under the
title of ‘‘Darwinism and Human Life’’ is most attractive read-
ing. Professor Thomson thinks independently and writes fasci-
natingly. He gives even the most familiar of subjects new color
and atmosphere.
The matter of the book was given in 1909 as the ‘South
African Lectures,’’ whose ‘‘chief aim was to explain the gist of
Darwinism.’’ An endeavor was made to add to the necessarily
general and somewhat familiar content of the lectures, sugges-
tions of how ‘‘ Darwinism a every-day life, in farm and
garden, in city and empire.’
e Darwinian reader interested by this prospect of finding
his old wine put into new bottles runs rapidly through the
chapters with the familiar headings of What we owe to Darwin,
The Web of Life, The Struggle for Existence, The Raw Materials
of Progress, Facts of Inheritance and Selection: Organic and
Social, nosing for Darwinism and Human Life. And he finds
himself rather disappointed at first, for he does not discover as
much of the practical interlocking of Darwinism and human
affairs as perhaps he felt justified in expecting. But in the last
chapter he does find it more obviously and in more abundance
than elsewhere and he begins really to read. And lo, when he
stops reading he finds that he has read the book, all of it,
backwards! And is very glad he has. At any rate, all this is
what I did.
Professor Thomson is a good selectionist; though not a bad
one; that is, not one who has an all other possible evolution
factors—phobia. However, Darwinism for him rests on, or is,
mostly selection. And it is the possible play of selection in
human life, its play among individuals, among societies and
among races, on which most of his direct application of evolu-
tion knowledge to human affair rests. Hence organic selection, |
social selection, eugenics, selection of Utopias, reversed human
1 Thomson, J. A., ‘‘ Darwinism and Human Life,’’ 245 pp., frontispiece
(Charles Darwin), 1910, H. Holt & Co., New Yo
— 639
640 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
selection, and the like, are the subjects of his more concrete
‘‘Darwinism and Human Life” paragraphs. But Professor
Thomson recognizes the broader aspect of his subject. He sees
that all of Darwinism, in its very broadest sense, has interrela-
tion with all of human doing and becoming. And it is this
recognition, and the constant suggestion of it, everywhere in his
discussion of the familiar subjects of the ‘‘gist of Darwinism,’’
that make even the practised Darwinian reader read with fresh
interest the whole of the book; even if he does happen, as your
reviewer did, to do it backward!
You te
STANFORD UNIVERSITY, CAL.
The American Journal of Science
Established by Benjamin Silliman in 1818
The Leading Scientific Journal in the United States
Devoted to the Physical and Natural Sciences, with special reference to
Physics, and Chemistry on the one hand, and to Geology and Mineralogy
on the other.
Editor: EDWARD S. DANA.
Associate Editors: Professor GEORGE L. GOODALE, JOHN TROWBRIDGE, W. G. FARLOW and WM. M. DAVIS
of Cambridge ; Professors A. E. VERRILL, HENRY 8. WILLIAMS and L. V. PIRSSON, of New
Haven; Professor O. F. BARKER, of Philrdelphia; Professor JOSEPH S. AIMES,
ts) imore; MR. J. S. DILLER, of Washington.
Two volumes annually, in monthly numbers of about 80 pages each.
This Journal ended its first series of 50 volumes as a quarterly in 1845; its second
series of 50 volumes as a two-monthly in 1870; its third series as a monthly ended Dec-
ember, 1895. A Fourth Series commenced in 1896.
Subscription price, $6 per year or 50 cents a number, postage prepaid in the United States ;
$6.25 to Canada ; $6,40 to Countries in the Postal Union. Back numbers at reduced pric
ka-Ten-Volume Indexes, Vols. I-X XI-XX, fourth series, price one dollar. Address
The American Journal of Science
New Haven, Conn.
SECOND EDITION, NOVEMBER, 1910
AMERICAN MEN OF SCIENCE
A BIOGRAPHICAL DIRECTORY
EDITED BY J. McKEEN CATTELL
A Biographical directory ires revision if it is to maintain ts usefulness. Nearly a third of the names in the
pany Hie metal a red in the first division have in near every case been revised. The
ist fis been as great as that given to the first edition. There has been no
Gr $ ; rons taud
1 as
conditions on which scientific research depends and so far as may be to um these conditions. 7.
an appendiz the two ioa studies that have been made.—From the Preface to the Second Edition.
The second edition of the Directory extends to more than 600 pages and contains more than 5500 sketches.
It is well printed on all rag paper seg bound in buckram with leather label. Although the work has been
in size by more than 50 per cent., it is sold at the same price as the first edition.
Price: Five Dollars, net, Postage paid
THE SCIENCE PRESS
GARRISON, N. Y. LANCASTER, PA.
SUB-STATION 84, NEW YORK CITY.
The American Naturalist
A Monthly Journal, established in
with S
1867, Devoted to t
e Advancement of the ste Sciences
h
pecial Reference to the Factors of EA Evolution and Her
CONTENTS OF THE APRIL NUMBER
Genetical Studies on Oenothera. II. Dr. BRADLEY
The we aes of Maize. Dr. GEORGE HARRISON
so mad oT Is the Female Frog Heterozy-
regard to Sex Determination ? Professor .
E aa The Mutation Theory. Dr. R.
GATES,
CONTENTS OF JUNE NUMBE
Inheritance 5 Fecundity in the Domestic ae Dr
AYMOND PEARL.
The Samaras sion, of the Pure Line Theory. Dr. J.
REHAR
ay piei an meaner External Conditions on
Pro-
CONTENTS OF THE MAY NUMBER
The Inheritance of Polymorphism a vie in Colias
Philodice. Professor JoHN H. GE
Nucleus and ps age in aoti.
MICHAEL F. GUYER
A Comparative Study of the pcan et of the Photo-
en e orean of Certain American Pose siet
. McDermott and ai eee
Soorte Articles and Discussion; A A ‘Paper
nN 1 Selection in the English Sparrow.
fo da ppan HARRIS
ick: a Literature : Biometrics, Yule’s Introduc-
o e Theory of Statistics. Dr. RAYMOND
Poti
CONTENTS OF JULY NUMBER
Germ-cell Determinants and Their Significance. Pro-
H
sor R. EGNER.
Further Observations on the Pose of the Sauropodous
Dinosaurs. OLIVER P. HAY.
Shorter Articles and Correspondence : Computation of
the en ae = st Ba ara bs Professor H. $
JEN = No achoseps attenuatus Esch.
5 Borsa
fessor THOM - MONTGOMERY. Notes. and Literature: Some Recent Studies on Vari
Shorter mre and seh The Ontogeny of a ation and Correlation in Apenes Plants: As
To a car ton OND i oka T name
‘AS
Notes ad Feito prem t Contributions to a seaininay © Prenden Davip STARR J JORDAN:
na of the Extinct Amphi ibia, Dr. Ror Sone Rec ze ent Boo aka = Possit Plants: Professor
Las HoucH
poean AIEEE
CONTENTS OF AUGUST NUMBE
Comparative pte e Study of the gece
Content of Pigmen Skins, inte kegs refer-
ce to the Question of Color Bee e among
Mulattos. Professor H.
A Coeficient of Song gree: Pre cca for Students
of Heredi J. ARTHUR ies a
The Adaptations T the Primates. datas F. B
Jean 5 Marchant an Eighteenth Century Mutationist.
Pasi es and ad Literature : Notes on Heredity. Dr. W.J-
>
CONTENTS OF SEPTEMBER NUMBER
TREE s the “Eye” in Vigna. Dr. W. J.
LMA
hacker ot r Form among the Filipinos. Dr.
ROBERT DENKETI BEAN.
The Zoogeography of = East Indian Archipelago.
Dr. P. N. VAN KAMP
Shorter Articles and Diéa ssion: Biom
ments nag: oi ford the Genotype Con
RAYM EARL: On the Formation or Go
tion anit ‘Coagation —_ when = aby
Combinations is L J. ART
Acquired Char a BaD ew
Notes and Literature: The once
and Study of cians Psyehoiogy ri Useful Evo-
lution Bibliography. V.
— fined.
Seago meter Cents
Yearly Subscription, $4. 00
Dollar
NATURALIST will be sent to new subscribers for four months for One
T HE SCIENCE PRESS
ooo _Sub-Station 84: NEW YORK
Lancaster, Pa. . :
VOL. XLV, NO. 539 ~~ NOVEMBER, 1911
THE
AMERICAN
NATURALIST
A MONTHLY JOURNAL
Devoted to the Advancement of the Biological Sciences with
Special Reference to the Factors of Evolution
CONTENTS
Page
I. The Origin of Species in Nature. Dr. HENRI Hus - - 642
II. Some Experimental Observations concerning the porate of oe Bees
their Visits to Cotton Blossoms. H. A. ALLARD > 668
. The Distribution of Pure Line Means. DE. J. ARTHUR HARRIS - -686
IV. Shorter Articles and SERE A Kanor of EI EPET m
tions. Dr. J. K. Shaw - 701
THE SOIENCE PRESS
LANCASTER, PA. GARRISON, N. ¥.
NEW YORK: SUB-STATION 84
The American Naturalist
MSS. intended for publication and books, etc., intended for ee should be
sent to ney mg of THE AMERICAN NATURALIST, Garrison-on-Hud k
es containing research work bearing on the problems of ‘organi evolu-
tion are especially welcome, and will be given preference in publica
reprints of appeal are supplied to authors pa of charge.
Further iama will be supplied at c
criptions and advertisements r e sent to the geeni The
or Sange price is four dollars
thirty-five cents,
ear.
nadian postage twenty-five itg additional.
The advertising rates are Four Dollars for a page.
postage is fifty ce and
char
eign ents
"The arge for single copies is
THE SCIENCE PRESS
NEW YORK: Sub-Station 84
Entered as second-class matter, April 2, 1908, at the Post Office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act of
Congress of March 3, 1879.
Lancaster, Pa.
Garrison, N. Y.
THE BULLETIN—ror bargains in Ethnolograph-
ical and Pre-historic Specimens. Books on Natural
History, Science, Travel, Voyages, etc. See THE
BULLETIN post free for 3 cent stamp.
4 Duke St., Adelphi—t ondon—England
TENTH EDITION.
THE MICROSCOPE,
an introduction to Microscopic Methods and to Histology,
by SIMON Primi GAGE, of Cornell University. Over
350 la. and above 250 Fg iat es in this new
and fully wade edition. Price $2.00, postpaid.
COMSTOCK PUBLISHING CO., Ithaca, N. Y.
BIRDS’ EGGS
W. F. H. ROSENBERG,
57 Haverstock Hill, London, N. W.,
England
begs to announce the publication of a new
Price List (No. 15) of Birds’ Eggs, con-
taining over 900 species from all parts of
the world. This Catalogue is systematic-
ally arranged, with authors’ names, indica-
tions of localities, and an index to families.
It will be sent post free on application, as
will the following lists:
No. 11, Birds’ Skins, (5,000 species ) ;
No. 12, Tegidegaern (5,000 species) ; No,
13, Calera: No. 14, Mammals.
In course of preparation: New Price
List of Reptiles, Amphibians and Fishes.
Largest Stock in the world of specimens
Zoology.
rb ey an
Back or Current Numbers
of any American or Foreign technical
or trade journal and magazine fur-
nished on short notice at moderate
rates; all kinds of Government and
State Reports in stock. Clippings On
special subjects furnished promptly.
Large stock of American Naturalist,
Science and Popular Science on hand.
Magazines, Books and Papers
of all kinds bought
Special Subscription Price List on request.
Information concerning any periodical
furnished free of charge.
A. W. CASTELLANOS
259 Armstrong Ave.,
Jersey City, N.J., U.S.A.
THE
AMERICAN NATURALIST
VoL. XLV November, 1911 No. 539
THE ORIGIN OF SPECIES IN NATURE?
DR. HENRI HUS
MISSOURI BOTANICAL GARDEN
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN
Amone the duties of the botanist is that of adding to
the number of known species, varieties and forms. To
reach this end several ways are open. One may, by
studying the flora of new or insufficiently explored areas,
not only extend the range of species formerly known, but
add new species. The work of Setchell and his students,
especially Gardner, done on the algal flora of the Pacific
Coast, yields an excellent illustration.’
Sometimes it is possible to correlate with such investi-
gations work of economic value. The results obtained by
agricultural explorers working under the auspices of the
Office of Foreign Seed and Plant Introduction of the
Bureau of Plant Industry, U. S. Dept. of Agriculture and
other? institutions, offer a case in point. Such work, to
lead to the desired result, requires men of especial fit-
ness, physical, moral and mental. Not only must they
possess physical endurance to overcome the hardships
with which they necessarily meet. Moral courage, moral
strength are necessary to extricate them from the many
1 Read, through the courtesy of Mr. Henry W. Anderson, before the
Academy of Science of St. Louis, May 15, 1911. Contributions from the
Botanical Laboratory of the University of Michigan, No. 125.
2 Univ. Calif, Publ. Bot., 1° et seq., 1903-1910. o
* Hansen, N. E., ‘‘The Wild Alfalfas and Clovers of Siberia, with a
Perspective View of the Alfalfas of the World,’’ Bull. No. 150, B P. L;
U. 8. D. A., 1909
Aaronsohn, i. «í Agricultural and Botanical Explorations in Palestine, ””
Bull. No. 180, B. P. L, U. & D. A, 1910. ‘
641
642 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
difficult positions in which they are bound to find them-
selves and to bring to a successful end the undertaking
upon which they have embarked. Further, a thorough
knowledge and an excellent judgment are essential. Yet
none of these are sufficient unless they be complemented
by an all-pervading love for the subject, a devotion which
counts all obstacles as naught and persists in the face
of difficulties which to most men would appear unsur-
mountable. Frank Meyer, agricultural explorer, now,
for the second time, exploring eastern Asia—last heard
of when entering Thibet—exemplifies this ideal. Such
are the men who on their return to the civilized world
bring back with them the rare plants which delight the
collector and which, in themselves frequently of apparent
insignificance, in a few years add immensely to our col-
lections. The discovery of Nicotiana Forgetiana* is, in
recent years, perhaps the most widely known instance
through the part played by this species in the introduc-
tion to our gardens of Nicotiana Sandere (N. alata X
Forgetiana). But not always is it necessary to draw on
the flora of distant countries. By thoroughly going over
a well-covered territory one may be able to add new
varieties of a more or less well-known species, such as
was the case with Oxalis stricta viridiflora which, since
the time of publication of the original paper, has been
found near Thomson, Ga.* This plant, since the spring of
1909, has established itself in the Ann Arbor experiment
garden, spreading rapidly from seed selfsown in the
latter part of the same summer. The plants grow in the
open as well as in more shaded places and on a light,
sandy soil. The varietal character maintains itself per-
fectly, as it does in the Missouri Botanical Garden, where,
on a recent visit, I saw a bed of it, in the open and on a
fairly heavy soil. Though there is a certain amount of
variation in the intensity of the green coloring of the
* Curtis’ Botanical Magazine, 4th Ser., 1, pl. 8006, 1905.
*Hus, H., ‘‘Virescence of Oxalis stricta,” Ann. Rep. Missouri Bot.
Gard., 18: 99, pl. 10, 11, 1907.
Bartlet
t, H. H., ‘On Ozalis stricta viridiflora,’’ Rhodora, 11: 118,
June, 1909.
No. 539] ORIGIN OF SPECIES IN NATURE 643
flower, due to a variation in the relative amounts of
chloroplasts and yellow chromoplasts, the plant appears
to have undergone a sufficient number of fairly rigid
tests, under widely divergent conditions, and for a suffi-
cient number of generations (9), to entitle it to recogni-
tion as a distinct, non-pathological variety. The varia-
tion in the color of the flower I am inclined to ascribe to
differences in light intensity. In a bed, situated in the
middle of the experiment garden, i. e., in an open place
where no obstruction prevents full and direct illumina-
tion, the flowers are uniformly green. When the plants
are grown in the greenhouse or in the shade of shrubs,
there seems to be a tendency for the flowers to assume a
more yellow tinge. But not in a single instance has a
flower been observed which possibly could have been mis-
taken for one of the species.
Again it may be that a form deserving specific rank is
discovered, as instanced by the now well-known Capsella
Heegeri.? Such discoveries possess an added charm since
in these cases the possibility of a recent origin of the
new form is not excluded. Sometimes it is possible to
prove this experimentally, as was done by de Vries for
his evening primroses. An illustration of probably
recent origin and of repetition of mutation is yielded by
the discovery of a single specimen of the inermis variety
of Cynara Cardunculus in Algiers by Trabut.8 But some
years ago what would seem to have been the same variety
was grown in the St. Louis experiment garden from seed
which my father kindly obtained for me from the then
director of the Botanical Garden at Buenos Aires and
the ancestry of which I understand was to be traced to an
individual growing wild in the vicinity.’
" Solms-Laubach, H. zu, ‘‘Cruciferenstudien—I, Capsella heegeri, eine
neuentstandene Form der deutschen Flora,’’ Bot. Zeit., 55: 167, pl. 7, 1900.
$ Trabut, L., ‘‘Sur une arain inerme du Cynara Cardunculus,’’ Bull.
Soc. Bot. Fr., 57: 350, 191
? Cynara Cardunouhis, a ya of the Mediterranean Tegion, emigrated
to South America, where it occupies large areas (Darwin ‘í Animals and
Plants under Domestication’’). An analogous case is that of Silybum
Marianum, likewise a native of the Mediterranean region and now largely
644 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
Generally speaking, the investigation of the flora of a
newly discovered or formerly inaccessible region is a
matter of choice or, better, perhaps, opportunity. The
same is true for the detailed study of our collective
species, leading to a recognition of component elements
as illustrated by the work of Small on Oxalis,” Rhus, ete.
Whoever can devote a part of his time to the study of a
genus is able to establish the existence of differences
which, formerly ignored and in themselves slight, are of
the greatest importance for the tracing of relationships.
Unfortunately, perhaps, in such studies there is usually
developed a mass of detail so great, so intricate that none
but a few specialists are able to recognize the various
forms. Hieracium, Aster, Cyperus are names sufficient
to strike terror in the hearts of any but the most ardent
systematists. But before sucha detailed study can be made
there must be gathered, in the first place, herbarium mate-
rial. It is not sufficient to possess a single specimen.
Material must be collected from various habitats and
both during the flowering and fruiting periods. Often
there are differences between the leaves of old and
young shoots, as in Crategus. Or the leaves of the
fruiting branches may be different from those of purely
vegetative shoots as in Hedera Helix. Ficus and Pothos
both may show leaves of a very different character."’
None would at first sight believe leaves of seedlings or of
adventitious shoots of Eucalyptus globulus and those of
older specimens to belong to the same species. Many
species of Acacia show, during the first few yéars of
their existence, well-developed phyllodes which later dis-
appear entirely. Sometimes even the leaves on the same
naturalized in California where it forms a common and, on account of its
leaves, a most conspicuous weed.
‘North American Flora,’’ 25': 25, 1907.
“In the greenhouses of the Missouri Botanical Garden may be seen a
very fine specimen of Ficus repens which near the ground and up to 4
height of some eight feet, produces the small leaves typical of this species.
When, however, the plant makes a bend to twine horizontally along a rod,
large leaves are PPAS Other instances are given in de Vries’s ‘‘ Species
and a ranea ON d
No. 539] ORIGIN OF SPECIES IN NATURE 645
shoot may present a very different appearance. And
while this is something not entirely unexpected in hy-
brids as in Quercus Leana (Q. coccineaXimbricaria) and
Boston fern hybrids, it is a source of astonishment when
this occurs in species which we do not believe to be of
hybrid origin. Heterophylly is a matter of common
observation in the ubiquitous horseradish, Radicula
Armoracia. Sterculia diversifolia, commonly cultivated
in greenhouses, has leaves which are mostly ovate to
lanceolate in outline and which are often entire or vari-
ously three- to five-lobed on the same shoot. The sassa-
fras, S. variifolium, illustrates the same principle, in
fact, derives its name from this feature. The paper mul-
berry, Broussonetia papyrifera, shares the irregular
lobing of the leaf with its near relatives, Morus rubra
and M. alba12 The cut-leaved Persian lilac is very
variable in this respect.1* Sometimes seasonal differ-
ences are so great as to make collecting throughout the
year an absolute necessity,’ an instance so strikingly
illustrated by Viola palmata. In woody plants there is
not infrequently a return to the nepionic stage in the
leaves produced near the base.!* When we remember
that heterochromatism'® may add a further complication,
it becomes evident that it is not sufficient to be able to
refer to herbarium specimens only. The living plant
must be studied in its various stages of development. It
is by this means only that one may arrive at a true esti-
mate of the stability and significance of minute details.
12 Rep. Bot. Dep. New Jersey Agrie. Coll. Exp. St., 325, pl. 21, 1909.
Fry, A., ‘‘Note on Variation in Leaves of Mulberry Trees,’’ Biometrica,
1: 258, ‘1902.
13 Masters, M. T., ‘‘ Vegetable Teratology,’’ fig. 177. See also, Schlecht-
endal, Bot. Zeit., 13: 559, 1855, and Lloyd, Torreya, 2: 137, 1902.
* Cushman, J. A., ‘‘Studies of Localized Stages of Growth in some
Common New England Plants,’’ A. NAT., 36: 865; ibid., 37: 243, 38: 819.
3 Jackson, R. T., ‘‘ Localized Stages in Development in Plants and
Animals,’’ Mem. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., 5‘: 89, 1899.
» Teorie von Marilaun, A., ‘‘The Natural History of Plants,’’ 1: 149;
646 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
Trelease,17 in a recent paper on his favorite agaves,
says: ‘f... my own conception of specific identities and
differences in the genus oscillates as my study pro-
ceeds. ...”’
While ultimately work of this nature, conscientiously
carried out, leads to a clear delineation of the characters
peculiar to each species, subspecies, variety, etc., there is
reached, usually not so very long after the inception of
the work and very long before its termination, a period
of chaos which, to say the least, is the reverse of stimu-
lating and ordinarily sufficient to dampen the ardor of
the greatest enthusiast. Thus, in my cultures of local
forms of Capsella Bursa-pastoris, the four forms
describéd by Shull'® and some of those of Almquist!’
can be recognized readily. But there remain so many
whose classification is doubtful at the present time that
it would cause Mr. Murdock, associated with me in this
investigation, and myself to throw up our hands in
despair, were it not for the fact that there have appeared
in our cultures extreme forms, so striking and so
different from any previously described, that we are in-
clined to believe we are possibly dealing with mutations
in the sense of de Vries (Fig. 1). Research along these
lines requires long and tedious experimental efforts. It
is a different matter where the finding of distinctly new
forms in an old territory is concerned. Here an element
of chance largely enters. By increasing the number of
our observations our chances of discovering something
new may be increased materially. In other words,
directly or vicariously a large amount of ground has
to be covered. Yet I am not satisfied that a thorough
knowledge of a comparatively small area would not lead
to equally satisfactory results. The one requires about
as much exertion as does the other and certainly the
" Trelease, W., ‘‘ Species in Agave,’’ Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., 49: 232,
pl. 32, 33, 1910.
8 Shull, G. H., ‘“‘ Bursa Bursa-pastoris and Bursa Heegeri Biotypes and
Hybrids, ”? Carn. ‘Inst. Publ., No. 112, 1909.
3 Almquist, E., ‘‘ Studien ueber die Capsella Bursa-pastoris (L.),’’ Acta
Horti Berg., 4, Wo. 6, 1907.
No. 539] ORIGIN OF SPECIES IN NATURE 647
number of observations is identical. But the greater
familiarity with the territory and the fact that observa-
tion may be continued throughout the seasons offers cer-
tain advantages. It is a question which must be decided
for individual cases by every investigator along this line,
Fig. 1. Appearance of a new form among seedlings of
Capsella Bursa-pastoris. x1.
since its answer must depend on local conditions, such as
proximity to residence, climate, whether arid or temper-
ate, etc. A garden, for instance, offers as good if not
better opportunities to observe the appearance of new
forms as does the field. Here all the requirements for
such work are met with, i. e., large numbers grown under
highly favorable conditions. Parks, nurseries and espe-
cially the larger botanical gardens, where are kept accu-
648 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Vou XLV
rate records of the histories of the various plants grown,
constitute an important field. Thus, in the Missouri
Botanical Garden, there are grown every year numerous
plants of Bellis perennis ‘‘delicata.’’ In 1906 the seed
for these specimens was obtained from a Philadelphia
seed firm. The seed was sown and the plants were
handled in the usual manner until they finally found their
way to the beds used for decorative purposes. It was
while the plants, several thousands in number, were in
this position, that the attention of Mr. Shelby Jones, at
that time a student at the garden, was attracted to a plant
because of the abnormal character of its flowers. In the
capitula of this specimen the rayflowers had either disap-
peared, or, what is more probable, had been replaced by
Fig. 2. Capitula of Bellis perennis “ Delicata’’ and
Bellis perennis discoidea
dise-flowers. The result was a rather striking, maroon-red
button, in sharp contrast with the normal heads (Fig. 2).
For in the normal form of the variety under cultivation
the upper surface of the ligules was either white or rose-
colored, while the lower surface was red. In the discoid
variety, owing to the tubular nature of the transformed
No. 539] ORIGIN OF SPECIES IN NATURE 649
rayflowers, the white coloring disappeared from view.
It is an instance of change of color analogous to that of
the cactus dahlia, though differing in one striking fea-
ture. For in the latter case the brilliancy of the flowers
is due to the recurved rayflorets which show the bright
color of the upper surface instead of the dull shade of the
lower one, exposed to view in the older form of dahlia.
The plant was segregated and propagated vegeta-
tively, as many as one hundred specimens being on hand
at atime. Among these not a single instance of a return
to the conventional form was observed. Of course, it
would have been far more interesting to note the result
of sexual propagation, a proceeding which was rendered
impossible by the failure of the flowers to produce good
seed. This, however, is quite in accordance with the
experience of horticulturists, fide André.2° In this most
comprehensive publication the variety discoidea is men-
tioned under the name of ‘‘Paquerette vivace var.
double a fleurs tuyautées,’’ its slight fertility noted and
attention called to the fact that the seed for such plants
must be collected from flowers which are almost double.
It is added: ‘‘leur tendance a doubler est assez bien fixée
pour qu’on ne trouve dans le semis presque plus de fleurs
de duplicature imparfaite.’’ In this connection Master’s
notes published in the appendix to his ‘‘Vegetable
Teratology,” and de Vries’s remarks on Matthiola
incana fl. pl. are of considerable interest. Penzig evi-
dently refers to a similar form,?? though his use of the
term ‘‘ox-eye daisy’’ for this form appears to be con-
trary to usage, it being reserved ordinarily for Chrysan-
themum Leucanthemum. Similar instances are not rare
among Composite and are illustrated by Matricaria
(Chamomilla) discoidea and Anthemis tinctoria dis-
coidea. Very frequently one is able to find a few tubular
flowers among the rayflowers of our cultivated com-
2 Vilmorin-Andrieux et Cie, ‘‘Les fleurs de pleine terre,’’ 5th ed.,
R.-Ed. André, éditeur, 781, Paris, 1909.
2 De Vries, H., ‘‘Plantbreeding,’’ 238, Chicago, 1907.
2 Penzig, O., ‘‘Pflanzen-teratologie,’’ 2: 59, Genoa, 1894.
650 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
posites, especially Cosmos and Coreopsis. Some of my
earliest experiments, undertaken to study the effect of
selection on such deviations, yielded negative results.
De Vries? describes and illustrates a fistulosa variety
of Dahlia variabilis which appeared among his cultures.
Among chrysanthemums such ‘‘quilled’’ forms are not
rare. ‘‘Knterprise’’ is a variety which illustrates this
type and which not infrequently is met with at chrysan-
themum exhibitions.
Next to gardens, cultivated fields, i. e., places where
a large number of individuals of the same species or
variety are grown, offer the best opportunity for the
discovery of new or aberrant forms. One only has to be
reminded of the case of the beardless Anderbeck oats.?*
In a similar manner there was found, among the numer-
ous alfalfa plants which occupy a large portion of the
acreage of the garden, a white-flowered specimen, the
flowers of which, on fading, became almost yellow. Since
then there were found in a neighboring field, a group of
such white-flowered plants.
Color varieties are among the deviations most fre-
quently noted, perhaps because the resulting change is
particularly easy of observation. They occur both as to
flowers, as for instance in Lobelia syphilitica alba, Tri-
folium pratense album, ete., and as to fruits, as instanced
by Gaylussacia resinosa leucocarpa,® Vaccinium penn-
sylvanicum leucocarpum, V. corymbosum atrococcum f.
leucococcum, V. canadense chiococcum.® White straw-
rries of course are well known. Yellow-fruited vari-
eties exist of Ilex myrtifolia?" as well as of Ilex opaca
and I. verticillata. The Californian holly, Heteromeles
arbutifolia, also has a yellow-berried variety.2% Calli-
*De Vries, H, ape ? 1: 480, fig. 134.
* De Vries, H., loc. ci
* Porter, Thos. C., Oppe to our Native Flora,’’ Bull. Torr. Bot.
Cl., 16: 21, 1889,
* Deane, W., ‘‘ Albino Fruits of Vacciniums in New England,’’ Rhodora,
3: 263, 1901.
OE o R., ‘‘Ilex myrtifolia with Yellow Fruit,’’ Torreya, 2: 43,
*The American Botanist, 15: 49, 1909.
No. 539] ORIGIN OF SPECIES IN NATURE 651
carpa americana and Rubus cuneifolius both possess
white-fruited varieties.?°
Of Solanum nigrum there exist, besides the black-
fruited form, one with yellow and one with green fruit.
Atropa Belladonna exhibits the same color forms of the
fruit which to us are familiar in the cultivated peppers,
viz., red and yellow. Finally, in shrubs which are grown
chiefly because of the coloring of the bark, for instance
Cornus stolonifera, with a red bark, there may be met
with forms which have a yellow bark. So numerous are
references to color varieties in our literature and these
variations are met with so often that their frequency
suggests facility of origin perhaps parallelled only by
that through which dwarf forms are produced. For
Several years, on collecting trips in the vicinity of St.
Louis, Mo., all patches of Lobelia cardinalis were exam-
ined with particular care for white-flowered plants, since
they were known to exist in various parts of the United
States. Though these observations did not lead to the
desired result, Mr. O. S. Ledman, of St. Louis, was able
to find on the peninsula in the northern portion of Pitts-
burg Lake, St. Clair Co., Ill., opposite St. Louis and in a
locality with which I believed myself to be thoroughly
familiar and had searched most carefully on several
occasions, some plants of Lobelia cardinalis alba.
This would indicate that the formation of the white-
flowered variety had taken place recently, though the
possibility of transportation from other localities,
though improbable, is not excluded. That a white-flow-
ered form of Medicago sativa is formed as readily seems
likely. Various species belonging to the Leguminose
possess alba yarieties. De Candolle speaks of a color
variety,” and at first it was thought the specimens under
consideration could be classed here. Since then, how-
ever, there were found in the same alfalfa field several
» Rolfs, P. H., ‘‘ Variation from the Normal,’’ Asa Gray Bull., 8: 75,
0.
190:
% Medicago sativa versicolor (Sér. mss.) : floribus luteis ecoeruleisque.
M. falcata versicolor Wallr. sched. cort., p. 398. M. lutea-cærulea hort.,
Prod., 2: 173, 1825.
652 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
plants which answer the description of the variety men-
tioned in the Prodromus, more or less. It is more than
probable that these plants, the flowers of which exhibit
a great variation in color, are to be included under the
‘variegated alfalfas,’’ for which Westgate’! suggests
the designation ‘‘Medicago falcata X (M. sativa), to
indicate that ‘‘the hybrids have been-recrossed several
times with ordinary alfalfa and also among themselves.’’
Hybridization, however, does not explain the white
color of the flowers. That white-flowered plants and
those with flowers of a yellow or cream color are not of
rare occurrence is shown by the data furnished by
Westgate? who notes such plants among four, respect-
ively five of the forms experimented with. On the other
hand, in view of the known existence of white-flowered
forms the assumption of the formation of the white-
flowered plants at Ann Arbor, through recent mutation,
does not seem warranted. At the same time, such a
possibility is not excluded, for while we do not believe
that hybridization can have as its direct result the pro-
duction of a new character, or the loss of one,** it 1s
not at all improbable that hybridization indirectly may
cause a plant to initiate a mutation period. It is ex-
pected that the seed gathered from the white-flowered
plants will, in the course of a generation or two, yield a
pure white offspring. This seems to be the experience
of others. Mr. C. V. Piper, of the Bureau of Plant In-
dustry, U. S. D. A., in a reply to a recent letter concern-
ing alba varieties of Medicago sativa says: ‘‘Some of
* Westgate, J. M., ‘‘ Variegated Alfalfa,’’? U. S. D. A., B. P. I., Bull.
No. 169, pai 1910.
2 Loc 37, Table I.
Roane rites which may suggest themselves but which obviously fall out-
side our definition, are in the first place those in which atavism comes into
play, such as is the case in a cross between Datura levis and D. feros.
(Naudin, Ann. Se. nat., 5 Sér., 3: 155, 1865. Reciprocal crosses of the two
white- fovea plants vishded a uniform pei sae with pale purple flowers.
(See also de Vries, ‘‘Mutationstheorie,’’ 2: 44, 201.) More recently,
through the work of Cuénot, Durham and Nilsson, another, more oe
explanation of the reappearance of the purple color can be given. ( L.
— ‘*Vererbungslehre und Deszendenztheorie,’’ 1910.)
No. 539] ORIGIN OF SPECIES IN NATURE 653
our selections of these white-flowered forms now breed
true.’’
In connection with this alba form I wish to call atten-
tion to the local distribution of a white-flowered form
of Solanum Dulcamara, lately taken into cultivation in
the experiment garden. This variety occurs but rarely
Mich.
Fic. 3. Arctium minus laciniatum at Albion,
in the vicinity of Ann Arbor, chiefly on river and lake
shores and in swampy places. But at Albion, Mich., it
was found in great abundance, growing in moist situa-
tions alongside of the species. While it will take some
years to determine the constancy of this variety, there
is in my mind no question as to the outcome of the ex-
periment. It is a variety not always recognized in our
floras, though evidently met with from time to time.**
But if we give specific rank to mere color varieties, as
we do in the case of Datura Tatula and Datura Stramo-
nium, why not give taxonomic recognition to the equiva-
lent color variety of Solanum Dulcamara, the more so
* Collins, F. S., “A Variety of Solanum New to America,’’ Rhodora,
12: 40, 1910
654 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
since the addition of such an exceedingly variable char-
acter as is pubescence, seems sufficient to bring this about
(Solanum Dulcamara var. villosissimum Desv.) ?
The last illustration points to the largest source of
new or at least imperfectly known species and varieties,
i. e., the native flora. The same rule applies here as in
cultivated fields: striking morphological differences most
readily attract attention. When the plant normally is
possessed of large leaves, as is, for instance, Arctiwm
minus, any differences in the foliage become especially
noticeable. It is through this fortunate circumstance
that we owe to Professor Charles E. Barr, of Albion
College, Michigan, the discovery of at least a new local-
ity for the apparently rare laciniate form of the species
just mentioned (Fig. 3).
Laciniate forms are of relatively frequent occurrence.
We find them not only among the phanerogams and the
vascular cryptogams, but even among the alge one can
meet with forms which may be interpreted as such, for
instance Callophyllis furcata Farlow® and C. furcata f.
dissecta Farlow*® (Fig. 4), though of course there is no
connection. One of the earliest accounts of the sudden
appearance of a laciniate variety is given by Marchant.’”?
In 1715, in his garden, he discovered a plant which,
though evidently belonging to the genus Mercurialis, was
entirely new to him and which did not appear to have
been described previously. He named it Mercurialis
foliis capillaceis. No seed being collected, the next year
the same garden spot was anxiously watched. Six plants
made their appearance, four of which possessed the
character of the plants which had appeared in 1715.
The other two were sufficiently different to be segre-
* Exsic. in Collins, Holden and Setchell, Phycotheca Bor. Am. Fase. 18,
No. 883, 1901.
= Setchell, W. A., and Gardner, N. L., ‘‘Algw of Northwestern Amer-
+” 306, Univ. Calif. Publ., 1, 1903.
‘x Marchant, J., ‘‘Sur la prodato de nouvelles espèces de plantes,’’
Hist. de V Acad. d. Sc, 1719, 57, Paris, 1721.
Marchant, J., t Cmcrvations sur la nature des plantes,’? Mém. de
V’Acad. Roy. d. Bex 1719, 59, pl. 6, 7, Paris, 1721. See also THE AMERICAN
NATURALIST, 45: 493, August, 1911.
A
. 539]
ORIGIN OF SPECIES IN NATURE
655 `
b
Fig. 4. Callophyllis furcata and C. furcata dissecta.
656 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
gated under the term Mercurialis foliis in varias et
imequales lacinias quasi dilaceratis. They were remark-
able chiefly because of their laciniate leaves. Both forms
appeared to differ from Mercurialis annua in having a
longer lease of life, since they remained green until the
latter part of December. Plants of both continued to
appear in 1717 and 1718, propagating themselves.
Masters and others have given lists containing several
instances of the appearance of laciniate forms, to whose
number one readily may add by glancing over the cata-
logues annually published by the principal seed houses.
It is especially of trees and shrubs (Acer platanoides
laciniatum, Betula pendula var. dalecarlia® Rubus
fruticosus laciniatus) that cut-leaved varieties are in de-
mand. This popularity is equaled only by that which
Chelidonium majus laciniatum appears to enjoy in the
world scientific, dating from the time when Roze?’ called
attention to its history. Laciniation seems to have
taken place at least twice in the genus Chelidonium. Of
C. japonicum Thumb. occurs a var. dissecta.*®
There exist several varieties of Chelidonium majus.
Thus we have the broad-petaled form (C. majus latı-
petalum) of the Groningen Botanic Garden, the double-
flowered variety and the cut-leaved one, the latter par-
ticularly interesting because the laciniation extends to
the petals. During the last four years I have cultivated
s A cut-leaved variety of B. pendula is oa — vide Sanford, S.,
A neti Cherry Birch,’’ Rhodora, 4: 83, 1902.
” Roze, ‘*Le Chelidonium laciniatum ane Journ. de Bot., 9:
296, 301, ie "1895.
“Prain, D, ig Revision of the Genus Chelidonium,’’ Bull. Herb.
Boiss., 3: 570, 1
The aeee yield other instances of the reappearance of an
abnormality in members of the same genus, for instance pistillody of the
amens. The most quoted instance is that of Papaver somniferum poly-
cephalum, a variety which was grown more than fifty years ago in the trial
grounds of the Vilmorins. Similar varieties were described by von Mohl
for P. orientale and by Elkan for P. dubium (Henri van Heurck, ‘‘ Notice
sur une prolification axillaire floripare du Papaver setigerum,’’ Bull. Soc
Roy. Bot. Belg., 2: 329, 1863) and is said to oceur also in Macleya aids
(Le Sourd-Dussiples et Georges Bergeron, ‘‘Note sur un cas de méta-
morphose ascendante,’’ Bull. de la Soc. bot. de France, 8: 348, 1861).
No. 539] ORIGIN OF SPECIES IN NATURE 657
eight lots of Chelidonium majus laciniatum, two of
which have double flowers, the seed being obtained
through the exchange lists of various botanic gardens.
These eight lots apparently represent five distinct forms.
The differences are not great and probably would re-
main unnoticed by the casual observer. After constant
association with them one can not fail to recognize the
differences, however slight. But though slight, the dif-
ferences are constant. They consist in the degree of
laciniation as well as in degree of hirsuteness. It might
be argued that these differences perhaps are due to dif-
ferences in external conditions or in the age of the plants
or in seasons, etc., just as the leaves produced by Acer
saccharinum var. Wieri, in the latter part of the summer
at the extremities of the long, slender twigs, have a
lamina far more reduced than those formed earlier in
the year. Roze calls attention to the fact that in his cul-
tures of Chelidonium laciniatum the degree of lacinia-
tion of the leaves increased as the season advanced,“
the petals undergoing a similar change. He also noted
that the degree of laciniation increased with the amount
of light received.
While we have noted that the differences between the
varieties are most marked in the early part of the year,
the fact that our cultures were carried out under uni-
form conditions as to soil, light and water supply, and
that the various types are recognizable even in the late
summer, seems to indicate that these forms are entitled
to varietal rank. The specimen illustrated in Fig. 5
ought to set at rest all doubts upon this point. One
hardly would care to account for the extreme reduction
of leaf surface in this case on the basis of the influence
of fluctuating variability. This form, in all probability,
is identical with the Chelidonium majus foliis et flore
minutissime laciniatis of the Hortus regius (1661), which
“ Roze, loc. cit., . “, ,. si l’on suit la plante dans sa croissance, on
remarque que les deux ou trois premières feuilles (après les feuilles germi-
natives) ont l’apparence de celles de la forme crenatum et les dernières
celles de la forme fumarifolium, mais a découpures plus courtes et moins
étroites. ”?
658 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
originated in the Paris Botanical Garden from seed of
Chelidonium majus laciniatum and to which de Candolle
afterwards gave the name C. laciniatum fumariefolium.”
A second plant in our garden represents an extreme
in another direction and is intermediate between the
Fic. 5a. Chelidonium majus.
species and the variety laciniatum. It probably is iden-
tical with the var. crenatum.? Besides these three varie-
ties I believe to be able to distinguish two other forms,
constant from seed. It is possible that all of them origi-
nated through mutation of C. majus laciniatum, as did
the variety fumariefolium. It is equally possible that
laciniate forms of Chelidonium majus have originated
"Frog, 1: 183:
“C. majus crenatum Lange, FI. dan.
No. 539] ORIGIN OF SPECIES IN NATURE 659
more than once and directly from the parent species.
This is the view taken by Clos, who describes the find-
ing by P. Barthés of a plant of C. majus fumariefolium
in Soréze, Tarn. It is to be noted that these plants bore
underdeveloped, seedless pods. This last seems to speak
~ i
Fic. 5b. ©. fumariefolium.
in favor of the assumption of a creatio de novo, since
plants from other stock appear fertile. To this ex-
tremely interesting point, a discussion of which falls
outside the scope of the present paper, I hope to return
in an article shortly to be published.
The correctness of the view that the same mutation or
at least a mutation in the same general direction may
take place in different stocks, must be granted a priori.
agi in the support of this belief we find in the ex-
os, D., ‘‘Réapparition de la Chélidoine a feuille de Fumeterre,’’
ane rend., 115: 381, Paris, 1892.
660 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
istence of several distinct laciniate forms of different
species of trees and shrubs. The varieties heterophylla,
laciniata, asplenifolia*® and incisa of Fagus sylvatica,
Alnus glutinosa laciniata, A. glutinosa quercifolia and A.
glutinosa oxyacanthifolia are instances to which numer-
ous others might be added. It would seem that the
laciniate forms of Mercurialis annua, observed by
Marchant, would find a place here.*®
The repeated sudden appearance of the same variety
has been noted by various authors. Darwin, Korschin-
sky,‘ the late director of the St. Petersburg Botanic
Garden, and de Vries*S give numerous instances. Thisel-
ton Dyer was able to show the repeated formation of at
least two new varieties of Cyclamen latifolium.*® Many,
from personal experience, will be able to supply other
instances. And while most of the cases which come to
our notice probably are explainable through accidental
transportation of seed or through Mendelian splitting of
a hybrid between the species and a retrograde variety or
through atavism,” there are others which do not admit
# This variety, like cut-leaved varieties of other species, not infrequently
shows atavism in certain shoots. See de Vries, ‘‘Atavismus durch Samen
und durch Knospen’’ (‘‘Mutationstheorie,’’ 1: 482), and also R. G.
Leavitt, ‘‘ Partial one Sy in Leaves of the Fern-leaved Beech,’’ Ehodora,
6: 45, 1904; O. Paulsen, ‘‘Blivende Axelblade hos Boegen,’’ Bot. Tidskr.,
24: 281, 1902; A eden ‘t Contributo alla teratologia vegetale,’’ E. 8.
Bot., Hai 44, 1902.
“This variation in the degree of laciniation within a single species
ought to throw some light on ‘‘unit-characters.’’ If we consider—as I
believe generally is done—laciniation to be a ‘‘unit-character’’ it would
seem that such a ‘‘unit-character’? may be subject to considerable varia-
tion, though the degree of variation is constant or at least approximately
ch individual case. This relative stability of the varietal character
of course does not prevent the extremes of each degree of variation from
rschinsky, 8. Tienen gee und Evolution,’’ Flora, 89, 240, 1901.
‘3 íí Species and Varieties nd
“ Thiselton Dyer, W ties Cultural Evolution of Cyclamen lati-
folium,’? Proc. Roy. se "61: 135, 1897. See also J. Denman, ‘(The
Sporting Peculiarity of ihe, Paria Cyclamen,’’ Gard. Chron., 3d Ser.,
29: 266, 1900.
= Among the plants cultivated in the experimental grounds of D. M.
_ Ferry & Co., of Detroit, Mich., is a variety of cabbage bearing the name
No. 539] ORIGIN OF SPECIES IN NATURE 661
of such an interpretation. Thus the finding by Mr. W.
H. Ransome, of several plants of the four-leaved variety
of Fragaria vesca at a point about twenty miles west of
Kalispel, Flathead Co., Mont. A new form, which has
appeared at various times and which because of the na-
ture of the variation is incapacitated from reproducing
itself by seed, would from this very fact constitute an
ideal illustration of repeated mutation, since a hybrid
origin of the individuals which appeared later, is ex-
cluded. Such an instance is yielded by the wheat-ear
carnation, Dianthus Caryophyllus imbricatus. <A sterile
variety, it is propagated vegetatively. First described
in the eighteenth century, and since then the subject of
comment on the part of several teratologists, its sudden
appearance has been noted in different stocks and at
various times and places." Instances of similar mal-
formations may be met with from time to time. Thus
Ballard®? describes a sunflower in which the flowers were
replaced by scales.
It is a question whether the plants of Arctium minus
laciniatum from Albion are to be considered as derived
from preexisting plants of the variety or whether they
have arisen de novo. Are they perhaps the result of a
mutation of Arctium minus? Plants of both the species
and the variety were found growing near the junction
of Hannah St., Albion and the Kalamazoo River. The
road at this point is bordered by a tall fence between
which and the sidewalk is a space about 14 feet in width.
In a strip about 45 feet in length, among other weeds and
with several specimens of the species, were found about
a dozen individuals of Arctium minus laciniatum. Five
of these were two-year-old plants, the remainder young
rosets. As far as could be judged at the time, but slight
differences exist between the leaves of the rosettes of the
species and of those of the variety. A slight tendency
‘‘Early Winnigstadt.’’? For the last eight or ten years from one to three
per cent. of ‘‘Green Glazed’? have appeared among them.
* De Vries, H., ‘‘Species and Varieties,’’ 228, 1905.
® Gard. Chron., 3d Ser., 30: 347, 1901.
662 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
to laciniation is all that could be observed. Perhaps the
result of the cultural experiments, when a large number
of rosettes can come under observation, will shed more
light upon this point. But there was no danger of con-
fusing the adult plants of the species and of the laciniate
variety, for the latter presented a most striking appear-
ance (Fig. 3). At first glance it seemed as if caterpillars
or grasshoppers had destroyed the greater part of each
leaf; the midrib and larger veins and here and there a
small portion of the blade being left. A closer examina-
tion revealed the fact that the rosette leaves differed least
from those of the normal plant. The leaves a and b in
Fig. 6 show this sufficiently. The latter represents a
e Cc a
Fic. 6. Arctium minus and A. minus laciniatum. a, rose leaf of the species;
b-k, leaves of the variety; l, m, inflorescences of the variety.
rosette leaf of the var. laciniata, the former one of the
species. The next leaves possess a marked laciniation
(Fig. 6 c, d, ete.). As one proceeds higher up the stem,
the laciniation becomes more pronounced, till finally but
a figment is left of the leaves in the region of the inflores-
No. 539] ORIGIN OF SPECIES IN NATURE 663
cence. In fact, there are leaves which possess a midrib
only.
What appears to have been the same plant has been
described in a recent publication,®* as occurring in two
different places about Joliet, Ill., and near Champaign,
Ill. Here the inflorescence is referred to as ‘‘irregular
with numerous small sterile flowers.” It is also reported
from South Bend, Ind.*+ Previously its appearance had
been noted near Jessup, Ind.** Here also the inflores-
cence is described as ‘‘irregular, heads numerous, mostly
small, rudimentary and apparently sterile.” From an
article by Fernald and Wiegand"? it is gathered that
Darlington in his ‘‘Flora Cestrica’’ referred to a
similar plant.5?
To Professor Fernald, who saw Darlington’s speci-
men in the Gray Herbarium, I am indebted for the fol-
lowing: ‘‘Darlington’s sheet bears the note: var. foliis
pinnatifidis vel potius grosse dentatus. West Chester,
Pa., August 25, 1858. These are imperfect specimens of
the plant referred to in Fl. Cestrica, p. 156; but I am not
sure that it is the one spoken of in Gray’s Manual. The
inflorescence always has a eee of half-starved or semi-
abortive appearance. W. D.’
The general appearance of the inflorescence certainly
suggests a teratological development, giving an impres-
sion similar to that caused by inflorescences of Rhus
glabra infested with a certain gall. But an examination
of the living plants, at least such was the case with those
at Albion, at once does away with any question as to
their normal condition. The peculiar ragged appear-
ance of the flowering shoots is merely due to a progres-
5 The American Botanist, 15: 83, 1909.
* The American a? 15: 112, 1909.
* Brown, H. B., ‘‘A Peculiar Scien of Arctium,’’ Plant World,
12: 135, fig. 2, 1909.
= Fernald, M. L., and Wiegand, K. M., ‘‘A bs gen of the Species of
Arctium in North Aita” Rhodora, 12: 43,
“ Darlington, W., ‘‘Flora Cestrica,’’ 436, foi
observed here, cevnaiosinlly, with pinnatifid leaves.’
ences to a variety with pinnatifid leaves met with in Wood’s Flora and in
the earlier editions of Gray’s ‘‘Manual’’ owe their origin to this note.
“tA variety has been
664 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von XLV
sive laciniation as the leaves approach the apex, com-
parable to the seasonal reduction of the blades in Acer
saccharinum var. Wieri, or of the various laciniate vari-
eties of Chelidonium majus referred to above. Also,
Professor Barr was able to gather seed. It should be
stated in this connection that while the seed of the
species, obtained from Albion, germinated readily and
produced typical Arctium seedlings, there appeared in
the seedpans devoted to the variety, seedlings having all
the characteristics of those of Lactuca Scariola integrata,
and these only. Seedlings of species and their varieties
are as a rule so much alike that the thought at once pre-
sented itself that some seed of the wild lettuce either had
become mixed with the seed of the variety or was con-
tained in the soil used for growing the seedlings. Were
either of these suppositions correct, it would seem
curious that the same thing had not occurred in the case
of the seed of the species. At least one of these possibili-
ties could have been eliminated had it been possible to sow
the seed in sterilized soil. As the rosettes grow older
there could be no doubt as to their really belonging to
Lactuca. While therefore these experiments yielded
negative results, it still is possible that their repetition,
with perhaps certain modifications, may result differ-
ently. Also an attempt should be made to obtain seed
from a different source, for it is very well possible that
while one lot of laciniate-leaved plants is fertile, another,
perhaps of distinct origin, is sterile. We find an analogy
in the case of Chelidonium majus laciniatum quoted
above.
Unfortunately but few herbarium specimens are avail-
able for comparison with the specimen of Darlington in
the Gray Herbarium. Through the courtesy of the
curators of the herbaria mentioned we learn that in the
herbarium of the Smithsonian Institution the variety is
represented by a single specimen ‘‘collected by Alfred
E. Ricksecker at Elyria, Lorain County, Ohio, August 1,
1894.’’ It is added that it has very deeply laciniate
leaves and that the venation is very different from that
No. 539] ORIGIN OF SPECIES IN NATURE 665
of the common form. In both these respects it agrees
with the Albion specimens.
From the herbarium of the New York Botanical
Garden, Dr. Marshall A. Howe was kind enough to
write: ‘‘We have in our herbarium apparently only one
specimen of the form that you have in mind.” This
specimen was collected in 1865 at Uxbridge, Mass., hy
J. W. Robbins. Another sheet of this material is in the
Gray Herbarium.
Through the courtesy of Professor William Trelease
we know that a laciniate-leaved variety of the burdock is
represented in the herbarium of the Missouri Botanical
Garden by two herbarium sheets, the one, without date,
bearing a specimen collected in Europe, the other a
specimen collected at New Bedford, Mass., in 1890 by
Harvey. Professor Trelease adds: ‘‘Neither has repre-
sented the extreme cutting of the leaves that yours
shows, but there is enough of it to lead me to think that
as extreme forms might have been collected.’’
Dr. Greenman, of the Field Museum of Natural
History, fails to identify any material in this collection
with A. minus laciniatum, ‘‘unless possibly a very poor
specimen collected at Chelsea, Mass., Sept. 24, 1863, by
J. Blake.’’
While it is probable that the same form occurs in
Europe, thus far it does not appear to have been
recorded in the floras. Inquiries on the part of my
friend Dr. Jongmans, of the State Herbarium at Leyden,
Holland, failed to elicit confirmatory answers, nor does
the variety appear to be represented either in the Leyden
herbarium nor in any of the European herbaria whose
curators I have been able to consult.
It is hoped to amplify, by further inquiries, these some-
what meager data. From what we know at the present
time, it would appear that Arctiwm minus laciniatum is
of comparatively rare occurrence (Fig. 7). I have never
met it except at Albion, though a good deal of territory
was covered both here and abroad and I was looking
for just such variations. Professor Barr, who has
666 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
botanized extensively in the vicinity of Albion, never
has encountered it. From a glance at the map it appears
not improbable that this plant, perhaps having its origin
in Massachusetts, or introduced there from Europe,
Distribution of Arctium minus laciniatum.
_ Fic. 7. Map, showing successive collection of Arctium minus laciniatum in
the United States, 1837-1910, and based upon the data available at the present
time
mec Chester. OO, PE sss ces 837 6. Jessup, Ind. ......--+- 1907
West Chester, Pa, ...... 1858 7. South Bend, Ind. ....- 1909?
2. \ Ohelbey, Maus. is ies os 1863 S Johet fi. at one vets 1909
o - Uxbridge, Maes. o.u6scs 1865 9. Champaign, Ill. ...... 1909
4. New Bedford, Mass, .... 1890 10. Albion, Mich. .......--. 1910
E- EHNE DhE oo eek 94
perhaps in ballast, gradually has been transported to
various points of the compass, the area being covered by
it being limited to the northeastern section of the United
States. The transportation of seed, provided this is
formed at all, is not unlikely. Fairly large gaps, though,
appear between certain of the dates of collection. Thus,
the plant does not appear to have been collected between
1837 and 1858, between 1865 and 1890, between 1894 and
1907, gaps, respectively, of eleven, fifteen and thirteen
years. Yet these lacunæ very well may be accounted for
on the one hand by the failure of botanists to collect the
No. 539] ORIGIN OF SPECIES IN NATURE 667
‘‘abnormal’’ specimen and on the other hand by the lack
of data at our command.
There will not be wanting those who are inclined to
look upon the Albion specimens as well as upon those
from other localities as having originated through muta-
tion. The mutation idea, however, involves the idea of
constancy. Will the laciniate form come true to seed?
If the laciniate plants at Albion are mutants one ought
to be able to get a certain percentage of laciniate plants
from the apparently normal plants in the same locality,
eliminating in the experiment all possibility of hybrid
origin. Experiments to determine this have been inau-
gurated, but at least four or five years must elapse before
their results can be communicated. In view of our
experience with other laciniate forms and provided the
variety produces good seed, the question can hardly be
answered in the negative, though in view of the opinions
expressed by others we must reserve our decision until
the question has been answered by the plant itself. For
this is, after all, the only method which, though perhaps
tedious at times, will lead to a sane and safe conclusion.
Those in sympathy with this idea realize one need not go
far from home to find material as abundant, as interest-
ing, as instructive, as important, as can be met with at a
greater distance. And while the exploration of new or
difficultly accessible regions offers many attractions, he to
whom such an opportunity is not given need not feel
slighted, for work nearer home offers the advantage of
greater facility, especially of observation. Working
along lines similar to those followed by de Vries, Veit
Wittrock, Dahlstedt and Nillson, it is to the botanic
garden we must look for a solution of our problems.
SOME EXPERIMENTAL OBSERVATIONS CON-
CERNING THE BEHAVIOR OF VARIOUS
BEES IN THEIR VISITS TO COTTON
BLOSSOMS. II
H. A. ALLARD
U. S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE
Experiment No. 21—July 29. Observations con-
tinued one half hour, from 1:30 to 2:00 p.m. Three
blossoms arranged in the same row.
(a) Control. Normal American upland cotton blossom
pinned in position.
(b) Control. Normal American upland cotton blossom
pinned in position.
(c) Hawasaki blossom entire pinned in position.
DATA FOR EXPERIMENT No. 21
Distribution by Species | pa Distribution nby Species
Position of Blossom
Total Inspections
Elis plumipes
Honey Bees
Butterfly
Bumble Bees
Unidentified
Bees
Total Entrances
Melissodes sp.
Elis plumipes
Honey Bees
Rutterfly
Bumble Bees
Melissodes sp.
U a |
Bees
=~
Ono
(a) 12
(b) 9
(c)
tow bo
D m
a
2
2 1
Experiments 18, 19, 20 and 21 are essentially similar,
since in each a blossom of the Asiatic cotton, Hawasaki,
is compared with American upland blossoms. The
points of location of the blossoms were unchanged
throughout, but the blossoms themselves were inter-
changed in order to check any advantage which might
obtain from a particular position in the arrangement.
The Hawasaki blossom is smaller in size than the up-
land and much brighter yellow in color with conspicuous
deep cet purple petal spots inside. It was thought
668
=
p
No. 539] THE BEHAVIOR OF BEES 669
that the behavior of visiting bees toward the American
upland blossoms and the dissimilar Asiatic Hawasaki
would perhaps serve to distinguish between the effects of
. color and form as compared with odor in inducing the
visits of bees into cotton blossoms. Results indicate that
the Hawasaki blossom, although quite unfamiliar to our
native bees, is nearly as frequently inspected as our
American upland blossoms.
From the readiness with which bees are led to inspect
the Hawasaki blossoms, single detached cotton petals
and the white convolvulus blossom even after it had
become greatly wilted and collapsed, it is evident that
they are not at first sight led to distinguish cotton
blossoms from other blossoms, ete., by their character-
istic form and color alone. Only by a nearer approach
does the process of inspection become more discrimi-
nating in its nature with regard to the kind of blossom.
Experiment No. 22.—July 29. Period of observation
one half hour, from 2:10 to 2:40 p.m. Two blossoms were
used on two adjacent plants in the same row and similarly
exposed.
(a) Blossom of American upland which had opened
the day before and in consequence had become deep
reddish purple in color.
(b) Control. Normal, recently opened cream-colored
blossom of same variety.
DATA FOR EXPERIMENT No, 22
2 a Distribution by Species g Distribution by Species
= ©
A. $ S 2 Lo] S Š, 3 EA a| ©
Hilti pE} oxi ees pi
go a ŞS g fee} Sa & 3 = | 6l Se
pee a ars xe | 7 | £ lel ai ee
+ 1/3a/43]e8/8/¢|38/3 |] & | 213! 34
$ 3 $ = ¢| 8| a 2 3 2 Sps]
= g S § | lal p n = a | Fl) al}
(a) 12 11 1 |
@) | 26 | 24 2 1 1 ba
Some time after midday, depending upon prevailing
weather conditions, the recently expanded cream-colored
cotton blossoms of that day slowly begin to close again
and assume a reddish color, which by the second day is a
670 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von. XLV
deep reddish purple. In connection with previous obser-
vations it was noted that those older blossoms appeared
to possess little attractiveness for bees. The test was
designed to reveal any differences which might serve to
indicate to the bees that the purple blossom had passed
the stage of usefulness to them. Although bees may in
their flight indicate that the red blossom has been per-
ceived, the inspections are usually far briefer than with
the newly open blossoms of the same day. Rarely does a
bee noticeably check its flight to hover over the red
blossoms in the careful manner that it usually inspects
those newly opened blossoms which are unchanged in
color. The marked difference in color or some peculiarity
of odor seems to inform the bees that an old blossom has
nothing to offer them, since the pollen has been scattered
and nectar is no longer secreted.
Experiment No. 23.—July 30. Time of observation
one half hour, from 9:00 to 9:30 a.m. Three blossoms
are arranged in the same row in equally exposed posi-
tions, as in previous experiments.
(a) Control. Normal upland cotton blossom pinned
in position.
(b) Control. Normal upland cotton blossom pinned
in position.
(c) Normal upland cotton blossoms with a drop or
two of honey at base of petals within.
DATA FOR EXPERIMENT No. 23
$ 2 Distribution by Species w Distribution by Species
ò £ Q mi $<
z 3 a. : a| g| o 5 á 2 13181 %
vei i fs $| 3) 2 £ t/g j3
as a 3 £ Rim g = 3 g el Se
Ss 8 = = | hi © ag 5] 3 E bilsi ge
= 2 D © | 2 a
P13) i ie asi ag | ee elas
EIERE SNE | 218) 8 ajae
irig ila 1 1
(b) 6 2 1 | 2 1 1 1
(e) 7 4 | ee 2 1 1
The presence of a small quantity of honey in the ~
blossom at (c) has not noticeably increased the number
of entrances into it.
No. 539] . THE BEHAVIOR OF BEES 671
The single Melissodes which entered the blossom at
(c) gave evidence of its appreciation of the honey which
it discovered by stubbornly refusing to leave the blossom
until rather violently brushed away.
Experiment No. 24.—July 30. Time of observations
one half hour, from 11:00 to 11:30 a.m. Three blossoms
arranged in same row. This experiment is an exact
repetition of the preceding.
(a) Control. Normal upland cotton blossom pinned
in position.
(b) Control. Normal upland cotton blossom pinned
in position.
(c) Normal blossom with honey at base within.
DATA FOR EXPERIMENT No. 24
& a Distribution by Species g Distribution by Species
= © > LANSA FEE
= 3S i a A
Ge rg EE E UN
g a 8 z ALAIS a 8 = apm Se
BS a S § =en a : = o 29
aa = S 2 p> | 2 ag = a 25
= 4 3 & | 2/2] 38 3 2 S algi 38
g © S x G 2 5 $ 3 3 z
= e | & | § a 5 e | § | § |Blals
(a) 26 1 2 4/13 7 3 2 | 2
(b) 33 22 S Fora 8 2 u e
W | 14 i 2i 0 be
Experiment No. 25—July 30. Time of observations
one half hour, from 11:30 to 12:00 a.m. Three blossoms
arranged in the same row.
(a) Normal cotton blossoms pinned in position as a
control.
(b) Normal cotton blossom with honey added at base
of petals within.
DATA FOR EXPERIMENT No. 25
2 g Distribution by Species z Distribution by Species
5 = = ; x k
Se E E zanr ii?i’ ph
S$ a Š = = Sa 3 9 È fse] 3
2 oe ee eee 4i ije 38
ai i ir a $ Dd
= J © a ~ —
A ee Be eee ea
(a) 22 16 6 4 4
(b) 19 14 4/1 1
fe) | 1 10 3/2 2 re
672 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
(c) Normal cotton blossom pinned in position as a
control.
During the forenoon the weather was dull, so that bees
were less frequent: in their visits.
Experiment No. 26—August 1. Period of observa-
tions one half hour, from 9:00 to 9:30 a.m. Blossoms
arranged in same row as follows:
(a) Normal cotton blossom with honey at base of
petals within.
(b) Normal cotton blossom pinned in position as a
control.
(c) Normal cotton blossom pinned in position as a
control.
DATA FOR EXPERIMENT No. 26
|
Distribution of Species
A 2 Distribution of Species a
ea S a n Lio]
fos} ~ : : w
Sa sil a e ieras | & | paa
7 A $ = |M |S] Se a 3 E |M zg
zg a Š S or ae £] 3 = mie | g9
3 > 2 Z (812 8% | 4 Š & e 3A
= z R] Fay a z 3 4 pe < 2 B f=] =
2 3 3 = TERRE £ $ K] sig É
= & = Ñ a| p z 5
(a) 26 22 i A a Se i 1 0
(b) 27 2 1
c) 20 17 i; s 1
Experiment No. 27.—August 1. Period of observa-
tions one half hour, from 9:00 to 9:30 a.m. Blossoms are
arranged in the same row.
At (a) an unmutilated cotton blossom was pinned in
position. Portions of cotton leaves were carefully cut
out and fastened outside and within the blossom in such
a manner as to extend just to the margin of the petals on
both sides. In this way none of the yellow color of the
petals remained visible. The stamen tube, pistil, etc.,
projected as in a normal blossom. The blossom was
practically without petals, since these were not visible,
although such odors as they may have possessed could .
still diffuse around the blossom. A drop or two of honey
was also added at the base of the petals within in order
to make certain that agreeable odors were present, since
No. 539] THE BEHAVIOR OF BEES 673
these must now necessarily constitute the sole allure-
ment.
At (b) normal blossom pinned in position. The tips
-of the petals were lightly smeared with honey.
At (c) control. Normal cotton blossom pinned in
position.
DATA FOR EXPERIMENT No. 27
A | a Distribution by Species 2 Distribution by Species
= = >
m | 3 : pA S S g | n =]
2 E ae ee ae g| 3 2 * iS ae gee
28 A S E TAJA] Se a 3 E Aim] se
Sa (an) $3 = a a ag pes S s wi 2 | 6&3
z E 2 me | 2) ed gee 3 ~ Se E 3%
$ S.d ua Pes pt 2 cit eee betes
z a = Ñ | ajal z = R [Rl ale
1
Re ee | |
(a) | 0 | |
ay + 3 23 10/1 | 2 | 2
(c) 14 10| 1 | 6 | 6
As shown in previous experiments, the removal of the
petals no longer advertises a cotton blossom to the notice
of bees. The same results are obtained when the petals
are no longer visible, although still attached to the
blossom as at (a). It is natural to suppose that the pres-
ence of honey would add appreciably to the zone of
alluring odors surrounding the blossom.
Without the conspicuous corolla to invite inspection,
however, the bees are not led to approach sufficiently
near to discover the blossom by its attendant odors alone.
These results are not in agreement with some of the
general conclusions of Plateau in his noteworthy mem-
oirs: ‘‘Comment les fleures attirent les insectes.” He
states: ‘‘Les insectes visitent activement les inflores-
cences qui n’ont subi aucune mutilation mais dont la
forme et les couleurs sont masquées par des feuilles
vertes.””3 This would follow only when other attractive
influences were actively operative, as various odors
agreeable to bee visitors.
Experiment No. 28.—August 1. Time of observation
one half hour, from 9:30 to 10:00 a.m. This experiment
makes use of most of the material and the same positions
of the preceding, with the changes as follows:
* Bulletin de l’Académie royale des Sciences, No. 11, November, 1895.
674 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
(a) Outer leaf covering removed from the blossom
used at (a) in preceding experiment, thus making the
outer surface of the petals visible. Honey at the base
within, as before.
(b) Normal blossom pinned in position as a control.
No honey has been added to this blossom.
(c) Normal blossom used in preceding experiment
with petals removed.
DATA FOR EXPERIMENT No. 28
Distribution by Species
è ERREI
3 a Distribution by Species g
> 3 : Pe a : % a j| og
Se 3 a >z Fe S73 K a $ Sig S
g A % = ® | faa] C=] =| & es Q fea) =
as 2 x g m Sa 5 Š g m =
oa s = Š lej a2 = Š = bh! 2; 8s
3 S 3 eij] 24 r 2 R 2 2) 3a
= z 2 a a oA g£ 2 & =| g =
a Rg % Bl] = $ 2
$ Sie ee tes es | §$ |] § Rara
oe = = R JEJA] p = 8 aka
(a) 9 6 0
b) 11 1
(c) 1 1
By the removal of the outer covering of the blossoms
at (a), which in the previous experiment received no in-
spections, it became nearly or quite as attractive as the
control at (b). The blossom at (c), however, no longer
afforded means of attracting the bees. In this experi-
ment and the previous one the corolla at (a) was concealed
with portions of cotton leaves to guard against introducing
repellent odors which may have attended the use of any
other material. In the course of this experiment the
number of bees flying about became much reduced toward
ten o’clock, although the day was clear, hot and sunny.
The writer was even forced to postpone his observations
for the remainder of the forenoon owing to the scarcity
of visiting bees.
Experiment No. 29.—August 1. Period of observation
one half hour, from 2:00 to 2:30 p.m. The material is
arranged in the same row.
At (a) a cotton bud not due to open until the next
morning had its petals quite fully pulled open so as to
resemble a naturally opening blossom.
No. 539] THE BEHAVIOR OF BEES 675
At (b) a second cotton bud due to open the next morn-
ing had its petals partly pulled open.
At (c) a normal cotton blossom growing in situ as a
control.
DATA FOR EXPERIMENT No, 29
h a Distribution by Species z Distribution by Species
= 9 ò
= B : % FRA a : &
9 A © a n ©
eee oe te ELS a Pe a
ao a 2 £ m Sa a S g = Bn
=” as 3 Š h| 2| 8S H 3 = si 21 88
Se ee ee a ee
Z S > $ oi 818 = Ss S 318] 8
ñ 5 = A | Ala} e z = À | Ala} ep
|
(a) 15 5 10 0
(b) 2 0
(c) 24 4 20 14 14
In this experiment it was intended to observe the
behavior of bees toward immature buds at (a) and (b)
in comparison with fully expanded, mature blossoms.
It was assumed that the former, owing to their imma-
turity, would perhaps prove less attractive to bees
through the sense of smell than the fully matured
blossoms. Although not definitely proved, it is reason-
able to suppose that the processes of active nectar secre-
tion simultaneously attend the unfolding of the petals
and the shedding of the pollen. It would then follow that
the odor of the unopened buds at (a) and (b) would
prove less alluring than the blossom at (c).
The yellow petals of the blossom at (a) have served
to invite frequent inspection, although at (b) this is not
as evident. This difference may depend upon the fact
that the bud at (b) was much less conspicuous, since the
petals have been only slightly pulled open. Whatever
the true explanation, the mature, fully unfolded blossom
which serves as a control at (c) has received many more
inspections, nearly 60 per cent. of which are actual
entrances.
Experiment No. 30.—August 2. Period of observation
one hour, from 9:30 to 10:30 a.m. Two blossoms were
nin in the same row in equally conspicuous posi-
ions.
At (a) a very clean, thin 5X7 glass plate was sup-
676 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von XLV
ported in front of a fully opened cotton blossom pinned
in position. The surrounding cotton leaves were then
carefully drawn in closely around the plate so as to over-
lap the edges and most of the glass surface. In this
arrangement, although the blossom was plainly visible
through the glass, only a small portion of the glass sur-
face remained in view.
At (b) control. A fully opened cotton blossom was
pinned in position.
DATA FOR EXPERIMENT No. 30
h a Distribution by Species PA Distribution by Species
K E] 2 aa ORE A A TES
3 : 8 .
SoS oe Te eee Se ee fe ee
og a $ AE £ pes Š Sl S| g
=} n = Š = = = S = fa] Sn
aS fi Š m pe S] Š o =e
= H $ Š pi 2 a3 S 3 P| a] of
= E 2 S |$i¢1s3 13 3 | ale) 2"
$ 5 Š 2 elsi a S S 2-7 Si eis
= S = Ñ Hilal p a = 3 | a |
| amas: POT
(a) | 18 | 6 34 0 | |
(b) | 37 | 20 714 ) 514
Of those bees which attempted to inspect the blossom
at (a), eight flew more or less forcibly against the glass,
including two small unidentified bees, one Bombus sp.,
two honey bees and three Melissodes. One small bee
tried persistently several times to fly through the glass
toward the blossom just behind it. It is at once obvious
that the blossom at (a) invited inspection by passing bees
solely through the sense of sight.
Experiment No. 31.—August 9. Observations con-
tinued one hour, from 9:00 to 10:00 a.m.
Two blossoms were used in the same row as before. A
box of thin wood was carefully constructed for this
experiment. The dimensions were such that both cover
and bottom were made of thin clear glass by using for
each a 5X7 glass plate. These plates fitted tightly in
lateral grooves. The box was about 4 inches deep, 80
that the end of a cotton branch together with its leaves
and blossoms could be carefully pushed into a natural
position within. By sliding the glass cover into place
the box became practically air-tight. The blossom was
plainly visible to passing bees, although any attractive
No. 539] THE BEHAVIOR OF BEES 677
odors which it diffused could no longer act as allure-
ments. When placed in position among the cotton limbs
the box and glass were almost completely concealed by
drawing in and fastening around it a number of the sur-
rounding leaves. This box enclosed the blossom at (a).
At (b) control. A natural blossom pinned in position.
The blossom at (a) received only two inspections, both
by small, unidentified bees. The blossom at (b) received
only five inspections, three being by Melissodes and two
by honey bees. There were no entrances at (b).
Experiment No. 32.—August 9. Observations con-
tinued for one half hour, from 10 to 10:30 a.m. This
experiment was identical with the preceding, except a
third artificial blossom was added.
(a) Same blossom enclosed in the glass case as used at
(a) in Experiment 31.
(b) The same control blossom pinned in ee NE
(c) An artificial paper blossom of crepe paper simu-
lating a cotton blossom in color.
The blossom at (a) received one inspection by a Melis-
sodes which hovered in front of the glass a few seconds
only.
(b) Received eight inspections, which include two
entrances by honey bees. The six inspections were
entirely by Melissodes. Three bees inspected the arti-
ficial paper blossoms at (c), including one each by a
Melissodes, an unidentified bee, and a honey bee, which
paused for a few seconds over the blossom but did not
enter. During the last few days bee visitors have been
rather too infrequent for satisfactory work, probably in
part owing to the partly cloudy forenoons.
Experiment No. 33—August 11. Observations con-
tinued for about one half hour, from 9:00 to 9:30 a.m.
Three blossoms are arranged in a row.
At (a) three petals were placed in position on a leaf
which was spread out flat and held between two thin clean
5X7 glass plates bound firmly together. This was placed
in position among the branches of a plant and was nearly
concealed by overlapping around it a number of cotton
678 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von. XLV
leaves. In this arrangement the yellow petal color still
remained perceptible to the visual powers of bees.
At (b) the detached petals of a cotton blossom were
enclosed in a 250-c.c. graduated flask which was stoppered
and fastened among the cotton leaves. The yellow petals
were plainly visible through the clear thin glass of the
ask,
At (c) a normal cotton blossom as a control.
(a) Received no inspections.
(b) Received one inspection by a honey bee which
touched the flask.
(c) Received three inspections by honey bees. Two
bees did not enter the blossom but alighted outside to
get at the extra-involucral nectaries. During this experi-
ment the bees were too infrequent visitors to make any
results conclusive.
Experiment No. 34—August 12. Time of observa-
tions 45 minutes, from 1:30 to 2:15 p.m. This experiment
was an exact duplicate of the previous one.
(a) Petals of cotton blossom on a leaf between glass
plates as at (a) in Experiment 33.
(b) Petals of cotton blossoms enclosed in a flask as at
(b) in Experiment 33.
(c) Normal blossoms growing in situ as a control.
The blossom at (a) was twice inspected by Melissodes.
The petals in the flask at (b) were inspected two times by
bees, once by a honey bee and once by a small, unidenti-
fied bee. The blossom at (c) was inspected six times, in-
cluding five entrances. One inspection was made by a
small, unidentified bee, four entrances were by honey
bees, and one entrance by a Melissodes.
For several days it was rather difficult to secure sat-
isfactory data, as the bees were much less frequent visit-
ors. The species of Melissodes, which were extremely
common at the beginning of the experiments finally be-
came far less common, although honey bees greatly
increased. It is very interesting to note that many honey
bees finally began to confine their visits solely to the
outer involucral nectaries instead of entering the blos-
No. 539] THE BEHAVIOR OF BEES 679
soms. This change of habit seemed to become quite gen-
eral at about the same period, for the writer noted it in
all parts of the cotton field.
Throughout the period of observations the bees by
their behavior and varying numbers showed themselves
extremely sensitive to atmospheric changes, temperature
relations, air movements, moisture, sunshine, ete. At
times conditions even too obscure for human perception
may have regulated their activities. The composition of
the bee fauna to be observed in cotton fields shows much
variation, depending upon the time of day, prevailing
weather and seasonal influences. The position and expo-
sure of the cotton field with relation to various local phys-
iographic features, as type of soil, nearness to woods,
swamps, hills and other crops also greatly influence the
relative numbers and kinds of bees.
While carrying on his observations the writer noted
that the bees, Melissodes, were exceedingly abundant
among cotton grown on certain heavy, red-clay soils.
These bees were much less abundant in fields on the
lighter, sandy loams in some other localities. Honey bees
are especially noticeable near bee trees or domestic hives.
The marked abundance of other bees in particular
localities likewise probably depends upon the proximity
of the plants to their favorite breeding places.
Nectar glands are especially abundant on the cotton
plant, including the leaves as well as the blossoms. The
blossoms are supplied with several sets of nectaries.
Cotton blossoms with their abundant supplies of readily
accessible pollen and nectar and their open structure
exclude few insect visitors. It follows that a consider-
able number of species of bees, wasps and other insects
are at all times especially common visitors among cotton
blossoms.
During the time the experiments previously described
were in progress nearly 2,000 bees were observed to per-
ceive, inspect or enter the blossoms and other material
involved. 1,645 of thesevisits were distributed as
follows: 1,381 or 83.9 per cent. were by species of Melis-
680 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vor XLV
sodes. 130 or 7.8 per cent. were by honey bees. 40 or
2.4 per cent. were by bumble bees. 83 or 5 per cent. were
by various unidentified bees.
Eleven visits were made by Elis plumipes and one
by a large butterfly. The size and yellow color of the
petals serve to make cotton blossoms particularly con-
spicuous in contrast with their shaded background of
dark green foliage. Once visiting insects have entered
a cotton field, there is little doubt but that their visual
powers almost wholly enable them to discover the
blossoms. This is indicated by those experiments where
the corolla of certain blossoms has been covered or
entirely removed, since following this procedure the re-
maining portions of the blossoms were unvisited. The
size and general appearance of cotton blossoms do not
appear to be of great importance in initiating the process
of inspection, since a single petal may receive as many
inspections as the control. It is of interest to note in this
connection that in experiments 14 and 15 the bees did not
discriminate between the white convolvulus and cotton
blossoms at least until after closer inspection. When
such artificial material as cloth or paper was used, al-
though the color more or less resembled cotton petals,
the bees were rarely induced to inspect it closely. This
discrimination may depend upon perceptible differences
in color and texture rather than the presence of repellent
odors which the material possessed. Many eminent
observers have adduced a great deal of evidence which
proves beyond doubt that bees develop keen powers of
discernment in their associations with the structural
details of different flowers.
The actual number of entrances into cotton blossoms
is small in comparison with those instances when
blossoms have been merely perceived or inspected. The
writer’s observations show that of 1,061 inspections of
the control blossoms only 129, or 12.1 per cent., were
actual entrances. One hundred and twenty of these en-
trances were distributed among the several kinds of
bees, as follows : 45, or 37.5 per cent., were by Melissodes;
No. 539] THE BEHAVIOR OF BEES 681
45, or 37.5 per cent., were by honey bees; 6, or 5.0 per cent.,
were by Elis plumipes; 16, or 13.3 per cent., were by
bumble bees; 8, or 6.6 per cent., were by various small
unidentified bees. A single entrance was made by a
large butterfly.
Although it seems clear that the corolla of cotton
blossoms invites the first approach of the bees through
their visual sense, it is not so easy to determine the rela-
tive importance of the sense of sight and smell involved
in their nearer inspections. Just why do so few bees
decide to enter? In their careful inspection of a single
petal or a suspicious blossom is the sense of sight alone
involved? Except for a single Elis plumipes, no bee has
ever alighted upon detached cotton petals, although
these have served to attract attention quite as often as
the control blossoms. It is not unusual, however, for
the bees to inspect these structures very intently, almost
touching the surface in their movements over them.
The bees have just as persistently refused to enter all
artificial blossoms or blossoms mutilated by removing
a part or all of the petals. In experiment 6 a bee was
completely deceived by the unreal structure at (c) made
to simulate an expanding bud by the use of actual cot-
ton petals and portions of a cotton leaf. In this instance
the bee inspected and finally squeezed itself down be-
tween the petals. Unless the fresh petals themselves
possess a characteristic odor, odors such as might
emanate from a normal blossom were entirely lacking
and, therefore, could not have induced the bee to enter.
Plateau concludes that visual conspicuousness by means
of bright colors is of no advantage whatever to blossoms
So far as insect visitors are concerned. He claims that
if in nature all blossoms were green like the surround-
ing foliage, they would be just as readily discovered by
bees and other insects in virtue of their odor. The
writer’s experiments in the field indicate that conspicu-
Ousness in virtue of their position and yellow coloration
1S a very important factor in leading bees and other in-
Sects to perceive cotton blossoms.
682 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von. XLV
It does not appear that the addition of small quanti-
ties of honey either upon the petals themselves or at the
base of the flower within appreciably increased the in-
spections or entrances, although if a bee chanced to dis-
cover this honey, its fondness for it was evinced by its
strong reluctance to leave.
It is probable that the inspections are largely of a
visual nature, though these may be supplemented by
certain odors when the blossoms are more closely ex-
amined. Many noted observers, especially Miiller, have
adduced abundant evidence to prove that the visual
power of bees becomes very critical in their behavior
toward minute differences of floral structure.
The bee Melissodes bimaculata, which is probably by
far the commonest of this genus in certain cotton fields
at Thompson’s Mills, behaves somewhat differently
from other bees in its inspections. Its flight is swift and
irregular, and its entrance into a blossom is usually
preceded by a more careful examination than that re-
sorted to by bumble bees, the common honey bee, or the
wasp Elis plumipes. It is the usual procedure for the
last to fly straight into a blossom or almost drop into
it from above, apparently without troubling itself about
any preliminary examination. The bumble bees too are
less fastidious in their closer inspection.
Many instances are recorded which illustrate the habit
of bees to profit by previous successful or unsuccessful
experiences. A sort of memory by association is de-
veloped so that older, more experienced bees often ap-
pear to work among blossoms to much better advantage
than younger bees. As an illustration of the influence
of previous association upon subsequent behavior, the
writer cites the following interesting instance which has
come under his observation at Thompson’s Mills, North
Georgia. It has been mentioned that the common honey
bee sooner or later discovers the outer involucral nec-
taries of cotton blossoms and visits them very con-
stantly, seemingly in preference to the inner floral
No. 539] THE BEHAVIOR OF BEES 683
nectaries. These particular nectaries, although present
in our common American cottons, are never found on
the Asiatic cottons, Hawasaki, ete. In the writer’s
variety tests these foreign cottons have been grown side
by side and sometimes intermingled in the rows with
the American cottons. The honey bees, in passing from
blossom to blossom, visiting each time the outer involu-
eral nectaries occasionally met the Asiatic variety. The
previous association with the American cottons and
their outer involucral nectaries led these bees to visit
without success similar structures of the unfamiliar
Asiatic variety. The bees quickly recognized their error
after alighting and left the blossoms. Is this procedure
other than the working of an associative memory? The
writer is of the opinion that the honey bees do not dis-
cover these extra-floral nectaries until after more or
less association with cotton blossoms each summer.
This habit of the honey bee appears to become more
noticeable later in the season. During the season of
1908 it appeared to be very general. It is a habit which
seems to be almost wholly confined to honey bees.
These visits of the bees to the outer basal portion of
the Asiatic cotton blossoms indicate that the visual
powers alone were employed throughout the process.
Although the bees first discovered the blossoms by their
conspicuous petals, it is evident that they were led to
search for outer involucral nectaries on the Asiatic cot-
ton blossoms solely by their familiarity with the general
form and structure of cotton blossoms.
As an illustration of associative memory this behavior
of the honey bees is exactly similar to the behavior of
certain bees in experiments conducted by Pérez‘, who
used scarlet pelargoniums which are not visited by bees,
Since those flowers possess no nectar. He added honey
to certain flowers which were then visited by bees, and
says:
* Pérez, J., ‘Notes Zoologiques’’ (Actes de la Société Linnéenne de
bition "Vol. XLVII, série V, tome VII, pp. 250-251, 1894).
684 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
La couleur écarlate s’était si bien associée dans leur souvenir à
idée du miel, qu’elles se passaient à la fin sur des fleurs de cette couleur
n’en ayant pas recu, et ne les quittaient qu’ apres s’étre assurées, par
un examen scrupuleux et persistant, qu’elles n’avaient rien à y
recueillir.
A translation of his own words follows: ‘‘Scarlet color
and honey had become so closely associated in their
minds that they finally alighted upon flowers of the
same color which had received none, and would not leave
until they had assured themselves by a scrupulous and
persistent examination that these flowers had nothing to
offer them.’’ Plateau gets precisely the same results
when he says:
Lorsque l'insecte avait ainsi absorbé le liquide d’un certain nombre
defleurs miellees, il lui arrivait de se diriger vers les Pelargoniums non
nunis de miel.” .
‘t After the insects had gathered honey from a number
of flowers to which it had been added, they were then
led to visit Pelargonium blossoms which had not re-
ceived it.” These observations are hardly in agree-
ment with the rather radical conclusions of Bethe® that
bees are devoid of sense impressions, and are incapable
of profiting by previous experiences, that their activities
are purely reflex, mechanical. Forel, Wasman, Buttel-
Reepen, Huber and others have shown, nevertheless,
that bees do profit by previous experiences and form
habits under certain conditions. Lovell? has shown that
once bees have been accustomed to visiting a certain
color, they tend to return to it regularly until it is to
their advantage to change. Once the bees have entered
the cotton fields, it is quite obvious that they are led to
discover the blossoms by the conspicuous corolla. It
would be interesting to learn just how they find the fields
themselves. Although a single cotton blossom does not
: * Bulletin de 1’ Academie royale de Belgique, 3e série, 33, January, 1897.
- © Bethe Albrecht, ‘‘Durfen wir Ameisen und Beinen parohia Quali-
täten zuschrieben?’’ in Arch. f. d. ges. Physiologie, Bd. 70, 1898.
"Lovell, John H., ‘‘The Color Sense of the Honey Bee: Can Bees Dis-
tinguish Colors?’’ AMER. NAT., Vol. XLIV, No. 527, November, 1910.
No. 539] THE BEHAVIOR OF BEES 685
seem especially odoriferous, it is not improbable that a
field of well-developed cotton plants may readily adver-
tise its location to the olfactory sense of bees by odorif-
erous clouds, so to speak, which are wafted away with
every air-movement. During a hot, sunny afternoon the
combined odors volatilizing from the great numbers of
foliage and floral nectaries, the pollen, etc., must be very
considerable. Especially during clear sunny days fol-
lowing periods of cloudy or rainy weather bees become
unusually active and numerous. Many of these visitors
have no doubt learned the location of the fields by previ-
ous association.
THE DISTRIBUTION OF PURE LINE MEANS
DR. J. ARTHUR HARRIS
CARNEGIE INSTITUTION OF WASHINGTON
SEvERAL times recently we have been told that the
means of a character in a series of pure lines form a
‘“Quetelet’s Curve.’ Some of those responsible for this
assertion seem to attribute a particular virtue to ‘‘ Que-
telet’s Law,’’ and to feel that the statement that the
means of a series of pure lines form a chance curve fur-
nishes uncontrovertible evidence for the genotype theory
of heredity. The questions which interest the biologist
are, first, whether the statement is true in the sense that
it is made on a sufficient body of actual observations, and
second, what is the general biological significance to be
attached to it, if true.
But among these biologists the interpretation of the
facts has apparently preceded the demonstration of the
existence of the facts themselves. Now while it is not at
all unlikely that the means of genotypes—if such entities
in Johannsen’s sense of the term do exist in nature—
form a chance curve, it by no means follows that con-
versely a series of averages which can be arranged in a
symmetrical variation polygon proves or even suggests
the existence of differentiated pure lines or biotypes.
Yet just such differences in means are being accepted
and cited without criticism as valid evidence in support
of Johannsen’s sweeping generalizations.
A case in point is a paper by Roemer? on pure lines in
peas. It is with regret that one criticizes Roemer’s
*Compare, for example, in this connection: Nilsson-Ehle, Bot. Not., 1907,
pp. 113-140; Lang, Zeitschr, f. Ind. Abst.- u. Vererbungsl., Vol. 4, pp. 15-
16, 1910; Spillman, Amer. NAT., Vol. 44, p. 761, 1910; Pearl, AMER. NAT.,
Vol. 45, P. 423, 1911.
a , T., ‘“‘Variabilitätsstudien,’? Arch. f. Rassen- u. Gesellsch.-
Biologie, Vol. 7, pp. 397-469, 1910.
686
No. 539] DISTRIBUTION OF PURE LINE MEANS 687
paper. It is an exceedingly laborious Arbeit and appa-
rently done with scrupulous care. One who himself has
experienced the labor of calculating a few tables of con-
stants has sympathy for a worker who has industriously
filled pages with them. But the tenability of the geno-
type theory is one of the most pressing of current evolu-
tionary problems, and all available evidence must be
scrutinized. Roemer’s data are chosen for two very
excellent reasons, the first of which is that of all of the
men who have discussed the disposition of the means of
pure lines in a ‘‘ Quetelet’s Curve,’’ he is, so far as I am
aware, the only one who has put on record sufficient data
for a critical test of his conclusions. If without over-
trying the case, as the lawyers have it, we can give the
second reason, it is that Roemer’s data and conclusions
have been accepted as perfectly valid by genotype
specialists. One of them, for example, says:
The work is essentially a confirmation, with another plant, of
Johannsen’s epoch-making investigations on beans, though it lacks any
extensive studies on the effect of selection within the pure line. The
essential objective point of Roemer’s research is rather to determine
the biometrie characteristics of pure lines as such in relation to the
general population. Among the more important general results are
the following:
1. The different biotypes in a population arrange themselves in fre-
quency distributions in accord with Quetelet’s Law.
2. No relation was found to exist between the variability of the
biotypes (i. e., variation within the general population) and variation
within the pure lines.
Our problem is twofold. First, we have to determine
whether Roemer is really justified in regarding his lines
as differentiated. Second, we have to inquire concerning
the critical value of his data as evidence in support of
the genotype theory of heredity. Incidently we shall
make the first of these problems serve as an illustration
of the use of a coefficient of individual prepotency recently
proposed in these pages.
Harris, J. Arthur, ‘‘A Coefficient of Individual Prepotency for Stu-
dents of Heredity,’’ Amer. Nart., Vol. 45, pp. 471-478. 1911.
688 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
Il. THE PROBLEM or DIFFERENTIATION IN RoEMER’S
Pure LINES
The method of Roemer’s study was very simple. In
1908 a population of pea plants was grown from a sample
of ordinary seed. In 1909 the offspring of each of a num-
ber of these plants was studied separately, and the means
of several characters calculated. By a comparison of
selected pairs of these means Roemer concludes that the
several lines differ from each other, and by a seriation of
all the line means he obtains the Quetelet’s curve.
Such evidence as this can not be accepted. Every
mean calculated on a sample of individuals is more or less
untrustworthy as a measure of the character in individ-
uals in general, because of the errors of random sam-
pling, and in attaching significance to a series of averages
this fact must be fully taken into account. It can not
adequately be allowed for by a comparison of selected
cases with their probable errors. ©
First Test. A Comparison of the Variability within the
‘“‘Pure Line” with that of the “Population”
One of the tests of the presence of differentiated
‘“biotypes,’’ ‘‘genotypes’’ or ‘‘pure lines’’ within a
‘‘population”’ is the comparison of the intra-line with the
population variability. If both be the same there is no
justification in the assumption that the population is
composed of a number of differentiated pure lines.* If
the variability of the population is greater than that of
the individual lines it may (or may not) comprise a series
of ‘‘genotypes.”’
The reason for this is obvious. The standard devia-
tion within the pure line, ø, describes only the differences
occurring among the individuals of the group, while ž,
the standard deviation of the group, includes also the
amounts by which the several lines are differentiated.
* This is, of course, under condition that the individuals of the several
pure lines are not reared under conditions which tend to increase artificially
their variability beyond that of the population.
No. 539] DISTRIBUTION OF PURE LINE MEANS 689
Roemer does not give us the population standard
deviations for the several characters in 1909 but only the
averages, Mi, Ms, Ms, °**, Ms, and the standard deviations
Tis Ta, C3, t, os We may approximate the desired con-
stants very closely indeed® by the following method.
Let there be s samples or pure lines of n4, na, na, +t, Ns
individuals each, with means my My, Mz, ***, Ma, e
standard deviations o,, o,, ¢ -, os. These form the
population S(n) =N, for hick the physical constants
x and M are desired.
The mean is clearly M — S (nm)/S (n).
In calculating the S.D. we may take the first two
rough moments, v,’, v⁄, about any point we one and
adjust by the familiar formula o?=p,—v,’—v,’. If
the moments be taken about 0° v,’— M, and it is at once
clear that for the population
BF A] (Kum)?
TEN a) gogi
when S indicates a summation for all groups or lines.’
The population constants have been calculated by these
formulæ for all the characters of Roemer’s two large
series. He has given population constants, M and 3,
for the 1908 series, the parents of the 1909 plants.
The two are conveniently laid side by side for com-
parison in Table I.8 The data in hand hardly seem to
justify detailed comparison with reference to probable
* There is no approximation in the formula. The accuracy in practise
depends solely upon the trustworthiness of the original m’s and a’s, and
upon the number of decimal places retained in the arithmetical routine.
* For several advantages in doing this see AMER. NAT., Vol. 44, pp. 693-
699. 1910.
' The application of the formula to Roemer’s data is of course exceed-
ingly laborious, involving as it does the determination and summation by
pairs of 3,108 squares, and the summation of the products of their totals
by the frequencies upon which they are based. The publication of a little
tabulated data would have reduced many days’ labor necessary for a critical
test of his results to a few hou
*The constants for 1908 are tuken from Roemer’s Table I. Those for
1909 are calculated by the formule given above
690 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von. XLV
errors. It will be noted at once that for all the char-
acters the mean is higher in 1909°—indeed for some
characters in the ‘‘Kapital Erbse” it is almost double
that found in 1908! With one exception the standard
TABLE I
COMPARISON OF PHYSICAL CONSTANTS FOR 1908 AND 1909 POPULATIONS
Averages Standard Deviations paS Vari-
Character and Com- |———_—
parison Gelbe Svalöfs Gelbe fanran Gelbe Svalöfs
Viktoria- | Kapital- | Viktoria- p reent Viktoria- | Kapital-
Erbse se Erbse T Erbse bse
Weight of Plant
1908 Population 13.09 7.99 4.250 2.815 32.47 35.23
1909 ae 20.82 20.39 6.568 7.127 31.54 34.95
1909/ ee —— 1.59 2.55 1.545 2.531 97 .99
Length of
1908 Popa 114.96 | 78.96 12.985 | 12.575 11.30 | 15.95
1909 = 136.81 | 158.42 16.331 | 20.163 11.93 | 12.73
1909/1908 Ratio 1.19 2.01 1.257 1.603 1.06 .80
Thickness of Stem
1908 Population 24.03 | 20.50 2.766 2.081 11.50 | 10.15
1909 di 24.05 2.390 2.933 9.48 | 12.19
1909/1908 Ratio 1.05 3:47 .864 1.409 .82 1.20
Number of Pods
_ 1908 Population 4.59 5.62 1.364 1.805 20.72 | 82.12
1909 6.48 11.54 1.987 4,263 30.66 | 36.95
1909/1908 Ratio 1.41 2.05 1.456 2.361 1.48 1.15
Weight of Pods
1908 Population 9.71 5.76 3.192 2.184 | 32.80 | 37.95
1909 s 11.28 | 10.26 4.290 4.407 | 38.03 | 42.98
Pad /1908 ie 1.16 1.78 1.343 2.017 1.16 1.13
um
1908 Population 19.64 | 24.02 6.267 8.418 | 31.91 | 35.05
1909 26.60 | 45.11 9.162 | 18.633 | 34.44 | 41.31
ese boy Ratio 1.35 1.88 1.461 2.213 1.08 1.18
Weight of Seeds
1908 Population 7.63 4.56 2.569 1.883 | 33.67 | 40.21
1909 8.56 7.26 3.511 3.376 40.99 | 46.49
1909/1908 Ratio 1.12 1.59 1.366 1.841 1.22 1.16
deviations in 1909 are higher than those in 1908. Mean
and standard deviation are generally closely correlated,
and this doubtless accounts for the greater variability
of the 1909 series. Possibly, however, the 1909 plants
°” Roemer states that conditions for growth in 1909 were superior to
those in 1908,
No. 539] DISTRIBUTION OF PURE LINE MEANS 691
were grown under conditions more heterogeneous than
those to which the 1908 plants were exposed. In the
second case, the S.D. might be directly raised, 7. e.,
heterogeneity in the crop may be merely a reflection of
heterogeneity in the substratum.
ere is no way of determining whether Roemer’s
cultural conditions were more heterogeneous in 1909
than in 1908, but it must be noted that in ten of the four-
teen cases the coefficient of variation is higher in 1909.
Two ratios are to be examined,
Mean Pure Line Variability —
Parental Population Variability’
Mean Pure Line Variability
General Population Variability’
Consider first the ratio of the mean pure line to the pa-
rental population variability. If the offspring of the
individual parents are differentiated we should expect
to find the mean variability of the pure lines less than
that of the parent population, providing, of course,
that innate tendencies are not obscured by environmental
factors. Table II° gives the necessary data.
Now the remarkable thing about these standard devia-
tions is that in the most cases the variability within the
individual ‘‘pure lines” in 1909 is greater than that of
a mixture of all the pure lines in 1908. The excess is
very striking in several cases. Of the fourteen com-
parisons, thirteen show a higher variability within the
pure line than in the population. For the ‘‘Viktoria’’
° For 1908 the population = and C.V. are from Roemer’s Table I. The
1909 population = and C.V. have been calculated by the formule given
above. The mean pure line standard deviations have been taken from
Roemer’s Tables II-III. None of the constants have been rechecked, since
the original data are not available. The mean value of 12.13 for thickness
of stem in Table II is obviously a printer’s slip for 2.13. The mean pure
line coefficients of variation are from Roemer’s Table X. These were not
calculated by dividing the sum of the coefficients of variation of the indi-
vidual pure lines by the number of lines, but by dividing the mean standard
deviation of the pure lines by the mean average of the pure lines.
R
692 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
the average M.P.L./Parental ratio is 1.327 while for the
‘*Kapital’’ it is 1.996. The “pure line’’ variability is
thus from 30 to 100 per cent. in excess of that of the
population.
TABLE II
COMPARISONS OF MEAN PURE LINE AND POPULATION VARIABILITY
1908-1909. Stand-
1908-15 1909. O 1909-1909. Stand-
ard Deviations
nt of Variation ard Deviations
Character and Comparison |
Gelbe Svalifs Gelbe Svalifs Gelbe Svalifs
Viktoria- Kapital- Viktoria- | Kapital- | Viktoria-| Kapital-
Erbse Er bse Erbse Erbse Erbs Er
Weight of Stem
POISON sci cic cess 4.250 2.815 32.47 35.23 6.568 TIZ
Mean Pure Line.......... 5 .96 6.44 28.53 | 31.40 | 5.96 6.44
L./Pop. Ratio ...... 1.402 | 2.288 .88 89 | .907 | .904
Langit of | > me
Population. senii 12.985 | 12.575 E30 15.95 | 16.331 | 20.163
Mean Pubs Line ES TS 13.80 15.98 10.05 10.05 | 13.80 15.98
M.P.L./Pop. Ratio. .....| 1.063 | 1.271 S01 .63| 5i .792
Thickness of Stem
laiión sss eiin] TOG | 2081 1: 11.50: 10,16: +. 2.9900 | Bess
Mean Pure Line. Eear O18 2.04 8.45 8.46 | 2.18 2.04
L./Pop. pene past .770 .980 13 .83 .891 696
Webes of Pod
OU UIALION (05) 6 sscsy deus: 1.364 | 1.805 | 2972 | $2.12 | 1.987 | 4.263
Mean Pure Line..........| 1.80 3.92 27.19 | 34.00 | 1.80 3.92
g Ratio.. 19200) 2173 .91 1.06 .906 .920
Weight of Pod
PODOIION, aaa 3.192 | 2.184 | 32.80 | 37.95 | 4.290 | 4.407
ú Pure Lino... 3.80 3.95 33.84 38.50 3.80 3.95
M.P.L. / Pop. Ratio ..... 1.190 | 1809] 1.03 | 101| 385] .896
Number of Seeds
Population .. ......-| 6.267 | 8.418 | 31.91 | 35.05 | 9.163 | 18.633
Mean Pure Line. . is 801 | 16.60 33.30 | 36.80 | 8.01 | 16.60
To Pop. Ratio. ..... ~ 1.278 1.972 1.04 1.05 .874 .891
Weight o : i
prie bg Bon TE OE EA 2.569 1,833 33.67 40.21 3.511 3.376
Mean Pure Line........... 8.17 3.04 37.05 | 41.90 | 3.17 3.
M.P.L./Po p. Ratio..... 1.234 | 1.658 1.10 1.04 .903 .900
The explanation of this anomalous result is first to
be sought in the higher means (with the associated
higher variability) in the 1909 plants. Basing the com-
parison on the coefficients of variation in order to elimi-
nate, in so far as possible, the influence of the means,
we note that seven of the ratios are greater and seven
No. 539] DISTRIBUTION OF PURE LINE MEANS 693
are less than unity, while for all the mean is .936. On
an average, therefore, the pure lines have 93.6 per cent.
as much variability as the population.
The second comparison, that between the variability
of the individual pure lines and the population which
they form, can be made on the basis of the standard
deviations alone since the means are the same. This
comparison (the last two columns of Table IT) shows
that in both series and for every character the variabil-
ity written, the line is less than that for the population.
The lowest ratio is .70, the highest is .92 and the mean
is .858. This test indicates that they are differentiated.
This is, of course, the conclusion which Roemer drew
from his selected individual comparisons.
Second Test. The Deviation of the Pure Line Means
from the Population Mean
For characters measurable on a quantitative scale the
test for the deviation of the offspring of an individual
from its population is given by
o° In n(M— m?
er) S
2
(m — M) + .67449 Ny rs (1 -7
Where m and M, o and 3, n and N are the means, stand-
ard deviations, and numbers of individuals for the
family and the population, respectively."
= For reasons which will be apparent to the reader
later, the data which are given us do not justify calcu-
lations to a high degree of refinement.'? We therefore
approximate in every point possible.
The expressions
1 2n n(M— my
~n’? NN—n)
H AMER. NAT., Vol. 45, pp. 471-478. 1911.
“ Furthermore, I have serious misgivings that Roemer’s lines comprise
80 few individuals each that the coefficient suggested must be used with
caution. It is not needful to consider the point in greater detail here.
694 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
may be disregarded, since with such relatively low values
of n as those of Roemer’s data the first is practically
unity, while the second is generally insignificant and
may always be neglected, having a maximum value of
circa .010, and in the majority of the cases falling far
towards zero. The values of 3?/N are given in Table
III. In practically every case the inclusion of 3*/N in
TABLE III
VALUES OF 2?/N
Gelbe Viktoria Svalofs Kapital
Char: Erbse * Erbse
1 GION OF PAUL Fics. civ sak ae ee 0233 -0292
2 ngth a oe ee ck 1442 .9204
o. Thokoa OF SOM -o:a 0031 0049
4. Number Of pods i:i csi dans 0021 0105
5. Weight : POA soo ase es ee eS 0100 0112
6 umbe BOOdS sch ae Si a aes 0454 1997
7. Weight of WOE. si Seg ca cs <y ieee 0067 0066
formula would change the end result only insignifi-
cantly, and since we are working roughly it may be
omitted throughout.
We have thus reduced the formula to the fundamental
term Vo?/n. Fortunately for us, Roemer has not used the
correct formula for the probable error of the mean but
has given Johannsen’s ‘‘Mittlerer Fehler,” o/Vn=
Vo?/n. We now simply determine m—M*? and
(m—M)/(c/Vn) for each of his lines. Table IV gives
the ratios.
Apparently there can be no question concerning the
reality of differentiation in Roemer’s lines. If the differ-
ences (m — M) were due purely to random sampling
from a homogeneous population, we should expect the
* This second test was carried out before the first, and so before the
actual population means and variabilities were available. The means used
were Roemer’s means of pure line averages, as given in his Table IX.
These would be the same as the population means if all the lines had the
same n. As a matter of fact, the agreement is very close in all. In two
cases only did I modify Roemer’s means—changing number of pods from
6.6 to 6.5 and weight of pods from 11.2 to 11.3, in the ‘‘Gelbe Viktoria
Erbse.’’
No. 539] DISTRIBUTION OF PURE LINE MEANS 695
TABLE IV
Character }4 in Gelbe Viktoria | Character in Svaléfs Kapital
Ratio of Deviation to Erbse Erbse
Probable Error
4
a
wo
or
a
~<
2 A Ea e
|
A
m
°
|
w
LF
|
|
Lng
(e)
|
j
H © SO 00 NT O On p go pO H O O H DO Go i On O 9o SO O m DO Go h
LITTLE DL peo 8 nona] |
had
| |
holt tie
LIITRIT]
meet Li Pet 4
wee! tii hide
wert hr eerel
Remus sl b1 Flat 14
wal LELTE]
Saamansa IIL]
60 ho a es me | Piva | ee
mt ped
CO ht ADD eS
Sowel el || lel | |
aekSmallet lil il tl
bow he
Qe te OO
Nobby e
On eo
be
ora
pd
ow
kt bo bo
We Lo
e]
cass bonasi] TIT]
pi
or
bo
or)
oS
is)
n
e bo bo bo
He bo Co He OF
cont
| lend
He bo
PEED Ee |
5
ote Bee pE E ee on a
ooo a
LIL] lL Leer wands
LIT TELL | omit
1
fi bbet tl
Litt tie
Iiii e
Pie eo ee ee Se Serf! Se ate
an
io)
|
Otte ett ti ELI
ee
5
1
1
1
jd pad ool
©
kh
ratios (m — M )/oim-y) to have a standard deviation
1 + .67449/\/2s, where s is the number of lines involved.
The constants are given in Table V.
TABLE V
Character Gelbe Viktoria Erbse Svaléfs Kapital Erbse
1. Weight of plant’ ....... 1.738 & .077 1.886 + .087
2. Length of stem ........ 2.620 + .117 3.209 + .148
3. Thickness of stem ...... 2.008 + .089 1.768 + .082
4. Number of pods ....... Ath) SOG 1.955 + .090
5.. Weight of pods ........ 2.213 + .098 1.839 + .085
6. Number of seeds ....... 1.857 + .083 1.759 + .081
7. Weight of seeds ....... 1.895 + .084 2.188 + .101
Now we remember that Roemer’s individual lines are
represented by so few individuals that our formula may
not give absolutely trustworthy results, and that in case
“ Numbers of characters are the same as in Tables III and vV. ;
696 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
it does not, the discrepancy is in favor of the pure linist.
But comparing these values with 1.000 + .044 for ‘‘ Vik-
toria” and 1.000 + .046 for ‘‘Kapital,’’ I think we must
admit that the evidence is strongly in favor of a differ-
entiation in these lines of peas.
Ill. Tue BEARING or THESE Data UPON THE GENOTYPE
THEORY oF HEREDITY
To the conclusion that these pure lines of peas are
differentiated among themselves and that speaking
roughly their means ‘‘form a Quetelet’s Curve,” there
can be no objection, although this conclusion is by no
means justified by Roemer’s own analysis of his data.
The assumption that these facts lend any support what-
ever to the genotype theory!® seems to me to rest not only
upon the most slipshod reasoning, but upon a complete
disregard of simple biological precautions.
The chief of the pertinent reasons follow.
First. There is no Evidence of Line or Genotypic Con-
stancy or Heredity.
By definition the genotype is a rigid organic entity,
distinguished by breeding true from generation to gen-
eration, with the exception of mutations which are com-
pletely inherited and fluctuations which are not inherited
at all. The mean of the line remains the same from
generation to generation (except for rises and falls due
to periodic environmental changes); the variations
around these means are absolutely incapable of inherit-
ance.
Roemer and his supporters of course assume this to be
true for the Pisum series dealt with, but no fragment of
evidence is adduced to show either (a) that these means
remain the same from generation to generation, or (b)
that selection within the pure line is ineffective. The
condition is even worse than this. Roemer measured the
“The cardinal points of the genotype theory have been tersely, and I
believe fairly, summarized elsewhere in these pages. See AMER. Nar.,. Vol.
45, pp. 346-363, 1911.
No. 539] DISTRIBUTION OF PURE LINE MEANS 697
characters of the parent plants which furnished the seed
from which his various pure lines were grown, but he
neither determines whether there is any parental corre-
lation in the population nor gives us the data from which
this might be determined. To be sure, one may determine
from his data that the variability within the individual
line is less than that of the population, but this might be
as easily attributed to the much-scouted ‘‘Galton’s Law’’
as to genotypic heredity; possibly it is to be referred to
some factor quite outside inheritance.‘® In fine, it is
impossible to determine anything at all about inheritance
from Roemer’s data.
Second. The Possibility of Environmental Hetero-
geneity is not Adequately Taken into Account.
One of the first precautions of the experimental
breeder should be to make sure that the environmental
conditions to which his materials are subjected are not so
heterogeneous as to vitiate entirely any conclusions con-
cerning innate factors. Two watch glasses of Paramecia
may present highly different environmental conditions.
Food and housing are important factors in the egg
records of poultry. Peas differ from row to row, or
within the row, because of slight differences in the sub-
stratum. But experimenters now-a-days are so obsessed:
with the idea of rigid ‘‘unit characters,’’ ‘‘determiners’’
and ‘‘genes’’ that little attention is paid to environmental
influences; they are so absorbed in ‘‘analyzing’’ the
‘‘germ plasm’’ that they forget to make proper allowance
for factors which may so modify the soma—which is the
only available index of the germ plasm of an individual
—that it is misleading as a guide to hereditary tendencies.
From my own experience in experimental cultures it
seems quite possible that the differences in Roemer’s lines
are due to lack of uniformity in the substratum. One is
“ For instance, de Vries has several peg suggested that the feeding of
the parent plant may have an effect o e offspring. I personally do not
believe that this could be a sensible source of differentiation in Roemer ’s
peas, but it is one of the factors which should be taken into account by a
critical student of the problem.
698 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
not much impressed with the consistency of his results.
Not only are his means and standard deviations much
higher in 1909 than in 1908, but the relative variabilities
are also higher in ten out of fourteen cases. To be sure,
he has used the conventional precautions. He describes
his field as a ‘‘gleichmissiger humoser Lehmboden,’’ and
states that the fertilizer was mixed with soil before appli-
cation and distributed as evenly as possible. But for an
organism so responsive to environmental influences as
the garden pea," and in a problem of this delicacy, these
precautions are not at all sufficient. It is quite clear’®
that the seeds from each parent were planted together
in rows, and if the soil differed at all from one part of the
field to another the tendency would be for this hetero-
geneity to induce a differentiation in the crop.
If it be urged that we do not know that the differentia-
tion in Roemer’s means are due to environmental hetero-
geneity, the reply is simple. It is the duty of those who
claim genotypic rank for observed differences to prove
that their results are not due merely to faulty experi-
mental conditions.
Third. One or Both of Roemer’s ‘‘Populations’’ are
in Reality ‘‘ Pure Lines.’’
By definition a pure line is the offspring of a single
individual of a continually self-fertilizing or vegetatively
propagating organism. They may or may not be differ-
entiated. Genotypists assume that generally they are
both differentiated and highly constant. Selection within
the line is absolutely incapable of effecting any change.
Now the curious thing about Roemer’s material is that
at least one, and possibly both, of the two populations
suitable for our examination are in reality pure lines.
Whether the ‘‘Individualauslese’’ by which the ‘‘Gelbe
Viktoria Erbse’’ was developed gave rise to a pure line
depends largely upon the stringency with which it was
* Roemer observes that the pea is exceedingly susceptible to environ-
mental influences.
* See Roemer, J. c., pp. 404-405.
No. 539] DISTRIBUTION OF PURE LINE MEANS 699
carried out. Concerning ‘‘Svaléfs Kapital Erbse’’ there
can be no doubt. The original plant was selected at
Svalof in 1896. Whether a further selection within the
offspring of this plant was made, Roemer was unable to
determine, but of the ancestry of his seed he felt quite
certain.
Truly this is an anomalous state of affairs! Analyzed
by the best available statistical methods, Roemer’s data
certainly indicate that the lines studied are significantly
differentiated. Pure-line specialists dispense with any
statistical analysis at all and accept the data as ‘‘a con-
firmation ... of Johannsen’s epoch-making investigations
on beans.’’ Yet if the differentiation in these lines be
due to anything other than faulty experimental condi-
tions, the observations described destroy entirely the
value of Johannsen’s theory by showing that heritable
variations may occur in great numbers in the pure line.
IV. Summary AND CONCLUSIONS
1. The statement that the means of the pure lines of a
population form a ‘‘Quetelet’s Curve’’ is now being made
by genotypists. If it is true that an apparently homo-
geneous population is composed of a large number of
slightly differentiated genotypes, it seems a priori not
unlikely that their means will be arranged according to
‘‘Quetelet’s Law.’ The question which concerns the
biologist is whether this is, as a matter of fact, the condi-
tion found in nature. The object of the present rather
laborious study has been to test the validity of this asser-
tion on the basis of available facts. Roemer’s data for
pure lines in peas are the only passably satisfactory
published series available.
2. Such a problem has two phases. It is first necessary
to determine by adequate statistical tests that the lines
in question may be reasonably regarded as differentiated
biologically—i. e., that the differences between them can-
not be explained as the errors of random sampling, such
700 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
as give one a low or a high hand at ecards. It is then
allowable to consider the biological interpretation of the
differences.
3. Two tests for differentiation were applied: (a) the
mean intra-line variability was. compared with the popu-
lation variability, and (b) the significance of the devia-
tion of individual line means from the population mean
was tested by a coefficient of individual prepotency re-
cently suggested. Both of these tests indicate sensible
and statistically significant differences between the lines.
These differences may be said to be distributed according
to ‘‘Quetelet’s Law’’ as the term is loosely used by
biologists.
4. This fact per se furnishes no evidence at all for the
genotypic nature of the differences in Roemer’s lines.
Indeed, throughout Roemer’s work there is no conclusive |
evidence of any kind concerning any problem of heredity.
At least one (and possibly both) of his series of material
is from his own explicit statements in reality a pure line.
The difference observed within these lines and considered
by him and other pure linists to be of genotypic value and
a confirmation of Johannsen’s results with beans are
probably merely the result of faulty experimental condi-
tions. If they are not, Roemer’s evidence goes squarely
against Johannsen’s theory.
CoLD SPRING HARBOR, L. I.,
July 19, 1911.
SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION
A SYSTEM OF RECORDING MENDELIAN
OBSERVATIONS
IN any experimental investigation the importance of making
full, definite and at the same time simple and easily understood
notes can hardly be overestimated. To record all pertinent ob-
servations in a convenient and easily accessible manner with the
least expenditure of time and energy should be the object of the
observer.
In connection with some investigations in plant breeding at
the Massachusetts Experiment Station a system of records has
been devised for use in experiments where segregation of char-
acters occurs that has worked very well in practise and may be
found suggestive to other observers who are investigating Men-
delism and handling a considerable number of plants.
The records are kept on 5 X 8 index cards, though 4X6 .
cards might be preferred by some. All observations pertaining
—BEAN Y: ROSS 115 i AN preis Pog 2p i” l
Plant, size Phedicerst habit A ae ame
cir ced. 7 © season s Aak Diet ii SERRET A e A hotiret
ENR
epee size ape Soll aloe er per
Pods, ae mei BA Trie JEA fof
brittleness w stringiness Vv aee Task, An.
T point Ja edccenet.
hice, size in A AES Position tou Lie length
Seeds, number oee position CA awed ea aie tenes, length (dry) /4S t
cross section ends ads Cra call curvature Aghti color Zoe
Notes
Experiment Department, Division of Horticulture, Dinanath Aroa €
Fic. 1. Description Card.
701
702 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
to parent varieties or the F, generation are kept on blue cards
and subsequent generations are recorded on buff, salmon and
white cards. This provides for four generations which is about
as many as are usually desired, but other colors are available if
needed for subsequent generations. Four different blanks in
each color are provided known as (1) description cards, (2) cul-
ture cards, (3) type cards and (4) blanks which are plain ruled
cards used for miscellaneous notes. A description card applic-
able to beans is shown in Fig. 1. Cards suitable to other plants
may, of course, be easily devised. These cards are not often
used but are occasionally very convenient. Figure 2 shows a cul-
crop (Ja Sy daca Cross Sikia J (feo Generation opo 4 KERI
Planted ay 1? 14 /f ingd i Arch, in + growth a.
Culture NES GE, A tru P T so ean BDF gs
Hybridization aA A, NAE TACE pe PAE ILESA b P
Harvest Ket: 1 [b - Xò edu natin, hepa poo TA
Notes
Plads ges é AU ae Aka AMA-
ngle ali fea, Goh ee aT RF
PARESE Dep Division of Horticulture Massachusetts Agricultural College.
Fic. 2. Culture Card.
ture card that is used for any crop under observation and gives
all necessary information concerning the care, cultivation and
growth of any lot of plants.
The type card shown in Fig. 3 is the most important and dis-
tinctive feature of the system. A single line is given to each
plant and furnishes opportunity for recording easily and quickly
a wide range of observations. Each hybrid between parent vari-
eties is given a serial number that is stamped at the top of the
first column and beneath this are entered the numbers of the in-
dividual plants. Hybrids between different individuals of a
variety are distinguished by the addition of a letter to this num-
No. 539] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 7038
ber which is discontinued when it appears that the plants are
similar in constitution. Numbers given in each generation are
earried along separated by a hyphen in the manner usually fol-
lowed in such work.
Each character that appears is designated by a letter of the
Flower} Fruit Ped Seed wotesSERIES OF 1910 CROP OF baal
3
3
2
3
=
z
«
3
PAPE PRE OC
ye
ee
as.
Ag
>
Experiment Department, Division of Horticulture, “Massachusetts Agricultural College.
Fic. 3. Type Card.
alphabet and in order to secure opportunity for recording a large
number of characters they are more or less arbitrarily grouped,
each group having if needed the whole twenty-six letters avail-
able. Each group is assigned a column in the card. In order to
illustrate this a portion of the type designations we have used
with beans is here given which with Fig. 3 will clearly show the
application of the system. The same blank may of course be
used with plants other than beans.
Plant type: Fruit types:
a= stems green, a= pod flat,
b =— stems with purple lines, b= pod oval,
c = stems purple tinged, e= pod round,
h= pole form, s = pod straight,
i= runner form, u= pod curved.
j= bush form.
Pod types:
Flower types: a= light green,
a = white b =— medium green,
b = light Tok c= dark green,
704 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST
c = pink.
Leaf types:
a = light green,
b — medium green,
m= no fiber,
p = much fiber,
s = stringless,
v = very stringy.
[Vou. XLV
e = medium yellow, Seed types:
h = broad, a= white,
t = medium, ba buff,
t c= yellow,
d= light red,
g = black,
m = medium eye,
o = dark mottling.
The notes shown in Fig. 3 give the following information :
The cross in number 272 which is shown by a separate list and
by a neighboring guide card to be Prolific Black Wax X Mo-
hawk. This cross was one of those made in 1910 (Series 1910)
and these plants were grown in 1911. (Crop of 1911.) The
color of the card shows at once the generation. Plant 7-34 had
green stems and was a bush bean. The leaf was medium green,
the flower pink, the pod flat, straight, green, tough and stringy.
The seed was black and buff mottled, the black predominating,
as shown by o indicating dark mottling. All these observations
are very quickly recorded, once they are determined and the
record is brief, convenient, definite and easily summarized.
It is of course necessary to record clearly and positively just
what is signified by each letter. Most characters appear in some
established variety and may be fixed by referring to them. Full
description or preserved material may supplement such refer-
ences when necessary. Additional blank columns are provided
to allow for more extended observations or they may be used 1m
connection with the space to the right for brief special notes on
the individual plant. If more extended notes regarding any
plant or group of plants are desired, a description card or a
blank card of the appropriate color may be inserted at any point
for their accommodation. Photographs or drawings might also
be easily filed if desirable.
We have used these cards for the past three years for record-
ing observations on many thousands of plants, not only beans
but several other kinds as well, and the system has given good
satisfaction. If it contains any features useful to other observ-
ers the purpose of this article will be fulfilled.
wae ise J. K. SHAW.
THE MASSACHUSETTS AGRICULTURAL COLLEGE
The American Journal of Science
Established by Benjamin Silliman in 1818
The Leading Scientific Journal in the United States
Devoted to the Physical and Natural Sciences, with special reference to
Physics, and Chemistry on the one hand, and to Geology and Mineralogy
on the other.
Editor: EDWARD S.DA
Associate Editors: Professor GEORGE L. GOODALE, JOHN TROWBRI IDOR, W. G. FARLOW and ve x DAVIS
of Cambr ridge ; Professore A. E. VERRILL, HENRY S. WILLIAMS and L. V. PIRSSON, of N
IMES,
n; Profes F. BARKER. na Philrdelphia ; arera hea Ha HS. A
etnies ee Se S. DILLER, o of Washington
Two volumes annually, in monthly numbers of about 80 pages ah
This Journal ended its first series of 50 volumes as a quarterly in 1845; its second
series of 50 volumes as a two-monthly in 1870; its third series as a monthly ended Dec-
ember, 1895. A Fourth Series commenced in 1896.
Subscription price, $6 per year or 50 cents a number, postage prepaid in the United States -
$6.25 to Canada ; $6,40 to Countries in the Postal Union. Back numbers at reduced prices.
taTen-Volume Indexes, Vols. I-X XI-XX, fourth series, price one dollar. Address
The American Journal of Science
New Haven, Conn.
SECOND EDITION, NOVEMBER, 1910
AMERICAN MEN OF SCIENCE
A BIOGRAPHICAL DIRECTORY
EDITED BY J. McKEEN CATTELL
A Bio wographical directory re
quires revision if it isto maintain its ulness. Nearly a third of the names in the
= cer ites es fe new, and the sketches which a penred $ in the first Saa jae in nearly er k rds revised. The
ú ru ed to prepare the revision Nes: bis as great as that given to the first edition. There has been no
change in the general rekle of the work. Greater irii has been observed in confining its scope to the natural and
“tact sciences ; f j itt omuted. Efforts have
reply ae book as complete and accurate as ible. There are of cou omissions, if only Sere Sams Se GEI nol
by Xe to repeated requests Jor the information needed. “The hound k leading men of scien ve been again selected
rae ot) that were used before, and stars kave been added tothe subjects of research in the fi of 269 new m
the “ae places on the list. “The editor’ a in selecting this group of scientific men has been to make a study iy kd
aa ions on whic ich scientific research dependa a an Ae may be to conditions There
+t the two statistical studies that have bee n made.—From the Preface to the Second Edition.
Bi ‘eect econd ene iy the Directory extends to more than 600 pages and contains more than 5500 sketches
pa nted on all rag paper and bound in buckram with leather label. ia ere a the work has been
in size by fronts: Dg ra cent., it is sold at the same price as the first editi
Price: re Dollars, net, ostage paid
HE sc SCIENCE PR PRESS
GARRISON, N. Y. LANCASTER, PA.
SUB-STATION 84, NEW YORK CITY.
The American Naturalist
1867, Devoted to the Advancement of the eRe 5 Sciences
with Special Reference to the Factors of Organic Evolution and Heredity
A Monthly Journal, established in
CONTENTS OF THE MAY NUMBER
The Inheritance of Polymorphism and ie in Colias
Philodice. Professor JoHN H. GEROUL
Nucleus and ee in Heredity. Aua
MICHAEL F, G
A Comparative patie a the oe of the ees
ree Organs of Certain beat: oe ee Tide.
roltanept? and C G. Cra
anore Sco and Discussion: rary Kaikai Paper
fs cary cape al Selection 3 in the English Sparro
r
Notes and tie ture: Biometrics, Yule’s ee
colby to the Theory of Statistics. Dr. RAYMOND
CONTENTS OF JUNE NUMBE
on ae ee in the Domestic oi Dr
The Biometric Proof vil the Pure Line Theory. Dr. J.
The rahe es ai External Conditions fa
essor T: . MONTGOMERY.
Shorter Articles and aeg Bieg Ontogeny of &
PERE HOBART CLA
Notes and Literature: eai Gonia to &
Knowledge a the Extinct Amphibia, Dr. Roy
L. MOODIE.
CONTENTS OF JULY NUMBER
marewa Firma and Their Significance, Pro-
Further Observations on shs Pose of the Sauropodous
Dinosa ered paces P. Hay. A
r Articl d Correspond nce: Computati
the Coeficient igi Correlation. iege on r H S =
ENNINGS
Dra V buao atrachoseps atten sare Eich.
and Literature: Some Recent Studi es on Vari
ation sea ER in Agricultural Plants: Fa
Some Recent Books on Fossil Plants
Dovelas HOUGHTON CAMPBELL.
CONTENTS OF AUGUST NUMBER ka
A Comparative Microscopic Study of the Melanin
os ntent of Pigmented Skim with special refer-
e to the Question of oori kr ritance Amon;
Mulattos. Professor H. E. a
A Coeficient of ne 1 Prepotency for Studen
of Heredity. Dr. J. A So Š
The Tee of the pie Professor F.
Jean Marchant, an Eighteenth Century Mutationist.
Dr. HENRI Hus.
Notes and Literature : Notes on Heredity. Dr. W.J-
SPILLMAN.
CONTENTS OF SEPTEMBER NUMBER
eritance of the “Eye” in Vigna. Dr. W. J
Heredity of Hair F Form among the Filipinos, Dr.
ROBERT BENNETT BEAN.
The ang ae pg pe of ne Tomes Indian Archipelago.
peA — = aie: Biometrie A
Concept. Dr.
Rava oo he n a sia at = i qe Nu Correla-
ani nungency Tables when the Number c
Combination rati 3
Acquired Characters defined. C.L. Teona.
a of a ee Sige o n
of An € Jseful Ev
lution Miiogriehe. V de 5 = x
CONTENTS OF OCTOBER gees =
E ia in Œnothera. r. R. R
tal Observations eine the
Behavior of clk Bees in Their Visits to Cotton
Blossoms. H. A. ALLARD,
III. Reproduction in the Brown Rat. NewToNn MILLER
IV. — Articles and Discussion : pa Dialectics
d Other Digressions. Dk. J. e
v. Topp and Literature: Darwinism agja Hum
Life. V.L.E
——— a
e Number 35 Cents
NATURALIST
will be sent to new subscribers for four months for One Dollar
THE Z CENCE PRESS
n 84: NEW YORK
Yearly Subscription, $4-00
VOL. XLV, NO. 540° DECEMBER, 1911
THE
AMERICAN
NATURALISI
A MONTHLY JOURNAL
Devoted to the Advancement of the Biological Sciences with
Special Reference to the Factors of Evolution
CONTENTS
; Page
I. The Inheritance of Color in Short-horn Cattle. H. H. LAUGHLIN - - -705
- = = -743
IT. Studies on Melanin. DR. Ross AIKEN GORTNER
IN. Shorter Articles and Discussion: A Noteon Certain TOR SEESE
Dr. RAYMOND PEARL, LOTTIE E. MCPHETERS ~ z
IV. Notes and Literature: The Doctrine of Evolution.
V. Index to Volume XLV - - =- + += -
Noke o| eo l FEL
“ - 763
THE SCIENCE PRESS
LANCASTER, PA. GARRISON, N. Y.
NEW YORK: SUB-STATION 84
The American Naturalist.
. intended for perrea and books,
MSS
sent to the Editor of THE AME
etc., intended for review should be
RICAN NATURALIST, Garrison-on-Hudson, New York.
rticles containing research work bearing on the
tion are especialiy welcome, and will be given preference i
prcblems of organic evolu-
n.
n publicatie
drea reprints of contributions are supplied to authors free of charge,
ost.
One hun
Further reprints will be supplied at c
dollars a year.
e twenty-five cents additional.
thirty-five cents. The advertising rates are Four
sent to the publishers. The
oreign postage is fifty cents and
The charge for single copies is
Dollars for a page
THE SCIENCE PRESS
NEW YORK: Sub-Station 84
Lancaster, Pa.
Entered as second- l
Garrison, N. Y.
tter, April 2, 1908, at the Post Office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act ot
Congress of March 3, 1879.
r E A Naas T E came ae
THE BULLETIN—For bargains in Ethnolograph-
ical and Pre-historic Specimens. Books on Natural
History, Science, Travel, Voyages, ete. See THE
BULLETIN post free for 3 cent stamp.
4 Duke St., Adelphi—London—England
TENTH EDITION.
THE MICROSCOPE;
an introduction to ey Methods
by SIMON HENRY GAGE, of Cornell University. Over
350 large octavo S and above 250 figures in this new
and fall re ition. Price $2.00, postpaid
COMSTOCK PUBLISHING CO., Ithaca, N. Y.
BIRDS’ EGGS
W. F. H. ROSENBERG,
57 Haverstock Hill, London, N. W.,
England
begs to announce the publication of a new
Price List (No. 15) of Birds’ Eggs, con-
taining over 900 species from all parts of
the world. This Catalogue is systematic-
ally arranged, with authors’ names, indica-
tions of localities, and an index to families.
It will be sent post free on application, as
will the following lists:
No. 11, Birds’ Skins, (5,000 species) ;
No. 12, Lepidoptera, (5,000 species) ; No.
13, Coleoptera ; No. 14, Mammals.
In course of preparation : New Price
List of Reptiles, Amphibians and Fishes.
Largest Stock in the world of imens
Back or Current Numbers
of any American or Foreign technical
or trade journal and magazine fur-
nished on short notice at moderate
rates; all kinds of Government and
State Reports in stock. Clippings on
special subjects furnished promptly.
Large stock of American Naturalist,
Science and Popular Science on hand.
Magazines, Books and Papers
of all kinds bought
Special Subscription Price List on request.
Information concerning any periodical
furnished free of charge.
A. W. CASTELLANOS
259 Armstrong Ave.,
Jersey City, N.J., U.S.A.
THE
AMERICAN NATURALIST
VoL. XLV December, 1911 No. 540
THE INHERITANCE OF COLOR IN SHORT-
HORN CATTLE
A Srupy 1x Somatic BLENDS ACCOMPANYING GAMETIC
SEGREGATION AND InTRA-zyYGOTIC INHIBITION
AND REACTION
H. H. LAUGHLIN
CARNEGIE STATION FOR EXPERIMENTAL EVOLUTION,
CoLD Spring HARBOR, N. Y.
THE men who made the breed of Shorthorn cattle were
in many respects the most skillful breeders of domestic
animals. They had many rich and varied inheritance
lines to draw upon, and in developing the breed they had
high ideals of real excellence, largely ignoring the super-
ficial quality of color. A consequence of this neglect of
coloris that the great breed of Shorthorn cattle is mongrel
in this respect, ranging as follows: Solid red—varying
from the richest dark to a light yellowish; spotted red-
and-white; red-roan; and white—besides many inter-
grades and combinations of these shades and patterns.
It is the prevailing experience among Shorthorn breeders
that the color of the calf can not be accurately predicted
before its birth. Reflecting this experience, Mr. B. O.
Cowan, of the American Shorthorn Breeders’ Associa-
tion, writes:
Owing to the fact that Shorthorns are of mixed colors, you can not
with absolute certainty, before birth, tell what will be the color of the
705
Pleasant Valley Bud and Calf.
No. 540] INHERITANCE OF COLOR IN CATTLE 707
Courtesy of Thos. Stanton, Wheaton, Ill,
Cow—CINDERELLA. Red. CALF—CINDERELLA 2D. Roan.
(White star on forehead.)
Dam—Clara. Red. Dam—Cinderella. Red.
Dam’s Dam—Carrie. Red. Dam’s Dam—Clara. ed.
Prince Gloster. Red. Dam ’s Sire—Scottish Minstrel. sag Roan.
Sire—Scottish Minstrel. Dark Roan. Sire—Prince Imperial. Light Roa
i —Imp. Mistletoe 20th. Roan. Sire ’s Dam—Imp. Helen 21st. Light Roan,
Sire’s Sire—Imp. Collynie Mint. Roan. Sire’s Sire—Prince. Red.
Courtesy of Geo. M. Rommel, Bureau of Animal Industry, Washington, D. C.
Cow—MAvTALINI 17TH. Roan.
(A champion Ta T A.) cow.)
i 8th.
Sire’s Sire—Bapton Conqueror. Roan.
CALF. Roan.
Dam—Mautalini 17th. Roan.
Sir q n.
Sire—True Blue. Red and White.
Sire’s Dam—Twin Princess 10th.
Red and White.
Sire’s Sire—Bapton Champion. Roan.
Courtesy of F. W. Harding, Waukesha, Wis.
Cow—PLEAsANT VALLEY Bup. Roan.
Dam—Rosebud llth. Red.
Dam’s D
CALF. Red.
Dam—Pleasant Valley Bud. Roan
Sire’s Dam— Valley Gem. Red.
Sire’s Sire—Mildred’s Royal. Roan.
Fie. 1.
708 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
calves. There are a great many instances of red cows bred to white
bulls producing red calves, in some instances white calves, and in other
instances roans. In some herds in the United States where the breeders
have used nothing but red for thirty or forty years it is very rare that
they have any calves excepting reds; but even among these occasionally
a calf is dropped that is either a roan or a red with some white marks
—this is the influence of the blood of ancestors many generations back.
Mr. Spangler, of Sullivan County, Mo., reports the
following to the Breeders’ Gazette of February 17, 1909:
My bull is white, but his sire and dam are both roan. The results are
as follows: Since September first there have been fifty-five calves
dropped to his service, of these forty-one are roan, nine red, four red-
and-white, and one white. Twenty-six are bulls and twenty-nine heif-
ers. The cow that dropped the white calf is herself a roan’. . . the
rest of the cows are red.
Robert Bruce, of County Dublin, Ireland, tabulated the
color matings and color progeny of Shorthorns bred by
Amos Cruickshank! at Sittyton. This he reports to the
Breeders’ Gazette of November 25, 1908, as follows:
TABLE I
COLOR OF OFFSPRING
Color of Matings Red Rd. & Wh. Roan White Total
Red. mated with tod ni.i 133 12 3 1 180
Red mated with red and white ....... 31 11 6 0 48
Red mated with roan ... i. Praun] 278 25. 265 0 568
Red mated with white ............... 0 41 4 46
Red and white mated with red and white 0 2 0 1 3
Red and white mated with roan ...... 22 40 2 86
Red and white mated with white ..... 0 1 1 1 3
Roan mated with roan .............. 56 10 183 60 309
Roan mated with white .............. 0 0 12 12 24
White mated with white ............. 0 0 1 2
S21 as oss & 120
Professor E. N. Wentworth, of Ames, Ia., supplies the
following tabulation from random pedigrees:
*Amos Cruickshank, of Sittyton (1808-1895), the most distinguished
breeder of Shorthorns, and one of the most skillful breeders of domestic
animals,
No. 540] INHERITANCE OF COLOR IN CATTLE 709
TABLE II
Offspring
43 from white ey white matings.
1 from red by red matings.
83 from roan by roan matings.
127 whites
122 from red by roan matings.
8 from red by red matings.
172 from white by red and white matings.
136 from red by red and white matings.
n
207 from roan by roan matings.
645 roans |
439 from red by red matings.
52 from red by red and white matings.
81 from roan by roan matings.
892 reds
320 from red by roan matings.
Total 1,664 animals
The following table (No. III) records some matings,
selected almost at random from the Shorthorn Herd
Book, detailing the color of dam, sire and offspring, the
last animal of this table, the roan cow Dorothea (Vol. 45,
p. 645), herself a roan from two red parents, produced six
calves: The first a roan Trout Creek Beauty, by the red-
and-white Klondike of Baltimore; the second the red-and-
white Lord Strathearn by the red Strathearn Oakland;
the third the red Dorothea’s Knight by the red Red
Knight; the fourth the white Bapton Favorite by the
roan Bapton Ensign; the fifth the roan Dorothea Second
by the red March King, and the sixth the red-and-white
Dorothea Third by the red March King. It is interesting
to note that one cow can produce calves of each color
characteristic of the race.
In color pattern the red-and-white and the roan-and-
white Shorthorns are quite similar to all other breeds of
cattle possessing broken patterns—that is to say, there
is a tendency toward a white belt at the front flank, a
slightly more pronounced one at the rear flank and a
white underline. It is known that Angus cattle which are
generally black sometimes possess white patches, gener-
ally within the line of the rear flank belt. A white Short-
horn bred fo a black Angus or Galloway will produce a
blue-roan calf, or when bred toa white-faced, roan-bodied
[Vou. XLV
THE AMERICAN NATURALIST
710
uvoy
PIT
uvoy
INU M
PIT
uvo pup pay
uvo
INYM PUD pry
INYM PUD pay
INYM PUD pay
uvoy
ONY M PUD pax
eoyjo1og, =
wojny, euve Apery =
BILOJOIA S$, OISSTY 1OJOTA =
uByng yoorg uay =
1071A. ISH PIM =
uqoy pnorg =
yg Weg IMH-FO-8BHOPrA =
uByNg MeH OUM
puowviq uogdeg
SUM, {
£yo1e4)
Suun eN
əuulany pIo
Əuuím y Apery
TEI0g
quy
əsodəy 8, 44t S8010 PIN
pLogxQ AS
IBA
snpnəIə, T
uI g uueg
PIEI IBA
ound MEIMN
pug əurpəðuðry
3uudsyo
PI
uvoy
PI
IUM
pay
uno I4PVT
pee
Iy M PUD pay
unoy
Foy wosurrsy
uom PHAS
OISSIPY 109TA
UvIINS MEH OMMA
penp oy} yo dup
ulpoane woydeg
uvyng woydeg
mojsnsny
vosy
PLA ISIA
roronbuog
Pueg IB
qfy ss010 pN
43ra y S8010 Poy
PIOFXO UM 1}
wore r
sokot PIIM
alg
Til WTavah
KM RR Me MK KS OR a RR KN
IMUM PUD PIJ
INYM PUD PIJ
INYM PUD pay
IMUM PUD pay
IUM PUD pay
uom ouve Apery
PIEI 8, orsnog
448 WAV, [[F{-FO-BII0zOT A
Wg WAR T TIEE{-FO-BILOpITA,
U48 WIV T [H-FO-BMO0pT A
Ig WAV T T-FO-BILOqT A,
IG WIV [ITH -FO-BIL0qOT A
[veg uogdeg
No. 540] INHERITANCE OF COLOR IN CATTLE {ii
Hereford will produce a white-faced, roan-bodied or red-
bodied calf. It is also known that a black Angus bred to
a white-faced, red-bodied Hereford will produce a calf
with a white face and a black body. A roan Shorthorn
Fic. 2. BroopHooKs CHIEF.
BROADHOOKS CHIEF 348176. White.
Courtesy of F. W. Harding, Waukesha, Wis.
Dam—Broadhooks Rose 101234. Roan. Sire—Royal Fancy 93217. Roan.
Dam’s Dam—Imp. Roan Rose 75966. Roan. Sire’s Dam—Sensation 7th. Red.
Dam’s Sire—Rustic Chief 236800. Roan. Sire’s Sire—Prince of Fashion 64587. Red.
mated with a black Angus or Galloway will sometimes
produce a black and sometimes a blue-roan calf; as in-
stances of the former, Mr. Ralph B. Goodhue, of Don-
nelly, Minn., writes:
I have had a few animals cross-bred between Angus and Shorthorn
and in every instance have the offspring been black, sire and dams pure
bred animals. I have bred 31/32 Holstein cows to red Shorthorn bulls
and about 65 per cent. have been red-and-white, the rest being black-
and-white, more black than white in markings. In breeding grade
Shorthorn cows to pure bred Holstein bulls, have got black and white
offspring. In the Hereford-Shorthorn, the red Shorthorn bred with the
Hereford will most always give a mottled face on the offspring. The
roan Shorthorn cows bred to Hereford bulls will give either a ealf
looking like a Hereford or a roan calf with clear white face.
Professor Wentworth, previously referred to, writes:
12 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
In regard to color coats in cattle hybrids, I can give you a few cases
from my own experience.
We had three Holstein cows at home, two of them carrying a pre-
dominance of black, the other a predominance of white. As we had no
Holstein bull on three successive years, they were bred to Shorthorn
bulls. The first year when bred to a roan one of the calves came a
blue gray. This calf was from the cow with the greatest amount of
black. The others showed the pattern markings of their mothers. The
second year they were bred to a deep red Shorthorn bull (all of the
animals mentioned pure breds) and the color pattern showed no trace
whatsoever of the Shorthorn parentage. The third year they were bred
to a red and white bull. In the ease of the lightest Holstein cow there
seemed to be some tinge of red on the ends of the hair in the black
pattern; however, at a distance it showed the same color.
I have seen Jersey-Holstein crosses usually partaking of the Hol-
stein pattern with, perhaps, a slight admixture of dun color on the
tips of the hair on the black markings.
I have seen Angus crossed on Jersey showing simply the black
polled character, although in a few cases the extremities showed a slight
tendency towards dun or fawn.
I have seen Angus crossed with Holstein and have seen both pure
black and black-and-white cows. The instances which I have in mind
are about twenty showing pure black and six or seven showing the
black-and-white. However, these figures are simply a question of mem-
ory and might easily be modified. The case in question is that of a
man with a Holstein herd who was forced to breed to an Angus bull
one year.
Out at the dairy farm we have a Shorthorn cow, roan in color but a
grade, which was bred to our Holstein bull, a half brother of Colanta
4th’s Johanna. The calf is roan in color.
We also have some Arkansas backwoods cows; they are variegated
in color pattern, showing red, dun, yellow, white, brindle and various
other markings. A Holstein bull when bred to one of these produced
a nearly pure black heifer. The black seemed to be rather tinged with
brown at the ends of the hair, but the udder showed a white color. . - .
A roan Shorthorn bull bred to a Hereford cow will quite frequently
give a roan body with white Hereford markings. A red Shorthorn bull
crossed with the Hereford cow is apt to increase the red splotches on
the white markings of the Hereford.
Mr. P. G. Ross, of the famous Maxwalton Farm, Mans-
field, O., relates his experience, throwing his observations
into approximate percentages, as follows:
The color of the offspring of white Shorthorns depends largely on the
ancestors, as about 50 per cent. of a bull’s calves will have the color of
No. 540] INHERITANCE OF COLOR IN CATTLE dis
his dam and her ancestors. . . . We have used white on white and
often had roan calves and in one instance had a red calf, but about 75
per cent. are white
We have had considerable experience in crossing the Shorthorn on
Angus. This we consider the best cross and the offspring is generally
better than either of the parents. When crossing red and black the
offspring are generally 75 per cent. blacks and even the second cross
will not bring 50 per cent. reds; og crossing roan and black, about
50 per cent. will be blue-roans, 10 per cent. red-roans, 10 per cent.
reds and 30 per cent. blacks. The Galloway color is much stronger
than the Angus, consequently more dark calves will be expected. The
Hereford cross is very strong as far as the white face is concerned and
about 95 per cent. of white heads ean be expected but the red of the
body is easily blended into a roan and about 95 per cent. roan calves
can be expected by a white bull, and at least 75 per cent. by roan bull,
on Hereford cows.
The black of the Holstein seems to be particularly strong and when
crossed with red the offspring will be nearly black and will remain
very predominant to the third and fourth cross; the broken color shows
itself but very little. . . . On the other hand, Holsteins take the roan
color very readily and wise crossed on white 95 per cent., and when
crossed on roan 75 per cent. of the calves will be ine roan: It is our
experience that either the Holstein or the Hereford will take the roan
color from a white or roan much oftener than from the red Shorthorn
even if part of the red’s ancestry were roans. The Red Polls and
Devons seem to be very hard to blend into a roan and when crossed on
a white not over 25 per cent. roans can be expected; the balance are
red. This we do not consider strange as they have been bred red for so
many generations. It would seem that the red color of the Shorthorn
is not so strong as the roan when used in erossing, and in our opinion
it is the most objectionable. . . . We believe that to maintain the
standard we must exert judgment in crossing the best types and colors,
as it is evident in both animals and plants that they must have fresh
blood to prosper and this is seen much earlier in breeding the short-
lived animals such as hogs, dogs, cats and rabbits. We feel that the
Shorthorn has given a much better opportunity for crossing than any
other breed of cattle as there is very little restriction as to standard
color. The different color is, we feel, a very safe rule to go by in cross-
ing and we are particularly opposed to using red on red no matter if
the ancestors are desirable. We feel that white on red is the proper
cross and roan is good to cross on anything.
The observed facts fit the following hypothesis so
closely that it is presented as a further working basis in
solving the problem of the prediction of the color and
color pattern in Shorthorn cattle.
714 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
Hypothesis—There are two groups of genetically inde-
pendent sets of hairs intermingled to make up the Short-
horn color coat. One set is alternatively ‘‘ positive
white’’ (W) and red (R), in which the white is dominant
and the red recessive; the other set is alternatively red
(R) or ‘‘albinic white’’ (wr), in which the red is dominant
and the white recessive. Dominant white is caused by a
Fig. 3. ANOKA ACONITE 2D,
ANOKA ACONITE 2p 40311. Roan.
Courtesy of F. W. Harding, Waukesha, Wis.
Dam—Double Aconite 2d. Vol.53, p.563. Red. Sire—Whitehall ar aea 209776. son
Dam’s Dam—Double Aconite. Roan. Sire’s Dam—Imp. Missie 167th.
Dam’s Sire—Godoy 115575. Red. Sire’s Sire—Whitehall Suftas vy White.
specific antibody existing in the zygote in small quan-
tities, retarding or inhibiting the ontogenesis of the
determiner for pigmentation. The same body existing
in larger quantities reacts with and destroys the deter-
miner for pigmentation, causing recessive or albinic
white.
The dominant white of the Shorthorn is doubtless de-
rived from the Romano-British cattle, which it is generally
conceded entered into the Shorthorn make-up, which ele-
ment is to-day represented by the ‘‘Park Cattle.” They
No. 540] INHERITANCE OF COLOR IN CATTLE 715
behave as dominant whites—. e., they themselves are
white but sometimes throw red or black (not roan) calves.
The recessive white doubtless came in with the Dutch
flecked, the colored areas of which took the ‘‘ differential
coloring’’ because they lacked the positive graying
factor; this recessive white must therefore be attributed
to a strain of partial albinism. The spotted color pattern
or coarse mosaic doubtless came in with the Dutch bulls
of the eighteenth-century importation. The areas com-
posing Group One are located about the two flank belts,
the underline, the median line and the face and a fine net-
work over the remainder of the body; those composing
Group Two cover the neck, sides, back, hind quarters and
legs in a network exclusive of the areas of Group One.
Factors CONSIDERED
W = Inhibitor of pigment formation.
w = Absence of such inhibitor.
R= Determiner for red pigmentation.
r= Absence of determiner for red pigmentation.
With reference to Set No. 1, or group-unit No. 1, indi-
vidual cattle are gametically W.r., WwR, or w.R,. With
reference to group-unit No. 2 they are w.R,, WR: or
Wr». There are therefore involving these characters
nine gametic and three somatic types of individuals,
which types are set forth in the following table:
TABLE IV
GAMETIC COMPOSITION Somatic UNIT PURITY
Set 1 Set 2 Aspect Blood Set 1 Set 2
ee a. w.R, W. Red Pure Duplex Duplex
r ES w.R, w.Rr Red Mongrel Duplex Simplex
APES wR, Wa Roan Pure ulliplex
eer WwR, w Roan Mongrel Simplex Duplex
Doy WwR, wRr Roan Mongrel Simplex Simplex
a WwR, wr, White Mongrel Simplex Nulliplex
PAs eek War, w.R, Roan Pure Duplex uplex
aa War, wRr Roan Mongrel Duplex Simplex
oaa. W.r, Waa White Pure Duplex Nulliplex
Roan in this table stands for any animal with red and
white hairs interspersed, regardless of the proportion or
pattern.
716 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
All of these theoretical types seem to occur except the
roan of type 3, which phenomenon will be discussed
further on in this paper.
With these nine theoretical types of individuals the
following forty-five type matings are possible. (The
numbers following the color designations refer to the
above table describing the individuals somatically and
gametically. )
These forty-five cases typify the behavior of two com-
panion traits of opposing patency in their dominant
phases, thus explaining the behavior of one type of
apparent or somatic blend, which is in fact the resultant
somatic effect of the lack of synchronism in the behavior
of genetically independent units.
‘With these matings it is noted that the cases joined by
an arrow (cases 8 and 9,10 and 11,13 and 14,17 and 18, 19
and 20, 22 and 23, 32 and 33, 34 and 35, and 37 and 38) are
reciprocal cases wherein the same parental elements
enter and the same offspring are expected, but these
parental elements are differently combined in each pair
of parents—different somatic but identical gametic
matings. These principles fit the previously observed
facts as follows: As to the attempt to establish a race of
Red Shorthorns, the above mating No. 30 (a red by red)
expects 25 per cent. roan offspring and amply accounts
for the occurrence of roans in such a cross. This phe-
nomenon is equally well accounted for by the simple
hypothesis that red is dominant; some reds are simplex.
It is known that breeders in attempting to eliminate
white, spotted and roan from their stock simply
destroyed the ‘‘off color’’ calf—the genotypic germ
plasm that produced it being continued in the herd.
There are, however, reds which will produce only reds,
as in matings Nos. 6 and 15.
Mr. Spangler’s white bull was produced by two roan
parents; such color is expected from such a mating in
one fourth of the offspring of matings Nos. 25, 26, 37; in
three sixteenths of No. 28 and in one half of No. 34. His
whiteness is of either type 6 or type 9 and consequently
717
INHERITANCE OF COLOR IN CATTLE
No. 540]
¢
g ULoy L weoy & P me
T PA
Sap =
aym | tym p =
kg TMi TM T EM” M
T pew p ugoy L uoy l tym p =
T a TaT? z ZZ
5 ueo {
“AF =
EMTT M
“UMMA OT waa
p Ueo 2 weoy f ymp =
Me M z TMI | oe
MMM 8 FEM 8 ers g 4 SM Bee
L weoy
yap =
Zat?
Be uk oe
ZulidsyO Jo uolsodwog dy4¥vulog puv oMeuIey SUOIJB[NI[VH 9}BIPIMIeIUT
A Wiavib
Cam)
[ P
Cra)
Cam)
p woy
(a)
Cuamm)
L weoy
Ca)
Crm)
guəredq pZ
Erm) z
L Ugoy yoyo orywUI0g
quəredq IUO
[Vou. XLV
THE AMERICAN NATURALIST
718
6 PR T PA
z ngë —
IJ NYM g + J MYM 8 y M Z + WMS inegau
aA > ns
Zz pey T pay G uBoy p ueo (
2 z aye arene ==
QM p H YR yt F H QE MYM M F + MAM 2 a = pin M í ae
o PU T pee ¢ weoy p ugoy É ka
INMA M
IMM p H MAA p H ay Mp FE YEAH A F ress ee
"aM G+ "UMM S
Z poy T poy
ry a ye g + an yea g H
G ueo p weoy g ueo L uoy
TUM TMM P HAMM P EMEA g H EM g
Ig g + g
“aM + MM g HFM
II Il
f
G uroy p ugoy i A
å ayia g + g =
INYM 8 F INIMA 8 1 oe aM p =
c ugoy p ueoy ta enas oe
TEMA MM 8 H 'IMYMM 8 ATE od ue pe
G ueo p ugoy 8 ugoy L ugoy : ji a
à Iya “ag ==
THEM MM P bE p H EEM p HEM F a. M : : EM g =
G ueo p weoy 8 uĽroy L ugoy Wag + gag =
TEAM MF EMM MA P H MEM P H EM F mM g +H EEM z ioe
SujidsyO Jo UOTTsodu0D OMBUIOg pus OYoUTEH HB[NITV) IVTPA: I
(panuyjuoo) A ATAVL
Z PN
(ay?)
(ye)
G uvoy
(aga)
(Cum)
Z PN
(aga)
(ga)
G ugoy
(igm)
Fam)
8 ueo
(1g)
EEM)
CEM)
g ueo
(iym)
(yam)
JUIIV PZ
guəðreq IUO
Sl
“BL
719
INHERITANCE OF COLOR IN CATTLE
No. 540]
6 Pe g weoy
IPM 8 + TMM AA 8
Z pay Gg weoy
IJ 8 + IY MAMA 8
(
Z pay G UBoyy 8 uroy
IY MYM p + IMMM B+ IYEM ITM F {
G ueoy
IY MYM M OT
G ueo
IJN YAM OT
G uroy 8g ueoy
TPA MM 8 + IMIM 8
G uBoy 8 ueo
QM YMM 8 + IMIM 8
Co ey AN
g ugoy
IJ MIM OT
SutidsyO Jo uonsodwop pemos pug oyowery
OM g =
"2M g + UMM ZS
nea >? =
"aM g HUM 8 =
Ha y =
TM HUM HM =
wa p =
UAM b=
nea p =
YAM > =
nya >? =
MMS HEMA =
nA p =
"IMM 3 HFM g =
TE ERS. TPE E desea’ S
(panuyuoo) A ATAVL
9 IFM
(rm)
CaM)
g ugoy
Cra)
Ca)
9 ƏM
Cra)
Cam)
6 FIM
(rm)
CEM)
9 HM
(Erm)
Cam)
6 OTM
(ra)
CEM)
quosed pZ
"LE
‘OL
[Vou. XLV
THE AMERICAN NATURALIST
720
g weoy g pP
raya p + IMTM g H YMY p
g weoy g P
Ermaya g + aytay p +
T PU 9 IFM G ueo
AA g H EMM 3 H IMAAM P H AMM g
G wsoy
Ty MM F +
g weoy c PON T PA 9 OVUM
p weoey 6 OFM 8 ugoy
T arm + agim g + tga =
tata $ =
: zt yë tn =
p moog Ta + ag g +y =
Ta g + UMM g
,uog | SM tanas t'a =
apna Z H EAEE H MEM g H MEM
aiaiga + agiagia g H g eM pA g H | Fa EMAG E EA =
9 IUM G uvoy p uvoy zM iym g + ya =
"EM MM P + Ty AMM 8 + MMM F she “IMM p =
9 IUM 9 usog
FEM ITM M Z + IaM p + atm + aya g + ya =
p ugoy 6 NTM 8 uoy L Vaa yam 2+ MZ =
MMA g H EMM g H EM p H MM g
6 OTM 8 uvoy L woy ezz aye =
Feta p F EM 8g H UMM P a + Ira g eas ts
Z pu nea p =
Iyya a we p =
3uudsyo Jo up sod oD əpvuog put opowvrg hsb TITOS DN
(penuyjuoo) A ATAVL
g uvoy
(ga)
guad p3
gZ Pu
(Gya)
Caa) ‘08
g ugoy
(1ga)
yam) "63
g uvoy
(ym)
(am) "SZ
8 uvo
(1m)
CEM) "18
8 uoy
(1y)
Erm) "93
8 deo
maG: ev)
Crm) "93
T poy
(m)
(ym) H3
qua eug i
121
INHERITANCE OF COLOR IN CATTLE
No. 540]
9 OFT A
‘mg --ay'm g = (ua)
‘ym g++ ym g = (am)
g meou 3 pou 9 MUM ¢ ugoy
AYM p H TMA p H AM P H M P
g ueoy Z Pou 9 FIM c ugoy g usog
SEMAIA p TYP Ya p -H EMM M p + MMM F au; ae = a
g uroy 3 PA
armiya g + yntym g -+ : 9 oun
9 IFM G ugoy 6 OFT A g unoy tag -+ga g = (a)
EPMA M F H Typ aay MA M F of Trea g + IMF M z M + TMM ra + FM = (mam)
t
l
tg
9 om g ueog i 6 ONAL
l
l
(
oye —
MAMMA 8 + TYTMATA A 8 Bs shops: ‘is Se
9 OVUM g ugoy g uroy
aastata |Meat oD
9 80M Q weoy 6 IVM g uroy : - 6 RIM
MMM P H IAA p HEMM p H M F ean ved ke a et
g = M
9 M G uvoy 6 MTM g uroy 9 ORUM
TEMAM P H IMA M P H EME p + M F Ta g+ igmg =, (ta)
"YAM 3 HM = (Fam)
6 IM 8 umeog 6 OYM
‘tne taranna | estates | Go
SutidsyO JO uopssodmog Ipvwogs pus ojaUIBy SUOPIB[NI[VO AVIAU] quereg pz
(panuyuoo) A AIAVL
quale IUO
"88
"98
[Vou. XLV
THE AMERICAN NATURALIST
722
g Weoo
: TEM f =
FEM YAM OT Ig p =
(
g ueoy 9 OIM J Puy
ZIM? TM oye FAAS M Ji —
TM 8 H OEMTMM 8 amg + UA g =
.
g UBOT 9 9210 M 6 TM 4} IEM p =
EMM p H TaM 8 HITAM F il ara + yam g +M =
m -e gus
¢
9 OMIM 1 ctu p =
SIEM ATM
9 TM 6 OTA zm p
CAS F Na um g HME =
Se
6 OA { utap =
z MŽ
A My =
g ugoy Z Poy bags + mata g oe
SEIM g + TPM g ttm p =
Buudsyo Jo uoprsoduoo onvwog pur oyaurey SUOTIB[ND[VD IB pomu
(panuyuoo) A W'TAVL
9 OTT M
(rm)
Cunm )
6 OTM
(m)
EEM)
guaedq pZ
9 UM
(ra)
(apa )
6 IUM
(Era)
EEM)
6 ƏHYM
(Erm)
CEM)
6 OUM
quoieg oud
“PP
No. 540] INHERITANCE OF COLOR IN CATTLE 723
when mated with red cows only roan calves are expected
if the mating be like mating No. 20; 50 per cent. red and
50 per cent. roan if like No. 23; 50 per cent. roan and 50
per cent. white if like No. 35; and 50 per cent. roan, 25
per cent. red and 25 per cent. white if like No. 38. There
is ample explanation for throwing a white calf from a
roan cow and a white bull. If the mating be like Nos. 31,
Fia. 4. FLORINDA SULTANA.
FLORINDA SULTANA 70519. Roan.
Courtesy of F. W. Harding, Waukesha, Wis.
Dam—Gertrude, Vol. 60, p. 1110. Red. oe Hall ApS ap 3. White.
Dam’s Dam—Wild Eye Belle 15th. Red Sire’s Dam—Bapton - Roa
Dam’s Sire—Judge Wardell 144980. Red. Sire? s Sire—Bapton isni S Roan.
32, 33 or 44 the chance for roan and white colors are
equal; if like No. 36 the ratio of white to roan to red
expected is 6 to 8 to 2, but if the mating be of type 42 only
white calves can be expected.
Mr. Bruce’s array of data concerning the Sittyton
cattle presents a very telling table of facts. All possible
color matings are made, and in most cases the number of
offspring is quite large enough to insure a proportional
distribution among the expected colors. The facts of this
table fit the hypothesis quite significantly. Of special
724 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
interest are the roan by roan matings, which produced 56
reds, 193 mixed color (i. e., roan and red-and-white) and
60 white offspring. This ier not fit well into the now
abandoned hypothesis that ‘‘roans are simplex, reds are
duplex and whites nulliplex.’’ The number being quite
large should approximate more nearly the expected 50
per cent. of roans, or even less than 50 per cent., inasmuch
as some reds were later thought to be simplex; however,
there are 62.46 per cent. roans. This may mean that some
roans are pure and when mated to like animals will pro-
duce only roans—as mating No. 1, wherein two roans
produce only roans, which in turn are pure and will re-
produce themselves. As further explanation in account-
ing for an excess of roans—which is common in most
herds—note that in matings Nos. 1, 2, 7, 8, 9, 19 and 45 a
roan mated with a roan produces roans only. As to the
red by red matings, types Nos. 6 and 15 will give only
red offspring, while type 30 gives 75 per cent. red and 25
per cent. roan, which fits very well the distribution—133
red, 12 red-and-white, 34 roan and 1 white—with the
exception of the one white which will be discussed a little
-` further on. As a matter of fact, every possible color
mating has been reported to throw every other color
characteristic of the breed.
The red Shorthorn calf of white parentage is no doubt
derived as follows: Save for occasional insignificant red
patches in the ears, many Park Cattle are solid dominant
white; this element in a few cattle of the Shorthorn breed
would in the course of time, by the laws of chance, make
the mating Sets 1 and 2 (WwR.), Sets 1 and 2 (WwR,),
which would throw 25 per cent. red calves; this appar-
ently is exactly what has happened. Moreover, the much
more frequently possible white by white mating
wR.)
(WwR,) Set 1 y
Sets 1 and 2 (Wara) will produce 124 per cent. red offspring.
t 2
The red-by-red mating that produces a white calf is
No. 540] INHERITANCE OF COLOR IN CATTLE 725
either of very rare occurrence or does not occur at all.
Besides the cases just referred to, Pearson and Barring-
ton? reported two Shorthorn matings reputed to have
been red by red that produced white calves. Cases of
such rarity and import should be supported by more
painstakingly minute evidence than that offered by the
es TN
Fic. 5. Spicy SULTAN.
Spicy SuLTAN 334972. Roan.
Courtesy of F. W. Harding, Waukesha, Wis.
Dam—Spicy of Edna, Vol. 50, p. 532. Sire—Whitehall Sultan 163573. White.
Red, little White. Sire’s Dam—Bapton Pearl. Roan.
Dam’s Dam—Spicy of Browndale 9th. Red. Sire’s Sire—Bapton Sultan 163570. Roan,
Dam’s Sire—Orange Victor 138562. Red.
herd book, which often records an animal as red though it
may have white or roan areas of quite noticeable extent,
or an animal as ‘‘white’’ that may have, besides the
generally characteristic red in and about the ears, small
body areas of red or of roan. Mr. E. M. Hall, a promi-
nent Shorthorn breeder of Carthage, Missouri, in
response to a recent inquiry, wrote: ‘‘I now, March 30,
1911, have one white calf—from red dam and sire, but it
is an inbred calf.’ In response to further solicitation he
‘On the Inheritance of Coat-Colour in Cattle,’’ Biometrika, 1905-6,
p. 442.
726 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
kindly supplied the data for the following descriptive
pedigree:
A ft 3
Remus Gerafsine = Choice $ Imp. Efra 554 Reyaf Bug Victoria Riaerss
cei ite ja oi r s Res ded Ly VOI p.ms
Roa RS GER , Res : i
Roda a R
Choice Beo$s 15650: Ress Salt Vrolet 94 Ths Con Fuser 219004 Victeria HUS.
A beasties riem = Res Dark Rossa (frin) L"
dark aleut the heak anb a EE E E H.G3 fp. 074
hick an ramning To R
lykter cofor Lack i=B tf
body ae —=
Choici Goofs Mo <f i
2 Mes gd Dangirous GiM. ra. Fi.
ALD ~ twifh littl: white Liten "R $
fers fejs ande little hitt ox Kid. with aring pow whiti hairy
Tach hind 169 pust siet bef" dmtic spirets slong The [emir
F lines uf har bed”
White Caf Cost of
Buff. colsi Och, at lyre,
Inside of gers pele rsh; syes
vary deck bias.”
CHART I. Ancestry of White Calf.
Following the nomenclature of this paper this mating,
because each parent had both red and white hairs, would
be classed as ‘‘roan’’ by ‘‘roan’’ and the white calf could
be accounted for easily; but the case should not be dis-
missed so summarily. There are red Shorthorns without
a single white hair and, although red hair in and about
the ear is quite persistent, there are white Shorthorns
without a single red hair. If a mating of such red ani-
mals should have been known to have produced a white
calf it might be accounted for on the grounds of mutation
due to an intrusion de novo of an inhibitory or destroy-
ing antibody in quantity sufficient to affect the entire coat.
As an alternative possibility, it might be that by chance
the duplex red areas (w,R,) of one parent were in the
homologous areas of the other simplex red (wRr), a con-
dition very remotely, if at all, possible on account of the
absence of the reciprocally colored patterns in cattle.
However, should it be possible, the process would be as
follows:
No. 540] INHERITANCE OF COLOR IN CATTLE T2
lst Parent 2d Parent sprin
4 w.R,w Red
Set 1. (w.R,) (wRr) = 2 wR, +2 wRr | | ei : = Fi
= Na R, 24022
Set 2. pah = = 2 wR, + 2 w.Rr i wBrw,R, (Red)
Seen Seek 4w.Rrw.Rr (Red)
Now mate two of the latter type—w.Rr w.Rr
w.R.w2R, (Red)
2 w.R.w.Rr (Red)
w-R.w.r, (Roan)
2 w.Rrw.R, (Red)
4 w.Rrw,Rr (Red)
2 w.Rrw.r, (Roan)
w.r.W.R, (Roan)
2 w.r.w.Rr (Roan)
w.rWet, (White)
(wRr) (wRr) = w.R, + 2 wRr + war:
(w:Rr) (wRr) = w.R, + 2 wRr + wr,
A white thus derived from two reds would be an albino
as far as coat color is concerned. As still another possi-
bility it may be that a strain albinic as to its entire coat
entered into the Shorthorn make-up; this, while the
simplest explanation, can not, however, be shown historic-
ally. While the areas of dominant white and albinic are
quite specific, still, in view of the facts that the whitening
process is systematically progressive and that the albinic
condition is the more advanced, the areas of albinic white
must ultimately encroach upon those of dominant white.
Thus an animal whose coat is mostly albinic white, bred
to a duplex red, would produce a simplex red (with little
white), which latter animal could produce white offspring.
This may be what sometimes happens. But again it
involves the existence of a strain with an entire albinic
coat. Thus the behavior in heredity of the pattern and
pigments of the white calf belonging to Mr. Hall becomes
of absorbing interest. If it should be retained as a herd
bull and proves to be an animal of type No. 6 or No.9, then
the ‘‘roan-by-roan’’ theory or the intrusion de novo
theory must be accepted; if, however, it will produce
black calves when bred to an Angus or Galloway cow ‘‘the
reciprocal areas” theory or the ‘‘albino’’ theory must be
accepted. Present evidence seems to point toward the
roan-by-roan’’ theory and the impossibility of a mating
of an absolutely.red by an absolutely red producing any-
728 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von XLV
thing but red or roan calves—mutations excepted. In the
present light, the absence of white calves from red
parents, the absence of entire coat albinos, and the ab-
sence of theoretical type No. 3 are mutually corroborative
phenomena. The fact that white by white—Table I—pro-
duced a roan may mean nothing more than that the
mating was of type No. 43, in which 75 per cent. white and
25 per cent. roan offspring are expected.
As to the spotted animals, they seem to be of the same
nature as the roans. Just as there are mulattos and
‘‘spotted’’ negroes due, respectively, to fine and coarse
mosaics of the pigment granules, there are roan cattle,
which roan effect is due to a very close intermingling of
red and white hairs; and spotted cattle, due to a coarser
mosaic of the same, which coarser mosaic came from a
distinct inheritance source—doubtless the Dutch bulls of
eighteenth century importation, as previously stated. In
this paper, the spotted animals have thus far been treated
as roans; they have never been popular with breeders,
consequently, there are relatively few of them—the few
(three) Sittyton matings being typical. It is observed
from the table that when a mixed color animal is mated,
the mixed color offspring tend to be like the mixed color
parent—i. e., either largely roan or largely spotted, as the
case may be.
TABLE VI
(Caleulated from Table I)
Red by spotted gives 23.3 per cent. spotted and 12.7 per cent. roan.
Red by roan gives 4.4 per cent. spotted and 46.6 per cent. roan.
Roan by spotted gives 25.5 per cent. spotted and 45.3 per cent. roan.
The persistence of spottedness in the offspring of
spotted parents is accounted for by the fact that the color
areas are definite in location and contour and, being inde-
pendently transmitted, the registering of fortuitously the
red or the white phases of the homologous areas of the
two spotted parents will generally produce spottedness in
offspring. A similar registering of roan and spotted
coats would make the spottedness less pronounced.
There are all degrees of the roan condition, varying from
No. 540] INHERITANCE OF COLOR IN CATTLE 129
nearly white to nearly red; this may mean that the set of
dominant white hairs and the set of recessive white hairs
are not each governed by a single determiner, but by a
group of either many or few similarly behaving and gen-
erally, but not essentially, synchronously moving deter-
miners. This is consistent with the observed fact that all
matings into which roans enter produce more roans than
any other color. Thus it appears that, as with spotted-
Fic. 6. Roan LILY.
Roan Lity 59531. Roan.
Courtesy of F. W, Harding, Waukesha, Wis.
Dam—May Lily 59528. Red. j Sire—Gloster’s Choice 284895. Roan.
Dam ’s Dam—Mourey May 59529. Red. Sire’s Dam—Gloster Girl. Red.
Dam’s Sire—King of Banff (Imp.) 306221. Sire’s Sire—Choice of the Ring 187237. Roan.
Roan.
ness, the degree of roanness is the somatic effect of the
fortuitous registering—generally in accordance with the
theory of the pure gamete—of the many units composing
each of the two independently behaving sets of hairs;
this, together with the occasional intra-zygotic inhibition
and reaction in response to set conditions, quite com-
pletely explains the observed facts. Thus the registering
of pigments and patterns may give a measurable somatic
730 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
effect in inheritance without a specific chemical unit
determiner for such effect, and the spotted and roan
Shorthorns are not blends in the old sense of the term.
Angus cattle which are black sometimes throw dark red
colors, exemplifying the fact that in cattle, as with
animal pigments generally, the darker pigments are
epistatically dominant over the lighter, hence the cattle
colors—black, red, yellow with its variations—are domi-
nant over ‘‘albinic’’ white (w), like the white of the Silkie
Fowl, but ‘‘positive’’ white (W), like the white of the
Leghorn Fowl and such as that of the British Park
cattle, is dominant over any and all pigments. Corrob-
orative of this, recali the instance reported by Prof.
Wentworth, wherein pure-bred Holstein cows were bred
to a deep red Shorthorn bull, and in the offspring ‘‘the
color pattern showed no trace whatever of the Shorthorn
parentage.” Now conceive the white Shorthorn coat to
be made up of an admixture of ‘‘albinic’”’ and ‘‘positive’’
whites, and let the duplex red be mated with the white of
this nature—the offspring are the familiar roans, for the
‘‘positive’’? white persists and the ‘‘albinic’’ white is
covered by the red pigment. In explanation of the black
cattle crosses: Mate a white Shorthorn of type No. 9, or
a roan of type 7 or 8, with a black Angus or Galloway; the
dominant white persists, the black covers the red (as in
human hair) and the familiar blue-roan hybrid results in
exact accordance with the theory of gametic purity. Con-
ceive of the white-faced Hereford mated with the black
Angus—the ‘‘positive’’ white persists, the black pigment
covers the red and the familiar white-faced, black-bodied
hybrid results. Thus it is determined that the white of
the areas of the face, the two flank belts and the underline
are largely ‘‘dominant white,’’ while those of the neck,
barrel and quarters are mostly ‘‘albinic white.”’
The old single-unit coat hypothesis, even when amended
to permit the simplex condition in some reds and in some
whites, does not explain how the simplex condition could
run the entire color gamut; neither has the ‘‘first genera-
tion blend, later generation segregation’’ theory yet been
No.540] INHERITANCE OF COLOR IN CATTLE 731
reconciled with gametic purity. The old hypothesis is,
therefore, abandoned. The facts demand the companion-
trait or unit-complex hypothesis modified to permit of
occasional intra-zygotic reactions in response to a definite
set of conditions, instead of the single-unit notion, and
the 45 case matings instead of the typical 6.
The following table is compiled from data reported in
Biometrika, 1905, 1906,3 by Amy Barrington and Karl
Pearson from Coates’s Shorthorn Herd Book.
TABLE VII
% ane Offspring
Mati |
SRR Red ig ere Roan | Spotted Beer | White | Total
S |
E Red by red... 156 23 6 11 40 | 0 196
2. Red by roan......... 243 46 324 39 409 | 4 656
3. Red by white........ 1 2 2 89 | 0 90
4. Roan by roan....... | 104 43 286 69 398 | 84 586
ʻ5. Roan by white...... 1 1 47 l 49 | 24 74
6. White by white..... 0: 9 0 58 3
In addition to this, special search* for white-by-white
matings yielded 91 cases, giving 1 red, 4 roan and 86
white offspring; in two cases, red-by-red matings were
reported to have given white offspring.
The color distribution of this table practically parallels
that found in the Cruikshank herd as reported by Mr.
Bruce and that of the other compilations herein recorded.
Barrington and Pearson then proceeded with the fol-
lowing criticism:
. No simple Mendelian formula applies rigidly. We find our-
selves neglecting sensible percentages of occurrences incompatible with
the theory of the pure gamete.*
It is true that the first studies in color in Shorthorn
cattle suggested the single-unit color coat hypothesis and
as late as 1909 James Wilson, of the Royal College of
Dublin, in his interesting book on the ‘‘ Evolution of British
Cattle,’’? suggested this hypothesis. It is not, however,
the sole possible Mendelian interpretation, but rather the
* Ibid., pp. 427-464.
* Ibid., p. 441.
* Ibid., p. 454.
732 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
preliminary working analysis. The ‘‘sensible percent-
ages’’ that Pearson objects to also impel the most ardent
adherent of the pure gamete theory to discard the single-
unit color coat hypothesis and to seek the unit—however
great or small—that does behave in the expected fashion.
We must agree with the above criticism that the incom-
patible percentages and the exceptions are too persistent
to ignore; such percentages simply indicate that the
Fic. 7. RED LADY 6TH.
Rep Lapy 6TH 86626. Red.
Courtesy of F. W. Harding, Waukesha, Wis.
Dam—Red Lady (Imp.). Red, little White. Sire—Baron Sultan 300788. Me and White.
Dam’s Dam—Roan Mary. Roan. Sire’s Dam—Athene of River Red.
Dam’s Sire—Cornelius 226511. Red. Sire’s Sire—Whitehall Sultan spores White.
ultimate unit, or unit-behaving group of characters, is not
isolated, and that besides gametic segregation there is
occasionally intra-zygotic reaction. The old hypothesis
then must be abandoned and another better fitting the
facts must be worked out. Among other things the be-
havior of the unit complex must be studied. Thus, if a
Shorthorn is crossed with an Angus, the pure gamete
theory does not lead us to expect a series of ‘‘blends’’ or
of one of the pure parental types in the F, generation and
No. 540] INHERITANCE OF COLOR IN CATTLE 733
25 per cent. pure Shorthorn, 50 per cent. blends and 25
per cent. pure Angus in the F, generation. If all the in-
dependent units moved with absolute synchronism this
would be expected, but they are genetically independent
and the laws of chance demand that the greater the num-
ber of units the more intricate becomes the task of ex-
tracting an animal with the combination of a great num-
ber of arbitrarily selected traits such as compose any of
the pure breeds of domestic animals.
Barrington and Pearson in referring to the blue-gray
hybrid and white Shorthorn cross give evidence showing
that sometimes blue-gray, sometimes ‘‘grizzled’’ and
sometimes white animals result.° Quoting Mr. Hodgson,
they say: ‘‘This cross gives white cattle which are not,
however, to be reckoned as pure white Shorthorns.’” If
all the characters essential to differentiating ‘‘pure-
bred”? Galloway and ‘‘pure bred’’ Shorthorn cattle
from each other were reduced to their ultimate
inheritable units, the laws of chance having free play,
we should expect in F, one ‘‘pure-bred’’ Short-
horn and one ‘‘pure-bred’’ Angus in 4° individuals—in
which n is the number of ultimate units. A conservative
estimate would certainly make this number at least a
score, but more likely a hundred or a thousand. Taking
into consideration the fact that the phases of the units
patent in Shorthorn and Angus cattle are not uniformly
dominant or recessive, that the same units that distin-
guish Shorthorns from cattle in general may not also dis-
tinguish Angus from cattle in general, it is obvious that the
chance of producing a ‘‘pure’’ animal in F, from such a
combination is very remote. Thus, if the differentiating
traits be uniformly dominant or recessive and only ten in
number, the chance of securing such a combination would
be one in 1,048,576. The close and exceptional fitting of
many cases to the simply four-part Mendelian ratio is the
only conclusive evidence of the location of the ultimate
unit. It is infinitely easier to approximate one of the
° Ibid., p. 433.
' Ibid., p. 433.
734 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
parental types by breeding back to the desired type—the
‘‘pure sire’’ method— than to extract it from F, hybrids
by the operation of the laws of chance. In the general
run of cattle the 7/8 grades are quite like the pure types;
15/16 grades are much more so, while 31/32 or 63/64 are
generally so like the pure breed as to be, except for
arbitrary rules, eligible for registration. All of which
tends to support the pure gamete theory, in that under
such a process the laws of chance rapidly ‘‘quarter out”?
the foreign units, albeit rigid selection can, of course, as
it often does, maintain any one of the mongrel types indef-
initely. If the number be great, the longer the process
and the more likelihood of ‘‘reversion.’’ The theory of
the pure gamete is not inconsistent with the somatic blend
in F; in fact, it demands it in the coarser aspects. Such
a blend indicates that a unit complex rather than a single
unit is under observation.
All the data so admirably collected by Barrington and
Pearson yield most readily to a Mendelian interpretation,
if by such interpretation is meant the purity, segregation
and fortuitous recombination of the unaltered deter-
miners of unit characters, provided such interpretation
is not held to be inconsistent with frequent intra-zygotic
reactions between the determiner and some antibody
occasioned by the definite relative concentration and
intimacy of the two bodies. They reject a Mendelian
interpretation on the grounds that the whole coat does
not behave as a single unit. Gametic purity of the unit
character might as well be rejected on the grounds that
the whole animal with its thousands of characters does
not so behave, or that there are occasional intra-zygotic
reactions causing mutations. In mentioning the types of
cattle going into the making of the Shorthorn, they con-
tinue:
Upon the ingredients just referred to, the breeders had to work when
pedigree cattle breeding, which is scarcely more than a century old,
came into vogue. The Shorthorn had possibly arisen from four races:
the Celtic, a Romano-British, an Anglo-Saxon and the “Dutch” and
even some of these are mixtures. . . . Thus the Shorthorn Red may
No. 540] INHERITANCE OF COLOR IN CATTLE 7135
have had three sourees—an Anglo-Saxon red, the red of the Dutch
flecking, and the supposed Celtic red. The white may have come
through the Romano-British, through the Anglo-Saxon white or pos-
sibly through the white in the Dutch. The particolors and the roans
are of equally doubtful origin, although it probably is safe to assert
that they are due to the ‘ites of latest importation; and it thus
seems fairly impossible to determine a priori how many distinct red,
roan, particolor or white types may really exist in the case of the
Shorthorn. The importance of this statement for any Mendelian in-
terpretation must be obvious. We may have reds which are domi-
nant, recessive or even heterozygous to white or even to other reds,
and the search for a Mendelian formula becomes very elusive. . . .
We have seen that there is historically a possibility of two strains of
red and two strains of white having been mingled in the Shorthorn.
Determinants representing particolor and white markings can un-
doubtedly be introduced also; we confess to having made an attempt
from this standpoint which shattered with further examination of
Table I.—but the introduction needs a wider practise than we can
boast of in inventing Mendelian formule and until we are more con-
vineed than we are at present of the soundness of such formule we
should prefer to leave the invention to those who have had it. Coates
Herd Book presents a wide range of material and whatever we may
think of the categories selected, the record has been made by persons
in absolute ignorance of recent controversies about heredity. It is
therefore really impartial material for Mendelians to unravel.
It would thus seem that no simple Mendelian formula can poeiibty ‘ft
the Shorthorn eases. Roughly, such a formula approaches the data in
one or two points but the roughness appears inconsistent with a
theory of Mendelism being due to the purity of gametes. It is of
course clear that the introduction of a complex allelomorph may im-
prove matters, or the differentiation of whites and reds into different
classes, homozygous and heterozygous. Increase in the number of
available variables usually does give better fits.*
The whole color problem in Shorthorns is a compli-
cated study in mongrelism and no single simple four-part
Mendelian ratio can be expected to explain it. Instead
of a single unit or a single uniformly dominant or reces-
Sive series, there are two genetically independent unit-
behaving groups of units—one dominant, the other reces-
sive in their companion, i. e., their white phases. How-
ever, such companion traits—if the somatic blend is con-
sidered as simplex—when undistinguished, will give the
* Ibid., p. 444.
736 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
simple four-part Mendelian ratios in 42 case matings out
of 45, the exceptions being matings 28, 29 and 36. In sum-
ming up the coat-color inheritance of blue-gray cattle,
Barrington and Pearson say on page 435, ‘‘It will need a
complex allelomorph to describe these color changes, if,
indeed they can be described at all.’’ With this it must be
agreed. The ‘‘complex’’ allelomorph is, however, not so
complex, after all; the complex is simply a group of
Fic. 8. AVONDALE.
similar units each independently transmitted. If they
were less uniform in their somatic aspects they would
not be so confused. The task of segregating the unit
becomes more difficult but not at all impossible.
Barrington and Pearson emphasize the statement that
the evidence of the breeders of the blue-grays is that a
white Shorthorn bull of white parentage is greatly to be
preferred to one of roan parentage, inasmuch as the
former type invariably gives the desired blue-gray color
—referring to Mr. deVere Irving:
737
INHERITANCE OF COLOR IN CATTLE
No. 540]
sonig ‘ft Pag
439 suIJAy
anig “f IMUM
LEOOFT Ireqmoug
yquvysyomip 'V pay
‘a 80g ‘d ‘Fg “IOA qyuvivuy
yuvysyinip “Vv uno
9z90¢ puvyiequing
uV "H ‘S INUM 21441) “PIAM
Ur HAA MOPVƏIWN
POOM ‘U IUM 91290 “PAA
T6937373 pgo uvwsury
yuvysyomnip “vy uno
4389 depusa
yuĽeysy mIo “vy pIa
6LOZET paeng oq} Jo ureydep
uospaerd “V IUM
esOIUIL
yuvysyinig 'V Uno
69ELST UMOIQ uəpjo9
amuma “MA uno
"a LOS “d ‘gg IOA JOpUaAR'T JIM
yUvysyoMaAy) “Vv pad
9LOSET ULWƏSION
SHIM “GO “£ INUM PUD pay
ASTEA OATGSIIEM
yurysyondg “Vv pay
6S0ZET pieng əy} Jo ureidup
SHIM ‘dd ‘f£ pay
'H 819 ‘d TE-A dHsSmop
SHIM “dd '£ uvo
PLOZET 1020TA JUNOD
ie
qi0OT ƏUIAV
yqueysyoIndiy “Vy
PAX
yopwog 0143118
LOFTIST
uwy “H ‘8
PAN
TIL HdA Mopweyy
SHIM “a ‘f
DIA
JapueaAv'yT UJALI
EL9GGS
pna “MA
‘sce 'd ‘6g 'I0A Uog
pz esormag
qmq “M
GLOSET uvo
+
J
7
Jepuaavy jyunop
J
SHIHA ‘d ‘f£
‘POL ‘d ‘Zh ‘OA Poy
ASEA woop,
SHIMA ‘d 'r
TLES9T unos
10791A UOJdeg
‘1 98L d ‘gp oA wnoy
OLSE9ST
i 001333
P898 ‘d ‘SF ‘IOA
meraq uoideg ‘duy
PHN V “AA
ayqoun[Vay
UIIIV “H S
IPU M 29114 “Pay
əƏquoəsə
SHIM ‘q ‘Lf
uno
SHIIM ‘qa ‘Lf
uno
uryng uojdeg
‘OQO ‘pleysuvyy ‘ssoy pur aejuediep JO goes
‘UDO ="PPISHG DIVANOAYV
elo’ “A ‘OD
eco d ‘09 “10A unoy
pz əypuvjvay ‘dwg
SHUM 9uveqd ‘Lf
ELGLITI INUM
uens NVA PUM
+
oro
‘s8uridg MOTO
erepuoay
738 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
He finds on using a white bull of roan parentage that the offspring
are liable to come dark, some almost black, in color and others very
dark blue-gray.’
No better material for Mendelian interpretation than
this could be offered. It simply means that the white
bull of ‘‘white parentage’’ is more likely to be of type
**9’? (a roan bull of type 7 or 8 would do as well); the
whole becomes a mating of type No. 20, which expects
100 per cent. roans—black taking the place of red the
Fig. 9. AVONDALB'’S FIRST CALVES.
roan becomes blue-roan or ‘‘blue-gray.’’ A white bull of
‘‘roan parentage’’ is more likely to be of type ‘‘6’’ (a
roan of type 4 or 5 would do as well—see matings Nos.
5 and 14), which mated to a pure black would produce
50 per cent. blue-roans and 50 per cent. blacks, in
accordance with a mating of type No. 23. Wild
white cattle which occasionally drop red or black calves,
when crossed with a white Shorthorn produce white off-
spring. Such a female offspring when bred to a white
Shorthorn bull ‘‘may produce a considerable percentage
of both roan and red as well as of white calves.’’®
° Ibid., p. 432.
Thid., p. 442.
No. 540] INHERITANCE OF COLOR IN CATTLE 739
AVONDALE’S HIRST CALVES
Courtesy of Carpenter and Ross, Mansfield, Ohio.
ea ROAN. Calf No. I. Colonel. Dark Roan.
Sire’s mp. Avalanche 2d. Roan Dam—Chrysanthemum, ROAN.
Sire’s rice ert ear ik White. Dam’s Dam—Christina. Roan.
Sire’s Dam’s Dam—Avalanche. Roan. Dam’s Sire—General White. White.
Sire’s Dam’s Sire—Mescombe. Calf No. II. Max Rosewood. Roan.
Red, little White. Dam—Rosewood 86. ROAN.
Sire’s Sire’s Dam—Imp. Bapton Pearl. Dam’s Dam—Rosewood 81. xoan.
Roan. Dam’s Sire_Pride of Day. Roan.
Sire’s Sire’s Sire—Bapton Sultan. Roan. Calf No. III. Wall Street. White.
Dam—Wedding Gift 16. Roan.
Dam’s Dam—Wedding Gift 12. Roan.
Dam’s Sire—Royal Prince. Roan.
Calf No. IV. Sir Collin Campbell.
Red, little White.
Dam—Ury Lassie. RED, LITTLE WHITE.
Dam’s Dam—tUry of Greenwood.
Red, little White.
Dam’s Sire—Royal James. Red.
Calf No. V. Max Clipper. Red.
Dam—Miss Council. AN
Dam’s Dam—Christina. Sook.
Dam’s Sire—Council. Roan.
Precisely this phenomenon was paralleled experimen-
tally and given a clear Mendelian explanation by Daven-
port,’ who mated the dominant white of the Leghorn
fowl with the recessive white of the Silkie. The
F, generation, save for some red on the wings of the
males, was white; this F, generation mated inter se gave
some individuals with the typical ancestral Jungle fowl
coloration. The fact that the Park cattle generally breed
white but occasionally throw a red or a black calf means
that generally the germ cell formula is (W.R,), which will
throw all white, but sometimes is (WwR,), a strain of
which introduced into a breed will throw the ‘‘ occasional
red calf.” The introduction of a strain of partial albin-
ism seems to effect this cleavage and apparently is
brought about as follows:
™**New Views about Reversion,’’ Proceedings of the American Philo-
sophical Society, Vol. XLIX, No. 196, p. 294.
740 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
Wild White Cow Offspring
Body areas 1 and 2
Germ cells W,
White Shorthorn Bull No. 6 8 WwR, WwkRr White
Body areas 1 ee
Germ cells WwR, wT, | 8 W2R, WwkRr White
1 2
F, 100 per
cent. White.
2W.R,+2WwR, 4WwRr
Now mate a female of one of these types—e. g., 1/WwR,
2/WxR: with a white Shorthorn bull—e. g., one of type
No. 6.
Areas 1 2 1 2
Hybrid cow WwR, WwRr WB WwEr White
Bull No. 6 Ww wn WR Wafa White
1 2 Why Wwr, White
WR, wRr
W.R, + 2 WwR, + w.R. WwRr + wr, + Wwr, + wRr 2 WwR, Wwkr White
2WwR, Wafa White
2 WwR, Wawr, W
2 WwR, wRr Roan
WR WwRr Roan
wR, WP's
No theory not involving the purity—i. e., chemical iden-
tity, of the determiner and its segregation and recombina-
tion in unaltered form, together with occasional intra-
zygotic inhibition and reaction in response to specific con-
ditions, can explain the facts reported by Barrington and
Pearson, which facts of observation tally with those
reported from many other sources.
Confirmatory of the declaration that the white of the
wild Park cattle is dominant white, the following evidence
by Storer—referring to the Chartley cattle—is offered:
Whatever cows were put to the white bulls, the calves came almost
invariably the color of their sires; the only instance he remembered to
the contrary being that on one occasion a dark-colored cow produced
a spotted ealf. Thus were singularly confirmed at Chartley two of
the facts which Bewick relates with regard to Chillingham—the exist-
ence of the custom and the prepotency of the white sire.”
“=**The Wild White Cattle of Great Britain,’’ p. 239.
No. 540] INHERITANCE OF COLOR IN CATTLE 741
And further, in quoting Mr. John Thornton he says:
The peculiarity most striking was the color; a clear white body,
head and neck, with much hair; but the ears, nose, circle around the
eyes, and the hoofs were black, and there were a few black spots on
the fetlock above the hoof.” Black calves are not at all uncommon.
snes the variation of color occurs the calves are mee pars bink
“ with not a white hair on them” never particolored. .
Professor S. Cossar Ewart, of Edinburgh, writes
(April 11, 1911):
Some years ago I saw at Chillingham crosses between these white
Park cattle and white Shorthorns—all the crosses were white or light
cream color.
Recently under his direction wild Chartley bulls were
crossed with domestic heifers. The matings and off-
spring are indicated by chart No. 2, which was drawn
from data supplied by him.
a
acK, hight Ref.
et
on Bey.)
CHART II. Ewart’s Experiment. >
From this, as from other pedigrees, it appears that the
white of the Park cattle is dominant white, that, barring
dominant white, the darker pigments are epistatically
dominant over the lighter ones, but that neither domi-
nancy and segregation nor the coexistence of several pig-
ments, nor midway blends—all of which may operate here
—entirely explains the facts; there must also be occa-
sional intra-zygotic reaction and mutations.
* Ibid., p. 241.
“ Ibid., p. 237.
742 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
The behavior of the crest when a crested fowl is mated
with a non-crested variety is typical of the behavior of
somatic blends tending to obscure gametic segregation.
Davenport has shown that there are two genetically
independent factors united in the crest: One, erectness of
feather growth over a certain area is dominant over the
normal condition; the other a continued growth of
feathers of this area is recessive to the normal growth.
Hence, in the F, generation there is an apparent ‘‘blend.’’
the feathers being short but erect. From F,, however,
in subsequent generations, Davenport has extracted a
beautiful complete crest. There are many other striking
somatic blends—among them the case of the Andalusian
fowl, of the human mulatto, and of the human herma-
phrodite. Blends are essentially the somatic aspects of
the fortuitous combinations of the patent and latent
phases of two or more genetically independent units. In
this sense Galton’s law may justly stand for the general
measure of ancestral influence—a measure of the opera-
tion of the laws of chance. The existence of somatic
blends can not be denied, for they are among the most defi-
nite things commonly observed in inheritance. The more
cursory the examination and the more general the view
of such cases, the more seeming the blend; however, a
more minute inspection often reveals the segregation of
the parental factors, all of which points towards the
minuteness of the unit character and the purity of the
gamete. Were blending, in the commonly understood
sense a fact, all individuals of a race or a strain would in
a few generations become identical with each other. It is
the creation of new units by intra-zygotic reactions and
intra-gametic intrusions, together with the segregation
and recombination of the unaltered ultimate units of
inheritance that have given selection such an opportunity
for developing so many strains and species.
*«<Tnheritance in Poultry,’’ p. 69.
(To be concluded)
STUDIES ON MELANIN—IV
THE ORIGIN OF THE PIGMENT AND THE COLOR PATTERN IN
THE ELYTRA OF THE CoLorRADo Potato BEETLE
(Leptinotarsa decemlineata Sayt)
DR. ROSS AIKEN GORTNER
INTRODUCTION
AmoxNG the more important problems in the study of
animal pigmentation is the question as to the origin of
the color pattern. Perhaps one of the most common of
the insects which has a definite color pattern is the Colo-
rado potato beetle (Leptinotarsa decemlineata Say), and
I have, therefore, investigated the origin of the color in
the elytra of this beetle, and have found a possible ex-
planation for the cause of the color pattern.
I have already shown that in all probability the for-
mation of animal pigments is due to the interaction of
some chromogen and an oxidase of the tyrosinase type
(Gortner, 1910, 1911). I have found evidence which
leads me to believe that the same reaction produces the
pigment in the potato beetle, and that the color pattern
of the elytra is produced by the localized secretion of
chromogen.
HISTORICAL
In so far as I am aware the only work which has been
done on the nature of colors in Leptinotarsa has been re-
ported by Tower. In an article on ‘‘Colors and Color
Patterns in Coleoptera” (1903), Tower discusses the
origin of the pigment in the Colorado potato beetle, and
repeats his findings in a larger work, ‘‘ An Investigation
of Evolution in Chrysomelid Beetles of the Genus Lep-
tinotarsa’’ (1906). The biological features of the latter
* From the Biochemical Laboratory of the Station for Experimental Evolu-
tion. The Carnegie Institution of Washington.
743
744 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
work have been reviewed elsewhere (Cockerell, 1907),
but, in so far as I can find, the chemical data and theo-
rizings have been passed over. It is evident from a very
casual glance at the chemistry, that Tower has strayed
from familiar paths and is wandering far afield. I can
refer to only a few of his errors here, but these are so
obvious as to show that no reliance can be placed upon
the chemical findings, much less upon his chemical theo-
rizings.
Perhaps the worst error, inasmuch as Tower bases all
of his results as to the nature of the pigment upon this
point, is to state (1906, p. 136), ‘‘Bottler, working upon
the hair of animals and upon silk, has shown these pig-
ments to be azo compounds, and in insects they belong
to the same series.” The reference which Tower quotes
is a book by Bottler (1902) entitled ‘‘Die animalischen
Faserstoffe. Ein Hifls- und Handbuch fiir die Praxis,
umfassend Vorkommen, Gewinnung, Eigenschaften und
technische Verwendung sowie Bleichen und Farben
thierischer Faserstoffe. Nach dem gegenwärtigen
Standpunkte der wissenschaft bearbeitet.” From the
title I did not expect to find much original work on the
subject of animal pigments, neither could I find in any
of the biochemical literature any reference which could
be so construed as to intimate that animal fibers, espe-
cially silk, occurred naturally dyed with azo dyes. I
find in Bottler’s book references to azo compounds in the
chapter on ‘‘Das Färben animalischer Faserstoffe’’
and in each instance the references are to azo dyes with
which to dye the animal fibers. In almost every instance
Bottler gives the origin of the dye employed, as “M. L.
Br.” (Meister, Lucius and Brüning) or “Fr. Bay.” (Fr.
Bayer & Co., in Elberfeld) together with explicit direc-
tions as to the composition of the dyeing bath. Bottler
does mention the naturally occurring pigments by stating
on page 36 that ‘‘dark-colored wools are usually used in
their natural color or dyed dark, as it is only with great
No. 540] STUDIES ON MELANIN 745
difficulty that they can be bleached’’: and on page 44
‘tone uses camel hair in the natural color or dyed dark
inasmuch as it can not be bleached.’’ This is the only
connection in which the natural-occurring pigments are
mentioned.
Tower states (1903, p. 63) that:
The chemical nature of colors is a problem most difficult of investi-
gation, chiefly because such energetic measures are necessary to get the
color into solution that there is every reason to suspect that it is no
longer the same as that in the cuticula. With solutions of P. cornutus
in HCl or H,SO,, various tests were made, which established the fact
that it is much like some of the benzine derivatives, and the spectra of
this solution and of permanent brown are identical and closely similar
to that of Bismarck brown. There is, however, a great difference be-
tween the solution of cuticula color and Bismarck brown, the former
being a colored substance and the latter a coloring substance.
Cutieula colors in acid solution are decolorized by reducing agents
such as tin and HCl or strong alkalis. If, however, the decolorized
solution is treated with a mild oxidizing agent, part or perhaps all of
the color is restored. In the process of decolorization the solution
passes from deep brown to lighter shades, to yellow, and eventually to
a colorless solution. According to Stecher and others, fast brown is a
diazo compound belonging to the group of amidoazo and oxyazo com-
pounds, which form colored solids varying from yellow to deep brown.
These diazo, oxyazo, and amidoazo compounds are soluble in alcohol,
as is this cuticula color,’ and when in solution are rendered colorless
by reducing agents, thus forming colorless azo, or hydrazo compounds,
which, by mild oxidation, may be reconverted into yellow- or brown-
colored diazo, oxyazo, or amidoazo compounds. There is thus a very
close agreement between the reaction of cuticula color and the diazo,
oxyazo, and amidoazo compounds to reducing and oxidizing agents.
In these and in other characters the cuticula colors resemble these ben-
zine derivatives, but not in any respect do they resemble other colored
substances or dyes known to organic chemistry. The existence of azo
compounds has been recognized by Bottler in the hairs of animals and
in silk fibers, where they function as pigments and have some of the
structural peculiarities of cuticula color. I feel perfectly certain,
therefore, that these cuticula colors are azo compounds, a conclusion
based upon the following characters: (1) their colors; (2) solubility;
7 On page 41 of the same work Tower states that these cuticula colors are
‘‘insoluble in water, alcohol, ether, oils, weak acids or alkalis. Soluble in
strong concentrated mineral acids with dissolution of the cuticula.’’
746 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
(3) behavior to oxidizing and reducing agents; (4) crystallization; (5)
spectrum; and (6) their decomposition products.
Let us see what of real value these characters possess:
1. If color is any criterion, all colored objects must con-
tain azo dyes, inasmuch as azo compounds occur in almost
every possible shade of color,
2. If the data which Tower gives on page 11 (1903) be
referred to we fin
f Black : Permanent. Insoluble in water, al-
Gatienia | Dark brows Located in cohol, ether, oils, weak acids or
colors | Brown
Straw yellow
y alkalis. Soluble in strong concen-
cuticula trated mineral acids with dissolu-
tion of the cuticula.
These are not the characteristics of the azo compounds,
for azo compounds are soluble in alcohol and in many
cases are very soluble in water. The ‘‘amidoazo’’ com-
pounds are soluble in weak acids and the oxyazo com-
pounds are very soluble in weak alkalis. The characters
which Tower gives are, however, exactly those char-
acters which are possessed by the melanins.
3. Tower has made a great mistake when he states
that azo compounds are reduced to colorless bodies and
then reoxidized to colored diazo, oxyazo or amidoazo
compounds by mild oxidizing agents. When azo com-
pounds are reduced by tin and hydrochloric acid the azo
union is broken, each nitrogen atom yielding an amino
group, and the colored compound can not be regenerated
by mild oxidation, but the original diazotization and
coupling must be repeated before a color results. For
example we reduce Congo red and we get benzidine and
‘‘naphthionie acid’’ neither of which gives a color on
mild oxidation. (See Mulliken (1910), p. 26, footnote.)
C,H,—N=N—C,,H,(SO,H) (NH,)
H_—N=N—C,H,(80,H) (NH)
C.H,—NH,
eH,—NH,
There are, to be sure, dye stuffs (for example, indigo),
which do reduce to colorless compounds, or leuco bases,
+ 2C,oH,(SO,H) (NH2)2
No. 540] STUDIES ON MELANIN 747
and which reoxidize to the original color and compound,
but the azo compounds are distinguished from these
colors by the fact that no reoxidation takes place. —
4. I have been unable to find any data as to the crystal
form of cuticula pigments. All writers report that they
are non-crystalline. If Tower succeeded in preparing
_erystals he has succeeded where every one else has failed.
The azo compounds, on the other hand, are usually easily
obtained in erystal form.
5. As to the value of the spectrum I will quote Tower’s
own words (1903, p. 56).
The study of animal and plant pigments has been carried on almost
entirely by means of spectrum analysis. ... There is, however, very
grave doubt as to the value of such spectrum work. After spending
several months in the analysis of cuticula pigment of Coleoptera, Lepi-
dopterous larve, and Hymenoptera, I discarded as worthless all of my
results, because in no ease was I able to obtain a spectrum of sufficient
permanence, or one that had absorption bands of enough constancy, to
be reliable. The same solution with the same apparatus and light will
vary in its spectrum from day to day. Moreover, any slight change
in acidity or alkalinity, or in dilution or concentration, ete., will pro-
duce a variation in the spectrum.
6. In regard to the decomposition products of cuticula
pigments, I can find no data in Tower’s paper, so that I
do not know in what respect they may resemble known
organic compounds. Enough has been shown, however,
to prove that Tower’s statement (1906, p. 136), ‘‘we are
safe, then, in concluding that these cuticula pigments
are azo compounds, but whether they are azo, diazo,
oxyazo, or amidoazo® is not known,’’ is entirely with-
out foundation.
? For those who are not familiar with this nomenclature I will give here an
example of the formula of each class:
Azobenzene, ©,H;—N=—N—C,H,,
Duiske: C,H;—N=—=N—OH.
Tower probably refers to Disazo compounds, inasmuch as diazo compounds
are very unstable and are not coloring matters
Disazobenzene, C,H,;—N=N-: OH, —N=N—C,H,,
zobenzene, C,H,—N==N—C,H,OH,
Aminoazobenzene, C,H,—N==N—C,H,NH,.
748 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
Other examples of this chemistry are numerous, but I
can only mention one or two. Tower states (1903, p.
54) ‘‘Sundwick and Ledderhose conclude that chitin is
an amido derivative of a carbohydrate having the for-
mula CoH yy 5059.’’4 I was willing to allow this as an error
in proof-reading had not the same C,H,,,0;, occurred
again on page 55, where he adds ‘‘and hence glucoside,
like cellulose, and other plant substances.’’
Again I quote from the 1906 paper (p. 123) ‘‘ Griffiths
farther isolates and studies a green pigment which is
allied to uric acid or is a uric acid derivative called lepi-
dopteric acid (C,,H,,Az,.N,0,)?).’’? I have not seen
Griffiths’s paper (1892), but, from the formula which
Tower gives, I would say that the question mark is well
placed, inasmuch as the English form of nitrogen is not
known to differ from the French variety. Some of the
other errors will be referred to in connection with my
work.
EXPERIMENTAL
The Formation of the Pigment by Oxidation.—The
material employed was the pupæ and adults of the Col-
orado potato beetle, Leptinotarsa decemlineata Say.
Large larvæ were secured in the field and placed in bat-
tery jars, provided with abundance of fresh potato stalks,
and containing about four inches of sifted soil in the
bottom. The top of the jar was covered with mosquito
netting. Within a few days all of the larvæ had entered
the soil and had pupated. When the adult beetles emerge
from the pupal skin, the elytra are an almost uniform
light yellow color, and upon this surface the lines of the
darker color pattern shortly appear. In accordance
with my former work I have found that this pigmenta-
tion is an oxidation, induced by an oxidase of the tyro-
sinase type. |
Tower (1903, p. 58) states that he tested the rate of
pigmentation when the pupx were kept in an atmosphere
* My italies.
* My italics. Cellulose is in no way related to the glucosides.
No. 540] STUDIES ON MELANIN 749
containing respectively ‘‘O, 40 parts, N, 80 parts; O,
60 parts, N, 80 parts; O, 80 parts, N, 80 parts, and O,
pure. In the first two no changes were noted, but in the
third there was a large mortality, showing that the
amount of O, had become toxic and the pigmented areas
were small and weak. The same results were attained
in a more marked manner with pure O..’’
Tower’s results in this instance are easily accounted
for, inasmuch as a very small quantity of oxygen is con-
sumed in the process of pigmentation and even in normal
air the oxygen is present in enormous excess. The rate
of pigmentation is, in all probability, at a maximum
even when the oxygen is present in very small concen-
tration. Tower further adds (1903, p. 58): ‘‘A second
set of experiments consisted in diminishing the O, pres-
ent, but even although O, was absent, pigmentation was
not changed. A third set consisted in placing pups in
an atmosphere of CO., N, H, and pigmentation, if about
to begin or already begun before the pupæ were placed
in the gas, was not retarded or changed.’’ Tower does
not state what precautions were used to ensure the entire
absence of oxygen. I have found that when all oxygen
is absent, no pigmentation takes place.
Newly emerged adults, whose elytra showed no trace
of brown pigment, were placed in gas wash bottles which
were provided with a tubulated ground glass stopper,
arranged in such a manner that when the stopper is
turned slightly the stream of gas is cut off and the bottle
is tightly closed (see Himer and Amend’s 1910 Catalogue
no. 3658). A current of washed carbon dioxide, from a
Kipp apparatus, was then passed through the bottle for
twenty-four hours and then the gas was shut off by turn-
ing the stopper slightly. In every instance the elytra of
the beetles remained colorless as long as they remained
in the carbon dioxide and if removed to the air, or else
if the carbon dioxide were displaced by a stream of pure
oxygen, before decomposition set in, pigmentation pro-
750 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
ceeded at once. Other beetles were kept in the air as a
check upon the results, and in some instances one elytron
was removed, and either the beetle minus one elytron
was placed in the carbon dioxide and the other elytron
kept in the air as a check, or vice versa. The same results
were obtained when pure hydrogen was used instead of
carbon dioxide. I found that it was impossible to obtain
entire absence of oxygen when either rubber or cork
stoppers were employed, for on long standing some
traces of oxygen, apparently, diffuse through the rubber
or cork, and cause pigmentation to proceed.
If a beetle with unpigmented elytra be kept submerged
in water by means of a small weight, for example in a
test tube under a ten cent piece, no coloration appears
in thirty-six hours, while in a check the pigmentation
was complete in twelve hours. When, however, the
beetles were removed from the water and exposed to the
air, pigmentation proceeded at once. In most cases the
beetles revived after having been submerged for thirty-
six hours, as did those that had been forty-eight hours in
carbon dioxide. Heating an unpigmented elytron at 70°
for one minute totally inhibits pigment formation. The
above results are identical in every respect with those
which I have reported in the case of the periodical cicada
(1911) and the meal worm (1910 b.), so that there can be
no doubt that the formation of the pigment in the elytra
of the Colorado potato beetle is an oxidation. Tower
states (1903, p. 53) that the cockroach, Phyllodromia
germanica Linn. was used in contributing to his conclu-
sions, and Phisilax (1905) has since shown that in this
material the pigmentation is due to an oxidation induced
by a tyrosinase.
Evidences of Enzyme Action—Tower claims to have
shown the presence of enzymes by finding stained
zymogen granules in some of his sectional material. He
states (1903, p. 60), ‘‘it was impossible to prove the ex-
istence of a zymogen in the hypodermis of much of my
No. 540] STUDIES ON MELANIN 751
material, as almost all of the best of it was in sublimate-
acetic-acid fixation, which does not fix zymogens well, but
dissolves them and leaves vacuoles where the granules
should have been. . . . With Berenyi and picric acid
mixtures some zymogen granules were preserved, but
the rest of the material was so bad that the preparations
were useless. The account of the zymogens and their
part in pigmentation is based on. material from L.
decemlineata and C. femorata. For demonstrating the
presence of substances, probably zymogens, I used iron
hematoxylin, which is fairly good, and Bensley’s stain
for zymogens.’’
I do not know by what right one can designate a
stained granule as a zymogen when we do not know
whether zymogens exist as distinct bodies or not. Zym-
ogen is only a term which we use to state the fact that
in some cases there is, apparently, the sudden appear-
ance of enzyme action where no enzyme action could be
previously detected. We call the mother substance of
this enzyme a zymogen, but since the term ‘‘enzyme”’ is
only another term for a peculiar kind of energy, which
may some day be shown to be only a catalysis, or other
physical phenomenon, we have, at present, no basis for
believing that either enzymes or zymogens can be stained
by definite stains.
Tower states that he has prepared an enzyme which
is responsible for the production of pigment. and which
causes the hardening of the primary cuticula. To this
‘‘enzyme’”’? he has given the name ‘‘chitase.’’ The
method of preparing this enzyme is given on page 60
(1903), and on page 138 (1906). Pupz were ground with
quartz sand and the mixture extracted with 35 per cent.
aleohol containing 2 per cent. of acetic acid, or with 50
per cent. aleohol containing 10 per cent. of glycerol.
“Dilute alcohol and acetic acid served the best, as it gave
the largest precipitate upon the addition of 95 per cent.
alcohol. The white, rather floceulent, precipitate pro-
752 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
duced was separated by filtration, redissolved in alco-
hol and acetic acid, and reprecipitated several times,
and finally used in 30 per cent. aleohol containing one
tenth per cent. acetic acid.” Into this solution were
suspended pieces of primary cuticula, taken before pig-
mentation had begun to develop. ‘‘The result was that
in about thirty-six hours the cuticula had become brown,
being first drab, then pale brown, then full brown. Be-
yond this, coloration did not advance. It was uniform
over the entire surface, but, although areas where spots
normally develop were present, no tendency to spot for-
mation was observed.’’
This does not prove that the solution which Tower
prepared contained enzymes, for the pieces of unpig-
mented cuticula which were used as the testing material
may have contained sufficient enzymes to produce the
pigmentation. Tower does not mention that he used a
check of distilled water in place of the ‘‘enzyme’’ solu-
tion. I have repeated this part of the work, and for the
piece of the primary cuticula I have used the fresh ely-
tron, taken before the pigmentation had begun to de-
velop. I find that there is an appreciable difference in
the rate of the development of the pigment when the
elytron is placed in the ‘‘enzyme’’ solution or in distilled
water, and that this difference is in favor of the dis-
tilled water. The color is distributed more over the en-
tire surface in the case of the enzyme solution, but I find
that this is probably due to the fact that the precipitate
contained some of the chromogen and when this came
in contact with the tyrosinase on the surface of the ely-
tron, pigment was produced. Tower’s ‘‘enzyme’’ solu-
tion, if it does contain an enzyme, does not contain the
enzyme which causes the pigmentation, for it gives none
of the tests for oxidases. Oxidases are destroyed by
solutions that are slightly acid so that this is probably
one of the reasons why his preparations did not give
more positive results. Another reason could be found
No. 540] STUDIES ON MELANIN 753
in the high percentage of alcohol which was used both
to extract the enzyme, and as a solvent.
The Isolation of a Tyrosinase——Phisalix (1905), De-
witz (1902), Roques (1909) and Durham (1904), as well
as myself (1910 b.) (1911), have shown that the produc-
tion of melanin is caused by the action of an oxidizing
enzyme of the tyrosinase type upon some oxidizable
chromogen, which may, in some instances, be tyrosin.
My first step was, therefore, to ascertain whether or not
tyrosinase were present in the potato beetle. I found
that it was present in large amounts in the beetles that
were collected in the field. In order to make sure that
there was no mistake, I tested some of the potato leaves,
and there I found abundance of tyrosinase. I found,
however, that if I removed large larve to the laboratory
and kept them without food until they pupated, that the
body contents of these three or four days old pupe gave
no test for the enzyme. As a final precaution, however,
I used only the unpigmented elytra of beetles which had
transformed from such pupx. In this manner there
seems to be no possibility that the food could have con-
taminated the material, for a period of a least twelve
days without food must have elapsed between the se-
curing of the larve and the removing of the unpig-
mented elytra from the adult beetles. The elytra, which
showed only a faint trace of the color pattern which was
to develop, were ground with quartz sand in an agate
mortar, and the mixture leached with distilled water con-
taining a few drops of chloroform. The filtered solution
was clear, gave an intense blue with a drop of tincture of
gum guaiac, produced a rapid darkening in solutions of
tyrosin, leading to the deposition of the typical black pre-
cipitate, lost its activity at 70°, or in the presence of meta
di phenols [see Gortner (1911 b.)], and behaved in every
way identically like other preparations of tyrosinase
which I have reported from other sources. There can be
no doubt that if the pigmentation in other instances is
754 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLV
caused by the action of a tyrosinase, the same cause pro-
duces the color pattern in Leptinotarsa.
The Cause of the Color Pattern on the Elytra.—If the
pigmentation is due to the oxidation of a chromogen by
an enzyme, the color pattern may develop in four ways.
(1) The enzyme may be present over the entire body and
the chromogen may be localized. (2) The enzyme may
be localized and the chromogen secreted over the entire
body. (3) Both enzyme and chromogen may be localized
in those spots which form the color pattern. (4) Those
spots which lack color may be pigmentless because there
is an inhibitor to pigment production present. I have
found that in all probability the first hypothesis is the
true one, for, although the pigmentation is not much more
general when an unpigmented elytron is placed in a solu-
tion of tyrosinase, when such an elytron is floated upon a
solution of tyrosin the entire elytron becomes pigmented.
Apparently, therefore, the chromogen is localized and
the enzyme is secreted over the entire surface.
SuMMARY
It has been shown that Tower’s statements as to the
nature of the cuticula pigments, and the methods of pig-
ment formation, are based upon wrong interpretations
of his results, and upon errors in the application of chem-
ical data. The cuticula pigment is not an azo compound
but belongs to the melanins.
The pigmentation of the elytron of the Colorado potato
beetle (Leptinotarsa decemlineata Say) is produced by
the interaction of an oxidizing enzyme of the tyrosinase
type, and an oxidizable chromogen. The color pattern is
eaused by the localized secretion of chromogen.
LITERATURE CITED
Bottler (1902). Die animalischen Faserstoffe. Ein Hilfs- und Handbuch
fiir die Praxis, umfassend Vorkommen, Gewinnung, Eigenschaften und
technische Verwendung, sowie Bleichen und Färben thierischer Faser-
stoffe. Nach dem gegenwärtigen Standpunkte der Wissenschaft bear-
beitet. Leipzig.
No. 540] STUDIES ON MELANIN - 155
Cockerell (1907). An Investigation of Evolution in Chrysomelid Beetles of
the Genus Leptinotarsa. (A book review.) Science, N. S., XXVI, p. 71.
Dewitz i Recherches ENEADO sur la dotiakarp ies des insects.
Compt. rend. soc. biol., LIV, p. 4
Durham 11004): On the Presence of Tyrosinases in the ne of some Pig-
mented Vertebrates. Proc. Roy. Soc
Gortner (1910). A Contribution to the Study of me me Trans.
Lond. Chem. Soc., XCVTI, p. 110.
IT, p. 365.
—— (1911). Studies on Melanin—II. The Pigmentation of the Adult
Periodical Cicada. Jour. Biol. Chem., X, p.
—— (1911b.). Studies on Melanin—III. The heirs by certain Phe-
nolic Substances of the Action of Tyrosinase. (A Suggestion as to the
Cause of Dominant and Recessive Whites.) Jour. Biol. Chem., X,
113
Griffiths (1892). Recherches sur les couleurs de quelques insectes. Compt.
rend, acad. sci., ‘Pe .
Mulliken (1910). Identification of Pure Organic Compounds. Vol. 3.
Commercial Dyestuffs. Wiley and Sons, New York.
Phisalix (1905). Sur le changement de coloration des larves de Phyllo-
dromia germanica. Compt. rend. soc. biol., LIX, p. 17.
Roques (1909). Sur la variation d’une enzyme oxydante pendant la meta-
en sci., p. 418.
Tower (1903). The Development of the Colors and the Color Patterns of
Coleoptera, with Observations upon the Development of Color in other
d Insects. The Decennial Publications, The University of
» P-
` Ai Tnvestigation of Evolution in Chrysomelid Beetles of the
Genus Leptinotarsa. Publication No. 48, The Carnegie Institution of
Washington.
m~
L
SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION
A NOTE ON CERTAIN BIOMETRICAL COMPUTATIONS?
1. It is a-well known fact that curves of individual growth, in
which some size character of the organism is taken as ordinate,
and time as abscissa, are closely related to a logarithmic curve.
To Pearson? belongs the credit of first demonstrating this con-
eretely by fitting a logarithmic curve to growth data. Since that
time a number of other students? of growth have made use of
such curves in graduating observational data.
Now while the simplest logarithmic curve
y =a + b log x (i)
is probably only very exceptionally (if ever) followed precisely
in the growth of an organism, yet it certainly represents the
general type towards which many observational growth curves
tend. In the practical analysis of growth data it is often found
to be extremely helpful as the first step to fit such a curve as (i)
or a simple variant of it in which a ‘‘line’’ term is added, as in
y=a+bre+c log z. (ii)
Actually finding out by trial just wherein a curve like (ii) fails
to fit the data—if it does fail—will usually give one the clue as
to the way in which the curve must be modified in order to grad-
uate the observations satisfactorily. ;
In fitting a curve like (ii) to a series of observations by the
method of least squares the type equations are as follows:
S(y) — na —b8 (x) — c8 (log x) =0, ;
S(zy) — a8 (xz) — bS (x?) — c8 (x log x) = 0, fa
S(y log x) — a8 (log x) — b8 (x log x) — c8 (log x)? = 0,
where S denotes summation for the n values of the variables.
Now it is evident that, of the 11 summations included in these
equations, only 3 involve the variable y. All the others are func-
*Papers from the Biological Laboratory of the Maine Agricultural
Experiment Station. No. 31.
? Pearson, K., Biometrika, IV, 131-190. Cf. also Lewenz, M. A., and
Pearson, K., iā. III, 367-397.
* Cf., for example, Pearl, R., Pepper, O. M., and Hagle, F. J., Carnegie
Institution Publ. No. 58, 1907, and Donaldson, H. H., in Jour. Comp. Neurol.
and Psychol., XVIII, 345-392, 1908, and also in later papers
i 756
No. 540] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 757
tions of z. In practise many cases arise where all the base ele-
ments of the observational curve are equal and the values of x
run in ordinal units from 1 to whatever number the observations
comprise. In such eases, taking the origin of x at 0, the sums in
(iii) which involve x and x? may be read off at once from Elder-
ton’s* tables of the sums of the powers of the natural numbers.
If, now, similar tables are available from which one can obtain
the values of S(log x), S(x log x) and S(log x)? for integral
values of z, there are left only the three sums in which y is in-
volved which must be directly calculated.
So far as we are aware no tables have hitherto been published
giving the sums of these logarithmic functions of the natural
numbers. Consequently the present short table has been pre-
pared. The immediate incentive to its calculation was the fact
that in studies on growth and related topics in this laboratory
it has been rather frequently necessary to fit these simple loga-
rithmic curves. The table was calculated several years ago
purely as a labor saving factor in the work of the laboratory. It
has been used in manuscript here since that time. It seems de-
sirable to publish it in order that other workers may have the
benefit of the time and effort which it saves in curve-fitting work
of this sort.
2. The values of S(log x), S(x log x) and S(log x)? given in
the appended table were caleulated twice independently, once
with 10-place values of the logarithms, and once with 7-place
figures. The 10-place logarithms were taken from Vega’s
Thesaurus,’ and the multiplications and summations were per-
formed on a large size Brunsviga arithmometer. As was to be
expected, the values of S(x log x) and S(log x)? for the higher
numbers, when calculated from 7-place logarithms, were not ac-
curate beyond the fifth place. This 7-place table merely served
as a rough check on the accuracy of the 10-place work. The
tabled values given in this paper were all obtained by cutting off
the last 3 figures from the values in the 10-place table. The ac-
curacy of these last figures was previously tested by differences.
The table as given is believed to be accurate in the seventh place.
This is entirely sufficient because, as a matter of fact, in practical
curve fitting work one will not ordinarily use more than 4 or at
the most 5 places of figures in the logarithms.
* Biometrika, II, 474-480.
5 For the loan of a copy of these tables we are greatly indebted to Dr. H.
G. Kribs, of the University of Pennsylvania.
758 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von. XLV
3. The use of the tables may be illustrated from a concrete ex-
ample based on data collected in this laboratory. Each of the
successively laid eggs of a certain hen were measured, length
and breadth being recorded. From these records the length-
breadth index (100 breadth -- length) was ealeulated. In all 87
eggs were measured.® To the line given by plotting the value of
the index of each of these eggs in consecutive order as they were
laid a curve of the type
y =a + bx + c(log x)
was fitted by the method of least squares. In this equation y de-
notes the value of the length-breadth index of an egg whose
ordinal number in the whole series laid is z. That is, S(x) will
be the sum of the integers from 1 to 87 inclusive.
The type equations for this curve have been given above
(p. 756) and need not be repeated. For the data under discus-
sion n= 87. From the table given in the present paper we
read off at once
S log x = 132.3238,
S(a log x) = 6,602.9556,
S (log x)? == 215.0293.
Further from Elderton’s table (loc. cit.) we get
S(a) = 3,828,
S (z?) = 223,300.
This leaves to be obtained by actual addition from the data
only
S(y) = 5,473.81,
S (xy) = 245,041.55,
S (y log x) = 8,416.4497.
Substituting these values in the type equation (iii) we have
87a + 3,828b + 132.3238c — 5,473.81,
3,828a -+ 223,300b -+ 6,602.9556c — 245,041.55,
132.3238a + 6,602.9556b + 215.0293c = 8,416.4497.
Solving
y = 49.0241 — .0910x + 11.7669 log zx.
The goodness of fit of this curve may be judged by examination
of Plate II of the paper where the original data are published.’
° The actual measurements of these eggs are given in detail in the Journal
of Experimental Zoology, VI, 349.
* Jour. Exper. Zool., loc. cit.
No. 540] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION
TABLE OF THE SUMS OF THE LOGARITHMS OF THE NATURAL
Nu T 0
MBERS FROM
759
x S (log x) S (x log x) S (log z)?
1 0.0000000 0.0000000
2 0.3010300 0.6020600 0. ‘09 06191
3 0.7781513 2.0334238 0.3182638
4 1.3802112 4.4416637 0.6807400
5 2.0791812 7.9365137 1.1692991
6 2.8573325 12.6054212 1.7748184
7 3.7024305 18.5211075 2.4890091
8 4.6055205 25.7458274 3.3045806
9 5.5597630 34.3340100 4,.2151594
10 6.5597630 44.3340100 5.2151594
11 7.6011557 55. Kea 6.2996581
12 8.6803370 68.739504 7.4642903
13 9.7942803 83. 3207681 8.7051601
14 10.9404084 99.2665606 10.0187696
15 12.1164996 116.9079295 11.4019602
16 13.3206196 136.1738492 12.8518651
17 14.5510685 157.0914808 14.3658697
18 15.8063410 e 6863859 15.9415788
19 17.0850946 3.9827044 17.5767895
20 18.3861246 330. 0033043 19.2694686
21 19.7083439 257.7699095 21.0177324
22 21.0507666 287.3032084 22.8198311
23 22.4124944 318.6229487 24.6741338
24 23.7927057 351.7480185 26.5791169
25 25.1906457 386.6965187 28.5333531
26 26.6056190 423.4858257 30.5355027
27 28.0369828 462.1326474 32.5843049
28 29.4841408 502. pole 34.6785713
29 30.9465388 142 36.8171792
30 32.4236601 589. 3702518
31 33.9150218 635.6084643 41.2232261
32 35.4201717 683.7732636 43.4887026
33 36.9386857 733.8842237 45.7945871
34 38.4701646 785.9545068 48.1400148
35 40.0142326 50.5241609
36 41.5705351 896.0237784 52.9462384
37 43.1387369 954.0472422 55.4054951
38 44.7185205 1,014.0790189 57.9012113
39 46.3095851 1,076.1305385 60.4326979
40 47.9116451 1,140.2129382 62.9992941
41 49.5244289 1,206.3370763 -6003659
42 51.1476782 1,274.5135465 68.2353041
43 52.7811467 1,344.7526901 70.9035233
44 54.4245 „417.0646079 73.6044600
45 56.0778119 1,491.4591710 76.3375716
46 57.7405697 1,567. 79.1023352
47 59.4126676 1,646.5346306 81.8982465
48 61.0939088 1,727.2342100 84.7248186
49 62.7841049 1,810.0538179 87.5815814
50 64.4830749 1,895.0023181
THE AMERICAN NATURALIST
[ Vou. XLV
S (log z)
S (x log x)
SERIE RES
SSeS58 &ESSE
bt
66.1906450
67.9066484
69.6309243
71.3633180
73.1036807
74.8518687
76.6077436
ch i 1716
420236
Si. ‘0201748
83.7055047
85.4978964
87.2972369
89.1034169
90.9163303
92.7358742
94.5619490
96.3944579
98.2333070
100.0784050
101. ae
103.7869959
105.6503187
107.5195505
109.3946117
111.2754253
113.1619160
115.0540106
116.9516377
118.8547277
120.7632127
122.6770266
124.5961047
126.5203840
128.4498029
130.3843013
132.3238206
134.2683033
136.2176933
138.1719358
140.1309772
142.0947650
144.0632480
146.0363758
148.0140994
149.9963707
151.9831424
153.97
1,982.0883971
2,071.3205710
2, og 7071920
2,256.2564551
2, roi 9764030
< ppm 8749325
-9597993
2 "Oma: 2386229
2,756.7188916
2,863.4079666
2,972. 0 oh
3
3,430.2347124
3,550.3246122
4 053. 3196801
4,184.7590228
4,318.4869626
4,454.5095314
4,592.8326786
4,733.4622734
4,876.4041064
6, 267. 8505832
- sent whl ate
e cork 0701012
7, 123. 4476876
7,665.4577986
7,850.9318169
8,038.8155594
‘ pe 1135977
1.8304560
s 616. 9706114
8,814.5384957
9,014.5384957
S (log z)?
93.3838763
96.3285438
105.3317215
108.3878829
1 17. 7165745
120.8783964
124.0657990
127.2784670
130.5160934
133.7783793
137.0650341
140.3757742
143.7103234
147.0684123
150.4497786
153.8541654
157.2813229
171.2128609
174.7503207
189.1119291
192.7542442
196.4169276
200.0997884
203.8026391
207.5252965
211.2675808
215.0293157
218.8103286
222.6104500
226.4295137
230.2673568
234.1238194
237.9987445
241.8919781
245.8033687
249.7327590
265.6
RAYMOND PEARL,
E. McP HETERS.
NOTES AND LITERATURE
THE DOCTRINE OF EVOLUTION
In? ‘‘The Doctrine of Evolution,’’ Professor Crampton is
issuing in book form eight ‘‘Hewitt Lectures’’ delivered at
Cooper Union in 1907 before ‘‘audiences made up almost ex-
elusively of cultivated minds, but who were, on the whole, quite
unfamiliar with the technical facts of natural history. ... The
course was, in a word, a simple message to the unscientific.’’
The scientific reader of this book, can not expect, then, to dis-
cover a new message in it for himself unless he be pretty woe-
fully ignorant of all things connoted by the word evolution.
And he will not. Or perhaps after all he will. For if he be
a reader who relegates evolution to the world of lower creatures,
the plants and ‘‘animals,’’ he may find himself suddenly learn-
ing that he too is a part of evolution and nothing else besides.
Because that is what this book teaches very strongly. Four of
the eight chapters of it discuss the evolution of man; first, the
evolution of his physical self, then of his mental self, then of
his social and ethical self, and finally of all there is left of him,
to wit, his religious, theological and philosophical self. It is
this part of the book that as ‘‘a simple message to the unscien-
tific’? may make even a few scientific open wide eyes and be
strongly attracted or repelled by it. For the treatment of man
in all his parts and activities as a wholly natural, perfectly ex-
plicable and perhaps quite to be expected product of the great,
world-dominating, blind causa efficiens that is evolution, has
not been more lucidly, strongly and consistently done—that is,
as far as my reading goes. This may, of course, say more about
the limitations of my reading than of the quality of Professor
Crampton’s book; but that is the reader’s risk with any
reviewer.
Especially is Chapter VII, ‘‘Social Evolution as a Biological
Process,’’ well handled. There is more of a whole-souled sure-
ness with less of an imitating dogmatism of language about the
z< Tho mara of Evolution,’’ by Henry Edward Crampton, professor
of zoology in Col "yes University, 311 pp., 1911, Columbia University
Press, New York, $1.50
761
762 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLV
treatment of social evolution in this concise chapter than one
usually gets from others who consider this subject from the
same point of view. The three laws of life that make social
evolution possible and inevitable, viz., ‘‘Preserve thyself,”
‘*Preserve thy kind,’’ ‘‘Remain together,’’ and the course of
biological and sociologic specialization, are all very happily ex-
posed and illustrated.
In the chapter on ‘‘ Evolution and the Higher Human Life,”’
Professor Crampton has been admirably bold and explicit. His
treatment is encouragingly specific. His consistent attitude as
a thoroughgoing evolutionary explainer of man’s body, mind
and social life, receives no shadow of weakening from his atti-
tude toward man’s ethical, religious and philosophical capacities
and activities. Man in the entirety of self and possession is a
natural product, and evolution is his natural producer! That is
the emphasized and conspicuous part of Professor Crampton’s
‘‘simple message to the unscientific’?! The rest of the book is
really only preparation for this part of it.
Vp E
STANFORD UNIVERSITY, CAL.
INDEX
NAMES OF CONTRIBUTORS ARE PRINTED IN SMALL CAPITALS
Abbott, J. F., Collection of Fishes,
43
eye sree ea al defined, R. L.
REDF
pobra of the Primates, F. B.
OOMIS, 479
Agricultural Plants, Variation and
rrelation in, RAYMO ND PEARL,
41.
Albrecht, K., Variation a Corre-
lation, RAYMON lakeem
ALLARD, Beha avior of
B heir Visits to Cotton
Blossoms, 607,
Arer John A., Ancylus and Gund-
achia, WILLIAM HEALEY DALL,
ve
Amphibia, Extinct, Roy L. Moopig,
Annandale, N., and T. J. Jenkins,
Fishes taken by steamer Golden
Crown, 43
Bancroft, F. W., Production of Mu-
tants in Drosophila, 512
ouR, THOMAS, ‘Translation of
The Zoogeograph y of the East
peers ae by P. N. Van
KAM 537
Batrachoseps attenuatus Esch., C. V.
41
Bean, Barton A., and Alfred C.
ica, 432; Habits of Electrice Ray,
437
BEAN, RoBert BENNETT, Heredity
of Hair Form among "the Fili ip-
pinos, 524
Bees, Behavior of, H. A. ALLARD,
607, 66
Bibliographica Evolutionis, V. L.
Biometrie, Arguments regarding the
raph a
Line Titers, i ,
346; Conaiutatines, RAYMOND
and E. L. Mc 6
Bohn, Georges, La Nouvelle Psy-
chologie Animale, Vv. L. E, 574
Boulenger, George ike Fresh-water
Fishes of Africa, 431
Boveri on Sex-Determination, W. E.
CASTLE, 425
Branson, E. B., Rag Amphibia,
Roy I.. Mooprs, 37
Broom Ai Extinet Amphibia, Roy
L. Moop E, 381
Bryant, Owen, Collection of Fishes
made n Labr ador, William Con-
vee Kendall, 2
Bumpus, H. C., The ste pree ig of
the Unfit, J. Annuk HARRIS, 314
BurKE, C. V., Note on moide
seps attenuatus Tech. 413
Butterflies, Mimicry, Punnett on,
190; Inheritance in, JOHN H.
G 257
EROULD,
Byrne and Holt, Grammatostomias
flagellibarba, 433
Callaway, cie and T. D. A
Nature of
LE, , Boveri on Sex Chro-
mosomes in Fraade es vrii 425
, AUSTIN HOBART (0)
_togeny of a Genus, 372
. F., Variation and Corre-
tation a Timothy, RAYMOND
A., Scales of Soft-
Call
Rayed ihan 433; and Oti -
away, Minno ; and Barton
W. Evermann, 435; ; Androgyne lla,
512
Coeficient, of T ce Ba
of th S. JENNINGS,
T p Badire Praias for
ews of Heredity, J. ARTHUR
1
Coles, Russell 2i ame from Beau-
yrr of
nd
fort, N. C.,
Colias” a eing
Polymorphism and Sex in, JOHN
H. GEROULD, 257
Collins, G. N., Value of First Gen-
tr danse rids in Corn, Ray-
» 4
Color Inheritance, among Mulattoes,
, 449; in Short-horn
Cattle, H “TL ‘Racal, 705
763
764
Ray-
E E. Mc-
Sores Biometrical,
D PEARL and LOTTI
Pora
Correlation, and Contingency Tables,
Formation of, J. ARTHUR Harris,
413; and variation in Agricultural
Plants, RAYMOND PEARL, 4
grai and F, ALEX. Mc-
Cans mparative Study
of T Structure bis the Photo-
genie Organs ain American
Lampyride, 306
DALL, WILLIAM HEALEY, Notes on
Gundlachia and Ancylus, 175
AVIS, BRADLEY — Genetical
Studies on Œnothera, 193
bi ing, EAR „Tho Mutation
eory, , 25
Dialetis, Data erg Other Digres-
ons, J. ARTHUR Harris, 636
e, Gorad, ‘Aaiptitation of
ee of Pure Lines to, T.
M
ORGA 5
Dinosaurs, aitab, Further
Observations on the Pose of,
P. Hay, 398
Doncaster, Sex-Inheritance, 509
Dunlop, Robert, Extinct Amphibia,
Roy L. Mooprg, 382
m E. M., The ios Hypoth-
and Hybridization, 160
Bisaa Carl H., Catalogue =.
Bi bliography of Fresh-Wat
eect ag ee mY. le. Ee,
761
Ewing, E. C., Correlation n Char-
acters in Corn , RAYMON
420
Extinct Amphibia, Recent Contribu-
tions to Knowledge of, Roy L.
75
MOODIE,
ae fo Meine gigi of
he, W. J. SPILLMAN
THE AMERICAN NATURALIST
[Vor. XLV
Fage, Louis, Larval Fishes, 431
platen N, Inheritance in Do-
tie Fowl, RAYMOND Phat, 321
Filipinos, Heredit ity of Hai Form
ong, ROBERT aiana BEAN,
524
Forbes, Stephen A., Fishes of Ili-
s, 431
Fossil’ Plants, Recent Books on,
Dovetas HOUGHTON CAMPBELL,
9
Fowl, Domestic, Inheritance of
Fecundity in, RAYMOND PEARL,
32
Fowls, Barred and _ Self- Colored,
Relative Conspicuousness of, RAY
107
W., Albuloid from
a Domingo, Fishes of New
Jersey, and Notropis, 436
Gates, R. R., The Mutation Theory,
Hu ugo De Vries, 254; Inheritance
So oth
_— and O. grandiflo
mble O. met eae BRADLE
Moo OORE Davis, 193
Genetics in Lodet Organisms, Pure
Lines in Study of, H. S. JEN-
NINGS, 79
Genotype, Conception of Heredity,
129; Hypothesis
. EAST
ments regarding the, RAYMOND
PEARL, 561
Genotypes of Maize, GEORGE HARRI-
SON SHULL, 234
Genus, Ontogeny of, AUSTIN HOBART
?
Germ-Cell Determinants and their
Significance, R. W. NER, 385
GEROULD, JOHN H., The Inheritance
of P aori and Sex
Colias philodice, 257
Gilbert, Charles H., Lantern Fishes,
433
Gilbert, James Z., Fossil Flounder,
Gill, Theodore, Structure and Habits
of the Wolffishes.
grear. Edmund L. .„ and Wil-
dall, Shore Fishes
arik by the Albatross, 431
RTNER, ITKEN, Studies on
Melanin, 743
No. 540.]
mya E., Variation and Correla-
RAYMOND PEARL,
Graft- -Hybrids, Nature of, DOUGLAS
UGHTON CAMPBE 41
Greene, hety W., ary of
430
Gudger, $. W., Fishes at Beaufort,
Gundlachia and Ancylus, Notes on,
WILLIAM HEALEY DALL, 175
Gunther, Albert, Fische der Südsee,
GUYER, MICHAEL F., Nucleus and
Cytoplasm in Heredity, 284, 512
Hair Form, Heredity of, among the
Filipinos, ROBERT BENNETT BEAN,
524
HARRIS, J. ARTHUR, A Neglected
T 46; A Coefficient of
Individual Prepotency for
ents of Heredity, 471; On the
Formation of Correlation and
Contingency able: en the
Number
Digressions, 636; The ie eea
of Pure Line Mea eans,
HATAI, nea, the Mendelian
Ratio and Blended a 99
AY, OLIVER P., Further Observa-
i n the Pose jen the Sauro-
398
, Germ-Cell Determ
nants and their Significance, 385
E
Hen ee, Double, J. THOMA
itll
Heredity, w EN SPILLMAN, 60, 507;
Genotype Conception f,
JOHANNSEN, 129; Nucleus and
Cytoplasm in, MICH F. GUYER
84; Coefficie of vidual
A ee, Sex-Chromosomes
W. E. CASTLE, 425
Hertwig, Richard, „Study of Bex-
T. H. MORGAN, 253
h von, Extinct Am-
phibia, Roy L. Mooptg, 381
INDEX.
765
Hus, Henri, Jean Marchant
Eighteenth. Century Motetiontet,
na Bees Origin of Species in
641
Hybridisation and the Genotype
Hypothesis, E. M. East, 160
Hybrids, Graft-Nature of, DOUGLAS
GHTON CAMPBELL, 4
rar eho TP cr Ne on, DAVID STARR
JORD.
Deine Rodel pho v von, Catfishes, re
Individual Prepot Coefiici
of, for Students of Heredity, T
ARTHUR HARRIS, 471
Inheritance, nee lim ited, Applica-
tion of Conception of Pure Lines
. MorGan, 65; in Colias
philodice, Joun H ULD, 257;
dity in the Domestic
Fowl, RAYMOND PEA 21;
Cattle, H. H. LAUGHLIN, 705
Jaekel, ce Extinct Amphibia, Roy
L. Moo 382
Jean Marchant: an Eighteenth Cen-
tury Mutationist, HENRI
Jenkins, T. J., and N. Annandale,
Fishes taken w Steamer Golden
431
S., Pure exer’ in the
Study of Genetics a Lower Or-
ms, 79; Compu
wis ‘Symmetrical
o
Computation of the Coefficient of
ay dogs 413
JOHANNSEN, W., The Genotype Con-
oep of Heredity, 129
ARR, Notes on
aoas, 3 430
ORDAN, H. E., A Comparative-
Microscopic St tudy of the Melanin
Content of Pigme ins with
tt
Jun ngersen, Hector F. E., Anatomy
of Pipefishes and ` Trumpetfishes,
437
K, V. The Present-Day Concep-
tion i Study of sy-
chology, 574; A Useful Evolution
Bibliography, 576; Darwinism and
766
Human Life, J. A. atl 639 ;
raphy "of. the East Indian Archi-
pelago
Kendall, William C., and Edmund L.
Fishes taken
of Fishes made in ory eae b
Owen Bryant, 432; and Bar
n W
Evermann, Chub- Mackerels, "432:
ee ae S., Study of Sex-
CT H. Morcan , 253
Lampyride, American, Comparative
, and Barton
Lake of the Woods, 432
The Inheritance
of Color in Shorthorn Cattle: A
Study in a Blends accom-
panying Gametic Segregation and
Intra-zygotic "Inhibition and Re-
action,
Lill, T.” biian and Corre'a-
lati ion, RAYM ND PEARL, 4
Loeb, a Protini of Mu-
tant osophila,
Loomis, pS B., The Adaptations of
the Primates, 479
Lutz, FRANK E., Mimicry, 190
McDERM F. ALEX., Some Con
paran Si concerning the Photo-
genie Function in Marine Organ-
isms, 118; ma ‘Onis: G. CRANE,
A Comparative Study of the Struc
h
certain American grin es ‘306
MacDoveat, Fi
onse,
Maize, omnis o, GEORGE HAR-
RISON SHULL
Matthew, W. D., Pose of the Sauro-
podous Dinosaurs, OLIVER P. Hay,
398
Means, Pure Line, eae of,
J. ARTHUR HARRIS,
Melanin, Studies in, a AIKEN
GORTNER, 743
THE AMERICAN NATURALIST
[ Vou. XLV
gag votre Ratio and Blended In-
ance, SHINKISHI HATAI, 99;
Variations, System of Recording,
J. K. Saaw, 701
Mice, Growing Effects of Tempera-
such Effects in a yg air
Pa ge s B. Sum
MILLER, NEWTON, Reproduction in
the Brown Rat (Mus Norwegicus),
623
Mimiery in Ceylon ge. Pun-
nett on, FRANK z, 190
Mosnoonieey, aang T JR., The
Influe of Change ed. External
Conditions on the Development of
Two Species of mire 364
Moopig, Roy ent Contribu-
tions to a Kiwistiee ó of the Ex-
tinet Amphibia, 375
Morean, T. H., The Application “i
the Conception of Pure Lines
Sex-limited Inheritance and ro
Sexual Dim ett ee 65; Is the
ozy gous in re-
r >
Heredity, 508; Mutations in
ila, 511
Moths, Influence of Changed Exter-
nal Co nditions on Development of
Two Species of, THOMAS ‘
ONTGOMERY, JR., 364
Mulattoes, Color Inheritance among,
. E. Jo
Mutationist, J san Marchant, an
Eighteenth Century, HENRI Hus,
493
Natural Selection in the English
Ow AR Harris, 314
Newman, H. H, Killifish, 436
Nichols, John ” Treadwell, Pelagic
Pipefish, 433; Blennies, 433
Notes and Literatnre, 60, 190, 253,
319, 375, 415, 507, 574, 639, 761
Notropis, Henry W. Fowler , 436
Nucleus and Cytoplasm in Heredity,
AEL F. GUYER, 284, 512
(Enothera biennis, some ee of,
BRADLEY RE Davis, 193; Mu-
tation in, R. R. Ga slong 577
Ogilby, p Pe Fishes of Bris-
bane
irai a a Genus, AUSTIN
HOBART CLARK, 372
i D T. Mio
Organice Response,
DOUGAL, 5
No. 540.]
Origin of Species in Nature, HENRI
Hus, 641
PATTERSON, J. p nae A Double
Hen ’s Egg, 5
PEARL, RAYMON kad Data on the Rela-
tive Conspicuousne ss of Barred
and Self-Colored Fowls, 107; an
Introduction to the
istics : ny
antes Plants, 415;
Arguments regarding
the Genotype Concept, 561; and
Lottie E. McPHETERS, Biomet-
rical Computations, 756
cha ne: Sa Function in Marin
gani F. ALEX. neniet,
Pigmented Skins, Study of Melanin
Content of, with special reference
to Question of Color Inheritance
among Mulattoes, H. E. JORD
449
Plants, agar ia hidang and
Correlation in, RAYMOND PEARL,
15; Fossil. ecent otis on,
UGLAS Hovamtor CAMPBELL,
439
Polymorphism and Sex in Colias
groin eo of, JOHN
. GEROULD
Poss of the ihe Dinosaurs,
Further Observations on the,
OLIVER P. Hay
Primates, Adaptations of the, F. B.
479
Punnett on Mimiery in pete But-
terflies, FRANK E. L
Pure Line, Theory, Application of
Conception of, to Sex-limited In-
heritance pte o Sexual Dinorah
i : , 65; in the
Study of Genetics in er Or-
ganisms, H. ENNINGS, 79;
ae Proof of, J. ARTHUR
, 346; Means, —
of, J Ta HUR HARRIS,
Quante on Variation and Correla-
Tae RAYMOND PEARL, 416
Radcliffe, Lewis, a ug
Smith, Butterfly Fishes, 437
Rat, Brown, Reproduetion in, NEw-
N MILLER, 623
REDFIELD, = L, Acquired Characters
defined, 5
INDEX.
767
Regan, C. Tate, Zeide and Caproide,
432; Flou nders, 432; Systematic
Position of the Genus Macristium,
; Lampreys of the Tno siae
Pike of Loch 434;
iant
natoniy an Sussman ‘of the
Teleostean Fishes of the Order
niomi, 435; Berycide, 435;
Fische d dsee, by Albert
Gunther, 437; Microcyprini, 437;
Salmoperee, 437; Silver Gar and
Flying Fish, Fishes related to,
437; Cirrhites, 438
Reprodu ction in the Brown Rat
(Mus didi eee NEWTON
MILLER,
Ribeiro on i OES in Brazil, 435
Rietz, H. L., and L. H. Smith, Varia-
tion and "Correlation, RAYMOND
PEAR
Roberts, a F, Variation and Corre-
ati
ARL, 42
Russo on Sex- -Chromosomes, 429
Sauropodous Dinosaurs, Further Ob-
servations on the Pose of, OLIVER
; Y, 398
Schleip on Sex-Chromosomes, 425
Schoute, J. C., Variation and Corre-
Scott, D. H., Studies in Fossil Bot-
LAS HOUGHTON CAMP-
L, 439
aie Alvin, Fishes of Bantayan Is-
nd, 431; Fishes from paws 0,
436
gegen N eno in ise og
UR HARRI
Bie Chetek ana Boni Fowls,
Relative Conspicuousness of, RAY-
MOND PEARL, 107
gp AC, Fossil nae o aa
HOUGHTON CAMPB
d Takeria, fa
tion of wow on = Pure Lines
. H. Morean, 65; Determina-
era ‘Is the Fomle | Frog Hetero-
sie in regard to, T. H. MoR-
, 253; in Colias - philodice, and
Paika sm, pegs tance of,
JOHN H. GEROULD,
H . K., System sf Recording
Mendelian Variations,
ria
314, 372, 413, 561, 636, 701,
768
Short-horn Cattle, panera of
Color in, H. H. Lau , 705
S
HULL, GEORGE Hanmisos, The
Genotypes of Maize, 2
Shull, G. H., Variation and Correla-
tion, RAYMOND PEARL, 424
. Rietz, Varia-
tion ane Correlation, RAYMON
PEARL,
Society ears Naturalists, 5, 65,
79, 90, 99, 129, 160, 234, 257, ‘984’
321 , 346
Sparrow, Phen a N a Paper
AR-
ral Selectio m Ms
re UR ea
SPILLMAN, W. J., Heredity, 60, 507;
Inheritance of the c Bye? GE
Vigna, 513
Starks, E. thi and W. F. Thompson,
Stopes, Mari D rie nt Plants,
DOUGLAS ionann CAMPBELL,
439
s B., Some Effects
owing
a Subsequent Genera-
F. M., Variation and Cor-
only used, H. S. Jwunxes, 123
ae on Effects upon or
Mice, and Pers — or su
t Generation,
2, 9
Extinct Am-
3
and W. Stock-
berger, r, Variation snd Correlation,
RayM 15
Oda and ar 7 **Gold-eye of
Lake Winnipeg,’’ 431; Lobotide
and Lutianide, 431; Scienide, 432
Thompson, W, F., and E. C. Starks,
, 4 5
inism and Hu-
Tower, Wm. Da ' Heredity, Ww. J.
SPILLMAN , 60
THE AMERICAN NATURALIST
[ Vou. XLV
Tracy, Henry C., Fishes of Rhode
Island, 435
Variation and Correlation in Agri-
cultural Plants, RAYMOND PEARL,
415
Variations, System of
recordin 701
be as Inheritance of the “Eye”
. J. SPILLMAN, 513
Mendelian,
Je 3 SHAW
Wagner, George, Cisco from Lake
Michigan, 434; Stickleback of
Lake Superior 4
Waite, Ed ., Fishes from Ker
madee and Norfolk Talands, 434;
New Zealand Fishes,
Waldron, L. R., Va enin Pe Sid Corre-
lation, RAYMOND PEARL, 415
Waugh A, K. Shaw,
ugh, le
Variation and “Commi tet: Ray-
MOND PEARL, 421
i Max, a of New Guinea,
Weed, Alfred C., and Barton A.
Bea , Anteliochimera, 432; Morel
omous Toad-fishes of South ‘Am
ica, 432; Habits of Electric er
been ange. J. M., Variation, RAY-
D PEARL , 424
Wheldale, M., Formation of Antho-
507
Whiting, P. W., 2
G
Wieland, G. R. ao dene Fossils
Cycads, DoUGL AS HOUGHTON
CAMPBELL,
Williston, S. W., Extinct Amphibia,
Roy L. ’ MOODIE, 375
Wilson, E. B., Chromosome Be-
havior, 507
Winkler, H., Oun i DOUGLAS
HOUGHTON CAMPBELL, 43
Woodward, A.
major, 375
Smith, Bothriceps
T G. aes Introduction to the
Theory Statistics, RAYMOND
PEARL, 319
Zaleskiego, E. I., Variation and
Correlation, RAYMOND PEARL, 416
oogeography of the East Indian
Archipelago, P. N. VAN KAMPEN,
“ 537
The American Journal of Science
Established by Benjamin Silliman in 1818
The Leading Scientific Journal in the United States
Devoted to the Physical and Natural Sciences, with special reference to
Physics, and Chemistry on the one hand, and to Geology and Mineralogy
on the other.
: EDWARD 8. DANA
Associate peat nk Professor GEORGE L. GOODALE. JOHN TROWBR RIDGE, W. G. FARLOW and WM. M. DAVIS
of G hoy e; Professors z x VERRILL, HENRY S. WILLI AMS and L. V. P of New
; Professor 0. ARKER, of geet egypt: Professor JOSEPH 8. AIMES,
o more; MR. J. § . DILLER, of Washington.
Two volumes annually, in monthly numbers of about 80 pages each.
This Journal ended its first series of 50 volumes as a quarterly in 1845; its second
series of 50 volumes as a two-monthly in 1870; its third series as a monthly ended Dec-
ember, 1895. A Fourth Series commenced in 1896.
Subscription price, $6 per year or 50 cents a number, postage prepaid in the United States ;
$6.25 to Canada ; $6,40 to Countries in the Postal Union. Back numbers at reduced prices.
sa Ten-Volume Indexes, Vols. I-X XI-XX, fourth series, price one dollar. Address
The American Journal of Science
New Haven, Conn.
SECOND EDITION, NOVEMBER, 1910
AMERICAN MEN OF SCIENCE
A BIOGRAPHICAL DIRECTORY
EDITED BY J. MeKEEN CATTELL
A Biographical direc ires revision if it is to maintain its- mess. Nearly a third of the names in the
Present edition are new, “ane od the elas — a peared $ in Ags sheng division have in ae every en been revised. —
amount of work required to prepare the rev as that given to the first edition.
change +n the general plan of the work. "Cran predia A ayia in y tis a ms gia natural and
exact sciences, and for this reason a few names included in as fal edition have been o
make the book as complete and accurate as possible. There are of course suse aed T only a Se men will oe
ge Sige to Sones: requests for the information needed. The thousand leading men of science have been again selected
by hods that were before, and stars have added to the is of research in gid case of 269 new men who
have obtained places on the list editor’ s object in selecting this group o” —— en to make a study a
the -o = pog scientific pasta pega ara 80 = as may be to im
- iron the nate the “Seon 2
i The second ag of the D 600 FER 5500 sketches.
rec is well Bge on all rag paper rand bound in rakor with leather mhara Although the work has been
n size by more than 50 per cent., it is sold at the same price as the first editio
Price: Five Dollars, net, Postage paid
THE SCIENCE PRESS
GARRISON, N. Y. LANCASTER, PA.
SUB-STATION 84, NEW YORK CITY.
The > American Naturalist
stablished in 1867, Devoted to the Advancement of the Biological Sciences
Factors
oe ‘Spaced Reference to the
of Organic Evolution and Heredity
CONTENTS OF JUNE NUMBER
Inheritance of Fecundity in the Domestic Fowl. Dr
RAYMON
The seine wowed of the Pure Line Theory. Dr, J.
ARTHUR HAR
The Influence a ante nged External Conditions on
e Development of fades = rae of Moss, Pro-
ale THomas H. M
r Articles and sonata ang ge Ontogeny of a
Genus, AUSTIN HOBART CLARK.
Notes and Literature: Recent Contributions to s
Knowledge of the Extinct Amphibia, Dr. Roy
L. Mooprz.
CONTENTS OF JULY NUM
Germ-cell Bet harman and Their emacs Pro-
fessor
Further eg ga on the re of the Sauropodous
Dinosaurs, si us
a pri d Tien
Notes and asx nai Some Recent Studies ca evil
ation an z Correlation n Agricultural Plan
RAYMOND PE x-chromosomes n Yee
saephrodithie - Professor W. E. CASTLE. Notes on
Ichthyology: President DAVID STARB Joani
Some Recent his on Fossil Plants: Projessor
Dovelas HOUGHTON CAMPBELL.
posi OF AUGUST NUMBER
A Comparative aacupte Study of the Melanin
ae of Nera: Skins, with special ae
ce to the Question of Color In a BIRGA
Mi essor H. E, Jor
A Coefficient of Individoat E oe k for Stud
of Heredity. gore Prepotency e
The Adaptations o = Peat tes. Professor F. B.
Pag o Marchant, an Eighteenth Century Mutationist.
Notes and Literature : Notes on Heredity. Dr. W, J-
SPILLMAN, ad
CONTENTS OF SEPTEMBER NUMBER
eg ome of the “Eye” in Vigna. Dr. W. J
PILLMAN.
Heredity « of Hair Form among the Filipinos, Dr.
ROBERT BENNETT BEAN.
= weography of th of n — Indian Archipelago.
Ey
rter Articles and nae ssion: Biometrie Argu-
ments regarding the Genorita Con Eai. Dr.
RAYMOND PEARL. On the s when te of Borres
3 ; e 3.
defined. C. L. REDFIELD.
Notes and Literature: The Present Day Peotone
— ote e of Animal Psychology; A Useful Evo
tion Bibliography. V. L. K.
CONTENTS OF OCTOBER NUMBER
I. Mutation in Œnotbera. Dr. R. R. Ga ATES.
II. Some Experimental Observations concerning =
Behavior of Various Bees in Their Visits to Cotto
Blossoms. H. A. ALLARD.
Tir. es P Newro:
IV. Shorter Articles and Discussion
and Other Disian Dk. J.
V. Notes avd Literature: adeila nin pea
Life V.L. K.
N MILLER
— kinken
ARR
CONTENTS OF NOVEMBER NUMBER
The Origin of Species in Nature. Dr. HENRI HUS.
Some Experimental Observations concerning the Be-
havior of Various Bees in their Visits to Cotton
Blossoms, H. A. ALLARD.
The Distribution of Pure Line Means. Dz. J. ARTHUR
Harris.
Shorter Articles and Discussion: A System sa a
ing Mendelian Observations. Dr. J. K.8
ee tent
NATURALIST will be sent to new subscribers for four
JHE SCIENCE PRESS
——
84: NEW YORK
Yearly Sabios $4.00
four months for One
Lancaster, Pa.